Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA/PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS/2012
TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA/ PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS/ . ra ql- FFg- /a ass-C-mob-�2 1n_MhR- �a '� `Trrry lr•Kt7�lood Rec rem-�-'�,n r�r�r,� �} hose 3 cOs-�.--- RrsoLic ea-o---se-r-f't.n�.--a � .--M4 rc-h 1 9s /,;2 .1�7,8t;� e�„Lq o., 6 Jr! _ P �C rt ,SP.ttcv ,.Ck+; e rl.S. /--� + "CRYh'� Ur - C DZ,r4-�r--c -- --eS , mcg U eoE,4'T�br1.SxS�i,i1-.qq._4_X..er__K.__�iiCGda 4tif_._IiCL 1- � 0. s1 -e 3 - •-Lr+-0.i�4trttn'T31I -Tpprod e c k/ cli rtaq_ Ci �j _ lit nl , _ /.'1 `i' 1k F11'r rGtJ'___.- r �' n Ogns_._a��_- �P__ _.OY GC infLLS J-CrI2 ((�� Resglcx�,o,, /3-9g_-cfproVpr? pfanS/ 0 11 __1, r .r-,caL ._O _CAS- D� {'� CO ns�.�-.-�,Vc �a±�_of- 4kAZair Recreq{ gay_ Are A- �P k0.5-t.� -- 2fd✓cn�PrLfS- C9)-tt �. _eS4r,b l s�a O_�l<rl' �— L �,'. C4r-4T:,-_ 0-f-_6,-- LO ce__a__. - /a II Agpr,'ou'm , 1?- Aft,/a f� I . i o �a- /85 a -card n con�.a� E c5���or es i E�ir /tIa �v OIAO _ eS !,ta - PrJj2ci”. Y D41 ------ - /a II Agpr,'ou'm , 1?- Aft,/a f� I . i o �a- /85 a -card n con�.a� E c5���or es i E�ir /tIa �v OIAO _ eS !,ta - PrJj2ci”. Y '� r rKi�(ood �v��� o l�res� Pease 3 age a o� a- 2 oia �o m -. o br3un �n i �l ormav cam__ _ Pc�ut*ZR ri t Anna arA C er -CJ70-� n Sur an cam. �es I4�-3 (- ► -Far IS- �- ► CITY OF IOWA CITY DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA February 15, 2012 FILEL FEB 21 2012 y• S9 PM SF _lerk . Y' Iowa ENGINEER'S ESTIMATE February 21, 2012 City Clerk City of Iowa City, Iowa � r � 111 1117 CITY OF IOWA CITY 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240-1826 (319) 356-5000 (319) 356-5009 FAX www.icgov.org Re: Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 Improvements Project Dear City Clerk: The estimate for this project is: Total Base Bid $3,639,215.00 Add Alternate #1 $19,750.00 Add Alternate #2 $19,500.00 FILED Add Alternate #3 $11,500.00 Add Alternate #4 $28,000.00 Fast 1 7012 Total Add Alternates $78,750.00 1':Sf ?`W -SF Ci Clerk Iowa City, Iowa Sincerely, X Joshua J. Slattery Civil Engineer Project Manual Terry Trueblood Recreation Area- Phase 3 Improvements Iowa City, Iowa February 15, 2012 Project No. 111.0253 City File No. PA261 Prepared by: Snyder & Associates, Inc. 5005 Bowling Street S.W. Suite A FILED Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 Ankeny, Iowa 50023 FEB 21 2012 319-362-9394 sF a& ��r i Io Architects Schipper Kastner a 3716 Ingersoll Ave. Suite A Des Moines, IA 50312 515-277-6707 Farris Engineering 10636 Justin Drive Des Moines, IA 50322 515-331-0981 Shuck Britson, Inc. 2409 Grand Avenue Des Moines, IA 50312 515-243-4477 Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 COVER Iowa City, Iowa I hereby certify that this Engineering Document was prepared by �OQPpEESS1pN4� Fy under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly :y c, Licens d Professional der the Laws of the State of Iowa. TROY A. CULVER T uIver, .. ate 20165 icense Number 16007 My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2013 IOWA ^%�jy�ye�✓ Z i ExacPy- azgoe �oz9z�i pSF OF j DONALD P MARNER LANDSCAPE n ARCHITECT J ND. goy 314 (ANTI( License Expires: June 30, 2012 I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Professional Landscape it Architect under the Laws of the State of Iowa. P. Marner, Date License Number 314 -PI VISI C4 Ar, 12Vtste.3 2 4&c-6,%45 GZ100 t 02.124. FILED FEB 21 2012 3f rM city Oak "cay Im Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 1 SIGNATURES Iowa City, Iowa I hereby certify that this Engineering Document was prepared by a�au+nm,n,n ieiSf��; ,, and r my eI t personal supervision and that I am a duly Li ''��QQ�( ��'', Pr a si n ineer under the Laws of the State of Iowa. Ti thy Jnso , P.E. Dat TIMOTHY J. a 'M MONSON Mme_ License Jbe2r1103 12103 �Z My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2012 to N 00 FILED FEB 21 2012 3f rM city Oak "cay Im Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 1 SIGNATURES Iowa City, Iowa 1 hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed lolls%, Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. �.. GERRY W. . X signet Gerry werding date ,; WILWERDING 16743 * My license renewal date is December 31, 20�� ,,,���''•a��,,,,n "�� trill Pages or sheets hovered by this seal ESS 1pN9`.,,�. ?z{ JUSTIN B. OLSON 19500 ,. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of lows. 2/1`1 112 Justin B. Olson date 19500 My license renewal date is December 31,ZG12, Pages or sheets covered by this seat D I u I b Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 Iowa City, Iowa FILED FEB 21 2012 y: 5t FA Ciq Clerk 1 2 Iowa city, Jun SIGNATURES I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE PORTION OF THIS �LBYMEIORUNDE DESCRIBED 6 BELOW �PWAS ()FESS/p�o, PREPARED MYYDIRECTSSION • '� '• �,,, • AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MICHACIL J. KAS i AER x = 5346 : 'f MICHAEL J. KAS NER, AIA DATE ,•'f�a DISCIPLINE: ARCHITEC11 RE �I)WA * IOWA REGISTRATION NO.: 5946 ""s') pn,DAna•" SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL: plvo� -:o,tl 1 hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed lolls%, Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. �.. GERRY W. . X signet Gerry werding date ,; WILWERDING 16743 * My license renewal date is December 31, 20�� ,,,���''•a��,,,,n "�� trill Pages or sheets hovered by this seal ESS 1pN9`.,,�. ?z{ JUSTIN B. OLSON 19500 ,. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of lows. 2/1`1 112 Justin B. Olson date 19500 My license renewal date is December 31,ZG12, Pages or sheets covered by this seat D I u I b Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 Iowa City, Iowa FILED FEB 21 2012 y: 5t FA Ciq Clerk 1 2 Iowa city, Jun SIGNATURES SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS TITLE SHEET TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE TO BIDDERS .............................. NOTE TO BIDDERS ................................ INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS ..................... FORM OF PROPOSAL ............................... BIDBOND ................................................... FORM OF AGREEMENT .......................... PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND... CONTRACT COMPLIANCE (ANTI -DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) ........................... GENERALCONDITIONS.................................................................................... Paae Number AF -2 NB -1 IB -7 FP -3 BB -1 AG -2 PB -2 CC -7 GC -1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS......................................................................... IDOT SC -5 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGHWAY AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS......................................................................... SC -17 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FILED FOR CONSTRUCTION, AIA DOC A201-2007 FEB 21 2012 TECHNICAL SECTIONy:C5 boat DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01025 Measurement and Payment ................................................ 01025-7 Section 01100 Summary ............................................................................. 01100-3 Section 01200 Price and Payment Procedures ........................................... 01200-3 Section 01300 Project Coordination............................................................ 01300-6 Section 01310 Progress and Schedules..................................................... 01310-2 Section 01325 Construction Progress Schedule ......................................... 01325-2 Section 01400 Quality Requirements.......................................................... 01400-5 Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls ...............:....................... 01500-2 Section 01510 Temporary Utilities............................................................... 01510-3 Section 01570 Traffic Control and Construction Facilities ........................... 01570-2 Section 01600 Product Requirements......................................................... 01600-3 Section 01700 Execution Requirements..................................................... 01700-9 Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 1 INDEX Iowa City, Iowa Section 01780 Close -Out Submittals ................ Section 01820 Demonstration and Training..... DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK ........................ 01780-6 01820-3 DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories ................................... Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement................................................. Section 03300 Cast -In Place Concrete .................................................. Section 03310 Colored Concrete............................................................... Section 03356 Polished Concrete Floor Finishing .................................. Section 03390 Concrete Curing and Sealing .......................................... DIVISION 4 — MASONRY Section 04720 Cast Stone...................................................................... Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies ............................................... Section 04820 Reinforced Unit Masonry ................................................ Section 04852 Stone Masonry Veneer .................................................. DIVISION 5 — METALS Section 05120 Structural Steel............................................................... Section 05321 Steel Deck...................................................................... Section 05500 Metal Fabrications.......................................................... 02050-3 02100-2 02110-3 02220-5 02270-3 02520-3 02524-2 02660-17 02665-6 02700-12 02710-4 02751-5 02880-10 02900-4 02924-11 31623-11 03100-4 03200-2 03300-9 03310-5 03356-4 03390-3 04720-4 04810-8 04820-5 04852-5 05120-6 05321-3 05500-4 Section 06100 Rough Carpentry ............................................................. Section 02050 Demolitions, Removals and Abandonments ...................... Section 06150 Wood Decking................................................................. Section 02100 Site Preparation................................................................. Section 06181 Glued -Laminated Structural Units .................................... Section 02110 Clearing and Grubbing...................................................... Section 06410 Custom Cabinets............................................................. Section 02220 Earth Excavation, Backfill, Fill and Grading ....................... Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 2 Section 02270 Slope Protection and Erosion Control ............................... FILED Section 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving .................................... Section 02524 Curb Ramps...................................................................... FEB 21 2012 Section 02660 Water Distribution.............................................................. 41 S9 Prt Section 02665 Water Service Work for Contractors ................................. mwcaa� Section 02700 Sewers............................................................................... Section 02710 Grinder Pump Station........................................................ Section 02751 Directional Boring and Drilling ........................................... Section 02880 Irrigation System................................................................ Section 02900 Landscaping..................................................................... Section02924 Seeding............................................................................ Section 31623 Rammed Aggregate Pier Soil Reinforcement ................... DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE Section 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories ................................... Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement................................................. Section 03300 Cast -In Place Concrete .................................................. Section 03310 Colored Concrete............................................................... Section 03356 Polished Concrete Floor Finishing .................................. Section 03390 Concrete Curing and Sealing .......................................... DIVISION 4 — MASONRY Section 04720 Cast Stone...................................................................... Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies ............................................... Section 04820 Reinforced Unit Masonry ................................................ Section 04852 Stone Masonry Veneer .................................................. DIVISION 5 — METALS Section 05120 Structural Steel............................................................... Section 05321 Steel Deck...................................................................... Section 05500 Metal Fabrications.......................................................... 02050-3 02100-2 02110-3 02220-5 02270-3 02520-3 02524-2 02660-17 02665-6 02700-12 02710-4 02751-5 02880-10 02900-4 02924-11 31623-11 03100-4 03200-2 03300-9 03310-5 03356-4 03390-3 04720-4 04810-8 04820-5 04852-5 05120-6 05321-3 05500-4 Section 06100 Rough Carpentry ............................................................. 06100-5 Section 06150 Wood Decking................................................................. 06150-3 Section 06181 Glued -Laminated Structural Units .................................... 06181-3 Section 06410 Custom Cabinets............................................................. 06410-5 Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 2 INDEX Iowa City, Iowa DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07210 Board and Batt Insulation ................................................ 07210-6 Section 07260 Weather Barriers............................................................. 07260-4 Section 07261 Under -Slab Vapor Barrier ................................................ 07261-2 Section 07311 Shingles.......................................................................... 07311-6 Section 07410 Metal Wall Panels............................................................ 07410-4 Section 07461 Wood Siding................................................................... 07461-4 Section 07540 PVC Membrane Roofing .................................................. 07540-12 Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ........................................ 07620-3 Section 07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties ........................................ 07710-2 Section 07900 Caulking and Sealing ...................................................... 079004 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08100 Hollow Metal Work........................................................... 08100-4 Section 08210 Flush Wood Doors........................................................... 08210-4 Section 08351 Operable Panel Partitions ................................................ 08351-4 Section 08410 Aluminum Doors & Storefront .......................................... 08410-6 Section 08710 Door Hardware................................................................ 08710-12 Section 08850 Glazing........................................................................... 08850-5 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09250 Gypsum Board Assemblies ............................................. 15000-8 09250-5 Section 09300 Ceramic Tile.................................................................... Section 15251 HVAC Insulation.............................................................. 09300-5 Section 09510 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ........................................ 15300-6 09510-4 Section 09650 Resilient Floor and Base Coverings ................................. Section 15400 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods ........................... 09650-3 Section 09685 Carpet Tile....................................................................... 15407-5 09685-3 Section 09900 Paints and Coatings....................................................... Iowa City, Iowa 09900-9 FILED DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES FEB 21 2012 Section 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments ................... 4j.3.q..P'q........ 10170-3 Section 10180.01 Toilet Accessories ............................. cuy ©k .. .. loivi 10180.01-5 Section 10305 Manufactured Fireplaces ..............................-:...'-:.:....... 6iy.1� 10305-2 Section 10400 Identification Devices ...................................................... 10400-3 Section 10523 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets ............................................... 10523-2 DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT Section 11400 Custom Fabricated Food Service Equipment ................... 11400-6 Section 11450 Residential Equipment..................................................... 11450-2 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15000 Mechanical General Provisions ........................................ 15000-8 Section 15010 Submittals........................................................................ 15010-2 Section 15251 HVAC Insulation.............................................................. 15251-6 Section 15300 Fire Protection General Provisions .................................. 15300-6 Section 15310 Fire Protection................................................................. 15310-15 Section 15400 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods ........................... 15400-23 Section 15407 Plumbing Insulation......................................................... 15407-5 Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 3 INDEX Iowa City, Iowa Section 15410 Plumbing Piping and Equipment ...................................... 15410-14 Section 15420 Plumbing Pumps............................................................. 15420-4 Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures............................................................ 15440-6 Section 15441 Domestic Water Heaters ................................................. 15441-4 Section 15530 Refrigerant Piping and Specialties ................................... 15530-6 Section 15670 Condensing Units............................................................ 15670-4 Section 15783 Energy Recovery Ventilator Unites .................................. 15783-5 Section 15785 Electric Heating Systems ................................................. 15785-3 Section 15790 Air Coils........................................................................... 15790-3 Section 15820 Forced Air Furnace and Condensing Unit ........................ 15820-7 Section 15890 Air Distribution................................................................. 15890-13 Section 15952 Controls and Sequence of Operation ............................... 15952-6 Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing .................................... 15990-3 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Electrical............................................................ 16010-7 Section 16110 Raceways........................................................................ 16110-7 Section 16120 Wires and Cables............................................................ 16120-4 Section 16135 Electrical Boxes and Fittings ............................................ 16135-3 Section 16143 Wiring Devices................................................................ 16143-4 Section 16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects ......................................... 16170-2 Section 16190 Supporting Devices......................................................... 16190-4 Section 16195 Electrical Identification..................................................... 16195-4 Section 16420 Service Entrance............................................................. 16420-2 Section 16452 Grounding........................................................................ 16452-2 Section 16470 Panelboards.................................................................... 16470-4 Section 16477 Fuses.............................................................................. 16477-2 Section 16510 Lighting Fixtures.............................................................. 16510-3 Section 16722 Fire Alarm System............................................................... 16722-11 Section 16950 Occupancy Sensors............................................................ 16950-4 APPENDICES Appendix A Geotechnical Engineering Report Appendix B NPDES Contractual Requirements FILED FEB 21 2012 y:5T PM c Clerk U U. Iowa Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 4 INDEX Iowa City, Iowa NOTICE TO BIDDERS TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE3IMPROVEMENTS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until April 10, 2012, at 10:00 a.m. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 p.m. April 17, 2012, or at special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: Base Bid: Construction of the park improvements to include, but not limited to, site demolition, grading, erosion control, utilities, drives, parking, trails, lodge building, park shelters, pavement, walls, prairie seeding, surface restoration and associated work. Add Alternate No. 1: The additional cost for providing rubberized composite shingles for the lodge, park shelters and associated work. Add Alternate No. 2: The additional cost for providing three fishing jetties improvements and associated work, Add Alternate No. 3: The additional cost for providing the canoe launch improvements and associated work, and Add Alternate No. 4: The additional cost for providing the 'prairie style' planters and associated work. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Snyder & Associates, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and mainte- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to AF -1 FILED FEB 21 2012 it. S9 i3tv/ Ci k Iowa Cuy, Iowa AF -2 exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: April 26, 2012 Specified Completion Date: May 31, 2013 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the Office of Snyder & Associates, Inc., Cedar Rapids, Iowa, by bona fide bidders. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239- 1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the FILED names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcon- FEB 2 1 2012 tract. This list shall include the type of work and 4_S9 -PM approximate subcontract amount(s). city clerk Iowa City, Iowa The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully re- quired under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK AF -2 NOTE TO BIDDERS The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2. References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3. Bid submittals are: Envelope 1: Bid Bond Envelope 2: Form of Proposal FILED FEB 21 2012 4:5q Qi City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa NB -1 FILED FEB 21 2012 - : 54 em INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS > ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. The bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3 Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 2007 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Engineer prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B. A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C. The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to which work may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternate bids. D. An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E. A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the bidding documents or in the contract documents. F. A bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G. A sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2— BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. L:MI 2.2 The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. 2.3 The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. 2.4 The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding documents without exception. ARTICLE 3—BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 Copies A. Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of Snyder & Associates, Inc., 5005 Bowling Street SW, Suite A, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404, Phone: 319-362-9394. B. Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding FILED documents. No partial sets will be issued. FEB 21 2012 C. In making copies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the q: S9e& City Clerk 1 Owner and the Engineer do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the city 10w city, Ima work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D. Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documents may be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner's reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the contract documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are incorporated therein by reference. 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A. The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Engineer errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B. Bidders and sub -bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Engineer at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. C. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. WA 3.3 Substitutions A. The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. B. If the Engineer approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.4 Addenda A. Addenda will be mailed, faxed, or delivered to all who are known by the Engineer to have a complete set of bidding documents. B. Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. C. No addenda will be issued later than seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1. An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2. An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3. An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. D. Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the proper location on the bid form. .FILED ARTICLE 4— BIDDING PROCEDURES FEB 2 1 2012 4.1 Form and Style of Bids }` c �y,Clat Iowa City, Iowa A. Submit bids in duplicate on forms identical to the form bound into the project manual. Separate copies of the bid form are contained within the back cover of this document. B. Fill in all blanks on the bid form by typewriter or manually in ink. C. Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govern. D. Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E. All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter "No Change". F. Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. M G. Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the bidder. H. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of opening. 4.2 Bid Security A. Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of FILED all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall FEB 21 2012 be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier's P check, cash or certified check will not be an accepted bid bond. `f cty Ga Iowa city, Iowa B. Surety bond shall be written on enclosed "Bid Bond" form bound within the project manual and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. C. The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until either: 1. The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2. The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3. All bids have been rejected. 4.3 Submission of Bids A. All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB — Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving the bids ("City Clerk, City of Iowa City"), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder's name and address, and the envelope's contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face of that envelope. B. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. 1. Location: Office of City Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240 2. Time and Date: Before 10:OOa.m.. April 10, 2012 Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. C. The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. IM D. Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A. A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidder after the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the bidder or by telegram. If by telegram, written confirmation over the signature of the bidder shall be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. C. Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. D. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. FILED ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS FEB 21 2012 5.1 Opening of Bids : 5R e"? Ci clerk Iowa City Iowa A. The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly an will be read aloud. 5.2 Rejection of Bids A. The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) A. It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bid which, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B. The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. TW ARTICLE 6 - POST -BID INFORMATION 6.1 Submittals A. The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Engineer: 1. A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder's own forces. 2. The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. 3. A list of names of the subcontractors or other persons or entities proposed for the principal portions of the work. B. The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. C. Prior to the award of the contract, the Engineer will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Engineer has FILED reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder's option: FFB 21201 1. Withdraw the bid. Sq P t 2. Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in cnY� the bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such Iowa -10" substitution. D. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7- PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.1 Bond Requirements A. The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder's usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B. If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder's usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. 7.2 The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A. The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. B. The bonds shall be written on the "Performance and Payment Bond" form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the 9M amount of the contract sum. C. The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D. The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 — PRE-BID CONFERENCE 8.1 Conference A. Bidder is encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference on Thursday. March 22 Id, 8.2 Parking 1. Parking shall be within the construction limits. am FILED FEB 21 2012 #:!5,1 -FM Iowa �C4, rowa FORM OF PROPOSAL TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF IOWA CITY NOTICE TO BIDDERS: PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder Address of Bidder TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 E. Washington St. Iowa City, IA 52240 FILED FEB 21 2012 V.•c ry`1 P Iowa City, Inwa The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ , in accordance with the terms set forth in the 'Project Specifications." The undersigned bidder, having examined and determined the scope of the Contract Documents, hereby proposes to provide the required labor, services, materials and equipment and to perform the Project as described in the Contract Documents, including Addenda , and , and to do all work at the prices set forth herein. We further propose to do all "Extra Work" which may be required to complete the work contemplated, at unit prices or lump sums to be agreed upon in writing prior to starting such work. ITEM DESCRIPTION 1. Mobilization UNIT EST QUAN LS 1 $ UNIT EXTENDED PRICE AMOUNT 2. Clearing and Grubbing LS 1 $ $ 3. Site Demolition and Removals — Rubble EA 450 $ $ 4. Site Demolition and Removals — Debris EA 50 $ $ 5. Earthwork LS 1 $ $ 6. Soil Import CY 4,500 $ $ 7. Erosion Control LS 1 $ $ S. Rammed Aggregate Pier Soil Reinforcement LS 1 $ $ 9. Storm Sewer LS 1 $ $ 10. Water Service LS 1 $ $ FP -1 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. Sanitary Sewer Service LS 1 $ $ Site Electrical LS 1 $ $ T' Depth PCC Pavement SY 4,960 $ $ 6" Depth PCC Pavement SY 3,990 $ $ 5 Depth PCC Pavement SF 3,790 $ $ 7" Depth Decorative PCC Pavement SF 1,260 $ $ 5' Depth Decorative PCC Pavement SF 5,765 $ $ Lodge Building LS 1 $ $ Lodge Patio and Wall LS 1 $ $ Open Shelter EA 2 $ $ Donor and Accent Walls LS 1 $ $ FILED Trash Enclosure LS 1 $ $ FEB 21 2012 Park Sign y: f LS 1 $ $ cu'�, lowa C]t7�. Iowa Limestone Retaining Wall LS 1 $ $ Site Furniture LS 1 $ $ Shoreline Stabilization LS 1 $ $ Irrigation Installation LS 1 $ $ Plantings LS 1 $ $ Seeding LS 1 $ $ BASE BID TOTAL EXTENDED AMOUNT $ Add Alternate #1 - Rubber Composite Shingles LS 1 $ $ Add Alternate #2 - Fishing Jetty LS 1 $ $ Add Alternate #3 - Canoe Landing LS 1 $ $ Add Alternate #4 — Planters EA 7 $ $ FP -2 The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract, are as follows: NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: FILED FEB 21 2012 Title: H 59 PM City clerk 1 Iowa City, Iowa Address: Phone: Contact: FP -3 as Principal, and as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($ ) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated Project. FILED for NOW, THEREFORE, FEB 21 2012 Al. sf PM (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, City Clem Iowa City, Iowa (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this A.D., 20_ Witness Witness KM day of (Seal) Principal By (Title) (Seal) Surety By (Attomey-in-fact) Attach Power -of -Attorney FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City'), and ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the day of 20_, for the Project ('Project'), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers ; b. "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2001, Iowa Department of Transportation, as amended; C. Plans; d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; FILED FEB 21 7012 e. Notice to Bidders; y; 51 pM C' Clerk f. Note to Bidders; Urwa'Iowa g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding on Non -Federal -Aid Projects; i. Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements); j. Proposal and Bid Documents; and k. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG -1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. DATED this ATTEST: FILED FEB 21 2012 4: 59 PM City Clvk Iowa City, Iowa day of 20_ Mayor City Clerk AG -2 Contractor (Title) ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: City Attorney's Office PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Dollars ($ ) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. FILED WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of entered into a FEH l; 2012 YIEJ pt., (date) Iowa uy°`k written Agreement with Owner for Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by _, which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient WM funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. 20 SIGNED AND SEALED THIS IN THE PRESENCE OF: Witness Witness FILED FH 21 2012 y: Sq P,1 City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa RM DAY OF (Principal) (Title) (Surety) (Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) (Phone) Contract Compliance Program FILED FEB 21 2012 I Sq Pn� Ciry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa CITY OF IOWA CITY SECTION I - GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT It is the policy of the City of Iowa City to require equal employment opportunity in all City contract work. This policy prohibits discrimination by the City's contractors, consultants and vendors and requires them to ensure that applicants seeking employment with them and their employees are treated equally without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, gender identity, sexual orientation, disability, marital status, and age. It is the City's intention to assist employers, who are City contractors, vendors or consultants, in designing and implementing equal employment opportunity so that all citizens will be afforded equal accessibility and opportunity to gain and maintain employment. PROVISIONS: 1. All contractors, vendors, and consultants requesting to do business with the City must submit an Equal Opportunity Policy Statement before the execution of the contract. 2. All City contractors, vendors, and consultants with contracts of $25,000 or more (or less if required by another governmental agency) must abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program. Emergency contracts may be exempt from this provision at the discretion of the City. Regardless of the value of the contract, all contractors, vendors, and consultants are subject to the City's Human Rights Ordinance, which is codified at Article 2 of the City Code. 3. Contracting departments are responsible for assuring that City contractors, vendors, and consultants are made aware of the City's Contract Compliance Program reporting responsibilities and receive the appropriate reporting forms. A notification of requirements will be included in any request for proposal and notice of bids. 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC -2 and CC -3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. 5. Contracting departments are responsible for answering questions about contractor, consultant and vendor compliance during the course of the contract with the City. 6. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must refrain from the use of any signs or designations which are sexist in nature, such as those which state "Men Working" or "Flagman Ahead," and instead use gender neutral signs. 7. All contractors, vendors, and consultants must assure that their subcontractors abide by the City's Human Rights Ordinance. The City's protected classes are listed at Iowa City City Code section 2-3-1. FILED FEB 21 2012 Ion" Clerk city. Iowa CC -1 SECTION II - ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. PLEASE RETURN PAGES CC2 AND CC3 OF THIS SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contractor" shall include consultants and vendors.) a. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. b. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C. § 1608 et sec.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. 3. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? 4. What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? (Please print) Phone number Address 5. The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. FILED FEB 21 2012 µ: 51 AM City Clcrk Iowa City, Iowa CC -2 6. How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6, are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. Business Name Signature Print Name Phone Number Title Date CC -3 FILED FEB 21 ?012 City calix Iowa City. town SECTION III - SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES COMPANY POLICY Determine your company's policy regarding equal employment opportunities. Document the policy and post it in a conspicuous place so that it is known to all your employees. Furthermore, disseminate the policy to all potential sources of employees and to your subcontractors asking their cooperation. The policy statement should recognize and accept your responsibility to provide equal employment opportunity in all your employment practices. In regard to dissemination of this policy, this can be done, for example, through the use of letters to all recruitment sources and subcontractors, personal contacts, employee meetings, web page postings, employee handbooks, and advertising. 2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY OFFICER Designate an equal employment opportunity officer or, at minimum, assign someone the responsibility of administering and promoting your company's Equal Employment Opportunity program. This person should have a position in your organization which emphasizes the importance of the program. 3. INSTRUCT STAFF Your staff should be aware of and be required to abide by your Equal Employment Opportunity program. All employees authorized to hire, supervise, promote, or discharge employees or are involved in such actions should be trained and required to comply with your policy and the current equal employment opportunity laws. 4. RECRUITMENT (a) Let potential employees know you are an equal opportunity employer. This can be done by identifying yourself on all recruitment advertising as "an equal opportunity employer'. (b) Use recruitment sources that are likely to yield diverse applicant pools. Word-of-mouth recruitment will only perpetuate the current composition of your workforce. Send recruitment sources a letter annually which reaffirms your commitment to equal employment opportunity and requests their assistance in helping you reach diverse applicant pools. (c) Analyze and review your company's recruitment procedures to identify and eliminate discriminatory barriers. (d) Select and train persons involved in the employment process to use objective standards and to support equal employment opportunity goals. (e) Review periodically job descriptions to make sure they accurately reflect major job functions. Review education and experience requirements to make sure they accurately reflect the requirements for successful job performance. (f) Review the job application to insure that only job related questions are asked. Ask yourself "Is this information necessary to judge an applicant's ability to perform the job applied for?" Only use job-related tests which do not adversely affect any particular group of people. (g) Monitor interviews carefully. Prepare interview questions in advance to assure that they are only job related. Train your interviewers on discrimination laws. Biased and subjective judgments in personal interviews can be a major source of discrimination. (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non -biased promotion, transfer and training policies to increase and/or improve the diversity of your workforce representation. Companies must make sure procedures for selecting candidates for promotion, transfer and training are based upon a fair assessment of an employee's ability and work record. Furthermore, all companies should post and otherwise publicize all job promotional opportunities and encourage FILED all qualified employees to bid on them. FEB 21 2012 4: SQ Pm - City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa CC -4 I l 1 City of� O7P,4 CN Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 — 3 — 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. FILED FEB 2 r x:59 �M2012 C1ctk a Qty, 1u" CC -5 2-3-1 CHAPTER 3 DISCRIMINATORY PRACTICES SECTION: 2-3-1: Employment; Exceptions 2-3-2: Public Accommodation; Exceptions 2-3-3: Credit Transactions; Exceptions 2-3-4: Education 2-3-5: Aiding Or Abetting; Retaliation; Intimidation 2-3-1: EMPLOYMENT; EXCEPTIONS: A. it shall be unlawful for any employer to refuse to hire, accept, register, classify, upgrade or refer for employ- ment, or to otherwise discriminate in employment against any other person or to discharge any employee be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender Identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. B. It shall be unlawful for any labor orga- nization to refuse to admit to member- ship, apprenticeship or training an applicant, to expel any member, or to otherwise discriminate against any applicant for membership, apprentice- ship or training or any member in the privileges, rights or benefits of such membership, apprenticeship or train- ing because of age, color, creed, disability, gender Identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation of such ap- plicant or member. 2-3-1 C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organiza- tion or the employees or members thereof. to directly or Indirectly adver- tise or in any other manner Indicate or publicize that individuals are unwel- come, objectionable or not solicited for employment or membership be- cause of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, nation- al origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) D. Employment policies relating to preg- nancy and childbirth shall be governed by the following: 1. A written or unwritten employment policy or practice which excludes from employment applicants or employees because of the employee's pregnancy is a prima facie violation of this Title. FILED Iowa City FEB 21 2012 4: SI pM City Cleric Iowa City, tows CC -6 2. Disabilities caused or contributed to by the employee's pregnancy, miscar- riage, childbirth and recovery there- from are, for all job-related purposes, temporary disabilities and shall be treated as such under any health or temporary disability insurance or sick leave plan available in connection with employment or any written or unwrit- ten employment policies and practices involving terms and conditions of employment as applied to other tem- porary disabilities. It shall be unlawful for any person to solicit or require as a condition of employment of any employee or pro - 697 2-3-1 2-3-1 spective employee a test for the pres- 2. An employer or employment agency ence of the antibody to the human which chooses to offer employment or immunodeficiency virus. An agree- advertise for employment to only the ment between an employer, employ- disabled or elderly. Any such employ- ment agency, labor organization or ment or offer of employment shall not their employees, agents or members discriminate among the disabled or and an employee or prospective em- elderly on the basis of age, color, ployee concerning employment, pay creed, disability, gender identity, mari- or benefits to an employee or pro- tal status, national origin, race, reli- spective employee in return for taking gion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. a test for the presence of the antibody 95-3697, 11-7-1995) to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this 3. The employment of Individuals for subsection do not apply if the State work within the home of the employer epidemiologist determines and the if the employer or members of the Director of Public Health declares family reside therein during such em - through the utilization of guidelines ployment. established by the Center for Disease Control of the United States Depart- 4. The employment of individuals to ment of Health and Human Services, render personal service to the person that a person with a condition related of the employer or members of the to acquired immune deficiency syn- employer's family. drome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human Immunode- 5. To employ on the basis of sex in ficiency virus to other persons in a those certain instances where sex is a specific occupation. bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal F. The following are exempted from the operation of a particular business or provisions of this Section: enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted nar- 1. Any bona fide religious Institution or rowly. its educational facility, association, corporation or society with respect to 6. A State or Federal program de - any qualifications for employment signed to benefit a specific age classl- based on religion when such qualifica- fication which serves a bona fide pub - tions are related to a bona fide reli- lic purpose. gious purpose. A religious qualifica- tion for instructional personnel or an 7. To employ on the basis of disability administrative officer, serving In a in those certain Instances where pres- supervisory capacity of a bona fide ence of disability is a bona fide occu- religious educational facility or reli- pational qualification reasonably nec- gious institution shall be presumed to essary to the normal operation of a be a bona fide occupational qualifica- particular business or enterprise. The tion. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) FILED 997 FEB 21 2012 a1: sf PM town City City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa CC -7 GENERAL CONDITIONS Division 11, General Requirements and Covenants of the Iowa Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2009, as amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction " AIA DOC A201-2007 amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. FILED FEB 21 2012 $4.5.7 p, Ci ty Clerk Iowa City, Iowa GC -1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ARTICLES WITHIN THIS SECTION S-1 Definitions S-2 Limitations of Operations S-3 Insurance S-4 Supervision and Superintendence S-5 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others S-6 Compliance with OSHA Regulations FILED S-7 Employment Practices S-8 Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements) FEB 21 2012 S-9 Measurement and Payment 5 S1 " S-10 TaxesIO+ic;Cl k S-11 Construction Stakes S-12 Restriction on Non -Resident Bidding on Non -Federal -Aid Projects Caption and Introductory Statements These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement Division 11 of the Iowa Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2001, as amended and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. S-1 DEFINITIONS. ADD to or CHANGE the following definitions within 1101.03 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. "ENGINEER" shall mean the Director of Public Works for the City of Iowa City, Iowa or his authorized representative. "OWNER" and "CITY" shall mean the City of Iowa City, Iowa acting through the City Council and duly authorized agents. "CONTRACTING AUTHORITY," "DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION," or "COUNTY" shall mean the CITY. "IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS" shall mean the Iowa Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2001, as amended. S-2 LIMITATIONS OF OPERATIONS. Add the following paragraph to 1108.03 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the ENGINEER. IDOT SC -1 S-3 INSURANCE. A. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE: CANCELLATION OR MODIFICATION Before commencing work, the Contractor shall submit to the City for approval a Certificate of Insurance, meeting the requirements specified herein, to be in effect for the full contract period. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. 2. The Contractor shall notify the City in writing at least thirty (30) calendar days prior to any change or cancellation of said policy or policies. Cancellation or modification of said policy or policies shall be considered just cause for the City of Iowa City to immediately cancel the contract and/or to halt work on the contract, and to withhold payment for any work performed on the contract. B. MINIMUM COVERAGE Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the following type and minimum amounts: Type of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence Aggregate Bodily Injury & Property Damage* $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Automobile Liability Combined Single Limit FILED Bodily Injury & Property Damage $1,000,000 FEB 21 2012 Excess Liability $1,000,000 $1,000,000 L4:5 I Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. City Clerk Iowa City. Iowa 'Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage when determined by City to be applicable. The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. In addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and on the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 2. The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. IDOT SC -2 3. If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance. 4. The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims -made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: a. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. b. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of FILED two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of FEB 21 2012 this Contract from and after its inception. y;SF rM City Clerk Iowa city, mala "Tail" or "prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self-insured retention than the insurance which it replaces. 5. The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and pursue any and all remedies available to the City. 6. In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses reduce the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance below the limits required hereunder, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 7. In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. C. HOLD HARMLESS The Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the City of Iowa City and its IDOT SC -3 officers, employees, and agents from any and all liability, loss, cost, damage, and expense (including reasonable attorney's fees and court costs) resulting from, arising out of, or incurred by reason of any claims, actions, or suits based upon or alleging bodily injury, including death, or property damage rising out of or resulting from the Contractor's operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or herself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. S-4 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE. Add the following paragraph to 1105.05 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: FILED CONTRACTOR shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. FEB 21 2012 CONTRACTOR shall provide to ENGINEER the phone number and/or paging service of this A+-. S I Pot individual. City CI k Iowa City, l" CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS. Add the following paragraph to 1108.01 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: Bidders shall list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required for approval by the City and as noted on the Form of Proposal and the Agreement. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. S-6 COMPLIANCE WITH OSHA REGULATIONS. Add the following paragraphs to 1107.01 of the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS: The Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 191C (General Industry Standard) and 29 CFR 1926 (Construction Industry Standard). The Contractor and all subcontractors are solely responsible for compliance with said regulations. The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be submitted to the Project Engineering prior to the start of construction and supplemented as necessary throughout the project. This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to -know. S-7 EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES. Neither the Contractor nor his/her subcontractors, shall employ any person whose physical or mental condition is such that his/her employment will endanger the health and safety of them- selves or others employed on the project. Contractor shall not commit any of the following employment practices and agrees to include the following clauses in any subcontracts: IDOT SC -4 To discriminate against any individual in terms, conditions, or privileges of employment because of sex, race, color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, marital status, age or disability unless such disability is related to job performance of such person or employee. To discharge from employment or refuse to hire any individual because of sex, race, color, religion, national origin, sexual orientation, gender identity, marital status, age, or disability unless such disability is related to job performance of such person or employee. S-8 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI -DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS). For all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. S-9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. Section 01025, Measurement and Payment, contained in Division 1 of these specifications defines all pay items and methods of measurement. The provisions of this section will supersede applicable sections in the IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. S-10 TAXES. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. S-11 CONSTRUCTION STAKES. Replace the last paragraph of 1105.06 of the IDOT Standard Specifications with the following: The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction staking for the project. FILED FEB 2 l 2012 1/: S. P � VCi City.jowa k ( IDOT SC -5 INSERT IOWA CITY SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS - 17 PAGES FILED FEB 2 1 22012 L : 5 I p G Iowa City. Iowa IDOT SC -6 CITY OF IOWA CITY SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION FILED FEB 21 2012 9'. P PM City Clerk Iowa City, lova A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201-2007. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. B. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as ^tp'�- and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as "bold italic". D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Law or Regulations in respect to any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety. 1.2 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 Contract Documents to read as follows: 1.1.1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is listed as AG in the project manual. B. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide. C. Add the following paragraph 1.2.4: 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements, govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. 1.3 ARTICLE 2 -OWNER A. Change paragraph 2.4 to read as follows: 2.4 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. - In such case aR appFepFiate Change QFder shall be issued dedU ^^ the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -1 Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasenable entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's and/or Consultant's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.2 to read as follows: 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; FILED however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such FEB 21 2012 form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the contractor's review is made in the y:5q ort Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and kaew'ngfy failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume apprepriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear all costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. B. Change paragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, vendors, materialmen and suppliers and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. C. Add the following 3.3.4: 3.3.4 Contractor shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. Contractor shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. D. Change paragraph 3.4.1 to read as follows: 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, storage, parking and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work to be performed after regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to perform work after regular hours, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -2 E. Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 0160 00 - Post Bid Substitutions. F. Change paragraphs 3.5 to read as follows: 3.5 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, Work, materials or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. G. Change paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. All such information for said certificates shall be submitted to the City/Owner together in one submission. H. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall serapfy perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. Change paragraph 3.7.3 to read as follows: 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume full apprepriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to the seFrestiea and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -3 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor: .t represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution T2 LED that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs Fid k 2012 under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for *:5Y Pef additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and City Q`rt 41.4 Iowa City, Iowa will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as maybe required for the Work to be complete in all respects. .5 will adhere to the contract schedule F. Change paragraphs 3.5 to read as follows: 3.5 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, Work, materials or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. G. Change paragraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. All such information for said certificates shall be submitted to the City/Owner together in one submission. H. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall serapfy perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. Change paragraph 3.7.3 to read as follows: 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume full apprepriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to the seFrestiea and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -3 Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are 1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or 2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than the next business day 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's costs of or time required for performance of any part of the work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. J. Change paragraph 3.11 to read as follows: 3.11 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one edpy at all approved Shop Drawings, MSDS Sheets, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. K. Change paragraph 3.13 to read as follows: FILED 3.13 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the FEB 21 2012 Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. q-,6Jffn The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are City Clerk located may be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The Iowa city' Iowa Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted. L. Change paragraph 3.17 to read as follows: 3.17 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Owner in writing. M. Change paragraphs 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property , but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -4 may be liabl , . Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. Nothing In the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnification by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to Paragraph 3.18.1. N. Change paragraph 3.18.2 to read as follows: 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa. In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under worker's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. FILED 1.5 ARTICLE 4 -ARCHITECT FEB 21 2012 A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows: '{' SR�ry Pe?kk 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect ado�seCifprtbtvin the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner Sentraster and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein during construction and until the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment to the Contractor on the Project. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner 1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and 2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect and the Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and seF* recommend to the Owner the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -5 performing portions of the Work. E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regarding decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then the Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is FILED made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations desisiens of the Architect will be consistent with FEB 21P 2012 the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in %1: S�9ty f Al the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and recommendations desisiens, the Io.CC- ul m Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations desisiens rendered in good faith. 1.6 ARTICLE 5 -SUBCONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following: 5.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. 1. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3 to read as follows: 5.3 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub -subcontractors. All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -6 FILED 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS FEB Z 1 2012 .y: 55 P!* -t A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. city clerk Iowa City, Iowa B. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: B. Add paragraph 7.2.2 as follows: 7.2.2 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Work and related parts of the Work. C. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed directly by the Contractor's employees, not including oversight of such work performed by subcontractor, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (1551o) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub -subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub -subcontractor. .5 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 1.9 ARTICLE 8 -TIME A. Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -7 enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, 61..aS61aa•-,.laa;, = deliveries, _ unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, OF by delay autheFzed by the Owner pend Rg aFbitratioR, or by ether Gauses INh Gh the Arch tRAt dAteFrR RAS rRay justil .J"� then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect, may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. D. Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. E. Add paragraph 8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES to read as follows: Since the actual monetary value of damages sustained by the Owner as a result of delayed completion of the Work is extremely difficult or impractical to assess, the Owner and Contractor agree as follows: 1. Upon failure of the Contractor to achieve "Substantial Completion" of the Work in compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents: The Contractor shall pay as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum of amount as listed in FILED the Notice to Bidders (or Instruction to Bidders) for each calendar day that "Substantial Completion" is delayed beyond the date written in the Agreement, FEB 21 2012 subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided for in the Contract y-; 5Documents. c ty clur Iowa City. Iowa 2. The Owner shall give written notice to the Contractor of intent to assess liquidated damages pursuant to provisions of this Article. Calculation of the amount of liquidated damages shall commence on the date the Owner notifies the Contractor of this intent. 3. Liquidated damages assessed in accordance with these provisions are exclusive of other monetary damages to which the Owner may be entitled as a direct result of the Contractor's failure to achieve final completion of the Work in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents. These liquidated damages are not intended to be exclusive of Owner's right to terminate this Contract based on Contractors' failure to comply with the terms and provisions of the Contract. 4. Partial performance of the Work of this Contract shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for liquidated damages. 5. Contractor's liability for liquidated damages shall cease upon issuance of Substantial Completion Certificate for the Work of the Contract. 6. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, amounts assessed to the Contractor as liquidated damages may be deducted by the Owner from any money payable to the Contractor pursuant to this Contract. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of a claim for liquidated damages prior to the date the Owner deducts such sum from money payable to the Contractor. 1.10 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -8 .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such final waivers. B. Change paragraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. 'UP Add paragraph 9.4.2.1: B 1 ZO12' 9'4'2'1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the 5q FM amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no c ty cterr I% liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. Iowa City, Iowa Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 The Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor within 30 days after the Owner has received a Certificate for Payment from the Architect. To insure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. shall so Retifythetprt E. Change paragraph 9.8.4 to read as follows: When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warrant es required by the GGRtFaGt. Document,; shall GOMmenGe GR the date of 91-hqtant 2.1 Completion of the Werk or deSigRated PON OR thereof un! Substantial Qemplet4F�-. F. Add paragraph 9.10.6: 9.10.6 Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa (2009), as amended. G. Add paragraph 9.10.7: 9.10.7 Warranties required by the Contract Documents, including those stated in the performance and payment bond, shall commence on the date of final, formal acceptance of the work by the City. 1.11 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add paragraph 10.1.1: 1. The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -9 chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as necessary FILED throughout the project. This data Is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and FEB 21 2012 State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right -to -know. tel' S�Ry � B. Change paragraph 10.2.4 to read as follows: Iowa city, Iowa 1. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice and shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. C. Add paragraph 10.2.9: 10.2.9 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. The Owner shall be notified once these notices have been served and before the work is performed. 1.12 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Change paragraph 11.1.1.5 to read as follows: .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities and loss of use resulting therefrom; B. Change paragraph 11.1.2 to read as follows: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverage wbefher shall be written on an occurrence er- s4afrns made basis and shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the contractor's completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 11.1.3 to read as follows: 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted upon final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. D. Delete paragraph 11.1.4 in its entirety and add the following paragraphs 11.1.4 through 11.1.14: 11.1.4 Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -10 in the following type and minimum amounts: Type of Coverage Comprehensive General Liability Bodily Injury & Property Damage' Automobile Liability Bodily Injury & Property Damage Excess Liability Employer's Liability Each Accident Each Employee Policy Limit Professional Liability (if applicable) Each Occurrence Aggregate $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit $1,000,000 FILED $1,000,000 $1,000,000 - FEB 21 2012 $500,000 54 em Clb' Clerk $500,000 Iowa City, Iowa $500,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Worker's Compensation Insurance as required by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage. Comprehensive General Liability using Insurance Services Office CG0001 or equivalent, shall include Contractual, Premises & Operations, Products & Completed Operations, Independent Contractors, Personal & Advertising Injury coverages, and Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) endorsement. Automobile Liability shall include all owned, non -owned and hired autos and also coverage for Contractual Liability. Excess Liability shall provide no less than following form coverage to the primary underlying policies. Workers Compensation shall include the Alternative Employer and Waiver of Subrogation endorsements in favor of the Owner. Professional Liability, if applicable: Tthe Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Professional Errors and Omissions Liability Insurance. The Contractor will notify the Owner if claims made erode the policy limits below those required above. All liability policies above, except for Workers Compensation and Professional Liability, shall include the Owner's Governmental Immunities Endorsement. [See attached]. 11. 1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. In addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 11.1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11.1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -11 11. 1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance and copies of such shall be attached thereto. 11.1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. The Contractor shall include the Owner (City of Iowa City, including its employees, agents and assigns) as additional insured on all policies, except worker's compensation and professional liability. Such additional insured endorsement(s) shall make the Contractor's liability insurance primary to the Owner's and, furthermore, shall not be contributing with any other insurance or similar protection available to the Owner, whether such available protection be primary, contributing or FILED excess. Owner shall be an Additional Insured with repect to all required aforementioned coverages, which shall be stated on all Certificates of Insurance. Such Certificates shall FEB 21 2012 also state that the Governmental Immunities Endorsement (see attached) apply and said µ: 54 Pv` endorsements shall be attached thereto. City clerk Iowa City, Iowa The Contractor shall require any of its agents and subcontractors who perform work and/or services pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement to purchase and maintain the same types of insurance as are required of the Contractor. 11.1.10 The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims -made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: A. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. B. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. D. "Tail" or "prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self-insured retention than the insurance which it replaces 11.1.11 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case may be. 11.1.12 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -12 E. due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.13 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.14 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but not limited to the owner's deductible on the owner's builder's risk. Delete paragraphs 11.3 in its entirety and add paragraphs 11.3 as follows: 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: .1 include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Owner's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; .2 be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; .3 include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property; .4 include $100,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER; .5 allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; FILED .6 include testing and startup; and FER 21 2012 .7 be maintained in effect until final payment is made. uy, Iu�ra .8 Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -13 11.3.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. 11.3.3 All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of FILED insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. FEB 21 2012 11.3.5 If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the q -;SQ Oq property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, city Clem Iowa City. Iowa include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. Delete section 11.4 in its entirety and add paragraph 11.4 to read as follows: 11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with the American Institute of Architect's Document A-312 (1984 Edition), with coverage provided by a surety having a financial rating from A.M. Best of A, VII or higher. .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner/Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. .3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract Documents. .4 The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its Principal's denial of default as justification for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -14 .5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. .6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. 11.4.2 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. FILED 1.13 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS FEB 2 1 2012 Y: 5'j PA.t A. Change paragraph 13.1 to read as follows: city clerk 13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Iowa of thel#"541'u '4n d'n to r nl 1'n the Federal Ah1tratign Ant Ghall n n SeGtion 15.4. B. Change paragraph 13.3.1 to read as follows: 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if deli ,nam,, nt n^r sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. C. Change paragraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect and Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect and Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of 1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded and 2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. D. Delete paragraphs 13.7. E. Add the following Section 13.8: 13.8 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -15 AILED FEB ot Pr~k City Clerk Iowa Ciry, Iowa 1.14 1.15 employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. .2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance Add the following Section 13.9: 13.9 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) for all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC -1. ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A. Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: .5 falls or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. B. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows: 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract. ARTICLE 15- CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Change paragraphs 15.1.1 through 15.1.3 to read as follows: 15.1.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other similar relief with respect to the administration terms of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. 15.1.2 Notice of Claims. Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor. . 15.1.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -16 proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. B. Change paragraph 15.2.5 to read as follows: 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the claim. This initial decision shall 1) be in writing, 2) state the reasons therefore, and 3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approve' aF Fejeotion of a Glaim by the initial decision she" be final and binding GF; the paFt;96 but subjeGt tG Fnediatien and, if the paFtles fail to Fe6alve their disputes thFaugh mediation, W bonding dispute resolution arbitratieR. C. Delete paragraphs 15.2.6 and 15.2.6.1 in their entirety. D. Delete Section 15.3 MEDIATION in its entirety. E. Delete Section 15.4 ARBITRATION in its entirety. F. Add the following paragraph 15.5 to read as follows: 15.5 The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to anv dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. END OF DOCUMENT 00800 FILED FEB 21 2012 y: sf PM CdY Clerk Iowa City, Iowa SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC -17 SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FILED FEB 21 2012 'S`j PNj PART 1 -GENERAL Io a C ry iowa 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Procedures and submittal requirements for schedule of values, applications for payment, and unit prices. 1.02 STANDARD OFMEASUREMENTS. A. Work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer. Payment will be based on the actual quantity of work performed according to the various classes of work specified unless noted in Part 3 of this Section. The Contractor will be given an opportunity to be present during measurement. 1.03 SCOPE OF PAYMENT: A. The Contractor shall accept the compensation as herein provided as full payment for furnishing materials, labor, tools and equipment and for performing work under the contract; also, for costs arising from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the execution of the work and up to the time of acceptance. B. Construction items may be bid as a lump sum or as itemized work, which will be paid on a unit cost basis. In either case, some work may be required for which a separate pay item is not provided. Completion of this work is required. If a separate pay item is not provided for this work, it is to be considered incidental to the project and no separate payment will be made. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 NONE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROCEDURE: A. Payment under this contract shall occur no more than once per month for work completed by the Contractor. Payment is based on an estimate of the total amount and value of work completed minus 5% retainage. It is not the City's policy to pay for materials and equipment stored or furnishings fabricated off site. The 5% retainage will be released 31 days after the project is accepted by the City Council, provided no claims against the project have been filed within 30 days of project acceptance. Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa will govern the release of retainage and resolution of claims. 01025-1 3.02 BID ITEMS. A. GENERAL The following subsections describe the measurement of and payment for the work to be done under the items listed in the FORM OF PROPOSAL. Each unit or lump sum price stated shall constitute full payment as herein specified for each item of work completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, including FILED clean up. It is the Contractor's responsibility to identify the locations of public and private utilities. FEB 21 2012 No additional compensation will be made for any interference or delay caused by the if -1:51 �M placement and/or relocation of said utilities. No additional compensation will be made for Iowa city, Iowa repair costs to fix damage caused by the Contractor or his/her Subcontractors. Work associated with existing items on private and/or public property that are to be protected, removed, relocated, replaced, reinstalled or modified is considered incidental unless it is listed as an item in the FORM OF PROPOSAL. Existing items damaged or unsuitable for relocation or reinstallation will be replaced with like item and painted, if necessary, at the Contractor's expense. All trees and shrubs shall remain and be protected from damage unless specifically noted as "REMOVE" or "CLEAR AND GRUB" on the project plans and as otherwise directed by the Engineer. The prices for those items which may have any impact on existing trees and shrubs shall include compensation for special precautionary measures required to prevent injury or damage to said tree, shrub or root system. The prices for those items which involve grading or excavation shall include compensation for top soil removal and replacement (unless it is listed as an item in the FORM OF PROPOSAL), disposal of surplus excavated material, handling water, installation of all necessary sheeting, bracing and temporary fencing around all open excavations and supply, placement and compaction of specified backfill. The prices for those items which involve surface removal adjacent to buildings or vaults shall include compensation to protect exposed surfaces from water which may leak or seep into vaults and/or basements. All labor, materials and equipment required to bring surfaces to the proper elevation and density including loading, hauling, and disposal of unsuitable material, below grade excavation, borrow and hauling, placing, forming, drying, watering and compaction of fill material, and all such work as may be required to make the grading work complete with a uniform surface free of rock, broken concrete, tree roots, limbs and other debris is incidental to this project unless it is listed as an item in the FORM OF PROPOSAL. The Contractor must pay for all parking permit fees, meter hoods, lot and ramp fees, and parking tickets. The Contractor must figure these costs into their bid prices. The City will not waive parking fees or fines. Permits paid for by the Contractor will be issued only for construction vehicles, not personal vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible for continuous cleaning of mud and debris off adjacent driveways, streets, sidewalks and private property, when mud and debris is deposited there as a result of any construction activity. The cost of clean up shall be incidental. 01025-2 B. BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS Bid Item No. 1: Mobilization (LS): Lump sum price shall include preparatory work and operation for all items under the contract, including, but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, and supplies. Also includes construction staking, traffic control, signs, dewatering, construction fence and other incidental items to the project. Payment shall be made upon percent complete on the project. 2. Bid Item No. 2: Clearing and Grubbing (LS): Lump sum price includes all work required to cut, remove and dispose of trees, stumps, roots, logs, down timber, hedges, brush, shrubs and vegetation within the grading limits of the proposed improvements. Measurement for payment based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted clearing and grubbing. 3. Bid Item No. 3: Site Demolition and Removals — Rubble (EA): Unit price includes all equipment, tools, excavation, digging, removing, loading, transporting, and disposing FILED of rubble material. Rubble material includes concrete, boulders, rock, gravel, brick, and soil associated with the removal of this unwanted material. Disposal location is FEB 2L2012 available east of the park site as shown on plan sheet SP -3. Material can be dumped in 'f'Vf T'Wt piles. Each unit is defined as a full truckload based upon a 10 cubic yard truck. The City Gert P j necessary Iowa City, Iowa unit rice will be adjusted as necessa for the actual truck used. Measurement for payment based upon the number of full truckloads hauled off-site and properly disposed. Contractor to assume for bid purposes, 450 truck loads. 4. Bid Item No. 4: Site Demolition and Removals — Debris (EA): Unit price includes all equipment, tools, excavation, cutting, digging, removing, loading, transporting, and properly disposing of debris material. Debris material includes steel, metal, cabling, structures, asphalt, rebar, and unwanted materials. This includes any debris visible at water surface along the lake shoreline. Each unit is defined as a full truckload based upon a 10 cubic yard truck. The unit price will be adjusted as necessary for the actual truck used. Measurement and payment based upon the number of full truckloads hauled to an approved off-site location and properly disposed. Contractor to assume for bid purposes, 50 full truck loads. Bid Item 5: Earthwork (LS): Lump Sum price includes all equipment, tools, excavation, digging, removing, loading, transporting, compacting, stripping, stockpiling, topsoil, subgrade preparation, and testing of soils to be placed as reflected in the proposed grading plans and construction documents. This includes the site grading cuts and fills, load, transport, and place soils from existing soil stockpile directly north of site, placement, and finish grading. During grading activities, any rubble or debris encountered shall be placed in piles on site and will be accounted for as described in bid items 3 and 4. Measurement for payment based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted earthwork. 6. Bid Item 6: Soil Import (CY): Unit price includes securing acceptable soil, equipment, loading, transporting, placing, compacting, testing, finish grading, and associated work. Estimated quantity of soil import is 4,500 cubic yards. This volume is estimated based upon the expected rubble to be hauled off-site during construction. Measurement for payment based upon per cubic yard of approved soil hauled and placed on site. 01025-3 Bid Item 7: Erosion Control (LS): Lump sum price includes furnishing and placement of all temporary products and control such as filter socks, silt fence, temporary seeding, and maintaining the SWPPP as construction progresses to meet the administrative provisions set forth in the NPDES permit including weekly inspections and record keeping. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted erosion control. 8. Bid Item No 8• Rammed Aggregate Pier Soil Reinforcement (LS): Lump sum price FILED includes design and installation of the RAP foundation for all foundations of the lodge building and patio retaining wall. Includes all labor, material, equipment, any casing FEB 21 2012 holes, excavation of any unsuitable material, drilling obstructions, delays, and testing. H; 59 FM Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted City clerk rammed aggregate iers. Iowa City, Iowapiers. 9. Bid Item No. 9: Storm Sewer (LS): Lump sum price includes all materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and labor required to install complete and operational storm sewer improvements as indicated on plans. Includes all storm sewer structures, pipe, flared end sections, footings, apron guards, and associated work. Measurement for payment based upon percentage complete of in-place and accepted storm sewer system. 10. Bid Item 10: Water Service (LS): Lump sum price includes all material, equipment, tools, excavation, tapping, backfill, testing, materials and labor required to install a complete and operational water service and improvements on site. This includes water line, hydrant, valves, fittings, foot and shower tower with drinking fountain, and associated work.Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted water service components. 11. Bid Item 11: Sanitary Sewer Service (LS): Lump sum price includes all material, equipment, tools, excavation and backfill, boring, casing, materials and labor required to install a complete and operational sanitary sewer service and lift station as shown on the plans. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted sanitary sewer service components. 12. Bid Item 12: Site Electrical (LS): Lump sum price includes all equipment, tools, excavation and backfill, boring, materials and labor required to install a complete and operational electrical service to all components of the project, including site lighting and parking lot lighting. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted electrical improvements. 13. Bid Item 13: 7" Depth PCC Pavement (SYI: Unit price includes subgrade preparation per geotechnical report, over excavation, forming, furnishing and placing concrete of specified type, curing, protecting, testing, sawcutting, joints and associated work. Including all associated elements of the boat ramp. Measurement for payment based on square yard of pavement constructed and measured in the field. 14. Bid Item 14: 6" Dem PCC Pavement (SYI: Unit price includes subgrade preparation per geotechnical report, over excavation, forming, furnishing and placing concrete of specified type, curing, protecting, testing, sawcutting, joints and associated work. Measurement for payment based on square foot of pavement constructed and measured in the field. 01025-4 15. Bid Item 15: 5" Depth PCC Pavement (SF): Unit price includes subgrade preparation per geotechnical report, over excavation, forming, furnishing and placing concrete of specified type, curing, protecting, testing, sawcutting, joints and associated work. Measurement for payment based on square foot of pavement constructed and measured in the field. 16. Bid Item 16: 7" Depth Decorative PCC Pavement (SF): Unit price includes excavation, subgrade preparation, forming, furnishing, and placing colored concrete of specified type at full depth color, curing, protecting, testing, sawcutting, joints, and associated work. Measurement for payment based upon the square foot of pavement constructed and accepted as measured in the field. 17. Bid Item 17: 5" Depth Decorative PCC Pavement (SF): Unit price includes excavation, subgrade preparation, forming, furnishing, and placing colored concrete of specified type at full depth color, curing, protecting, testing, sawcutting, joints, and associated work. Measurement for payment based upon the square foot of pavement constructed and accepted as measured in the field. FILED 18. Bid Item 18: Lodge Building (LS): Lump sum price includes excavating, temporary FEB 2 sheeting and shoring, structural foundation, geogrid, compacting subgrade and 1 2012 backfill, forming, concrete slab, structural concrete materials, reinforcing steel and y placement, stone veneer, recast bases, caps and accessories mortar, decorative steel City ClClerk P � + P P > Iowa City, Iowa components & connectors, powder -coating, electrical work, mechanical work, labor and materials for the construction of the lodge building. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted lodge building. 19. Bid Item 19: Lodge Patio and Wall (LS): Lump sum price includes all materials, equipment, tools, excavation, dewatering, sheeting and shoring, grading, structural foundation and wall, backfilling, compaction, subgrade, decorative pavement, railing, and associated work. Measurement for payment based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted improvements. 20. Bid Item 20: Open Shelter (EA): Unit price includes excavating, temporary sheeting and shoring, compacting subgrade and backfill, forming, structural concrete materials, reinforcing steel and placement, stone veneer, precast bases, caps and accessories, mortar, decorative steel components & connectors, powder -coating, labor and materials for the construction of the shelter. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted shelters. 21. Bid Item 21: Donor and Accent Walls (LS): Lump sum price includes all materials, equipment, tools, and associated work to construct the donor walls. Includes excavating, sheeting and shoring, foundations, compacting subgrade and backfill, wall, structural support plaques, lettering and lighting. Measurement for payment based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted donor walls. 22. Bid Item 22: Trash Enclosure (LS): Lump sum price includes all material, equipment, tools, excavation, sheeting and shoring, structural foundation, reinforcing, wall, limestone gates, interior PCC slab, and associated work. Measurement for payment based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted improvements 01025-5 23. Bid Item 23: Park Sign (LS): Lump sum price includes all materials, equipment, tools and associated work to construct the park sign. Includes excavating, sheeting and shoring, foundation, compacting subgrade and backfill, wall, structural supports, and lettering. Measurement for payment based upon the percentage complete of in- place and accepted sign. 24. Bid Item 24: Limestone Retaining Wall (LS): Lump sum price includes excavating, sheeting and shoring, compacting subgrade and backfill, granular base, subdrain, granular backfill with fabric, geotextiles, stainless steel pins, grouting, labor and materials for the construction of the limestone retaining wall. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted limestone FILED retaining wall FEB 21 2012 25. Bid Item 25: Site Furniture (LS) —Lump sum price includes all materials, equipment, `E:54 PM tools and associated work for providing and installing bicycle racks, wooden C-1 Clerk benches, and portable restroom, as shown on plans. Measurement and payment Iowa City, Iowa based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted improvements. 26. Bid Item 26: Shoreline Stabilization (LS) — Lump sum price includes all materials, equipment, tools and associated work for providing and installing rock for shoreline stabilization and turf reinforcement matting where shown on plans. Measurement and payment based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted stabilization. 27. Bid Item 27: Irrigation Installation (LS): Lump sum price includes all equipment, tools and associated work for installing irrigation system as shown on the plans. Owner provides materials to site as specified. Measurement and payment based upon the percentage complete of in-place and accepted irrigation system. 28. Bid Item 28: Plantings (LS): Lump sum price includes the installation of all plant material including trees, shrubs, and perennials as shown on the plans. Also includes transportation, utility locates, planting bed preparation including soil amendments, tilling, excavation, placement, watering, mulching, warranty, and associated work. Measurement for payment based on the percentage complete of in-place and accepted plantings. 29. Bid Item No. 29: Seeding(LS): Lump sum price includes furnishing and installing all materials, equipment and labor necessary for seedbed preparation, installation, and placement of seed as indicated on the construction plans and all areas disturbed by construction. This work includes all seed type mixes. Measurement and payment based upon percentage complete of in-place and accepted seeding operations. 30. Add Alternate No. 1: Rubber Composite Shingles (LS)' Lump sum price includes the additional cost for providing and installing rubber composite shingles on the lodge building and open shelters in lieu of the asphalt shingles as specified on the plans. Measurement and payment based upon percent complete of in-place and accepted rubber composite shingles. 31. Add Alternate No. 2: Fishing Jetty (LS): Lump sum price includes three fishing jetties consisting of over excavation, sand, granular material, limestone walls, limestone boulders, trees, seeding, and associated work. Measurement and payment based upon percentage complete and accepted improvements. 01025-6 32. Add Alternate No. 3: Canoe Launch (LS): Lump sum price includes over excavation, sand, granular material, limestone boulders, trees, seeding, and associated work. Measurement and payment based upon percentage complete and accepted improvements. 33. Add Alternate No. 4: Planters (EA): — Unit price includes all equipment, tools and materials for providing "Prairie Style" planters in locations shown on plans. Measurement and payment based upon each unit placed and accepted. FILED FEB 21 2012 '/.sq P City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 01025-7 SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Description T rD FILE B. Contract Description C. Description of Work FEB 21 2012 D. Work by Owner Cary cry Iowa CITY, Iowa E. Owner Occupancy and Phasing F. Permits, Fees, and Regulatory Agencies G. Contract Documents 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. Architect: Architects Schipper Kastner B. Owner:City of Iowa City, Department of Public Works, Engineering Division. P C. The Project consists of a Phase 3 Improvements for the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area. 1.03 CONTRA CTDESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract is to be awarded based on a stipulated sum as described in Document 00 52 00 Form of Agreement Between the Owner and Contractor. 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work as indicated on drawings and specifications, including, but not limited to: 1. Site demolition, grading, erosion control, utilities, drives, parking, trails, lodge building, park shelters, prairie seeding, surface restoration, and associated work.. 1.05 WORK BY OWNER A. Owner will be providing partial residential appliances as indicated in schedule B. Security Systems; documents indicate rough -in and/or wiring to be provided under base bid. Owner will provide and install cameras, card readers, and security intercom. 1.06 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner occupancy: 1. Owner will occupy existing Marina Building, boat ramp, and parking portions of the Park B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy. 1.07 PERMITS, FEES, INSPECTIONS and REGULATOR YREQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable building codes, including: 01100-1 FILED I. 2009 International Building Code as ammended 2. 2009 International Mechanical Code FEB 21 2012 3. 2009 International Fire Code ' t 4. 2008 National Electric Code as ammended ry CCl 5. 2009 International Plumbing Code as ammended Iowa Cay, Iowa 6. 2009 International Fuel Gas Code 7. State Plumbing Code 8. Americans with Disabilities Act, 2010 Guidelines B. Permits/Fees: Contractor shall obtain and pay for building and inspection reviews, permits and inspections as required for construction including: 1. City of Iowa City for building permit and inspections 1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Site Access: 1. Construction vehicles and workmen will not be restricted in their use and access to the site except to the extent that this access limits the Owners continued operations during construction. B. House -Keeping: 1. Contractor is to clean the construction site on a daily basis, and keep on-site materials secured. Loose construction materials and debris that is suseptable to being blown around will interfere with conduct of Owner's on-going flight operations at south apron. 2. Contractor is to remove construction debris from the apron immediately after it is deposited. C. Construction Operations, Staging areas for temporary use and storage of materials shall be within construction limits as indicated in the Drawings. 1. Contractor to repair any damage to existing landscape areas. D. Parking: I. The existing parking areas adjacent to the Marina building shall not be used for construction parking. E. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: I. Owner occupancy and access to existing Park areas that will be occupied. F. Provide access to and from premises as required by law and by Owner: 1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. G. Utility Outages and Shutdown: I . Limit shutdown of utility services that disrupt existing facilities to 4 hours at a time or as prearranged with Owner. Provide 1 week advance notice to Owner to coordinate shutdown of utility services. 2. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities. H. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. 1. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. J. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. 1.09 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Specifications: 1. Specifications and other Contract Documents which are a part of the Contract Documents 01100-2 are as listed in the Specifications "TABLE of CONTENTS". 2. Work shall conform to requirements of Specifications and other written instructions which may be subsequently issued by the Architect to supplement, modify or interpret. B. Plans: 1. Drawings for work in this Contract shall be listed on Title Sheet of the Drawings. C. Specifications are intended to cover all labor, materials and standards of workmanship to be employed in the work indicted on the Plans and called for in the Specifications or reasonably implied therein. The Plans and Specifications supplement one another. Any partof the work mentioned in one and not represented in the other shall be done the same as if it has been mentioned in both. 1. If the drawings and specifications are in conflict, and the Contractor did not pose the question in writing so that an interpretation could be given prior to receipt of the bids, then the Contractor is responsible for having used the most expensive/conservative of the ways represented by the point of conflict, and included in the bid. D. The Contractor shall not make alterations in the Drawings and Specifications. In the event of errors or discrepancies, the Contractor shall notify the Architect. The Architect will make the necessary corrections/interpretation. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 -+: sy r,.w Clry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 01100-3 SECTION 01200 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL FILED FEB 21 201 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 4.5 ? c4 2 A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. Io We C'ty' I Wa B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00500 - Agreement: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period. B. Document 00700 -General Conditions and Document 00800 -Supplementary Conditions: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work. C. Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions: Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner -Contractor Agreement. E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section, and provide breakdown between materials and labor. Identify separate line item for Site Mobilization, Bonds and Insurance, and General Conditions. F. Include within each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. 01200-1 Progress Payments: I . The Owner will make payment to the Contractor based upon the total of Work Completed and Suitably Stored Materials. 2. The payment due will be equal to the sum of the Completed Work and Suitably Stored Materials, less 5% retainage to be held by the Owner until Completion of the Project, less previous payments. 3. Off site stored material; payment may be requested for materials stored off-site. Contractor shall submit with Application written location where material is stored, evidence of payment for off-site stored materials, and certificate of insurance for off-site stored materials. K. Include the following with the application: I. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01300. 2. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. L. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to the Contract Documents. B. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. C. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions. D. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. E. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 10 days. 01200-2 D. Present required information on electronic media printout. E. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 -Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. FILED F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. FEB 21 2012 G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line y. ? item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. city Clerk IowaCuy, Iowa H. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. 1. Submit five copies of each Application for Payment. Progress Payments: I . The Owner will make payment to the Contractor based upon the total of Work Completed and Suitably Stored Materials. 2. The payment due will be equal to the sum of the Completed Work and Suitably Stored Materials, less 5% retainage to be held by the Owner until Completion of the Project, less previous payments. 3. Off site stored material; payment may be requested for materials stored off-site. Contractor shall submit with Application written location where material is stored, evidence of payment for off-site stored materials, and certificate of insurance for off-site stored materials. K. Include the following with the application: I. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01300. 2. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. L. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to the Contract Documents. B. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor. C. Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions. D. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change. E. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 10 days. 01200-2 F. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. G. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: Refer to Section 00 73 00 - Supplementary Conditions. H. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. I. Provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. 2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. 1. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. J. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. K. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub -schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. L. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been submitted and approved: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01700. 2. Submittals as specified in Article 9 of General Conditions AIA A201 and Supplementary General Conditions Section 00 73 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED FILED END OF SECTION FEB 21 2012 IV: S{ p City Cle k Iowa City, Iowa 01200-3 SECTION 01300 PROJECT COORDINATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Contractor's personnel. FILED B. Preconstruction meeting. FEB 2 j 2012 C. Site mobilization meeting.q PAT OrY Off D. Construction progress meetings. Iowa c;,y, Iowa E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. F. Number of copies of submittals. G. Shop Drawing/Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01325 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules. B. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. L03 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Contractor's Project Manager. B. Project Superintendent: I. The superintendent shall be at thejob site during the performance of all work, including work by subcontractors. 2. General Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval the qualifications of the superintendent, which should include 5 - 7 years experience with projects of comparable size and construction. C. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and trailers, for site and premises access, traffic, and parking facilities. D. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. E. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra -project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. F. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. G. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. H. Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator. Refer to Article 3.04 Electronic Submittals for list of, and procedures for items to be submitted iQkIiliIII C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, schedule of values, submittals schedule, and construction progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Procedures and requirements for field testing, site security and access, material deliveries and storage. 8. Scheduling. D. Architect shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one copies to Contractor, Architect, Owner, and participants. Contractor shall forward to sub -contractors and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 SITE MOBILIZATIONMEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor's Project Coordinator. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and occupancy during construction. electronically. FILED I. Requests for interpretation. 2. Requests for substitution. FEB 2 12012 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. +f: 5°l P-1 4. Test and inspection reports. city Clerk S. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. towaCiv, tows 6. Applications for payment and change order requests. 7. Progress schedules. 8. Coordination drawings. 9. Closeout submittals. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTIONMEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor's Project Coordinator. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, schedule of values, submittals schedule, and construction progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Procedures and requirements for field testing, site security and access, material deliveries and storage. 8. Scheduling. D. Architect shall record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with one copies to Contractor, Architect, Owner, and participants. Contractor shall forward to sub -contractors and those affected by decisions made. 3.02 SITE MOBILIZATIONMEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. B. Attendance Required: 1. Contractor's Project Coordinator. 2. Owner. 3. Architect. 4. Contractor's Superintendent. 5. Major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements and occupancy during construction. 3. Temporary utilities. 4. Survey and building layout. 5. Security and housekeeping procedures. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Procedures and requirements for site security and access, Owner's use, and material deliveries and storage. 8. Construction and submittal schedules. 9. Application for payment procedures. 10. Procedures and requirements for field testing and required reporting forms. 11. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 12. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 13. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. D. General Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies electronically in accordance with Article 3.04 Electronic Submittals. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum bi-monthly intervals. B. Contractor shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, and preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: I. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress and planned progress during succeeding work period. 3. Review construction progress schedule status, maintenance of schedule, and corrective measures to regain schedule 4. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 5. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 6. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 7. Review of proposed Change Modifications and Requests for Information FILED 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of progress schedule. FEB 21 2012 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. `4;fiq em 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. City Clerk 12. Maintenance of quality and work standards. Iowa city, Iowa 13. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 14. Other business relating to Work. E. General Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies electronically in accordance with Article 3.04 Electronic Submittals. 3.04 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS.- A. UBMITTALS. A. Electronic Submittals shall be transmitted to the Architect in electronic (PDF) format via a website service designed specifically for transmitting e1-ctronic submittals between construction team members. I. Website Service Provider: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products and/or service under their current licensing agreements by one of the following website 01300-3 01300-4 service providers: a. "Submittal Exchange" www.submittalexchange.com (800-714-0024). b. Pre-approved equal website service provider. 2. Website Service shall have the following capabilities: a. Provide for an unlimited number of users, including but not limited to the Owner, the Architect, the Architect's Consultants, the General Contractor, Major Sub-Contractors and Suppliers. b. Provide 4 hours of training each at the Architect and General Contractor's office as required, and ongoing technical support for website service setup and utilization. c. Provide email notification to pre-selective website service users of uploaded documents, completed document reviews, and reminders of outstanding items. FILED d. Provide capability to log and organize by tab an unlimited number of electronic submittals with no file size limitations. e. Upon completion of project, provide a complete electronic archive copy of all project FEB 21 2012 uploaded documents in a digital storage format acceptable to the Owner and Architect. `1-•.11 3. Costs: General Contractor shall obtain and pay for the website service subscription (The citymlaik iowkcq, laws cost for the service shall be included in the Contractor's Bid- contact the website service provider prior to submitting Bid to obtain pricing). a. The intent of electronic submittals is to: I) Reduce paperwork and shipping costs. 2) Improve information flow. 3) Decrease turnaround time. 4) Provide the Owner with an electronic archive of submittals at project completion. b. Contractor shall be responsible for training their employees, sub-contractors, and suppliers in the use of the website service and PDF submittals. 4. Internet Service and Equipment Requirements: a. Email address and internet service at Contractor's main office. b. Adobe Acrobat (www.adobe.com <http://www.adobe.com>), Bluebeam PDF Revu (www.bluebeam.com <http://www.bluebeam.com>) , or other similar PDF review software for applying electronic stamps, mark-ups, and comments. B. The following items shall be electronic submittals: 1. Project Team Directory. 2. Shop Drawings. 3. Product Data. 4. Informational Submittals. 5. Requests for Information (RFPs). 6. Requests for Proposal (RFPs). 7. Architect's Supplement Instructions (ASI's). 8. Instructions to Contractor (ITC's). 9. Construction Change Directives (CCD's). 10. Contract Modification (Change Order) Logs. 11. Meeting Minutes. 12. Project Correspondence. 13. Test and Inspection Reports. 14. Field Reports. 15. Construction Schedules. 16. Closeout Documents (See Section 01 78 00). C. Procedures: 1. Submittal Preparation: Contractor may use any or all of the following options: a. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide electronic (PDF) submittals to Contractor via 01300-4 uploading to the website service. b. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to General Contractor who electronically scans submittals, converts to PDF format, and uploads submittals to website service. c. Subcontractors and Suppliers provide paper submittals to Scanning Service which electronically scans submittals, converts to PDF format. Subcontractors and Suppliers uploads submittals to the website service . 2. For all submittals larger than I I" x 17", Contractor shall submit one (1) full-size paper copy to Architect for reference only (paper copy will not be returned). 3. Contractor shall create an electronic transmittal for each submittal and attach to submittal in PDF format. 4. Contractor shall review and apply electronic stamp certifying that the submittal complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents including verification of manufacturer/ product, dimensions and coordination of information with other parts of the work. 5. Contractor shall transmit each submittal to Architect using the website service. 6. Architect / Engineer review comments will be made available on the website service for downloading. 7. Distribution of reviewed submittals to subcontractors and suppliers is the responsibility of the Contractor. 8. Re -submittals, if required, shall be uploaded to the website service under the same procedures as described above. 3.05 NON -ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS: FILED A. The following items shall be hard -copy submittals: FEB 2 1 202 1. Color Samples, Color Charts, Physical Material Samples. 2. Applications for Payment. `E 54'P M Cny Clerk 3. Change Orders. Iowa_City,Iowa 3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information: 1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated. B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken. 3.07 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review 1. Submit documents electronically whenever possible. 2. An electronic copy of all final, approved shop drawing submittals shall be submitted to the Owner at Project Close -Out. Refer to 01 7800 Closeout Submittals. 3. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 11 x 17 inches: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect, one copy for the Owner, and one copy for closeout submittals to be completed by Contractor. 4. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. O1911AII.7 B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit one extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit two copies of samples required, unless greater quantity required in specification sections. All samples to be retained by Architect. I . Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.08 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with Architect's Submittal Cover form. B. Number submittals in accordance with specification section and a sequential numeric suffix in accordance with approved List of Submittals and Shop Drawing Log. C. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revised submittals shall have original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. F. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address. G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. 1. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. J. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. K. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. L. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. FILED FEB 21 2012 JP 51 vat C1Clerk 709Qaty_Ctly, IOWa END OF SECTION 01300 -6 SECTION 01310 PROGRESS AND SCHEDULES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY.• A. Prepare, submit and update as necessary a schedule of the work. FILED FEB 21 2012 x:59 PM Ciry Clerk Iowa city, Iowa B. Minimizing inconvenience, disruption and duration of disruption to residences and businesses. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. The Contractor shall submit prior to the Pre -Construction meeting a detailed schedule of the proposed work with the controlling operation identified. The schedule shall include proposed dates and durations of street closings. Work may not begin until the schedule is approved by the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall submit updated construction schedules at two week intervals throughout the project. PART2-PRODUCTS None. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MEETINGS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION: A. A Pre -Construction meeting will be held prior to beginning work. 3.02 PROGRESS OF WORK: A. The specified start date is April 26, 2012. Liquidated damages of $500 per day will be charged on working days beyond May 31, 2013. B. No work shall be done between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. without the approval of the Engineer, with the exception of saw cutting freshly poured concrete. C. Work will proceed in a well organized and continuous manner to minimize the disruption to the general public (both pedestrian and vehicular) and the local businesses and residents. Access to businesses and residences shall be maintained at all times. D. Contractor shall submit a construction phasing plan for Owner review prior to proceeding with work. E. The Contractor will become an active partner with the City in communicating with and 01310-1 providing information to concerned residents and businesses. F. Work is to be staged to minimize the length of time parking spaces and parking revenue are lost. 3.03 COORDINATION WITH UTILITY OWNERS. A. The Contractor shall work closely with the utility companies for proposed improvements and schedules. 3.04 PUBLIC STREET: A. Notify the Engineer four days in advance of any work activities associated with McCollister Blvd. and Gilbert Street Contractor shall provide traffic control as required for work within the right-of-way. McCollister Blvd. and Gilbert Street shall remain open at all times. 11/00 sh.rcdkn,i." spccs-iiW❑IO.. FILED FEB 21 2012 51 Prof City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 01310-2 SECTION 01325 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preliminary schedule. FILED B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type. FEB 2 j 2012 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS P Y. -j! ty Clerk A. Section 01100 -Summary: Work sequence and occupancy. Iowa City, Iowa B. Section 0120 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. C. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; electronic submittals 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. E. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by Architect. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Scheduler: Contractor's personnel or specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling with two years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity comparable to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering a detailed graphic printout within 48 hours of request. 1.05 SCHED ULE FORMA T A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. B. Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches or I 1 x 17 inches PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARYSCHEDULE A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 3.02 CONTENT A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of 01325- 1 each element of construction. B. Identify each item by specification section number. C. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month. D. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. E. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used. 3.03 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first workday of each week. 3.04 REVIEWAND EVALUATION OFSCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days. 3.05 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes. 3.06 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. To be posted electronically. Refer to Section 013000 for procedures for Electronic Submittals B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in schedules. FILED FEB 21 2012 •}: 5 F PM C' Cleric Iowa Ci , Iowa END OF SECTION 01325-2 SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. FII -ED B. Quality assurance submittals. FEH 2 12012 64-t 'f; . H C. Control of installation. bw,'�erra D. Tolerances. E. Testing and inspection services. F. Manufacturers' field services. G. Owner Required Report Forms 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Document 00700 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities. B. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements: Electronic submittal procedures. C. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1021 -Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008. B. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2008. C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2008. D. ASTM D 3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2008. E. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2008. F. ASTM E543 - Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2008a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. As requested by Architect, submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 01400-1 B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. C. FILED FEB 21 2012 +f' 5q 4M Ci [y Clerk �[�f, tOYYa Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly post electronic copies of report on website. Refer to Section 01 3000 for procedures for electronic submittals. I . Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f Location in the Project. g. Type of testlinspection. h. Date of testlinspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. 1QCOL11N E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTIONAGENCIES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform special inspections testing as outlined on Drawing S 101.0, and as listed in specifications, including: I. Soils; Footing Bearing Capacity, and fill compaction testing. 2. Concrete testing for footings, walls, paving, and slabs -on -grade. 3. Masonry; Grout strength, and reinforcement placement. 4. Structural Steel; deck welding, deck sidelap fasteners, and bolting 5. Glue -Laminated Structural Units; Bolting connections B. Employment of agency in noway relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. All testing and inspections other than Special Inspections required by Code or governing authorities, shall be arranged and paid for by the Contractor. FILED PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED FEB 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 2012 City Cier 3.01 CONTROL OFINSTALLATION Iowa i9, Iowa A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 01400-3 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. FILED 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. FEB 21 2012 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of 'f.- 54 rM, Work or products. In a- yt;r� 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. Cu 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. E. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. F. Re -testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. 01400-4 B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. C. Failure of the Architect to identify and/or reject Work not conforming to specified requirements shall not be construed as implying acceptance. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 y' -Si PM Ciry Clerk IOC Lux IOWA 01400-5 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. FILED B. Security requirements. FEB 21 C. Waste removal facilities and services. 2012 4: S4 P D. Temporary Field offices. City Clerk �>saCity, E. Temporary Fuel Spill Containment 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01510 -Temporary Utilities. 1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES- See Section 01510 1.04 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. C. Provide fencing/barriers at open trenches and/or edges as required by OSHA. 1.05 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.06 SECURITY A. Contractor shall be responsible to provide security and facilities to protect Work, stored materials, tools, and access to existing facilities through construction area from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.07 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide and maintain portable, general purpose fire extinguishers as required by governing authorities. 1.08 TEMPORARYSILTATION CONTROL A. General Contractor and appropriate Sub -contractors shall provide all necessary dams and 01500-1 END OF SECTION 01500-2 siltation fences as required to prevent soil erosion from moving from construction site to adjacent properties, storm sewers, sanitary sewers, and/or streams, and as required to stabilize banks/grade during construction. B. Refer to Pollution Prevention Plan in Contract Documents for additional requirements 1.09 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly. FILED C. If materials to be recycled or re -used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure FEB 21 2012 unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. q.S?1 PM D. Clerk Open free -fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containersCay Iowa city, Iowa with lids. 1.10 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. C. Locate office trailers within construction limits as indicated on plans and as not to interfere with Owner's use of the site. D. Cell phones may be utilized. E. Provide and maintain master set of Contract Documents, Change Orders, Field Orders, Supplementary Drawings, and RFPs. 1.11 TEMPORARY FUEL SPILL CONTAINMENT A. Provide earthen berm or secondary containment around any on-site fuel storage. B. General Contractor shall establish and post plan for containment of any fuel spills on site. 1.12 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION 01500-2 SECTION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, water, and phone. B. Temporary Sanitation Facilities FILED 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: FEB 2 P�1Z 1.03 TEMPORARYELECTRICITY City Clerk I Iowa city, towg A. Cost: By Contractor. B. Connect to Owner's existing power service, or provide temporary service from new service to be installed. 1. Do not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. 2. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. Each contractor/sub-contractor shall provide flexible power cords as required for their use. D. Provide main service disconnect and over -current protection at convenient location and meter. E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. 1.04 TEMPORARYLIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft . B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. D. Permanent building lighting maybe utilized during construction only after main dust and debris operations have been completed.. I. If new lighting system has been used for construction lighting, just prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps. LOS TEMPORARY HEATING A. Cost of Energy: By Contractor. B. Provide vented, self-contained, LP, natural gas, or fuel oil heaters with individual thermostatic control as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 01510-1 D. New natural gas service may be utilized for temporary heating as applicable. Contractor shall provide meter to monitor usage and shall reimburse owner for cost of gas utilized. E. New heating plant/equipment may be used for heating, but only after all construction operations/sequences creating major sources of air-borne dust and debris are completed. 1. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. FILED 2. Equipment and materials shall be in like new condition at substantial completion. 3. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or FEB 21 2012 consumed parts. y. Cstk 4. Provide additional filters as required to prevent dust and/or construction debris from «y. entering ductwork. Clean ductwork as required at substantial completion. IoWa�y, IQ" 5. Manufacturer's warranties shall begin at substantial completion, not when equipment was put into service. Contractor shall coordinate extension of manufacturer's warranty as required. 1.06 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Provide temporary fans as maybe required to maintain conditions for construction operations as required by manufacturer and/or by good construction practices.. 1.07 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Cost of Water Used: By Contractor. B. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization. New service may be utilized. Contractor shall provide temporary meter to monitor usage. 1.08 TEMPORARYPHONE SERVICE A. Owner will not provide temporary phone line and/or service. B. Contractor and Sub-Contractors shall provide their own individual respective cell phones/services. 1.09 TEMPORARYSANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain sufficient portable sanitary facilities for all workmen on site as required by regulatory agencies. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. Use of existing facilities is not permitted. C. New permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations. D. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements indicated in Division 15 Mechanical, and Division 16 Electrical 3.02 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment prior to substantial completion. I7FiGIIWA B. Clean and repair any damage caused by temporary installations. C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to their specified condition. END OF SECTION FILED FEH 21 2012 y: s gj Per City Clerk g low Ci4SIMM 01510-3 SECTION 01570 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY., A. Furnish, install and maintain traffic control and construction facilities required for the work. Remove when work is completed. FILED 1.02 REFERENCES. FEB 21 2012 '1: ST Pet A. IDOT Standard Specifications. Ciry Clerk ; Iowa City, Iowa B. U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways," 1988 Edition, as revised. C. Traffic Control Notes on project plans. L03 SUBMITTALS. A. Submit a traffic control plan for all activities requiring traffic control not specifically addressed by the project plans. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Traffic control devices may be new or used, but must meet the requirements of the IDOT Standard Specifications. B. All construction fence shall be new and securely fastened to approved posts and installed as directed by the Engineer. 2.02 EQUIPMENT.• A. Portable generators may not be used to power traffic control devices within 300 feet of residential dwellings, including apartments, between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES. A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 11. General Requirements and Covenants. Section 1107.09. Barricades and Warning Signs. 01570-1 Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. Section 2528. Traffic Control. 3.02 NO PARKING SIGNS: A. The City will furnish "NO PARKING" signs to facilitate removal of parked vehicles ahead of scheduled work. The Contractor is responsible for installation and maintenance of the signs 48 hours in advance of when the vehicles must be removed. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF FACILITIES. A. The Contractor shall monitor the condition of traffic control and construction facilities at all times, including non -work hours. Repair, replace and maintain as necessary. B. Temporary gravel surfaces shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. 3.04 EXCAVATIONS. A. All excavations shall be fenced. 3.05 ADDITIONAL FACILITIES. A. All signs, barricades and fences within and beyond the project area deemed appropriate by the Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide, install, and maintain. 11/00 shamadkngin"Mpecs-i iW I570.dw FILED FEB 21 2012 �c�A mora 01570-2 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. General product requirements. FEB 212012 2012 B. Re -use of existing products. g? p C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. City CCerk 5 Iowa _Pay, low D. Product option requirements. E. Substitution limitations and procedures. F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01400 -Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NEWPRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics: 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 2. Containing any asbestos 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. B. Deliver and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTIONPROCEDURES A. Substitution Submittal Procedure: I . Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. FILED 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. FEB 21 2012 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. q: 5q P P l- citty�Clerk B. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during 1W4. the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. C. After award of the contract, single product substitutions may be approved. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. E. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. F. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent. 3.02 TRANSPORTATIONAND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. 01600-2 F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 1. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 $1.11.5f Pry City,Clerk Iowa U. IM 01600-3 SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination B. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. C. Pre -installation meetings. FILED D. Cutting and patching. E. Surveying for laying out the work. FEB 21 2012 F. Cleaning and protection. 44 5f fm c;tyClerk to ciry. ion G. Starting of systems and equipment. H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. 1. Substantial Completion and Final Inspection. J. General requirements for maintenance service. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01100 -Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence. B. Section 01300- Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. C. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. D. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures. E. Section 01510 -Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities. F. Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: I . Requires any utilities to be shut-off. 2. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 3. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 4. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 5. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 01700-1 C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Iowa and acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Iowa. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air -borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property. I . Provide dust -proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors. FILED 2. Provide dust -proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be occupied FEB 21 2012 by Owner. y: 59 P►1 E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage C. cter from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. Iowa City, Iowa 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. F. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations. 1.07 COORDINATION A. See Section 01 100 Summary for occupancy -related requirements. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. 01700-2 F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. Division of the Work: 1. Document Division: a. Specifications are divided for convenience into title sections as set forth in the TABLE OF CONTENTS and shall not be considered an accurate segregation of the several units of labor and materials. b. No responsibility, either direct or implied, is assumed by the Architect for omissions or duplications by the error in arrangement of the subject matter. c. The Contractor will be held responsible for the complete work whether or not the parts are described in one or more Sections. 2. Item(s) Description a. Mention in the Specifications and/or indication on the Drawings of articles, materials, operations or methods, requires that the Contractor furnish each item so mentioned or indicated. b. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, incidentals and supervision necessary to complete the work in the true meaning and intent of these Specifications. c. All such articles, materials, operations methods, quality, qualifications or conditions shall be binding even though written descriptions may not be expressed in complete sentences. d. Where devices or items or parts thereof are referred to in the singular, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many devices, items or parts as are required to properly complete the work. FILED PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED. FEB 21 2012 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS Y: 54 Q# C' cle A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and w�R*W Iowa patching and extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over -ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct 01700-3 locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION FILED FEB 21 2012 ,a: 91 ?rA city Clerk Iowa Gty,10" 3.03 A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect seven days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. The Contractor shall be responsible to provide all construction staking for the project, including exterior improvements and utilities. B. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. C. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. D. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. E. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. F. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. G. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. H. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. 1. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. J. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. K. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 01700-4 I. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. L. Periodically verify layouts by same means. M. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to: I . Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. FILED 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. FEB 2 1 1 2��2 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. H, Sq S 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. Cary Clerk I 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. Iowa City, Iowa 8. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming work. C. Execute cutting and patching to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non -conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work. D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to specified condition. E. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07950, to full thickness of the 01700-5 penetrated element. J. Patching: 1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. FILED 2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other FEB 21 2012 imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair 4; SR fM4 substrate prior to repairing finish. city C= mvra_04,10rs K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. L. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. M. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible. H. Maintenance of Existing Property: 1. Utilities: Contractor shall verify location of all utilities on site with utilities companies. Send notices, make necessary arrangements and perform other services required in care and no X1I1M. maintenance of existing utilities. Assume responsibility for which Owner maybe liable. Provide enclosing or boxing-in, removal or relocations as necessary for protection of existing utilities equipment. Upon completion of work involved in execution of the Contract, remove all enclosures, fill in all openings and concrete, grout watertight and leave in finished condition. 2. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all water, gas, irrigation lines, lighting, and telephone conduits and wires, sewer lines, connections in place and other surface or subsurface structure and lines and landscaping except as specifically indicated to be removed shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall not be disturbed, disconnected or damaged by him during progress of work. 3. Notify the Architect immediately upon discovery of any utility lines not shown on plans which interfere with construction. 4. Should the Contractor in performance of work disturb, disconnect or damage any of the above, all expenses arising from disturbance or in replacing or repair shall be bome by the Contractor. FILED 3.09 SYSTEMSTARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. FEB 2 1 2012 'f.'S9 Pr B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item. Iowa b city, tyo y towa C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 3.10 DEMONSTRA TION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 01820 -Demonstration and Training. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 15990 and 01400. 3.12 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning after Substantial Completion but before making final application for payment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish 01700-7 transparent and glossy surfaces. D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the FILED surface and material being cleaned. FEB 21 2012 E. Replace filters of operating equipment. r Sq ?At F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. city Clerk lcptaC41,101112- G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury. 3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner -occupied areas. F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. G. .Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. H. Location of Underground Utilities 1. After all utilities have been installed, but prior to Substantial Completion, Contractor shall demonstrate, in the presence of the Owner, the continuity of all tracer wires from end to end at all underground utilities. Tracer wires which fail a continuity test shall be repaired or replaced and re -tested until a successful continuity test is achieved. Provide the Owner 48 hours notice of this activity. 3.14 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION and FINAL INSPECTION.- A. NSPECTION. A. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion by submitting written certification stating: I. Contract Documents have been reviewed and work is completed in compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Contractor's list of any items which have not been completed. 3. Operation and Maintenance manuals have been completed in accordance with Section 01 78 00 and are available for use by Architect during inspection. 4. Initial Cleaning has been completed. D. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect/Engineer will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. 01700-8 E. Should it be determined that the work is not substantially complete: 1. Architect will promptly notify the General Contractor in writing, giving general masons for rejecting work. 2. The General Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the Architect. F. Should it be determined that the work appears substantially complete, the Architect will: I . Inspect work for compliance with contract documents. 2. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA form G704, accompanied by Architect's list of items to be completed or corrected. 3. The General Contractor shall sign and submit the Certificate to Owner for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. G. When Contractor has completed the indicated items, he shall notify Architect and request final inspection. H. Architect will re -inspect work. I . If the Architect finds the work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, the Architect shall request the Contractor to make close-out submittals. 2. If the Architect finds the work still remains uncompleted, the Architect will promptly notify the General Contractor in writing, giving reasons for rejecting any re -inspected work. a. Cost for Architects time for any re -inspections beyond this time to re -review non -conforming work shall be borne by General Contractor at Architects standard hourly rate. 3.I5 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for_ year from date of Substantial Completion. D. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required. E. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. F. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 6�1.SR4pM roxC"iRY ry Im 01700-9 SECTION 01780 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Project Record Documents. FEB B. Operation and Maintenance Data. *SSl7 pM 2��2 Clerk C. Warranties and bonds. Y" AIR D. Energy Rebate Forms 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 00700 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment bonds, warranty, and correction of work. B. Section 01300- Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, samples, and electronic submittals. C. Section 01700- Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before startof Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Energy Rebate Forms 1. Submit to Utilities, with copy to Architect and Owner. D. Shop Drawing File: I. An electronic copy of all final, approved shop drawing submittals shall be submitted to the Owner at Project Close -Out.. 2. Refer to Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. E. Warranties and Bonds: 1. Submit Warranties and Bonds prior to Final Acceptance. 2. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the 01780- 1 FILE 1-11 beginning of the warranty period. FEB 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED AP ,61 PM 0 City Clerk PART 3 EXECUTION is ._ , Iowa 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site in the field office one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Architectural Supplemental Information (ASI's) 5. Requests for Information and Responses (RFI's) 6. Request for Changes (RFC's) 7. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 8. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 9. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. B. All recorded changes shall be "clouded" and identified. Make reference to the document that originated the change. C. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. D. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. E. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. Provide status update as agenda item at regular progress meetings. Provide record documents for review during progress meetings when requested. F. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number of actual products installed. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized and approved. 3. Changes made by Addenda. 4. Changes made by the following: a. Change Orders. b. Architectural Supplemental Information (ASI's) c. Requests for Information and Responses (RFI's) d. Request for Changes (RFC's) e. Changes documented by Meeting Notes or Field Reports and agreed to during Progress Meetings or Site Observations G. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction on one "Record" set of drawings and Shop Drawings, including the following: 1. Changes made by Addenda 2. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 3. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 4. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 5. Actual Equipment locations. 6. Revisions to routing of piping and conduit. 7. Revisions to electrical circuitry. 01780-2 8. Record information of any work that is described schematically in the Contract Documents 9. Field changes of dimensions and details FILED 10. Details not on original Contract Documents 11. Changes made by the following: FEy 2 a. Change Orders 't< S9 P �2 b. Architectural Supplemental Information (ASI) City Clerk c. Responses to Requests for Information (RFI) Iowa Gry, town d. Request for Changes(RFC) e. Changes documented by Meeting Notes or Field Reports discussed and agreed to during Progress Meetings or Site Observations. H. Submit electronic (color scanned) copy of record documents at Project Closeout in accordance with Section 01 3000 Administrative Procedures 3.02 ENERCYREBATE FORMS A. In addition to two (2) hard copies, submit electronic copy of final, approved Operation and Maintenance Data at Project Closeout in accordance with Section 01 30000 Administrative Requirements. B. Obtain rebate forms from appropriate Utilities/Governing Agencies as required. 3.03 OPERA TIONAND MAINTENANCE DATA A. In addition to two (2) hard copies, submit electronic copy of final, approved Operation and Maintenance Data at Project Closeout in accordance with Section 01 30000 Administrative Requirements. B. General Contents for Data Sections 1. Provide Table of Contents for each Manual indicating each data item, with tabbed sheet at each section. 2. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. 3. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. 4. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. 5. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES 1. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: a. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. b. Information for re -ordering custom manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. D. Moisture protection and weather -exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. 1111r1ills] 3.04 OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. FILED 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. FEB 21 2012 B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and ,Y:5 cteerk communications; typed. cit' C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. L. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. M. Include test and balancing reports. N. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 OPERA TIONAND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. In addition to two (2) hard copies, submit electronic copy of final, approved Operation and Maintenance Data at Project Closeout in accordance with Section 01 30000 Administrative Requirements. B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part l: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. Provide separate binders for Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of 01780-4 FILED Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: FEB a. Significant design criteria. 1 2012 b. List of equipment. "1' t c. Parts list for each component. �waCgw,Iowa d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Occupancy Permits and Regulatory Agency Inspection Certificates. e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. F. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Effective dates of warranties shall be the Date of Substantial Completion (not the date of installation) and must be identified on the warranty or by signed letter modifying the warranty. C. Warranty shall include: 1. Product or work item, referenced to specification section. 2. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 3. Duration of warranty, bond, or service maintenance contract. 4. Contact for claim/failure 5. Proper procedures in case of failure 6. Instances which may affect validity of warranty or bond. D. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. E. Co -execute submittals when required. F. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. Submit two original signed copies of each to Architect with Closeout Submittals. G. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents. 3.07 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit an electronic copy of all final, approved shop drawing submittals at Project Closeout in accordance with Section 01 3000 Administrative Requirements. 3.08 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIRED CLOSEOUTDOCUMENTS. 01780 - 5 A. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims (AIA G706). B. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA G706A). C. Final Punch List with all Items marked "COMPLETED". D. Keys, Keying Schedule, and Biting List in accordance with Section 08 71 00. FILED FEB 22012 y;S1 FNL City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 01780-6 SECTION 01820 FILED DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING FEP� 1T PART 1 GENERAL Cl1 Ciq;e1 1.01 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for: 1. All software -operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Electrical systems and equipment. 4. Food Service Equipment 5. Items specified in individual product Sections. C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for: 1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather -exposed or moisture protection products. 2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes. 3. Fixtures and fittings. 4. Items specified in individual product Sections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals. B. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill -level of attendees. 1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session: a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Applicable sections of O&M manuals shall be available during training. 1. Include copies of all hand-outs, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in the O&M manuals. D. Training Reports: 01820- 1 I . Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. FILED 2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to FEB 21 M2012 supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that 1. 5f Q61 could not be answered in original training session. City cIr 10wa-c-hy'19!% E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for Owner's subsequent use. I. Format: DVD Disc. 2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems. I. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION- GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. D. Non -Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures. 3.02 TRAINING -GENERAL A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor. C. Coordinate Training Sessions with availability of Owner's Personnel. 1. Training sessions for several pieces of equipment may be combined as applicable and Owner's personnel is the same. D. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals. E. Product- and System -Specific Training: I. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies. 01820-2 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut -down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance. 4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures. F. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days. FILED FEB 21 2012 H: 5 Ci Clerk 9 Iowa Crq, lgrra END OF SECTION 01820-3 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITIONS, REMOVALS AND ABANDONMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY. - A. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to remove existing gravel and paved surfaces as indicated and specified. B. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to remove existing structures, as indicated and specified. FILED 1.02 REFERENCES: FEBl i 2012 A. IDOT Standard Specifications. cc bw4 GttY, Iowa 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Disposal sites shall comply with all applicable Iowa Department of Natural Resources and United States Environmental Protection Agency regulations. B. Comply with all state and local ordinances pertaining to hauling and disposal of rubbish, broken concrete, asphalt, stone, bricks, castings, and other waste or debris resulting from work on the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Locations of disposal sites. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Granular backfill material shall consist of Class A Crushed Stone, IDOT Standard Specification Section 4120.04 and Section 4109, Gradation No. 11. B. Explosives shall not be used for demolition. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 24. Structures. Section 2401. Removal of Existing Structures. 02050-1 Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. FILED Section 2510. Removal of Old Pavement. FEB 21 2012 Section 2511.. Removal and Construction of Portland Cement Concrete Side- 4..51 1 WL walks. Section 2515. Removal and Construction of Paved Driveways. low" lc�_M Section 2516. Removal and Construction of Retaining Walls and Steps. 3.02 INSPECTION. A. Limits of demolition shall be per 3:04 of this section. The Engineer reserves the right to revise demolition limits if required by the nature of construction. 3.03 PROCEDURES. A. Utilities 1. Notify all corporations, companies, individuals and state or local authorities owning pipelines, water lines, gas mains, buried and overhead electric facilities, telephone, cable television, fiber optic, and other public or private utilities shown on the drawings or otherwise known or discovered to be in the project area. 2. When active utilities are encountered, promptly take necessary measures to support and protect said utilities and maintain them in service. 3. If active utilities are damaged or interrupted as a result of work on the project, take appropriate measures to restore service immediately. Restoration of utility services under these circumstances shall be at the Contractor's expense. 4. Active utilities shown on the drawings to be relocated, or which require relocation due to unforeseen circumstances or conditions, shall be relocated in accordance with instructions from the Engineer. Generally, the respective utility owners shall be responsible to perform relocation work for their facilities. The Contractor shall cooperate with these efforts in every reasonable way and shall not be entitled to additional compensation for delays resulting from such relocations. B. Site Protection Measures Barricade and fence open excavations or depressions resulting from work during non -working hours and when not working in immediate area. Provide suitable warning devices adjacent to excavations and work areas. 2. Warning devices shall be kept operational during all non -working and non-active periods. C. Site Access Measures 1. Pedestrian access to homes and businesses shall be maintained at'all times. Temporary gravel surfaces shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. 02050-2 2. Contractor shall perform demolition and removal operations so as to maintain vehicular access to adjacent properties and businesses to the maximum extent possible. D. Disposals No material or debris shall be buried within the project work area. All unsuitable material resulting from demolitions and removals shall be hauled to and disposed of at a Contractor -furnished site approved by the Engineer or to the landfill. The Contractor shall pay the current tipping fee at the landfill. 3.04 DEMOLITIONAND REMOVALS. A. Site Removals Removal shall be to the limits noted on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. 2. Removals shall include gravel, rocks, boulders, brick, P.C. Concrete, and A.C. Concrete pavements, driveways, and sidewalks. 3. Sawcuts shall be approved by the Engineer. 4. Removal operations shall conform to construction phasing as directed by the Engineer. 11/00 sharedkngiaedrl cs-i M2050.dw 02050-3 FILED FEB 21 2012 y;67 r1 City Clvk Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY.• A. Furnish labor, material, tools and equipment to prepare site as indicated and specified. 1.02 REFERENCES. A. MOT Standard Specifications. FILED PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1-(_a Z' 71112 1.51 P,�t None.City Clerk 1,0W3 city, lawa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES.- A. ECHNIQUES. A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the MOT Standard Specifications: Division 21. Earthwork, Subgrades and Subbases. Section 2101. Clearing and Grubbing. Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. Section 2519. Fence Construction. 3.02 EXISTING TREES, SHRUBSAND VEGETATION. A. All trees, shrubs and vegetation shall remain and be protected from damage unless specifically noted as 'REMOVE" or "CLEAR AND GRUB" on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. B. No construction materials and/or equipment are to be stored, piled, or parked within the trees' drip line. C. Contractor is responsible for damage outside the limits of construction, and for trees, shrubs and vegetation not designated for removal. The Contractor's liability for tree and shrub damage will be based on the appraised value, not replacement value, and shall include the cost of appraisal by a qualified arborist. 02100-1 3.03 EXISTING STRUCTURESAND PROPERTY: A. Remove existing signs and posts within the construction area as directed by the Engineer. All permanent traffic signs will be removed, stored, and replaced by the City of Iowa City. Contractor shall provide 48 hour minimum advance notice for sign removal and for sign replacement. Permanent signs will be replaced prior to concrete pours. B. Move mailboxes to a location approved by the Engineer prior to closing road. Salvage and store any unique supports for mailboxes. Restore mailboxes and their supports to their prior location and condition when road is reopened. 3.04 EXISTING FENCING: A. Only fencing designated by the Engineer shall be removed. B. Sections of fence removed for construction shall be replaced per the applicable bid item. If not addressed, replace with new materials. 3.05 EXISTING UTILITIES: A. Contact appropriate utility representative to verify the presence and location of buried utilities in the construction area. 3.06 EROSION CONTROL: A. Comply with Iowa City Code and Section 02270, Slope Protection and Erosion Control. 11/00 s1%aredkngmcc0upecs-iM2IOO.dac FILED FEB 21 2012 y. 55 AY cur W�lowa 02100-2 SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS FILED FEB 21 2012 �•S�.PM �h Clerk IOC Ct4'. ?owa A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, plants, and grass to remain. 2. Removal and disposal of all woody and other herbaceous vegetation, rubbish, unsuitable soils, and other objectionable materials. 3. Removing existing stumps, trees, shrubs, plants and grass. 4. Clearing and grubbing obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation including grinding stumps and removing roots and debris. 5. Preparation of the site. B. Related Sections: Section 31 23 00: Excavation and Fill 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Construction sequencing. 1.04 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS A. Conflict Avoidance: Expose possible conflicts in advance of construction, such as utility lines and drainage structures. Verify elevations and locations of each and verify clearance for proposed construction. 2. Notify Owner of conflicts discovered or changes needed to accommodate unknown or changed conditions. 1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Stop Work: Stop work and notify Owner immediately if contaminated soils, historical artifacts, or other environmental or historic items are encountered. B. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 02110-1 C. Conform to Local, State, and Federal requirements. D. Burning is not permitted. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Except for those items which are to be preserved as indicated in the contract documents or as designated by the Owner, all woody and other herbaceous vegetation, fences, trees, brush , stumps, roots, rubbish, etc. shall be removed from the project area. Work shall be classified as follows: A. Clearing: Clearing shall consist of cutting, removal and disposal of trees greater than 6 inches (I52.4mm) in diameter. B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of removal and disposal of the following: All stumps, including roots, all trees, and all down timber 6 inches (I52.4mm) or 4. Construction fence shall be removed from the project upon project completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Notification: Notify Owner prior to start of clearing and grubbing activities. B. Removal: Remove the following items: Trees, stumps, including roots. 2. Logs and downed timber. 3. Hedges, bushes, and shrubs, including roots. 4. Vegetation and rubbish. 5. Other objectionable materials. 02110-2 less in diameter. FILED 2. Brush removal shall consist of pulling or grubbing of trees and shrubs 6 inches FEB 2��W (I52.4mm) or less in diameter, including roots, which are not classified as hedge. cq�yCmar 3. Vegetation and rubbish removal shall consist of removal of all vegetation and all !PWROV.PW—a rubbish encountered. 4. Construction fence shall be removed from the project upon project completion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Notification: Notify Owner prior to start of clearing and grubbing activities. B. Removal: Remove the following items: Trees, stumps, including roots. 2. Logs and downed timber. 3. Hedges, bushes, and shrubs, including roots. 4. Vegetation and rubbish. 5. Other objectionable materials. 02110-2 C. Disposal: Material from clearing and grubbing may be removed in accordance with Iowa Administrative Code 567-23.2 and must meet local ordinances. Material from clearing and grubbing may be processed by such means as chipping of logs, down timber, or brush, for mulching material, or salvaging of logs and down timber for firewood. Other vegetation including turf grass may be disked into the existing ground surface if approved by the Owner. Materials from clearing and grubbing, other than fence, that is not handled on the project shall be hauled to a "yard waste" landfill. Fence shall be removed from the project and shall be deposited in an approved off-site location. FILED FEB 21 2012 Iy:SCF em city Clerk Iowa_Gry, Iowa 02110-3 SECTION 02220 EARTH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL AND GRADING PART1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY.• FILED FEB 21 2012 4.59 F,s1 �Ca3' C;erl A. Excavating, placing, stabilizing and compacting earth, including trench and rock excavation, addition of borrow and backfill, disposal of excavated material, and topsoil, strip, salvage and spread. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. IDOT Standard Specifications. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Whenever a percentage of compaction is indicated or specified, use percent of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698-91, unless noted otherwise. B. Borrow sites and materials shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Granular backfill material shall consist of Class A Crushed Stone, MOT Standard Specification Section 4120.04 and Section 4109, Gradation No. 11. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES. A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 21. Earthwork, Subgrades and Subbases. All sections Division 24. Structures. Section 2402. Excavation for Structures. 3.02 TOPSOIL: A. Strip and stockpile topsoil from lawn, grass, and crop areas for surface restoration and landscaping work. Strip topsoil to a uniform depth to provide sufficient quantity of material for placement of a minimum of 6 inches of topsoil for surface restoration and 02220-1 landscaping. Protect topsoil from mixture with other materials such as aggregate and from erosion. Removal of topsoil from the site is not permitted. 3.03 DRAINAGE AND DEWA TERING: A. Provide and maintain ample means and devices (including spare units kept ready for FILED immediate use in case of breakdowns) to intercept and/or remove promptly and dispose properly of all water entering trenches and other excavations. Keep such excavations dry FEB 21 2012 until the structures, pipes, and appurtenances to be built therein have been completed to ', -! 54 eK such extent that they will not he floated or otherwise damaged. C1q Clea Iowa Circ, Iowa B. Dispose of all pumped or drained water without undue interference to other work, or causing damage to pavements, other surfaces, or property. Provide suitable temporary pipes, flumes, or channels for water that may flow along or across the work site. C. Take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to the work by rain or by water entering the site, whether water entry be overland or by groundwater. 3.04 TRENCH EXCA VA TION: A. General Excavate trench by machinery to, or just below, designated subgrade when pipe is to be laid in granular bedding or concrete cradle, provided that material remaining at bottom of trench is only slightly disturbed. 2. Do not excavate lower part of trenches by machinery to subgrade when pipe is to be laid directly on bottom of trench. Remove last of material to be excavated by use of hand tools, just before placing pipe. Hand shape bell holes and form a flat or shaped bottom, true to grade, so that pipe will have a uniform and continuous bearing. Support on firm and undisturbed material between joints, except for limited areas where use of pipe slings have disturbed bottom. B. Protection Barricade and fence open excavations or depressions resulting from work during non -working hours and when not working in immediate area. C. Trench Width Make pipe trenches as narrow as practicable and safe. Make every effort to keep sides of trenches firm and undisturbed until backfilling has been completed and consolidated. 2. Excavate trenches with vertical sides between elevation of center of pipe and elevation 1 foot above top of pipe. 3. Refer to plans for allowable trench widths within the pipe envelope for various types, sizes and classes of pipe. D. Trench Excavation in Fill 02220-2 Place fill material to final grade or to a minimum height of 6 feet above top of pipe when pipe is to be laid in embankment or other recently filled areas. Take particular care to ensure maximum consolidation of material under pipe location. Excavate pipe trench as though in undisturbed material. E. Excavation Near Existing Structures Discontinue digging by machinery when excavation approaches pipes, conduits, or other underground structures. Continue excavation by use of hand tools. 2. Excavate exploratory pits when location of pipe or other undepifi JnFocture is necessary for doing work properly. FEB 21 2012 Disposal of Unsuitable Soil Lf: 54 0-M City Clerk Iowa , 10 1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and Iowa Department oi?Natural Resources (DNR) if soil contamination is found or suspected during excavation. 2. Soil disposal and remediation method shall be an option outlined in the IDOT Construction Manual Section 10.22, and approved by the Iowa DNR and City. The Contractor is not to proceed with soil removal and remediation measures until instructed by the Engineer. 3. Disposal site to be provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer and Iowa DNR. 4. Contractor is responsible for completing and filing all necessary Federal, State and local government agency forms and applications. G. Care of Vegetation and Property Use excavating machinery and cranes of suitable type and operate with care to prevent injury to trees, particularly to overhanging branches and limbs and underground root systems. 2. All branch, limb, and root cuttings shall be avoided. When required, they shall be performed smoothly and neatly without splitting or crushing. Trim injured portions by use of a chainsaw or loppers for branches, or an ax when working with roots. Do not leave frayed, crushed, or torn edges on any roots V or larger in diameter or on any branches. Frayed edges shall be trimmed with a utility knife. Do not use tree paint or wound dressing. If conflicts with large roots and branches are anticipated, notify the Engineer. 3. No construction materials and/or equipment are to be stored, piled, or parked within the trees' drip line. 4. Excavators and loaders used on brick surfaces shall be limited to those with rubberized tracks or rubber tires. Do not use or operate tractors, bulldozers, or other equipment on paved surfaces when treads or wheels can cut or damage such surfaces. 02220-3 6. Restore all surfaces which have been damaged by the Contractor's operations to a condition at least equal to that in which they were found before work commenced. Use suitable materials and methods for restoration. Aerate all grassed and planter areas compacted by construction activities. 8. Utility lines, including drainage tiles, encountered shall be restored in one of the following ways: FILED a. Repair or otherwise reconnect the utility across trench after trench has been backfilled, provided adequate drainage gradient is maintained, if FEB 21 2012 applicable. qcx� fK iow1ac;uy0a b. Connect drainage tiles to nearest storm sewer. The Contractor shall document the location and elevation of any utility lines encountered. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer whenever a utility is encountered and submit the proposed method of restoring the utility for review and approval. All utility repairs shall be made prior to backfilling the trench. H. Water Services 1. Permanent copper water service lines which are damaged (cut, nicked, bent, crimped, crushed, etc.) shall be replaced from the water main to the curb box with new copper service pipe, without any joints. The cost for this work shall be at the Contractor's expense. 2. In any excavation where existing lead or galvanized iron water services are in the excavation or disturbed area, the Contractor shall replace the existing lead or galvanized piping with new 1 -inch or larger copper water service pipe from the water main to the curb box. The Contractor will be paid per the applicable bid item. If there is no bid item, the unit price for the replacement of the water service shall be negotiated prior to commencement of the work. 3. When water service is disrupted, the Contractor shall make a reasonable attempt to restore the service within two hours. 4. Water service pipe shall be type k soft copper. 3.05 ROCKEXCAVATION. A. Rock excavation will be considered Class 12 Excavation as defined in MOT Standard Specification Section 2102.02. B. Explosives shall not be used for rock excavation. 02220-4 3.06 BACKFILLING: A. General 0 FILED Do not place frozen materials in backfill or place backfill upon frozen material. Remove previously frozen material or treat as required before new backfill is placed. Backfilling Excavations FEB 2 j 2012 v. sp 10M Ciry Clerk 4wa Ciry, Iowa Begin backfilling as soon as practicable and proceed until complete. Material and Compaction a. Paved Areas: Under and within 5 feet of paved surfaces, including streets, sidewalks and driveways, backfill shall be Class A crushed stone placed in one foot lifts compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. The top 12 inches directly below paved surfaces shall be Class A crushed stone compacted to 98% Standard Proctor Density. If under pavement, backfill to bottom of the subgrade. If not under pavement, backfill to within 12 inches of finished surface. b. All other areas: Backfill shall consist of suitable job excavated material placed in one foot lifts compacted to 90% Standard Proctor Density. If excavated material is unsuitable, backfill with Class A crushed stone to within 12 inches of finished surface. C. Do not place stone or rock fragment larger than 2 inches within 2 feet of pipe nor larger than 12 inches in backfill. Do not drop large masses of backfill material into trench. C. Backfilling Around Structures Do not place backfill against or on structures until they have attained sufficient strength to support the loads, including construction loads, to which they will be subjected. Avoid unequal soil pressure by depositing material evenly around structure. 2. Backfill shall consist of Class A crushed stone placed in one foot lifts compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density unless otherwise indicated or specified. 3.07 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION.• A. When the bottom of any excavation is taken out beyond the limits indicated or specified, backfill, at Contractor's expense, with Class A crushed stone compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density. 11/00 sharedkngineed Pecs-ii102220.dm 02220-5 SECTION 02270 SLOPE PROTECTION AND EROSION CONTROL FILED PART 1 - GENERAL FEB 212012 N: 511 P M 1.01 SUMMARY.• ID `� A. Placement of silt fence, erosion control mat, engineering fabric, revetment stone, and erosion stone. 1.02 REFERENCES. A. IDOT Standard Specifications. B. Iowa Department of Transportation Highway Division "Standard Road Plans Manual", latest edition. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE. A. Revetment stone and erosion stone shall meet the abrasion and durability requirements of Section 4130 of the IDOT Standard Specifications. B. Engineering Fabrics (geotextile) shall be of a non -woven material and conform to the requirements of IDOT Engineering Fabric for Embankment Erosion Control. 1.04 STORAGE: A. Prior to use, geotextile shall be stored in a clean dry place, out of direct sunlight, not subject to extremes of either hot or cold, and with the manufacturers protective cover in place. Receiving, storage, and handling at the job site shall be in accordance with the requirements in ASTM D 4873. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Except as amended in this document, the materials in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 41. Construction Materials. Section 4130. Revetment Stone and Erosion Stone. Section 4169. Erosion Control Materials. Section 4196. Engineering Fabrics. 02270-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES.- A. ECHNIQUES: A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: FILED Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction. Section 2507. Concrete & Stone Revetment. FEB 21 2012 and the following [DOT Standard Road Plans: Al :c r, Iwwa _ .ARWI RC -5 Wood Excelsior Mat RC -16 Silt Fence 3.02 SCHEDULE.- A. CHEDULE. A. Silt fence shall be installed at locations indicated on the plans immediately upon completion of grading. Wood excelsior mat shall be placed and staked in seeded areas of swales immediately following seeding. 3.03 GEOTEXTILE., A. Surface Preparation The surface on which the geotextile is to be placed will be graded to the neat lines and grades as shown on the plans. The surface will be reasonably smooth and free of loose rock and clods, holes, depressions, projections, muddy conditions and standing or flowing water. B. Placement Prior to placement of the geotextile, the soil surface will be inspected for quality of design and construction. The geotextile will be placed on the approved surface at the locations and in accordance with the details shown on the plans. The geotextile will be unrolled along the placement area and loosely laid (not stretched) in such a manner that it will conform to the surface irregularities when material is placed on or against it. The geotextile may be folded and overlapped to permit proper placement in the designated area. 2. The geotextile will be joined by overlapping a minimum of 18 inches (unless otherwise specified on the plans or by the manufacturer), and secured against the underlying foundation material. Securing pins, approved and provided by the geotextile manufacturer, shall be placed along the edge of the panel or roll material to adequately hold it in place during installation. Pins will be steel or fiberglass formed as a "U", "U', or "T" shape or contain "ears" to prevent total penetration. Steel washers will be provided on all but the "U" shaped pins. The upstream or up- slope line will be inserted through both layers along a line through approximately the midpoint of the overlap. At horizontal laps and across slope laps, securing pins will be inserted through the bottom layer only. Securing pins will be placed along a line approximately 2 inches in from the edge of the placed geotextile at intervals not to exceed 12 feet unless otherwise specified. Additional pins will be installed 02270-2 as necessary and where appropriate, to prevent slippage or movement of the geotextile. The use of securing pins will be held to the minimum necessary. Pins are to be left in place unless otherwise specified. 3. Should the geotextile be torn or punctured, or the overlaps disturbed, as evidenced by visible damage, subgrade pumping, intrusion, or grade distortion, the backfill around the damaged or displaced area will be removed and restored to the original approved condition. The repair will consist of a patch of the same type of geotextile being used, overlapping the existing geotextile. Geotextile panels joined by overlap will have the patch extend a minimum of 2 feet from the edge of any damaged area. 4. The geotextile will not be placed until it can be anchored and protected with the specified covering within 48 hours or protected from exposure to ultraviolet light. In no case will material be dropped on uncovered geotextile from a height greater than 3 feet. 11/00 sharedkngineedspecs-iA02270.doc 02270-3 FILED FEB 21 2012 Y. -SP P,7 City Clerk a Y,kai SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING FILED PART 1- GENERAL FEB 21 2012 C4 City Clerk 1.01 SUMMARY. • IYaCiry,iowa A. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to prepare, install, shape, trim and compact subgrades to receive Portland Cement Concrete paving. B. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to form, place, reinforce, finish, joint and cure Portland Cement Concrete roadways, parking area slabs, driveways, and sidewalks at the locations and grades noted on the plans. 1.01 REFERENCES. A. MOT Standard Specifications. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE. A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work in this section. B. Quality testing by the Owner: 1. Compressive Strength Tests. 2. Entrained Air. 3. Slump. 4. Density Tests of Base and Subgrade. PART2-PRODUCTS 1.01 MATERIALS. A. Except as amended in this document, the materials in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the MOT Standard Specifications: Division 41. Construction Materials. Sections 4101 through 4122. B. Aggregate durability class for all Portland Cement Concrete paving shall be Class 3. 02520-1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES. A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the following divisions and sections of the IDOT Standard Specifications: Division 21. Earthwork, Subgrades and Subbases. Section 21 1 1. Granular Subbase. Division 22. Base Courses. Section 2201. Portland Cement Concrete Base. FILED Section 2212. Base Repair. Section 2213. Base Widening. FEB 21 2012 q:59 PDivision 23. Surface Courses. city Ct ti Section 2301. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement. IO°apy' Pwa Section 2302. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Widening. Section 2310. Bonded Portland Cement Concrete Overlay. Section 2316. Pavement Smoothness. Division 25. Miscellaneous Construction Section 2512. Portland Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter. Section 2515. Removal and Construction of Paved Driveways. Section 2517. Concrete Header Slab. Section 2529. Full Depth Finish Patches. Section 2530. Partial Depth Finish Patches. 3.02 CURING AND PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT.• A. Curing compound shall be applied immediately following finishing of the concrete, including back of curb. 3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS.- A. EQUIREMENTS. A. When concrete is being placed in cold weather and temperatures may be expected to drop below 35°F, the following requirements must be met for concrete less than 36 hours old: 24 Hour Temperature Forecast Covering Minimum 35-32'F One layer plastic or burlap. Minimum 31-25° F One layer plastic and one layer burlap or two layers burlap. Below 25° F Commercial insulating material approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete shall be protected from freezing temperatures until it is at least five days old. C. Concrete damaged by cold weather shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 4101IN D. Maximum allowable concrete temperature shall be 90° F. E. If concrete is placed when the temperature of the concrete could exceed 90° F, the Contractor shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregates and/or mixing water, as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete as it is placed below 90° F. 3.04 OPENING TO TRAFFIC. A. Opening to traffic, including Contractor's vehicles, will not be permitted until the compressive strength of 6" dia. x 12" cylinders is at least 3,000 Ib. per square inch. B. All joints in the pavement shall be cleaned and sealed prior to opening the street(s) to traffic of any kind. C. Opening to traffic shall not constitute final acceptance. 3.05 COMPLETION OF WORK.• A. When traffic is allowed upon the pavement, the Contractor shall begin remaining work and clean up. All streets and sidewalks shall be finished and opened to the public as soon as practicable. B. Contractor shall notify the Engineer if weather conditions make it difficult to use Class M concrete, when specified. C. Contractor responsible for cleanup of concrete washout area at end of project. 11/00 sbaredle"gineedspecs-ii\02520.doc FILED FEB 21 2012 y sq v Cary cll Iowa izi X low, 02520-3 SECTION 02524 CURB RAMPS FILED PART1-GENERAL FEB 21 2012 1.01 SUMMARY. • Sq PM City Clerk 1o�0'q, n A. Construct sidewalk curb ramps to meet ADA specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES. A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. City of Iowa City Design Standards. C. Iowa DOT ADA Curb Ramp Compliance (Alterations) - (I I A-4) 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE. A. Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of curb ramp construction. B. Slope measurements. Newly constructed curb ramps and sidewalks not meeting the slope requirements will be, at the Engineer's discretion, removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS. A. Section 02520, Portland Cement Concrete Paving PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TECHNIQUES. A. Except as amended in this document, the work in this section will conform with the Iowa DOT ADA Curb Ramp Compliance (Alterations) — (1 lA-4) and the following sections of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) B Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. Section 4. Accessible Elements and Spaces: Scope and Technical Re- quirements Section 14. Public Rights -of -Way 02524-1 3.02 SLOPES. A. Cross slope refers to the slope that is perpendicular to the direction of travel. Running slope refers to the slope that is parallel to the direction of travel. B. Curb ramp cross slopes should be no greater than 1:50 or 2% to a level plane. C. Curb ramp running slopes should be no greater than 1:12 or 8.33% to a level plane unless existing conditions do not permit and layout is approved by the Engineer. 3.03 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE THICKNESS: A. 6 -inch thick P.C.C. will be placed at all curb ramps unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 11/00 shared\engineer\s a s -I 1\02524.dm FILED FEB 21 2012 it: C' Cleric mwa"C , lows 02524-2 SECTION 02660 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: FILED FEB 21 2012 4 , 54 CIL, Iowa C. A. Furnish, install and test water distribution system as indicated and specified. L02 REFERENCES: A. This specification references the following documents. In their latest edition, the referenced documents form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. In case of conflict, the requirements of this specification shall prevail. One copy of all references marked with a *** shall be kept on the site, readily available and accessible to the Engineer during normal working hours. Copies may be obtained from the organizations or from the Iowa City Water Division at cost plus 15%. B. City of Iowa City Water Division Reference Manual C. American National Standards Institute and American Water Works Combined Standards: ANSI/AWWA-C104/A21.4: Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water 2. ANSI/AWWA-C105/A21.5: Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems 3. ANSI/AWWA-CI IO/A21.10: Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 -inch through 48 -inch, for Water and Other Liquids 4. ANSI/AWWA-Cl11/A21.11: Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 5. ANSI/AWWA-Cl50/A21.50: Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe 6. ANSI/AWWA-C151/A21.51: Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids 7. ANSI/AWWA-C153/A21.53: Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 -inch through 24 - inch, and 54 -inch through 64 -inch for Water Service 8. ANSI/AWWA C502: Dry -Barrel Fire Hydrants 9. ANSI/AWWAC504: Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves 10. AWWA C509: Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 02660-1 H. . ANSI/AWWA C510 Double Check Valve Backflow -Prevention Assembly 12. ANSI/AWWA C511 Reduced -Pressure Principal Backflow -Prevention Assembly FILED 13. ANSI/AWWA C550: Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 14. ANSI/AWWA C600***: Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their FEB 21 2012 Appurtenances y.'.55 PNL i +�Y.iowa 15. ANSI/AWWA C651 ***: Disinfecting Water Mains 16. ANSI/AWWA C900: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 -inch through 12 - inch for Water Distribution D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA Manual M23***: PVC Pipe -Design and Installation 2. AWWA Manual M17***: Installation, Field Testing, and Maintenance of Fire Hydrants E. American Society for Testing Materials: I. ASTM D2241 F. Manufacturers Standardization Society: I. MSS -SP -58 Pipe Hangers and Supports, Materials Design and Manufacture 2. MSS -SP -69 Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application G. Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association: 1. UNI -B-3-88 Recommended Practice for the Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (nominal diameters 4-36 inch) complying with AWWA Standard C-900 or C-905. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit to the Engineer the following drawings or details for approval prior to installation. One copy of each with the approval stamp shall be kept at the work site at all times. B. Shop and Working Drawings: 1. Pipe layout with valves, fittings and hydrants shown 2. Valves 3. Hydrants 4. Fittings 5. Bolts 02660-2 6. Joints 7. Tapping sleeves, couplings, and special piping materials. FILED s. Polyethylene FEB 21 2012 '� 5Y Pmt 9. Thrust block designs and details Cry Clerk 10. Special backfill Iowa Lay, IM C. Certificates: Sworn certificates of shop tests showing compliance with appropriate standard for all piping materials. D. Manufacturer's Literature: Catalog cuts of joints, couplings, harnesses, expansion joints, gaskets, fasteners and other accessories. 2. Brochures and technical data and coatings and linings and proposed method of application. E. Plans for initial operations and final operations: Special prepared drawings and typed list of sequences of steps are needed prior to any operation of water distribution system. Submit 2 weeks prior to date of planned operation. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE. A. Engineer reserves the right to inspect and test by independent service at manufacturer's plant or elsewhere at Engineer's expense. B. Contractor shall conduct visual inspection before installation. 1.05 TIME. A. Time is of the essence for water main construction work. All work which requires shutdown of active water mains must be completed as quickly as possible to minimize inconvenience to the consumers and risk to the community. B. Amount of advance notice required to the Iowa City Water Division when materials or services are supplied by the Division are listed below. Serve notice to the Water Division at 356-5160. 1. For tapping service, provide 24 hours notice. 2. For notice to customers of disruption of water service, provide 48 hours notice. This work will be completed with the assistance of Water Division personnel. 3. For review, comments, and approval of plans of operation, provide 3 days notice. 4. For locations of underground facilities, provide 48 hours notice. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 All products used for this work shall be from the list of "Accepted Products for Water Distribution 02660-3 Materials" contained in the Iowa City Water Division Reference Manual and found in Appendix A. If there is a discrepancy between the Iowa City Water Division Reference Manual and Appendix A, the Iowa City Water Division Reference Manual prevails. Z02 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE: A. Thickness design shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C 150/A21.50. FILED B. Manufacture shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C15l/A2L51. FEB 21 2012 C. Thickness for direct bury piping, unless otherwise indicated or specified, shall be class 52. 1-:0 PFl city clerk D. Thickness for pipe suspended from structures and bolted or restrained joint pipe, unless lg"'a�cgy'1°w' otherwise indicated or specified, shall be class 53. E. Cement mortar lining shall conform to ANSI/AWWA CI04/A21.4. Z03 DUCTILE-IRONPIPE JOINTS. A. Single rubber -gasket push -on joints or mechanical joints conforming to ANSI/AWWA Cl 11/A21.11. Furnish with all necessary hardware and gaskets. B. Bell -and -spigot pipe joints conforming to ANSI A21.6 or ANSI A21.8. C. For bolted/restrained mechanical joint, use Griffin Bolt -Lok restrained joint or approved equal. (Class 53) D. For unbolted/restrained mechanical joint, use Griffin Snap -Lok restrained joint or approved equal. (Class 53) E. Do not use drilled & tapped retainer glands. F. Plain end of push -on pipe factory machined to a true circle and chamfered to facilitate fitting gasket. 1.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE: A. Pipe shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C900 and shall be thickness class DR 18 (Class 150). All pipe shall have the same outside dimensions as ductile -iron pipe. PVC pipe materials are only allowed in sizes 6 to 10 inch diameter. B. PVC pipe materials shall not be used in any area where there is likelihood the pipe will be exposed to concentrations of pollutants comprised of low molecular weight petroleum products or organic solvents or vapors. C. PVC pipe shall not be installed under public roadways and shall not be used around cul-de-sacs or other small radius curves. 1.05 FITTINGS: A. All fittings shall conform to ANSI/AWWA Cl 10/A21.10, with pressure rating of Class 350 for 3" to 24". 02660-4 B. Mechanical joint fittings shall be ductile iron compact ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or ductile standard ANSI/AWWA Cl 10/A21.10. Large fittings, 12 -inch through 20 -inch shall be ductile iron standard ANSI/AWWA CI10/A21.10. Swivel tees shall be ductile iron standard ANS1/AWWA C110.A21.10. Where ductile iron is not available (i.e., offsets), cast iron standard ANSI/AWWA Cl 10/A21.10 shall be provided. C. All fittings shall be bituminous coated inside and outside and shall be furnished complete with necessary accessories including plain rubber gaskets, ductile iron glands, NSS Cor - Blue bolts and nuts. Verify the gasket seats are not made irregular by improper �ppljcatign of the lining materials. t 11 M 2.06 VALVES & VALVEBOXES. FEB 21 2012 y;57 PM`` C"CIerP A. Gate valves shall conform to ANSUAWWA C509. Iowa_ ' lows 1. Valves shall be full line size gate valves with epoxy coating inside and outside and contain stainless steel nuts and bolts. 2. Valve bodies shall be ductile iron or cast iron. Working pressure of the valve shall be at least 200 psi and gaskets rated at 250 psi. 3. Valves shall have a standard 2 -inch square operating nut and shall open left. 4. Valves shall be capable of being repacked or replacing o -rings under pressure. 5. Valves are to be non -rising stem with the stem, nut and thrust collar made of bonze. B. Butterfly valves shall conform to ANSUAWWA C504, for buried service, Class 150B. 1. Valve seat to be installed on disk or valve body. 2. Butterfly valves shall not be utilized in sizes smaller than 16", unless so noted on the plans. 3. Working pressure of the valve shall be at least 150 psi. 4. Valves shall be short body pattern with mechanical joint ends. 5. Shaft seals shall be o -ring type. 6. Valve shall have manual operator with a 2" square operating nut for operation of the valve and shall open left. 7. All interior and exterior cast iron, ductile iron or steel surfaces shall be painted with an epoxy coating and contain stainless steel bolts and nuts. 02660-5 C. Tapping Valves shall be as specified for resilient -seated gate valves with the exception that one end shall be mechanical joint and the other end shall be flanged to match the tapping sleeve and shall have oversize seat rings to permit entry of the tapping machine cutters. PILED FEB 21 2012 ' SC.ItyPCleck Iowa city, Iowa 10 1. Tapping valves be 175 psi minimum working pressure. 2. Valves shall be epoxy coated inside and outside with stainless nuts and bolts. 3. Valves shall be furnished with all joint accessories. Valve Boxes shall be 2 -piece or 3 -piece slip type, range 51" to 71". Use lids marked "water". V 2.07 HYDRANTS.- Specification YDRANTS.Specification standard: Type of shutoff: Type of construction: Main valve opening: Nozzle arrangement and size Nozzle thread: Type of inlet connection: Size of inlet connection: Depth of bury: Direction of opening: Packing: Size and shape of operating nut: Working pressure: Color: ANSUAWWA Standard C502 Compression Break flange or break bolt above the ground line and a breakaway stem connection. All bolts to be stainless steel. 4'/z inches for 12" water main and under 5'114 inches for 16" water main and above 3 nozzle, two 2'/2 -inch hose nozzles and one 4'/2 -inch pumper nozzle, with caps attached with chains National Standard Hose Threads Mechanical Joint 6 inch Depth of bury shall be 6 feet Open to right (clockwise) Conventional or O -Ring I %2 inch, standard pentagon 250 psi Safety Red 02660-6 Z08 SPEC24L FITTINGS. A. Special pipe fittings must be approved by the Engineer. B. Special fittings must be the same diameter, thickness and pressure class as standard fittings. C. Special fittings may be manufactured to meet requirements of same specifications as standard fittings except for laying length and types of end connection. D. Full Body Tapping Sleeves: 1. Shall be mechanical joint, split construction with end gaskets, manufactured to fit cast iron or ductile iron pipe. Branch shall have a flange fitting to match the tapping valve. 2. Shall meet the OD requirements for Class A, B, C, or D pit cast pipe. 3. Shall be furnished complete with all accessories. FILED 4. Required for 12" and larger pipe or under paving. FEB 21 2012 5f pM City Clerk E. Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves: Iowa City, Iowa 1. Shall be epoxy coated with ductile -iron flange and stainless steel bolts. 2. Shall meet the OD requirements for class A, B, C, or D pit cast pipe. 3. Shall be furnished complete with all accessories. 4. Shall be compatible with Mueller, Clow, Kennedy, or U.S. Pipe F. Stainless Steel Repair Clamps: 1. All stainless steel, single section, double section, or triple section, depending upon size of main. 2. Shall have stainless steel bolts and nuts. 2.09 GASKETS, BOLTS, AND NUTS. A. Mechanical joints made with: Bolts: 3/4 inch NSS Cor -BLUE. 2. Stainless steel bold studs with stainless steel nuts on each end. B. All thread rod used to restrain fittings shall be stainless steel with stainless steel nuts and 3/4" diameter. 02660-7 2.10 LOCATION WIRE: A. Location wire shall be #12 solid copper, THHN insulation in yellow or orange color. 2.11 LUMBER: A. Lumber for bracing or supports shall be hardwood (i.e. oak or maple). Do not use creosoted lumber in contact with piping materials. 2.12 WATER: A. Reasonable amounts of water will be provided for use in the final operations of water main flushing, disinfection and testing. Prior notice must be given to the Water Division. B. Contractor will not be charged for the water used as long as there is reasonable care to control and conserve the rate and volume used. If there is waste or carelessness, Contractor will be charged for water. FILED C. Owner to provide water meter. FEB 21 PQ PART 3 - EXECUTION 4; �; cieTk Iowa city, IOWA 3.01 REFERENCESAND DOCUMENTS: A. Contractor must have all required documents on the site before commencing with the work. B. Valves, fittings, hydrants and ductile -iron pipe shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600 except as noted herein. C. PVC pipe must be furnished and installed in accordance with AWWA M23 and Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association UNI -B-3-88 except as noted herein. D. Contractor must prepare and retain a set of "as -built' drawings on the job site with accurate and current information on the location of all valves, pipe and special construction features. Examples of special buried features would be: Offsets in alignment. 2. Changes in depth, depth greater than 8 feet or less than 5 feet. Special fittings or construction materials. 3.02 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. The Engineer may mark materials which are found on the job site and which are determined to be defective or not approved. The marking may be done with spray paint. The Contractor shall promptly remove defective or unapproved materials from the site. B. While unloading PVC piping materials: Do not allow the pipe units to strike anything. 2. Do not handle pipe units with individual chains or single cables, even if padded. 02660-8 3. Do not attach cables to pipe unit frames or banding for lifting. FILED C. Within the "Storage" language of AW WA M23, change "should" to "shall." FEH 21 2012 D. Within the "Handling" language ofAWWA M23, change "should" to "shall." V: SS Frig Clty Clerk 3.03 LOCATION, ALIGNMENT, SEPARATION & GRADE: Iowa City' taxa A. Water mains, valves, hydrants, and special fittings shall be installed in the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. B. Contractor shall have all buried utilities located by the 1 -800 -ONE -CALL service and shall do exploratory excavation as necessary to determine specific conflicts between existing utilities and new water main. No extra compensation will be allowed for the exploratory excavations. C. Water main shall be installed a minimum depth of cover of 5'h feet. D. Water mains crossing sewer services, storm sewers or sanitary sewers shall be laid to provide a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water main and the top of the sewer. Where local conditions prevent this vertical separation, the water main shall not be placed closer than 6 inches above a sewer or 18 inches below a sewer under any circumstances. Additionally, one full length of water pipe crossing the sewer shall be centered at the point of crossing so that the water pipejoints will be equal distance as far as possible from the sewer. The water and sewer pipes must be adequately supported and have pressure tight joints. A low permeability soil shall be used for backfill material within 10 feet of the point of crossing. E. No water pipe shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole. A minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet shall be maintained. F. All PVC water main and ductile iron water main with greater than 400 feet between features that extend to the surface (such as hydrants or valve boxes) shall be marked with a wire for the entire length to make electronic location possible. The wire shall be installed continuously as the pipe is backfilled. The wire shall be fixed to the side of the pipe at a position of 2 o'clock or 10 o'clock and attached with duct tape every 5 feet. 2. The insulation shall be protected to prevent accidental grounding. Make few splices and splice the wire together using a Twister DB Plus Wire Connector. Bring the wire to the ground surface at each fire hydrant and loop wire in a Valvco tracer wire terminal box. These boxes shall be located between the hydrant and the hydrant valve with at least two feet of extra wire inside the box. Install the terminal box perpendicular from the hydrant and parallel with the valve box, one -foot from the hydrant base. The tracer wire terminal box must be installed flush with the finished grade. If there is no fire hydrant within 500 feet, bring the wire to the surface in a "daylight box" which is a full-size valve box and mark the drawings appropriately. 02660-9 3.04 PIPE BEDDING AND BACKFILLING: A. Ductile -iron pipe bedding shall conform to the project plan details or as otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer. B. PVC pipe bedding shall conform to UNI -B-3-88 laying condition Type 2 including hand excavation for the bell holes. The bedding shall be loose, natural, fine soil which is compacted by stomping on the soil along the sides of the pipe to the top of the pipe. C. Trench width within the pipe envelope shall conform to the plans or as directed by the Engineer. D. Set valves and hydrants on precast concrete bases. 3.05 PIPERESTRAINT. A. Thrust Restraint: I. For pipe smaller than 10" diameter, concrete block shall be used, placing the concrete block next to the fitting and undisturbed soil. For 10" and larger diameter FILED pipe, blocking shall be by cast -in-place concrete. Cover fittings and joints with 10 mil. polyethylene before placing concrete. Brace fittings with hardwood lumber to FEB 21 NQ prevent shifting before placing concrete. S� ty clerk 2. Do not pour excess concrete on top of pipe and fittings. Iowam'lowa B. Socket Pipe Clamps, Tie Rods, and Bridles: Where indicated or necessary to prevent joints or sleeve couplings from pulling apart under pressure, provide suitable socket pipe clamps, tie rods, and bridles. Bridles and tie rod diameter shall be at least 3/4 in. except where they replace flange bolts of smaller size with nut on each side of flange. C. Dead Ends Pipe ends or fittings left for future connections shall be plugged or capped using materials supplied by the pipe manufacturer. 2. All pipe ends or fittings left for future connections shall be blocked against thrust. 3.06 JOINTS AND COUPLINGS. A. Push -on Joints: Inspect bell grooves and clean to assure complete gasket seating. 2. Use extreme care to prevent separation of joints already installed. 3. Do not use push -on joints when boring. Griffin Snap -Lok shall be used in casing with locking rubbers. 02660-10 B. Mechanical Joints: The range of torque for tightening bolts which is indicated in ANSI/AW WA C600 may be somewhat affected by the temperature. On cold days, more torque may be required. 2. Use extreme caution when tightening cast iron fittings to avoid breaking the ears of the flanges. An average worker should not use a wrench longer than 10 inches. 3. On PVC pipe connections to MJ joints, cut the bevel off the end of the PVC pipe to get full pipe diameter in thejoint. 4. Do not deflect pipe atjoint. FILED C. Sleeve -Type Coupling: FE6 2 1 2012 Cay 4: Sq rM I. Clean pipe ends for distance of 12 inches. Iowa ciy,lon 2. Use soapy water as gasket lubricant. 3. Carefully mark and place the sleeve coupling in the center of the joint. 3.07 TAPPED CONNECTIONS UNDER PRESSURE: A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Tapping mains for new connections 1 -inch to 12 -inch in diameter shall be done by the Water Division. C. A new and site specific tapping application must be prepared for each tap regardless of size, and submitted to the Water Division. The tapping application must be completed and include location, name, and address of water customer, schematic drawing, and materials of construction. 3.08 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT.• A. All open cut installed ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be wrapped with an 8 mil polyethylene encasement in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C205/A21.5 installation methods. This includes any ductile iron laid in cul-de-sacs or other small radius areas where PVC main could not be used. 3.09 HYDRANT INSTALLATION: A. Handle carefully to avoid breakage and damage to flanges. Keep hydrants closed until they are installed. Protect stored hydrants from dirt, water, ice, animals and vandals. Before installation, clean piping and elbow of any foreign matter. C. Install hydrants away from the curb line a sufficient distance to avoid damage from or to vehicles. A set -back of 4 feet from the curb line is recommended. D. Orient the hydrant so the pumper nozzle faces the street. Outlet nozzles shall be at least 18 02660-11 inches above finished ground. The break -off flange should be no more than 6 inches above ground. There shall be no obstructions to fire hose connections. E. The base elbow shall be placed on solid precast concrete blocks on firm, undisturbed soil. The barrel of the hydrant shall be firmly braced against the back of the trench wall with pre -cast cement blocks to resist thrust at the pipe connection. F. The base and lower barrel shall be backfilled with 5 cubic feet of washed gravel or I inch crushed rock to allow water to release from the hydrant drain. G. Install the hydrant plumb. Drainage stone and soil backfill around the barrel shall be firmly compacted to provide good lateral support for the hydrant. This is essential to the performance of the break -off flange. 3.10 WATER MAIN OPERATIONS. A. All work which involves operating the active public water distribution system will require the notice, consent, approval and assistance of the Water Division. FILED B An accurate and legible copy of the "as -built" drawings must be on file in the Water FEB 21 2012 Division office prior to using the water supply. 1.:99, 91"x, C' . ClcrkC. If requested by the City, the contractor will work with the Water Division personnel to �- ,10a submit a plan for initial operations and a plan for final operations to the Water Division for approval. The plans shall include a drawing and typed list of actions which show all the significant steps necessary to connect to the existing water distribution system or conduct the filling, flushing and testing operations. The purpose of both plans is to minimize the impact of service interruptions and pressure and flow variations on the water distribution system and existing customers. 3.11 DISINFECTION FOR POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS. A. General Upon completion of a newly installed water main or when repairs to an existing water system are made, the main shall be disinfected according to instructions listed in ANSI/AW WA C651 and the following specifications. B. Special Disinfection Requirements I. Exercise cleanliness during construction. Protect pipe interiors, fittings and valves against contamination. 2. Water main 16 -inch and larger in diameter must be swabbed with a soft pig prior to flushing if flow in the system is not adequate to maintain scouring velocity (2 fps) during flushing. 3. The minimum uniform concentration of available chlorine used for disinfection shall be 50 mg/L. Use either the granulated/tablet or continuous feed method with modifications as described in 3.11 C or D below. 4. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the main at least 24 hours, during which 02660-12 time all valves and hydrants in the section treated shall be operated in order to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this 24 hour period, the treated water shall contain no less than 25 mg/L chlorine throughout the length of main. 5. After the retention period, flush the heavily chlorinated water from the main until the chlorine concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than 3 mg/L and the water appears clean. Flush at a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second in the main through an opening not less than '/4 of the main diameter. For 6 -inch through 12 -inch water mains, a single 2%2 -inch fire hydrant opening is adequate. Water entering storm sewer system shall be dechlorinated by a method approved by the Engineer to prevent downstream environmental damage (i.e. fish kills). 6. Collect a bacterial sample from the end of each line or 800-1,000 feet and deliver the sample to the University Hygienic Laboratory at Oakdale for analysis. Allow approximately 5 days for the results. If the bacterial sample shows the absence of coliform organisms, the hydrostatic test may proceed. C. Tablet Method of Chlorine Application Use ANSI/AW WA C651, however slowly fill the main (less than 1 cubic foot per second) with system water, pushing out as much air as possible. Do not wash out the tablets. D. Continuous Feed Method of Chlorine Application Prior to applying chlorine, do a preliminary flush at a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second in the main through an opening not less than not less than 1/4 of the main diameter. For 6 -inch through 12 -inch water mains, a single 2%2 -inch fire hydrant opening is adequate. 2. Add the water and chlorine solution with the required concentration to fill the main completely. FILED 3.12 TESTING: A. Filling the water main: FEB 21 2012 5 PM City Cierk Iow2.City, Iowa Fill the newly constructed water main system slowly using treated public water under low pressure and low flow. The objective is to displace air with water while avoiding damage to new construction, customer services, and adjoining property due to the release of air and water. Public Works staff must be on site to assist with operation of the system valves and hydrants during this operation. 2. Open one hydrant (completely) at the end of the main or at a high point on the main which is to be filled. Open a filling valve (the smallest one available) slightly. Allow the water main to fill and slowly release the air. When the main being filled has released nearly all air, surging should diminish and water released from the hydrant should flow in a steady stream. Monitor and control the released water to minimize damage. 02660-13 3. After a few minutes of steady state operation, open all other valves slowly and then open the initial fill valve completely, while regulating the flow hydrant to minimize damage. When the main has been filled, open and close all hydrants sequentially to force fresh water progressively through each section (new and old) of water main which was shut down to replace fresh water into each section. 4. After clear water and a fresh chlorine odor are observed at each hydrant, shut down hydrant flow slowly and allow water flow to cease and internal pressure to stabilize. Then, each water service connection shall be tested at a sill cock and observed by the Contractor to verify adequate pressure and flow. B. Pressure and Leakage Tests: Conduct combined pressure and leakage test in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600. 2. Pressure test off the hydrants or furnish and install temporary testing plugs or caps. D Furnish pressure pumps, pipe connections, meters, gauges, equipment, potable FILE water and labor. Use only potable water for testing. FEB 2 12012 3. Test after disinfection operations are successfully completed. If testing operations 4:59 PM require reconstruction or repairs during which the interior of the pipe is exposed to Gty Clerk Iowa civ. Lo r+ contamination, disinfection will be required again. 4. Keep the water main full of water for 24 hours before conducting combined pressure and leakage test. 5. Pressure and leakage test consists of first raising water pressure at the lowest point of section being tested to 150 psi internal pressure. 6. Failure to achieve and maintain the specified pressure for two hours with no additional pumping means the water main has failed to pass the test. 7. If the water main fails the pressure and leakage test, locate, uncover, and repair or replace defective pipe, fitting or joints. Conduct additional tests and repairs until water main passes the test. C. Valve Operations: 1. All valves shall be located and tested to verify operation. Remove the valve box lid, insert the valve key and open and close each valve. Count the turns and record the results. D. Hydrant Operations: After the hydrant has been installed and the main and hydrant have been pressure tested, each hydrant shall be flushed and checked for proper operation. 2. Remove a nozzle cap and open the hydrant slowly and fully. Check the direction of opening as marked on the top. Do not force the hydrant in the opening direction beyond full open as indicated by sudden resistance to turning. 02660-14 After hydrant has been flushed, close it and check for drainage. This is done by placing the hand over the nozzle opening and checking for a vacuum. Then check the hose thread for proper fit. 4. Replace nozzle cap, then open hydrant again and inspect all joints for leaks. E. Flow Test: Flow tests shall be conducted to verify all components of the water system are fully open and operational and to determine the Fre flow capacity. 2. Public Works staff personnel must be on the site to operate the system valves and hydrants during this test. 3. A hydrant flow test shall be conducted on the hydrant at the extreme locations for distance or highest elevation to determine the Fre flow capability of the system. Static and flowing pressures and flow rates shall be recorded, and a copy forwarded to the Water Division. FILED FEB 21 2012 AL: !9 PM City Clerk?. Iowa_Cuy, Iowa 02660-15 FILED FEB 212012 APPENDIX A CityM ak ' °C1O°" Accepted Products for Water Distribution Materials WATER PIPE: (Ductile) ANSI/AWWA — A21.51/C151 American, Clow, Griffin, McWane, Tyler, and US Pipe Class 52 for direct bury piping unless other wise indicated or specified. Class 53 for suspended from structures and bolted or restrained joint pipe WATER PIPE: ( PVC) (Class 150) — C900 C900 thickness class DRI 8 (6" thru 10") FITTINGS: (Ductile Iron Standard) ANSI/AWWA — A21.10/C110, 3" to 24" - 350 psi (Ductile Iron Compact) AWWA C153,350 psi Clow, Tyler/Union, U.S. Pipe, or Sigma TAPPING SLEEVES: (Full Body Ductile Iron with Stainless Steel and/or NSS Cor -Blue Nuts and Bolds) for 12" and larger or under pavement Clow - F-5205, Mueller - H615, Kennedy, Tyler/Union, Kennedy, American Flow Control - Series 2800, or U.S. Pipe - T-9 TAPPING SLEEVES: (Stainless Steel) Smith Blair - 662 or 663, Ford FAST, Mueller -H304, Romac SST, JCM-432 MECHANICAL JOINT RESTRAINT DEVICE: (Megalug) Ebaa Iron Sales Inc. STAINLESS STEEL REPAIR CLAMPS: Smith -Blair -261, Ford FS1, Romac SSI VALVES: (Resilient Seated Gate Valves) ANSI/AWWA — C509 Clow F-2640, Kennedy 1571-X, Mueller Resilient Seat - A-2360-20, American Flow Control - AFC -500, or U.S. Pipe Metro Seal 250 95460 VALVES: (Butterfly) ANSI/AWWA C504, Class 150B Clow, Pratt, Mueller, American Darling, Kennedy, M & H, or DeZurik VALVES: (Tapping) Clow — F-2640, Mueller — T-2360-16, Kennedy 4950, U.S. Pipe Metro Seal 250 #5860, or American Flow Control -865 VALVE BOXES: Tyler— (Series 6855 & Item 666A, Range 51" to 71") East Jordan Series 8555 & Item 666A— Range 51" to 71" 02660-16 HYDRANTS (4'/2" for 12" and under) (5'/" for 16" and above) AWWA C502 Clow F-2545 Medallion, Kennedy Guardian K-81, Mueller Super Centurion 250, American Darling - MK 73 for 4 1/2" & B84 -B for 5 1/4" SLEEVE TYPE COUPLING: Standard solid black sleeve — Tyler/Union 5-1442, Griffin Bolted Straight Coupling with stainless steel bolts and nuts — Smith -Blair 441 or Romac Style 501 STAINLESS STEEL REPAIR CLAMPS (with stainless steel bolts & nuts): Smith -Blair 261, Romac SSI or Ford FSI TRACER WIRE TERMINAL BOX (DAYLIGHT BOX): U.S. Filter WaterPro or Utility Equipment - Valvco —95E —2 %" ID with lockable cast-iron lid — minimum 18" long, telescoping TRACER WIRE CONNECTORS: Twister DB Plus Wire Connector POLYWRAP: 8 mil polyethylene encasement WIRE: #12 solid copper, THHN insulation in yellow or orange FILED FREEZELESS YARD HYDRANT: FEB 2 12012 Woodford Mfg. Iowa Model Y34 and YI It: c, C112k Iowa Cay, Iowa 03/07 sh,redk"yineed Pecs-ii\02G00.doc 02660-17 SECTION 02665 WATER SERVICE WORK FOR CONTRACTORS FILED FES 212012 PART 1- GENERAL nr Cla 1.01 DESCRIPTION: Iowz c -q' Iowa A. Furnish and install new water services and yard hydrants as indicated and specified. 1.02 RELATED WORK.' A. Section 02660: Water Distribution 1.03 REFERENCES: A. This specification references the following documents. In their latest edition, the referenced documents form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. B. City of Iowa City Water Division: Tap Installation, Metering Policies & Charges and General Information. C. American National Standards Institute and American Water Works Combined Standards: ANSI/AWWA-C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. D. American Society for Testing Materials: ASTM B75-86 Seamless Copper Tubing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS. A. Submit to the Engineer the following drawings or details for approval 4 weeks prior to installation. 1. Sworn certificates of shop tests showing compliance with appropriate standard for all piping materials. 2. Working drawing or site plan with customer location, address, size, and materials of water service and main pipe including a full list of materials required from the Iowa City Water Division, as applicable. 02665-1 LOS PERMITS. A. City of Iowa City: FILED I Contractor's superintendent on the job must have a license as a sewer and water FEB 21 2012 service installer issued by the City to construct water and sewer mains and services 59 PM in Iowa City. ' city clerk IgwaCuYra 2. The Contractor or their agent will be responsible for the tapping application forms and records. L06 TIME. A. Time is of the essence for water service work. All required work must be completed as quickly as possible to minimize inconvenience to the consumers. The Contractor is expected to comply with the minimum response and completion times listed. B. Amount of advance notice required to the Iowa City Water Division when materials or services are supplied by the Division are listed below. Serve notice to the Water Division at 356-5160. I. For tapping service, provide 24 hours notice. 2. For notice to customers of disruption of water service, provide 48 hours notice. 3. For supply of materials for less than 20 units, provide 2 weeks notice. 4. For supply of materials for more than 20 units, provide 4-6 weeks notice. 5. For supply of seldom used materials such as galvanized or lead, provide 4-6 weeks notice. 6. For locations of underground facilities, provide 48 hours notice. C. Response Time - the maximum time allowed from telephone notice by the Engineer until the Contractor is on the job and ready to begin work: 1. For I service which is planned work, less than 24-36 hours. 2. For I service which is emergency work, less than 4-6 hours. 3. For 3 or more services which are planned work, less than 48 hours. D. Completion Time - the maximum time allowed from the time the Contractor turns off the water until the water service is connected and operational under normal circumstances: For 1 service, where it is necessary to break and remove concrete with no prior warning or planning, less than 12 hours. 2. For 6-8 services or more in one block area with prior planning, some services on each side of the street and in conjunction with paving projects, less than a 12 -hour workday. 02665-2 1.07 WORK ON PRIVATE PROPERTY FOR OTHERS. A. Water service work may be necessary or desired by private property owners at the same time as the new water service work under this contract is done. The Contractor will be allowed to work on private property adjacent to the work site in order to do water service work directly for the private property owner. Work on private property shall not adversely affect the time schedule for work under this contract. B. The work on private property will not be the responsibility of the City. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER SERVICE MATERIALS A. All water service materials shall meet or exceed current ANSI/AW WA -C800 specifications and shall be made in accordance with ASTM B-62. The manufacturer shall furnish a certificate indicating all new materials meet the specifications. All valves, fittings and pipe shall be inspected several times during the manufacturing process and pressure tested with air under water before shipment. All water service materials shall be visually inspected before installation. Brass and copper are soft metals and care in handling shall be exercised to avoid damaging threads or distorting piping, valves or fitting bodies. B. Water service brass for services 2 inches and smaller will be purchased from the City Water Division. The Contractor shall use the brass goods furnished by the Water Division on work under this contract only and not on private property. C. All water service lines will be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Material shall be new type K copper in coils for sizes 3/4 -inch through I Y2 -inch and in coils or straight pipe for 2 -inch size. No couplings or connections will be permitted under the paving. D. Curb boxes for services 2 inches and smaller will be purchased from the City Water Division. E. Couplings for services 2 inches and smaller will be purchased from the City Water Division. F. Materials purchased from the City Water Division are available at the Water Division at 330 North Madison Street during normal working hours. The Water Division will provide an accounting for materials supplied and the Contractor will be required to keep records of materials used at each service connection. G. Quick coupler box assembly will be furnished by the Contractor. FILED FEB 21 2012 Y:5 9 ctt� ryCie jam 02665-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 RECORDS AND DOCUMENTS. A. Contractor must prepare and retain a set of "as -built' drawings on the job site with accurate and current information on the location of all water service valves, pipe and special construction features. Examples of special construction features include: FILED 1. Offsets in alignment. FEB 21 2012 2. Changes in depth and depth greater than 8 feet or less than 5 feet. wvii ?^ Cityry �Clint �a�iry, la" 3. Special fittings or construction materials. Following completion of the project, a copy of these drawings shall be furnished to the Water Division. 3.02 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. The Engineer may mark materials found on the job site which are determined to be defective or not approved. The marking may be done with spray paint. The Contractor shall promptly remove defective or unapproved materials from the site and replaced with new. 3.03 EXCAVATIONAND BACKFILL: A. All excavators shall comply with the requirements of the O.S.H.A Standards subpart P - Excavations. B. Earth excavation, backfill, fill and grading shall be in accordance with Section 02220. C. Excavation and backfill shall include all excavation, backfilling, compacting, stockpiling of surplus material on the site, and all other work incidental to the construction of trenches, including any additional excavation which may be required for construction of the water service lines. D. Along the proposed water service lines, the Contractor shall remove the surface materials only to such widths as will permit a hole or trench to be excavated which will afford sufficient room for proper construction. Paving removals shall be as directed by the Engineer E. The Engineer shall approve removal limits. F. Where working space permits, holes or trenches may be excavated by machine, provided that by so doing, public and private improvements will not be subjected to an unreasonable amount of damage. The size of the hole shall be as small as reasonably possible to do the work. If, however, excavation by machine methods cannot be made without damage being done to public and private improvements, hand excavation shall be employed. G. The Contractor shall use a mole for excavation of a hole to place the water service piping, '/d' to 2" diameter, at any location under a street surface, driveway, sidewalk or lawn area whenever the distance from the water main to the water service connection is greater than 20 feet. The mole shall be used even though the street surface has been removed so as to 02665-4 protect the new street surface from settlement. The mole shall be a maximum of four inches in diameter. The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, equipment, materials and supervision for mole excavation. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the location of all buried utilities and for all damage or repairs to utilities caused by mole excavation. Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary to explore and excavate to determine the best line and grade for the construction of the new water service line or to locate an existing water service which must be disconnected, the Contractor shall make explorations and excavations for such purposes. J. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Fire hydrants under pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb stop boxes, or other utility controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is completed. Gutters shall be kept clear and adequate provisions shall be made for street drainage. Natural watercourses shall not be obstructed. K. The Contractor shall provide and maintain ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and properly dispose of all water entering excavations or depressions until all work has been completed. No sanitary sewer shall be used for disposal of water. L. To protect persons from injury and to avoid property damage, adequate barricades, fencing, construction signs, caution lights and guards as required shall be placed and maintained by the Contractor at excavations during the progress of the construction work and until it is safe for pedestrian and vehicular traffic to use the roads, sidewalks and facilities. All material piles, equipment and pipe which may serve as obstructions shall be enclosed by fences or barricades and shall be protected by proper lights when the visibility is poor. The rules and regulations of O.S.H.A. and appropriate authorities for safety provisions shall be observed. M. Trees, shrubbery, fences, poles and all other property and structures shall be protected during construction operations unless their removal for purposes of construction is authorized by the Engineer. Any fences, poles, or other improvements which are removed or disturbed by the Contractor shall be restored to the original condition after construction is completed. Any trees, shrubbery or other vegetation which are approved for removal or ordered for removal by the Engineer shall be removed completely, including stumps and roots. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by construction operations to shrubbery or other landscape improvements which were not authorized for removal by the Engineer. FILED FEB 21 2012 't:5� FM Cler Iowa City, Iowa 02665-5 3.04 WATER SERVICE CONSTRUCTION: A. The City Water Division will not provide labor and equipment to tap the water main for services 2 inches and smaller. Each water service pipe shall be connected to the water main through a brass corporation stop. A tapping saddle is required on all PVC water main materials. The plastic plug shall be recovered. The main shall be tapped at an angle of forty-five degrees (450) with the vertical, if possible. The stop must be turned so that the T - handle will be on top. B. The old water service under the street right-of-way will be shut off and removed. C. The Contractor shall install the new copper service line from the new corporation stop to the new curb stop and from the curb stop to the customer service line near the property line. The size will be determined by the Water Division. The minimum size will be 1 -inch to the stop box. The service pipe shall be laid in the mole hole excavation and in the trench with sufficient weaving to allow not less than one foot extra length for each 50 feet of straight FILED line distance. FEB 21 2012 D. Underground water service pipe shall be laid not less than ten (10) feet horizontally from y:SiryClerk the building drain, and shall be separated by undisturbed or compacted earth. Where the Iowa civ, Iowa horizontal separation cannot be met, the water service pipe shall be installed so the bottom of the water service pipe is at least eighteen (18) inches above the top of the building drain line at its highest point. E. A curb stop shall be furnished and installed for each service at the location shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Place a brick or masonry block under each curb box valve. A cast iron service box shall be furnished and installed over the curb stop and held in a truly vertical position, until sufficient backfill has been placed to ensure permanent vertical alignment of the box. The top of the box shall be adjusted and set flush with the finished surface grade. The curb stop shall be located between the curb and the property line and visible from the sidewalk. F. The Contractor shall make a clean cut on the existing service line and connect the new service line at the location as directed by the Engineer. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for visual inspection of all water service materials used in this work. If water pressure is available or will be available within 24 hours of making the new service connection, the new service shall be subjected to normal system pressure and visually inspected for leaks. If any leaks appear, the Contractor shall make repairs. Each water service shall be turned on and observed by the Contractor within the premises to verify adequate pressure and flow. 11/00 s1iamdmnsinecftpecs.ii\02665.dm 02665-6 SECTION 02700 SEWERS PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: FILED FEB 21 2012 '/-:59 PAS �City Clerk �4S tows A. Construction of piping and structures for the collection and transmission of wastewater and storm water. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe - For Sanitary and Storm Sewers ASTM C76, latest edition, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe. 2. ASTM C443, latest edition, Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Culvert and Sewer Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets. 3. ASTM C361, latest edition, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low - Head Pressure Pipe. B. Reinforced Concrete Arch Pipe - For Storm Sewers ASTM C506, latest edition, Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe. C. Vitrified Clay Pipe ASTM C700, latest edition, Standard Specification for Vitrified -Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated. 2. ASTM C425, latest edition, Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified -Clay Pipe and Fittings. D. Ductile Iron Pipe ANSI/AWWA-A21.5/C 151, latest edition, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand -Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. 2. ANSI/AWWA- A21.50/C150, latest edition, Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe. 3. ANSI/AWWA-A21.53/C153, latest edition, Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 in. through 16 in., for Water and Other Liquids. 4. ANSI/AWWA-A21.11/Cl 11, latest edition, Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Gray -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 02700-1 5. ANSUAWWA-A21.4/CI04, latest edition, Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. FILED E. Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe — For Sanitary Sewer Service Lines 1. ASTM D1784, latest edition, Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) FEB 21 2012 Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds c, cK �� tour 2. ASTM D2321, latest edition, Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. 3. ASTM D2729, latest edition, PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings 4. ASTM D3034, latest edition, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings 5. ASTM D3212, latest edition, Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals F. PVC Truss Pipe — For Sanitary Sewers ASTM DI 784, latest edition, Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 2. ASTM D2321, latest edition, Recommended Practiice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe. 3. ASTM D2680, latest edition, Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile -Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping 4. ASTM F477, latest edition, Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe G. Force Main See Section 02710 for force main specifications. Pressure testing requirements for force main are under Part 3 of this specification. H. Manholes ASTM C478, latest edition, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. Intake Structures IDOT Standard Specifications. 2. Iowa Department of Transportation Highway Division "Standard Road Plans Manual", latest edition. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE. A. All products will meet or exceed the minimum standards specified in the applicable 02700-2 references listed in the previous subsection. B. All suppliers of reinforced concrete pipe and manholes must be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation. C. Reinforced concrete pipe shall be manufactured by such means to minimize cage twist. Pipe displaying cage twist in excess of 30 degrees, as demonstrated by the form seam, will be rejected. D. Details of gasket installation and joint assembly are subject to acceptance by the Engineer. E. All materials judged to be of poor quality will be marked by the Engineer and promptly removed from the site by the Contractor and replaced with new. All pipe must pass the leakage tests specified in Part 3 of this section. L04 SUBMITTALS: A. Concrete Pipe: Submit current Iowa Department of Transportation certification. B. Vitrified -Clay Pipe: Submit shop drawings of gasket installation andjoint assembly C. Shoring: Submit plans for all shoring, excluding trench boxes, certified by a professional engineer registered in the State of Iowa. This submittal will not be reviewed for structural adequacy by the City. PART 2 - PRODUCTS FILED FLH 21 2012 2.01 MATERIALS: ,f. Hvt City Clerk A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe - For Sanitary and Storm Sewers Lomacay., Iowa I . Joints: All joints will be confined O-ring gasket meeting ASTM C443 or ASTM C361, as specified. All pipe 36 -inch diameter and smaller will have bell and spigot joints. Pipe larger than 36 -inch diameter may have tongue and groove joints. 2. Wall Thickness: Minimum wall thickness will be B -wall as defined in ASTM C76 or Class C25 as defined in ASTM C361. 3. Pipe Strength: Pipe strength shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum pipe strength shall be Class III as defined in ASTM C76 or as defined in ASTM C361. 4. Pipe Markings: All pipe shall be marked with the date of manufacture and ASTM class. If quadrant reinforcement is used, the top shall be marked on the outside of the pipe. 5. Lift holes are not allowed. 6. Minimum Bedding— Type B per ASTM C 12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe - For Storm Sewers 02700-3 I. Joints a. Circular pipe: All joints will be confined O-ring or profile gasket meeting ASTM C443. All pipe 36 -inch diameter and smaller will have bell and spigot joints. Pipe larger than 36 -inch diameter may have tongue and groove joints. FILED b. Arch pipe: All joints will be sealed with mastic butyl rubber -based sealant FEB 21 2012 meeting the requirements of AASHTO M198-75, Type "B". Wrap exterior of each joint with engineering fabric. y City ci r Iowa City,Ima 2. Wall Thickness a. Circular pipe: Minimum wall thickness will be B -wall as defined in ASTM C76. b. Arch pipe: Minimum wall thickness as defined for in ASTM C506. 3. Pipe Strength a. Circular pipe: Pipe strength shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum pipe strength shall be Class III as defined in ASTM C76. b. Arch pipe: Pipe strength shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum pipe strength shall be Class III A as defined in ASTM C506. 4. Pipe Markings: All pipe shall be marked with the date of manufacture and ASTM class. If quadrant reinforcement is used, the top shall be marked on the outside of the pipe. 5. Lift holes are not allowed. 6. Minimum Bedding — Type B per ASTM C 12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. C. Vitrified Clay Pipe Joints: Shop drawing of gasket installation and joint assembly, subject to approval of the Engineer. 2. All pipe shall be "extra strength" as defined by ASTM C700. 3. Minimum Bedding— Type B per ASTM C12 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. D. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints: Use push on joints unless otherwise specified on the plans. 2. Thickness: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, use Class 52. 3. Lining and Coating: 02700-4 a. Inside of pipe and fittings: Double thickness cement lining and bituminous seal coat conforming to ANSI A21.4. b. Outside of pipe and fittings: Standard bituminous coating conforming to appropriate ANSI. 4. Minimum Bedding — Type 5 per ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 with compacted granular material to the springline of the pipe. E. PVC Truss Pipe — For Sanitary Sewers All PVC truss pipe shall be made of PVC compound having a minimum cell classification of 12454 as defined in ASTM D1784. 2. Joints: Gaskets shall comply with all requirements in ASTM F477 and F913. Joint shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2680 and ASTM D3212. 3. Pipe shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 200 psi at 5% deflection. 4. Minimum Bedding — Crushed stone encasement to the top of the pipe. The minimum bedding depth shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum bedding depth shall be 4" below the pipe. F. Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe — For Sanitary Sewer Service Lines FILED 1. All PVC pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3034. FEB 21 2012 2. Joints: ASTM D3212 gasketed. `/;Sy P City Cie, 3. All 4" and 6" services shall be SDR 23.5. 10"' C'4', Iowa 4. Minimum Bedding — Crushed stone encasement to 6" above pipe. The minimum bedding depth shall be as specified on the plans. If not specified, the minimum bedding depth shall be 4" below the pipe. G. Corrugated Plastic Pipe for Subsurface Drainage Corrugated PVC with a smooth interior wall shall meet the standards of ASTM F949 and be constructed of resins meeting the requirements of ASTM D1784, cell class 12454B. 2. Corrugated HDPE with a smooth interior wall shall meet the standards of AASHTO M-252 and M-294. 3. Minimum Bedding— Drainable stone encasement to 6" above pipe. H. Force Main See Section 02710 for force main specifications. Pressure testing requirements for force main are under Part 3 of this specification. 02700-5 1. Manholes Joints: All joints will be confined O-ring or profile gasket meeting ASTM C443. 2. No lift holes through the entire wall. 3. Mark date of manufacture. FILED 4. Inverts: Precast and cast -in-place inverts must provide a channel at least one-half the depth of the pipe and match the full cross-sectional area of the pipe. All FEs 21 2012 junctions and changes in directions of inverts shall be smooth and rounded to the H .5ry k maximum extent possible to supplement flow through the manholes. Iowa City, towa 5. All manholes are 4 -foot diameter unless noted otherwise. 6. Manhole frame and lid to be Neenah R-1670, self-sealing, East Jordan 1117, self-sealing or approved equal. If in paved area, casting shall also be non -rocking. 7. Manholes in paving shall have an interior Cretex chimney seal (or approved equal) that spans from the casting to the cone section. J. Bedding: Granular bedding material shall consist of porous backfill material, IDOT Standard Specification Section 4131 and Section 4109, Gradation No. 29. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE: A. Inspect before installation. Remove and replace defective sections. B. Alignment and Grade Install to line and grade indicated on plans using laser and check elevation as required to maintain grade. 2. Driving down to grade by striking or with excessive force from excavating equipment is not allowed. 3. Blocking the pipe to grade with wood, stones or other materials is not allowed. C. Bedding Support on compacted granular bedding material using the type of bedding specified on the plans. If no bedding is specified, use the minimum bedding specified in Part 2 of these specifications. 2. Place bedding material to ensure that there are no voids under or alongside the length of the pipe. Slice with shovel to remove voids. Compact with pneumatic equipment. 3. Hand shape bell holes so that only pipe barrel receives bearing pressure. 02700-6 D. Connections A-LOK shall be used for all sanitary sewer connections to manholes unless approved by the Engineer. 2. Subdrains shall be connected to storm sewer intakes and manholes using MOT standard intake outlet detail RF -19C. CMP outlet shall be used unless approved by the Engineer. E. Jointing Clean and lubricate all joints prior to assembly. 2. Join per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Suitable couplings shall be used for jointing dissimilar materials. FILED F. Backfill as specified in Section 02220. FEB 2 d5'S4 Z01Z G. Clean pipeline upon completion. let Crh Clerk H. Tolerances IMQ%Lo%z Any deviation in a sewer pipes section more than 1/8 inch per foot of pipe diameter from the horizontal or vertical alignment, as established by the Engineer, will not be allowed; and all sewer laid incorrectly, as determined by the Engineer, must be relaid at the Contractor's expense. This tolerance in grade will be allowed only if the sewer is designed at a slope sufficient to prevent backfall when its limits are reached. Under no condition will a sewer be accepted when one or more pipe lengths have been installed without "fall". 2. The completed sewer must be laid so nearly in a perfect line that an ordinary electric lantern held at center of the sewer at a manhole may be wholly visible to the eye at the level of the sewer at the next manhole. 3. Sags and reverse slope on gravity pipe is prohibited. Remove and relay pipe to proper grade. 3.02 TESTING OF PIPE: A. Lamp all pipe to visually inspect for defects and debris. B. Leakage Tests: Perform leakage tests on all sanitary sewers as follows: Perform after completion of backfill. Perforin after groundwater has returned to normal level. Furnish test plugs, water pumps, appurtenances, and labor. Install bulkheads for testing and weirs for measurement as necessary. Groundwater elevation from observation wells or excavations are subject to acceptance by the Engineer. 02700-7 a. If groundwater is more than two foot above top of pipe at upper end, conduct infiltration or low-pressure air tests. If maximum pressure exerted by groundwater is greater than 4 psig, conduct infiltration test. b. If groundwater is less than two foot above top of pipe at upper end, conduct exfiltration or low-pressure air tests. FILED C. If pipe is larger than 27 -inch, air test is not allowed. FEB 21 2012 4. Exfiltration or infiltration test performed on sections of approved length (maximum it:Ctycut '/2 -mile for sewers) and before connection to buildings. Low-pressure air tests Iowa city, Iowa performed on manhole -to -manhole sections of pipeline. 5. Low-pressure air test: a. Equipment (1) Designed for testing sewers using low-pressure air. (2) Provide air regulator or safety valve so air pressure does not exceed 8 psig. (3) All air through single control panel. b. Procedure (1) Perform from manhole -to -manhole after backfill. (2) Place pneumatic plugs: (a) sealing length: equal to or greater than pipe diameter, (b) capable of resisting internal test pressure without external bracing or blocking. (3) Introduce low-pressure air into sealed line and achieve internal air pressure 4 psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by groundwater above pipe invert. (4) Limit internal pressure in sealed line below 8 psig. (5) Allow two minutes minimum for air pressure to stabilize. Disconnect low-pressure air hose from control panel. (6) Acceptable Test Result: (a) Minimum time for pressure to drop from 3.5 to 2.5 psig greater than maximum pressure exerted by ground water above pipe invert. Pipe diameter Time in in inches Minutes 4 2.0 6 3.0 02700-8 (b) Minimum allowable time for sewers with more than one size of pipe: based on largest diameter reduced by 0.5 min. (c) If groundwater level at time of testing is above the sewer, air pressure shall be increased 0.43 psig for each foot the groundwater is above the flow line of the pipe. C. If pressure drop exceeds 1.0 psig during the test period, the test shall be considered to have failed. Locate and repair leaks and retest as required. 6. Infiltration Test a. Dewater and conduct test for at least 24 hours. b. Locate and repair leaks, and retest as required. C. Allowable infiltration, including manholes, fittings, and connections: maximum 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per 24 hours. Exfiltration Test a. Subject sewers to internal pressure by: (1) plugging the inlet of the upstream and downstream manholes, (2) filling sewer and upstream manhole with clean water until the water elevation in the manhole is two feet above top of sewer, or two feet above the existing ground water in the trench, whichever is the higher elevation. b. Use suitable ties, braces, and wedges to secure stoppers against leakage from test pressure, where conditions between manholes may result in test pressure causing leakage. C. Rate of leakage from sewer: Determined by the amount of water required to maintain the initial water elevation for one hour from the start of the test. d. Allowable exfiltration same as allowable infiltration. If the average head above the section being tested exceeds two feet above top of pipe, then the allowable exfiltration can be increased by 5% for each additional foot of head. e. Modification to this test only as approved by the Engineer. f. Locate and repair leaks and retest as required. 02700-9 8 4.0 10 5.0 12 5.5 FILED F 15 7.5 18 8.5 FEB 21 2012 21 10.0 Y. 59 PM 24 11.5 City Clerk 27 13.0 Iowa City, Iowa (b) Minimum allowable time for sewers with more than one size of pipe: based on largest diameter reduced by 0.5 min. (c) If groundwater level at time of testing is above the sewer, air pressure shall be increased 0.43 psig for each foot the groundwater is above the flow line of the pipe. C. If pressure drop exceeds 1.0 psig during the test period, the test shall be considered to have failed. Locate and repair leaks and retest as required. 6. Infiltration Test a. Dewater and conduct test for at least 24 hours. b. Locate and repair leaks, and retest as required. C. Allowable infiltration, including manholes, fittings, and connections: maximum 200 gallons per inch diameter per mile per 24 hours. Exfiltration Test a. Subject sewers to internal pressure by: (1) plugging the inlet of the upstream and downstream manholes, (2) filling sewer and upstream manhole with clean water until the water elevation in the manhole is two feet above top of sewer, or two feet above the existing ground water in the trench, whichever is the higher elevation. b. Use suitable ties, braces, and wedges to secure stoppers against leakage from test pressure, where conditions between manholes may result in test pressure causing leakage. C. Rate of leakage from sewer: Determined by the amount of water required to maintain the initial water elevation for one hour from the start of the test. d. Allowable exfiltration same as allowable infiltration. If the average head above the section being tested exceeds two feet above top of pipe, then the allowable exfiltration can be increased by 5% for each additional foot of head. e. Modification to this test only as approved by the Engineer. f. Locate and repair leaks and retest as required. 02700-9 8. Force Main Pressure Testing a. Test liquid piping systems after filling with water in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C600 for Pressure Piping; inspect all visible joints and FILED valves for leakage after piping has been under pressure 24 hours. Minimum test pressure for the force main is 150 psi. FEH 21 2012 b. Valve off, or otherwise isolate instruments, controls or other piping 54 y cir�7yy. M accessories which would be damaged by test pressure. InwaC y,19WB C. Provide test pumps, test plugs, pipe, and gauges, and make required piping connections. d. Retest piping showing leakage; replace or repair defective pipe, fittings and valves disclosed during testes to satisfaction of Engineer. C. Deflection Tests: Perform deflection tests on all PVC truss sewers as follows: The mandrel (go/no-go) device shall be cylindrical in shape and constructed with nine (9) evenly spaced arms or prongs. The mandrel dimension shall be 95% of the flexible pipe's published ASTM average inside diameter. Allowances for pipe wall thickness or ovality (from shipment, heat, shipping loads, poor production, etc.) shall not be deducted from the ASTM average inside diameter, but shall be counted as part of the 5% allowance. The contact length of the mandrel's arms shall equal or exceed the nominal diameter of the sewer to be inspected. Critical mandrel dimensions shall carry a tolerance off .001 ". Proving rings shall be available. 2. The mandrel inspection shall be conducted no earlier than 30 days after reaching final trench backfill grade provided, in the opinion of the Engineer, sufficient water densification or rainfall has occurred to thoroughly settle the soil throughout the entire trench depth. Short-term (tested 30 days after installation) deflection shall not exceed 5% of the pipe's average inside diameter. The mandrel shall be hand pulled by the Contractor through all sewer lines. Any sections of the sewer not passing the mandrel test shall be uncovered and the Contractor shall replace and recompact the embedment backfill material to the satisfaction of the Engineer. These repaired sections shall be retested with the go/no-go mandrel until passing. 3. The Engineer shall be responsible for approving the mandrel. Proving rings may be used to assist in this. Drawings of the mandrel with complete dimensioning shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer for each diameter and type of flexible pipe. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES, MANHOLE BOXES AND INTAKE STRUCTURES.- A. TRUCTURES. A. Set bases true to line and elevation on minimum six-inch granular backfill material. B. Install O-ring or profile gasket in joints between sections conforming to manufacturer's standard. C. Cast in place inverts must provide a channel at least one-half the depth of the pipe and match the full cross-sectional area of the pipe. All junctions and changes in direction shall be smooth and rounded to the maximum extent possible to supplement flow through the 02700-10 structure. D. Plug holes for handling with mortar. E. Lay grading rings in full bed and joint of mortar without subsequent grouting, flushing or filling; bond thoroughly. F. Set frames with top conforming to finished ground or pavement surface as indicated and directed. Grading rings plus the frame height shall not exceed 24 inches. G. Set frames in full bed of RAM-NEK or equal to fill and make watertight space between masonry top and bottom flange of frame. H. Backfill as specified in Section 02220. FILED FEET 21 2012 Clean manhole upon completion. q-; 5S PM� cur clerk Inspect for visible leaks after groundwater has returned to normal level. Repairel ak . I lawa 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW.• A. Storm Sewers: At the end of each working day, the Contractor shall reestablish the full capacity of any drainage system affected by construction. Diversion of storm water into the sanitary sewer system is not allowed. B. Sanitary Sewers: The Contractor shall at all times maintain full capacity in the sanitary sewer system and protect the system from storm water. C. If pumps are used for the diversion of flow, the Contractor shall have a stand-by pump readily at hand. The Contractor shall provide the Police Department and the Supervisor of the Iowa City Wastewater Treatment Plant with phone numbers where the responsible person may be reached 24 hours a day to make immediate repairs and/or replacement in case of diversion system failure. Diversion of sanitary sewage to storm sewers or waterways is not allowed. 3.05 CONFLICTS A. Provide temporary support for existing water, gas, telephone, power or other utilities or services that cross the trench. B. Compact backfill under the existing utility crossing as specified in Section 02200. C. Separate gravity sewers from water mains by horizontal distance of at least 10 feet unless: 1. Top of sewer is at least 18 inches below the bottom of the water main. 2. Sewer is placed in separate trench or in same trench on bench of undisturbed earth with at least three feet separation form the water main. D. Use water main materials for gravity sewers with less than 10 feet of horizontal distance and top of the sewer less than 18 inches below the bottom of the water main; maintain a linear separation of at least two feet. 02700-11 E. Where gravity sewer crosses over water main or service or where the top of sewer is less than 18 inches below the bottom of the water main or service, the following requirements shall apply: 1. The sewer may not be placed closer than 6 inches below a water main or 18 inches above a water main. The separation distance shall be the maximum feasible in all cases. 2. Use 20 -foot length of water main material as specified for gravity sewer centered on the water main. Both joints shall be located as far from the water main as possible. 3. The sewer and the water main must be adequately supported and have watertight joints. 4. Backfill trench with low permeability soil for the 20 -foot length centered on the crossing. F. Sanitary sewer force mains and water mains shall be separated by a horizontal distance of at least 10 feet unless: 1. The force main is constructed of water main material meeting a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi. 2. The force main is laid at least four linear feet from the water main. 06/03 shnn:d�enyiie FVlxcs-iiW27W.dm FILED FEB 21 2012 !;,I 14 Clet Iowa City. Iowa 02700-12 SECTION 02710 FILED FEB 21 2012 -V:59 C'PA GRINDER PUMP STATION Iowa PA a PART1-GENERAL 1.01 Contractor shall supply and install a Barnes Duplex factory pre -wired 60" diameter by 168" deep grinder pump station with the grinder pumps, required electrical cables, connection boxes, and the Grinder Pump Duplex Control Panel. 1.02 General layout of the grinder pump station installation is shown on the plans. 1.03 After installation of the Grinder Pump Station, coordinate with Iowa City Public Works Department for start up of the grinder pump station. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GRINDER PUMP STATION A. Install Grinder Pump Station as shown on plans and in full compliance with manufacturer's installation manual. B. The Contractor is responsible to install ballast to prevent buoyancy. C. Required ballast is a minimum of 5.0 CY of concrete. D. Design duty point with one pump running is 58 gpm at a TDH of 16 feet. Minimum HP required is 2 HP, Barnes Model SGVF. E. Pumps shall be rail mounted for removal by service personnel without requiring entry into the wet well. Provide check valves and isolation valves suitable for wastewater use. 2.02 PUMP STATION WET WELL BASIN A. The pump station wet well basin shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester resin. B. The pump station wet well shall be constructed with wall thickness sufficient to withstand a water saturated sand load of 120 lbs per cubic foot with a 1.5 (minimum) factor of safety. C. The pump station wet well shall include at ballast support flange around the radius of the basin to allow for installation of concrete ballast. D. The pump station basin shall be factory pre -wired. E. The pump station basin shall be duplex configuration. 02710-1 F. The pump station shall be equipped with a lockable aluminum cover allowing convenient access to the pumps. G. Provide a bug free vent for the pump station wet well. Z03 GRAVITYSEWER LINE Fes 2I Mt 3: A. Pipe: 6" Schedule 40 PVC pipe. Iowa Cay, Iowa B. Pipe: 4" Schedule 40 PVC pipe. C. Install the gravity sewer line from the Lodge Building to the grinder pump station as shown on the drawings. Cut inlet opening in tank in the recommended inlet zone as required in the manufacturers installation manual and install hub. 2.04 PRESSURE DISCHARGE LINE A. Forcemain to be 3" high density, polyethylene (HDPE), AWWA C901 DR 11 200 psi, IPS pipe size. B. Install pressure discharge line from the grinder pump station to the discharge manholes shown on Sheet SP6. Install check valve and shut-off valve as shown on the plans. ZOS CHECK VALVES A. Check valves PVC, Type 1, Grade I, polyvinylchloride ASTM D1784, Buna-N Flapper, stainless steel hardware, manufacturer R & G Sloane, Chemtrol, or equal. B. Install check valve next to shut off valve as shown on the drawings. 2.06 SHUT OFF VALVES A. Valve type; ITS (OD) or use PE pipe, SDR 11; working pressure 200 psi; CEPEX Performance Series curb stop or equal. B. Instal I shut off valve next to check valve as shown on the plans. C. Valve box and over; valve box to conform with SUDAS except valve box cover marked "S" for sanitary sewage. 2.07 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. The pump station shall be energized under the requirements of Division 16 with 208V, 3 phase power. B. Install non-fused disconnect switch adjacent to Grinder Pump Control Panel on side of the trash enclosure as indicated on contract documents. Z08 GRINDER PUMP DUPLEX CONTROL PANEL & ACCESSORIES A. Provide a UL listed, integrated, wall mounted, duplex pump control panel to control pump operation and provide malfunction warning. Control panel shall be Stealth Control Panel or equal. 02710-2 11 C. M 2. 3. 4. S. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. H. Provide fiberglass NEMA 311 (minimum rating), lockable enclosure. Include all required pump and alarm circuit breakers and transformers. Provide IEC rated motor contactors. Provide manual pump start push buttons Provide terminal strip and ground lug for incoming connections. Provide alarm light and audible alarm with silence. Provide 7 digit elapsed time meter with running meter indicator Provide moisture sensors. Provide cycle counter. FILED FE�l l 1 2012 4: sq PAt CitY Iowa cityIM Control panel shall automatically alternate lead and lag pump to even wear on units. Control panel shall start pumps when called for operation by float level system. The pump control panel shall be prewired and shall be ready to accept a single point electrical connection of 208 volt, 3 phase power. Provide a float level control system for control of pumps and wet well level. Provide floats to be Feld adjusted to perform as follows: a. Low level—all pumps off b. Lead high level—lead pump start c. Lag high level—lag pump start (lead pump already running or failed) d. Lag low level—lag pump stop e. High level emergency—trigger alarm lights and horn 2. Floats shall be mounted into basin utilizing a guide rail system with a heavy duty slide bracket. 3. Floats shall be field adjustable. 4. Floats and mounting system shall be specifically designed for installation in a wastewater filled wet well environment. Install the Grinder Pump Control Panel on side of the trash enclosure as indicated on contract documents. E. Connect the electrical cable for grinder pump power supply and the float control cables to the grinder pump control panel as shown on the wiring schematic in manufacturer's installation manual. Provide junction box or boxes such that pumps may be easily disconnected and removed from the pump station without removing all power wiring from pump station to Grinder Pump Duplex Control Panel. 02710-3 PART 3 — EXECUTION A. Provide a complete operating installation in compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions and as described in the contract documents. B. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of on-site time by manufacturer's representative for pump station startup and owner training. FILED FEB 21 2012 °I P ' 6city clerk Iowa City. WIP 02710-4 SECTION 02751 DIRECTIONAL BORING AND DRILLING FILED FEB 21 2012 PART 1 - GENERAL ?:Sy em IaWRCierk �' toWa 1.01 SUMMARY.• A. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment to install carrier pipe by directional boring and drilling. B. This specification covers thrust -restrained Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe. Pipe is intended for use in pressure -related potable water delivery systems. C. Pipe material including carrier pipe and fittings will be provided by the Contractor. D. Boring pits will be excavated and backfilled by the Contractor. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid PVC Compounds and Chlorinated PVC Compounds 2. ASTM D2837 Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials 3. ASTM D3139 Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 4. ASTM F477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Jointing Plastic Pipe B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) AWWA C900: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inch through 12 inch, for Water 2. AWWA C906-99: Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 inch through 63 inch, for Water Distribution and Transmission C. American Railway Engineering Association "Specifications for Pipelines Conveying Non - Flammable Substances," latest edition D. Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT) Standard Specifications, latest edition L03 SUBMITTALS: 02751-1 A. Carrier Pipe Materials: To be provided by the Contractor FILED B. Boring Pit: To be provided by the Contractor FEB 21 2012 C. When boring is complete, contractor shall provide Engineer with a plan and profile of the ,t:gq pM, bore path. City Clerk iowaC4' Lova D. Record and submit notes of actual boring operations with field load conditions. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. Only workers experienced in boring and jacking operations shall be used to perform the work. Statement of qualifications shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to the start of work. B. Provide efficient, useful monitoring devices on the equipment so the operator and Engineer can compare the field conditions with the design and effectively monitor the loads on the pipe as it is being installed. C. Engineer will survey and record top of pavement elevations before and after boring operations as necessary. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 CARRIER PIPE MATERL9LS: A. PVC pipe for directional boring shall be C900/RJ. PVC restrained joint pipe (Certs-lok) from CertainTeed Corporation will be supplied by the Contractor. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES: A. Contractor will locate underground facilities via potholing at critical locations. B. Contractor is responsible for modifying boring operations to prevent damage to existing facilities. 3.02 DIRECTIONAL BORING EQUIPMENT.• A. The drilling equipment shall be capable of placing the pipe as shown on the plans. The installation shall be by a steerable drilling tool capable of installing continuous runs of pipe without intermediate pits, a minimum distance of 400 feet. B. The directional boring machine shall be supplied with an output signal inside the housing of the drill bit. The output signal shall have a constant output signal to allow a person to track the location of the beacon at all times. C. The drilling machine shall be equipped with a drilling fluid compatible for the onsite conditions. 02751-2 D. The directional head shall be capable of accepting a variety of cutting bits for varied soil conditions. 3.03 CONTROL OFLINE AND GRADE: A. Engineer will provide control surveying and grade stakes as necessary. Engineer will survey and record top of pavement or rail elevations before and after boring operations as necessary. B. During the installation of carrier pipes, the Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring alignment and elevation of said pipes. The Contractor shall provide control points, reference marks and equipment for this purpose. The drill bit shall be located a maximum of every 5 feet. The operator of the drilling unit shall check the bore path and position of boring pit at every five feet and make necessary correction to stay along the alignment. C. Allowable deviations from the plan alignment and elevation are as follows: The guidance system shall be capable of installing pie within 1-1/2 inch of the plan vertical dimensions and 2 inches of the plan horizontal dimensions. 2. In addition, care shall be taken to assure that continuous positive or negative grads, as shown on the plans, are maintained in the installed carrier pipe. 3. The Contractor shall be required to remove and reinstall pipes which vary i�Ptl} D and alignment from these tolerances. LL 3.04 PILOTHOLE INSTALLATIONS. FEES 21 2012 E9�' 01Y a� A. The pilot hole shall be drilled along the path shown on the project plans I0R1G44lowa At the completion of the pilot hole drilling, the Contractor shall provide a tabulation of coordinates, including elevation data, referenced to the drilled point entry, which accurately describe the location of the pilot hole. C. Pilot hole alignment shall be accepted and approved by the Engineer prior to reaming and pipe installation. 3.05 REAM and PULLBACK OPERATIONS: A. Reaming shall be sufficient to prevent damage to pipe or pipe crossing. B. The maximum allowable tensile load imposed on the pipeline pull section shall not exceed 90% of the product of the Specific Minimum Yield Strength of the pipe and the area of the pipe section, or as specified by the pipe manufacturer. C. A swivel shall be used to connect the pipeline pull section to the reaming assembly to minimize torsional stress imposed on the section. D. The pipeline pull section shall be supported as it proceeds during pull back so that it moves freely and the pie and pipe coating are not damaged. E. The pipeline pull section shall be installed in the ream hole in such a manner that external 02751-3 pressures are minimized. F. In case of a pull back where the bore hole will be abandoned or where voids are created, the Contractor shall fill voids with grout injected under pressure using approved methods. 3.06 DIRECTIONAL BORING OPERATIONS: A. The drilling machine shall be set up at such a location to avoid disruption of private yard and landscaping. B. Pipes shall be joined before being subjected to the boring process, or after they have FILED reached final position, depending on the type of pipe and nature of the joint and jointing material. FEB 21 2012 4•.b4 PM C. The method of boring, in each case, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the city clerk governing agency. Iowa City, lows D. Once boring has been started, it shall be continuous until completion of the boring operations in order to reduce the possibility of a so-called "stuck" pipe and to minimize the creep of the soil into the face, even though this may involve working outside the normal working days. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation for effort required to maintain continuous boring operations. The Engineer reserves the right to waive the requirement for continuous boring if such waiver is approved by the appropriate governing agency. E. Care shall be taken during boring operations to ensure that the pipe remains true to line and grade. No open cut within boring limits shown on the plans shall be permitted without written authorization of the Engineer and the governing agency. G. Pull back forces shall not exceed the allowable pulling forces for the pipe being installed H. The drilling fluid, such as bentonite, shall be used for lubricating the pipe during pull-back, forcing spoils out of the pipe pit, assisting in holding the hole open during pull back, and hardening into a clay substance around the outside of the conduit, preventing settlement of the ground. Adequate drilling fluids shall be used to avoid a "hydra -lock" condition. Disposal of excess fluid and spoils shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any damage to property, landscaping or trees caused by Contracot's operation shall be replaced to the Owner's satisfaction and at no additional cost to the Owner. J. The Contractor shall make necessary provisions to keep water and soil out of the installed piping systems. K. Obstructions to the progress of the pipe, such as roots, boulders or portions of former structures, shall be removed and deviations from line and grade shall be avoided if such deviation will result in ill-fitting joints. The use of explosives for removing obstructions is prohibited. 02751-4 3.07 RESTRAINED JOINT PVC PIPE ASSEMBLYAND INSTALLATION: A. Follow manufacture's instructions and recommendations for assembly and installation. B. Prevent dirt from getting into the couplings and, especially, the gasket grooves. If dirt does get into the gasket grooves, the gaskets must be removed and cleaned, and the grooves must be cleaned, and the gaskets then reinserted before they can be installed into the pipes. C. When pulling in restrained joint PVC pipe, do not exceed the maximum recommended pulling or bending limits for the pipe. When the pull -in is complete, apply pushing forces to each end of the pipeline to relieve any stretch that may be remaining. 3.08 CARRIER PIPE INSTALLATION.• A. The carrier pipes shall be the class, type and size as indicated on the plans and specified herein. This will be supplied by the Contractor. B. If the plans call for the carrier pipe to be installed without a casing pipe, the requirements for installation of casing pipe as detailed herein shall apply. This shall include filling of voids between undisturbed embankment and outside of pipe with specified grout. 3.09 SEALING: A. After installation of carrier pipes within casing pipes, the Contractor shall seal ends of casing pipes with weak concrete bulkheads a minimum of one -foot thick or manufactured end seals as indicated. 3.10 TESTING. A. Testing procedures for carrier pipe shall follow those outlined in Sections 02660 — Water Distribution. 06/06 Ow.dknyintt�,xcs-i10275 Edo, END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 -r: 5q fAl ChX.Clerk Ion. Iowa 02751-5 SECTION 02880 FILED IRRIGATION SYSTEM FEB 21 2012 '&5f rM `4 PART 1 - GENERAL 4w,-- SIowa 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. The following irrigation system when fully completed shall water all areas as shown on the plans. It is the intent of the diagrammatic irrigation plan to install all products within the areas to be irrigated. B. The Owner shall supply the irrigation components and materials as listed under Part 2 2.1. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, additional parts/components and supervision required to construct a fully -functioning irrigation system. C. Irrigation system shall be installed as a complete coordinated system. All system components shall be coordinated to provide a fully compatible functioning system. D. Irrigation system components shall be installed with Hunter equipment, including controllers, heads and valves. E. Provide and install irrigation controller on separate circuit. Coordinate location with Owner, 120 VAC wiring by Electrical Contractor. F. Provide and install sleeves under walks and drives as required. Both piping and 24 VAC wiring sleeves shall be schedule 40 PVC. Size, depth, and location as required. Coordinate with Owner. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to ensure adequate and timely irrigation of all areas to be irrigated. 1.3 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. The Owner shall deliver all Owner -supplied materials to the site. All other materials shall be delivered to the site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for shipment and protection of materials. B. Handling of materials as recommended by manufacturer. C. Storage of all materials in locations designated and approved by Owner. 02880-1 L4 CODES, INSPECTIONS, AND PERMITS A. The entire installation shall fully comply with all local and state laws and ordinances, and with all the established codes applicable thereto. B. The Contractor shall take out all required permits, arrange for all necessary inspections and shall pay any fees and expenses in conjunction with the same as a part of the work under this section. 1.5 SITE DISTURBANCES A. FILED Take precautions to ensure that equipment and vehicles do not disturb or damage existing site grading, walks, curbs, pavements, utilities, plants, and other existing items and FEB 21 2012 elements on public and private property. 55' PM B. city Clerk Verify locations and depths of all underground utilities prior to commencing excavation. Iowa City, tawa . C. Repair and/or return to original condition any damage caused by Contractor's negligence at no cost to the Owner. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: I . Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during this work. 2. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility Owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in full operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Owner and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 4. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to the Owner and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. S. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed after complete deactivation. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active. B. Protection of Persons and Property: I . Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post warning lights. 2. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, curbs, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by this work. 02880-2 L7 GUARANTEE A. For a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of work performed under this Section, the Contractor shall promptly furnish and install any and all parts and equipment which prove defective in materials, workmanship, or installation at no additional cost to Owner. B. During the one (1) year guarantee period, the Contractor shall drain the irrigation system and winterize it for each winter during the guarantee period and shall put the irrigation system back into operation in the spring at no additional cost to Owner. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. The Owner shall provide the irrigation components for the project as listed under Part 2 2.1. No submittals are necessary for items being supplied by the Owner. For all other items not listed, the Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of manufacturer's technical data and specifications for all component parts of the underground sprinkler system. Include manufacturer's printed literature for operation and maintenance of operating system elements. B. Describe in detail, in the bid for this work, any proposed deviation or variance from the equipment or installation described herein. FILED PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL FEB 21 2012 59 P C. C�r Inwa c;ui', iowa A. All irrigation components, including irrigation heads, electric valves, controllers, etc., shall be Hunter as manufactured by Hunter Industries, 1940 Diamond Street, San Marcos, CA 92078. Said equipment and other products are called out on the Irrigation Plan and/or are listed in the specifications below. B. The Owner shall provide the following items for the Contractor to install as shown on the plans: 1. Hunter 1-25 Series Rotor Heads with #13 nozzles; 2. Hunter Pro Series 4" Pop -Up heads with MPR Nozzles; 3. Hunter QVC Quick Coupling Valve, I'; 4. Hunter ICV -101 Series Electric Valves, I 5. Hunter ICV -201 Series Electric Valves, 1'; 6. Hunter ACC -99D ACC Series 2 -wire decoder controller; 7. Hunter ICD 100 Single Station decoder; 8. Hunter WR-CLIK wireless sensor; 9. PVC Mainline Class 200 BE, 2"; 10. PVC Lateral Class 200 BE, various sizes as shown on plans; 11. 2 -wire twisted pair 14 AWG standard decoder cable. C. Any materials not shown on the previous list are to be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor's cost. 02880-3 Z2 COPPER PIPING FILED A. As per local codes. FEB 21 7n12 *:" e&I 2.3 P.V.C. t City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa A. Sizes I" diameter and larger. B. Virgin, high impact, poly -vinyl chloride (P.V.C.) pipe, Schedule 1120-1220. Mainline piping: Class 200, having a minimum of 200 psi working pressure rating. Lateral piping: Class 200, having a minimum of 200 psi working pressure rating. 2.4 2.5 2.6 C. Continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name, material, size, and schedule or type. D. Pipe: Conform to CS 207-60 or latest revision. E. Material: Conform to CS 256-63 or latest revision. P. V C. PIPE FITTINGS A. Schedule 40 P.V.C. solvent weld or belled fittings; saddles prohibited. B. Conform to ASTM D1784, ASTM D2466. POLYETHYLENE PIPE A. SDR 15 high Density Polyethylene water pipe: (PE 3408, ANSI/AW WA C901); black with blue stripe. Provide pipe homogeneous through out and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign material, blisters, wrinkles and dents. SADDLE TEES A. None unless approved by Owner. 2.7 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Hunter 1-25 Series Rotor Heads with #13 Nozzles. B. Hunter Pro Series 4" Pop -Up Heads with MPR Nozzles. C. All heads are to be connected to pipe with a factory -assembled o -ring sealed swingjoint. D. Match precipitation will be required on all full and part circle sprinklers on the same zone. 02880-4 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 FILED FEB 21 2012 ELECTRICAL CONTROL VALVES 14 PM C Clerk A. Hunter ICV Series. — B. All valves are to be combined when possible into groups of three within an oversized valve box. Valve box to be flush with finished grade. C. Valves shall be normally closed, requiring the solenoid to be energized to be opened. CONTROL CABLE A. All electrical control and ground wire shall be "UF" direct burial. B. To wire path; jacketed, twisted pair 14 AWG standard decoder cable to 10000 ft. C. Decoder to solenoid: Standard pair 14 AWG to 400 ft. D. Provide one spare control wire from controller along entire main line. CONTROL EQUIPMENT A. Low voltage system manufactured expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of underground irrigation systems. Provide unit(s) of capacity to suit number of circuits. 1. Hunter ACC -99D Decoder Series. B. Transformer: To convert service voltage to control voltage of 24 volts. C. Circuit Control: Each circuit variable from approximately 5 to 60 minutes. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each circuit. D. Timing Device: Adjustable, 24-hour and 7 or 14 day clocks to operate any time of day and skip any day in a 7 or 14 day period. E. Settings: solid state. F. Coordinate location of controller with Owner. See plan. G. No time lag between sections or stations. H. Install rain sensor (Hunter Wireless Rain-Clik). QUICK COUPLING VALVES A. Located in intervals along mainline pipe. Verify final locations with Owner. B. Install quick coupling valve in 10" Valve Box. C. Provide matching quick coupler keys with swivel hose end connection. One key for each 3 coupling valves. 02880-5 Z12 VALVE BOX FOR ELECTRICAL CONTROL VALVES AND QUICK COUPLING VALVES A. All valve box locations to be approved by Owner prior to installation FILED B. Single Valve Setup: 12" circular box. FEB 21 2012 C. Multi -Valve Setup: Oversized box. Use manufacturer's recommended extension kits if required. y•.5t PM City Cleric Iowa Cay, Iowa D. Quick Coupling Valves: 10 " circular box 2.13 SLEEVES A. Coordinate with Owner as necessary for locations. Install schedule 40 PVC for sleeves to accommodate irrigation line and wiring. 2.14 SWING JOINTS A. Hunter SJ Swing Joint Assembly, or approved equal. 2.15 BACKFLOW PREVENTER (By Plumbing Contractor, See Mechanical Plans) A. See mechanical plans for Backflow Preventer. Install as per manufacturer's specifications, requirements and recommendations. B. Locate in building interior as shown on plan. C. Provide steel supports and anchor into concrete floor to support backflow device. Bolt backflow device to support assembly. D. Field -verify the dimensions of the proposed location of the backflow preventer versus the interior room layout and other mechanical/electrical components to ensure there is sufficient space to mount components as directed prior to ordering. 2.16 ISOLATION VALVE A. Provide and install isolation valves as shown on plan. B. NIBCO Brass Ball Valve S -FP -600A two-piece valve, or equal. Install as per manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and requirements. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Design Pressure: Verify static water pressure prior to bid. B. Location of irrigation line: Locate lines as per manufacturer's recommendations. Make adjustments as necessary to avoid plantings and other obstructions. Exact locations of 02880-6 piping, valves, and other components shall be established by the Contractor in the field at time of installation and on the approved shop drawings. C. Minimum Water Coverage: Design to deliver the equivalent of 1.5" of rainfall per week. System total operating time not to exceed 6 hours per 24-hour day. D. Minor adjustments to system field layout will be permitted to clear existing fixed obstructions; final field layout shall be acceptable to the Owner based on the approved shop drawings. 3.1 TIMING FILED A. Coordinate time schedule with Owner. FEB 21 2012 3.3 INSTALLATION 4: Sf FM city clerk A. Excavating and backfilling: I . Excavation shall include all materials encountered, except materials that cannot be excavated by normal mechanical means. a. Rock excavation: Submit a unit cost per foot of trench for rock excavation. Include in price additional backfill materials required to replace excavated rock. 2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and installation of pipe and fittings. 3. If the pulling method is used, the pipe "plow" shall be a vibratory type. Starting and finishing holes for pipe pulling shall not exceed a 1'-0" by 3'-0" opening. 4. Excavate to depths required to provide 2" depth of earth fill or sand bedding for piping when rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered. 5. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place and compact fill in layers not greater than 8" depth. a. Provide approved earth fill or sand to a point 4" above the top of pipe. b. Overfill with approved excavated or borrow fill materials free of lumps or rocks larger than 3" in any dimension. Level, compact and water settle. Should settlement occur, refill and re -sod as required. 6. Except as indicated, install irrigation mains with a minimum cover of 18" based on finished grades. Install irrigation laterals with a minimum cover of 12" based on finished grades. 7. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not leave open trenches or partially filled trenches open overnight. B. Polyethylene Pipe (PE) I. Install polyethylene pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. 2. Where necessary saw cut polyethylene pipe, using a square -in sawing device to ensure a square cut. Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation. 3. All joints to be fusion butt -welded as per pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by acceptable methods when pipe installation is not in progress and over all non- working hours. 02880-7 C. FILED FEB 21 2012 4:SR PM City Clem Iowa City, Iowa FBI E. Fittings, valves, and accessories: I. Install fittings, valves, risers, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Provide concrete thrust blocks where required at fittings valves and all change of directions. 2. Install rotors with manufactured o -ring swing joints. 3. Install quick -coupling valves in 10" valve box on 360 -degree swing joint assembly as per manufacturer's recommendation with stabilizer. 4. Install fittings and accessories as shown or required to complete the system. 5. Install controller: a. Coordinate location with Owner. b. Waterproof wire conduit to provide a complete, waterproof, permanent and neatjob. C. Ground controller in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Install in -ground control valves in a valve access box as indicated. 11. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level foundation at proper grade to provide drainage of the access box. 12. Seal threaded connections on pressure side of control valves as per manufacturer's recommendations. Control wiring: 1. Install electric control cable in the piping trenches wherever possible. Place wire in trench beneath pipe. Secure control cable to pipe with plastic ties. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal expansion and contraction. Expansion joints in wire shall be provided at 200 -foot intervals by making 5-6 turns of the wire around a piece of 1/2" pipe instead of slack. Where necessary to run wire in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 12". 2. Provide sufficient slack at site connections at remote control valves in control boxes, and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or splice to the surface without disconnecting the wires when repair is required. 3. Connect each remote control valve to one station of a controller except as otherwise indicated. 4. Connect remote control valves to a common ground wire system independent of all other controllers. A separate common neutral wire is required for each controller. 5. Make wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in the field, using 3M DBY or 3M DBR Direct Bury Splice Kit (or approved equal). 6. Provide tight joints to prevent leakage or water and corrosion build-up on the joint. Sleeves: Coordinate with Owner. Flushing, testing, and adjustment: I. After piping and risers/swing joints are installed and before dripline are installed, open control valves and flush out the system with full head of water. 2. Perform system testing upon completion of each section. Make necessary repairs and re -test repaired sections as required. 02880-8 3. Adjust dripline after installation for proper and adequate distribution of the water over the coverage pattern. 5. Adjust all electric remote control valve flow control stems for system balance. 6. Test and demonstrate the controller by operating appropriate day, hour, and station selection features as required to automatically start and shut down irrigation cycles to accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions. G. Boring under existing pavements: I . Place irrigation pipe and wiring under existing concrete or asphalt surfaces by jacking, boring or hydraulic driving. 2. Polyethylene pipe shall be used for the mainline material through boring sleeves to avoid joints within boring areas. 3. Open cutting of existing concrete and asphalt surfaces to install sleeves is not permitted unless approved by Owner in writing. 4. Where piping is shown under paved areas which are adjacent to turf areas, install the piping in the turf areas. 3.4 AS-BUILTDRAWING A. Furnish accurate reproducible Mylar "As -Built" drawings of all components. State the size, manufacturer, model number, part number, size, and exact location of each and every item furnished and installed by this Contractor. Final payment can be withheld until "as -built" has been provided to and approved the Owner. B. Contractor will furnish Owner with 2 bound copies of instruction sheets and parts lists covering all operating equipment. 3.5 SPARE PARTS FILED FEB 21 2012 A. Owner will supply necessary spare parts. y. 91 pM City Clerk - 3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL 'On c'h'i 10wi A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable excavated materials, rock, trash, and debris. B. Maintain disposal route clear, clean and free of debris. C. Repair any damage resulting from irrigation system installation. 3.7 ACCEPTANCE A. Test and demonstrate to the Owner the satisfactory operation of the system free of leaks. B. Instruct the Owner's staff in the operation of the system, including adjustment of sprinklers, controller(s), valves, and pump controls. 02880-9 C. Upon acceptance, the Owner will assume operation of the system. 3.8 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with the General Contractor, Mechanical/ Electrical Contractors, and all subcontractors, during the installation of this system. B. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer and Owner of any system items or elements that are required for operation of the system specified herein, but installed and furnished by others. C. The Irrigation System must be in full operation within one week seeding operations. It is the intent and mandatory requirement that the system be installed to provide the water for the newly seeded areas. FILED FEB 2112012 y'SC'P CI tr �ry k Iowa Cuy, ima END OF SECTION 02880-10 SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPING PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: FILED FEB 2 r 2012 4: Srj 04 � IY Clerk 4%IOWa A. Plantings (trees, shrubs, grasses, and perennials), including soil preparation, landscape accessories and maintenance. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE: A. The fitness of all plantings shall be determined by the Engineer and/or the City Forester with the following requirements: Nomenclature: Scientific and common names shall be in conformity with U.S.D.A. listings and those of established nursery supplies. 2. Standards: All trees must conform to the standards established by the American Association of Nurserymen. B. Take precautions to ensure that equipment, vehicles, and planting operations do not disturb or damage existing site elements. Contractor shall repair any damages at their own cost. C. The Contractor shall repair or replace all plantings which, in the judgment of the Engineer and/or City Forester, have not survived and grown in a satisfactory manner for a period of one year after City Counci I acceptance of the project. D. All plant material shall meet the minimum requirements of size and grade in the latest addition of American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS. A. Certify that all plantings are free of disease and insect pests. Certificates shall be submitted to the Engineer and/or City Forester. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING. A. Protect all plantings in transit to site to prevent wind burning of foliage. B. Set all balled and burlapped trees and shrubs, which cannot be planted immediately, on ground and protect with soil, wet peat moss or other acceptable material, and water as required by weather conditions. C. Keep container grown trees, shrubs, grasses, and perennials, which cannot be planted immediately, moist by adequate watering. Water before planting. 02900-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 TREES, SHRUBS, GRASSES, AND PERENNIALS. A. Trees and shrubs shall be vigorous, healthy, well -formed, with dense, fibrous and large root systems and free of insect or mechanical damage. B. All trees and shrubs, except those specified as container grown, shall be balled in burlap with root ball formed of firm earth from original and undisturbed soil. At a minimum, 80% FILED of all plantable containers shall be removed during planting. FEB 21 2012 C. All trees shall display the following form and branching habits: 4' 55Ct A 1. Free of branches to a point at 50% of their height. City Iowa City, Iowa 2. Contain a minimum of six (6) well placed branches, not including the leader. D. Trees shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Caliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk six inches (6") above ground. E. Trees which have no leader or have a damaged or crooked leader, or multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees shall be freshly dug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PLANTING TREES, SHRUBS, GRASSES, AND PERENNIALS: A. Planting Season and Completion Date: 1. Trees: Spring—April I through June 1 Fal I —September 1 through October 31 2. The Contractor may plant outside the limits of such dates with permission of the City Forester. The City Forester may stop or postpone planting during these dates if weather conditions are such that plant materials may be adversely affected. B. The planting shall be performed by personnel familiar with the accepted procedures of planting and under the constant supervision of a qualified planting supervisor. C. Plant placement shall be as shown on the plans. D. Contractor shall inform the City Forester of the starting date and location. All planting soil must be approved by the City Forester before use. E. Excavate with vertical sides and in accordance with following requirements: Excavate tree pits to a minimum of two feet greater in diameter than root ball of tree. 2. Plant shrubs in pits 18 inches greater in width than diameter of root ball or container. 02900-2 Do not use auger to excavate planting pits. F. Set plants in center of pits, align with planting plan, plumb and straight and at elevation where the root collar (root to stem transition zone) is visible at ground level with the first main order lateral roots at or slightly below (1" to 2") this point. For the purpose of this contract, the root collar is defined as the point immediately above where the first main order lateral roots attach to the stem. G. Compact topsoil mixture thoroughly around base of root ball to fill all voids. Soil shall be backfilled in layers and each successive layer shall be slightly tamped before the next layer is placed. Backfill tree and shrub pits halfway with planting soil mixture and remove all exposed burlap, wires, and lacing from the top half of the root ball. Do not pull burlap or wire from under the root ball. Thoroughly puddle before further backfilling tree or shrub pit. Construct earthen saucer ring at finish grade as per planting detail. Excess soil shall be removed from the site. Thoroughly water each tree or shrub upon completion of backfill and construction of saucer ring. H. Rake bed area smooth and neat. Mulch all tree pits and shrub beds with a minimum of three inches of hardwood mulch which has been approved by the City Forester. The contractor shall perform a final watering of all plant material upon completion of planting operations. The contractor shall notify the City Forester upon commencement of final watering. J. Upon notification by the City Forester, the contractor will be required to immediately remove, replace, and replant plant material found not planted in accordance to the prescribed procedures above. 3.02 PLANTING SOIL MIXTURE. A. Backfill material for plantings shall be a mixture of 2/3 loose friable topsoil and 1/3 clean sand. All backfill shall have a uniform appearance and shall be loose, friable{ and free of hard clods and rock over two inches in diameter. FILED 3.03 MULCH: FEB 21 2012 A. Provide sample for approval by Engineer prior to construction. Iowa ,ryOI lows B. Mulch shall consist of harvested North American hardwood. Mulch shall be double shredded hardwood with fibrous consistency without sawdust and wood chips. C. Mulch shall be free of weeds, weed seed, chaff, diseases, soil, leaves, twigs, contaminates, and other foreign material. D. Mulch shall be placed around all plant material. Individual trees shall have a 4 foot diameter ring around the tree. Groupings of plant material, such as shrubs and perennials, shall require mulch to be placed in the entire planting bed. All mulch shall be placed at 3 inch depth. 3.04 MAINTENANCE -ALL PLANTINGS: A. Begin maintenance immediately and continue maintenance until final acceptance of work. Water, mulch, weed, prune, spray, fertilize, cultivate and otherwise maintain and protect all 02900-3 plantings. B. Reset settled trees and shrubs to proper grade and position, and remove dead material. C. All plantings shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after by City Council acceptance of the project. D. The Contractor shall supply all all equipment and water for planting and maintenance. Water may be obtained at the Contractor's expense at the bulk water fill station located at 1200 S. Riverside Drive. All water must be paid for in advance at the Civic Center, 410 E. Washington Street. 11/00 shnredkngineeAgxcs-i i{02900.do FILED FEB 21 2012 x:5'1 Prrt CHY.Cluk IOWAuly'IOW1 02900-4 SECTION 02924 SEEDING PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED FEB 21 2012 V., 0 Pn( r� Clerk Iowa l:Uy, I A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division I specification sections apply to this section. B. This section shall include materials, equipment, and labor for the preparation of the seedbed, furnishing and installing seed, fertilizer and mulch, maintenance, and guarantee for completed seeded areas, as shown on plans. Seed all areas disturbed by construction. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor has the option of using either hydraulic or conventional seeding methods; unless specified otherwise in the contract documents. B. Related work covered by other Sections: Section 31 23 00: Site Excavation And Earthwork C. Provide permanent seed at the earliest possible date following grading and topsoil respreading operations, as approved by Engineer. 1.03 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Protect existing conditions at the site against damage including the following: 1. Take precautions to insure that equipment, vehicles, and seeding operations do not disturb or damage existing grades, walls, drives, pavement, utilities, plants, lawns, irrigation systems, and other facilities. 2. Verify locations and depths of all underground utilities prior to excavation and report conflicts with new seeding operations. 3. Any damage to existing trees or shrubs, including branches and root systems shall be repaired and/or pruned by an experienced tree surgeon or arborist. 4. Contractor shall replace plantings damaged due to watering of newly seeded areas with same species, size, 1 -year warranty, and planted as approved by Engineer without additional compensation. 5. All existing lawn areas undisturbed by construction within the construction limits shall be mown by the Contractor until the project is accepted. 02924-1 6. New seeding installed adjacent to existing lawns shall be installed to provide a smooth matching grade transition in a straight, neat alignment as approved by the Engineer. Repair, replace, and/or return to original condition any damaged item, without additional compensation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit from an established seed dealer or certified seed grower the certified blue tag from each container of seed of grass seed mixture dated within 9 months of delivery, indicating percentage by weight and percentage of purity, germination and weed seed for each grass, forbe, legume, and cereal crop stating botanical and common name of each species as specified in contract documents. B. Submit certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities and manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments. I . Certification of the fertilizer analysis with scale weight and statement of FILED guaranteed analysis. 2. Certification of the tackifier ingredients, recommended rates of application, and FEB 21 2012 expiration date. 4;51 Peri City ClerkWd 3. Certification of the inoculant ingredient for legumes and the specific seed to be mwa-- inoculated with the application rate and expiration date. 4. Certification of the fungicide ingredients and applicable fungus disease control and recommended application rate of manufacturer. 5. Certification on the sticking agent ingredients with applicable use and rate by manufacturer. 6. Certification in the degradable wood cellulose fiber mulch ingredients with applicable use and rate, and the water retention capacity by manufacturer or supplier. C. Submit written maintenance instructions recommending procedures for maintenance of seeded areas for one year, prior to final acceptance of the seeded areas. D. Upon request the Contractor will provide Material Certifications to the Owner. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. All seed shall have a certified blue tag or certification of content with purity and germination and weight or percentage of content on each container. B. All materials to be in accordance with Iowa Seed Law and Iowa Department of Agricultural Regulations and shall be labeled accordingly. All grasses, legumes, Forbes, and cereal seeds shall be furnished from an established seed dealer or certified seed grower. C. All materials and method of operation shall be subject to inspection and approval by Engineer. 02924-2 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Packaged materials shall be delivered in original, unopened, and undamaged containers. B. Store and protect materials off the ground to prevent wetting and deterioration. C. Deliver all seed in original containers. Seed shall not be mixed or blended except in the presence of the Engineer. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Notify Owner and Engineer at least 3 days prior to start of seeding operations. Perform seeding operations after grading and planting operations are complete as approved by the Engineer. 1.08 WARRANTY The seeding shall be installed as specified to germinate and provide a uniformly dense stand of grass, free of weeds and undesirable grasses, debris, and free of eroded areas and bare spots. Rerake areas failing to show a good dense stand within 60 days and reseed as originally specified. A. A warranty is to be provided for completed seeded areas, starting upon the date of initial acceptance. The warranty is to guarantee completed seeded areas to provide a uniformly dense, live, and healthy stand of grass, free of weeds and undesirable grasses, debris, and free of eroded areas, bare spots, diseases, and insects at the end of the warranty period of sixty (60) days for domestic/lawn grasses and a 12 month period for native prairie and wetland species. B. During warranty period, any defects in the seeded area and grass stand such as weedy areas, eroded areas and bare spots shall be corrected and reseeded as originally specified until all affected areas are accepted by the Engineer; without additional compensation. C. Repair and replace to original condition all damages to property resultant from the seeding operation and all damages as a resultant from the remedying pf#{tele ¢�fects, without additional compensation. i'1trb PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.01 SEED FEB 21 2012 x•S� a City C ort IOC cuy. I9N A. Provide fresh, clean, new crop, certified blue tag seed complying to tolerance for germination and purity and free of poa annua, bent grass, and free of noxious weed seed; see item 1.5 Quality Assurance herein. B. Mix seed to the specified proportions by weight by methods approved by the Engineer. C. Seed Quality: The seed provided shall exceed the following minimum requirements of purity and germination stated on a certified blue tag or a copy of current test of each species with quantity. 02924-3 D. Type 1 Seeding — Prairie Mix: "Shortgrass Prairie Seed Mix for Dry San" seed mix as supplied by Prairie Moon Nursery 1-866-417-8156. E. Type 2 Seeding— Waterway Mix: "Waterway Mix" seed mixture as supplied by Big Country Seeds, North Liberty, Iowa 1-319-560-3263. Type 3 Seeding— Lawn Mix: "ProTurf' seed mix as supplied by Pace Supply 1-800-396- 7917. Shall include "Germinex Tale TG" by Floratine Products Group, 563-210-1616. 2.02 SEED MIXTURES A. Provide the certified blue tag or a copy of current tests of each species with quantity seed mixture type and application rate as defined on the plans. B. Type 1 Seeding— Prairie Mix: Shortgrass prairie seed mix for dry sand As per Prairie Moon Nursery — Application rate of 12.78 lbs per acre. FILED C. Type 2 Seeding— Waterway Mix: Waterway Mix FEB 21 2012 As per Big Country Seed — Application rate per manufacturer recommendations. 14:55 P% _ D. Type 3 Seeding - Lawn Mix: ProTurf City Cler lowa City, Iowa As per Pace Supply— Application rate of 348 lbs per acre. 2.03 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer shall comply with the rules of the Iowa Department of Agriculture and as follows: 1. The grade of fertilizer will be identified according to the percent nitrogen (N), percent of available phosphoric acid (P205), and percent water soluble potassium (KZO), in that order, and approval will be based on that identification. 2. All fertilizer shall be furnished from an established fertilizer dealer and guaranteed percentage analysis shall be provided by the fertilizer supplier on each container with the proper scale weight records. 3. Fertilizer shall be of a type that can be uniformly distributed by the application equipment. Fertilizer may be furnished in a dry or liquid form. 4. When applied dry, the fertilizer shall be a granular, non -burning chemically combined product composed of not less than 50% organic slow acting, guaranteed analysis professional fertilizer. Granular or pellet form shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free flowing without caking or other damage not suitable for use. 5. When applied in a liquid form, fertilizer may be chemically combined or may be furnished as separate ingredients. 6. Upon request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide a test of the fertilizer for conformance with the required analysis at no additional compensation; a tolerance of 1.0 percentage point plus or minus of that specified will be considered to be in substantial compliance. 02924-4 Z04 WATER A. Water shall be free of any substance harmful to seed growth. B. The Contractor shall provide water, equipment, methods of transportation, water tanker, hoses, sprinklers, and labor necessary for the application of water. Contractor may utilize on-site water and to coordinate with City on metering. 2.05 MULCH A. Hydraulic Seeding: 1. The material shall be a natural or cooked cellulose fiber processed from whole wood chips (no recycled material) which will disperse readily in water to form a homogeneous slurry and remain in such state when agitated in the hydraulic mulching unit. 2. The homogeneous slurry of material and water shall be capable of being applied with standard hydraulic mulching equipment. 5. Mulch shall have a water -holding capacity of not less than 9 pounds of water per pound of fiber. 6. The wood cellulose fiber shall have an equilibrium air dry moisture content of 12 percent or less a time of manufacture, as defined by the pulp and paper industry standards, and shall have a ph range of 4.0 — 5.5. It shall be packaged in new labeled containers and be applied at a rate of 1,800 pounds per acre (41.3 Ib/1,000 sf). Tackifier (Hydraulic Seeding): The mulch shall include a colloidal polysaccharide tackifier which shall be adhered to the fiber to prevent separation during shipment and avoid chemical co -agglomeration during mixing within the hydraulic mulching equipment. 2. The material shall be homogeneous within the slurry and shall have no growth or germination -inhibiting factors nor any toxic effect on plant or animal life when combined with seed or fertilizer. The tackifier shall be applied at a minimum rate of 50 pounds per acre (0.1 1 Ib/sq) and shall be packaged in new labeled containers. I0'J'➢L51 3. The slurry shall be dyed greed to facilitate visual metering during FILE application with said material or homogeneous slurry having no growth or germination -inhibiting factors, being completely non -injurious to FEB 2 2012 plant or animal life and having no toxic effect when combined with seed, Y:69 PM fertilizer, and water. City Clerk Ian City, Iowa 4. When applied, the wood cellulose fiber slurry shall be free from weeds or other foreign matter toxic to seed, consisting of a classification of fibers with a minimum of 30 percent having an average length of 0.15 inches or passing a Clarke Classifier 24 mesh screen, will form an absorptive mat, but not a plant -inhibiting membrane, which will allow moisture to percolate into the underlying soil. 5. Mulch shall have a water -holding capacity of not less than 9 pounds of water per pound of fiber. 6. The wood cellulose fiber shall have an equilibrium air dry moisture content of 12 percent or less a time of manufacture, as defined by the pulp and paper industry standards, and shall have a ph range of 4.0 — 5.5. It shall be packaged in new labeled containers and be applied at a rate of 1,800 pounds per acre (41.3 Ib/1,000 sf). Tackifier (Hydraulic Seeding): The mulch shall include a colloidal polysaccharide tackifier which shall be adhered to the fiber to prevent separation during shipment and avoid chemical co -agglomeration during mixing within the hydraulic mulching equipment. 2. The material shall be homogeneous within the slurry and shall have no growth or germination -inhibiting factors nor any toxic effect on plant or animal life when combined with seed or fertilizer. The tackifier shall be applied at a minimum rate of 50 pounds per acre (0.1 1 Ib/sq) and shall be packaged in new labeled containers. I0'J'➢L51 C. Conventional Seeding: I. Material used as mulch may consist of straw (oats, wheat, barley, or rye). 2. Hay (bromegrass, timothy, orchard grass, alfalfa, or clover) shall not be FILED used to mulch areas where lawn mixtures are seeded but may be used to mulch areas where erosion control and perennial ground covers are FEB E 12012 seeded. N:S1 ftA C* Oak 3. All material used as mulch will be free from all noxious weed , seed- �' awa bearing stalks, or roots and shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to its use. 4. Other materials, subject to the approval of the Engineer, may be used. 2.06 INOCULANT FOR LEGUMES A. An inoculant is a culture of bacteria specifically formulated for legume seeds (alfalfa, clovers, lespedesa, birdsfoot trefoil, hairy vetch, and crown vetch). B. The manufacturer's container shall indicate the specific legume seed to be inoculated, rate of application, and the expiration date. C. All inoculant shall meet requirements of the Iowa Seed Law. 2.07 FUNGICIDE A. A fungicide shall be a noncommercial protectant formulation to provide protection from soil -born fungus diseases of seeds. B. The application shall be made at the rate of 5 1/2 ounces of a 75 percent concentrate or equivalent per 100 pounds of seed. 2.8 STICKING AGENT A. A sticking agent shall be a commercial material recommended by the manufacturer to improve adhesion of inoculant and fungicide to the seed. For small quantities, less than 50 pounds, the sticking agent need not be a commercial agent, but it must be approved by the Engineer and must be applied separately prior to application of inoculant and fungicide. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 AREA OF SEEDING A. Areas to be seeded shall conform to the limits stated or shown on the construction plans and contract documents. Areas disturbed outside the contract limits approved for seeding shall be seeded by the Contractor at no additional compensation. 02924-6 B. Temporary Erosion Control: Contractor to provide and seed temporary seeding as may be required to fulfill NPDES Permit requirement. 3.02 SEEDING DATES A. Normal spring seeding dates shall be between March I and May 31. Commence only when ground temperatures are 55 degrees Fahrenheit or greater. Normal fall seeding dates shall be between August 20 and September 30. B. Native grasses and forbes normal seeding dates shall be between April 1 and June 30 and between August 1 and August 31. C. Dormant seeding dates except native grasses and forbes shall be between November 1 and March 1, with permission of Owner. D. At the option and at the full responsibility of the Contractor, seeding operations may be conducted under unseasonable conditions. The final results shall be as specified and guaranteed without additional compensation should the seeded areas require reseeding. 3.03 SEEDBED PREPARATION FILED FEB 21 2012 A. Limit preparation of seedbed to areas which will be seeded immediately upon .A, SS FW completion. City C1,rr Iowa City, Iowa B. Remove all straw -mulch, weeds and weed debris where weed growth has developed, in the opinion of the Engineer. Straw -mulch, weed growth and weed debris removal process shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be done without additional compensation. C. The Contractor shall shape and fine grade to remove washes or gullies, water pockets, and irregularities to provide a smooth, firm, and even surface true to grade and cross- section. D. Disk or rototill and cultivate seedbed to a minimum 3 inch depth to a fine texture and without soil lumps. Where the area is inaccessible to machinery, it shall be prepared by hand to a minimum depth of 1 1/2 inches after the fertilizer has been applied. E. Ruts that develop during the sequence of operations shall be removed prior to seeding. F. Application of Fertilizer: 1. Apply fertilizer after shaping and fine grading and prior to the combined tillage and rock -removal operations. On areas inaccessible to machinery, the fertilizer may be spread prior to tillage and cultivated seedbed preparation and uniformly mixed into the top 1 1/2 inches of soil. 2. Fertilizer shall be spread with a mechanical spreader or sprayer uniformly to all areas to be seeded at the minimum rate specified herein. The fertilizer shall be tilled into the soil to a minimum depth of 3 inches. 02924-7 3. The Contractor shall be permitted to substitute other fertilizer containing analysis percentages different from those specified, provided that the minimum amounts of actual nitrogen (N), phosphate (P), and potash (K) per acre are supplied and that in no case shall the total amount per acre of the three fertilizer elements (N), (P), or (K) be exceeded by 30 percent of the following minimum amounts. 4. Conventional Seeding: a. Apply 6-24-12 commercial fertilizer or the equivalent units of nitrogen (N), phosphate (P), and potash (K) at the rate of 200 pounds per acre. A minimum of 40 percent of the total nitrogen (N) shall be water insoluble nitrogen. 5. Hydraulic Seeding: FILED b. Apply 6-24-12 commercial fertilizer or the equivalent unitsof nitrogen (N), phosphate (P), and potash (K) at the rate of 200 FEB 21 2012 pounds per acre prior to seeding. µ:5°I P!^ city Clerky, I Iowa city, Iowa ty C. In addition to the above, a minimum of 100 pounds per acre of a 20-26-6 fertilizer in which a minimum of 50 percent of the total nitrogen is water insoluble nitrogen shall be applied as part of the seed, fertilizer, mulch, and water slurry. 6. Tilling: d. After fertilizer has been applied, a mechanical rock picker shall be used on areas accessible to machinery to mix fertilizer in the soil to a depth of 3 inches and to remove all rocks, debris, and solid non -soil material larger than 1/2 inches in diameter from the upper 3 inches of the soil. A spring tooth cultivator may be used in lieu of a rock picker. The rock shall then be removed by hand after each use of the cultivator --the process to be repeated until the soil is relatively free of rock as determined by the Engineer. e. Remove all rock remnants from rock piles used on project smaller than 1/2 inches. f. The seedbed shall then be smoothed with a cultivator -type tillage tool having a rake bar -such as the Roseman rake -or a rock rake -such as the York -gauged by rear gauge wheels or by a blade gauged by a landscape roller -such as the Viking roller blade. g. Tilling shall be parallel to the contours. h. Ruts and wheel tracks in the seedbed from seedbed preparation are to be removed prior to seeding. This must be completed just prior to seeding and the work approved by the Engineer before the seeding application. 3.04 APPLICATION OF SEED A. Prior to seeding, the seedbed shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer and Owner. B. Conventional Seeding: Sowing: 02924-8 a. Domestic grasses - On all areas accessible to machinery, all grasses shall be sown with a drop -type seeder attached to a landscape roller in such a manner that the seed is applied and then covered by rolling which firms the soil. Seeding to be completed with a minimum of two passes in different directions. C. On areas inaccessible to field machinery, the use of cyclone seeders will be permitted, but no other hand -seeding methods will be accepted. d. The application of grass and legume seed with hand seeders on early spring work must be performed as separate operations. No mixing of the two types of seed will be permitted. 2. Mulching: a. All seeded areas shall be mulched within 24 hours after the seed is sown. The mulch shall be uniformly distributed over the required areas at a rate of 2 tons of dry mulch per acre. b. The mulch shall then be worked into the soil with a mulch tucker which shall be designed to anchor the mulch into the soil. The tucker shall be designed to anchor mulch into soil by means of dull blades or disks. Do not tuck mulch over native prairie, wetland, and forties mixtures. C. Hydraulic Seeding: I. All material, seed, fertilizer, mulch, tackifier, and fungicide shall be placed in hydraulic -mulching equipment specifically manufactured for hydraulic seeding and mulching. 2. The hydraulic equipment, pump, and application process shall not damage or crack seeds. 3. Materials shall be mixed with fresh potable water using a combination of both recirculation through the equipment's pump and mechanical agitation to form a homogeneous slurry. 4. It shall be applied evenly over all specified areas in a workmanlike manner at component material rates specified. 02924-9 b. Native Grasses and Forbes — Seed shall be uniformly applied to areas shown; as a split rate application with not less than two passes in different direction. Areas assessable to field equipment shall be seeded with a native grass seed drill, gravity, FILED or broadeast equipment and shall be cultipacked with not less than one complete rolling with a cultipacker. Other areas shall FEB 2 1 2012 be broadeast seeded followed by a light dragging or hand raking 'V,: -`'i PM City Clerk ± seed to belanted 1/2 inch depth maximum. Hydraulic seeding p Imvacity, Iowa of native grasses and forbes is not permitted. C. On areas inaccessible to field machinery, the use of cyclone seeders will be permitted, but no other hand -seeding methods will be accepted. d. The application of grass and legume seed with hand seeders on early spring work must be performed as separate operations. No mixing of the two types of seed will be permitted. 2. Mulching: a. All seeded areas shall be mulched within 24 hours after the seed is sown. The mulch shall be uniformly distributed over the required areas at a rate of 2 tons of dry mulch per acre. b. The mulch shall then be worked into the soil with a mulch tucker which shall be designed to anchor the mulch into the soil. The tucker shall be designed to anchor mulch into soil by means of dull blades or disks. Do not tuck mulch over native prairie, wetland, and forties mixtures. C. Hydraulic Seeding: I. All material, seed, fertilizer, mulch, tackifier, and fungicide shall be placed in hydraulic -mulching equipment specifically manufactured for hydraulic seeding and mulching. 2. The hydraulic equipment, pump, and application process shall not damage or crack seeds. 3. Materials shall be mixed with fresh potable water using a combination of both recirculation through the equipment's pump and mechanical agitation to form a homogeneous slurry. 4. It shall be applied evenly over all specified areas in a workmanlike manner at component material rates specified. 02924-9 Site cleanup shall be considered part of application and shall include the removal of hydraulic mulch slurry from buildings, landscaping, sidewalks, and any other areas not specified for application. All debris resulting from this application shall be removed from the site. 3.05 WATERING A. All seeded areas shall be kept moist at all times, The areas shall be artificially watered a minimum of twice a day (early morning and evening) every day for the first week after seeding is completed. For the second and third weeks after seeding, the seeded areas shall be artificially watered once a day (early morning or evening). C. The quantity of water used shall be adequate to keep the soil and mulch moist to a depth of 1 inch and ensure growth of the seed. If natural rainfall is adequate to keep the soil and mulch moist as stated above, artificial watering may be deleted. D. Any area seeded in the month of May shall be maintained for an additional 3 weeks. The seeded areas shall receive a minimum of 1 inch of water each week (either natural, artificial, or combination) for the fourth, fifth, and sixth week after seeding. 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. Domestic Grasses - Maintenance shall begin immediately following the installation of seed and mulch and continue for a 60 day period. FILED B. Native Grasses and Forbes—Maintenance shall begin immediately following installation FEB 21 2012 of seed and mulch and shall continue for a 12 month period. 4: 55 P^^ city Cleric Iowa city, Iowa C. Maintenance of seeded areas shall include protection against traffic, repairing of areas damaged, watering, rolling, and mowing when domestic grasses are at an approximate 3 - inch height; and mowing of native grasses and forties when 8 inch height to a 6 inch height. If areas are seeded in the fall and not given a full maintenance period, or if seeding establishment is not acceptable at that time, continue maintenance the following spring until acceptable lawn or native seeded area is established. 3.07 RESEEDING A. When all work related to seeding on an area has been completed but is washed out or damaged prior to final acceptance of the seeding area and that area involves seeding in combination with mulching or fertilizing or both, the area shall be reseeded, refertilized, and remulched at the contract unit price or prices when so ordered by the Owner. B. Fertilized or seeded areas damaged by rain prior to required mulching or areas where the mulch is not tucked shall be refertilized or reseeded or both at a rate not to exceed the specified rate, as designated by the Engineer, without additional compensation. 3.08 CLEANUP A. Perform cleanup operations during installation of work and upon completion. 02924-10 B. Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. C. Hose down and/or broom clean all paved surfaces. D. Repair any damage resulting from seeding operations. E. Remove hydraulic slurry from buildings landscaping and plantings, mulch, sidewalks, pavement, and any other areas not specified for application. 3.09 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. The areas seeded shall be given acceptance based upon the following criteria: All requirements for the completed installation and a minimum of 60 days maintenance have been provided for domestic grasses and a minimum of 12 months for native grasses and forties. 2. Seeded areas shall be in a live, healthy, growing, and well-established condition without eroded areas, bare spots, free of weeds, undesirable grasses, disease, or insects. 3. Reseeding operations are completed, as per original specifications. B. Final acceptance may be given by the Owner upon fulfillment of all items completed as required. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 Y 5.5 P City CII& rM cur, Iowa 02924 -II SECTION 31623 RAMMED AGGREGATE PIER SOIL REINFORCEMENT FILED PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FEB g21 2012 1.1 DESCRIPTION 1/' uy Clerk y Ind 01Y. -4n Work shall consist of designing, furnishing and installing Rammed Aggregate Pier (RAP) elements to the lines and grades designated on the project foundation plan and as specified herein. The RAP elements shall be constructed by compacting aggregate in an excavated hole using special high-energy impact densification equipment. The RAP elements shall be in a columnar - type configuration and shall be used to reinforce soils for the support of shallow foundations. The RAP elements may be either vibro stone columns or rammed piers. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provision of all equipment, material, labor, and supervision to design and install RAP elements. Design shall rely on subsurface information presented in the project geotechnical report. B. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions, and Division I Specifications, apply to the work in this specification. 1.3 APPROVED INSTALLERS A. Installers of RAP Foundation Systems shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience with the installation of RAPS and shall have completed at least 50 projects. B. Installers shall have demonstrated experience in the construction of similar size and types of projects. The RAP Installer shall be approved by the Owner's Engineer and must be approved two weeks prior to bid opening. The Installer shall adhere to all methods and standards described in this Specification. C. Installers currently approved for these works in the Iowa, Illinois, area are: I. Peterson Contractors, Inc. — Reinbeck, Iowa (Licensed Open -Shop Installer) 2. Foundation Service Corporation — Hudson, Iowa (Licensed Union -Shop Installer) 3. Subsurface Constructors— St. Louis, Missouri 1.4 RELATED WORK A. Earth Moving B. Cast -In -Place Concrete C. Geotechnical Report and Recommendations 31623-1 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Design I . Lawton, E.C., N.S. Fox, and R.L. Handy. "Control of Settlement and Uplift of Structures Using Short Aggregate Piers." ASCE. Proceedings of In -Situ Deep Soil Improvement. ASCE National Convention, Atlanta, Georgia. October 9-13, 1994. 2. Lawton, E.C. and N.S. Fox. "Settlement of Structures Supported on Marginal or FILED Inadequate Soils Stiffened with Short Aggregate Piers." ASCE. Geotechnical Special Publication No. 40: Vertical and Horizontal Deformations of Foundations FEB 21 2012 and Embankments, ASCE 2, 962-974. µ; 5a Pt,\ 3. Fox, N.S. and M. Cowell. 1998. Geopier Reference Manual. Published by Geopier cicY�tecx Foundation Company, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ. Iowac:�Y, lob+ 4. Wissmann, K.J., E.C. Lawton, and T.M. Farrell. 1999. "Behavior of Geopier- Supported Foundation Systems During Seismic Events." Technical Bulletin No. I. Geopier Foundation Company, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ. 5. Wissmann, K.J. 1999. "Bearing Capacity of Geopier-Supported Foundation Systems." Technical Bulletin No. 2. Geopier® Foundation Company, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ. 6. Wissmann, K.J., J.M. Caskey, and B.T. Fitzpatrick. 2001. "Geopier® Uplift Resistance." Technical Bulletin No. 3. GeopierO Foundation Company, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ. 7. Wissmann, K.J., B.T. Fitzpatrick, and E.C. Lawton. 2001. "GeopierO Lateral Resistance." Technical Bulletin No. 4. Geopier® Foundation Company, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ. 8. Fitzpatrick, B.T. and K.J. Wissmann. 2002. "Geopier® Shear Reinforcement for Global Stability and Slope Stability." Technical Bulletin No. 5. Geopier® Foundation Company, Inc., Scottsdale, AZ. B. Modulus and Uplift Testing ASTM D-1143 — Pile Load Test Procedures 2. ASTM D-1194 — Spread Footing Load Test 3. ASTM -D-3689 — Uplift Load Test C. Materials and Inspection ASTM D-1241 — Aggregate Quality 2. ASTM STP 399 — Dynamic Penetrometer Testing ASTM D-422 —Gradation Soils 1.6 CONFLICTS IN SPECIFICATIONS/REFERENCES Where specifications and reference documents conflict, the Architect/Engineer shall make the final determination of the applicable document. 31623-2 1.7 CERTIFICATIONS AND SUBMITTALS A. The installer shall submit detailed design calculations and construction drawings prepared by the RAP Designer (the Designer) to the Owner or Owner's Engineer for approval at least 2 week(s) prior to the start of construction. All plans shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer in the State in which the project is constructed. B. The RAP Designer shall have Errors and Omissions design insurance for the work. The insurance policy should provide a minimum coverage of $2 million per occurrence. C. Modulus and uplift test data - The Installer shall furnish the General Contractor a description of the installation equipment, installation records, complete test data, analysis of the test data and recommended design parameter values based on the modulus test results. The report shall be prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer. D. Daily RAP Progress Reports — The Installer shall furnish a complete and accurate record of RAP installation to the General Contractor. The record shall indicate the pier location, length, average lift thickness and final elevations of the base and top of piers. The record shall also indicate the type and size of the densification equipment used. The Installer shall immediately report any unusual conditions encountered during installation to the General Contractor, to the Designer and to the Testing Agency. FILED PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERJALS FEB 21 2012 4:53' P.N Citti� Clerk < Iowa t:uy, Iowa A. Aggregate used for piers constructed above the water table shall be Type I Grade B in accordance with ASTM D-1241-68, or shall be other graded aggregate selected by the Installer and used in the modulus test/successful initial RAP element. It shall be compacted to a densification and strength, which provides resistance to the dynamic penetration test (ASTM STP 399) of a minimum average of 15 blows per 1.75 -inch vertical movement. B. For aggregate used for piers constructed below the water table, the gradation shall be the same as Type I Gradation B, except that particles passing the No. 40 sieve shall be eliminated. Alternatively, No.57 stone or other stone selected by the RAP Installer may be used. Dynamic penetration resistance testing is inappropriate for this material. C. Potable water or other suitable source shall be used to increase aggregate moisture content where required. The General Contractor shall provide such water to the Installer. D. The General Contractor will provide adequate and suitable marshalling areas on the project site for the use of the Installer for the storage of aggregate and equipment. PART 3 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 3.1 RAP DESIGN A. The RAP elements shall be designed for an RAP stiffiess modulus of 150 pci. The stiffness modulus value shall be verified by the results of the RAP modulus test, described in this specification. B. RAPS shall be designed in accordance with generally -accepted engineering practice and the methods described in Section I of these Specifications. The design shall meet the 31623-3 C. The design submitted by the Installer shall consider the bearing capacity and settlement of all footings supported by RAPs, and shall be in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and these specifications. Total and differential settlement shall be considered. The design life of the structure shall be 50 years. D. The RAP system shall be designed to preclude plastic bulging deformations at the top-of— pier design stress and to preclude significant tip stresses as determined from the shape of the telltale test curve from telltales installed in modulus test piers. The results of the modulus test shall be used to verify the design assumptions. 3.2 DESIGNSUBMITTAL The Installer shall submit 4 sets of detailed design calculations, construction drawings, and shop drawings, (the Design Submittal), for approval at least 2 week(s) prior to the beginning of construction. A detailed explanation of the design parameters for settlement calculations shall be included in the Design Submittal. Additionally, the quality control test program for RAPS, meeting these design requirements, shall be submitted. All computer-generated calculations and drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State where the piers are to be built. 3.3 BUILDING CODE ACCEPTANCE The RAP Installer shall demonstrate that the RAP system has been ICBO certified. PART 4 - CONSTRUCTION 4.1 STONE COLUMNS A. Install stone columns with a down -hole vibrator capable of densifying the aggregate by forcing it radially into the surrounding soil. The vibrator shall be of sufficient size and capacity to construct stone columns to the diameters and lengths shown on the Installer's approved construction drawings. B. The probe and follower tubes shall be of sufficient length to reach the elevations shown on the installer's approved construction drawings. The probe, used in combination with the available pressure to the tip jet, shall be capable of penetration to the required tip elevation. Preboring shall be permitted if it is specified in the installer's approved construction procedure submittal. 31623-4 following criteria. Maximum Allowable Bearing Pressure for RAP Reinforced Soils 3,000 psf FILED Estimated Total Long -Term Settlement for Footings: < 1 -inch FEB 21 2012 Estimated Long -Term wsi PM Differential Settlement of Adjacent Footings: < Y2 --inch city Cleric '^ Irma lay, Iowa Minimum Aggregate Pier Stiffness Modulus Value: 150 pci C. The design submitted by the Installer shall consider the bearing capacity and settlement of all footings supported by RAPs, and shall be in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and these specifications. Total and differential settlement shall be considered. The design life of the structure shall be 50 years. D. The RAP system shall be designed to preclude plastic bulging deformations at the top-of— pier design stress and to preclude significant tip stresses as determined from the shape of the telltale test curve from telltales installed in modulus test piers. The results of the modulus test shall be used to verify the design assumptions. 3.2 DESIGNSUBMITTAL The Installer shall submit 4 sets of detailed design calculations, construction drawings, and shop drawings, (the Design Submittal), for approval at least 2 week(s) prior to the beginning of construction. A detailed explanation of the design parameters for settlement calculations shall be included in the Design Submittal. Additionally, the quality control test program for RAPS, meeting these design requirements, shall be submitted. All computer-generated calculations and drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State where the piers are to be built. 3.3 BUILDING CODE ACCEPTANCE The RAP Installer shall demonstrate that the RAP system has been ICBO certified. PART 4 - CONSTRUCTION 4.1 STONE COLUMNS A. Install stone columns with a down -hole vibrator capable of densifying the aggregate by forcing it radially into the surrounding soil. The vibrator shall be of sufficient size and capacity to construct stone columns to the diameters and lengths shown on the Installer's approved construction drawings. B. The probe and follower tubes shall be of sufficient length to reach the elevations shown on the installer's approved construction drawings. The probe, used in combination with the available pressure to the tip jet, shall be capable of penetration to the required tip elevation. Preboring shall be permitted if it is specified in the installer's approved construction procedure submittal. 31623-4 C. The probe and follower shall have visible markings at regular increments to enable measurement of penetration and repenetration depths. D. Provide methods for supplying to the tip of the probe a sufficient quality of air or water to widen the probe hole to allow adequate space for stone backfill placement around the probe. E. The probe shall penetrate into the foundation soil layer to the minimum depths required in the installer's construction plans. F. Life thickness shall not exceed 4 feet. After penetration to the treatment depth, slowly retrieve the vibrator in 12 -inch to 18 -inch increments to allow backfill placement. G. Compact the backfill in each lift by repenetrating it at least twice with the vibrating probe to densify and force the stone into the surrounding soil. H. Install stone columns so that each completed column is continuous throughout its length. FILED FF H i 1 2012 4.2 RAMMED PIERS KSS Ph, City Clerk 4 Iowa City,1OW4 A. All rammed piers shall be pre-augered using mechanical drilling or excavation equipment. Installation of piers without pre-augering shall not be allowed because this technique results in significant disturbance and remolding of the matrix soils surrounding the piers. B. If cave-ins occur during excavation such that the sidewalls of the hole are deemed to be unstable, steel casing or a drilling slurry shall be used to stabilize the excavation. C. If cave-ins occur on top of a lift of aggregate such that the volume of the caved soils is greater than 10 percent of the volume of the aggregate in the lift, then the aggregate shall be considered contaminated and shall be removed and replaced with uncontaminated aggregate. D. Special high-energy impact densification apparatus shall be employed to densify the RAP elements during installation. The apparatus shall apply direct downward impact energy to each lift of aggregate. E. A minimum tamper CIMA energy level of 2,000 foot-pounds of force per minute shall be applied by the energy source. F. The bottom of the excavation shall be densified prior to the placement of the aggregate. If wet, soft or sensitive soils are present, open -graded aggregate, such as ASTM No.57 stone or other, shall be placed at the bottom of the excavation and compacted to stabilize the element bottom and may serve as the initial lift. G. Densification shall be performed using a beveled tamper. The beveled tamper foot is required to adequately increase the lateral earth pressure in the matrix soil during installation. H. Downward pressure shall be applied to the tamper shaft during tamping. I. Each lift of aggregate shall be tamped for a minimum of 15 seconds. 4.3 PLANLOCA TIONAND ELEVA TION OF RAP ELEMENTS 31623-5 The center of each pier shall be within six inches of the plan locations indicated. The final measurement of the top of piers shall be the lowest point on the aggregate in the last compacted lift. Piers installed outside of the above tolerances and deemed not acceptable shall be rebuilt at no additional expense to the Owner. FILE! REJECTED RAP ELEMENTS FEB 21 2012 RAP elements improperly located or installed beyond the maximum allowable tolerances shall be , f_55 &c , abandoned and replaced with new piers, unless the Designer approves other remedial measures. City Iowa Ciq,ima. All material and labor required to replace rejected piers shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner, unless the cause of the rejection is due to an obstruction. PART 5 - QUALITY CONTROL 5.1 QUALITY CONTROL REPRESENTATIVE The Installer shall have a full-time Quality Control (QC) representative to verify and report all QC installation procedures. The Installer shall immediately report any unusual conditions encountered during installation to the Design Engineer, the General Contractor, and to the Testing Agency, The QC procedures shall include the preparation of RAP Progress Reports completed during each day of installation and containing the following information: A. Footing and RAP location. B. RAP length and drilled diameter. C. Planned and actual RAP elevations at the top and bottom of the element. D. Average lift thickness for each RAP. E. Soil types encountered at the bottom of the RAP and along the length of the element. F. Depth to groundwater, if encountered. G. Documentation of any unusual conditions encountered. H. Type and size of densification equipment used. 5.2 MODULUS TEST A modulus test shall be performed to verify the parameter values selected for design. The modulus tests shall be of the type and installed in a manner specified herein. A. A telltale shall be installed at the bottom of the test pier so that bottom of pier deflections may be determined. Acceptable performance is indicated when the bottom of the pier deflection is no more than 20% of the top of pier deflection at the design stress level. B. ASTM D-1143 general test procedures shall be used as a guide to establishing load increments, load increment duration, and load decrements. C. With the exception of the load increment representing approximately 115% of the design maximum top of RAP stress, all load increments shall be held for a minimum of 15 minutes, a maximum of 1 hour, and until the rate of deflection reduces to 0.01 inch per hour, or less. D. The load increment that represents approximately 115% of the design maximum stress on 31623-6 the RAP shall be held for a minimum of 15 minutes, a maximum of 4 hours and until the rate of deflection reduces to 0.01 inches per hour or less. E. A seating load equal to 5 percent of the total load shall be applied to the loaded steel plate prior to application of load increments and prior to measurement of deflections to compensate for surficial disturbance. F. RAP modulus testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements outlined in the Design Submittal. G. The location of the RAP modulus test should be coordinator ia project Geotechnical Engineer of record. HLED FES 212012 5.3 BOTTOM STABILIZATION VERIFICATION TEST 4 -C"y Clerk Iowa_Ciry, A. After completion of the bottom pier bulb, or at anytime during the process of constructing the pier, the energy source may be turned off, and bottom stabilization verification test may be performed. These tests shall be performed when a new soil formation is encountered, or at the beginning of a project to provide quantitative information on pier stabilization. B. Bottom Stabilization Tests are performed by placing a reference bar over the cavity, marking the tamper shaft, applying energy to the tamper for an additional 15 seconds, and observing the downward deflection of the tamper shaft by observing the deflection of the mark on the tamper shaft. C. Acceptable performance is indicated if the vertical movement of the shaft is less than 150% of the vertical movement measured for the modulus test pier. D. If the measured vertical movement exceeds 150% of the value achieved during the modulus test, added energy is applied to re-densify the bulb. The procedure for measure is then repeated. If there is still movement greater than 150% of that achieved during the modulus test and greater than %z inch, a lift of loose aggregate may be placed on top of the compacted aggregate, and the verification test may be performed on this next lift after it is densified. If there is excessive movement on this lift, another lift may be placed and tested. Movement must be limited to below 150% of the values achieved for the modulus test before completion of 2/3 of the pier depth. 5.4 DYNAMIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST A. The RAP elements shall be tested by the Dynamic Cone Penetrometer method (ASTM STP 399) at locations within the upper 1/3 of the pier shaft length. B. The minimum acceptable criteria as an indicator of acceptable densification shall be at least 15 blows per 1-3/4 inch penetration. C. Dynamic Cone Penetrometer testing shall be performed in each RAP until such time as five consecutive tests indicate that the minimum criterion is met. Thereafter, such tests need not be performed on every pier, provided that the aggregate used in the elements is representative of that previously tested. If average penetration resistances measured exceed 15 blows, and less than 10% of tests fall below 15 blows, then testing may be reduced to spot checks. A pattern of successful tests is sufficient to reduce testing to several tests per day. D. Observation of questionable aggregate moisture content or questionable aggregate 31623-7 FILED gradation appearance may determine the need for additional dynamic penetration testing FEB 21 2012 to verify that the proper densification is being achieved. 4, Sk Pal E. Use of Dynamic Cone Penetrometer is not appropriate for use on open -graded aggregate City �Cleric ]owagly,]owa such as No. 57 stone. PART 6 - QUALITY ASSURANCE 6.1 INDEPENDENT ENGINEERING TESTING AGENCY The Owner is responsible for retaining an independent engineering testing firm to provide Quality Assurance services. The Testing Agency should be the Geotechnical Engineer of Record, if possible. 6.2 RESPONSIBILITIES OF INDEPENDENT ENGINEERING TESTING AGENCY A. The Testing Agency shall monitor the modulus and uplift test(s) when modulus or uplift test(s) are to be performed. The Installer shall provide and install all dial indicators and other measuring devices. B. The Testing Agency shall monitor the installation of RAP elements to verify that the production installation practices are similar to those used during the installation of the modulus test elements. C. The Testing Agency shall perform Dynamic Cone Penetrometer tests as described herein. D. The Testing Agency shall report any discrepancies to the Installer and General Contractor immediately. PART 7 - RESPONSIBILITIES OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR 7.1 PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall locate and protect underground and aboveground utilities and other structures from damage during installation of the RAP elements. B. The General Contractor will provide the site to the Installer, after earthwork in the area has been completed. C. Site subgrade shall be established by the General Contractor within 6 inches of final design subgrade, as approved by the Design Engineer. D. A working surface will be established and maintained by the General Contractor to provide wet weather protection of the subgrade and to provide access for efficient operation of the RAP installation. 7.2 LAYOUT OF THE RAP ELEMENTS The General Contractor shall provide layout (construction staking) of the RAPS. The General Contractor shall provide ground elevations in sufficient detail to estimate drilling depth elevations to within 2 inches. 7.3 RAP EXCA VA TION 31623-8 Should any obstruction be encountered during drilling or excavation for RAPS, the General Contractor shall be responsible for removing such obstruction, or the pier shall be relocated or abandoned. Obstructions include, but are not limited to, boulders, timbers, concrete, rebar, utility lines, etc., that prevent installing the RAPS to the required depth, or cause the RAP to drift from the required locations. Dense natural rock or weathered rock shall not be deemed obstructions, and piers may be terminated short of design lengths on such materials. If the General Contractor cannot or does not remove such obstructions within one hour from the time the Installer reports the obstruction to the General Contractor, the Installer may remove such obstructions with his own means. Should this occur, the Installer shall receive an extra to the contract tq pe�oGtor E their additional expenses, including delay time involved to crew and equipment. 1J FEB 21 2012 7.4 UTILITYEXCAVATIONS H: 59PM City Cleric g Iowa Crty, im The General Contractor shall coordinate all excavations made subsequent to RAP installations so that at least five feet of horizontal distance remains between the edge of any installed RAP and the excavation. Protection of completed RAP elements is the responsibility of the General Contractor. In the event that utility excavations are required at horizontal distances of less than five feet from installed RAPS, the General Contractor shall contact the RAP Designer to develop construction solutions to minimize impacts on the installed RAPs. Recommended procedures may include: A. Using cement -treated base to construct portions of the RAPS subject to future excavations. B. Replacing excavated soil with compacted crushed stone in the portions of excavations where the RAPS have been disturbed. The placement and compaction of the crushed stone shall meet the following requirements. 1. The crushed stone shall meet the gradation specified by the Designer. 2. The crushed stone shall be placed in a controlled manner using motorized impact compaction equipment. 3. The aggregate should be compacted to 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor method (ASTM D698). 4. The Testing Agency shall be on site to observe placement, compaction, and provide density testing. The test results shall be submitted to the Designer and the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall provide notification to the Testing Agency and the Designer when excavation, placement, and compaction will occur and arrange for construction observation and testing. 7.5 SUBGRADE PREPARATIONAND FILL PLACEMENT A. Subgrade preparation and FII placement on RAP reinforced soils shall be performed in accordance with the site preparation earthwork section of the project specifications, which contains the following recommendations regarding: Gradation/type of engineered fill soils. 2. Methods for fill placement including, but not limited to, type of compaction equipment, moisture content requirements, maximum lift thickness, and compactive effort. Testing frequency and requirements for engineered fill. 31623-9 4. Minimum dry density as determined by the modified/standard Proctor method (ASTM D-1557/698). 7.6 FOOTING BOTTOMS A. Excavation and surface compaction of all footings shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. B. Foundation excavations to expose the tops of RAP elements shall be made in a workmanlike manner, and shall be protected until concrete placement, with procedures and equipment best suited to (1) prevent softening of the matrix soil between and around the RAP elements before pouring structural concrete, and (2) achieving direct and firm contact between the dense, undisturbed RAP elements and the concrete footing. C. Recommended procedures for achieving these goals are to: 1. Limit over -excavation below the bottom of the footing to 3 -inches (including FILED disturbance from the teeth of the excavation equipment, FEB 21 2012 2. Compaction of surface soil and top of RAP elements shall be prepared using a motorized impact compactor ("Jumping Jack," or similar impact tamping 4: city Cler P equipment). Sled -type tamping devices shall not be used. Compaction shall be Ci ' Iowa city, 109K' performed over the entire footing bottom to compact any loose surface soil and loose surface pier aggregate. 3. Place footing concrete immediately after footing excavation is made and approved, preferably the same day as the excavation. Footing concrete must be placed on the same day if the footing is bearing on expansive or sensitive soils. 4. If same day placement of footing concrete is not possible, place a minimum 3 -inch thick lean concrete seal (`mud mat") immediately after the footing is excavated and approved. D. The following criteria shall apply, and a written inspection report sealed by the project Geotechnical Engineer shall be furnished to the Installer to confirm: I. That water (which may soften the unconfined matrix soil between and around the RAP elements, and may have detrimental effects on the supporting capability of the RAP reinforced subgrade) has not been allowed to pond in the footing excavation at any time. 2. That all RAP elements designed for each footing have been exposed in the footing excavation. 3. That immediately before footing construction, the tops of all the RAP elements exposed in each footing excavation have been inspected and recompacted as necessary with mechanical compaction equipment, and that the tops of any RAP elements which may have been disturbed by footing excavation and related activity have been recompacted to a dry density equivalent to at least 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor method (ASTM D698). 4. That no excavations or drilled shafts have been made after installation of RAP elements within horizontal distance of five feet from the edge of any pier, without the written approval of the Installer or Designer. E. Failure to provide the above inspection and certification by the project Geotechnical Engineer, which are beyond the responsibility of the RAP Installer, may void any written 31623-10 or implied warranty on the performance of the RAP system. END OF SECTION FILED FEe 21 2012 IM-01Y.>M 31623-11 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Formwork for cast -in place concrete. B. Void Form for frost stoops. C. Formwork for exposed column foundations D. Openings for other work. E. Form accessories. F. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. FILED FEB 21 2012 59 PAA Cary Clerk -. Iowa City, lows D. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast -in-place concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2010. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute; 2010. C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute; 2008. D. ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on form materials. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL 03100-1 A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast -in-place concrete work. B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. E. Use the following form types: FILED 1. Footings; 2x edge form 2. Frost Footings; Void Form Fl g ZI 3. Exposed Column; round laminated fiber material form. 2012 .q: S1 P L1 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALSClts' clerk Iowa City, Iowa A. Edge formwork; Lumber: #2 SPF 2.03 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Tubular Column Type: "Sonotube Round" as manufactured by Sonoco Construction or equal. 1. Round, multiple layers of 100% recycled paperboard, spirally wound, and laminated with adhesive. 2. Interior surface; smooth with spiral seam. Moisture barrier plastic coating 3. ]-piece, 1 time use forms. Sizes as indicated. B. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set; 4 inches thick. Provide SlabVoid manufactured by SureVoid Products, Inc. or equal. 2.04 FORMWORKACCESSORIES A. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied. 1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy -based, or vegetable -oil based compound. 2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds. 3. VOC Content: In compliance with applicable local, State, and federal regulations. B. Comers: Chamfered, wood strip type; _3/4" x 3/4" _ inch size; maximum possible lengths. C. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05120. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Earth forms are permitted only where trench foundations are indicated. B. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. C. Form top of earth forms to ensure correct line and grade. 03100-2 3.03 ERECTION -FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping witout hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where striping may damage concrete surfaces. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. E. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like to prevent swelling and for easy removal. F. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of walls. G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms fromE moisture or crushing. H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. FILED 3.04 ERECTION -ROUND FORMS FEB 21 2012 A. Place and brace round forms in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. hL:gfPM IUty Cr Ik owa B. Set forms plumb, and center on column above. itf,19 + C. Apply form release coating to interior surface. D. Protect forms from rain and snow. Do not allow forms to stand in water or snow before placing concrete. 3.05 APPLICATION- FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate informs or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. 3.06 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer. B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, except as otherwise indicated. 3.07 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. 03100-3 B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.08 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.10 FORMREMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. FILED FEB 21 2012 y , 51 PM. cauy�c>ax lowaG4, Sawa END OF SECTION 03100-4 SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Reinforcing steel for cast -in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. FEB 2 1 2012 1. 02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Ciry Ger Iowa A. Section 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories. 'Iowa B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. C. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Reinforcement for masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. B. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. D. AWS DIA/DI AM - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society; 2005. E. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 2001. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. Show all walls in plan and elevation. C. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis if requested by Architect. D. Engineer's review is for general design considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials, dimensions, fabrication, and erection is the Contractor's responsibility. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with CRSI - Manual of Standard Practice. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Deformed billet -steel bars. 03200-1 2. Unfinished. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Flat Sheets. 2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4. C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. 1. Review locations of splices with Architect/Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. Do not "stick" reinforcing into concrete after it has been poured. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows: 1. Supported Slabs and Joists: 1-1/2 inch. 2. Column Ties: 1-1/2 inch. 3. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 2 inch. 4. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch. 5. Slabs on Fill: 2 inch. E. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01400, will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement. FILED FEB 21 7012 it;; rytClerc 10" C-41 Iowa END OF SECTION 03200-2 SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Building concrete slabs on grade. B. Concrete foundation walls and footings. FEB 2 j 2012 y: 5 + t'M C. Joint devices associated with concrete work.City clef], Iowa City, Iowa 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements; Testing and Inspection Agency C. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, pavements, curbs and gutters. D. Section 03100 -Concrete Forms and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork. E. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. F. Section 03356 - Polished Concrete Floor Finishing G. Section 03390 - Concrete Curing. H. Section 07 261 - Under -Slab Vapor Barrier I. Section 07900 -Caulking and Sealing: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. J. Section 312316 - Excavation and Earthwork; Granular cushion. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. C. ACI 302.IR - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007). D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. F. ACI 306R -Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010. G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. H. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011. I. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2010. 03300-1 J. ASTM C143/C143M -Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic -Cement Concrete; 2010a. K. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011. L. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. M. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. N. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2008a. O. ASTM C88I/C88IM - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2010. P. ASTM CI059/CI059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008). Q. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved 2008). R. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawing indicating construction joints and saw cut control joints. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. E. Submit mix design and test data. F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Concrete Testing Service: Owner to hire testing laboratory to perform field quality control testing. Contractor to coordinate work with Testing Agency, refer to Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. C. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. E. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATIONMEETING A. Prior to placing concrete hold meeting with Architect, General Contractor, Concrete Subcontractor, and Polishing Subcontractor to review elevations, finishing requirements, curing FILEDequirements, and slab protection. FEB 21 2012 q:01 PK 03300-2 City Clerk Iowa Cily, Iowa PART2 PRODUCTS 1.01 FORWORR A. Comply with requirements of Section 03100. FILED 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 03200. FEB 2 12012 -0' 69 PM 2.03 CONCRETE MATERMLS City Clerk Iowa Cuy, Iowa A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I -Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. 2. Use crushed stone aggregate for all exposed concrete and floor slabs. 3. Gravel aggregate may be used for unexposed footings, grade beams, and concrete 4. Aggregate shall limit chert, shale, iron oxide, and deleterious materials. 5. Maximum aggregate size: I", unless noted otherwise. a. Natural Sand Fine Aggregate: ASTM C-33; clean hard, strong, durable, and uncoated. b. Crushed Limestone Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C-33; clean, hard, durable, and uncoated. 1) Limit clay lumps to 0.5%, coal and carbonaceous shale to 0.5%, total of shale and coal combined to 1.0%, iron oxide to 0.5%, and unsound chert particles retained on 3/8" sieve to 1.5%. Chert particles which break into 3 or more pieces when subjected to IDOT freezing and thawing shall be considered "unsound". C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. C. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 2.05 A CCESSOR Y MA TERMLS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07261 - Underslab Vapor Retarder. B. Granular Cushion 1. Granular fill to be clean/washed, free draining, approved crushed gravel or crushed stone, with 100% passing a 1-1/2" sieve and not more than 5% passing a #4 sieve. 2. Sand is not permitted. C. Curing Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 03390. D. Non -Shrink Grout: CRD -C 621, factory pre -mixed grout. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which maybe incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Type D Non-metallic 1) "Master flow 713" Master Builders. 03300-3 FILED FEB 21 2012 ,+..5rt1� C�1 2) "Supreme"; Gifford-Hill/American; Admixtures. towa`�+tY�� 3) "Crystex"; L&M Construction Chemical Co. E. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type", "Grade", and "Class" to suit project requirements. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059 Type 11. B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application. C. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. D. Pre -formed Expansion Joint Filler: Foam, closed -cell, expansion joint with tear -off strip. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Expansion Joint Strips EXP04050 manufactured by Reflectix. b. Cellu-Cushion EXP 200 manufactured by Sealed Air. c. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. F. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations. Max. 15% of cement content by weigh. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. 1. Use water -reducing admixture in all concrete. 2. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 3. Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content within following limits: a. Concrete slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, or subjected to hydraulic pressure: 1) 5% to 7% for maximum 1" aggregate. 4. Use admixtures for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. D. Normal Weight Concrete: Footings and walls, not exposed to view. 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 4000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 03300-4 3. Cement Content: Minimum 540 Ib per cubic yard. 4. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 44 percent by weight. 5. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 6. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 7. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch, gravel. E. Normal Weight Concrete: Concrete Slab -on -Grade (Not exposed to freeze -thaw) and concrete foundations exposed to view. I. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/09M at 28 days: 4,000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Cement Content: Minimum 540 Ib per cubic yard. 4. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 53 percent by weight. 5. Non -air entrained. 6. Maximum Slump: 3 inches, 4.5 to 5 inches at floors to receive polished finish. 7. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch, crushed limestone. F. Normal Weight Concrete: Bond beam concrete I . Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. FILED 3. Cement Content: Minimum 470 lb per cubic yard. 2 EB 4. Water -Cement Ratio: Maximum 53 percent by weight. FEB B PM 2012 5. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. Ci Clerk 6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch, gravel. >oaa_Ciry, Iowa 2.08 MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete/Transit Mixers: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. 1. "Delete references for allowing additional water to be added to batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted." B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. 1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 EXECUTION .3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean before applying release agent. B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing 03300-5 applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non -load-bearing applications. FILED D. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non -shrink grout. FEB J ewe -U12 ' E. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. Cooperate with other trades insetting �t c.ry Clerk such work. Iowa City, Imea F. Building Sub -drainage: Install underslab sub -drainage piping and underfloor ductwork sub -drainage piping as indicated on drawings and in Sectio 02620 - Subdrainage. G. Granular Cushion: I. Set granular cushion over prepared sub -grade. Refer to Earthwork for sub -grade preparation. 2. Place granular material in depth as indicated on drawings. Roll and tamp to 98% standard proctor density and until top surface of porous fill base coarse is absolute true to line and grade. Trim top surfaces to permit minimum design thickness of concrete and rigid insulation. H. Vapor Barrier: Install underslab vapor barrier, refer to Section 07261 - Under -Slab Vapor Barrier. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302. IR. Consolidate all concrete and concrete slab -on -grade with mechanical vibration equipment, supplemented by hand-spadding, rodding or tamping. C. Coordinate schedule of placement with Architect to allow observation/inspection of completed prep work prior to placement of concrete, min 7 day notification. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. F. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. G. Round Columns/Foundations: 1. Vibrate concrete in forms to consolidate and eliminate voids. Do not allow vibrator to touch sides of form. 2. Trowel and finish top of exposed foundation. Provide slight crown to maintain positive 03300-6 drainage. 3. Tool perimeter at top of exposed foundations. H. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. I. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F, and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. I. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F. Mixing water maybe chilled, or chopped ice maybe used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 3. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Use water -reducing retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions. J. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.04 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings. If none indicated, verify locations with Architect prior to commencing placement operations. 1. Any required construction joints to be located under wall locations as not to be exposed in final construction. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. 1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains. D. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours after placing; use 3/16 inch thick blade and cut at least I inch deep but not less than 1/3 the depth of the slab. E. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key form, with removable top section forjoint sealant. 3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. Minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Values: FIT ED I. Concrete Building Slab: I a. F(F): overall 40, local 25 FEB 2 b. F(L): overall 35, local 20 , f. Sg p Z��Z chy clerk Iowa City, Iowa 03300-7 B. Measure F(F) and F(L) in accordance with ASTM El 155, within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. C. Correct defects of the defective work as agreed to by Architect Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re -measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.111, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel' as described in ACI 301.I11; thin floor coverings include carpeting and thin set ceramic tile. 2. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: "Steel trowel' as described in ACI 302.1 R; use steel -reinforced plastic trowel blades instead of steel blades to avoid black -burnish marks; decorative exposed surfaces include surfaces to be polished. Tight hard -troweled (three passes) concrete, no burn marks a. Coordinate finishing requirements with concrete polishing sub -contractor. 3. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel' as described in ACI 302.111, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. a. Refer to Section 03390 - Concrete Curing and Sealing for additional sealer to be applied to these surfaces. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of Section 03390. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. FILED FEB2 1j 7012 S�h03300 - a y^ Clty Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be bome by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 1012 'f:JW4 PM City Clerk Iowa Ciry, Iowa, 03300-9 SECTION 03310 FILED COLORED CONCRETE FEB 2 1 2012 4: S? 4M Ci Clerk PART 1- GENERAL I.OI SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, materials, tools and equipment for the colored concrete improvements where shown on the plans. B. Section Includes: I. Integrally colored concrete. 2. Stamping/imprinting. 3. Curing of integrally colored and imprinted concrete. L02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): I. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 2. ACI 302 IR "Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction." 3. ACI 303.1 "Standard Specification for Cast -In -Place Architectural Concrete." 4. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing of Concrete." 5. ACI 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting." 6. ACI 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting." B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C309 "Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete." 2. ASTM C494 "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." 3. ASTM C979 "Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete." C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): AASHTO M194 "Chemical Admixtures." L03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete technical data sheets for the following: I. Colored admixture. 2. Imprinting/Texturing tools. 3. Antiquing release agent. 4. Curing compound. 5. Sealant. 03310-1 B. Design Mixes: For each type of concrete. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors available. D. Mockup example by contractor to provide to client for approval prior to installation. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with 10 -years experience in production of specified products. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer with 5 years experience with work of similar scope and quality. C. Comply with the requirements of ACI 301. D. Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project. E. Notification of manufacturer's authorized representative shall be given at least 1 -week before start of Work. FILED F. Colored Concrete Mock-ups: 1. Based upon colors identified on plans, provide mockups of the two closest FEB 21 2012 standard colors so a selection can be made. if Sti et" 2. At location on Project selected by Engineer, place and finish, each 4' x 4' area. Aq" clerk owa t;� I . ima 3. Construct mockup using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control, construction, and expansion joints in sample panels. Mockup shall be produced by the individual workers who will perform the work for the Project. 4. Accepted mockup provides visual standard for work of Section. 5. Mockup shall remain through completion of the work for use as a quality standard for finished work. Minimum 4'x4' per color/stamp. 6. Remove mockup when directed. LOS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver products in original, unopened packaging. Store in dry conditions and protect from damage, weather and construction activity. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are applied. B. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow, or frost is forecast within 24 -hours. Protect fresh concrete from moisture and freezing. C. Comply with professional practices described in ACI 305R and ACI 3068. D. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. Mix times shall meet manufacturer's written recommendations. 03310-2 L07 PRE -JOB CONFERENCE A. One week prior to placement of integrally colored concrete, a meeting shall be held to discuss the Project and application methods. B. It is suggested that the Engineer, General Contractor, Subcontractor, Ready -Mix Concrete Representative, and a Manufacturer's Representative be present. FILED PART 2 - PRODUCTS FEB 21 2012 L+= 54 fm 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERCity Clerk Iowa City, Iowa A. L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY, Douglasville, Georgia and Los Angeles, California (800) 800-9900 or the appropriate local contact: Eastern Division — 201-672-9050; Western Division — 714-568-1870; Central Division Office — 630-752-9424. B. CHAS E. PHIPPS COMPANY, Cleveland, Ohio or appropriate contact. 4560 Willow Parkway, Cleveland, OH 44125, Office -216-641-2150. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Admixture for color conditioned concrete: CHROMIX; L. M. SCOFIELD COMPANY, factory proportioned, mixed, and packaged, or approved equal. B. Stamping/imprinting Tools and Materials: LITHOTEX® Pavecrafters imprinting tools; L. M. SCOFIELD COMPANY, or approved equal. C. Powder Antiquing Release Agent: LITHOCHROME® Antiquing Release; L.M. SCOFIELD COMPANY, or approved equal. Powder antiquing release agent shall be recommended by pattern tool manufacturer and compatible with color admixture. D. Curing and Sealing Compound: SCOFIELD® Cureseal-WTM and Cureseal-STM; L. M. SCOFIELD COMPANY. Curing and sealing compound shall comply with ASTM C309 and be of same manufacturer as colored admixture, for use with integrally colored concrete, or approved equal. E. SUBSTITUTIONS: The use of products other than those specified will be considered providing that Contractor requests its use in writing. This request shall be accompanied by the following: A certificate of compliance from material manufacturer stating that proposed products meet or exceed requirements of this Section. Documented proof that proposed materials have a 10 -year proven record of performance confirmed by at least 5 local projects that Engineer can examine. 2.03 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors: As selected by Engineer from Scofield Color Chart CHROMIX Admixtures. See plans 03310-3 Imprinting patterns as selected by Engineer from Scofield LITHOTEX® PavecraftersTM Pattern Sheets. See Plans. B. Powder Antiquing Release Agent: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors. 1.04 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Minimum Cement Content: 5 sacks per cubic yard of concrete. B. Slump of concrete shall be consistent throughout Project at 4 -inches or less. At no time shall slump exceed 5 -inches. FILED C. Do not add calcium chloride to mix as it causes mottling and surface discoloration. FEB 21 2012 D. Supplemental admixtures shall not be used unless approved by manufacturer. { 51 P, -k E. Do not add water to the mix in the field. airy Clerk iowacity, IOWA F. Add colored admixture to the mix according to Manufacturer's written instructions in premeasured bags, not by weight of cement content. G. Maximum air content shall not exceed 5 percent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Move concrete into place with square -tipped shovels or concrete rakes. B. Vibrators, when used, shall be inserted and withdrawn vertically. C. Concrete shall be struck to specified level with wood or magnesium straight edge or mechanical vibrating screed. D. The concrete surface shall be further leveled and consolidated with highway magnesium straight edge and/or magnesium bull float. E. Mechanically float concrete surfaces as soon as concrete surface has taken its initial set and will support weight of a power float machine equipped with float shoes or combination blades and operator. F. Apply pattern according to tool manufacturer's instructions. Touch up pattern and finish edges with hand tools as necessary. 3.01 CURING A. Imprinted concrete shall be cured with liquid membrane curing compound as recommended by manufacturer. B. Apply curing compound for integrally colored concrete according to manufacturer's instructions using recommended application techniques. C. Apply curing compound at consistent time for each pour to maintain close color consistency. 03310-4 D. Curing compound shall be of the same color as the colored concrete and be supplied by the same manufacturer. E. As soon as possible after antiquing release has been removed and after moisture content of concrete is low enough that alkali and other salts do not become trapped beneath sealer, normally a minimum of 14 to 28 days after placement, apply 2 -coats of specified sealer according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. There should be no free water on the surface at time of application. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finish work. Prohibit foot or vehicular traffic on the newly imprinted concrete surface. C. Barricade area to protect newly imprinted concrete. D. Protect floor surface from damage until final inspection and acceptance by Owner. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete, which are similar to natural variations in color and appearance of uncolored concrete, are acceptable. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 4:9 PM City Clerk a Iowa Gly, Iowa 03310-5 SECTION 03356 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Grind and polish of floor. B. Surface treatment with concrete hardener, sealer, and slip resistant coatings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS FILED FEB 21 2012 4-.S q pv1 C'ry Clerk Iowa Q% Iowa A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to receive finish. B. Section 03390 - Concrete Curing. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C779 - Standard test method for abrasion resistance of horizontal concrete surfaces. B. ASTM F609 - Standard test method for using a horizontal pull slipmeter. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on Concrete dye, concrete densifier/hardener, concrete enhancer, and grinding and polishing, including information on compatibility of different products and limitations, and color charts for selection by Architect. C. Maintenance Data: Provide data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Floor Finisher: One of the following: 1. Provide documentation showing finisher/applicator is certified by the polishing and densifier manufacturer. 2. Finisher/applicator to have a minimum of 10 projects performed within 3 years of similar type. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those that will exist during actual placement, 6 feet long by 6 feet wide, with coatings applied. B. Locate where directed. C. Maintain mock-up during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. B. Store materials in a clean dry area in and accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 03356- 1 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATIONMEETING A. Attend pre -installation meeting prior to placement of concrete with Architect, General Contractor, Concrete Sub -contractor, andConcrete Polishing Subcontractor to review concrete, placement, and protection. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain light level equivalent to minimum 200 W light source, placed 8 feet above the floor surface, for each 425 sq ft of floor being finished. B. Maintain ambient temperature of 50 degrees F minimum. C. Limit and control damage from excessive dust caused by grind ing/plosh ing procedure. D. Properly dispose of collected dry dust from polishing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS FILED A. Concrete polishing systems FEB 21 2012 1. Manufacturers v: s9 PMI, Cler a. Retroplate. Iowa ry. y, Iowa C b. Induroshine; W.R. Meadows, Inc.. c. Or approved equal. B. Grinding and polishing equipment with dust extraction system: 1. Equipment to be used for grinding/polishing shall possess at least 775 lbs of head pressure. C. Metal diamond grinding segments used with grinding and polishing equipment shall be: 1. VCH 101(40 grit) 2. VCH 102 (80 grit) 3. VCH 103 (150 grit) D. Diamond polishing resin pads used with grinding/polishing machines: I . Type II 3" (100 grit) 2. Type 11 3" (200 grit) 3. Type 113" (400 grit) 4. Type 113" (800 grit) 5. Type 113" (1500 grit) 6. Type 11 3" (3000 grit) E. Concrete Dye: 1. Dye to be installed at 400 grit level. 2. Architect to select from full color line. 3. All areas to receive polished concrete finish shall be the same color color application to produce a mottled effect 4. Manufacturers a. Ameripolish b. L&M Scofield c. or approved equal F. Concrete Densifier 1. Liqui-Hard as manufactured by W.R. Meadows. 2. or approved equal. G. Concrete Enhancer 03356-2 Floor color to be a two 1. Bellatrix as manufactured by W.R. Meadows FILED 2. or approved equal. FEB 21 2012 2.02 SLIP RESISTANT TREATMENT 4.V rq CitY Clerk PART 3 EXECUTION Iowa CiLy' lcwa 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. B. Final sheen shall be equivalent to that as accepted in the mock-up. 3.02 GENERAL POLISHING REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate polishing operations with other associated work and trades. B. Do not use stain of scuff removing agents. C. Utilize machines to the maximum extent practical to achieve optimum efficiency. D. Edge grinding: I. All edges to be polished with hand grinder and the same grit diamonds as noted above to take polish to within 1/2" of edge. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARTION A. Protect adjacent surfacesnot designated to receive treatment. B. Ensure concrete is a minimum of 28 days old. C. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions ensuring that all stains, oil, grease, form release agents, dust and dirt removed prior to application. 3.04 APPLICATION A. To obtain a high -gloss finish, ensure applicator follows the applicable procedures incorporating grinding plates in the following order. (Based on Induroshine PDS -3 process). 1. Verify that the floor is clean and dry prior to polishing procedure. 2. Inspect and verify that the floor does not have curled joints, large cracks, spalling or lippage. If lippage or curled joints are present, refer to Section 03300 for corrective procedures. 3. Using the VCH102 (80 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 500 sq ft/hr. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 4. Using the BRV2 (150 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 600 sq ft/hr. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 5. Using the Type 11 3" (100 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 600 sq ft/hr. If scratches from the previous grit are still apparent, decrease the rate of grinding by 100 sq ft until scratches are removed. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 6. Flood surface with concrete densifier and scrub into floor for 45 minutes, ensuring that no puddling of densifier occurs. 7. Squeegee off excess material. 8. Wait 24 hours. 9. Verify that the floor is dry and clear of debris prior to continuation of polishing procedure. 10. Using the Type I13" (200 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 700 sq ft/hr. If scratches 03356-3 from the previous grit are still apparent, decrease the rate of grinding by 100 sq ft until scratches are removed. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 11. Using the Type 11 3" (400 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 700 sq ft/hr. If scratches from the previous grit are still apparent, decrease the rate of grinding by 100 sq ft until scratches are removed. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 12. Using the Type II 3" (800 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 1000 sq ft/hr. If scratches from the previous grit are still apparent, decrease the rate of grinding by 100 sq ft until scratches are removed. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 13. Using the Type 11 3" (1500 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 1500 sq ft/hr. If scratches from the previous grit are still apparent, decrease the rate of grinding by 100 sq ft until scratches are removed. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 14. Using the Type 11 3" (3000 grit), grind the floor surface at a rate of 2000 sq ft/hr. If scratches from the previous grit are still apparent, decrease the rate of grinding by 100 sq ft until scratches are removed. Vacuum the surface to remove loose particulates. 15. Apply concrete enhancer per manufacturers instructions. 3.05 FLOOR SURFACE TREATMENT A. Apply hardener to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply slip resistant finish to scheduled floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Restrict foot traffic for at least 12 hours. B. General Contractor is responsible to protect floor finish prior to concrete polishing and after concrete polishing until building occupancy. FILED FEB 21 2012 y: 55' (Im City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 03356-4 SECTION 03390 CONCRETE CURING AND SEALING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. B. Finish sealer at exposed concrete surfaces, not indicated for other finish FILED 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS FEB 2 2012 A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals e}: S9 &k. B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. erk Iowa ry c,ryIo . w, Iowa C. Section 03356 -Polished Concrete Floor Finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 302.1 R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007) . C. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001 (Reapproved 2008). D. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. E. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2007. F. ASTM D 2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, moisture -retaining sheet, and sealers, including compatibility of different products and limitations. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.11K. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 and ASTM C-1315, Type 1 - Clear or translucent, Class B. I. Acrylic polymer resin, 25% solids, water based curing, sealing, and dustproofing. 2. Non -yellowing 03390- 1 3. No solvent vapors 4. Manufacturers: a. Kure -N -Seal by Sonnebom. b. Dress and Seal WB30 by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. B. Finish Sealer: Clear, high gloss, emulsified cross-linking polymer, stain protection 1. PennaGuard SPS as manuf by L&M Construction Chemicals or equal. C. Moisture -Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. 1. Curing paper, regular. 2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in.. 3. White -burlap -polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches wide. D. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103,4 mil thick, clear. E. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. FILED PART 3 EXECUTION FEB 21 2012 1/:57 PK 3.01 EXAMINATION ity Clerk Iowa City, Iowa A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured. B. Verify compatability of Curing Compound with floor coverings to be utilized. 3.02 EXECUTION- HORIZONTAL SURFACES A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308R. B. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. C. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. D. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. E. Curing Methods; Perform curing of concrete by one or a combination of the following: 1. Moisture Curing: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water -fog spraying 2. Moisture -Retaining Sheet; Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped not less than 3 inches and sealed with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. 3. Absorptive Moisture -Retaining Sheet: Saturate burlap -polyethylene and place burlap -side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place for 7 days. 4. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimum two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. a. Membrane curing compounds shall not be used on concrete to recieve Polished Finish. 3.03 EXPOSED FLOORS WITH SEALER (Floors indicated in Room Finish Schedule to receive Sealer) A. Apply sealer after completion of construction and final clean-up, and prior to final occupancy. 03390-2 B. Clean concrete floor prior to application. Utilize mechanical means as required to clean drywall compound, paint and other construction debris from C. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, minimum two coats, with second coat applied at right angles to first. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface. B. Protect concrete to receive polished finish from damage and/or staining during construction. 3.05 SCHEDULES A. Vertical walls/Round Column Foundations: Membrane curing compound. B. Concrete Frost Stoops: Membrane curing compound. C. Interior Concrete slab -on -grade to receive polished finish: Moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. D. All Other Floor Areas: at contractor's option 1. Membrane curing compound. 2. Moisture retaining sheet. 3. Absorptive moisture retaining sheet. 4. Ponding/spraying END OF SECTION FjLED FFR 2 • s PSI 2012 bW 'tYcj"j' . a �Y, i;R 03390-3 SECTION 04720 CAST STONE PART 1 GENERAL FILED 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FEB 2 j 2012 't.'Sy /M A. Architectural cast stone. Iow'�tIk Iowa B. Units required are: 1. Coping at top of cut stone veneer wall and columns. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Mortar for setting of cast stone B. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers; Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast stone work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. B. ASTM A185/AI85M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b. D. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011. E. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011. F. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010. G. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a. H. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. I. ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2010b. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer. C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement, exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers. 1. Supplier shall detail and provide anchorage and joint connections and accessories. D. Verification Samples: Pieces of actual cast stone components not less than 12 inches square, illustrating range of color and texture to be anticipated in components furnished for the project. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years of experience in 04720-1 producing cast stone of the types required for project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and discoloration. Protect comers from damage. B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule. C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions. D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt. E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or other damage. F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided. G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry work to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS FILED A. Architectural Cast Stone: FEB 2 f 2t42 1. Edwards Cast Stone �: Sq Pn1 2. Haddonstone City C .rk 3. Continential Cast Stone Iowa City, Iowa 4. Any current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute. 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural limestone, complying with ASTM C1364. 1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece. 2. Freeze -Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by laboratory testing in accordance with ASTM C 1364. 3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet. 4. Color: match Edwards Cast Stone, Buff 10-025 at existing Shelter and Marina building on site. 5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings. I. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide: a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces. b. Drips on projecting components. c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in. C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses; comply with ACI 318. 04720-2 1. Pieces More than 12 inches Wide: Provide full length two-way reinforcement of cross-sectional area not less than 0.25 percent of unit cross-sectional area. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150. 1. For Units: Type I, white or gray as required to match Architect's sample. 2. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III maybe used in cold weather. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands. FILED D. Pigments: ASTM C979, inorganic iron oxides; do not use carbon black. FEB 21 2012 1/: 5,T E. Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M. C; a , ]OWa-�. IcRq F. Water: Potable. G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M deformed bars, galvanized or epoxy coated. H. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185/A185M, galvanized or epoxy coated. I. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required for conditions. J. Mortar: Portland cement -lime, ASTM C270, Type N. K. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. L. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine construction to receive cast stone components. Notify Architect if construction is not acceptable. B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section 04810. B. Mechanically anchor each cast stone unit. C. Setting: 1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation. 2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fill vertical joints with mortar. 4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non -shrink grout. D. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed. 1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing. 2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints. 3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile. 04720-3 4. Leave the following joints open for sealant: a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. b. Joints in projecting units. c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. f. Joints labeled "expansion joint". E. Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 07900. F. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more. 2. Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 4. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units. G. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed indirect daylight at 20 feet. 1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect's approval. 3.03 CLEANING A. Keep cast stone components clean as work progresses. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect completed work from damage. B. Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar -splashed work to condition of new work. FILED FEB 212012 y: sci e&t City Cleric lawa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 04720-4 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Concrete Block. FILED B. Ground Face Concrete Block FEB 21 C. Mortar and Grout. 2012 q S4 pr� City D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. CI`erk . Iowa Cry, Iowa E. Flashings. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Electronic submittals B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry. C. Section 04852 - Stone Masonry Veneer: Stone anchored to masonry back-up. D. Section 05500 -Miscellaneous Metals: Loose steel lintels. E. Section 07210 -Building Insulation: Insulation for cavity spaces. F. Section 07900 -Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control joints. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2009. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6frMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. E. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. F. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011. G. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006. H. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. 1. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011. J. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. K. ASTM C270 -Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010. 04810- 1 L. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007. M. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010. N. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units; 2011. O. ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010. P. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009. Q. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single -Ply Roof Membrane; 2010. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers. LOS SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. C. Shop Drawings: FILED 1. Provide shop drawings indicating locations for masonry reinforcement. FEB 2 12012 D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. U' 51 PM E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has certified City Clerk masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in the manufacture Iowa City, Iowa of concrete block. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct a masonry wall/stone veneer as a mock-up panel sized 4 feet long by 4 feet high; include CMU back-up, stone veneer material, anchors, thru-wall flashing, cavity vent, mortar, and mortar net in mock-up. 1. Approved mock-up panel shall be standard of quality for remaining work. B. Locate where directed, adjacent to existing marina building. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 04810-2 A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for lintels, control joint edges, jambs, and other detailed conditions. 3. Radius Corners: Provide block with 1 inch radius bullnose edge at all exposed outside comers/edges. 4. Load -Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight. a. Hollow block. 5. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129. a. Hollow block. B. Ground Face Units: ASTM C 90, non -load bearing, hollow block, with ground face complying with ASTM C 744, with manufacturer's integral water -repellant 1. Size: Nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on plans. 2. Pattern: Vertical single score to simulate nominal 8 x 8 inch. 3. Provide units with ground face on 1 and/or 2 sides as required to provide ground face finish at all exposed surfaces. 4. Colors and styles: As selected by Architect from Manufacture's standard colors, similar to Trenwyth's 38 colors. 5. Manufacturer:. FILED a. Trendstone as manufactured by Trenwyth Industries b. Anchor Block Company FEB 21 2012 c. Basalite Concrete Products 59 PMA� d. Premier Block Corporation � ry Geir e. As approved by the Architect. wa city, tuwa 6. Units with Integral Water Repellent: Concrete block units as specified in this section with polymeric liquid admixture added to concrete masonry units at the time of manufacture. a. Performance of Units with Integral Water Repellent: 1) Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 and for a minimum of 72 hours. (a) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours. (b) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per hour at the end of 24 hours. (c) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test. 2) Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase. 3) Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease. 4) Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage. b. Use only in combination with mortar and grout that also has integral water repellent admixture. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERL9LS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. 3. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 4. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. B. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Iron or chromium oxides with demonstrated stability and colorfastness. Color(s): a. CMU: Std gray (non -colored) mortar b. Stone Veneer: Tinted as required to match mortar color at existing Marina Building 04810-3 stone veneer. FILED 2. Manufacturers: a. Davis Colors: www.daviscolors.com. FEB21 2012 b. Solomon Colors: www.solomoncolors.com. EBc. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. city ri0r Iowa CWI. . Water: Clean and potable. _ - D. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. E. Moisture -Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 1. Acceptable product: Omicron as manufactured by Master Builders Company or equal. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur -O -Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur -O -Wal brand): www.h-b.com. 3. WIRE -BOND: www.wirebond.com. 4. As approved by Architect. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600- Product Requirements. B. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03200; size as indicated on drawings; uncoated finish. C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. D. CMU/Stone Veneer Anchors and Reinforcing: Refer to Section 04852 - Stone Masonry Veneer E. Refer to Section 04852 Stone Masonry Veneer for veneer anchorage. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637, Type 1, 0.040 inch thick. 1. "Epra-Max" as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. or equal. 2. Provide manufacturer's accessories as required for a complete installation, including 1 1/2" wide butyl tape, spray primer, and bonding adhesive. B. Stainless Steel Flashing: ASTM A 666, Type 304, soft temper; 20 ga thick; 2D dull finish. 1. Provide stainless steel flashing with drip at all thru-wall flashing locations. Extend 1/2" out from face of wall, with this 1/2" bent down 30 degrees and hemmed to form a drip. 2. Provide pre -fabricated comer pieces. 3. Membrane flashing shall lap down over this steel flashing to within 1" of exterior face of wall. C. Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. 1. Mortar Diverter: Mortar Net or equal. Panels designed for installation at flashing locations, thickness to match cavity, x 10" height x 5' long sections. a. Manufacturers: 04810-4 1) Advanced Building Products Inc: www.advancedflashing.com. 2) Mortar Net USA, Ltd: www.mortamet.com. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Air Barrier: Refer to Section 07260 -Weather Barriers for air barrier to be applied to face of CMU at exterior walls. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S. 2. Interior/Exterior, loadbearing and non-loadbearing masonry: Type S. B. Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. C. Mortar -Proofing: Provide motar-proofing admixture to all setting mortar and grout. Comply with manufacturers requirements D. Mixing: FILED 1. Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. 2. Colored mortar shall utilize manufacturer's pre -mix mortar FEB 21 2012 PART 3 EXECUTION y city clerk loam city, Iowa 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 04810-5 3.05 PLACINGAND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortarjoints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. FILED E. Interlock intersections and external corners. FEB 21 2012 F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must q: 511 CkTr be made, remove mortar and replace. CAY ion 'Ima G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled. I. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 3.06 CAVITYMORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity airspace or to plug weeplcavity vents. B. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories. C. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonryjoint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 24 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - STONE MASONRY VENEER A. Refer to Section 04852 - Stone Masonry Veneer 3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non -masonry construction. 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing. C. Extend EPDM flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. D. Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. 04810-6 E. Provide end dams at sides of flashing above openings. 3.10 LINTELS FILED A. Install galvanized, loose steel lintels over openings. B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening. FEB 2 1 2012 54 PM C. Provide 16 oz smooth copper bond break at lintel at control joints City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa D. Rake back joints at lintel and provide backing rod and sealant. 3.11 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce bond beams with 2, No. 5 bars, 1 inch from bottom web. B. Reinforce cells at adjacent to doors and window with 2- #5 bars and grout solid. C. Lap all reinforcing minimum of 40 bar diameters. D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. F. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 16 inches either side of opening. G. Refer to structural drawings for additional notes and requirements. 3.12 CONTROL JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 3.13 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in anchors and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. I. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.14 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. 04810 - 7 C. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and I/4 inch in 1011; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. D. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. E. Maintain minimum 1" air space in cavity walls. 3.1 S CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.16 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Protect all sash, metal, aluminum, lintels, and other adjacent materials that may be stained or damaged by cleaning materials/process. D. Attempt cleaning with stiff brushes and clean water prior to application of any cleaning agents. E. If additional cleaning is required, prepare test sample area of exposed masonry with proposed cleaning method and cleaning agent for approval by architect. 3.17 PROTECTION A. Provide secured in place polyethylene cover overtop of exposed masonry and/or brick walls to prevent water infiltration/collection into wythe. Covering to be installed at the end of each work day, and upon completion of work until floor/roof system is installed. B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. FILED FEB 21 1012 L+,-5PM city Clerk Iowa city, Iowa END OF SECTION 04810-8 SECTION 04820 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES FILED FEB 2 12012 54 PM CiClerk IoM+- '10M A. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. B. Masonry Grout. C. Extent of each type of reinforced Unit Masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Placement of steel anchors for Steel Beams. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of loose steel lintels. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04065 — Mortar and Masonry Grout applies to work of this section. A Section 04810 - Unit Masonry System applies to work of this Section. 1.4 REFERENCES A ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. B. ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures. C. ASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM At 23 - Zinc (Hot -Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Mill certificates: Submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis, tensile and bend tests for reinforcement steel required for project when requested by Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. Show all walls in plan and elevation. C. Engineer's review is for general design considerations only. Compliance with requirements, dimensions, fabrication, and erection is the Contractor's responsibility. 04820-1 FILET) FEB 21 2099 9F Pit 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE e' CityCierk Iowa City, Iowa A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1, 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site in a manner which does not damage materials. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 615, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18. 2. Where No.2 bars are shown, provide plain, round, carbon steel bars, ASTM A 675, Grade 80. 3. Shop -fabricate reinforcement bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. 4. Provide 9 gage galvanized rebar positioners to accurately locate reinforcing bar. 2.2 GROUT A. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling vertical cores. Use 3000 psi concrete in all bond beams. Do not use grout or mason's mortar. C. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting technique subject to requirements of this Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater). 1. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as indicated, but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2", whichever is greater. Provide lateral ties as indicated. C. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the 04820-2 Architect. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. Provide not less than minimum lap indicated, or if not indicated, as required by governing code. D. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and 'T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fire- proofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. E. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated. 1. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non -reinforced masonry where they intersect. At masonry wall openings provide two vertical reinforcing bars each side of opening. 1. Extend vertical reinforcing full height of wall. 2. Provide two courses joint reinforcing below sills and above lintels at each opening. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Refer to Section "Unit Masonry" for general installation requirements of unit masonry. B. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar, grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, be and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. C. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 1. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of members before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. FILED TT i�T� a. 10 days for girders and beams. 1LED b. 7 days for reinforced masonry soffits. FEB 21 2012 3.4 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 4; S9Pvt City Clerk Io A. General: -city,IoWa 1. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. a. Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed joints. B. Walls Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 -running bond (unless noted otherwise) with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. 04820-3 2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in FILED mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. FEB 21 2012 3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. Place small mesh expanded metal '}•%&,k lath or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over cores or cells of non - Iowa City, Iowa reinforced vertical cells, or provide units with solid bottoms. a. Option: Where all vertical cores are not shown to be grouted, Contractor may elect to fill all vertical cores with grout. In which case, requirements for mortar bedding of cross -webs and closing of core spaces below bond beams do not apply. C. Columns, Piers and Pilasters: 1. Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not shown, use units which provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for number and size of vertical reinforcement bars shown. 2. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints in vertical alignment. 3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, lay wall and pilaster units together to maximum pour height specified. D. Low -Lift Grouting: 1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in. in vertical cores to be grouted, and center bar in wall. Use 9 gage galvanized rebar positioners to accurately locate vertical reinforcing. 2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to lying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Provide 40 bar diameter lap for #6 bars and smaller. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding grout lift height. 3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 4' height or if bond beam occurs below 4' height stop pour at course below bond beam. 4. Place grout by pumping unless approved otherwise, using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top course of pour. 5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 -1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at comers and intersections as shown. Place 3000 psi concrete in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. 3.5 TESTING A. Grout testing: Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform material evaluation tests. Contractor shall employ, at his expense, a testing laboratory to design mixes. Testing laboratory services shall be in accordance with Section 01410. B. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Owner, Construction Manager, Architect, Structural Engineer, and Contractor. 1. Grout Testing: Grout testing will be performed following the methods outlined in ASTM C1019-84. a. Submit reports including mix design, slump of grout, and type and number of units used to form molds for specimens. 04820-4 b. One (1) set of tests and slump tests will be made at least 14 days ahead of actual date of intended use. Break samples at 7 days. Additional cylinders or design mix alterations may be required as conditions dictate following results of 7 day tests. Tests must indicate a grout strength of 2,000 psi @ 28 days. 2. Provide cylinders and slump tests throughout project as follows: a. 10 sets of cylinders and slump tests at random locations for project. 3. At least 95% of tests shall break at or above the strengths specified for the respective age. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 9-.57 PM City Clerk a Iowa City, lows 04820-5 SECTION 04852 STONE MASONRY VENEER PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Cut stone veneer at exterior and interior walls. FEB 21 2012 B. Metal anchors and accessories. '+'S4 PM C. Setting mortar and pointing mortar. to 'iry C1 k Y, Iowa D. Graffiti and water repellent coating. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Joint reinforcement, Ties, Anchors, and flashings. B. Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2009. B. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010. D. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2010. E. ASTM C568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 2010. F. ILI (HB) - Indiana Limestone Handbook; Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; 2007, 22nd Edition. G. IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction; International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council; 1993. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on stone units, mortar, and reinforcement. C. Samples: Submit two stone samples illustrating color range, texture, and markings. D. Samples: Submit mortar color samples. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten years of documented experience. 04852-1 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type required by this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Refer to mock-up requirements in Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site. B. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation from forming on stone. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and ambient air at minimum of 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of work. PART 2 PRODUCTS FILED 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Stone Quarriers: FEB 2i 212 1. Weber Stone Company; Product Random Split Face Veneer. v' cny Clerk 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. Iowa city, Iowa 2.02 STONE A. Limestone: Anamosa Limestone; complying with ASTM C568 Classification I -Low Density. To match existing stone veneer at on site Marina Building 1. Grade: Standard, per ILI Handbook. 2. Color: Buff B. Surface Texture: Split face. C. Size and variation to match existing stone at Marina Building 2.03 MORTAR A. Setting Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type S, using the Proportion Method, as specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Pointing Mortar: Type N as specified in Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies, and using the Property Method in ASTM C 270. 1. Color: Mineral oxide pigment; buff color, to match existing mortar at on site Marina Building stone veneer. a. Davis Colors b. Solomon Colors c. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: As specified in Section 04810. B. Wall Ties: 1. CMU: Formed steel wire, 9 gage diameter, hot dip galvanized per ASTM A123/Al23M, ladder reinforcing for embedment into masonry with wire loop and vertical j -hook.. a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., TIE-HVR-195 flexible vee tie, or equal b. Size as required for cavity depth. 2. Wood Stud: clip style system with backplate, vertical J -hook, and V tie. Hot dip galvanized 04852-2 per ASTM A123/A123M a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc TIE-HVR-195VB anchor sytem b. Backplate: 12 ga. x 2 5/8" wide x depth as required for insulation/cavity thickness c. Vertical J -hook: 3/8" diam. d. #195/295 Vee-Byna Tie; depth as required for cavity/stone thickness C. Other Anchors in Direct Contact with Stone: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel, of sizes and configurations required for support of stone and applicable superimposed loads. D. Flashings: Refer to Section 04810 E. Weep: Polyethelene tubing and cotton rope weep. F. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces. 2.05 STONE FABRICATION A. Pattern and Coursing: Anamosa Random Split Face Veneer, to match existing stone at on site Marina building B. Fabricate for 3/8 inch beds and joints. FILED C. Bed and Joint Surfaces: FEB 21 2012 1. Cut or sawn full square for full thickness of unit. 4:57 f'M City Clerk D. Backs: Sawn. Iowa City, Iowa E. Form stone corners to irregularjoint profile. Clean jagged corners from stone in preparation for setting. 2.06 SEALERIGRAFFITI CONTROL A. Sure Klean Weather Seal Blok-Guard & Graffiti Control Ultra as manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc., or equal B. Clear, solvent -based silicone elastomer formulated to weatherproof masonry materials and protect treated surfaces from repeated graffiti attacks without altering the natural appearance. 1. Total solids: 9%, ASTM D2369 2. Breathable PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. B. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces. C. Clean sawn surfaces of rust stains and iron particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back-up. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. B. Cut stone at site to produce clean faces. 04852-3 C. Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions. D. Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar. E. Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and minimize visual variations, and provide a uniform blend of stone unit sizes. Match pattern and coursing at existing Marina building F. Provide setting and pointing mortar in accordance with Section 04810. FILED 1. If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper mortar only within two hours after mixing. 2. At ambient air temperature 80 degrees F and above, use mortar within two hours after FEB 21 2012 mixing; at ambient air temperature below 50 degrees F, use mortar within 4194 Ptv\ two -and -one-half hours after mixing. City Clerk Iowa City, lowa G. Fill dowel holes in stone units with mortar. H. Arrange stone coursing in random bond with consistent joint width. I. Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width. J. Install cavity mortar control as indicated in Section 04810. K. Install weeps in vertical stone joints at 24 inches on center horizontally; immediately above horizontal flashings, above shelf angles and supports, and at top of each cavity space; do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place horizontal joint reinforcement in first two horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Embed wall ties in masonry back-up to bond veneer to back-up at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 36 inches on center horizontally. F. In addition, place wall ties at maximum 3 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. 3.05 JOINTS A. Leave the following joints open for sealant: 1. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. 2. Joints in projecting units. 3. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. 4. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. 5. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. 6. Joints labeled "expansion joint'. B. Rake out mortar joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch and brush joints clean to accommodate pointing mortar. Fill joints with pointing mortar. C. Pack mortar into joints and work into voids. Neatly tool surface to concave joint. D. At joints to be sealed, clean mortar out of joint before it sets. Brush joints clean. 04852-4 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon completion of work. B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. FILED 3.07 SEALERIGRAFFITI CONTROL FEB 2 A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. y..S9 KZU12 B. Protect glass, aluminum storefront, and other adjacent materials. tc aiC,ry Io C. Apply "wet -on -wet' to a visibly dry and absorbent surface. D. Spray Application: 1. Using low-pressure (<50 psi) spray equipment, saturate, "wet -on -wet' from the bottom up. Avoid excessive overlapping. 2. Allow the first application to penetrate the masonry surface for 2 to 3 minutes. Reapply in same saturating manner to ensure complete coverage of recessed surfaces. 3. Immediately brush out runs and drips to prevent build up. E. Brush or Roller: 1. Thoroughly saturate the surface. Avoid excessive overlapping. 2. Brush out runs and drip to prevent buildup. 3.08 PROTECTION A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non -staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. 3.09 SCHEDULE A. Stone Veneer; at interior and exterior locations as indicated on plans, including: B. Sealer/Graffitti Control 1. Provide sealer at the following locations: a. Interior and exterior locations indicated for stone veneer provided under this project/phase. b. Ground face concrete block at trash enclosure c. Existing interior and exterior stone veneer at existing Marina and Park Shelter columns. Sealer/Graphitti control will be required to be installed at separate times. a. Finish at existing Marina and Park Shelter columns to be installed as soon as weather permits this spring 2012. b. Finish at work to be completed under this phase to be provided after work completed and prior to final occupancy. END OF SECTION 04852-5 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURALSTEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Structural steel framing members. FEB 2 1 2U12 B. Base plates, expansion joint plates, and angle frames. y:5� k laza �Y, iowa C. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 05 3210 -Steel Roof Deck: Support framing for small openings in roof deck. C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Additional requirements for steel exposed to view, items to be galvanized D. Section 04 8100 -Unit Masonry System: Supply of anchors for embedding into masonry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a. F. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2003. G. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b. H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. 1. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2004a. J. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2002. K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. L. AWS DI. 1/DI.IM - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. M. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS 05120- 1 A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. B. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.1 and A2.4 symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 1. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections. C. Engineer review of shop drawings will be for general considerations only. Compliance with requirements for materials, dimensions, fabrications and erection shall be the Contractor's responsibility. FILED D. All beams and girder connections not otherwise noted shall be designed, fabricated and erected as a standard connection in accordance with the latest edition of AISC Manual of Steel FEB 21 2012 Detailing. Details shown are typical: similar details apply to similar conditions unless 4,.e, q vtj- otherwise indicated. Connection concepts to be approved by Architect/Engineer. Judgment Gry Clerk Iowa Gry, lowa regarding appropriateness of specific connections to be determined by Architect/Engineer. E. Any material ordering or fabrication prior to reviewed shop drawings is at the contractor's own risk. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Code and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator as a part of this preparation of these shop drawings". 2. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Building", including "Commentary" and Supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. American Welding Society (AWS) DI.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel". B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". C. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. 1. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. L06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast -in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time so not to delay work. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. D. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damage materials or structures as directed. 05120-2 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FILED A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Sections: ASTM A992 (Fy=50 ksi) B. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. FEB 2 j 2012 -f:'S4 Pon C. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. luwahCity, a �yjaws D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B. Type E. E. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108 Grade 1015 or 1020, Headed Studs, Cold finished carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 (Grade 36), non -headed type unless otherwise indicated. G. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low -carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections. H. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows: 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A325, Type N. I. Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors to be "Kwik Bolt" or approved equal. J. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Tnemec- 10-99. K. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. L. Non-metallic Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: Pre -mixed, non-metallic, non -corrosive, non -staining product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CE -CRD -C621, Type D. 1.02 FABRICATION A. Refer to Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications for items to be galvanized, and additional requirements for Architectural steel to remain exposed. B. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. C. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. D. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. E. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. F. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners with washers for all field bolts. 05120-3 G. High -Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM or A490 bolts" (RCRBSJ). H. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of Welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. FILED I Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes FEB 21 2012 with warp. *} roq ?A J. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings. No holes allowed in structural steel beams or columns unless specifically detailed and approved by Engineer. K. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. L. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. Z03 SHOP PAINTING A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar or those receiving five proofing. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2" of embedded areas only. 1. Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from fust. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 1. Remove oil and grease with solvents in accordance with SP -1-63. 2. Remove dirt, rust, mill scale and deteriorated paint by power tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP-2-63. 3. Brush-off blast clean all exposed steel columns in accordance with SP -7. C. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use painting methods which result in full coverage ofjoints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Surveys: Employ a registered professional engineer or land surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds. C. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to 05120-4 FILED FEB 21 2012 effectively complete work. Iowa City, Iowa D. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. E. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices. G. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. H. Pack non-metallic, non -shrink grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. 1. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment. J. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. K. Established required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. L. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. M. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. N. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. O. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. P. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. Q. Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch up painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel is included in Division 9 under painting work. 3.02 QUALITYCONTROL A. Owner may engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. 05120-5 • I. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work. B. Owner shall provide the following testing by testing agency or qualified personnel: 1. Shop Bolted Connections: Inspector test in accordance with AISC specifications. a. Shop Welding: Inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows: 1) Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. b. Perform visual inspection of all welds. c. Field Bolted Connections: Inspect in accordance with AISC specifications. Use calibrated wrench to tighten all high strength field bolts. Recalibrate wrench on a daily basis. 2. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection of structural steel as follows: 3. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. a. Perform visual inspection of all welds. FILED N:Sq PM FEB 21 2012 Ci�y,Clint lows G41, Iowa END OF SECTION 05120-6 SECTION 05321 STEEL DECK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Roof deck. B. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals FILED FEB 21 2012 B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches. C. Section 05 2100 -Steel Joist Framing D. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2004a. B. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability; 2004b C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2006. D. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2001. E. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual. B. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified. C. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Floor Deck: 1/360. D. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Roof Deck: 1/240. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittals procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 05321 - 1 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Iowa. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation. B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Deck: 1. Vulcraft/Nucor Corporation; Product Type 1.5 B: www.vulcraft.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 STEEL DECK A. Roof Deck: Non -composite type, fluted steel sheet: 1. Ungalvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS. a. Grade as required to meet performance criteria. 2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized substrate. 3. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 20 gage. 4. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch. FILED 5. Type B 6. Span Design: 3 span minimum 7. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. FES 21 2012 8. End Joints: Lapped, welded. y't PClerk Iowa City, Iowa 2.03 ACCESSORYMATERIALS A. Welding Materials: AWS Dl.l. B. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick. C. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck. 2.04 FABRICA TED DECK A CCESSORIES A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, 22 gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck. B. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. 3.02 INSTALLATION 05321 -2 A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing. C. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing. D. Fastening - Roof Deck 1. Lap deck min 2" 2. Main supports: Weld deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports with 5/8" diameter fusion welds at 12" oc. (36/4 weld pattern) 3. Deck side laps: Fasten sidelaps with # 10 tek screw at 36" oc. 4. Perimeter edges: Weld perimeter edges of deck with 5/8" diameter fusion welds or 1" long fillet welds at 12" intervals uno. E. At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide 3 x 3 x 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute. F. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum. G. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion. H. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings. I. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell closures. J. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute. K. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. L. All holes "burned through" steel roof deck when welding shall be repaired and touched up with primer. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 4: $.Y PAY 05321 -3 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items., including: 1. Lintels 2. Glu -lam connections 3. Entry sign metal fabrication 4. Trash enclosure gates 5. Misc. Roof Opening Framing 6. Fireplace lintel 7. Misc. support angles at millwork 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals FILED FEB 21 2012 ,/: #1 Pna CRY Clerk Iowa City. 10wa B. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 06181 - Glued -Laminated Structural Units. D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A14.3 -American National Standard for Ladders --Fixed --Safety Requirements; 2008. B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2010. D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. E. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. F. ASTM A283/A283M -Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003 (Reapproved 2007). G. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a. H. ASTM A325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009. 1. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a. J. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007. K. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2010. 05500- 1 L. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). M. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Design under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Iowa. FILED PART 2 PRODUCTS FEB 2 1 2012 2. 01 MATERIALS - STEEL t: 51 P tq City C111 A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. Iowa city, Iowa B. Plates: ASTM A283. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM Al53/AI53M where connecting galvanized components. D. Welding Materials: AWS DI.1/Dl.l M; type required for materials being welded. E. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type 1 -Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Fill any remaining voids with plastic filler and sand smooth. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Ledge Angles Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. B. Glued -Laminated Connections: As detailed, hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication. No shop 05500-2 primer, galvanized finish to remain exposed. C. Entry Sign fabrication: as detailed, hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication. No shop primer, galvanized finish to remain exposed 2.04 FINISHES -STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions a. Galvanized Glue -Laminated Connections. b. Galvanized Entry Sign fabrication c. Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. d. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Prime Painting: One coat, red oxide. D. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. E. Galvanizing ofNon-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. 2.OS FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. FILED FEB 21 2012 y, 5Y PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS Dl. 1/D1.IM. D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 05500-3 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non -cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out -of -Position: 1/4 inch. FILED FEB 21 2012 S°l ?e1 - I City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 05500-4 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing. C. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings. D. Non-structural Plywood Sheathing. E. Roofing nailers. F. Preservative treated wood materials. G. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. H. Mounting boards at IT Room. 1. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. J. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS FILED FEB 21 2012 ':sf ?m Io a Ci ler City, Iowa A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing. B. Section 06150 - Wood Decking. C. Section 06160 - Sheathing; roof sheathing and structural plywood at shear walls D. Section 06181 - Glued -Laminated Structural Units. E. Section 07210 - Board and Batt Insulation; nailable base insulation over wood decking F. Section 07260 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over sheathing. G. Section 07461 - Wood Siding:shade trellis H. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum -based sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AFPA (WFCM) -Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two -Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B. ASTM A153/A153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM E84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b. D. AWPA Ul -Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2010. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology 06100-1 (Department of Commerce); 2005. F. W WPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. C. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structural tables marked for comparison. 1. OS DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Refer to Structural Notes on Drawing S1 for structural lumber species and/or structural ratings. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Refer to Structural Notes on Drawing S 1 for structural lumber species and/or structural ratings. B. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (W WPA). C. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. D. Moisture Content: Kiln-dryor MC15. FILED E. Stud Framing( 2x2 through 2x8):2 FES zr I CJI 1. Species: Spruce Pine Fir. y : 5 f PM 2. Grade: S4S, No. 2. City clux Iowa City, Iowa F. Small Beam Framing (2x6 through 2x12 ): 1. Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. 2. Grade: No. 2. G. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 06100-2 Z03 STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER A. At Contractor's option, structural composite lumber may be substituted for concealed dimension lumber and timbers. B. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer. 1. Beams: Use laminated veneer lumber with manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum. 2.04 CONSTRUCTIONPANELS A. Roof Sheathing, overlay over 2x6 laminated wood decking: Refer to Section 06160 � S}t�aikiPg B. Wall Sheating, Structural Shear Walls; refer to Section 06160 - Sheathing i 1LLlJ C. Wall Sheathing: Non -Structural Wall Sheathing FEB 21 2012 '.4.54 em, 1. C -D Plywood or OSB, APA rated 24/16, Exposure I or better. City Clerk 2. 1/2", 5/8", and 3/4" as indicated on drawings Iowa City, Iowa 3. square edge D. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A -D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2. Tech Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. 4. Sill Anchor Bolts: 1/2" dia. x 12" long, bent, with nut and washer. B. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from continuous rolls. C. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 07620. 2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA UI -Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative -Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Ul, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber exposed to weather. c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. e. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated. Urc7DDIIc3 FILED 2• Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Gmde: AWPA Ul, Use Category UC2 and UC313, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft FEB 21 2012 retention. "sq VtA a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. City Clerk b. Treat plywood in other locations as indicated. Iowa City, Iowa P %� PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION- GENERAL A. Connections and Fasteners as indicated on structural drawings/notes and in accordance B. Select material sizes to minimize waste. C. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. D. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing at each end. F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. G. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. 06100-4 C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall -mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Where ceiling -mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. FILED 3. Grab bars. 4. Towel and bath accessories. FEB 21 2012 5. Wall -mounted door stops. 5ty P 6. Wall paneling and trim. Clerk 7. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. lowa_Cuy, qn 8. Projection screens 3.05 ROOF -RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTR UCTION PANELS A. Wall Sheathing (exterior of wall): Secure with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails or screws. 1. Refer to structural drawings for nailing requirements 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.08 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01732. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co -generation facilities or "waste -to -energy" facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION ;�b1GhII�7 SECTION 06150 WOOD DECKING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES FILED A. Glued laminated structural wood decking. FEB 2 1 2012 q. s9PNL 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS City Clerk q A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Iowa City, Iowa B. Section 06181 - Glue -Laminated Structure C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AITC 110 - Standard Appearance Grades for Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2001. B. AITC 111 - Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber During Transit, Storage and Erection; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2005. C. AITC 113 - Standard for Dimensions of Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2010. D. AITC Al 90.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2007, E. ASTM D2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions; 2010a. L04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and framed openings. C. Samples of Wood Deck Exposed To View: Submit two samples, 6 inch in length illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design decking under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Iowa. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience and certified by AITC. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glue laminated members in accordance with AITC 111 requirements for unwrapped material. 06150- 1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS FILED FEB 212012 City Ck Iowa A. Glued Laminated Decking: 7awa t I. Lock -Deck www.lockdeck.com 2. Filler King Company: www.fillerking.com. 3. Unit Structures: www.unitstructures.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Glued Laminated Decking: Douglas Fir/Larch fabricated to comply with AITC 190.1 and AITC 113, laminated with adhesive tested according to ASTM D2559 for wet service; Standard Vee, single tongue. 1. Appearance: Fabricate to AITC 110 Architectural grade.Sound knots and natural characteristics. Occasional pieces may contain chipped edge knots, short end splits or seasoning check, and some pin holes. 2. Nominal Size: 2x6 3. T&G with V -Edge 4. Texture: Smooth Surfaced 5. Random Length Continuous. 6. Moisture Content: 10% - 12% average, 15% max 7. Factory Finish: a. Acrylic semi -transparent stain, Lock -Deck #716 DFL Natural 8. Designed for the following minimum values: a. Bending (Fb): 2640 psi. b. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 165 psi. c. Modulus of elasticity (E): 1,800,000 psi. 9. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer. 10. Protection; bundle wrapped 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fastener Type and Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 INSTALLATION- BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Random Length Continuous installation 1. Deck shall be continuous over three or more spans, with each piece of deck over at least one support. 06150-2 2. Place decking to disperse end joints as randomly as possible. Distance between end joints in adj. rows of decking shall be 2' minimum. Distance between in joints separated by only one row shall be 1' minimum. 3. Provide cantilevered overhang free of end joints. 4. Decking shall be end -matched and toe -nailed within l' of all ends. C. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. D. Secure with fasteners in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Face nailing to supports: a. 16d for 2" nominal 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 r -:Sq PM Iowa City ion 06150-3 SECTION 06181 GLUED -LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Glue laminated wood beams and columns. B. Steel hardware and attachment brackets. FEB 21 2012 v s q P 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS City Cler Q IowaCity, la A. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field Finishing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AITC 117 - Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2004 (with errata 2005). B. AITC Al 90.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2007. C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008. D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009. E. ASTM Al53/AI53M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. F. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a. G. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009. H. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a. I. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007. J. W WPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011. 1.04 DESIGNREQUIREMENTS A. Design and laminate members in accordance with AITC 117 -DESIGN. B. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: 20 lbs/sq ft with deflection limited to 1/240 of span. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique and resultant performance information. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, framed openings, and 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE 06181-1 A. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units with three years of documented experience, and certified by AITC in accordance with AITC A190.1. B. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in erection of products of the type specified, with 5 years of experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, and other load criteria. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect members to AITC requirements for individually wrapped. B. Leave individual wrapping in place until finishing occurs. PART PRODUCTS 2.O1 MANUFACTURERS A. Glued -Laminated Structural Units: FILED 1. Timberweld Mfg. 2. Sentinel Structures, Inc: www.sentinelstructures.com. FEB 21 2012 3. Unit Structures: www.unitstructures.com. 't''" pK 4. Western Wood Structures, Inc: www.westernwoodstructures.com. City Clerk S. Lam -Wood Systems Inc Iowa city, Iowa 6. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 GLUED -LAMINATED UNITS A. Glued -Laminated Units: Fabricate in accordance with AITC 117 Architectural grade. 1. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. 2. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. 3. Fabricate member with camber built in. 4. Do not splice orjoin members in locations other than those indicated without permission. 5. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Douglas Fir lumber conforming to W WPA grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture content before fabrication. B. Appearance Grade: Provide grade timbers complying with AITC 110. 1. AITC Architectural; suitable for applications where appearance is a factor, knot holes and loose knotsover 3/4" diameter are not allowed. 2. Finish: Factory applied stain with penetrating sealer. Match Lam -Wood color #0728 light brown. C. Design for the following values: 1. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,800,000 psi. D. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36/A36M weldable quality, galvanize per ASTM A 123/A 123M. E. Hardware: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M) Type 1 high strength heavy hex bolts and ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) nuts, hot -dip galvanized to meet requirements of ASTM Al53/A153M, matching washers. 06181-2 F. Laminating Adhesive: Wet -use (waterproof) complying with AITC A190.1. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC Architectural grade. B. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. C. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. D. Fabricate member with camber built in. E. Do not splice or join members in locations other than those indicated without permission. F. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth. G. After end trimming, seal with penetrating sealer in accordance with AITC requirements. H. Factory finish with Additional Field Finishing of Members: Specified in Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION FILED A. Verify that supports are ready to receive units. 3.02 PREPARATION FEB 21 2012 v: st PA.t City Clerk A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. Iowa City, Iowa 3.03 ERECTION A. Lift members using protective straps to prevent visible damage. B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions or sloped where indicated. C. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured. D. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, splicing, or other unauthorized modification. E. Swab and seal the interior wood surfaces of field drilled holes in members with primer. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position. END OF SECTION 06181-3 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS FILED PART 1 GENERAL FEB 21 2012 Y'S4 e6r 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES Io City Clerk A. Custom fabricated cabinet units. B. Composite surface countertops and window sills. C. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.2 -American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use; 2009. B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)- Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009. C. AWUAWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. D. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A, Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. Indicate field verified dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed plastic laminate manufacturer and composite surface material. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 06410- 1 FILED 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING FEB 2 1 2ntZ y:64 P� A. Protect units from moisture damage. r city Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade. 2.02 WOOD -BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. No added urea-formaldyhyde resins 2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: MST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade II/Custom; average moisture content of 5-10 percent; species as follows: 1. Concealed Surfaces: Species #2 spf. 2. FSC -Certified Wood 3. No added urea-formaldyhyde resins 2.04 PANEL MATERIALS A. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as indicated. 1. Use as backing for plastic laminate unless otherwise indicated. 2. FSC -Certified Wood 3. No added urea-formaldyhyde resins 2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. 2. Panolam Industries International, IncWevamar: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart Intemational, Inc: www.wilsonart.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -product Requirements. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. C. Provide specific types as scheduled. 1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, matte finish. 2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness, colors as scheduled, matte finish. 3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, white color, matte finish. 4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. 2.06 COUNTERTOPS 06410-2 A. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous substrate. 1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. 2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness. a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20. c. Color/Pattern Family: Dupont Corian, Price Group A, B, or C, as selected by Architect. d. Manufacturers: FILED 1) Dupont Corian: www.corian.com. 2) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. FEB 2 3) Avonite Surfaces: www.avonitesurfaces.com. T012 4) Wilsonart International, 5) Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Prod ct Requirements. IowaiC�Y.Mw,, 3. Window Sills and Other Components Thickness: 1/2" inch, minimum. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: 1/2 inch thick; eased edge. 5. Back Splashes and end splashes: Same sheet material, cove base, eased edge top, 4 inches high. 6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings. B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS I Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines. C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined. D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, color as selected by Architect. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application, urea-formaldyhyde free, complying with South Coast Air Quality Management District VOC limits. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome -plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel, or chrome -plated finish in exposed locations. D. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to blend with adjacent surface. 2.08 HARDWARE A. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, aluminum with satin finish, 4 inch centers. 1. Product: 4484 series manufactured by Stanleyworks. B. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: 150 Ib. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type. 06410-3 FILED 6. Manufacturers: FEB 21 2012 a• Hafele y:5q eA b. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com. city-.0"k C. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com. lam LUY,Iowa d. Knape &Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. C. Hinges: 1. Hafele Aximat 2. 3-way adjustable clip-on hinge, with decorative exposed knuckle 3. ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 Standard 4. Polished steel finish D. Levelers 1. Adjustable levelors with nylon glide 2. Set to provide min 3/8" clearance between cabinet body and concrete floor slab E. Cabinet Adjustable Shelves and Standards 1. Knape & Vogt or equal 2. 255 Series Pilaster; clips adjustable to 1/2" increments, 5/8" wide x 3/16" deep, 23 ga. steel, ZC zinc finish, BHMA Grade 1, recessed installation. 3. 256 Series Pilaster Supports, ZC zinc finish F. Wall Mounted Adjustable Shelves and Standards 1. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt or equal 2. Wall Standard; #87, heavy duty standard, surface mounted, 2" adjustment slots, anochrome finish. 3. Brackets; #161 Heavy duty lock lever bracket, length as required for shelf depth indicated. a. #212 Front Rest, for anchoring shelf to bracket 4. Installation a. Provide standard and brackets at 36" oc max G. Closet Rod and Shelf: 1. Epco or equal 2. Center Supports: 863 -PC, polished chrome 3. Rod: 895 -PC, 1 5/16" aluminum tubing, polished chrome finish, 14 ga wall thickness 4. Rod end brackets: 861 -PC, polished chrome, closed flange with exposed fasteners 5. Fasteners: chrome tamper resistant screws. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay. B. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style. C. Drawer Construction: White cabinet line, Dovetail joints. Contractor's option utilize metal drawer body. D. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. E. Edging: provide laminate edge on door and drawer fronts F. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. G. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with 06410-4 manufactured sizes. Fit comers and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 3.03 ADJUSTING FILED A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. FEB 2 1 2012 sfPet 3.04 CLEANING City Clerk Iowa_Gty,lowa A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. 3.05 SCHEDULES A. Kitchen Base and Wall Cabinets 1. Base/Wall Cabinets; PL -1 color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard 2. Countertop; composite surface, color CS -1 B. Restroom: composite surface, color CS -2 C. Window sills: Composite surface, color CS -3 D. Prep Room 109: countertop, P.Lam PL.2 END OF SECTION ULZI[1151 SECTION 07210 FILED FEB 212012 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION vrs? aty pert PART 1 GENERAL �0"atom 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Nailable Base Roof Insulation B. Board insulation at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, and thermal break at slab/footing . C. Insulated Sheathing; exterior of stud walls D. Board insulation ceiling at exterior Lobby soffit. E. Batt insulation in wall and roof construction. F. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. G. Vapor Retarders 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry. C. Section 06100- Rough Carpentry: wall framing D. Section 07 5400 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Insulation specified as part of roofing system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2004a. B. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Constriction and Manufactured Housing; 2001. C. ASTM D 2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2001. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. E. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to 07210-1 FILED FEB 212012 successful installation. It: 51 Flit e C ty Cicrk PART 2 PRODUCTS Iowa C q. Iowa 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded Polystyrene board. B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Expanded polystyrene board vertical between slab and foundation. C. Insulation Inside Cavity Walls: Extruded polystyrene board. D. Thermal break between slab and top of foundation wall: extruded polystyrene board E. Insulation in Stud Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. F. Insulation Sheathing on exterior of Stud Framed Walls: polyisocanurate board insulation G. Insulation in Structural Steel Framed Roof Structure: Batt insulation and polyisocanurate board insulation with separate vapor retarder. 2.02 NAILABLE BASE INSULATION A. Comply with FM -I60 requirements B. ACFoam-II polyisocanurate board insulation and ACFoam Nail Base insulation as manufactured by Atlas Roofing or equal C. ACFoam-II board insulation 1. Closed cell HCFC free polyisocanurate foam core laminated to heavy non -asphaltic fiber -reinforced felt facers 2. Compressive strength: 20 psi 3. ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1 Grade 2 4. LTTR 12.1, 2" thickness D. ACFoam Nail Base Insulation 1. Closed cell HCFC free polyisocanurate insulation board bonded to 7/16" APA/TECO rated OSB on top side and a fiber -reinforced felt facer facer on the bottom. 2. Compressive strength: 20 psi 3. LTTR 12.7, nominal thickness 2.5", 4'x 8' panel 4. ASTM C 1289, Type V E. Fasteners 1. Manufacturer's fasteners, carbon steel with epoxy coating, .245" nominal diameter, flat head with square recess, 5/8" nominal 2. Length as required for insulation/board thickness 3. Fastener spacing; comply with manufacturer's requirements to meet FM -I60, 15 fasteners min, 1" penetration into 2x6 T&G decking 2.03 BOARD INSULATIONMATERIALS A. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Expanded polystyrene board, ASTM C 578; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 4. Board Thickness: as indicated on drawings 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Water Absorption: 4 percent by volume, maximum, when tested In accordance with ASTM D 2842. 7. Board Density: 0.7 Ib/cu ft. 8. Compressive Resistance: 5 psi. 9. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.28. 10. Manufacturers: a. AFM Corp: www.r-control.com. b. Diversifoam Products: www.diversifoam.com. c. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com. d. As approved by the Architect. 11. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV; Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 4. Board Thickness: as indicated on drawings 5. Board Edges: Shiplap. FILED 6. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F:.20. 7. Compressive Resistance: 40 psi under slab, 25 psi wall/cavity application FEB 21 2012 8. Board Density: 1.3 Ib/cu ft. y,sp ft 9. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume. ccStX clerk Iowa Lq. Iowa 10. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscoming.com. c. As approved by the Architect. 11. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. C. Insulated Sheathing; Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Glass -fiber -reinforced enhanced polyisocyanurate foam core sheathing faced with nominal 4 mil embossed white or blue acrylic -coated aluminum on one side and 1.25 mil embossed aluminum on the other side, complying with ASTM C1289 and meeting the following physical properties: I. ASTM C 1289, Type 1, Class 2 2. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 4. Compressive Strength: 25 psi 5. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 6. Aged Thermal Resistance: ASTM C518, measured at Mean Temp of 75F, R -value of 6.5 per V thickness. 7. Flexural Strength, ASTM C203:Min 40 psi 8. Water Absorbtion, ASTM C209: Max. 1.0% by volume 9. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E96: <0.3 perms 10. Board Edges: Shiplap on long edges. 11. Accessories: a. Fasteners: Provide insulated sheathing manufacturer's recommended polymer or other corrosion -protective coated steel screw fasteners for anchoring sheathing to metal wall framing. Fastener length and size based on wall sheathing thickness 1) Wind -lock Corporation "ci-Lock Steel Series Selection" with 1-3/4 inch diameter high-grade plastic washers or equal. b. Insulation Flashing Tape: Provide insulation manufacturer's recommended board joint 07210-3 A. BattInsulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; kraft faced, conforming to the following: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 3. Provide insulation made without formaldehyde. 4. Thermal Resistance: a. 31/2": R-13 b. 6": R-19 c. 8": R-25 5. Thickness: as indicated on drawings. 6. Facing: Asphalt treated Kraft paper, one side. 7. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www jm.com. c. Owens Coming Corp: www.owenscoming.com. d. As approved by the Architect. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 6 mil thick. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. C. Adhesive: Gun grade, mastic type, compatible with insulation and substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 NAILABLE BASE INSULATION 07210-4 tape for sealing joints, seams and veneer tie penetrations through the insulation layer. FILED 1) Acceptable Products: The Dow Chemical Company "WEATHERMATETM Straight Flashing with butyl rubber adhesive. 4" width at joints and 6" or 9" at FEB 21 2012 opening flashing. ,%I eM c. Penetration Filler: Provide insulated sheathing manufacturer's recommended City Gert im Curi IMA polyurethane foam for sealing penetrations of insulated sheathing. 1) Acceptable Products: The Dow Chemical Company "Great Stuf rm Pro Gaps & Cracks" single -component polyurethane insulating foam sealant. 2) Acceptable Products: The Dow Chemical Company "Great Stuffrm Pro Window & Door" single -component polyurethane low-pressure foam sealant 12. Manufacturers: "THERMAX ci Exterior Insulation, Dow Chemical Co. or equal a. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com. b. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. 13. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.04 BATT INSULATIONMATERIALS A. BattInsulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; kraft faced, conforming to the following: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 3. Provide insulation made without formaldehyde. 4. Thermal Resistance: a. 31/2": R-13 b. 6": R-19 c. 8": R-25 5. Thickness: as indicated on drawings. 6. Facing: Asphalt treated Kraft paper, one side. 7. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www jm.com. c. Owens Coming Corp: www.owenscoming.com. d. As approved by the Architect. 8. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 6 mil thick. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. C. Adhesive: Gun grade, mastic type, compatible with insulation and substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 NAILABLE BASE INSULATION 07210-4 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install vapor retarder over roof sheathing on 2x6 wood decking. C. Install base layer of foam insulation. Mechanically attach. D. Install nailable base insulation. Stagger joints with base layer. Mechanically attach with fasteners as required by manufacturer for specified rating. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATIONATFOUNDATIONPERIMETER FILED A. Apply adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. FEB 21 2012 vt B. Install boards vertical) on foundation perimeter. v 59 Cl 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. low Clerk maximize,.lmv_a 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. C. Extend boards overexpansion joints, unbonded to foundation on one side ofjoint. D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.04 INSULATED SHEATHING BOARD INSTALLATIONAT EXTERIOR WALLS A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set over exterior sheathing and under air/weather barrier. Fasten to exterior face of exterior wood stud wall framing using sheathing manufacturer's recommended type and length screw fasteners with washers. Abut panels tightly together and around openings and penetrations. I. Install sheathing panels horizontally with blue aluminum facing to exterior. Use maximum lengths to minimize number ofjoints. Locate edge joints parallel to and on framing. Center end joints over supports and stagger in each course. Provide additional framing wherever panel joints do not bear against framing, plates or sill members. 2. Fasten panels to each support with fasteners spaced 12 inches on center at perimeter and 16 inches on center in panel field. Set back perimeter fasteners 3/8" from edges and ends of panel units. Drive fasteners to bear tight and flush with surface of insulation. Do not countersink. Perimeter fasteners can be detailed to bridge the gap of abutting board joints due to the 1.75' diameter of the washer used to fasten the board to the studs. Maximum of two board joints may be bridged per fastener. 3. Do not tape/seat joints between panels 3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Verify air barrier has been applied to CMU material. B. Apply boards in min two layers. Stagger joints between layers C. Apply adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. D. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. E. Install boards horizontally on walls. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. F. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. Foam insulation fill any voids around penetrations. 07210-5 G. Tape joints in insulation boards 3.06 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on vapor barrier after granular base for slab has been compacted. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and concrete slab. 3.07 BATT and VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in stud walls and ceiling cavity spaces indicated for batt insulation. C. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. D. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. E. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. F. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center. G. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. H. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. 1. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. J. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. K. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 07260. 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. FILED FEB 21 2012 ,rrA Cox CACterk END OF SECTION 07210-6 SECTION 07260 FILED FEB 21 2012 V: %9 Pnt WEATHER BARRIERS�"'' .% � �rcows PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Air Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing or other substrate; not airtight or vapor retardant from interior. B. Air Barriers: at exterior side of CMU exterior cavity walls; not airtight or vapor retarder from interior. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies: Air barrier at exterior CMU walls B. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt insulation and Nailable Base Roof Insulation. C. Section 07410 - Metal Wall Panels; Ventilation/Drainage Mat installed over air barrier. D. Section 07460 - Wood Siding; Ventilation/Drainage Mat installed at base of cavity. E. Section 07540 - PVC Membrane Roofing: Vapor retarder installed as part of roofing system. F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques. L03 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water -resistive barriers, air barriers, or vapor retarders. B. Air Barrier: Airtight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. Note: For the purposes of this specification, vapor impermeable air barriers are classified as vapor retarders. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2008. B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers --Tension; 2006a. C. ASTM D1970 -Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2009. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010b. E. ASTM E96/E96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010. F. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2003. G. ICC -ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water -Resistive Coatings Used as Water -Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2009. 1.05 SUBMITTALS 07260- 1 A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Install air barrier materials in mock-up specified in Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after installation. PART2 PRODUCTS Z 01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A. Air Barrier: 1. On outside surface of inside wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls use air barrier coating. 2. On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air barrier sheet, mechanically fastened type. B. Interior Vapor Retarder: Refer to Section 07210 -Board and Batt Insulation. 2.02 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER -RESISTIVE) A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened: 1. Air Permeance: 0.001 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance FILED with ASTM E2178. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 20 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM FEB 21 2012 E96/E96M Procedure A (desiccant method). y;51 Prn 3. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, for City Clerk minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127. Iowa City, Iowa 4. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 4 months weather exposure. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 6. Self cinching at penetrations. 7. Provide manufacturer's butyl tape to seal penetrations 8. Products: a. DuPont Company; Tyvek CommercialWrap: www.dupont.com. b. Pactiv Corporation; GreenGuard C2000 Building Wrap: greenguard.pactiv.com. c. VaproShield, LLC; "WallShield": www.vaproshield.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Air Barrier Coating: Cold -fluid -applied, vapor permeable, elastomeric waterproofing membrane. I. Material: Water-based acrylic or polymer -modified bitumen, with VOC content of zero. 2. Acceptable Substrates: Stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation on visibly damp surfaces and concrete that has hardened but is not fully cured ("green" concrete) without requiring a primer. 3. Dry Film Thickness: 7 mils (0.007 inch), minimum. 4. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance 07260-2 with ASTM E2178. 5. Water Vapor Permeance: 12 peens, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. 6. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 6 months weather exposure. 7. Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 9. Code Acceptance: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC -ES Acceptance Criteria AC 212. 10. Products: a. BASF Corporation; ENERSHIELD-HP: www.enershield.basf.com. b. Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; Barritech-VP: www.carlisle-ccw.com. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Air -Shield LMP: www.wrmeadows.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive sheet flashing complying with ASTM D1970 1. Air Barrier manufacturer's standard flexible flashing tape FILED B. Fasteners: FEB 1. Manufacturer's screw fastener with 13/4" plastic washer. 21 2012 PART 3 EXECUTION 10chy Iia 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. C. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior: 1. Install sheets shingle -fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. Attach to framed construction with fasteners extending through sheathing into framing. Space fasteners at 12 to 18 inches on center along each framing member supporting sheathing. 5. Seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-adhesive tape; use only large -headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Apply butyl tape under attachments through air barrier, including: a. Continuous horizontal butyl tape at metal panel attachments b. Under wall tie brackets for anchoring masonry stone veneer. 7. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings. 07260-3 8. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 9. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at head, seal sheet over flange and flashing. D. Coatings: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by coating manufacturer; treat joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where exterior masonry veneer is to be installed, install masonry anchors before instdlling FILED weather barrier over masonry; seal around anchors air tight. 3. Use flashing to seal to adjacent construction and to bridge joints. FEB 2 1 2012E. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers: H'. � f ityecic 1. Install flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches mv' wa Iowa onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges. 2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange. 3. At openings to be filled with non -flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing. 4. At head of openings, install flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing. 5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod. 6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed. B. Take digital photographs of each portion of the installation prior to covering up. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 07260-4 FILED SECTION 07261 FEB 212012 tt UNDER -SLAB VAPOR BARRIER 4y a itr,% PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Vapor Barrier, seam tape, mastic, pipe boots, detail strip for installation under concrete slabs. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. C. Section 07210 -Board and Batt Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 882-02 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. B. ASTM E 1745-97 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. C. ASTM E 154-88 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, D. ASTM E 96-95 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. E. ASTM E 1643-98 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. 1 EV1 rim JITI)711iy K" 2.01 MATERIALS A. Vapor Barrier: ASTM E 1745, Class A with the following characteristics: 1. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg)] per ASTM F 1249 or ASTM E 96 2. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(M *hr * in.Hg)] after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E 154 Sections 8,11,12, and 13. 3. ASTM E 1745 Class A 4. Puncture Resistance: minimum 2200 grams, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1709. 5. Tensile Strength: minimum 50.0 Ibf/si, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 882. 6. Thickness: 15 mil minimum 7. Manufacturer: a. Stego Industries LLC; Product Stego Wrap 15 -mil Class A: 07261 - 1 FILED www.stegoindustries.com. FEB 21 2012b..F_ SR PM b. Reflex Super; Monarflex cuy cterlc c. Vaporguard; Reef Industries Iowa 04,low, d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00 - Product Requirements. 2.01 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: 1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: maximum 0.3 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 2. Width: 4 inches minimum. 3. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as vapor barrier. B. Vapor Proofing Mastic: 1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: maximum 0.3 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96. 2. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as vapor barrier. C. Pipe Boots: 1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or mastic per manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that the work of Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation is complete. B. Ensure that subsoil is approved by Architect or geotechnical firm 1. Level and tamp or roll aggregate. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E 1643. B. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. C. Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. D. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. E. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions. F. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. G. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. END OF SECTION 01if10w. SECTION 07311 SHINGLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass shingle roofing. FILED FEB 2 12012 Cita' Clerk Iowa city, Iowa B. Synthetic Shingle (Add alternate #1 at Shelter(s) and lodge) C. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and around penetrations. D. Associated metal flashings and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06150 - Wood Decking: Roof decking. B. Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts. C. Section 07210 -Board and Batt Insulation 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D1970 -Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2009. B. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 2010a. C. ASTM D4586 -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007. D. NRCA MS104 -The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; 2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish texturelpattern; for color selection. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures. F. Manufacturer's Warranty. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface temperatures are below 40 degrees F. B. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces. 07311 - 1 FILED 1.07 WARRANTY FEB 2 P 7n12 A. Provide manufacturer's 50 year warranty PW City CleFkf PART2 PRODUCTS Iowa C4, Iowa 2.01 ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Specifications are based upon the products of CertainTeed Corporation to define quality and requirements. Products of the following manufacturers, complying with drawings and specifications will also be acceptable: 2. Certainteed Corporation 3. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. 4. Owens Corning Corp: www.owensroming.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt -coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D3462; Class A fire resistance. 1. Weight: 300 lb/100 sq ft. 2. 3 -tab, Self-sealing type, english size. 3. Basis of Design: CertainTeed "Landmark Premium". 4. Color: as selected by architect from manufcturer's standard. 5. Manufacturer's 50 year warranty 2.02 SYNTHETIC SHINGLES (ALTERNATE #1 Lodge and Shelter(s), Refer to Civil Drawings for Shelter locations) A. Manufacturers 1. Specifications are based on the products of EcoStar, products of the following manufacturers complying with requirements of drawings and specifications will be acceptable a. As approved by the Architect B. Majestic Slate Traditional as manufactured by EcoStar Carlisle, www.ecostar.carlisle.com 1. Composed of Starloy, an 80% recycled rubber and plastic compound with appropriate colorants and UV stabilizers, at 10" widths by 18" long, and with a tapered nominal thickness of 1/4". 2. Weight: 290-300 lbs/sq at 6" exposure (verify required exposure for roof slope) 3. Color: EchoStar Slate, Driftwood #602897 4. Class 4 Impact Resistance, UL 2218 5. Nail pull through ASTM D3136 6. Prolonged UV exposure ASTM G26-95 7. 50 yr warranty 8. 110 MPH wind warranty C. Fasteners: EcoStar ring shank roofing nail with a 3/8" diameter head and a minimum of 1-1/2" long shank made from stainless steel. Nails can be supplied either as a hand -drive style or in coils for use in pneumatic tools. The EcoStar ring shank roofing nail is required for fastening of all EcoStar roof tiles. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Ice -Water Protection Membrane: Self -adhering polymer -modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D 1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. 07311 -2 FILED Manufacturers: FEB 21 2012-V. 57, PAt a. CertainTeed; Product WinterGuard. Ciry Clerk b. GAF; Product StormGuard.c+4',Iowa c. OwensComing; Product WeatherLock. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Flexible Flashing: Self -adhering polymer -modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface. 1. Manufacturers: a. GAF; Product StormFlash. b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot -dipped zinc coated steel, 12 gage, 0.105 inch shank diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch into roof sheathing or decking. B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asphalt roof cement. C. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of underlayment, free of toxic solvents. D. Misc. preformed neoprene boot and sleeve assemblies for penetrations through roof. 2.05 METAL FLASHINGS A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge, gable edge, step flashing at chimney enclosure, and other flashing indicated and/or required to maintain weather -tight assembly. 1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water. 2. Style D and Perry Starter flashings shall have hemmed edge. 3. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 4. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside. B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 24 ga thick; primed and finished one side with Kynar 500 fluoropolymer coating 1.0 mil total dry film thickness and washcoat of .3-.4 mil dry film thickness on reverse side,dark bronze color PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners. C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface. Verify that flashingings/flanges are of type acceptable for shingle roof. D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids. 3.02 PREPARATION A. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and surface cracks with latex filler. 07311 -3 FILED FEB 2 1 2012B. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or cave protection. N: city ceck �� Iowa C. Install cave edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches on center. 3.03 INSTALLATION- ICE -WATER PROTECTIONMEMBRANE A. Install ice -water protection membrane at the following locations: 1. Over entire roof surface to be shingled 2. Install protection membrane where roof deck abuts vertical walls. B. Install cave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Eave: 1. Adhere protection membrane starter strip to metal edge flashing. Set protection membrane edge flush with face of metal flashings. Secure in place. 2. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. 3. Weather lap plies minimum of 2 inches. D. Rake: 1. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. 2. Weather lap plies minimum of 2 inches. 3. Install metal rake flashing over protection membrane. 3.04 INSTALLATION- METAL FLASHING AND ACCESSORIES A. Install flashings in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements. B. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches and seal weather tight with plastic cement. C. Secure in place with nails at 8 inches on center. Conceal fastenings. D. Return perry starter around cave and under rake flashing to maintain seal, closed corners, flashed to drain. E. Items Projecting Through or Mounted on Roofing: 1. Provide base flashing to run under adjacent shingles 2. Flash and seal weather tight with plastic cement. 3. Base flashing to divert water back out onto top of shingles. 3.05 INSTALLATION- SHINGLES A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is greater. 2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater. B. Place shingles in Six -course, Six -Inch, Stepped -Off Diagonal coursing pattern with 5 inch weather exposure to produce double thickness over full roof area. Verify with manufacturer's recommendation for single style. C. At eaves, apply starter strip of shingles with tabs cutt off. Project first course of shingles 1/4 inch beyond cave. D. Extend shingles 1/4 inch beyond face of rake. E. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with weather tight placement of counterflashings. F. Complete installation to provide weather tight service. 07311-4 T=ILED FEB 21 2012 .Y:sFF 3.06 INSTALLATION- SYNTHETIC SHINGLESCity Cher Iowa City, Iowa A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation requirements. B. After installing underlayment and before installing the Majestic Slate tiles, clean the surface of debris and dirt. C. Care must be taken to place tiles so color variations are evenly distributed over the entire roof area. Shade variation will occur differently from pallet to pallet and within individual pallets. Tiles between bundles and pallets MUST be blended to insure even distribution of color variations. Color "mapping" or "blotching" in appearance is not acceptable and the EcoStar authorized Gold Star applicator will be required to correct. It is recommended that work not begin until all EcoStar materials have been delivered to the job site so that all the material may be blended together. Periodic ground inspections should be conducted to ensure a random color pattern to the installation. Please contact EcoStaes technical department for correct blending procedures. D. Minimum Fastening - No less than 2 EcoStar ring shank fasteners per tile shall be used with a minimum length of 1-1/2". Fasteners should be installed at the designated "nail here" marks on the tile. Failure to fasten the tile at these locations may result in a "lifted" tile. CAUTION: When using a pneumatic nailer care should be taken to insure that nails are not over driven causing the tiles to curl upward. If tiles have been installed with over driven nails causing the ends of the tile to curve upward, tiles will never lay flat. Overdriven tiles must be removed and re -nailed properly. Never hold tiles from behind while nailing, as this will cause an upward curl of the tile. E. Do not install tiles against each other. A minimum gap of 3/8" must be maintained between installed tiles. A minimum 3/8" gap must be maintained between installed tiles and any sidewalls or roof projection. Beginning at the eave, install a starter row of Majestic Slate tiles gapped a minimum of 3/8" between tiles and any projections while achieving a 3/4" overhang with two EcoStar ring shank fasteners per tile (in location shown on tiles). This layer of tiles will become the starter row. The final tile at roof edges must be a minimum of 3" wide. This may involve cutting the EcoStar tile to fit. To cut the EcoStar tile to correct width simply score the back of the tile with a straightedge and utility knife and snap tile at that score. Install first course of tiles in the same manner as the starter row with the exception of the second layer having a 1/2 tile offset to the starter row. The first course of tiles should be installed flush with the starter row with no exposure. G. After the initial starter and first row of tiles has been installed, it is recommended that a chalk line be placed parallel to the roof edge running perpendicular to the first row of tiles. This chalk line will insure that the tiles stay true and plumb to the roof edge throughout installation. Never use red chalk, as this will permanently stain the EcoStar roof tiles. H. Continue installing tile courses up the roof slope now achieving the correct chosen exposure. It is recommended that chalk lines be placed horizontally up the roof slope for every tile course. This will ensure that each course is installed straight across the roof surface. 1. It is the responsibility of the Gold Star Authorized Applicator to ensure that each Majestic tile has been flexed to provide a downward curve prior to tile fastening. Do not install tiles with an upward curve. J. Majestic Slate tiles may not be installed if the tiles have been stored in temperatures lower than 45°F. If tiles have been stored in temperatures below 45°F, tiles must be brought back to a 07311 -5 minimum material temperature of 45°F. As the temperature rises Majestic Slate will expand beyond the designed installation pattern if the product is installed while cold or frozen. K. Install Majestic Slate - Universal Hip & Ridge tiles at all hip locations. EcoStar recommends a chalk line be snapped up the hip line to ensure a straight application up the roof surface. Universal Hip & Ridge tiles are always installed at a 6" exposure. L. Care must be taken to minimize foot traffic over completed areas of the roof. Majestic Slate tiles will show mud and dirt causing appearance problems. The removal of dirt and debris is the responsibility of the applicator. Never use chemical cleaning agents not approved by EcoStar to wash an EcoStar Majestic Slate roof assembly. M. Majestic Slate tiles can be slippery when wet; caution should be exhibited with early morning dew and after rain. EcoStar recommends the use of toe boards and OSHA approved harnesses and safety equipment at all times. N. Upon completion of the roof system installation, inspect and remove all debris from roof. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface. FILED FEB 21 2012 y:5� 7M END OF SECTION 11UNW1 FILED SECTION 07410 FEB 2112 97 PNtCitY METAL WALL PANELS 10wa CitClerk r, lava PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for walls, with related flashings, and accessory components. B. DrainageNentilation Mat material C. Coping at top of metal clad walls 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 05400 - Cold -Formed Metal Framing: C. Section 07260 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier under wall panels. D. Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Components: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with 2009 ICC code. Refer to structural drawings for design loads B. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span. C. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. D. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. E. Provide continuity of air barrier and vapor retarder seal at building enclosure elements in conjunction with materials specified in Section 07260. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. C. Samples: Submit one samples of wall panel, 8 inch by 8 inch in size illustrating each finish color, sheen, and texture. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 07410- 1 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with FILED minimum three years of experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING FEB 21 2012 A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. 4:5'1 PM cry ctc`k B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, Iowa City,towa or abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work for installation of vapor retarder and air barrier seals. B. Coordinate the Work with installation of window and louver components or materials. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion, including defects in water tightness and integrity of seals. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS A. Exterior Panel : Standing seam, copper panel, horizontal 1. 10" nominal width. 2. Max length 3. 16 oz / sf copper 4. 1" , single lock standing seam. 5. Exterior Finish: unfinished, copper to be allowed to patina 6. Anchors: concealed copper cleats with manufacturer's recommended fastener. Space as required by manufacturer. a. Fabricate cleats to allow thermal movement of copper wall cladding panels while preventing copper distortion due to negative wind pressure 7. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA standards and Copper in Architecture handbook published by Copper Development Association, Inc. B. Subgirts: 1. Hat channels, 20 ga., 1/2" depth, galvanized 2. Space to match wood stud C. Coping; Same material and finish as exterior sheets. Brake formed to indicated profiles. D. Internal and External Comers and End Caps: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; brake formed to indicated profiles. E. Misc. Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Copper sheet, ASTM B370, 99.9% copper, cold rolled 1/8 hard temper, H00. Uncoated to allow natural weathering. 07410-2 Z03 DRAINAGE and VENTILATIONMAT A. Driwall Rainscreen 10 mm drainage and ventilation mat as manufactured by Keene Building Envelope Products, wwwkeenebuilding.com, or approved equal. 1. Nominal 0.40", randomly oriented, geometric patterned mat 2. Extruded polymer core matrix of tangled monofiliments. Heat laminated to non -woven lightweight, breathable fabric 3. Flame spread; ASTM E 84, Class A FILED B. Driwall Weep Screed, ventilated, drainable, base flashing 1. 3 1/2" nailing and flashing flange FEB 21 2012 2. 3/4" "V'shaped drip edge S QPM 3. 5' length 4. PVC material meeting ASTM 131784, C1063 and D4216 aZ clerk Iowa 11Y, Iowa 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sealants: Specified in Section 07900. Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with installation of system; non -staining; color as selected. B. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; brake formed to indicated profiles. C. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; 24 gage; manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. D. Misc. Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. E. Sealant Tape: Pressure sensitive, 100% solids, gray, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide permenantly elastic, non -sag, non -staining tape not less than 1/2" wide and 1/8" thick. F. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard butyl sealant. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in single lengths. C. Form panels for standing seams. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Place butyl tap flashing vertically at line of sub-girts. Install subgirts perpendicular to panel length, securely fastened to substrates and shimmed and leveled to uniform plane. Space at intervals indicated. B. Install drainage mat material between subgirts. C. Install weep flashing at bottom of wall. Lap air barrier over flashing 07410-3 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. C. Locate anchor clips over subgirts D. Provide sealant tape at all panel joints. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. FILED FEB 21,A7M? 5C cyC jerk lows Gey, low END OF SECTION 07410-4 SECTION 07461 WOOD SIDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Board siding for Walls. B. Plywood panel siding for exterior walls C. Cement Board at exterior soffits D. Trim, flashings, accessories, and fastenings. E. Sun Shades at Trellis 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. B. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Water -resistive barrier under siding. C. Section 07260 -Weather Barriers: Weather barrier under siding. FILED FEB 21 2012 W_Tf P'j '. Clerk 4 ty'j"A D. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Product requirements for metal flashings and trim associated with wood siding for placement by this section. E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant at perimeter. F. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Stain finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. APA B840 - 303 Siding Manufacturing Specifications; APA - The Engineered Wood Association; 1997, revised 1999. B. APA PRP -108 - Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural -Use Panels (Form E445);2001. C. WCLIB (GR) -Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; 2004, and supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating materials. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Grade lumber in accordance with the following: 1. Western Red Cedar: WCLIB (GR). B. Plywood Specified by APA Grade or Type: Labeled by APA certified grading agency. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in ventilated areas with constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. 07461 -1 FILED FEB 21 niz ,,:I" em PART 2 PRODUCTS k City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 2.01 SIDING AND TRIM BOARDS A. Tounge & Groove Siding: 1. V -grooved on two sides (EV2S) WRCLA2. 2. Nominal 1x8, 11/16" x 7 1/8" finished dry size, 6 3/4" exposed face width. 3. Western Red Cedar, B Clear grade 4. Texture: smooth faced 5. Kiln-dryed, max moisture content 10% B. Type A - Plywood Panel Siding: APA Rated Siding, Exterior exposure class, panel style. 1. Western red cedar face 2. Grade; 303R, up to six small solid knots and knot holes filled with cedartone paintable exterior epoxy wood putty 3. Panel Size: 48"x96" inch size sheet, 15/32 inch thick. 4. Flat profile w/ square edge 5. Span Rating: 24 inches o.c. 6. Texture/Pattern: Brushed. 7. Provide 1 x western red cedar batten at plywood vertical buttjoints. Refer to drawings for profile. C. Soffit Panels 1. Non -vented, smooth cement board soffit panel, factory primed. 2. 1/4" thickness, 4'x 8' 3. HardiePanel as manuf. by James Hardie Building Products or equal. 4. Fasteners: ss finish screws. 5. Provide extruded aluminum trim shapes as indicated on draWINGS a. 1/2 X 1/2 X 1/16 angle b. 1 x .438 x 1/16 Tee D. Trim Boards 1. Western Red Cedar, A Clear Grade in accordance with WCLIB 102-c, S4S 2. Texture: Smooth faced 3. Kiln -dried, max. 10% moisture content 4. Ix and 5/4x sizes as indicated on drawings. E. Trellis Sunshades 1. Shade Lumber: a. Composite decking, solid core, wood plastic, square edge, 2x6 b. Decay, splinter and termite resistant c. Color as selected by Architect, similar to Certainteed Evemew PT Deck, Ipe Tropics d. 25 year warranty e. Manufacturers: 1) CertainTeed Evernew PT decking 2) Trex 3) As approved by Architect 2. Hangers; Simpson Strong -Tie or equal, FB26 fence bracket, 2x6, galvanized finish 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Hot dipped galvanized, ASTM -A153 type; non -staining, of size and strength to securely and rigidly retain the work. Splitless ring shank siding nails, textured head. 1. Length as required to penetrate solid wood blocking or stud a minimum of 1 1/4" 07461-2 FILED B. Flashing: Aluminum as specified in Section 07620. FEB 2 j 2012 PART 3 EXECUTION ti: ss PM City Clerk 3.01 EXAMINATION IDSA city' Iowa A. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work. B. Verify that weather barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. B. Primelfinish back and edges of solid wood siding and trim prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install siding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, local and national building codes, and Western Red Cedar Lumber Association installation instructions. B. T&G Siding 1. Fasten siding in place, level and plumb. 2, Arrange for orderly nailing pattern. Blind nail except on over trim. 6d 3. Install siding with tongue up. 4. Position cut ends over bearing surfaces. Sand cut edges smooth and clean. 5. Minimize buttjoints. Where required provide 45 degree kerf cut C. Siding panels I. Install panel siding sheets vertically with edges and ends over firm bearing. 2. Install cedar batten over vertical butt joints. 3. Provide flashing and caulk at horizontal buttjoints. 4. Nail at 12 inches on center. D. Board trim 1. But joints; 45 degree mitre cut, drain to exterior 2. Kerf joints at comers E. Install metal flashings at sills, heads of wall openings, and as indicated on drawings. F. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. G. Cement Board Soffit Panels 1. Recess finish screws and fill and finish 2. Joints: layout soffit with joints as indicated on drawings. Provide solid blocking at joints. Maintain 1/8" gap at butt joints, set panels in sealant. H. Prepare for site finishing specified in Section 09900. Trellis Sunshades 1. Install in accordance with manuf. written directions 2. Galv. nails 3.04 TOLERANCES 07461 -3 A. Maximum Variation From Plumb and Level: 1/4 inch per 10 feet. B. Maximum Offset From Joint Alignment: 1/16 inch. FILED FEB 21 2012 y,5q PM Cleck II1Wa C. I1"a END OF SECTION 07461 -4 SECTION 07540 PVC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Adhered system with PVC roofing membrane. B. Insulation, flat and tapered. C. Vapor retarder. D. Sheathing; horizontal and vertical (protection on board and roof board) E. Flashings. F. Roofing cant strips and stack boots. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood milers. C. Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings, reglets,. D. Section 15146 -Plumbing Specialties: Roof drains. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS FILED FEB 21 2012 }` 54 P City Clerk Iowa C4, Iowa A. ASTM C1289 -Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2010. B. ASTM D4434 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Sheet Roofing; 2009. C. ASTM E1980 -Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low -Sloped Opaque Surfaces; 2011. D. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007. E. NRCA ML104 -The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. F. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. 07540-1 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials, and paver layout. FILED D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and FEB $ �2012 perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 5°I � E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. ibwaQ¢Y,lbwa F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Products used in the work included in this section shall be produced by the manufacturer and must have a history of successful production acceptable to the Owner. Private labeled products are not eligible for approval. 2. The roofing membrane reinforcement, formulation, and sheet configuration shall not have been altered by the manufacturer over the past time period equal in duration to the warranty term specified for this project. Upon request, Manufacturer shall provide a documentation supporting such claims. 3. Manufacturers/distributors submitting products for "approved equal" status will be required to complete a "Substitution Request Form" prior to being considered for approval. Completion of the form does not imply or guarantee approval. 4. Manufacturer must have existing installations similar to the specified system, being at least as old as the length of the warranty specified for this project and installed in a climate similar to that of the proposed installation. Upon request, Manufacturer shall provide documentation supporting such claims. C. Contractor Qualifications: 1. All contractors must be certified by the membrane manufacturer as an approved applicator of the products specified within these contract documents. 2. All contractors shall have had said approval for a minimum of five years prior to the date set for opening of bids. Contractors not meeting the minimum experience requirements must be able to provide supporting documentation of experience with like and/or similar systems that is acceptable to the owner. 3. The contractor will demonstrate 10 years of experience as the "bidding entity." A bidder is defined as the "bidding entity," i.e., the corporation, partnership or other entity in whose name a bid is submitted. Experience and qualifications required of "the bidder" will refer, first, to the bidding entity rather than the experience, either individual or aggregate, of the individuals who make up the company. The experience of key personnel will also be considered in the process of evaluating the bidding entity. 4. If requested, the bidding entity shall submit a minimum of five reference letters. References shall be from clients with projects of comparable size and complexity, utilizing like / similar roof systems. 5. The bidding entity will have never defaulted on, failed to complete, or requested to be relieved of the responsibilities of a contract with a public entity. 07540-2 D. Roof system shall be in accordance with The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Fifth Edition. E. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) - Norwood, MA FILED 1. Class 1-60 (For adhered system) FEB 2 1 2012 F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. - Northbrook, IL, UL 790: 4: M fm City Clerk 1. Class B assembly Iowa City, Iowa G. Refer to Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing, and Technology drawings for additional roof equipment and penetrations. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATIONMEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. B. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. WarrantyTerm: 15 years No -Dollar -Limit Manufacturer's warranty. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty. 3. Exceptions NOT Permitted: a. Damage due to wind of speed greater than 56 mph but less than 90 mph. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. PVC Membrane Materials, approved Manufacturers & Products: 1. Sarnafil Roofing System by Samafil, Inc.: a. Fully Adhered: G410 1) Minimum Thickness: 60 mils +/-3 mil. 2) Maximum Roll Width for fully adhered: Standard size recommended by the manufacturer 2. Fibertite Roofing System by Seaman Corporation: a. Fully Adhered: FiberTite SM (with Elvaloy Kee polymer) 1) Minimum Thickness: 45 mils +/-3 mil. 2) Maximum Roll Width for fully adhered: Standard size recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Substitutions: (subject to compliance with specifications) Submit Document 00 4325 Supplement F - Proposed Substitution Form (bidding phase) 4. Membrane to be white color, reinforced, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sheet membrane. Membrane manufacturing process shall produce a monolithic (non -laminated) sheet. 07540-3 FILED Minimum thickness: as indicated. B. Insulation: FEB 21 2012 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atiasroofiing.com. t City Clerk 2. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. loryiiVy, Iowa 3. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM A. PVC Membrane Roofing: Single ply membrane, mechanically fastened, over Dens Deck, over insulation, over vapor retarder, on metal deck. B. Roofing Assembly Requirements: 1. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): 78, minimum, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980. a. Field applied coating may not be used to achieve specified SRI. 2. Roof Covering External Fire -Resistance Classification: UL Class B. 3. Factory Mutual Classification: Class I and windstorm resistance of I-60, in accordance with FM DS 1-28. 4. Insulation Thermal Value (R), minimum: LTTR R-26; provide insulation of thickness required, min 4". C. Acceptable Insulation Types - Constant Thickness Application: Any of the types specified. 1. Minimum 2 layers of polyisocyanurate board. 2. Bottom layer of polyisocyanurate board covered with single layer of polyisocyanurate board, with all joints staggered. D. Acceptable Insulation Types - Tapered Application: Any of the types specified. 1. Tapered polyisocyanurate board over minumum of one layer constanty thickness. 2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane to be white color, reinforced, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) sheet membrane. Membrane manufacturing process shall produce a monolithic, (non -laminated) sheet. Minimum thickness 60 mils. B. Membrane 1. Material: Polyvinyl chloride acrylonitrile butadiene polymer or with fiberglass reinforcement complying with ASTM 4434 Type II, Grade I. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric, Fiberglass. 3. Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum. 4. Tensile Strength: 1600 psi (D638) 5. Linear Dimensional Change: 0.02% (DI204) 6. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets available, 120". 7. Color: EnergySmart (white), initial reflectivity of 0.83, initial emissivity 0.90, solar reflective index (SRI) of> 104.. C. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Vapor Retarder: Griffolyn Type -65 or equal, reinforced vapor retarder. 1. Material: 3 -ply laminate, combining two layers of high-density polyethylene and one high-strength non -woven cord grid. 2. Weight: 37 Ib/1,000 sq ft, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3776. 3. Puncture Propagation Tear: 28 Ib, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2582. 4. Permeance (Perm): 0.038 grains/hr-sq ft -in Hg, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. 07540-4 5. Drop Dart: 500 g, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1709. 6. Tensile Strength: 96 Ib/5,442 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 882, 3 incIC e ED long test specimen. FILED 7. Puncture Strength: 24 Ib, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4833. FEB 2 8. Usable Temperature Range: Minus 25 to 170 degrees F. 4. Sq P 2U12 9. Samavap self adhered or equal may substitute vapor retarder specification. city cirM E. Flexible Flashing Material: Material recommended by membrane manufacturer. Iowa city, Iowa F. Miscellaneous Flashing - Manufacturer's recommendations for specialty flashing with minimum requirements to be Sarnafil or better. 1. Samaflash a. A prefabricated expansion joint cover made from Sarnafil membrane. Sarnaflash is designed for securement to vertical or horizontal surfaces to span and accommodate the movement of new and existing expansion gaps from 1 inch to 4%z inches (25 mm to 114 mm) across. Available in 40 foot (12 m) rolls. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 2. Samareglet a. A heavy-duty, extruded aluminum flashing termination reglet used at walls and large curbs. Samareglet is produced from 6063-T5, 0.10 inch - 0.12 inch (2.5 mm - 3.0 mm) thick extruded aluminum. Samareglet has a 2'/, inch (57 mm) deep profile, and is provided in 10 foot (3 m) lengths. Use prefabricated Samareglet mitered inside and outside corners where walls intersect. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 3. Samastack a. A prefabricated vent pipe flashing made from 0.048 inch (48 mil/1.2 mm) thick Sarnafil G410 membrane. Available in five different sizes. Consult Product Data Sheet for sizes and additional information. 4. Sarnadrain-RAC a. PVC -coated, heavy-duty aluminum roof drain insert that mechanically seals to the drainpipe interior. Samadrain-RAC is made of 0.080 inch (2 mm) thick 6063 aluminum with a urethane seal installed at the end of the drainpipe. The large 14 inch x 14 inch (0.36 in x 0.36 m) drain strainer is also made of 0.080 inch (2 mm) thick aluminum stock. The flange dimensions of Samadrain-RAC are 18 inches x 18 inches (0.46 m x 0.46 m). Consult Product Data Sheet for sizes and additional information. 5. Sarnacirele-"G" a. Circular 0.048 inch (48 mil/1.2 mm) thick G410 membrane patch welded over T joints formed by overlapping thick membranes. 6. Samacorners - Universal a. Prefabricated outside and inside flashing comers made of 0.060 inch (60 mil/1.5 mm) thick membrane that are heat -welded to membrane or Samaclad base flashings. Available in one size which accommodate both inside and outside comers. Can be cut into one inside or one outside comer. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 7. Multi -Purpose Sealant a. A proprietary sealant used at flashing terminations. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 8. Samacol 2165 Adhesive a. A two -component urethane adhesive used for pitch pocket filler. Cures with excellent elasticity and adhesion to various surfaces. Consult Product Data Sheet for additional information. 07540-5 9. Samacol 2170 Adhesive FILED a. A solvent -based reactivating -type adhesive used to attach membrane to flashing FEB 21 2012 substrate. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information. 10. Sarnafelt y; 57 f' --%a. A non -woven polyester orpolypropylene mat cushion la layer that is necessary behind C;ry Clulc P Y Y �' lows City, Iowa G410 or G459 Flashing Membrane when the flashing substrates are rough or incompatible with the flashing membrane. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information. 2.04 INSULATION A. Polyisocyanumte Board Insulation: Closed cell, polyisocyanurate foam core wth factory -laminated facers, complying with ASTM C 1289-95, Type 11, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 1 and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 16 psi in accordance with ASTM C 165-95 or D 1621 2. Board Size: 48 x 48 inch. 3. 2" max individual board thickness. Provide multiple layers as required to meet min R -value, min. 2 layers. 4. Thermal Resistance: R -value of 6 per 1" thickness. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -product Requirements. 2.05 PROTECTION BOARD/ROOF BOARD A. Protection Board/Roof Board 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. "DensDeck Prime" Roof Board as manufactured by Georgia Pacific b. "Securock" Roof Board as manufactured by USG 2. Thickness: a. Thickness: 1/4" minimum for deck/horizontal application. 3. Board Size: 48" x 96" 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same material as membrane. B. Cant and Edge Strips: Wood fiberboard, compatible with roofing materials; cants formed to 45 degree angle. C. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer, compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering. D. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. 1. Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with metal washers. E. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1. Samacol 2170 Adhesive: a. A solvent -based reactivating -type adhesive used to attach the membrane to the substrate, either horizontally or vertically F. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane. G. Insulation Perimeter Restraint: Stainless steel edge device configured to restrain insulation 07540-6 boards in position and provide top flashing over ballast. H. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1. Sarnacol 2165 Adhesive (two -component urethane adhesive for pitch pocket toppings). Butyl Tape: PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION. FILED FEB 21 2012 y: city Ger Iowa Iowa City, tows A. Prior to starting any construction activities on or around existing roof areas, Roofing Contractor, General Contractor, Architect and Owner shall review/inspect existing roof for any damages or wear and document. Upon substantial completion and prior to issuing roof warranty, the new and existing roof areas shall again be inspected. Any and all damages noted that were not present at time of contractor possesion, and that impact the life and/or warranty of the roof shall be repaired and/or replaced by the contractor as required to maintain warrantty and expected life of roof. 3.02 INSTALLATION- GENERAL A. Coordination: 1. Verify location and quantity of roof curbs, rails, roof -top equipment, and roof penetrations with Mechanical and Electrical drawings. 2. Provide crickets as required to divert waterflow around all roof curbs and roof mounted equipment 3. Refer to Mechanical, Electrical, and Technology drawings for additional items on roof, including, but not limited to rooftop equipment, plumbing and conduit penetrations, pipe and gas line supports, and lightning protection. Coordinate work and penetrations of other trades with membrane installation. B. General 1. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. 3. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. 4. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. 5. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 6. Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips 07540-7 are in place. 3.04 VAPOR RETARDER AND VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's FILED instructions. I . Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck edge. FEB 21 2012 2. Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and W. S1 em seal to provide continuity of the air barrier lane. city Clerk P tY P Iowa City, Iowa B. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of insulation. 3.05 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation shall be installed according to insulation manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not install more insulation board than can be covered with Sarnafil membrane by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. C. Insulation shall be neatly cut to fit around penetrations and projections. D. Use at least 2 layers of insulation. Stagger joints at least 12 inches between layers. E. Mechanical Attachment 1. Insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the deck with approved fasteners and plates at a rate according to the insulation manufacturer's, FM's and Sika Sarnafil's recommendations for fastening rates and patterns. The quantity and locations of the fasteners and plates shall also cause the insulation boards to rest evenly on the roof deck/substrate so that there are no significant and avoidable air spaces between the boards and the substrate. Each insulation board shall be installed tightly against the adjacent boards on all sides. 2. Fasteners are to be installed consistently in accordance with fastener manufacturer's recommendations. Fasteners are to have minimum penetration into structural deck recommended by the fastener manufacturer and Sika Sarnafil. 3. Use fastener tools with a depth locator and torque -limiting attachment as recommended or supplied by fastener manufacturer to ensure proper installation. F. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. H. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. 1. At roof drains, use factory -tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18 inches. J. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.06 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Sarnacol 2170 Adhesive: Over the properly installed and prepared substrate surface, Samacol 2170 adhesive shall be applied using solvent -resistant 3/4 inch (19 mm) nap paint rollers. The adhesive shall be applied to the substrate at a rate according to Sika Sarnafil requirements. The adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coating with no gaps, globs, puddles or similar 07540-8 inconsistencies. Only an area which can be completely covered in the same day's FILED operations shall be coated with adhesive. The first layer of adhesive shall be allowed to dry completely prior to installing the membrane. I El 2 12012 2. When the adhesive on the substrate is dry, the Sarnafil roof membrane is unrolled. 3'_-'SF P Adjacent sheets shall be overlapped 3 inches (75 mm). Once in place, one-half ofth4owaGty jam_ sheet's length shall be turned back and the underside shall be coated with Samacol 2170 adhesive at a rate of 1/2 gallon per 100 square feet (0.2 liters per mz). When the membrane adhesive has dried slightly to produce strings when touched with a dry finger, the coated membrane shall be rolled onto the previously-coated substrate being careful to avoid wrinkles. Do not allow adhesive on the underside of the Sarnafil membrane to dry completely. The amount of membrane that can be coated with adhesive before rolling into substrate will be determined by ambient temperature, humidity and crew. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. The remaining un-bonded half of the sheet shall be folded back and the procedure repeated. a. Notes: b. The Applicator shall count the amount of pails of adhesive used per area per day to verify conformance to the specified adhesive rate. c. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas. All membrane shall be applied in the same manner. 3.07 HOT-AIR WELDING OF SEAM OVERLAPS A. General 1. All seams shall be hot-air welded. Seam overlaps should be 3 inches (76 mm) wide when automatic machine -welding and 4 inches (100 mm) wide when hand -welding, except for certain details. 2. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by Sika Sarnafil. All mechanics intending to use the equipment shall have successfully completed a training course provided by a Sika Sarnafil Technical Service Representative prior to welding. 3. All membrane to be welded shall be clean and dry. B. Hand -Welding 1. Hand -welded seams shall be completed in two stages. Hot-air welding equipment shall be allowed to warm up for at least one minute prior to welding. a. The back edge of the seam shall be welded with a narrow but continuous weld to prevent loss of hot air during the final welding. b. The nozzle shall be inserted into the seam at a 45 degree angle to the edge of the membrane. Once the proper welding temperature has been reached and the membrane begins to "flow", the hand roller is positioned perpendicular to the nozzle and rolled lightly. For straight seams, the 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) wide nozzle is recommended for use. For comers and compound connections, the 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide nozzle shall be used. C. Machine Welding 1. Machine welded seams are achieved by the use of Sika Sarnafil's automatic welding equipment. When using this equipment, Sika Sarnafil's instructions shall be followed and local codes for electric supply, grounding and over current protection observed. Dedicated circuit house power or a dedicated portable generator is recommended. No other equipment shall be operated simultaneously off the generator. 2. Metal tracks may be used over the deck membrane and under the machine welder to minimize or eliminate wrinkles. 07540-9 D. Quality Control of Welded Seams I. The Applicator shall check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver. Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted flow of dark gray material from the underside of the top membrane. On-site evaluation of welded seams shall be made FILED daily by the Applicator at locations as directed by the Owner's Representative or Sika FEB 21 2012 Samafil's representative. One inch (25 mm) wide cross-section samples of welded seams ar.55 P M shall betaken at least three times a day. Correct welds display failure from shearing of the Ciry Cterr membrane prior to separation of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator �Wa e- 1awa at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.08 MEMBRANE FLASHINGS A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and Sika Samafil. Approval shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, dry, smooth, and solvent -resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn into the building. B. Samacol Adhesive for Membrane Flashings 1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate, Samacol adhesive shall be applied according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The Samacol adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Only an area which can be completely covered in the same day's operations shall be flashed. The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller. 2. No adhesive shall be applied inseam areas that are to be welded. All panels of membrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels as required by welding techniques. C. Install Sarnabar/Samacord according to the Detail Drawings with approved fasteners into the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. Sarnabars may be required by Sika Samafil at the base of all tapered edge strips and at transitions, peaks, and valleys according to Sika Samafil's details. D. Sika Samafil's requirements and recommendations and the specifications shall be followed. All material submittals shall have been accepted by Sika Samafil prior to installation. E. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches above roofing level. F. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior corners and miters shall be cut and hot-air welded into place. No bitumen shall be in contact with the Samafil membrane. G. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter -flashed top edge with Sarnastop at 6-8 inches on center. H. Samafil flashings shall be terminated according to Sika Samafil recommended details. I. All adhered flashings that exceed 30 inches in height or that of the perimeter Sarnabar spacings shall receive additional securement. Consult Sika Samafil Technical Department for securement methods. 07540-10 FILED FEB 21 2012 3.09 METAL FLASHINGS Iowa Cq, Iowa m � A. Metal details, fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following: 1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 149 (latest issue). 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - latest issue. B. Complete all metalwork in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight condition exists daily. C. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending to allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. D. Metal joints shall be watertight. E. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid wood blocking. Fasteners shall penetrate the wood nailer a minimum of 1 inch. Airtight and contindbus metal hook strips are required behind metal fascias. Hook strips are to be fastened 12 inches on center into the wood nailer or masonry wall. 1. Continuous butyl tape shall be installedbetween edge of roof membrane and face of wall behind the continuous hook strip. G. Counter flashings shall overlap base flashings at least 4 inches. H. Hook strips shall extend past wood nailers over wall surfaces by 1'/s inch minimum and shall be securely sealed from air entry. 3.10 SARNACLAD METAL BASE FLASHINGS/EDGE METAL A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. No temporary flashings shall be allowed without the prior written approval of the Owner's Representative and Sika Sarnafil. Acceptance shall only be for specific locations on specific dates. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing due to incomplete flashings, the affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. B. Sarnaclad metal flashings shall be formed and installed per the Detail Drawings. 1. All metal flashings shall be fastened into solid wood nailers with two rows of post galvanized flat head annular ring nails, 4 inches on center staggered. Fasteners shall penetrate the nailer a minimum of I inch. 2. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal thermal expansion and contraction. C. Adjacent sheets of Sarnaclad shall be spaced '''A inch apart. The joint shall be covered with 2 inch wide aluminum tape. A 4 inch minimum wide strip of Sarnafil flashing membrane shall be hot-air welded over the joint. Exercise caution at perimeter of roof. Workers shall follow OSHA safety procedures. 3.11 TEMPORARY CUT-OFF A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a watertight condition as the work progresses. All temporary waterstops shall be constructed to provide a 100% watertight seal. The stagger of the insulation joints shall be made even by installing partial panels of insulation. The new membrane shall be carried into the waterstop. The waterstop shall be sealed to the deck and/or substrate so that water will not be allowed to travel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane shall be sealed in a 07540-11 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 3.13 CLEANING A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. B. All stains (including rust stains), fasteners, dirt, debris, etc. shall be cleaned and removed by the roofing installer upon completion of the installation. Roof membrane shall be cleaned again by the roofing installer or General Contractor, in accordance with roofing manufacturer's recommendations, just prior to Substantial Completion to remove subsequent stains (including rust stains), fasteners, dirt, debris, etc. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION 07540- 12 continuous heavy application of sealant as described in Section 2.09. When work resumes, the contaminated membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated membrane, insulation fillers, etc. shall be removed from the work area and properly disposed of off site. None of these materials shall be used in the new work. FILED B If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Applicator shall FEB 2 1 2012 provide the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition. W:51 P rA C. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly-completed roofing, the affected area shall be „ rk Iowa Lay, Iowa removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. D. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 3.13 CLEANING A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. B. All stains (including rust stains), fasteners, dirt, debris, etc. shall be cleaned and removed by the roofing installer upon completion of the installation. Roof membrane shall be cleaned again by the roofing installer or General Contractor, in accordance with roofing manufacturer's recommendations, just prior to Substantial Completion to remove subsequent stains (including rust stains), fasteners, dirt, debris, etc. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. 3.14 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION 07540- 12 FILED SECTION 07620 FEB 21 2012 y: M Fn City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, gutters, downspouts, and other items indicated in Schedule. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07311 - Asphalt Shingles: Flashings associated with shingle roofing. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005. B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2007. C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2007. D. ASTM D4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free; 2007. E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. L04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4x4 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metalwork with 5 years years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED METAL FASCIA 07620-1 Z02 SHEETMATERIALS FILED A. Pre -Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre -coated with fluoropolymercoating. FEB 21202 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, 5R Q thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. y'city clerk 2, Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Iowa City, Iowa 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. D. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. Z04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. 2.05 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile. 1. 50 size B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile. 1. 4x6 size C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Straps. 3. Downspout Supports: Straps.Single point attachment behind downspout to building. 4. Misc angled connectors as required. D. PVC transition from rectangular downspout to 6" diameter pipe. Refer to civil drawings for underground storm drain. E. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 07620-2 3. 01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. FILED F. Gutters run level. FEB 2 ?012 G. Connect downspouts to storm drain. r pM 3.04 SCHEDULE Iowa C Clerk 4, Iowa A. Gutters and Downspouts: 1. Lodge building; gutters and downspouts at south side. 2. Shelter: none B. Flashings Associated with Shingle Roofing, including Valley, Hip, Ridge, Eave, Gutter Edge, Gable Edge, Chimney, and counterflashings. C. Chimney cap END OF SECTION 07620-3 SECTION 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Manufactured roof specialties, including fascias. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS FEB 21 2012 �i.'Sq PAS City Clerk A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. Iowa City, Iowa 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and locations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances, and other affected work. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof Edge Fascia: 1. Architectural Products Co; Product _: www.archprod.com. 2. W.P. Hickman Company; PermaSnap 2 Coping: www.wph.com. 3. Metal -Era Inc; Product : www.metalera.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Roof Edge Fascia: Metal Era Anchor-Tite Extended Fascia Factory, consisting of a continuous extruded aluminum bar, exterior fascia, and continuous formed galvanized steel cleat with fasteners. B. Construction: 1. Fascia Metal; .050 inch (1.27 mm) thick -formed aluminum. 2. Finish; Standard color Kynar-500 as selected by the Architect from roof edge manufacturer's color chart. 3. Fascia: standard 12 feet 0 inches lengths with matching concealed joint splice plates. 4. Extruded Bar: Shall be continuous 6063-T6 alloy aluminum in 12'-0" standard lengths with pre -punched slotted holes. All bar miters are welded. a. Injection Molded EPDM Bar Splice to allow thermal movement expansion of extruded aluminum anchor bar. 07710-1 b. Fasteners: 2 inch stainless steel and 1/4 inch by 1-1/4 inch masonry/wood with driver. 5. Anchor Bar Cleat: Standard 12'-0"lengths of commercial type 20 gauge G-90 galvanized steel with pre -punched holes. C. Fully Adhered or Mechanically Attached Single -Ply Version: 1. Model: AEF -130,13" face. D. Pull -Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES -1 RE -I and RE -2 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code. PART EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section are in place and positioned correctly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and base flashings. C. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water tightness. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Perimeter of Lobby area roof as indicated on drawings. FILED FEB 21 7012 4: 59 Pn City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 07710-2 SECTION 07900 CAULKING AND SEALING FILED PART1 GENERAL FEB 21 2012 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES y: Sq pM A. Sealants and joint backing. city C1a Iowa city, Iowa 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 02750 - Rigid Pavement: Sealants required in conjunction with paving. C. Section 07950 - Fire and Smoke Sealing: Firestopping sealants. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C834 -Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010. B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2008. C. ASTM C920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011. D. ASTM C1 193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009. E. ASTM D1667 -Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed -Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011). F. SCAQMD 1168 -South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.l 168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Manufacturer's color chart/samples D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 07900- 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS FILED 2.01 MANUFACTURERS FEB 21 ?w y: 51 P,vt A. Silicone Sealants:a =Iowa 1. Bostik, Inc. IowaC Iowa 2. GE Silicones. 3. Pecora Corporation. 4. Degussa Building Systems/Sonneborn. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik, Inc. 2. Pecora Corporation. 3. Degussa Building Systems/Sonneborn. 4. Mameco International. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. C. Acoustical Sealants: 1. Tremco, Inc. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168. B. General Purpose Exterior/Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, T, G, A, M, and 1; three- component. 1. "NP 2" as manufactured by Sonneborn BASF 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's 40 standard colors, and 470 nonstocked colors. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Exterior Joints between door and window frames e. Control and f Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. Verify with Architect C. Wet Interior Locations: silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Clear, almond, and white colors as selected by Architect. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. D. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Locations: Permanently tacky non -hardening butyl sealant. 1. Tremco Acoustical Sealant or equal. 2. Applications: Use for concealed locations only: a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor. E. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self -leveling; ASTM C920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses 07900-2 T, M and A; single component. 1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1-1/2 inches. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's 40 standard colors, and 470 nonstocked colors 3. Applications: Use for: a. Expansion and control joints in exposed interior concrete floors. F. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Two -component, polysulfide rubber sealant, USA Specification A116.1, Class A, self leveling. 1. Hard curing type, non -staining. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's 40 standard colors, and 470 nonstocked colors 3. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior joints in concrete paving and sidewalks. G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non -sagging, non -staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. I. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. FILED 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35. 2 5. Applications: Use for: FEB FEBQ 2012 a. Countertop to wall at areas of moisture contact. _city0 cM 2.03 ACCESSORIES Iowa City, Iowa A. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. 07900-3 B. Perforin installation in accordance with ASTM Cl 193. C. Perforin acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width -to -depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. At interior joints, install sealant after painting is completed. Color of sealant to matchadjacent materials. Verify color with Architect. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured. FILED FEB 21 71`112 4:5City RM k ]owa t�Y, towa END OF SECTION 07900-4 SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Non -fire -rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. FILED C. Thermally insulated steel doors. FEB 21T012 `' 57 Ph] D. Steel glazing frames. Chy Cli lova C*, Iowa 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Ol 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 08710 -Door Hardware. C. Section 08850 -Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. D. Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 1998. B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI -100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zino -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2004a. E. DHI Al 15 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A] 15 Series). F. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999. G. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. H. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. I. UL I OC - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. 08100-1 C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. FILED1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE FEB 21 2012 A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section 4• gq PNS, with minimum three years documented experience. CityClerk Iowa CaY, Icw 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco or Curries: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 3. Kewanee Corporation 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 1.01 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSUICC A117.1. 2. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 3. Glazed Lights: Non -removable stops on non -secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 4. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI Al 15 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 5. Galvanizing at all exterior doors and interior doors: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 6. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound -rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound -rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Interior/Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless, 16 gauge. 2. Core: Polystyrene. 3. Tops and bottoms of all exterior doors shall be closed for a flush, waterproof construction with no visible seams ato top and bottom of door by one of the following methods: a. Install minimum 20 gauge channels (legs down at top of door, legs up at bottom of door) flush with top and bottomedges (no recesses). Seam wire weld continuous around entire perimeter of channel and grind smooth. b. Install minimum 20 gauge channels (legs down at top of door, legs up at bottom of door) flush with top and bottomedges (no recesses). Spot weld and grind smooth. Install fiberglass resin filler (automotive body filler) continuous around entire 08100-2 perimeter of channel and sand smooth. 4. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60/ZF 180 coating. S. Thickness: 13/4" 6. Texture: Smooth faces. 7. 12 gauge hinge channel, 14 gauge lock channel, 16 gauge top and bottort�ecD 1 8. 12 gauge closer reinforcement, 7 gauge hinge reinforcement. jj�" jj jj,, 9. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. FEB 2 10. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 1 2012 2.04 STEEL FRAMES y- 57 PM Ciry Clerk Iowa Cary, Iowa A. General: 1. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 2. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 3. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Interior/Exterior Door Frames: Full profile welded, grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 1. 14 gauge. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60/ZF180 coating. 3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. C. Interior Door Frames: Full profile welded, grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 1. 16 gauge. 2. Galvanizing: All components hot -dipped zinc -iron alloy -coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60/ZF180 coating. 3. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. 4. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. D. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.05 A CCESSOR Y MA TERULS A. Glazing: 08850. B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4 -inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. D. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop -assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust -inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. 08100-3 B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high -build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry orto be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. Utilize masonry anchors in masonry construction. Countersink anchors; fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed surfaces. C. Grout all frames at cmu, including sidelights, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames or adjacent wall construction. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. G. Touch up damaged factory finishes. H. Cut ends of glazing stops and other materials shall be primed and painted. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straightedge, comer to comer. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on drawings. FILED FEB 21 7012 4.6-1 CM Cry k Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 08100-4 SECTION 08210 FLUSH WOOD DOORS FILED PART 1 GENERAL FEB 2 12012 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES 4/c59P A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non -rated. IowaCilY,_I�a 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. C. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Work. D. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. E. Section 08850 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWUAWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0. B. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2006. C. ITS (DIR) -Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. E. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers. D. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. 08210-1 L 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. FILEDB. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. FEB 2121�C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or ,I % o Clerk *A wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with Ci,Ywwac1q, Iowa tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide warranty for the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Life of installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: The following manufacturers will be acceptable based on compliance with specifications. 1. Assa Abloy Graham: www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Marshfield Door -Systems, Inc: www.marshfiielddoors.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300, Custom Grade. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5 -ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non -Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above. 1. Formaldahyde free 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Plain sliced, select White birch, veneer grade as specified by quality standard„ book veneer, center balance assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. I. Vertical Edges: Compatible hardwood. 2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed. 08210-2 FILED FEB 21 2012 B. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant. w.5F Ciry CIe k 2.05 ACCESSORIES Iowa City, Iowa A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners, flush to face of door, 5/8" height; prepared for countersink style screws. B. Astragals for non -rated double doors: inset double nylon brush at center of each door edge. C. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors. 2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 1. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface -mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700. 2.07 FA CTOR Y FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard: 1. Stain; a. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 2. Transparent Finish: Transparent catalyzed polyurethane, Premium quality, dull satin sheen. B. Seal door top and bottom edge with color sealer to match door facing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Factory -Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. 08210-3 F. Install door louvers plumb and level. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on Drawings. FILED FEB 2I niz 4•.s11 rM City Clerk Iowa Ciry, Iowa END OF SECTION 08210-4 SECTION 08351 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Acoustic operable panel partition. B. Ceiling track, ceiling guards, and operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05120- Structural Steel: Overhead track structural support framing. FILED FEB 21 2012 St: sq PM City clerk Iowa City, Iowa B. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and track support shimming. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E557 -Standard Guide for The Installation of Operable Partitions; 2000 (Reapproved 2006)el. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on partition materials. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, track layout, details of track and required supports, and stacking depth. D. Samples for Selection: Submit two samples of full manufacturer's color range for selection of colors. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures. F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain removal methods. Describe cleaning materials detrimental to finish surfaces and hardware finish. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years of experience. C. Preparation of the opening shall conform to the criteria set forth per ASTM E557 Standard Practice for Architectural Application and Installation of Operable Partitions PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Design is based on Hufcor; Product Series 642 Paired Panels. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Modernfold, Inc: www.modemfold.com. 08351 - 1 2. Panelfold, Inc: www.panelfold.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Product to be top supported Series 642 paired panels as manufactured by Hufcor Inc, or approved equal 1. Panels shall be nominally 4" thick, to 48" in width, and hinged in pairs. 2. Panel faces shall be laminated to appropriate substrate to meet the STC requirement in 2.04 Acoustical Performance. 3. Frames shall be of 16 gauge painted steel with integral factory applied aluminum vertical FILED edge and face protection. 4. Vertical sound seals shall be of tongue and groove configuration, ensure panel -to -panel FEB 21 2012 alignment and prevent sound leaks between panels. PM 5. Horizontal top seals shall be retractable, provide V nominal operating clearance, and exert city Clerk Iowa Cay, tow, upward force when extended. 6. Horizontal bottom seals shall be retractable, provide up to 2" nominal operating clearance, and exert downward force when fully extended. 7. Horizontal trim shall be aluminum. 8. Low profile hinges on basic panels shall be of steel and project no more than 1/4" beyond panel faces. Each pair of panels to have a minimum of three hinges. B. Weight of the panels shall be 7.8-10.9 lbs./sq. ft. C. Suspension System 1. Track shall be of clear anodized architectural grade extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. Track design shall provide precise alignment at the trolley running surfaces and provide integral support for adjoining ceiling, soffit, or plenum sound barrier. Track shall be connected to the structural support by pairs of minimum 3/8" dia. threaded steel hanger rods. Guide rails and/or track sweep seals shall not be required. a. Each panel shall be supported by one 4 -wheeled carrier. Wheels to be of hardened steel ball bearings encased with molded polymer tires. D. Finishes 1. Face finish: Factory applied vertical ribbed carpet (N.R.C..20). Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed 15/15 2. Exposed metal trim and seal color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard 4 colors. 3. Aluminum Track: clear anodized E. Options: 1. Pocket Door a. Pair doors, manually operated, 3" depth, construction similar to operable panels, with edge protection. b. Pocket doors shall be secured in the closed position by the face -activated expanding internal mechanism. c. High pressure laminate, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 2. Markerboard a. Inset porcelain enamel steel dry marker board, white. b. Typical on one side of center pair of panels, full panel height. 2.03 OPERATION A. Panels shall be manually moved from the storage area, positioned in the opening, and seals set. 08351 -2 B. Retractable Horizontal Seals 1. Retractable horizontal seals shall be activated by a removable quick -set operating handle located approximately 42" from the floor in the panel edge. 2. All retractable seals in each hinged panel group shall be operated simultaneously. 3. Seal activation requires a 190 degree turn of the removable handle. C. Final partition closure to be by lever closure panel with expanding jamb which compensates for minor wall irregularities and provides a minimum of 250 lbs. seal force against the adjacent wall for optimum sound control. The jamb activator shall be located approximately 45" from the floor in the panel face and be accessed from either side of the panel. The jamb is equipped with a mechanical rack and pinion gear drive mechanism and shall extend 4"-6" by turning the removable operating handle. D. Stack/Store Panels 1. Retract seals with removable operating handle and move to storage area. Panels to be stored in pocket at one side. Refer to drawings for layout. 2.04 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE A. Acoustical performance shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E90 Test Standards. Standard panel construction shall have obtained an STC rating of 52. FILED PART 3 EXECUTION FF8 21 2012 3.01 EXAMINATION 'E: s4 PAf Ci[ Cler A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. lowu Iry. Iowa B. Verify track supports will permit track to be level within 1/4 inch of required position and parallel to the floor surface. C. Verify floor flatness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non -cumulative. D. Verify wall plumbness of 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non -cumulative. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E557. B. Fit and align partition assembly and pocket doors level and plumb. C. Lubricate moving components. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust partition assembly to provide smooth operation from stacked to full open position. Do not over -compress acoustic seals. B. Visually inspect partition in full extended position for light leaks to identify a potential acoustical leak. C. Adjust partition assembly to achieve lightproof seal. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean finish surfaces and partition accessories. 3.05 CLOSEOUTACTIVITIES A. Demonstrate operation of partition, identify potential operational problems and required maintenance. 08351-3 B. Deliver operation and maintenance manuals to General Contractor for incorporation in Close -Out Submittals. FILED FEB 21 2012 +ts S9 Pb4 City clerit Iowa City, low& END OF SECTION 111:l#biQl SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM DOORS &STOREFRONT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Aluminum -framed storefront FILED B. Aluminum doors. FEH 21 2012 C. Door hardware. V' C PM � Iowa �erk D. Perimeter sealant. City, Iowa 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07900 -Caulking and Sealing: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. B. Section 08 8500 -Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW -10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009. D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2010. E. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008. F. ASTM B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007. G. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. H. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). I. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009). 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural : Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 08410-1 FILED 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of IBC 2009 code. FEB 21 2012 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to L/175 of the clear span or flexture limit W.59 PM of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. Iowa City, Iowa 3. Deflection under design load shall not exceed U175 for spans less than 162" 4. Deflection under design load shall not exceed U240 for spans grater than 162" B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Thermal Transmittance: Conductive thermal transmittance shall not be more than 0.43 BTU/hr.sq 11.17 in accordance with ASTM 1503. 1, when glazed with 1" insulated glass. D. Air Infiltration: 1. Doors: measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. a. Single door; Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.50 cu ft/min/sq ft of unit. b. Pair of doors; Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.10 cu ft/min/sq ft of unit. 2. Unit Framing: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. E. Condensation Resistance Factor: 1. Measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1. 2. Storefront Framing: not less than 57 3. Doors: not less than 40 F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 12 Ibf/sq ft. G. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. H. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, dimensional limitations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE 08410-2 A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Iowa. B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATIONMEETING FILED A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. FEB 2 1. 08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 4.59 PM 2012 A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW -10. IOa-�,% B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a 1 year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 1 year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Specifications are based upon the products otEFCO Corporation to define quality and performance requirements. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers, based upon compliance with plans and specifications include: 1. Kawneer North America: Trifab 451Twww.kawneer.com. 2. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum Storefront: 1. Aluminum -Framed Storefront: EFCO 403-T or equal, thermally broken, factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage, and attachment devices. a. Provide factory fabricated comers to match. b. Finish: 1) Typical unless noted otherwise: Class I color anodized, med bronze to match Marina building 2. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. a. Cross Section: 2" x 4 1/2" nominal b. All aluminum vertical and horizontal extrusions shall have a nominal wall thickness of 0.080" 08410-3 5. Hardware: a. Operating hardware shall be 5 knuckle butt hinges with Teflon bushings and stainless steel pins at the head and stay arms/bars to hol vent. b. Locking handles shall be cam type. 6. Glazing: window manufacturer to furnish and glass glaze, 1" insulated glass as indicated in Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 7. Screens: Fiberglass mesh with extruded aluminum frame. Hinge entire screen to access cam lock. 8. Finish: Class I color anodized, med bronze to match Marina building 2.03 MATERL4LS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. D. Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07900. E. Glass: As specified in Section 08850. 1. Glass in Exterior Framing: 1" insulated, tempered as required by code. 2. Glass in Doors: Interior and exterior doors 1" insulated, tempered. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA -M 12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic 08410-4 c. Frame; Frame components shall be mechanically fastened by means of extruded aluminum shear blocks attached to vertical mullions. d. Glazing stops: Flush. e. Dry glazed with EPDM gasket. B. Doors: Series D300 Standard, 13/4", med stile entrance door, Glazed aluminum, as manufactured by EFCO Corporation or equal. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. .125' wall thickness 3. Top Rail: 3 1/2" inches wide. 4. Vertical Stiles: 3 1/2" inches wide. FILED 5. Bottom Rail: 6 1/2" inches wide. 6. Glazing Stops: Square. FEB 21 7012 7. Corners shall have heavy concealed reinforcement brackets shall be secured with screws p�q 4'' and shall be of deep penetration and fillet welded. cay cr«k 8. Closer Reinforcement: concealed reinforcement at door frame and door face at closer. Inwa c,Iy, Iowa 9. Door stops shall include a bulb weather-strip that complies with ASTM E 2203 specification 10. Finish: Class I color anodized, med bronze to match Marina building. C. Operable Sash: 1. WV -41, aluminum project -out awning, thermally -broken, storefront window system,as manufactured by EFCO Corporation or equal. 2. ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/NAFS-02 window type 3. Main frame: mitre cut 0.08" nominal wall thickness, screw spline construction 4. Vent frame: Mitre cut .125' nominal wall thickness, screw spline construction 5. Hardware: a. Operating hardware shall be 5 knuckle butt hinges with Teflon bushings and stainless steel pins at the head and stay arms/bars to hol vent. b. Locking handles shall be cam type. 6. Glazing: window manufacturer to furnish and glass glaze, 1" insulated glass as indicated in Section 08 8000 - Glazing. 7. Screens: Fiberglass mesh with extruded aluminum frame. Hinge entire screen to access cam lock. 8. Finish: Class I color anodized, med bronze to match Marina building 2.03 MATERL4LS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. D. Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07900. E. Glass: As specified in Section 08850. 1. Glass in Exterior Framing: 1" insulated, tempered as required by code. 2. Glass in Doors: Interior and exterior doors 1" insulated, tempered. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.04 FINISHES A. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA -M 12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic 08410-4 coating or AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: 1. Refer to Section 08710 - Finish Hardware and Hardware Schedule for additional hardware description and requirements. 2. Hinges: a. Continuous aluminum hinge, anodized finish to match door color. 3. Weatherstripping; Provide for all doors. a. Sill sweep; Adjustable molded EPDM or vinyl sweep, continuously contacting threshold b. Stops; bulb weatherstrip that complies with ASTM E 2203 FILED 4. Removable Mullion @ Door IOOA: a. EFCO removable mullion. FEB 'j b. Top and bottom mounting brackets `}' SF n 1012 c. Security clips 10a,tY ik d. Finish to match door and frame finish ' ° 5. Threshold, extruded aluminum 6. Remaining hardware provided by others, refer to Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. Alum door provider shall coordinate operation and fit of remaining hardware to be provided for use on aluminum doors with Finish Hardware supplier 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn upends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form watertight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. J. Install operating sash. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08850, using interior dry glazing method. L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non -cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. B. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. FILED FEB 2 9nl? f PM '11Y Clerk Iowa City, lows END OF SECTION 08410-6 SECTION 08710 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors. B. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. C. Thresholds. D. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 08100 -Steel Doors and Frames. C. Section 08210 - WoodDoors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS FILED FEB 21 2012 54 Prt City Cak Iowa _city,_Iowa A. ANSI/ICC AI 17.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1). C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA Al 56.2). D. BHMA Al 56.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSIBHMA A156.3). E. BHMA Al 56.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSIBHMA A156.4). F. BHMA Al 56.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA At 56.7). G. BHMA Al 56.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA Al 56.8). H. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSIBHMA A156.13). I. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.15). BHMA A 156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21). K. BHMA Al 56.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSIBHMA Al 56.23). 08710- 1 L. BHMA Al 56.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. M. BHMA Al 56.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006. N. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004. O. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996. P. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2010. Q. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2009. R. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware. C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers. D. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. E. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. FILED D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and FEB 21 7012 conduit. LI A5 PM E. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and r CaLaerk Iowa -Iowa inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. F. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Standards for Fire -Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for use by Architect and Contractor. 08710-2 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 5 years of experience. D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) qualified person to assist in the work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HARDWARE A. Finishes: FILED 1. US26D Satin Chrome unless noted otherwise 2. Closer casing: aluminum paint FEB 21 2012 B. Butt Hinges �C Sq P�1.� g Iowa city, to 1. Unless otherwise specified: city, Iowa a. 4-1/2"x4-1/2" b. Non -removable pins c. Permanently lubricated ball bearing at all doors d. Five knuckle 2. Exterior doors: a. 1 1/2 pair (min.) to 8'-0", provide 1 additional hinge for each additional 2'6" or fraction thereof. b. Stainless Steel 3. Interior doors: a. 1 1/2 pair (min.) to 8.4"', provide 1 additional hinge for each additional 2'6" or fraction thereof. 08710-3 1. Specifications are based upon the products of Von Duprin. Products of alternate manufacturers, complying with requirements of plans and specifications, include: a. Yale b. Sargent 2. 99L Series Mortise and Rim mounted series touchbar exit devices as manufactured by Von Duprin. a. Conform to ANSI A156.3-2001, Grade 1 b. Grooved casing c. Type and function as scheduled. d. UL listed at rated doors e. Double cylinder at exterior doors; interior cylinder locks/unlocks outside trim, outside key cylinder retracts latchbolt. f Cylinder dogging. 3. Attach with thru-bolts. 4. Removable core cylinders. 5. Trim: a. Pull: Von Duprin 697 series round pull with backplate 6. Strikes: stainless steel, curved lip F. Coordinator and Carry Bar: 1. Trimco 3092 Series 2. Open back strike where applicable. 08710-4 b. Bronze plated. 4. Numbers scheduled are Stanley Works a. Interior, FBB 191: Ball bearing, Bronze - polished and plated. b. Exterior; FBB 191: Ball bearing, stainless steel - Satin finish. 5. Comparable products from Hager, Lawrence and McKinney are acceptable. C. Continuous Hinge: 1. Continuous geared hinge, aluminum, clear anodized D. Mortise Lockset 1. Specifications are based upon the products of Schlage Manufacturing. Products of the following manufacturers, based on compliance with plans and specifications will also be acceptable: a. Yale b. Sargent 2. Schlage L -Series VandlgardMortise Lever Lockset a. Mortise type conforming to ANSI A 156.13, Series 1000, Grade 1. Install on doors FILED prepared to ANSI A 156.115(w) specifications. b. Escutcheon: L Full Face FEB 21 2012 c. Trim: ND Rhodes i:5� P rA d. Dormitory Function; "anti -panic" operation; inside lever simultaneously retracts cure deadbolt and latchbolt ;uy, Iowa 3. 2 3/4" backset. 4. Latchbolt; 3/4" throw, stainless steel, one-piece latch, reversible, with anti -friction piece. 5. Deadbolt; 1" throw, stainless steel with two enclosed hardened steel roller armor pins. 6. Strike: Stainless steel, dustproof, with curved lip. 7. Provide abrasive coating to backside of lever at all hazardous locations as required by ANSI A117.1. E. Exit Devices: 1. Specifications are based upon the products of Von Duprin. Products of alternate manufacturers, complying with requirements of plans and specifications, include: a. Yale b. Sargent 2. 99L Series Mortise and Rim mounted series touchbar exit devices as manufactured by Von Duprin. a. Conform to ANSI A156.3-2001, Grade 1 b. Grooved casing c. Type and function as scheduled. d. UL listed at rated doors e. Double cylinder at exterior doors; interior cylinder locks/unlocks outside trim, outside key cylinder retracts latchbolt. f Cylinder dogging. 3. Attach with thru-bolts. 4. Removable core cylinders. 5. Trim: a. Pull: Von Duprin 697 series round pull with backplate 6. Strikes: stainless steel, curved lip F. Coordinator and Carry Bar: 1. Trimco 3092 Series 2. Open back strike where applicable. 08710-4 G. Electric Strikes: FILED I . 7000 Series as manufactured by HES or approved equal. FEB 2 a. ANSI/BHMA 156.3 1, Grade 2 12012 b. Stainless steel construction 44' S� P�q City Clerk c. Fail secure Iowa City, Iowa d. Coordinate voltage with electrical e. Adapters, misc. fasteners, and trim plates as required for installation f. Verify/coordinate application with lockset, frame profile, and material for location used. H. Push/Pull: 1. Push/Pull: Brookline 111x73x73L push/pull set, 1" dia x 10-3/4" pull, 10" cc, 4" x 16" plate. Plate on push and pull side, type 9 concealed mounting I. Door Closers: 1. Manufacturers: a. LCN Supersmoothee Series, 4041. b. Norton 7500 series c. Yale 4400 series d. Sargent 350/351 series 2. Non -handed, adjustable closing and latching speeds, adjustable backcheck and spring power. 3. Comply with ANSI A 117.1 and ADA requirements. 4. Aluminum or cast iron enclosure. 5. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for door size and mounting location. J. Automatic Flush bolts: 1. No. 942/842 as manufactured by Door Controls International or equal. 2. Provide at top and bottom with dust proof bottom strike. K. Door stops: As required at all doors. 1. Wall: Ives 407 1/2 concave L. Drop Down Door Leg Holder: 1. Ives #452, aluminum with n:placeable rubber tip M. Overhead Door Holder/Stop: 1. Glynn -Johnson series 90 or equal N. Smoke Gaskets: 1. Reese 897B or equal. Install at head and jamb of all rated doors. O. Threshold: 1. Zero 564B or equal 2. Comply with ADA requirements. P. Weatherstripping 1. Perimeter: Reese DS70 2. Sweep: Reese 323, polyurethane 3. Astragal: As required by installation 4. As manufactured by Reese, National, Zero or as approved by the Architect. Q. Electromagnetic Wall Hold -Open: 1. Rixson 990 series wall mounted closer with concealed wiring. 2. Verify projection with installation. GI3fDII.'. R. Kickplates: 1. 22 ga stainless steel with eased edges and satin polish finish. 2. Size a. Std.; 12" high x 2" less than door width, unless noted otherwise b. Protection Plt; 36" height x 2" less than door width. 3. Hager 1985 or approved equal. S. Head Rain Drip 1. Manufacturer FILED a. Pemko 346 Series b. Reese R201 series FEB 21 2012 c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 -Product Requirements .i:5 1 PM 2. Anodized finish, clear or dark bronze as selected by Architect city clerk lOR'a ' 10" T. Knox Box 1. Knox -Box 3200 series, with RMK recessed mounting kit 2. Color: dark bronze 3. Provide 1 at west entry. Verify location with Architect and local Fire Marshal. 2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide all items of single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 3. Fire -Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 4. All Hardware on Fire -Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 5. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. 2.03 HINGES A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door. 1. Provide five -knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers. 3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated. 4. Provide non -removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges. 2.04 KEYING A. Security keyed with restricted keyway to Owner's requirements. 1. Owner shall provide interchangeble cores to key into existing TIRA Grand Master System. Contractor shall provider temporary construction cores to provide security during construction. Contractor shall switch out temporary cores with Owner supplied permanent cores just prior to Occupancy B. Provide locksets and latches in accordance with Owner's requirements. 1. 7 -pin small format interchangeable core, ANSI A156.5, Grade 1. 08710-6 a. Manufacturers: Best Lock Corporation, 9K series b. Verify cylinder and core configuration for lockset with Owner prior to ordering locksets 2. Hardware supplier shall coordinate core and cylinder requirements with Owner and FILED Owner's system PART 3 EXECUTION FEB p1 2012 3.01 EXAMINATION c ry cler I0lvkmay, Iowa A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire -rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire -rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Install all finish hardware as required prior to painting and then remove and reinstall after painting is completed. E. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Hardware Supplier's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall field inspect and certify hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. Following this section DII.N14IId Group No: 1A (Alum—exterior pair) Lockset: Door Nos. 100A, 10413, 10513 Hazardous Marking: Lockset: Continuous hinge (by Aluminum Door Supplier) Function: Yes, ea leaf Hazardous Markin Hinges: Continuous hinge (by Aluminum Door Supplier) Closer: Yes, ea leaf Threshold: Exit Device: Rim mtd , 697 TP key locks/unlocks thumbpiece, round pull grip Push/Pull: Smokeseal: None Weatherstripping: Yes, by Aluminum Door Supplier Sides/Hgt: Special Hardware Yes, by Aluminum Door Supplier FILED Threshold: None FEB 2012 Door Stop: PI Smokeseal: None City Irk Iowa C Iowa Kickplate: None Sides/Hgt Special Hardware Removable mullion at 100A Cylinder dogging Head drip Drop leg holder Group No: 1B (Alum—exterior single) Door Nos. IOTA, 102, Lockset: Function: Hazardous Marking: Hinges: Continuous hinge (by Aluminum Door Supplier) Closer: Yes, ea leaf Exit Device: Rim mtd , 697 TP key locks/unlocks thumbpiece, round pull grip Push/Pull: Weatherstripping: Yes, by Aluminum Door Supplier Threshold: Yes, by Aluminum Door Supplier Door Stop: Wall Mtd @ 102, 101A Smokeseal: None Kickplate: None Sides/Hgt: Special Hardware Electric strike @ 101A. Cylinder dogging 08710-8 Group No: 3 (exterior, single) Head drip Lockset: Mortise Lockset Drop leg holder Hazardous Marking: Group No: 2 (Aluminum interior vestibule) Closer: Door Nos. 100B None Lockset: None Function: Hazardous Marking: Hinges: Continuous hinge, (by Aluminum Door Supplier) Door Stop: Closer: Yes, ea leaf None Exit Device: None Location/Hgt: Push side, 36" Push/Pull: round pull grip, push plate Weatherstripping: By Aluminum Door Supplier FILED Threshold: Yes, by aluminum door supplier Door Stop: FEB 2 j 2012 None Smokeseal: 11,4: None Sq P City Clear g Kickplate: None Sides/Hgt: Special Hardware Drop leg holder Group No: 3 (exterior, single) Door Nos. 103B Lockset: Mortise Lockset Function: F13 Corridor Lock Hazardous Marking: Hinges: 1 1/2 pair SS butt hinges Closer: yes Exit Device: None Push/Pull: None Weatherstripping: Yes Threshold: Yes Door Stop: None Smokeseal: None Kickplate: Yes Location/Hgt: Push side, 36" Special Hardware Drop leg holder P18riUlW FILED EB 21 2012 ,v., 6PL CitXeM Group No: 4 (single security) Door Nos. 1010, 103A, 106, 108, 109 Lockset: Mortise Lockset Function: F84 Classroom Hazardous lock Marking: Hinges: 1 1/2 pair ea leaf Closer: 1 ea leaf, except 101C Exit Device: None Push/Pull: None Weatherstripping: Yes @ 106 Threshold: None Door Stop: Wall @ 103A, 109, Smokeseal: No Sides/Hgt Push side, 12", except none @ 101C. 36" @ Kickplate: Yes 103A Special Hardware Group No: 5 (Restroom) Door Nos. 110,111 Hazardous Lockset: None Function: Marking: Hinges: 1 1/2 pair Closer: Yes Deadbolt: None Push/Pull: Push plate, round pull grip Weatherstripping: None Threshold: None Door Stop: Wall Mtd Typ, Smokeseal: None Kickplate: Yes Sides/Hgt Push side, 12" Special Hardware 08710- 10 Group No: 6 (Classroom pair) Lockset: Door Nos. 104A, 105A Hazardous Lockset: None Function: Hazardous Hinges: 1 1/2 pr hinge ea leaf, swing clear Closer: Marking: Hinges: 1-1/2 pairealeaf Push/Pull: Closer: Yes, each leaf No Exit Device: None Door Stop: Push/Pull: Push plate and round pull grip FI Weatherstripping: None FEB 2 12012 Sides/Hgt: Special Hardware Electromagnetic Wall Hold -Open Threshold: None 4:59 p M Door Stop: None low ty Clerk > cilY Iowa Smokeseal: None Kickplate: Yes Sides/Hgt: Push side, 12" Special Hardware Drop leg holder Group No: 7 (entry - interior) Door Nos. 10113 Lockset: Function: Hazardous None Marking: Hinges: 1 1/2 pr hinge ea leaf, swing clear Closer: No Exit Device: Active leaf mortise exit device, 9975EO exit only Push/Pull: Weatherstripping: No Threshold: No Door Stop: No Smokeseal: No Kickplate: No Sides/Hgt: Special Hardware Electromagnetic Wall Hold -Open Cylinder dogging Automatic flush bolts at inactive leaf Coordinator 08710- 11 Group No: 8 (deadlock) Door Nos. 103C Lockset: None Function: Hazardous Marking: Hinges: 1-1/2 pair each leaf, swing clear 180 Closer: None Deadbolt: Yes, thumbtum inside, key outside Push/Pull: Form and Surface HC206 neoprene pull, ea leaf Weatherstripping: None FILED Threshold: None Door Stop: None FEB i ( 202 Smokeseal: 9q PM Smokeseal: None Cirk ty Cle Kickplate: No Sides/Hgt: ow Coordinator Manual flushbolts. Provide dustproof floor mtd strikes at both open and Special Hardware closed position. Head mounted at closed position only. Group No: 9 (double, security) Door Nos. 107, 10713 Lockset: Mortise lockset Function: F84 Classroom Hazardous Markin : Hinges: 1 1/2 pair each leaf Closer: Yes, lea leaf@ 107, none @ 107B Deadbolt: None Push/Pull: None Weatherstripping: None Threshold: None Door Stop: None Smokeseal: None Kickplate: Yes Sides/Hgt: Push side, 12" Special Hardware Coordinator Automatic flushbolts @ inactive leaf Drop leg holder END OF SECTION 08710-12 SECTION 08850 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Insulated Glass FEB 21 2012 4:54 pyi B. Single pane glazing Cih Clerk ., C. Safety glazing Iowa, ova D. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 08100 -Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 08410 -Aluminum Storefront. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002. C. ASTM C 1036 -Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. D. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass --Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2004. E. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005. F. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 2001. G. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997. H. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2004. 1. GANA (GM) -GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004. J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2009 IBC code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 08850-1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATIONMEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. L08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS FILED 2.01 GLASSMATERIALS FEH V 2012 t a� A. Manufacturers: y s City Clerk 1. Interpane Iowa city, Iowa 2. Cardinal Glass 3. Viracon 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Fireglass 6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Clear Float Glass: Clear, heat strengthened. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type 1, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048. 3. Thickness as required for spans and loads, 1/4" minimum. C. Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type 1, transparent flat, Class I clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) and ASTM C 1048. 2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 3. Thickness as required for spans and loads, 1/4" minimum. 4. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code. a. Glazed lites in doors except fire doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors. 09850-2 c. Glazed borrow lights. 2.02 GLASS TYPES A. Manufacturers: 1. Any of the manufacturers listed under Glass Materials. B. Insulated Glass Units (Type 1): Double pane with low e 1. Outer Pane: 1/4" PPG Solarban 70 XL Low -E #2 2. 1/2" air space 3. Inner Pane: 1/4" clear glass a. Winter U -Value: 0.28 b. Summer U -Value: 0.26 c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27 d. Shading Coefficient: 0.32 FILED e. Relative Heat Gain (BTU/hr-ft2): 67 f. Light to Solar Gain: 3.37 FFH 212012 g. Visible Light Transmittance: 64% 4`.'S'7 Prat h. Total Solar Transmittance: 24% �t�"c ' i. Total Solar Reflectance (outside): 52% j. Ultraviolet Transmittance: < I% k. Nominal thickness: 1.019 inch. I. Labeling; permanently label each piece of glazing. in. Tempered safety glazing at locations as required by Code C. Monolithic Glass Units (Type 2): Single pane glazing 1. 1/4" clear float glass, or as required for loads and spans 2. Tempered as required at non -fire rated hazardous locations as required by code. a. Permanently label safety glazing D. Laminated Single Pane Glazing: 1. 9/16" laminate - 1/4" clear, 0.030" Artic Snow (2165) colored PVB, 1/4" clear glass 2. Labeling; permanently label each piece of glazing 2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color, non -skinning. B. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non -staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 1. Comply with manufacturer's requirements at fire -rated glazing. 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option Il. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; inch size; black color. 08850 - 3 Manufacturers: a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 -Product Requirements. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION- EXTERIORIINTERIOR DRYMETHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INSTALLATION- INTERIOR WETIDRYMETHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from comers. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line. E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop withsealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge. 3.05 CLEANING FILED A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. FER al 2n1Z 4'ClClerk I C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. lawaziry, town 08850-4 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Exterior locations: I. I" insulated glazing, tempered in locations as required by code B. Interior entry vestibule I. 1 " insulated glazing, tempered in locations as required by code C. Interior door lites I. Single pane, tempered in locations as required by code D. Divider panel at south side of operable partition and above operable partition 1. Laminated glazing 2. Silicone but glaze END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 "L'M P Io AJ acclerk 08850-5 SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Metal channel ceiling framing. B. Gypsum wallboard. C. Joint treatment and accessories. D. Textured finish system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals FILED FEB 21 2012 y:SR PM Ciry (perk Iowa Cuy, Iowa B. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing. C. Section 06114 -Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of wall -mounted equipment. D. Section 07212 -Board and Batt Insulation: Acoustic insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG -971) B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process; 2004a. C. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002. D. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2004a. E. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2001. F. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2004. G. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2004a. H. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2004. I. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2004. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2004. K. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000. 09250- 1 L. GA -600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. FILED C. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. FEB 21 201Z D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing `I C CrY,l rk compliance with requirements. IuwaGUY� lows 1.65 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with ASTMC 840. Comply with requirements of GA -600 for fire -rated assemblies. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. Clark Steel Framing Systems: www.clarksteel.com. 2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com. 3. Marino -Ware: www.marinoware.com. 4. As approved by Architect. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Furring: Hat -shaped sections, depth of 7/8 inch, 1 1/4" width 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers 1. G -P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com/gypsum. 2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Regular Type: a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 5/8 inch. c. Edges: Tapered. C. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut. 1. Application: Gypsum board within 6'-0" of a water source. 09250-2 2. Core Type: Regular, as indicated. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Edges: Tapered. 2.03 FIBERGLASS FACED BOARD MATERIALS A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: (Toilet Room walls to recieve tile) 1. "DensShield" tile backer as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific or equal. 2. Gypsum panels with moisture -resistant core and coated inorganic fiberglass mat on front, back and long edges. 3. Mold resistance: 10 per ASTM D 3273. 4. 5/8" thickness FILED B. Non -tile finish. FEY 2 C. Provide fiberglas mesh at joints. +!.S'7 ,�. 'j �012 D. Non corroding fasteners Ic��y, ry o `�wa E. Plastic corner bead, casing bead, and trims as required 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 3 inch. B. Acoustic Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board. C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. (Provide plastic at shower ceiling) 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. D. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. I. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready -mixed vinyl -based joint compound. E. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex -based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish. F. Screws: ASTM C 954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. G. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Hat Channels: Wire tie hat channels to steel joists. Run perpendicular to joists. Space at 24" oc. C. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, 09250-3 and hardware. Comply with Section 06114 for wood blocking. 3.03 ACOUSTICACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. FILED B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing FLt3 `L 1201 members. W" 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 4:n W" 3. In non -fire -rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and Iowa l Iowa rough -in boxes. 3.04 GYPSUM BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single -Layer Non -Rated: Install gypsum board inmost economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing. C. Gypsum Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing members or other solid backing. D. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with sealant. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIMAND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. 2. At exterior soffits, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions. 3. At each side above door openings. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats ofjoint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. B. Spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated to achieve Level 5 finish as indicated in schedule. C. Gypsum Board to have smooth finish. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in IO feet in any direction. G119WIEl 3.08 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view. B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry. C. GA -214, Level 5 with smooth finish: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive paint finish. END OF SECTION FILED FE'6 21 2012 LI: 5k PM lowa City. . lower 09250-5 SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Tile for wall applications. FILED B. Coated glass mat backer board as the substrate. FF -f 21 2012 C. Ceramic accessories. Iowa ;ry5:55 Pceri k j D. Ceramic trim. a', lo{PA E. Non -ceramic, metal trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 04810 -Masonry Assemblies C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2009. 1. ANSI Al 08. la - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2005. 2. ANSI A108.1 b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar, 1999 (112005). 3. ANSI A 108.1c -Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet -Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry -Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (112005). 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005). 5. ANSI A 108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex -Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005). 6. ANSI Al 08.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (R2005). 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (112005). 8. ANSI A 108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (R2005). 9. ANSI A 108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (R2005). 10. ANSI A 108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (R2005). 11. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water 09300- 1 Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (82005). 12. ANSI A 118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (112005). B. TCNA (HB) -Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; 2011. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. FILED B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. FEB 21 2012 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, y:55 M junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic C'ry city, Iowa Cary, I wa accessories, and setting details. D. Samples: 2 samples of manufacturer's range of color selections, and 2 samples of tile material of selected tile colors. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A1 18 Series on site. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATIONMEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products of each type by the same manufacturer. 1. American Olean 2. Dal -Tile Corporation 3. Summitville Tiles, Inc B. Porcelain Tile Type A: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. "Cliff Point", colorbody porcelain as manuf. by Daltile 2. 12 x 12 size 09300-2 3. 5/16" thickness 4. Colors: No patterns a. Mens; Color A b. Womens; Color B c. Color as selected by Architect from manuf full range. 5. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 6. C.O.F.:.60 wet; .70 dry FILED 7. Edges: Cushioned. 8. Surface Finish: Unglazed. FF92 X012 9. Trims: .l; 54 ?M a. Inside Corners: Schlutter metal edge City clerk d low" C'4 b. Outside corners: Schlutter metal edge 4-3 c. Exposed edge (Top and side): Schlutter metal edge d. Base: Schluter metal edge, fill joint to floor with sealant. 2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Non -Ceramic Trim: Satin natural anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1 Applications: Use in the following locations: a. Open edges of wall tile. b. Wall comers; inside and outside. 2 Manufacturer: a. Schluter -Systems: www.schluter.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.03 ADHESIVE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1 W.R. Bonsai Co. 2 Bostik, Inc. 3 Laticrete 4 Mapei Corporation. 5 Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, Latapoxy 300, thinset bond type. 2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS A. N.anufacturers: 1 W.R. Bonsai Co. 2 Bostik, Inc. 3 Laticrete. 4 Mapei Corporation 5 Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Tiin-set Mortar; Laticrete 254, Platinum Multipurpose Thin -set Mortar as manufactured by Laticrete or equal. Polymer fortified latex-portland cement. 2. In accordance with ANSI A118.4 3 Antimicrobial protection 4, 10 year warranty 2.05 GROUTMATERIALS 09300-3 A. Manufacturers: 1. Laticrete International, Inc: www.laticrete.com 2. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com FILED 3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 4. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. FEB 21 2012 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. y.5q eA c;tx Cicrk , B. Standard Grout (Type 1): Iowa LAY. 10'�a 1. Laticrete SpectraLOCK PRO grout, as manufactured by Laticrete or equal. 2. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded, meeting performance requirements of ANSI A118.3, epoxy grout. 3. Antimicrobial product protection to inhibit growth of mold and mildew. 4. Stain resistant. 5. Color: as selected. 2.06 THIN-SETACCESSORYMATERL9LS A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI Al 18.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced, 5/8 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. B. Sealant: Neutral cure silicone sealant, in accordance with ASTM C-920 and ASTM C-794 1. Laticrete Latasil Tile and Stone Sealant 2. 25% movement capabilities. 3. Color; to match grout colors PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI Al 08.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry -set mortar to a featheredge. 3.03 INSTALLATION- GENERAL A. Install file and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through 09300-4 A 108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form comers and bases neatly. Align floorjoints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in the size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Install non -ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. FILED F. Sound the after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. G. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. -65 2 1 2��2 ��5 PM H. Allow the to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. i u'& Caerk aR lo_ W_a_ I. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION- WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W244. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION 09300-5 SECTION 09510 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. FILED B. Acoustical units. FEB 2 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS }; gy M 012 A. Section 013000 -Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals lu �_Ciry,ity 1 wa B. Section 15850 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling. C. Section 16510 - Interior Luminaires: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 635 -Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings; 2004. B. ASTM C 636 -Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels; 2004. C. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 09510- 1 1. 08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide full size units equal to 2% percent of amount installed, or two (2) unopened carton of tile, whichever is greater, for each type of tile specified, for Owner's use in maintenance of project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT -l: Gypsum Board panels with vinyl surface, with the following characteristics: 1. Product: Gypsum Panel #3260 by USG, or equal FILED 2. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inches. FB 2 1 2012 4. Light Reflectance: 77 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. q 55 QM 5. NRC Range: 65 to 75, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. city ciclk 6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 10WaCu '9?q. 7 Edge: Square. 8. Surface: 2 mil thick, white vinyl facing with embossed stipple pattern. 9. Suspension System: Exposed grid Type 1. 2.02 SUSPENSIONSYSTEM(S) A. Suspension Systems -General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, splices, and perimeter moldings as required. B. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type 1: Formed galvanized steel, commercial quality cold rolled; intermediate -duty, roll formed aluminum cap, painted finish. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. 4. Product: DONN Environmental ZXA by USG.L 1.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. 2. Provide preformed radius edge comer trim at radius edge block. C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. D. Hold-down Clips: manufacturer's standard PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 09510-2 3.02 INSTALLATION- SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Install in accordance with seismec requirements. C. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. D. Layout system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. E. Install after major above -ceiling work is complete and has been inspected by Arch itect/Engineer. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. F. Hanger wires shall not be supported from metal roof deck. G. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. H. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. I. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. J. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. K. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. L. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. 3. Wall molding shall be screw attached to wall. "Shot" type fasteners are prohibited. 3.03 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above -ceiling work is complete. FILED E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. FM 2 j 2012 F. Cutting Acoustical Units: u' 7ciuyCek 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. Iowa City, Iowa 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding. H. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 09510-3 B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. FILED FEB 21 2012 4:59 CM City Clerk Iowa CIV, Iowa END OF SECTION 09510-4 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOOR AND BASE COVERINGS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Resilient base. B. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS FILF,D FEB 21 2012 lt:S9PM lciwz city-,h•x;. A. Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals B. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. C. Section 16141 - Wiring Devices: Electrical floor cover plates for installation of resilient flooring specified in this section. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E648 -Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1. B. ASTM F710 -Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2008. C. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008. D. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002. E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements; electronic submittals. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. B. Keep boxed materials and adhesives under shelter and from freezing, in accordance with manufacturer's requirements 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a 09650-1 temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch and 2 1/2" heights as scheduled. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. FILED 4. Color: as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard. 5. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. FEB 21 2012 6. Manufacturers: '4'. S9 c9A a. BurkeMercer Flooring Products rk Iowa v' Iowa b. Flexco c. Roppe Corp d. Mannington e. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No. 1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51. B. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring. C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust -free, and are ready to receive resilient base. D. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. E. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces. F. Verify that concrete sub -floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 09650-2 3.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal comers. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.03 CLEANING A. At completion and when sufficient time has elapsed to permit proper adhesion, make thorough inspection of entire installation. 1. Replace all loose and cracked materials and any other materials that are stained or otherwise defective. 2. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 4:S1P City CiV Iowa City, IawA 09650-3 SECTION 09685 CARPET TILE FILED PART 1 GENERAL FEB 212012 i"S 9 PM 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES City Clerk I0A'°-City, Iowa A. Walk -Off Carpet Tile, fully adhered L02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2010e1. B. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009. C. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2002. D. CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. E. CRI (GLC) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Product Categories for Carpet; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. F. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition. G. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. D. Submit two, 12 inch long samples of edge strip. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS. Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern installed. 09685-1 L06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years experience. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Walk-Off Carpet Tile Type 1: 1. "Traverse" modular as manufactured by Mannington, color as selected by Architect a. Tile Size: 24 x 24 b. Installation: Monolithic c. Construction: Tip-Sheared Tufted Loop d. Face Fiber: 100% Type 6,6 Nylon FILED e. Dye Method: Solution/Yarn FEB 21 2012 f. Gauge: 5/32 ,-f, 54 g. Stitches per Inch: 9 c+ry Clerk h. Tufted Yarn Wgt: 38 oz Iowa City, Iowa i. Pile Thicknes: 0.142 j. Primary Backing: 100% synthetic k. Secondary Backing: Infinity RE Modular 1. CRI Green Label Plus ID m. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. n. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test"). o. NBS Smoke Chamber Test, ASTM E 662; less than 450 p. Electrostatic propensity Test, AATCC 134; <3.OKV q. Warranty 1) Limited 15 year ColorSafe Bleach Resistant Warranty 2) Limited 15 year XGUARD Stain Resistant warranty 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Rubber, matching color. C. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet tile manufacturer, compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet tile. 09685-2 C. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub -floor surfaces. D. Cementitious Sub -floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub -floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. D. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. E. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. F. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. G. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. J. Set tile under thresholds. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 Y,• sY en City Clerk Iowa may, Iowa 09685-3 SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Surface preparation. FEB 2 12012 B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. 41, sq pbl C IowaC Cleric C. Surfaces to be finished are indicated in this section and on the Drawings, ry, i0wa 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04852 - Stone Masonry Veneer; Graffiti/Water repellent coating B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop -primed items. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. C. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Master Painters and Decorators Association; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system (copy of relevant MPI Manual page is acceptable). 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed. C. Certification by manufacturer that products comply with Contract Documents and are compatible with applicable substrates and with each other. D. Samples: Submit three paper "drop" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. 1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen. 2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available. 3. Semi -Transparent Stain; submit sample on 6' long siding/trim board to be used. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 09900- 1 F. O&M Manuals; submit mix formula and base for each color. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. B. Material Safety Data Sheets: At project site maintain file of MSDS sheets for each product used; become familiar with and follow manufacturer's stated application and safety requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING FILED A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand FEB 21 2012 code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and y:55 P«_ instructions for mixing and reducing. C I Cleric Iowa Croy, lowaC. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 -Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each color and type; store where directed. C. Label each container with color, type, texture, and mix formula in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions. B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. C. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions 09900-2 will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for substitutions. D. Paints: in order to define requirements for quality, grades, and etc., material specifications are based upon the products of Sherwin Williams. Products of other manufacturer's, complying with drawings, specifications, and referenced manufacturer/brand may be acceptable, including: 1. Duron, Inc. 2. ICI Paints. 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. FILED 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 5. Diamond Vogel. FEB 21 2012 E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. sf PM Cily Clerk 2.02 MATERIALS - GENERAL lows %_Lon A. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D --National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically: 1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum. 2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum. 3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum. 4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Paints and Coatings: Provide products listed in Master Painters Institute Approved Product List, current edition available at www.paintinfo.com, for specified MPI Categories, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide ready mixed paints and coatings, except field -catalyzed coatings. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. Z03 PAINT SYSTEMS A. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats) as defined in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, except as otherwise indicated. B. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide Custom Grade system. C. Where sheen is not specified or more than one sheen is specified, sheen will be selected later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line. D. Provide colors as directed by Architect. 1. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 2. Paint Colors a. Stain Color A Banyan Brown; Cedar Panel Siding, battens, and edge trim 09900-3 b. Stain Color B Redwood; Accent band Trim, interior at 104/104 c. Stain Color C Crossroads; T&G Car Siding, cedar trim d. PT -1 General wall and ceilings; e. PT -2 Accent wall color f. PT -3 Accent wall color A. GALVANIZED STEEL I. Semi -Gloss Finish 2. 1 st Coat: S -W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series a. (24 mils dry) 3. 2nd Coat:S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series / B60V25 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series / B60V25 a. (2.5 - 3 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces a. Misc. galvanized metal items b. Fireplace lintel c. HM doors and frames B. METALS 1. Semi -Gloss Finish 2. 1 st Coat: S -W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series a. (2-4 mils dry) 3. 2nd Coat:S-W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45-150 series 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45-150 series a. (1.5 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Misc. metal items 09900-4 g. PT4 HM Frame h. PT -5 HM Door 2.04 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. METALS - GALVANIZED I. Gloss Finish, alkyd 2. 1st Coat: S -W Galvite HS FILED a. (24 mils dry) 3. 2nd Coat:S-W Pro Industrial Industrial Enamel, B54Z-200 Series FEB 21 2012 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Industrial Enamel, B54Z-200 Series µ'SC Pal. a. (2.2-3.5 mils dry per coat) . Clerk City Clerk I°waCUJ, 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Misc. galvanized items at exterior; including: 1) Exposed gas piping b. Galv. Glue -Lam Timber connections, and galv. entry sign fabrication to remain unfinished B. WOOD - SEMI -TRANSPARENT STAIN 1. 1 st Coat: S -W Exterior Polyurethane Semi -Transparent Stain 2. 2nd Coat:S-W Exterior Polyurethane Semi -Transparent Stain 3. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Interior/Exterior cedar T&G siding, trim, and cedar plywood type A siding panels. 2.05 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. GALVANIZED STEEL I. Semi -Gloss Finish 2. 1 st Coat: S -W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series a. (24 mils dry) 3. 2nd Coat:S-W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series / B60V25 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Waterbased Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series / B60V25 a. (2.5 - 3 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces a. Misc. galvanized metal items b. Fireplace lintel c. HM doors and frames B. METALS 1. Semi -Gloss Finish 2. 1 st Coat: S -W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series a. (2-4 mils dry) 3. 2nd Coat:S-W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45-150 series 4. 3rd Coat: S -W Pro Industrial Precatalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, K45-150 series a. (1.5 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces: a. Misc. metal items 09900-4 C. GYPSUM BOARD - WALLS 1. Semi -gloss Finish 2. 1st Coat: S -W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B1 1 W900 a. (4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) 3. 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Low VOC Semi -gloss, B31 series 4. 3rd Coat: S -W ProGreen 200 Low VOC Semi -gloss, B31 series a. (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces a. Interior gypsum board walls. D. GYPSUM BOARD - CEILINGS 1. Eggshell Finish 2. 1st Coat: S -W Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, BI I W900 a. (4 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) 3. 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Low VOC Egg -shell, B31 series 4. 3rd Coat: S -W ProGreen 200 Low VOC Egg -shell, B31 series a. (4 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) 5. Provide finish on the following surfaces a. Interior gypsum board bulkhds, and ceilings FILED FEB 21 2012 Y: 67 fM City Clerk j IOWA -city, IOWA E. CEDAR DECKING/GLUE LAMINATED TIMBERS 1. Factory Prefinished, refer to 06150 Wood Decking and 06181 - Glued -Laminated Structural Units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE — SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Paint all exposed surfaces except where indicated not to be painted or to remain natural; the term "exposed" includes areas visible through permanent and built-in fixtures when they are in place. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on the Drawings, and as follows: 1. If a surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in the same manner as similar surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings the same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Paint surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of the permanent item. 4. Paint back sides of access panels and removable and hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Finish top, bottom, and side edges of exterior doors the same as exposed faces. 6. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Paint shop -primed mechanical and electrical items occurring in finished areas. 8. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 9. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets with flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers, grilles, or louvers. 10. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. 11. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment 09900-5 before installing equipment C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Any voice/data cabling 2. Items fully factory -finished unless specifically noted; factory -primed items are not considered factory -finished. FILED 3. Items indicated to receive other finish. 4. Items indicated to remain naturally finished. FEB 21 2012 5. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of 4: 69PM� ry Cici� equipment. Iowa city, 6. Brick, precast concrete, integrally colored plaster. 7. Polished and brushed stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead. 8. Acoustical materials. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Reportany condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop -applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials; report incompatible primer conditions and submit recommended changes for Architect's approval. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: I. Plaster and Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. S. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. E. Measure the ph factor of concrete, masonry, and mortar before starting any finishing process, using the method specified in MPI Architectural Painting Manual. 1. Report results in writing to Architect before starting work. 2. If results of test indicates need for remedial action, provide written description of remedial action. If a different primer or paint systems is required, state the total cost of the change. Do not proceed with remedial action or change without receiving written authorization from Architect. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces as recommended by paint coating manufacturer's specific preparation methods or treatments and as specified in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and as follows for the applicable surface and coating; if multiple preparation treatments are specified, use as many as necessary for best results; where the Manual references external standards for preparation (e.g. SSPC standards), prepare as specified in those standards. B. Coordinate painting work with cleaning and preparation work so that dust and other contaminants do not fall on newly painted, wet surfaces. C. Surface Appurtenances: Prior to preparing surfaces or finishing, remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixtures, light fixture trim, escutcheons, machined surfaces, fittings, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 1. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before preparation and finishing. 11iiLhII1 2. After completing painting in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. E. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra -sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. G. Existing walls/ceiling to be painted: I . Remove all existing coatings that are loose or exhibit surface defects. Sand out/fill areas or exposed edges of existing finish 2. All existing misc. anchoring components, nails, screws, expansion anchors, hangars, etc. shall be removed by contractor from existing exposed surfaces. All existing or new holes, cracks, or otherwise damaged wall surfaces shall be patched and/or repaired to match existing surfaces prior to application of new finishes. FILED 3. Remove all existing adhesivves , including those from markerboards that have been removed. FEgl 12012 3.04 APPLICATION •f:s PM L,,ry Clerk A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as specified or Iowa City, Iaa3 recommended by MPI Manual, using the preparation, products, sheens, textures, and colors as indicated. 1. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. B. Do not apply finishes over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film; do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Use applicators and methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied and according to manufacturer's instructions. I . Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied; use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted; produce results free of visible brush marks. 2. Roller Application: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Application: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 4. Where application method is listed in the MPI Manual for the paint system that application method is required; otherwise any application method recommended by manufacturer for material used and objects to be painted is acceptable. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate; provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by manufacturer. I. Number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 3. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 09900-7 E. Apply finish to completely cover surfaces with uniform appearance without brush marks, runs, sags, laps, ropiness, holidays, spotting, cloudiness, or other surface imperfections. 1. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material recommended by manufacturer, unless the surface has been prime coated by others; where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear, recoat primed and sealed surfaces to ensure finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. 2. Apply first coat to surface that has been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 3. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by FILED manufacturer. 4. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky FEB 21 2012 under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the 4t s y tv\ undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. clurk Iowa city, Ioµ- 5. If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce a smooth, even surface, sand between coats. 6. Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 7. Stippled Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to even, fine texture; leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; back roll final coat to achieve a uniform surface. F. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. G. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1. Remove hardware from doors prior to painting and reinstall after painting is completed. 2. Touch-up factory prime coat as required. Verify that top bottom and edges are primed 3. Finish coat both faces, top, bottom, and edges of doors, including in top and bottom channel of interior doors. H. Interior concrete and masonry surfaces; block filler shall be roll applied, or spray applied and back-rolled. I. Dark and deep colors; Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many as required for complete hide and uniform appearance. J. Whenever necessary to obtain a uniform finish/sheen, a whole wall shall be refinished rather than spot finishing damaged or unsatisfactory areas. K. All data cabling, including concealed or above ceiling, shall be protected from paint overspray or installed after painting is completed. Paint on data cabling voidsthe manufacturer's warranty. Any data cabling with paint on them shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 CLEANINGAND PROTECTION A. Collect waste material which may constitute afire hazard, place inclosed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from site. C. Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect. D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 09900-8 E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in MPI Manual. F. Painting Equipment is to be cleaned in Contractor furnished receptacles with waste being properly disposed. The waste is not to be poured down the sanitary sewer, storm sewer, or poured out on the ground. Any costs incurred by the Owner for clean-up will be charged to the Contractor. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 1012 YX59 pM City clerk Io CUx Iowa 09900-9 SECTION 10170 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01SECTIONINCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES FILED FEB 21 2012 Y:591 PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Ampco Products, Inc 2. Accurate Partitions Corp. 3. Global Partitions. 4. Bobrick.: 5. Santana Products Co., Inc 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded, homogeneous, high density polyethelyne polymer (HDPE) panels, doors, and pilasters, floor -mounted headrail-braced. I. Color: as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. B. Urinal Screens: Solid molded, homogeneous, high density polyethelyne polymer (HDPE) panels and end pilasters. Continuous bracket at wall, 6 inch floor mounted pilaster, headrail-braced. C. Provide stainless steel heat sink strips as standard to bottom of all doors and panels. D. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 10170-1 10170-2 2. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch. 3. Height: Panels 55 inch, Pilasters 82 inch. 4. Thickness of Pilasters: 1 inch. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 in high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow chrome plated steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti -grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Pilaster Brackets: Satin stainless steel, min. 20 ga., min 3 inch height. D. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, satin stainless steel. E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. FILED 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through -bolts and nuts; tamper proof, stainless steel. FEB 21 2012 F. Hardware: Satin stainless steel: `1' S9 ?M City clerk I. Pivot hinges, gravity ty type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. Iowa City, Iowa 2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. a. Latch shall comply with ADA requirements at accessible compartments. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Report any unsatisfactory substrate conditions to General Contractor. Any unsatisfactory substrate conditions shall be corrected prior to proceeding with work. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 10170-2 B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out -swinging doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 C1ryF.C`-lerk bwk 10170-3 SECTION 10180.01 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Toilet Room Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810 -Unit Masonry Assemblies. 1.03 REFERENCES FILED FEB E 12012 'jT Pm ivy Clerk Iowa Cuy, Iowa A. ATBCB ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; 2004. B. ASTM A 240/A 240M -Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. 2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. 3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing products of the types specified in this section. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ADAAG requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Factory -apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight -exposed surfaces after finishing of products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In order to define requirements for quality, function, sizes, and materials, specifications are based upon the products of ASI -American Specialties. Products of the following manufacturers, complying with requirements of drawings and specifications will be acceptable: 1. Bobrick 2. Bradley 10180.01 - 1 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 -Product Requirements. B. Supply all products of this section from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 18-8 alloy. B. Fasteners; ss, tamper resistant head, type as required for wall surface 2.03 TOILETACCESSORIES A. Soap Dispensers 1. Stoko Refresh Foam Soap Dispenser, black, 29591 2. Wall mounted B. Paper Towel Dispenser - Surface Mounted: 1. ASI #0210 2. Surface mounted, holds 525 standard multi -fold or 400 standard c -fold paper towels, 22 ga. FILED type 304 stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish. 3. Locks: Tumbler locks, keyed alike other toilet accessory locks, with two keys for each FEB 21 2n12 lock. 4:Sq Q,& 4. 14 5/8" h x I 1 1/16" w x 4 1/16" d Crty Clerk Iowa C4, Iowa C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal - Surface MIA: 1. ASI #0852 -SH, surface mounted with shelf 2. Door and cabinet fabricated from 22 ga., type 304, stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish. 3. Shelf fabricated from 16 ga., type 304, stainless steel, no.4 satin finish. D. Toilet Paper Holder - Surface Mounted: 1. San Jamar, #R4000TBK, twin 9" JBT 2. Surface mounted, break resistant plastic, 9" JBT roll holder, free -delivery. 12"H x 19"W x 5 1/4" D, 3.125 mandrel, two (2) E. Robe Hook: 1. ASI #8425 2. Fabricated from 11 ga. type 304 stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish. 3. Surface mounted with exposed ss fasteners F. Mop Holder: 1. ASI #8215-3 2. 26" length with three mop holders. 3. Fabricated of one-piece hi -hat channel, 20 ga., type 304 stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish 4. Mop Holder: pivoting spring loaded serrated rubber cam. G. Mirrors Type A: 1. ASI #0600 2. Stainless Steel framed mirror, fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, type 304, 18 ga. with mitered corners welded and polished. All exposed surfaces #4 satin finish. 3. Back of mirror shall be protected by full size shock -absorbing water-resistant filler and full size one piece 20 ga corrosion protected steel 4. 18 ga, corrosion protected steel "H" mounting bracket with tamper resistant locking screws. 5. Mirror, 1/4" thick polished tempered glass with two coats of silver applied. Silver is hermetically sealed by electroplating with a heavy uniform coating of copper. Back of mirror finished and protected with coat of waterproof paint. 10180.01-2 FILED 6. 24"W x 48"H FFA GI 7��2 H. Mirror Type B: Iowa'C Clerk 1. Strasser # 01.223, 30" x32" mirror with square edge wood frame, plate glass mirror I. Hand Dryer 1. Excel #R76 -IC, recessed, automatic sensor activated hand dryer 2. Cover; one piece heavy duty, rib reinforced, die cast zinc alloy, chrome finish, with wall plate 3. Equipped with an air inlet opening on the bottom of the casting and covered with a vandal resistant metal protective grill to prevent the entry of foreign objects. A fixed chrome plated, die-cast zinc air outlet nozzle on the front of the cover shall permit a full flow of warm air when in operation, and shall be protected by a cast alloy grating fixed into the blower housing. 4. All internal parts shall be coated according to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. requirements. 5. Entire mechanism shall be internally grounded. 6. Motor for 60 Hz units shall be capacitor -initiated, brushless type (for longer life and quiet operation) 1/10 H.P. 3450 R.P.M. with self- lubricating bearings. It shall be insulated by a resilient mounting and shall be protected by a self -resetting thermal switch. Motor for 50 Hz units shall be a universal 1/10 H.P. 4200 R.P.M. at rated load with sealed lubricated ball bearings. It shall be insulated by a resilient mounting. Motor is thermally protected. 7. Fan shall be a large, single inlet centrifugal type for maximum capacity, and shall deliver 180 C.F.M. Fan shall be mounted directlyon the motor shaft, and fan and motor unit shall be insulated from dryer with a resilient rubber mounting to obtain maximum dampening effect. 8. The heating element is constructed of Nichrome wire and side mounted on the blower housing, thereby being vandal proof. It shall be protected by an automatic resetting thermostat, which shall open whenever air flow is cut off and shall close when flow of air is resumed. It shall produce an air temperature of 145°F/63°C at a 72°F/22°C ambient room temperature at the outlet. 9. The control assembly is activated by an infrared optical sensor located next to the air outlet. The dryer shall operate as long as hands are moving under the air outlet. There is a 90 second lockout feature, if hands are not removed. 10. Verify voltage with electrical. J. Grab Bars: I. ASI #3500 series with flanges for exposed mounting. 2. Sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings and in schedule. 3. Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from type 304, 18-8 alloy, stainless steel with no.4 satin finish. 4. Tubing: 1-1/2" OD, 18 ga., formed 1-1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end, peened finish. 5. Flange: 3" dia, 1/8" thick, with three countersunk holes for exposed fasteners. 6. Fasteners shall be tamper resistant, stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings. 2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with 10180.01-3 B. Women's Toilet 1. shop drawings. B. Installer's Examination: Toilet Paper Holder 1. Have installer of this section examine conditions under which construction activities of this FILED section are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are 5 ea unacceptable. FEB 21 2012 2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt. ��� k 3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been Iowa Iowa corrected is prohibited. -Civ, 4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of Surface Mtd. Paper Towel Dispenser conditions. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's D. Prep 109 printed installation instructions. B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). C. Co-ordinate fastener type with wall construction. Provide solid wood blocking for support in all stud walls. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight -exposed surfaces 24 hours before final inspection. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION OFINSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities. B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged finishes caused by subsequent construction activities. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Men's Toilet: 1. Soap Disp, Surface mtd 2 ea 2. Toilet Paper Holder 2 ea 3. Grab Bars 36", 18", and 42" length 1 ea 4. Hand Dryer 2 ea B. Women's Toilet 1. Soap Disp, Surface mtd 2 ea 2. Toilet Paper Holder 5 ea 3. Sanitary Napkin Disposal 5 ea 4. Grab Bars, 36", 18", and 42 " length 1 ea 5. Hand Dryer 2 ea C. Kitchen 103, Hand sink 1. Surface Mtd. Paper Towel Dispenser 2 ea. 2. Surface mtd. soap dispenser 1 ca D. Prep 109 1. Robe Hooks 3 ea 10180.01 -4 E. Storage 107: 1. Mop Holder 1 ea. 2. 24" high stainless steel wall protection, 2 sides of mop sink END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 2012 4: SS Pnq City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa I[IIF:iI HWI SECTION 10305 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Manufactured steel box fireplace. B. Insulated chimney flue and associated roof flashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Framed opening for firebox and chimney flue. B. Section 15145 - Plumbing Piping: Gas piping to fire box. C. Section 16155 - Equipment Wiring. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS FILED FEB 21 2012 5 T 'C7%Cay Ge Iowa City, Iowa A. UL 127 - Standard for Factory -Built Fireplaces; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Built-in firebox with direct vent concealed flue; rectangular shape; gas flame and circulating fan. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Fuel: Natural gas specified in Section 15145. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar construction, applicable regulatory agency approvals, electrical characteristics of fan. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions, rough opening sizes for chimney flue, fan size. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that fireplace components meet or exceed UL requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and component installation sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction, and 1.07 REGULATORYREQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for clearances from adjacent materials, chimney height above roof line requirements, and unit UL approval. B. Listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as complying with UL 127. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 10305- 1 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactured Fireplaces: 1. Spark Modern Fires: www.sparkfires.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 DIRECT VENT FIREPLACE A. Direct Vent 6 ft, model #18 as manufactured by Spark Fires 1. Interior dimensions: 72.25"W x 16"H x 16.5"D 2. Exterior dimensions: 81.25"W x 39"H x 22.5"D 3. Gas Type: Natural 4. Gas Connection: 1/2" pipe FILED 5. Efficiency: 80% 6. Venting: Sidewall venting FEB 21 2012 7. Vent: 2 Simpson Duravent Pro GS 6 5/8" dia. ss vent pipe tt,' Cry ? 0, 8. Fan: Thermostat activated 160 cfm erk Iowa City, Iowa 9• Electric: 1IOV fan 10. Glass: Fixed ceramic glass panel 11. Interior color: Satin Black 12. Supply pressure: 10.5" w.c. max, 5.0" w.c. min. 13. ANSI Z21.88 14. Moonstone/Pale rock PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on drawings. B. Verify that proper power supply and fuel source are available. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and UL requirements. B. Install chimney plumb through prepared openings using fire stop spacers. C. Secure chimney in opening framing with appropriate fasteners. D. Carefully cut holes for fan wall switch and grilles. 3.03 TOLERANCES 3.04 SCHEDULES A. 1 req'd at Room B 105 END OF SECTION 10305-2 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES FILED A. Room and door signs. FEB 21 2012 s : 5T P B. Plaque signs @ Restrooms 1o�'C clerk a C. Dimensional Letters 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSUICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ADAAG -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2010. C. Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 10400-1 A. Signage: 1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com. 2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com. 3. ASI Modulex 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADAAG and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. 2.03 SIGN TYPES A. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: As selected by Architect. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color. B. Signage Type A, Plaque Sign, Room Number/Identification sign. 1. "Intouch" Series interior plaque sign as manufactured by ASI Modulex or equal a. 15"H x 8 1/2"W, engraved panel sign with face of PVC/vinyl acetate bonded to 3/8" acrylic mounting plate, with square edges and comers, matte finish, aluminum framed. FILED b. Clear window paper insert, visible area 11" h x 8 1/2" w, 3" header, 1" base c. Provide "tactile" signage, with V letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II FEB 21 7012 braille. 4: Sty PAark d. Screw mounted Iowa City, towa e. Copy for sign to be verifyied with Owner/Architect and to include: 1) Room Name with braille 2. Copy, a. Signage Supplier to provide initial paper room name insert for window. Verify final copy with Owner 3. 4 required a. Room Number Room Name Room A Room B Storage Green Room C. Signage Type B, Plaque Type Sign; Identification Sign. 1. "Intouch" Series exterior plaque sign as manufactured by ASI Modulex or equal a. 8 1/2" H x 8 1/2" W, engraved panel sign with face of PVC/vinyl acetate bonded to 3/8" acrylic mounting plate, with square edges and comers, matte finish, aluminum framed. b. Provide "tactile" signage, with V letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. c. Screw mounted, tamper resistant heads. d. Copy for sign to be verifyied with Owner/Architect and to include: 1) MEN, with universal men symbol and universal HC symbol, braille; 1 ea 2) WOMEN, with universal women symbol and universal HC symbol, braille; 1 ea D. Signage Type C, Exterior Dimensional Letters 1. LPS Series cut metal letters as manufactured by ASI Modulex or equal a. Aluminum material, with black anodized finish 10400-2 2. Arial font, all caps, 6" height 3/4" depth, Flush Mount. a. Copy: TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA 3. Arial font, 4" height, 1/4" depth, flush mount a. Copy A; 3 numbers, to be located at Lodge as directed by Architect b. Copy B; 3 number, to be located at existing Marina as directed by Architect PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. FILED 3.02 INSTALLATION FEB 2 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. q 1 2��2 B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. owa GrY, Io a C. Locate signs to comply with ADA requirements: 1. Verify with Architect and Owner D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. END OF SECTION 10400-3 SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART I GENERAL FILED 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FEB 21 2012 171 : 55 Pm, A. Fire extinguishers. c s c Iowa City, Iowa B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 -Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2010. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide size, material, rough opening, materials, and finish for cabinets. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com. 2. Pyro-Chem: www.pyrochem.com. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. Potter -Roemer. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 -Product Requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. B. Fire Extinguisher FEC -1: 1. Larsen MP Series, Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical 2. Class A, B, and C fires 3. 101b size 10523- 1 C. Fire Extinguisher FEC -2 1. Larsen WC Series, Wet Chemical 2. Meeting K class 3. 2 1/2 gallon 4. Chrome finish 5. Provide wall bracket 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. FEC -1: Larsen "Architectural Series" SS -2409-R6 series 1. Metal: Formed stainless steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal. 2. Cabinet Configuration: 2 1/2" Recessed type, with rolled edge. 3. Sized to accommodate 10 Ib Multi -Purpose fire extinguisher. 4. Interior nominal dimensions: 24" high x 9 1/2" wide x 6" deep 5. Rough Opening: 26 1/8" high x 11 5/8" wide x 4 7/8" deep 6. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside comers and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. 7. Door: Full vision panel with latch, no lock. 8. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick tempered. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. B. FEC -2: Wall mounted fire extinguisher, type K. Provide wall bracket PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install bracket plumb and level, max 48" inches from finished floor to operating mechanism of door and/or fire extinguisher, and max 27" from finished floor to bottom of exposed edge. B. Secure rigidly in place. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. FEC -1; cabinet and extinguisher, 2 ea. B. FEC -2; extinguisher, wall mounted, 1 ea. FILED FEB 21 7012 'F'Sa ile City Cle k Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 10523-2 f1 B10 11WI SEf� ll CUSTOM FABRICATED FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES FILED A. Custom Fabricated Stainless Steel Equipment, including: FEB 2 1. Stainless steel counter with integral sinks. 12912 �rrI ah 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSio City Cl Iowa �, _ A. Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealing. B. Section 16155 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003. B. ASTM C1036 -Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006. C. ASTM C1048 -Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass --Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2004. D. NEMA LD 3 - High -Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. G. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; National Fire Protection Association; 2008. H. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication & Installation Guidelines; 2001 I. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on appliances; indicate configuration, sizes, materials, finishes, locations, and utility service connection locations, service characteristics, and wiring diagrams. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Operation Data: Provide operating data for the specified equipment. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's 11400- 1 name and registered with manufacturer. F. Shop Drawings: 1. Custom Fabricated Equipment; Provide shop drawings indicating equipment layout, construction details, edge conditions, and punching required for coordination with Food Service Equipment/Accessories. 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of standard products of the type specified. 1.07 REGULATORYREQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for utility requirements. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (EAUED) as suitable FILED for the purpose specified and indicated. C. ASME Boiler Code: For steam generating and steam heated equipment, comply with ASME FEB 21 2012 requirements and provide inspections, stamps, and registration of equipment with the National ,f, 5q Pel Board. City Ce Iowa lowaCity, D. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable NSF standards and recommended criteria. Provide each principal item of food service equipment with a "Seal of Approval" by NSF. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent damage. B. Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with location and placement of utilities. Coordinate characteristics of utilities with requirements of food service equipment. B. Schedule work of this section to follow immediately the installation of utilities. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for replacement or repair of scheduled equipment, refrigerant and compressors, including disconnection and removal of defective unit, and connection of replacement unit. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this section. B. Installation Accessories: Provide all rough -in hardware, supports and connections, attachment devices, closure trim, and accessories required for complete installation. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sealant: 1. General: Dow Corning, Silastic or GE RTV-108 silver color; Type S Grade NS, Class 25. Comply with FDA Regulation 21 CFR 177.2600 for food contacts areas. 11400-2 FILED FEB 21 2012 B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666 Type 304 commercial grade, No. 4 finish. 4' ty PIA Clerk 2.03 PLUMBING MATERIALS Iowa City, Iowa A. General: Where exposed or semi -exposed, provide bright chrome plated brass or polished stainless steel units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. B. Pressure Regulating Valves: Verify water pressure available in the building and furnish pressure regulating valves for all items of equipment required to operate at a specific pressure. Where exposed, valves shall be chromium plated. C. Piping: Install horizontal piping at the highest possible elevation and not less than 6" above floor; conceal piping; no tool marks or more than one visible thread at exposed fittings. D. Interconnections: Interconnect equipment utility lines between equipment sections to single connection point; materials consistent with specifications. 2.04 FABRICATION -CUSTOM FABRICATED STAINLESS STEEL EQUIPMENT A. See drawings for dimensions and configurations; ensure proper fit by taking field measurements prior to fabrication. B. Quality Standards 1. Provide fully shop assembled units complying with SMACNA "Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Guidelines" and NSF 2, unless specifically indicated otherwise; all components of stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Include necessary reinforcing, bracing, welding, uprights and crossbracing as required. Construct tops, shelves, and panels from a single metal sheet where possible. 3. Grain of polishing; Run in the same direction on all horizontal and vertical surfaces. Where tables join at angles, terminate in a mitered edge. C. Top: 14 gage, seamless, stainless steel. Miter, weld, grind smooth, and polish all joints. 1. Edges: Formed up into an integral 3" high rolled rim, 1/4" cove construction. 2. Backsplashes: Formed up into an integral backsplash, 8" high with 1/2" radius cove, 2" return with top sloped at 45 deg, and V return leg for "Z" -clip. Continuously weld rolled edges abutting splashes. Close all exposed ends. 3. Secure to wall with with 4" long, 14 ga stainless steel "Z" -clip at 24" oc. 4. Pitch drainboards min. 1/4" / ft, V max. pitch. D. Sinks: Stainless steel, 14 gauge stainless steel, fully coved and continuously welded, ground and polished. 1. Pitch sink bottoms to drain openings, die form drain openings and depress below the sink bottom. 2. Multiple sinks; Construct from one large sink, weld in V double-wall partitions between sinks to form fully coved sink, fully welded front with no indentations. 3. Where sinks are set into countertops provide separate sink supports stud bolted to bottom of counter top; at minimum, provide ss angles, 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches by 1/8 inch. 4. Provide 16 ga. ss support bracket for waste twist handle. 5. Provide spray -on sound deadening on bottom of sink, not visible from front.. E. Framework: 1. 1 "x4"xl" 14 ga galvanized steel channel located at legs, sink edges, and field joints, max 5'-0" spacing, with inverted 14 ga stainless steel hat channels. 2. Secure tops to framework with welded ss studs, lock washers, and cap nuts. F. Legs: 11400-3 I . Legs; 16 ga stainless steel; 1-5/8" diameter, with stainless steel gussets and adjustable feet. 2. Crossbracing; same as legs. Top at 10" above finished floor UNO. Extend crossbracing to rear leg, or to wall as indicated. Provide flanged foot with holes and secure to wall with ss fasteners. 3. Where vibration or oscillations is anticipated anchor in floor with 1/4 inch stainless steel pins. G. Under Shelves: I . 16 ga. stainless steel. 2. Edges turned down edge, 1 1/2" with 1/2" angled return. At walls and and cabinets provide FILED 1/2" radius cove with ends turned up 2". 3. Notch shelves at legs. Reinforce underside of shelves with ss framing as required to FEB 0j2 prevent sag. 21 702 4. Pully weld shelf to legs/crossbracing, grind and polish. city Clerk 5. 60" max. spacing between supports. Iowa Civ, town H. Misc. I. Punch holes in backsplash/tops for pre -rinse units, faucets, vacuum breakers, and misc equipment as required. 2. Sound deaden tops, shelves, sinks, and troughs. I. Isolate rotating or reciprocating machinery to prevent noise and vibration. J. Provide indirect drain piping from equipment to terminate over nearest waste receptor. K. Accommodate site installation of other services or equipment. 2.05 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required location. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Insulate to prevent electrolysis between dissimilar metals. C. Provide sealant to achieve clean joint with adjacent building finishes and between abutting components. D. Provide angle slip flanges for all pipe penetrations through top of backsplash(s) on stainless steel sinks, tables and counters. E. Welding: 1. Welding and Polishing: Provide continuous welded joints whether on top surfaces or cabinet faces. Welds shall be homogeneous, non -porous, free from pit, cracks, imperfections, discolorations, and shall be accomplished by the neutral gas, shield are method. Welding rod shall be of same composition as material to be welded. 2. Tack and/or plug welding will be acceptable only when specified and shall be of required length and spacing. 11400-4 3. Job site or field welds shall be accomplished as specified above and shall conform to all requirements of a shop weld. 4. Grind all welds smooth, and in the case of stainless steel polish to match the original finish of the material. F. Sealing: Install sealants and gaskets all around units to make joints airtight, waterproof, vermin proof, and sanitary for cleaning purposes. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave with edges flush with faces of materials at joint. At internal corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove of not less than 3/8" radius. Provide sealant filled or Basketed joints up to %" joint width; metal closure strips for welderjoints, with sealant application each side of strips. Anchor gaskets mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove masking or protective covering from stainless steel and other finished surfaces. B. After testing and startup, and prior to Substantial Completion, clean and sanitize food service equipment and leave in condition ready for use. C. Polish glass, plastic, hardware, accessories, fixtures, and fittings. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from damage. FILED 3.05 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE FEB 2 j 2012 4: 5y PM A. STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERCity Clerk Iowa City, Iowa B. General 1. Manufacturer: Custom fabricated. 2. Features: a. Table with undershelf, pass-thru, prep sink, pot and pan sink, and handwash sink; configurations shown on drawings X 24" D x 34" H (working height), all stainless steel construction. b. Top supported by I " X 4" X 1 " galvanized channels; 1/4" cove construction, 4" high backsplash at walls with solid ends, 3" high rolled rim on free sides. c. Legs; 16 gage stainless steel; 1-5/8" diameter, with stainless steel gussets and adjustable feet. Pin to floor. d. Under shelf; 16 ga ss, as indicated on drawings. e. Punch holes in counter and backsplash for plumbing fixtures. Provide chrome plated angle slip flanges for all pipe penetrations through back splash. f Sound deaden top, shelfs, sink, and trough. 3. Installation Requirements: Provide stainless steel 7 clips 24" OC at wall for mounting, and seal backsplash to wall. C. Pass-thru frame/counter: 1. Omit backsplash at pass-thru. Weld, grind smooth, and polish joint between table and pass-thru. Coordinate backsplash and pass-thru with hollow door frame to provide seamless transition. Extend pass-thru past face of wall to face of door frame and provide marine edge. Refer to A510. Return marine edge to wall at ends. Provide solid ends and return at pass-thru. 2. Provide sealant joint between pass-thru and HM door frame D. Pot and Pan Sink 11400-5 I. Features: a. Sink compartments: 3 at 24"W x 20 1/2"D x 12"H. b. Provide 16ga ss support bracket for twist valve operator. c. Sound deaden top, drainboard and sinks. d. Provide chrome plated angle slip flanges for all pipe penetrations through back splash. 2. Accessories: a. Fisher or equal T&S Brass & Bronze, Chicago b. Faucets: Model 3254 with 14" spout and aerator, 4" wrist blade handles. Two (2) units required. Model 2400-2103 wall adapter elbow and model 2200-000 slip joint kits. c. Waste Valve: Model 29033, with flat strainer, rough chrome overflow valve with twist rod handle (3 req'd). E. Vegetable Prep Sink 1. Features: a. Sink compartment: 1 at 14"W x 20 1/2"D x 10"H. Punch sink for basket and strainer, and attachment of garbage disposal b. Punch holes as required for plumbing fixtures 2. Accessories: a. Fisher or equal T&S Brass & Bronze, Chicago b. Faucets: Model 3254 with 14" spout and aerator, 4" wrist blade handles. One (1) unit required, with model 2400-2103 wall adapter elbow and model 2200-000 slip joint kits. c. SS basket assembly and strainer 3. Garbage Disposal a. Insinkerator Evolution Excel, or approved equal b. 1 HP, single phase, 120 V, 60 Hz, 10.2 A c. Stainless steel grind chamber and components d. Auto -reverse grind, permanently lubricated upper and lower bearings e. SoundSeal Plus; Anti -vibration mount, quiet collar sink baffle, multi -layer sound limiter insulation f. Multi -grind Plus; Grindshear ring, Tri -action lug system, undercutter disk, and jam -sensor circuit g. Manual reset motor overload protection F. Hand Sink 1. Features a. 12" dia x 5" deep bowl, with overflow b. Punch for drain connection and faucet 2. Accessories a. drain connection with strainer b. Refer to Plumbing drawings for faucet FILED FEB 21 7012 It' �i[ypNerk Iowa. City, Iowa END OF SECTION 11400-6 SECTION 11450 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT FILLL PART 1 GENERAL FEB 2 r 202 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 15145 -Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances. B. Section 16155 -Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 -Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHENAPPLIANCES A. General 1. All Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated. 2. Equipment shall be ADA compliant 3. Manufacturers; specifications indicate manufacturer to indicate quality and requirements. Products of the following manufacturers, meeting plans and specifications will be acceptable: a. General Electric b. Whirlpool c. Fridgidaire d. Hot Point B. Range: GE #JDP42STSS, drop-in electric range, with smooth cooktop. 1. Stainless steel finish 2. 4 burner, glass ceramic cooktop, black. 3. Self-cleaning oven, 4.4 cu ft capacity 11450-1 4. Electronic oven controls 5. Dual element, dual racks, interior oven light. C. Range Hood 1. Broan APEI Series Pro -Style, stainless steel Range Hood. 2. Ducted unit with backdraft damper. Refer to Mechanical drawings for ductwork connections. 3. Washable micromesh aluminum filters 4. Permanently lubricated, dual centrifugal blower resiliently mounted and controled with infinite speed, solid state control. RPM not to exceed 1618. 5. Controls shall be wall mounted, ADA accessible, infinite speed rotary control with memory and separate two -position light switch 6. Air delivery 440 cfm at sound level no greater than 7.0 sones 7. Single 42W GX24Q4 fluorescent light 8. UL listed D. Refrigerator; By Owner (2) E. Microwave; By Owner (2) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough -ins are present and correctly located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor built-in equipment in place. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment. END OF SECTION FILED FEB 21 7012 4 5q CieLerk Icwa Guy, Iowa 11450-2 SECTION 15000 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS FILED PART 1- GENERAL FEB 21 2012 x:55 Pn� 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Iowa A. This section applies to all mechanical work. B. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to all mechanical work. C. Each specification section within their respective Division shall be coordinated with all other sections in that division for related work. D. The project documents contemplate the complete installation of the systems described herein, or shown on the drawings, so that at the conclusion of the construction, the systems will be turned over to the Owner complete and ready for safe, efficient operation. E. The Contractor shall be obliged to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type, which while not mentioned directly herein are obviously essential to the installation and operation of the systems, and which are normally furnished on installations of this type. 1.02 COORDINATION OF WORK A. General: The Contractor shall recognize that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships that must be established within the mechanical and electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. This Contractor shall be responsible for work fitting in place without conflict with other trades, where proper planning could avoid interference. This Contractor shall examine the locations and verify all measurements, distances, elevations and existing conditions before starting work. Because the drawings are diagrammatic and on a small scale, all rises, drops, offsets, etc., have not been shown. The Contractor shall agree to provide and install the necessary piping, fittings, valves, ducts, duct fittings and offsets, and other specialties to suit such conditions without additional cost to the Owner. Mechanical drawings shall not be used for general construction dimensions or for type of material used for general construction. For exact building layout, dimensions and building materials used, Contractor shall refer to Architectural Drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall comply with all State, and local codes and ordinances. B. Contractor shall make application for, obtain and pay for all required permits and certificates of inspection of the work. C. All equipment, materials, and installation procedures shall comply with standards listed within each specification. 15000-1 02012 by FEI D. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. E. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Prepare and submit four (4) copies of operation and maintenance instructions for all mechanical equipment furnished. One copy will remain on record in the Engineer's office. Organize maintenance and operating manual information into suitable sets of manageable FILED size, and bind into individual binders properly identified and indexed (thumb -tabbed). Include emergency instructions, spare parts listing, copies of warranties, wiring diagrams, FEB 21 9(119 recommended "turn -around" cycles, inspection procedures, shop drawings, product data, 4'.51 ? A signed letters of certification of inspection and similar application information. Bind each City c1ak Iuwa City, Iowa manual of each set in a heavy-duty, 3 -ring vinyl -covered binder, and include pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on both front and spine of each binder. 2. Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed content formatted and organized as required by this Section. Engineer will comment on content of operations and maintenance submittals and indicate where revisions or re - submittals are required. Clarify and update reviewed content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. 3. Organization: Organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: a. Title Page, including name and address of project and Owner, and contact information for Contractor, Construction Manager and Architect. b. Table of Contents, including each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. C. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. d. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 4. Format: Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect/Engineer. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. Enable inserted reviewers comments on draft submittals. 15000-2 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 .V:55 0 B. Record Drawings: City Clerk Iowa city, Iowa 1. Provide one (1) set of mechanical drawings marked -up with actual installation locations. Give special attention to the complete and accurate recording of underground conduit, piping and ductwork, other concealed and non -accessible work, branching arrangement and valve location for piping systems, locations of dampers and coils in duct systems, locations of control system sensors and other control devices, and work of change orders where not shown accurately by Contract Documents. C. Contract Document Discrepancies: If Contract Document requirements appear to make it impossible to produce first class work, or should discrepancies appear among Contract Documents, request interpretation before proceeding with work. If Contractor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out work in satisfactory manner. Should conflict occur in or between drawings and specifications, Contractor is deemed to have estimated on more expensive way of doing work unless he shall have asked for and obtained written decision before submission of proposal as to method or materials required. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear any expense of alterations to the building or its appurtenances resulting from the substitution of equipment to that specified in the Contract Documents. E. Review of shop drawings does not release the Contractor from further satisfactory operating responsibilities. Material and equipment shall still be required to meet the requirements of the Construction Documents and shall be approved for final acceptance when construction is completed and all units and systems have been operated, tested, adjusted and balanced to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Should proposed approved alternate equipment involve rearrangement of designed equipment, a complete layout of the area involved shall be submitted by the Contractor, and shall be approved in writing before installation of any such items of equipment. Any additional expense involved shall be a Contractor -borne expense. 1.05 FEES, PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all fees, permits, licenses for services to the building required. Capital facilities utility service charges are to be paid directly by Owner, not part of the Construction Contract. B. The Contractor shall maintain all necessary signal lights and guards against danger and use all proper means for the safety of the public. C. The Contractor shall pay for opening and repairing all pavement cuts. D. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer copies of all fees, permits and licenses required for all mechanical work herein specified before any mechanical work is started. 1.06 AUTOCAD DRAWING FILE REQUESTS A. As an instrument of service to aid in Shop Drawing Submittals, Faros Engineering (FEI) will provide AutoCAD drawing files upon request. The files will be sent upon return receipt of the 'Request for 15000-3 ©2012 by FEI Drawings" agreement signed by an officer of the requesting firm. FEI does not assure that the drawings represent all changes, addenda items, change orders or modifications that may have occurred. The drawings are simply a tool for use in producing shop drawing submittals. 1.07 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION A. General: Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with Electrical Contractor for proper electrical power characteristics to all mechanical equipment which require electrical power connection. Unless specifically shown otherwise Electrical Contractor shall provide all power connections required to provide power to the equipment and Mechanical Contractor shall provide all equipment and electrical wiring required for all start -stop control and safety interlock functions required for all equipment. B. Types of work, normally recognized as electrical but provided as mechanical, specified or partially specified in this section, include but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Motors for mechanical equipment. 2. Starters for motors of mechanical equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. FILED 3. Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of mechanical T21 7012 equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. S1 Pt+\ city clerk 4. Furnish and install all electrical control circuit conduits and wiring and control devices Iowa cuy, lows required to perform the equipment control functions, including float control switches, flow control switches, and similar mechanical/electrical devices provided for mechanical systems. C. Mechanical/Electrical Coordination Schedule: See schedule on drawings for further Mechanical/Electrical coordination requirements. 1.08 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Basic Motor Requirements 1. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motors 1 HP and Larger: Polyphase. 3. Motors smaller than 1 HP: Single-phase. 4. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. 5. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected. 6. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 15000-4 02012 by FEI FILED 8. Enclosure: Open dripproof, unless otherwise indicated. FEB 21 2017 ar sq P,vl B. Polyphase Motors: to IIryL110 City, Iowa 1. Description: NEMA MG -1, medium induction motor. a. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG -1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated. b. Premium Energy -Efficient Design: All motors. C. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have separate winding for each speed. d. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated. e. Bearings: Double -shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. f. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated. g. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motors Used with Reduced -Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control method. 3. Motors Used with Variable -Frequency Controllers: Definite -purpose inverter -fed motors in accordance with NEMA MG -1, Part 31. Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. a. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output. b. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class B insulation. C. Insulation: Class H. d. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to NEMA MG -1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 4. Rugged -Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum service factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings are insulated with non -hygroscopic material. External finish is chemical -resistant paint over corrosion -resistant primer. 5. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to NEMA MG -1: a. Measurement of winding resistance. b. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency. C. Locked rotor current at rated frequency. 15000-5 ©2012 by FEI C. FILED d. High -potential test. e. Alignment. Single -Phase Motors: 1. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one (1) of the following, to suit starting torque and other requirements of specific motor application. FEB 2 i 1012 4, 61 PA icria C.uy, Iowa 2. a. Permanent -split capacitor. b. Split -phase start, capacitor run. C. Capacitor start, capacitor run. Shaded -Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 HP. 3. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt -connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors. 1.09 CONTROL PANEL NAMEPLATE A. General: Mechanical equipment furnished with industrial control panel, as defined by NEC Article 409, shall be provided with a factory installed nameplate with markings as indicated by NEC 409. 10, identifying the following for the equipment electrical power supply. Refer to the Mechanical/Electrical Coordination Schedule for minimum short circuit current rating (SCCR) value. 1. Current, phase to phase. 2. Voltage, phase to phase. 3. Three-phase real power (kW). 4. Three-phase reactive power (kVAR). 5. Short circuit current rating (A). 1.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. General: During handling and installation of work at project site, each Contractor shall clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 1.11 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Owner's operating personnel 15000-6 02012 by FEI present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work. B. Operating Instructions: Conduct a full-day walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and systems. Explain the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems. 1.12 FINAL COMPLETION A. The Mechanical Contractors shall not call for a final completion check until the entire Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and Systems have been installed, adjusted, balanced and in full and complete satisfactory operation. 1.13 FINAL PAYMENT A. Final Payment will not be made until the Contractor has satisfactorily completed all final inspection items. 1.14 GUARANTEE A. The one (1) year guarantee period shall not start until the project is fully completed and the Contractor has received the Final Payment and Certificate of Completion. B. All equipment and all work shall be fully guaranteed, parts, and labor, for one (1) full year from the date of the Certificate of Completion. Repairs made during this period must be fully guaranteed for an additional one (1) year period from the date of repairs. C. The Mechanical Contractor has the full responsibility to guarantee all equipment and work and shall assume full responsibility to repair any equipment at his cost that the manufacturer refuses to guarantee. D. The Owner has the right to order repairs to any equipment or work provided hereon and to charge the Contractor for same if repairs are not made by the Contractor within a reasonable period of time not to exceed 24 hours during an emergency or 72 hours on a noncritical item. FILED PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) FEB 21 2012 PART 3 - EXECUTION ie -:.51 City P� Iowa City, Iowa 3.01 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Painting of exposed mechanical work is specified and performed under other divisions of these specifications. B. Factory finishes, shop priming, and special protective coatings are specified in the individual equipment specification sections. 15000-7 02012 by FEI C. Where factory finishes are provided on equipment and no additional field painting is specified, all marred or damaged surfaces shall be touched up or refinished so as to leave a smooth, uniform finish at the time of final inspection. 3.02 REBATES A. The contractor shall assist the Owner with filing of applicable forms to obtain rebates. This shall include, but not be limited to determination of qualifying materials and furnishing invoices for materials with corresponding quantities. FILED FEB 21 z012 4:s� 4M City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 1001 ©2012 by FEI SECTION 15010 SUBMITTALS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL FILED FEB 21 2012 lJ: sq, P& cuy cterr lows City.towa A. Submittals shall include specially prepared technical data for this project, including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed form for general application to a range of similar projects. B. Submittals shall also include product data which includes standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not specially prepared for this project, but with the designation of selections from among available choices for this project clearly identified. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of Architect/Engineer's review with another. B. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, Subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals. Show Contractors executed review and approval marking and providing space for Architect's/Engineer's "Action" marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned by Architect/Engineer "Without Action". C. Provide Contractor's certification on form, ready for execution, stating that information submitted complies with requirements of contract documents. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear any expense of alterations to the building or its appurtenances resulting from the substitution of equipment to that specified in the Contract Documents. E. Review of submittals does not release the Contractor from further satisfactory operating responsibilities. Material and equipment shall be approved for final acceptance when construction is completed and all units and systems have been operated, tested, adjusted and balanced to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Should proposed approved alternate equipment involve rearrangement of designed equipment, a complete layout of the area involved shall be submitted by the Contractor, and shall be approved in writing before installation of any such items of equipment. Any additional expense involved shall be a Contractor-bome expense. 1.03 SUBMITTAL LIST 15010-1 02012 by FEI A. Submittals shall be submitted for, but not limited to, the items listed in each section of the specifications. Submittals, in addition to those listed, maybe required by the Architect/Engineer. The following submittal register is a summary list of submittals required for the project. FILED FEB 21 7012 Z/r54 Pr1 W City Cl rk Iotsa City, Iowa 15010-2 ©2012 by FEI SUBMITTAL REGISTER SECTION ITEM TRANS # DATE REC. DATE BY A/E RETURNE D 15000 O&M Manuals 15000 Record Drawings 15300 Fire Sprinkler Equipment, Layout Drawings and Calculations 15420 Plumbing Pumps 15440 Plumbing Fixtures & Layout Drawings 15441 Gas -Fired Water Heater 15670 Condensing Units 15783 Energy Recovery Ventilators 15785 Electric Cabinet & Unit Heaters 15790 Air Coils 15820 Furnaces 15890 Ductwork Layout Shop Drawings 15890 Diffusers, Registers & Grilles 15890 Louvers 15990 Test & Balance Report FILED FEB 21 7012 Z/r54 Pr1 W City Cl rk Iotsa City, Iowa 15010-2 ©2012 by FEI SECTION 15251 FILED HVAC INSULATION FEB 21 2012 c: ION'3�,. i:qd PART1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. HVAC insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings, and by requirements of this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. B. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k -value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each HVAC system requiring insulation. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Furnish insulation and materials bearing the manufacturers label. Only mechanics skilled at such work shall apply materials. Insulation and materials shall be by one of the manufacturers listed. Specialty material shall be of the manufacturer indicated or approved equal. Fire and smoke hazard classification ratings on insulation, jacket, and adhesive shall conform to NFPA 255, ASTM E 84, or ITL -723 as follows: 1. Flame Spread Index not exceeding 25. 2. Fuel Contributed not exceeding 50. 3. Smoke Developed Index not exceeding 50. B. Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. C. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of HVAC insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (1) of the following manufacturers: 1. Armacell LLC 2. Dow Chemical Company 3. Einsulation, Inc. 4. Johns -Manville Corp. 5. Keene Corp. 6. Knauf Fiber Glass 15251-1 02012 by FEI 7. Owens -Coming Fiberglass Corp. 1 inch 4 -PCF density fiberglass 8. Rubatex Corp. insulation with fire -resistive ASJ 9. Pittsburg Coming Corp. vapor barrier jacket or 1-1/2 inch E. Thermal Conductivity Average Maximum in Btu-in/hr-ft2 at 75°F Mean Temperature: 1. Fiberglass Board = 0.26. FILED 2. Fiberglass Blanket = 0.30. 3. Fiberglass Preformed Pipe Insulation = 0.26. FEF3 2 I 4. Cellular Glass = 0.30. 2012 5. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular = 0.27. 4t: 5PNS 6. Polyisocyanurate = 0.19. Cit Clerk g Iowa City, Iowa 7. Calcium Silicate = 0.60 @ 500°F. F. Vapor retarder film and tape shall have a maximum permeance of 0.030 perm. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION A. Piping insulation shall be as scheduled below: SYSTEM PIPE SIZE AND INSULATION AND JACKET LOCATION Air Conditioning Coil All above ground piping 1 -inch 4 -PCF density fiberglass Condensate Drain insulation with fire -resistive, ASJ Piping vapor barrier jacket or 1/2 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. 2. Refrigerant Suction Piping in building through 1 inch 4 -PCF density fiberglass Piping 1-1/2 inch insulation with fire -resistive ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1-1/2 inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1-1/2 inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. 3. Refrigerant Suction Piping in building 1-1/2 inch 4 -PCF density fiberglass Piping 2 inch and larger insulation with fire -resistive ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1-1/2 inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1-1/2 inch polyisocyanurate 15251-2 02012 by FEI SYSTEM PIPE SIZE AND INSULATION AND JACKET LOCATION closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. B. All pre -formed fiberglass and elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam pipe insulation shall be provided with self -adhering and self-sealing overlapping flap. C. Insulation of Piping Specialties on Cold Piping Services: Insulate unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, hoses, and expansion joints on cold piping services with flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. Thickness of elastomeric cellular insulation shall be equivalent to thickness of insulation on the piping service as specified in this Section or as shown on the drawings. Insulation shall be sealed to provide a vapor tight barrier. Cold piping services include chilled water systems, and geothermal heat pump water loop systems. D. Insulation Protection: 1. Pipe insulation exposed in finished areas shall be protected with 0.030 inches thick ABS plastic jacketing covers, Ceel-Co 100 Series or approved equal. 2. Pipe insulation exposed to weather or abuse shall be protected with a factory -fabricated aluminum jacket, 0.032 -inch thick. Moisture barrier membrane for insulation exposed to weather shall be 3 -mil thick polyethylene and kraft paper, installed according to manufacturer's recommendations for the application at hand. FILED 2.02 DUCT INSULATION I:11 FEB 21 2012 Duct insulation shall be as scheduled on the drawings and as follows: 7: c; (Q," ry Clek r Iowa Cuy, r INSULATION SYSTEM 1. Low Velocity Unlined 1 -1/2 -inch fiberglass flexible insulation, 1.5-pcf density, with heavy Supply and Return duty FSK vapor barrier. Apply insulation with edges tightly butted Ducts (Duct velocities secure on 15 -inch centers with approved adhesive and pins. Secure below 2000 fpm) joints by overlapping facing or flinch wide strips of same material adhered with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. 2. Outside Air Ductwork Same as low velocity unlined supply and return ducts except 2 -inch thick. 3. Ventilation Air 1 -1/2 -inch fiberglass flexible insulation, 1.5- PCF density, with heavy Ductwork duty FSK vapor barrier. Apply insulation with edges tightly butted secure on 15 -inch centers with approved adhesive and pins. Secure joints by overlapping facing or 4 -inch wide strips of same material adhered with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. 4. Supply Plenums, 1 -1/2 -inch fiberglass rigid insulation, 3- PCF density with heavy duty Relief Air, and Mixed FSK vapor barrier. Apply insulation with edges tightly butted. Secure Air Ducts in on 15 -inch centers with approved adhesive and pins. Secure joints by 15251-3 02012 by FEI FILED SYSTEM INSULATION Equipment Rooms overlapping facing or flinch wide strips of same material adhered with FEB 21 2012 Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. +'.55 f' M. City Clerk iowaCiry,Iowa 5. Exhaust Ductwork 1 -1/2 -inch fiberglass flexible insulation, 1.5- PCF density with heavy from Building Roof or duty FSK vapor barrier. Apply insulation with edges tightly butted. Wall to 10 feet inside Secure on 15 -inch centers with approved adhesive and pins. Secure of building joints by overlapping facing or flinch wide strips of same material adhered with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. 6. Flexible Duct Same as low velocity unlined ductwork. Connections B. Acoustical Duct Liner Duct Sizes: When acoustical duct liner is used the duct sizes shown on the plans shall be inside clear of duct liner. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with the MICA National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. The appearance of the completed insulation shall be a significant factor in determining the acceptability of the work. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Where vapor retarders are specified, elbows and fittings shall be wrapped with vapor retarder tape 3 - inches wide or shall have PVC jacketing. G. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory -molded, precut or job - fabricated units (at installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated. H. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. 15251-4 02012 by FEI I. I. rd 3.02 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Insulated piping systems shall be supported on the exterior of the insulation surface. Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation. Metal shields: Conform to table below for minimum length of shield: PIPE SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS LENGTH OF SHIELD Less than 1" Up to 1" 3" 1"-2" 1" 4 I/2" 1"-2" 11/2" 51/2" FILED 21/2"-4" 1" 61/2" 21/2"-4" 1 1/2" 71/2" FEH 21 21/2"-4" 2" 81/2" �i:S9 F 011 21/2"-4" 21/2" 91/2"b 'c'tClelka Pipe Hanger, Trapeze, and Roller Support Insulation Insert Options: 1. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. Apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 -inch wide vapor barrier tape or band. 2. Pipe insulation shall be inserted inside coupling with insulation contacting internal wall. Secure using anchor channel. INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with the MICA National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed. Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner angles on external comers of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing. Flexible Duct Connections: Install insulation materials on flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Provide adequate flexibility to allow for thermal, 15251-5 02012 by FEI axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. 3.03 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. B. Protection: Insulation installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. FILED FEB 21,,,2{012 civ lak Iowa City, Iowa 15251.6 02012 by FEI SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL PROVISIONS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES Ti FILED A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS FEB 21 2012 59 f'm City Clerk A. Section 22 05 00 — Mechanical Materials and Methods. 70waAGty, Iowa 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASME B16.1 — Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. B. ASME B16.3 — Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1998. C. ASME B16.4 — Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1999. D. ASME B16.9 — Factory -made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1993. E. ASME B16.18 — Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1984, Reaffirmed 1994 (ANSI B 16.18). F. ASTM A 47/A 47M — Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999. G. ASTM A 53/A 53M — Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2000. H. ASTM A 795 — Standard Specification for Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2000. I. AWS A5.8 — Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American Welding Society; 1992. J. AWWA C110 — American National Standard for Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 In. Through 48 In. (75 mm Through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids; American Water Works Association, 1998. K. AWWA Cl 1 I/A21.11 — Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water Works Association; 1995 (ANSIIAWWA Cl 11/A21.11). 15300-1 02012 by FEI FILED FEB ,,AA21 2012 AW WA Cterk Assoc,a C1519A21.51 UAuWWA CI5llA21cityS1).�fugally Cast, for Water; American Water works Iowa City, Iowa M. NFPA 13 — Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association; Current State Adopted Edition. N. UL (FPED) — Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition. O. UL 262 — Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition. P. UL 312 — Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings when more than one (1) model, size, finish, etc are provided on a catalog cutsheet. Mark or highlight all that apply and/or mark through all that do not apply. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. Provide final project "AS BUILT" drawings and hydraulic calculations. Drawings shall be folded and placed in plastic binder pouches equipped with 3 -hole punch. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Conform to UL and FM requirements. B. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 AUTOCAD DRAWING FILE REQUESTS A. As an instrument of service to aid in Shop Drawing Submittals, Farris Engineering (FEI) will provide AutoCAD drawing files upon request. The files will be sent upon return receipt of the "Request for Drawings" agreement signed by an officer of the requesting firm. FEI does not assure that the drawings represent all changes, addenda items, change orders or modifications that may have occurred. The drawings are simply a tool for use in producing shop drawing submittals. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Deliver and store valves and sprinklers in shipping containers, with labeling in place. B. Extreme care shall be exercised by the Contractor to prevent dirt and other foreign matter from entering pipe or components of system during construction. Pipe stored on project shall have open 15300-2 02012 by FEI ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over. Carbon Steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Bronze Body, up to and including 12": Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. B. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: 1. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and internal tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 15300-3 @2012 by FEI pipe, fitting or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide NFPA 13 required quantity of spare stock of sprinklers and provide two (2) spare sprinkler wrenches of each sizelstyle used on project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL SYSTEM AND PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS FILED A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13. FEB 2 'y SgPM2012 B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. bCity Clerk wa CiQe, Iowa 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over. Carbon Steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Bronze Body, up to and including 12": Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. B. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: 1. Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and internal tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 15300-3 @2012 by FEI FILED 2.04 CHECK VALVES FEB 21 2012 waST P^'t City Clerk A. 4 inches and Over: Iowa Cuy, Iowa 1. Iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel spring, resilient seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends. 2.05 DRAIN VALVES A. Compression Stop: 1. Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap. B. Ball Valve: 1. Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.06 EXPANSION COMPENSATION LOOPS A. Manufacturers: 1. Metraflex, Metraloop Fireloop Model MLUG. B. Two 90° elbows, braided connectors, 180° return, and factory installed drainlair release plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove buns. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Route wet piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. Install dry pipe with slope necessary to allow for drainage. C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 15300-4 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 .11"57 PM City Chir G. Inserts: IoCity, lon Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. H. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Install hangers to provide minimum 112 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 3. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 1. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. K. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. L. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided. M. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only. N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. O. Provide gate or ball valves for shut-off or isolating service. 15300-5 02012 by FEI Provide drain valves at main shutoff valves and at all low points of piping. Q. Provide wall plate on both sides of wall for all pipe penetrations. FILED FEB 21 7012 YA9 PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 15300-6 0F2 @2012 by FEI SECTION 15310 FIRE PROTECTION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED FILED FEB 21 2012 `q:Sq p C1Y Clerk Iowa City Iowa A. This Section specifies automatic sprinkler systems and standpipe and hose systems for buildings and structures. Materials and equipment specified in this Section include: 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers and accessories. B. Products furnished and installed shall include sprinkler cabinet with spare sprinklers and sprinkler wrenches. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Fire Service Piping for fire protection piping from fire service mains to a point 5 feet outside the building. 2. Fire alarm system. D. Electrical Work: Motors, manual or automatic motor control equipment and protective or signal devices required for the operation specified herein shall be provided under this section in accordance with Electrical Specifications. Any wiring required for the operation specified herein, but not shown on the electrical plans, shall be provided under this section in accordance with Electrical Specifications. E. See Plumbing drawings for fire protection design requirements. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13 and 24. C. Working Plans, as used in this Section, mean those documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13 for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction. 1.03 SYSTEMDESCRIPTION A. Fire protection system in areas not subject to freezing shall be a "Wet -Pipe' system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing water and connected to a water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by fire. 15310-1 02012 by FEI B. Sprinkler System Protection Limits: All spaces within areas of new building construction. Include closets, toilet and locker room areas and special applications areas. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and obtain approval from authority having jurisdiction for fire protection systems specified. B. Conduct fire hydrant flow tests as required to obtain hydraulic data needed to prepare design for hydraulically calculated systems. C. Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to: 1. Sprinkler System Occupancy Hazard Classifications: Sprinkler Contractor shall determine hazard classifications per local and/or any other governing fire codes, latest NFPA codes, and FILED applicable Building Codes. As a minimum, provide hazard classifications as follows: Ft� L iUj2 a. Office and Public Areas: Light hazard. b. Storage Areas: Ordinary hazard. city Ci k C. Equipment Rooms: Ordinary hazard. Iowa Cuy, lowa d. Service Areas: Ordinary hazard. 2. Minimum Density Requirements for Automatic Sprinkler System Hydraulic Design: Sprinkler Contractor shall provide density requirements per local and/or any other governing fire codes, latest NFPA codes, and applicable Building Codes. Area reductions may be used where listed quick response including quick response extended coverage sprinklers, are used throughout the system or portion of system having same design area in accordance with NFPA 13 guidelines. As a minimum, provide density requirements as follows: a. Light Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 GPM over 1500 square feet area. b. Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 GPM over 1500 square feet area. C. Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 GPM over 1500 square feet area. 3. Maximum Sprinkler Spacing: Sprinkler Contractor shall provide sprinkler spacing per local and/or any other governing fire codes, latest NFPA codes, applicable Building Codes, and sprinkler UL listing. As a minimum, provide sprinkler spacing as follows: a. Office Space: 225 square feettsprinkler. b. Storage Areas: 130 square feettsprinkler. C. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 square feet/sprinkler. d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 square feet/sprinkler. e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13. D. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise. 1. Sprinkler Systems: 175 PSIG. 1.05 SUBMITTALS 15310-2 ©2012 by FEI A. Product Data: Include each type sprinkler, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department connection, hose and rack, and hose cabinet specified. B. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 identified as "Working Plans," including hydraulic calculations where applicable, and which have been approved by the authority having jurisdiction. C. Maintenance Data for each type sprinkler, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, fire department connection, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual. D. Welders' Qualification Certificates. E. Test Reports and Certificates include "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground Piping" as described in NFPA 13. FILED 1.06 QUALITYASSURANCE FEB 2 P 2012 A. System Contractor Certification: City cter Iowa City" Iowa 1. Provide proof of fire extinguishing system contractor's certification for the layout, installation, repair, alteration, addition, maintenance or maintenance inspection of the automatic fire extinguishing systems. Certification may be in the form of the following: a. Current certification by the National Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologies, Level III or above; b. Current licensure as a professional engineer with competence in fire extinguisher system design. B. Installer Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term qualified means experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with all precautions required, and has complied with all the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect. C. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AWS D10.9, "Specifications for Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR -3." D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 26 - Recommended Practice for the Supervision of Valves Controlling Water Supplies for Fire Protection. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 15310-3 @2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 �Sce nctr Iowa City, Iowa 1.07 A. 1.08 A. B. 4. NFPA 231 - Standard for General Storage. 5. NFPA 231C - Standard for Rack Storage of Materials. 6. Local Fire Department Requirements. 7. UL and FM Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled, and Factory Mutual approved for the application anticipated. 8. Local Permits and Inspection Requirements. 9. Local utility requirements. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Schedule rough -in installations with installations of other building components. EXTRA MATERIALS Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, two (2) wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed. Sprinklers and Cabinets: Furnish spare sprinklers in quantities as outlined in NPFA 13 and shall include each style included in the project or as detailed in NFPA 13. Furnish special wrenches as specified in this Section. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one (1) of the following: Specialty Valves and Water Motor Alarms a. ASCOA Fire Systems, Figgie International Co. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. C. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. d. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. e. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp. I. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. Star Sprinkler Corp. h. Tyco -Grinnell i. Viking Corp. 2. Backflow Preventers: a. Ames Co., Inc. b. Cla-Val Co. 1531011 02012 by FEI 0 C. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Febco. e. Hersey Products, Inc., Grinnell Corp. f. Watts Regulator Co. g. Wilkins Regulator Div., Zum Industries, Inc. Waterllow Indicators and Supervisory Switches a. Gamewell Co. b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. C. Potter Electric Signal Co. d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e. System Sensor Div., Pittway Corp. FI f. Victaulic Company of America. LED g. Watts Regulator Co. FEB 2 217011 4. Fire Department Connections: 11's? 'Qtx� Iowa wa ow a. Badger -Powhatan, Figgie International Co. b. Croker Div., Fire -End and Croker Corp. C. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. d. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. e. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. g. Potter -Roemer Div., Smith Industries, Inc. h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. i. Sierra Fire Equipment Co. 5. Q Sprinklers: a. ASCOA Fire Systems, Figgie International Co. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. C. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. d. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. e. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp. f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. g. Star Sprinkler Corp. h. Tyco -Grinnell i. Firelock; Victaulic Company. j. Viking Corp. Flexible Hose Sprinkler Connections: a. AquaFlex; Victaulic Company. b. FlexHead Industries, Inc. Indicator Posts and Indicator Post Gate Valves: a. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. 15310-5 02012 by FEI C. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. d. Nibco, Inc. e. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc. f. Waterous Co. S. Indicator Valves: a. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. b. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. C. Nibco, Inc. d. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc. C. Victaulic Company of America. 10. Grooved Couplings for Steel Piping: a. Gruvlok; Anvil Industries. b. Shudoint. C. Tyco -Grinnell d. Victaulic Company of America. 11. Grooved Couplings for AW WA Ductile -Iron Piping: a. Shurjoint. b. Tyco -Grinnell C. Victaulic Company of America. 12. Grooved Couplings for Copper Tubing: a. Victaulic Company of America 13. Press -Seal Fittings for Steel Piping: a. Victaulic Company of America. 14. Mechanically Formed Outlet Procedure: a. T -Drill Industries, Inc. 2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS (SELECTION AS PER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS) 15310.6 02012 by FEI a. b. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. Grinnell Supply Sales Co., Grinnell Corp. FILED c. d. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. FEB 21 2012 E Al ?1'f. City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa e. g. Nibco, Inc. Sprink-Line by Sprink, Inc. Victaulic Company of America. 9. Fire Protection Service Gate and Check Valves: a. Gem Sprinkler Co. Div., Grinnell Corp. b. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. C. Nibco, Inc. d. Stockham Valves and Fittings, Inc. C. Victaulic Company of America. 10. Grooved Couplings for Steel Piping: a. Gruvlok; Anvil Industries. b. Shudoint. C. Tyco -Grinnell d. Victaulic Company of America. 11. Grooved Couplings for AW WA Ductile -Iron Piping: a. Shurjoint. b. Tyco -Grinnell C. Victaulic Company of America. 12. Grooved Couplings for Copper Tubing: a. Victaulic Company of America 13. Press -Seal Fittings for Steel Piping: a. Victaulic Company of America. 14. Mechanically Formed Outlet Procedure: a. T -Drill Industries, Inc. 2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS (SELECTION AS PER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS) 15310.6 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 �:•s9 r A. Refer to Part 3 Articles "Sprinkler System Piping Applications' and "Standpipe SystFnF* a Applications" for identification of systems where pipe and fitting materials specified below are u B. Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C115, ductile -iron barrel with iron -alloy threaded flanges, 250PSIG minimum working pressure rating, and AWWA C104 cement -mortar lining. 1. Option: Pipe may be AWWA pattern, cut -grooved for groovedcouplingjoints. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 in sizes 6 -inch and smaller and Schedule 30 in sizes 8 -inch and larger, black and galvanized, plain and threaded ends, for welded, threaded, cut -groove, and rolled -groove joints. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, Schedule 10 through 5 -inch sizes and NFPA 13 specified wall thickness for 6 -inch through 104nch sizes, with plain ends, black and galvanized, for rolled -groove and welded joints. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135, threadable lightwall, black and galvanized, for threaded joints. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 5, plain ends and black finish, for use with press -seal or rolled -groove fittings. G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795, black and galvanized, for joints listed and for use with fittings for plain -end steel pipe. 1. Type: Standard -weight pipe, Schedules 30 and 40, for cut -groove, rolled -groove, threaded, and welding joints. 2. Type: Lightweight pipe, Schedule 10, for rolled -groove and welding joints. 3. Type: Extra -lightweight pipe, thickness less than Schedule 10, for rolled -groove and welding joints. H. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 2.03 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Cast -Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B 16. 1, Class 150, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. B. Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, 250 PSIG minimum pressure rating, with AWWA C 104 cement -mortar lining. C. Ductile -Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with NPT or BSPT threads. D. Cast -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads according to ASMEB 1.20.1. E. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads according to ASMEB 1.20.1. 15310-7 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 Sq ?M' City Clerk Iowa Cuy, Iowa F. Grooved -End Fittings for Ductile -Iron Pipe: ASTM A 536 ductile -iron or ASTM A 47 malleable - iron, AWWA pipe -size, designed to accept AWWA C 606 grooved couplings. Include cement lining or Food and Drug Administration (FDA) -approved interior coating. G. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded; ASME B 16.9, buttwelding; or ASME B 16.11, socket -welding type for welded joints. H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASMEB 16.5. I. Grooved -End Fittings for Steel Pipe: ULlisted and FM -approved, ASTM A 536, Grade 6545-12 ductile -iron or ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable -iron, with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved couplings. J. Steel Press -Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM -approved, 175 PSIG pressure rating, for use with Schedule 5, plain -end, steel pipe and fitting manufacturer's pressure sealing tools. Fittings include carbon -steel housing, butylene O -rings, and pipe stop. K. Wrought -Copper Fittings: ASMEB 16.22, streamlined pattern. L. Cast -Bronze Flanges: ASME B 16.24, Class 300, raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. M. Grooved -End Fittings for Copper Tube: ULAisted, ASTM B 75, copper tube and ASTM B 584 bronze castings, designed for grooved -end couplings. N. Mechanically Formed Outlets for Copper Tube: Manufacturers UL -listed, standard, written procedure for forming "T" -branch outlets. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS A. Flanged Joints for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Ductile -Iron or Cast -Iron Fittings: AWWA C 115 ductile - iron or gray -iron pipe flanges, rubber gaskets, and high-strength steel bolts and nuts. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BcuP-3 or BcuP-4. C. Couplings for Grooved -End Steel Pipe and Grooved -End Ferrous Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C 606, ASTM A 536 ductile -iron or ASTM A 47 malleable -iron housing, with enamel finish. Include synthetic -rubber gasket with central -cavity, pressure -responsive design; ASTM A183 carbon -steel bolts and nuts; and locking pin, toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings. D. Couplings for Grooved -End Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings: UL 213, AWWA C 606, ASTM A 536 ductile -iron housing, with enamel finish. Include synthetic -rubber gasket with central -cavity, pressure -responsive design, and ASTM A 183 carbon -steel bolts and nuts to secure grooved pipe and fittings. E. Couplings for Grooved -End Copper Tube and Grooved -End Copper Fittings: UL 213, ASTM A 536 ductile -von or ASTM A 47 malleable -iron housing, with copper -colored enamel finish. Include synthetic -rubber gasket with central -cavity, pressure -responsive design, and ASTM A 183 carbon - steel bolts and nuts. 15310-8 ©2012 by FEI 2.05 FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE VALVES 0 • D. E. F. G. H. FILED FEB 21 2012 5el Prvc Ciry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa General: UL -listed and FM -approved, with 175 PSIG non -shock minimum working pressure rating. Option: Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type. Gate Valves, 2 -Inch and Smaller: UL 262, cast -bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Indicating Valves, 2 -1/2 -Inch and Smaller: Butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded ends, and integral indicating device. Indicator: Electrical 115 -VAC, prewired, single -circuit, supervisory switch. Gate Valves, 2 -1/2 -Inch and Larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings and flanged ends. Gate Valves, 2 -1/2 -Inch and Larger for Use with Indicator Posts: UL 262, 'von body, bronze mounted, solid wedge disc, non -rising stem with operating nut and flanged ends. Indicator Posts: UL 789, wall type, cast-iron body, with windows for target plates that indicate valve position, extension rod and coupling, locking device, red enamel finish and supervisory switch. Swing Check Valves, 2 -1/2 -Inch and Larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring and flanged ends. Butterfly Check Valves, 4 -Inch and Larger: UL 213, split -clapper style, cast -'von body with rubber seal, bronze alloy discs, stainless-steel spring and hinge pin. 2.06 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175 PSIG working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and single - hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber, and fill line attachment with strainer. B. Backflow Preventer Valve: Provide double check backflow preventers. Backflow preventers shall meet the requirements of A.S.S.E. Std. 1015; AWWA Std. C506-78 or USCFCCC Manual for Cross Connection Control. Watts Regulator Company Series 709 or equal. 2.07 SPRINKLERS A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat -responsive element conforming to: 1. UL 199, for applications except residential. 2. UL 1767, for early -suppression, fast -response applications. B. Sprinkler types and categories are as indicated and as required by application. Furnish automatic sprinklers with nominal 1/2 -inch orifice for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating except where otherwise indicated and required by application. 15310-9 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 1 2n12 .f; 5J Pr SF City Clerk C. Sprinkler Finishes: Iowa City, Iowa Sprinklers in finished ceiling areas shall be installed within 3 -inches of center of lay -in ceiling tile and shall be concealed type with white finish unless otherwise noted on drawings. D. Sprinkler Cabinet and Wrenches: Finished steel cabinet suitable for wall mounting with hinged cover and space for quantity of supplied spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrenches. Provide extra cabinets as necessary to meet the storage requirements of NFPA 13. 2.08 FLEXIBLE HOSE COMMERCIAL SPRINKLER CONNECTIONS A. Flexible stainless steel hose assemblies and elbow hose assemblies consisting of lengths from 2 feet to 6 feet as required for project conditions. Hangers note required for up to 6 feet of hose assembly. Fully welded non-mechanical or compression mechanical fittings, braided. leak -tested with minimum 1 inch internal corrugated hose diameter fabricated with 304 stainless steel, including end fittings. Complete system shall allow for a total of 2700 total bending per flexible drop unless listed for more bends. Flexible assemblies shall be UL listed and FM approved. 1. Outlet Connection: 3/4 inch. 2. Maximum Rated Pressure: 175 PSI. B. System shall only be authorized for installation in light hazard and ordinary hazard occupancies. C. Direct attachment flexible hose ceiling bracket with integrated snap -0n clip or screw -fastened ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper-resistant screws and removable attachment hub or open gate clamp with set screw for attaching and adjusting flexible hose. 2.09 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. Wall Type Inlet Connections: Polished cast brass, flush wall type, with wall escutcheon and two-way connections. Connection sizes shall be one (1) 4 -inch outlet and two (2) 2 -1/2 -inch (65mm) female inlets, having threads compatible with the local Fire Department equipment, for the connection size indicated, as specified in NFPA 1963. Each inlet shall have a clapper valve, and plug and chain. Unit shall have wall escutcheon of cast brass, finish to match connections, with words "AUTO SPKR - FIRE DEPT CONNECTION" in raised letters. 2.10 AIARMDEVICES A. Alarm Devices: Types and sizes that will match piping and equipment connections. B. Water -Motor -Operated Alarms: UL 753, mechanical operation type, 10 -inch diameter, cast -aluminum alarm gong, with red enamel factory finish. Include Pelton -wheel -type operator with nylon shaft bearings, and shaft length and sleeve to suit wall thickness and construction; 3/4 -inch inlet and 1 -inch drain. C. Electrically Operated Alarm Bells: UL listed exterior wall mounted 6" diameter, electric fire alarm bells, red glossy enamel finish. Provide all conduit and wiring necessary for electrical connection. Size wiring according to manufacturer's recommendations. 15310-10 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 y: 511 PM City Clerk Iowa Ciry, Iowa D. Waterllow Indicators: UL 346, electrical -supervision type, vane -type waterflow detector, rated to 250 PSIG and designed for horizontal or vertical installation. Include two (2) SPDT (single -pole, double -throw) circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 120 -VAC and 0.25 A, 24-VDC. complete with factory -set, field -adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamper -proof cover that sends a signal when cover is removed. E. Pressure Switches: UL 753, watertlow switch with retard, electrical -supervision type, SPDT normally closed contacts, designed to operate on rising pressure and signal water flow. F. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for valves, electrical -supervision type, SPDT, normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than full open position. G. Supervisory Switches: UL 753, for indicator posts, electrical -supervision type, SPDT, normally closed contacts, designed to signal controlled valve in other than full open position. 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Pressure Gauges: UL 393, 3-1/2 to 4-1/2 inches diameter dial with dial range of 0-250 PSIG. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which fire protection materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS A. Black Steel Pipe: Install Schedule 40 for less than 8 -inch; Schedule 30 for 8 -inch and larger; Class 150, cast-iron threaded fittings, threaded joints. B. Black Steel Pipe: Install Schedule 40 for less than 8 -inch; Schedule 30 for 8 -inch and larger; mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; cut -groove type. C. Black Steel Pipe: Install Schedule 10 for 5 -inch and smaller; 0.134 -inch wall thickness for 6 -inch; and 0.188 -inch wall thickness for 8 -inch and 10 -inch; wrought -steel buttwelding fittings, welded joints. D. Black Steel Pipe: Install Schedule 10 for 5 -inch and smaller; 0.134 -inch wall thickness for Grinch; and 0.188 -inch wall thickness for 8 -inch and 10 -inch mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings; roll - groove or mechanical locking type. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Extreme care shall be exercised by the Contractor to prevent dirt and other foreign matter from entering pipe or components of system during construction. Pipe stored on Project shall have open ends capped and equipment shall have all openings fully protected. Before erection, each piece of pipe, fitting or valve shall be visually examined and all dirt removed. 15310-11 02012 by FEI FILED Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general FEB 21 7012 location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. 14:City Cl Clerk 1. Deviations from approved "Working Plans" for sprinkler piping require written approval of Iowa city, Iowa the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Architect prior to deviating from the approved "Working Plans." C. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13. D. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. E. Install unions in pipes 2 -inch (50mm) and smaller, adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings. F. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2 -1/2 -inch and larger connections. G. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions, for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13. H. Make connections between underground and above -ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation. I. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. J. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes. K. Install pressure gage on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gage with a connection not less than 1/4 -inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and where they will not be subject to freezing. 3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AR -3. B. Threaded Joints: conform to ANSI 111.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows: 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 15310-12 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 4: PM ty Clerk Iowa Ciry, Iowa 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are stripped, chipped, corroded, or otherwise damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used. C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer. D. Mechanical Grooved Joints: cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings. E. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove buffs and fins from pipe ends. 3.05 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction. B. Gate Valves: Install supervised -open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. C. Install check valves in each water supply connection. D. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position, in proper direction of flow including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturers appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation. E. Backflow Preventer Valve: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and local code requirements, at each fire service entrance. 3.06 SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONS A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations. B. Exposed Piping and Fittings: Where sprinkler system is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide an installed surface that will accept paint. 3.07 FLEXIBLE HOSE COMMERCIAL SPRINKLER INSTALLATIONS A. Limit stainless steel hose assemblies and elbow hose assemblies to no greater than 2700 total bending per each drop unless drop assembly is listed for more turns. For FM -approved systems maximum bend radius shall not exceed 7 times braided hose diameter. B. Manufacturer shall provide written procedures for proper installation of flexible hose sprinkler systems. 15310-13 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 `) ecity C & Iowa City, Iowa 3.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS A. Install automatic drip valves at the check valve on the fire department connection to the mains. B. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetration in outside walls. 3.09 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM COORDINATIONAND WARRANTY A. The General Contractor and Sprinkler Subcontractor shall meet with the Architect/Engineer to coordinate routing of all piping and sprinkler placement in exposed areas prior to submittal of Shop Drawings to ascertain the aesthetic requirements in such areas. B. The General Contractor shall take full responsibility for locating all fire sprinkler piping and sprinklers within the building at locations not subject to freezing conditions. For areas of the building where that is not deemed possible, a "dry" system shall be substituted. The Contractor, in locating such piping and sprinkler, shall take into account the possibility that the interior space temperature may be reduced to approximately 60°F through the Owner's off -hours temperature control setback. C. In areas where concealment of the sprinkler is required, if the General Contractor and/or Sprinkler Contractor determine that additional chases, bulkheads and other architectural modifications are required in order to conceal the piping while complying with the above freeze protection requirements, they shall coordinate such concerns with the Architect/Engineer prior to submittal of Shop Drawings. D. All entry vestibules and other minimally conditioned spaces, where system piping, sprinklers and/or drop nipples are subject to freezing, dry pendant sprinklers shall be used. E. The General Contractor shall coordinate installation of the fire sprinkler system with the insulation characteristics of the building, and warrant the fire sprinkler system against freezing for a period of two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. Such warranty shall cover the cost of repair including damaged building materials. Such warranty shall not cover freezing in the event of a loss of heat due to malfunction or shut down of mechanical heating system beyond normal set backs previously stated. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Flush, test, and inspect both underground fire main and aboveground sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA 24. Provide certification of both underground and above ground flushing. B. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and retest repaired portion of the system. C. Provide a plastic pouch attached to system riser large enough to house the following: copy of underground flushing certification, aboveground flushing certification, copy of "As -Built" drawings, a copy of 2 -hour pressure test and system certification and a copy of NFPA 25. 15310-14 02012 by FEI D. Provide copies of all testing and certification documents/reports and a copy of "As -Built" drawings in the project O & M Manual. FILED FEB 21 2012 V. 5St'M Cny Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 15310-15 02012 by FEI SECTION 15400 BASIC PLUMBING MATERIALS AND METHOWED PART 1 - GENERAL FEB q2/(1 2012 $C ty CTerk 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Iowa city, Iowa A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. a. Valves: (1) Gate (2) Ball (3) Plug (4) Check b. Piping Specialties (1) Pipe escutcheons (2) Pipeline strainers (3) Pipe sleeves (4) Dielectric unions C. Meters and gauges: (1) Glass thermometers (2) Pressure gauges d. Supports and anchors: (1) Horizontal -piping hangers and supports (2) Saddles and shields (3) Cushion clamps supports (4) Isolation couplings 2. Mechanical identification. 3. Vibration control: a. Flexible pipe connectors 15400-1 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 4'iry Clerk iowaC�ry,14a Access panels. 5. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment; and for sealing penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 6. Installation requirements common to piping and equipment specification Sections. 7. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 8. Excavation and backfill. 9. Piping tests. B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. E. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract. 1.05 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS Dl.l "Structural Welding Code Steel." B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping." 15400-2 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 -f:s:SfWt Ciry Clerk Iowa Ciry, Iowa 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. MSS Compliance: Mark valves in accordance with MSS -25 "Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions." D. ANSI Compliance: For face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions of flanged- or welded -end valve bodies, comply with ANSI B 16.10 "Face -to -Face and End -to -End Dimensions of Ferrous Valves." E. FCI Compliance: Test and rate Y -type strainers in accordance with FCI 73-I 'Pressure Rating Standard for Y -type strainers". Test and rate other type strainers in accordance with FCI 78-1 "Pressure Rating Standard for Pipeline Strainers Other than Y -type". F. UL and FM Compliance: Provide meters, gauges, and supports which are UL -listed and FM approved. G. MSS Standard Compliance: Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP -58. H. ASMEA13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. I. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end -caps. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. 15400-3 02012 by FEI D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. FILED PART 2 - PRODUCTS FEB 21 212 Y: K4 FtA 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS city Iowa Cityty,, Iowa A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.02 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch (3mm) maximum thickness, except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. ASME B 16.20 for grooved, ring joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWAC110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 -inch (3mm) thick, except where other thickness is indicated; and full -face or ring type, except where type is indicated. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated. C. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95%) and silver (approximately 5%), having 0.10% lead content. 2. Alloy Sn50: Tin (50%) and lead (50%) (for use on nonpotable water systems only). D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. E. Flanged, Ductile -Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel bolts and nuts. 15400-4 02012 by FEI F 2.03 A. C. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain -end pressure pipes. 1. Sleeve: ASTM A126, Class B, gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. 4. Bolts and nuts: AWWA Cl 11. FILED 5. Finish: Enamel paint. PIPING SPECIALTIES Pipe Escutcheons: FEB 21 2012 It: SS Pin City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 1. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas. 2. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged. 3. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged. Low Pressure Pipeline Strainers: General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Select strainers for 125 PSI working pressure, with Type 304 stainless steel screens, with 3/64 -inch perforations at 233 per square inch. 2. Threaded Ends, 2 -inches and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 3. Threaded Ends, 2 -1/2 -inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off - center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 4. Flanged Ends, 2 -1/2 -inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off -center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 5. Butt Welded Ends, 2 -1/2 -inches and Larger: Schedule 40 cast carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with off -center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 6. Grooved Ends, 2 -1/2 -inches and Larger: Tee pattern, ductile -iron or malleable -iron body and access end cap, access coupling with EDPM gasket. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 15400-5 @2012 by FEI Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. FILED 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly for 250 PSIG (1725 kPa) minimum FEB 21 1012 working pressure at a 180°F (82°C) temperature. Y:55 em CityC 4. Dielectric Flanges: Facto fabricated, companion -flange assembl for 150 or 300 PSIG Cary Clerk g rY-Y Iowa Crry, Iowa (1035 kPa or 2070 kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric -Flange Insulation Kits: Field -assembled, companion -flange assembly, full -face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150 or 300 PSIG (1035 kPa or 2070 kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures. 6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300 PSIG (20700a) minimum working pressure at 225°F (107°C) temperature. 7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300 PSIG (2070 kPa) working pressure at 225°F (107°C) temperature. D. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously 511 annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. E. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: Steel Sheet -Metal: 24 -gauge (0.70mm) or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 3. Cast -Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, having plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified. 2.04 VALVES A. General: Provide factory -fabricated valves recommended by Manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure ratings indicated; provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with Installation requirements. Provide end connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option. B. Gate Valves: Comply with the following requirements 15400-6 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 Y.54 *M City Cictk Iowa C 1. Gate Valves - 2 -1/2 -Inches and Larger: MSS SP -70; Class 125 iron body, Ublonzw �mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B, flanged ends, and 'Teflon" impregnated packing and two-piece backing gland assembly. C. Ball Valves: Comply with the following requirements: Ball valves - 1 -inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 PSI SWP pressure, 600 PSI non -shock WOG pressure; 2 -piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584 or B61, full port, 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl -covered steel handle. Provide extended solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water service; full depth ANSI threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam. Provide 2 -inch extended handles of non -thermal conductive material. Valve pressure ratings shall be cast into the body of the valve. 2. Ball Valves - 1 -1/4 -Inches to 2 -Inches: Rated for 150 PSI SWP pressure, 600 PSI non -shock WOG pressure; 2 -piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 584 or B61, full port, 316 stainless steel ball, reinforced and replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl -covered steel handle. Provide extended solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water service; full -depth ANSI threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam. Provide 2 -inch extended handles of non -thermal conductive material. Valve pressure ratings shall be cast into the body of the valve. D. Plug Valves: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Plug Valves - 2 -Inches and Smaller: 150 PSI WOG, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square head, threaded ends. E. Check Valves: Comply with the following requirements: Swing Check Valves - 2 -Inches and Smaller: MSS SP -80; Class 125, cast bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62, horizontal swing, Y -pattern, with a bronze disc, and having threaded or solder ends. Valve shall be capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used with threaded end connections where pressure requires or Class 125 valves are not available. 2. Swing Check Valves - 2 -1/2 -Inches and Larger: MSS SP -71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM approved for fire protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line. 3. Wafer Check Valves: Class 250, cast iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non -slam design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Valve shall be designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure. 2.05 METERS AND GAUGES A. Thermometers: 15400-7 02012 by FEI General: Provide thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. 2. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel or hard powder coat finish, glass or acrylic front, 9 -inches long. FILED 3. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180° adjustment in vertical FEB 21 2012 plane, 360° adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device. y: 69ry ate k 4. Tube and Capillary: Blue organic -liquid filled, magnifying lens, :0 scale division accuracy, Iowa City, Iowa shock mounted. 5. Scale: Satin faced, non -reflective white aluminum, permanently etched black markings. 6. Stem: Copper -plated steel, brass or die-cast aluminum, for separable socket, length to suit installation. 7. Thermometer Wells: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2 -inch extension for insulated piping. Provide cap fastened to well when used in a non -permanent thermometer location. 8. Thermometer wells shall be installed at each thermometer and at each point where a temperature sensing device is required by the control specifications. 9. Range: Conform to the following: a. Hot Water: OF to 240°F with 2°F scale divisions. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Marsh Gauges. b. Moeller Instruments. C. Miljoco Corporation. d. Weiss Instruments. e. Winters Instruments. B. Pressure Gauges: General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated. 2. Type: General use, ±1% accuracy, ANSI B 40.1 Grade IA, phosphor bronze bourdon type, bottom connection. 3. Case: Stainless steel, glass or acrylic lens, 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. 4. Connector: Brass, lower mount with 1/4 -inch male NPT. 5. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched black markings. 15400-8 02012 by FEI 2.06 A. 13 6. Accessories: a. Provide protective coil siphon when used for steam service. b. Provide each gauge with a shut-off needle valve. C. Provide pressure snubber where spikes may be present. 7. Range: Conform to the following: a. Water: 0-100 PSI. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: FJJ r � a. Marsh Gauges. F b. Moeller Instruments. S9 1 ZO%2 C. Miljoco Corporation. Iowa City, d. Weiss Instruments. 10" e. Winters Instruments. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory- fabricated horizontal -piping hangers and supports complying with MSS SP -58, of one (1) of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer to suit horizontal -piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one (1) type by one (1) manufacturer for each piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper -plated hangers and supports for copper -piping systems. 2. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1. 3. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 2. 4. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3. 5. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4. 6. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5. 7. Trapeze type with horizontal angle iron. Vertical Piping Supports and Braces: General: Support and brace vertical piping at every floor level and at 15 foot intervals where floor to floor level exceeds 15 feet, in compliance with MSS -SP -58. Support riser clamps below piping hubs or couplings. 2. Double -Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8. 15400-9 02012 by FEI C. Saddles and Shields: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports, factory -fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 2. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching FILE adjoining insulation. FEB 21 "'Z 3. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent !: 5o ry � k crushing of insulation. Iowa Ciry, low' 4. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360 degree insert of high density, 100 PSI, water- proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360 degree sheet metal shield. Provide assembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation. D. Cushion -Clamps: Constructed of material resistant to oils, hydraulic fluids, grease, fuels, common solvents, salt solutions, dilute bases and mineral acids; and not degrade at operating temperature of 275°F. 1. Tube, pipe, and hose lines to be secured using cushions with clamps and anchoring channel or other similar approved equal method. E. Isolation Couplings: Constructed of material resistant to oils, hydraulic fluids, grease, fuels, common solvents, salt solutions, dilute bases and mineral acids; and not degrade at operating temperature of 275°F. 1. Tube, pipe, and hose lines to be secured using cushions with clamps and anchoring channel or other similar approved equal method. Channel stop required at bottom of coupling on vertical installations. 2.07 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment Markets: General: Engraved, color -coded laminated plastic. Include contact -type, permanent adhesive or fasteners to mount on equipment. 2. Coordination: Verify with Owner if equipment bar code system is required for specific applications. 3. Terrninology: Match drawing schedules as closely as possible unless directed otherwise by Owner. 4. Data Required: a. Equipment Description, i.e. Domestic Water Heater. b. Schedule Mark, i.e. DWH-1. 15400-10 02012 by FEI F3 C. 5. Marker Size: 2-1/2- by 4 -inches for main control valves; 4-1/2- by 6 -inches for equipment. Plastic Pipe Markers: Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturers standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap -on, color -coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 -inches (including insulation if any), provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location, fastened by the following method: a. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color -coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4 - inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1 -1/2 -inches. 3. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown on drawings, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. a. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic. Plastic Tape: General: Provide manufacturer's standard color -coded pressure -sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. 2. Width: Provide 1 -1/2 -inch wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6 -inches, 2 -1/2 -inch wide tape for larger pipes. 3. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, or as scheduled below: ITEM BAND FILED COLOR Domestic Cold Water Green yE v P1 Zp�2 Domestic Hot Water Yellow c;ryCYk Natural Gas Yellow Iowa CityIowa Insulated Drains and Downspouts Green 2.08 VIBRATION CONTROL A. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Provide neoprene or EDPM construction consisting of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and elastomer molded and cured in hydraulic tubber presses. Provide straight or elbow connector as indicated, rated at 125 PSI at 220"F. 2.09 JOINT SEALERS A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. 15400-11 02012 by FEI B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types: One -part, non -acid -curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non -traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. One -part, mildew -resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non -traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and non -porous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with non -porous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. FILED 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: FEB 21 2012 a. One -Part, Non -acid -Curing, Silicone Sealant: (1) "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. (or Equal) b. One -Part, Mildew -Resistant, Silicone Sealant: (1) "Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp. (or Equal) D. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealants: One -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5%. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. "Chem -Calk 600;' Bostic Construction Products Div. (or Equal) E. Fire -Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed -in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through -penetration fire -stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire - rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistant ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp. (or Equal) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size 15400-12 02012 by FEI pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1 -inch clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. FILED 118212012 K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. .9 C 9 tCMrk Iowa C Y L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions. ity, 1k M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following: Chrome -Plated Piping: Cast -brass, one-piece, with set -screw, and polished chrome -plated finish. Use split -casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping. 2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with set -screw. 3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. 4. Insulated Piping: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. 5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with set -screw or spring clips. N. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic (removable) sleeves. P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 15400-13 02012 by FEI a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 -inches (50mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified. 2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. 3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4 -inch (6mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 -inches. FILED b. Steel Sheet -Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 -inches and larger that penetrate FEB 21 2012 gypsum -board partitions. Sq el l City C,crk C. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure Iowa City, Iowa flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 -inches (50mm) above finished floor level. 4. Except for below -grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Q. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1 -inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 -inch. 2. Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 -inch and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. R. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1 -inch (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals. S. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping system Sections. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22 "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube." 4. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASMEB1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 15400-14 02012 by FBI FILED FEB 21 2012 +f; s4 f*L City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is specified). C. Align threads at point of assembly. d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being threaded. e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 5. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 'Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe' using qualified processes and welding operators according to the "Quality Assurance" Article. 6. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench. U. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified below. 1. Install unions in piping 2 -inch (50mm) and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having a 2 -inch (50mm) or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges in piping 2 -1/2 -inches (65mm) and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. Dry Piping Systems (Gas): Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems (Water): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 5. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures unless unavoidable. Install drip pan under piping that must be run through electrical spaces. 6. Install isolation valves upstream of all dielectric unions and flanges. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. 15400-15 02012 by FEI FILED 5R P 2Q12 Ct�c �,Clerkkk towalSaty, tow4nstall equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.03 VALVE SELECTION A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: Copper Tube Size 2 -Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except in heating hot water and low pressure steam service which shall have threaded ends. 2. Steel Pipe Sizes 2 -Inch and Smaller: threaded or grooved -end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2 -1/2 -Inch and Larger: grooved -end or flanged. 3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system specification sections for specific valve applications and arrangements. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment removal without system shut -down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. D. Install 3 -valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves. E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe, and to allow full stem movement. F. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows: I. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Wafer Check Valves: Install between two (2) flanges in horizontal or vertical position. 3. Lift Check Valve: Install in piping line with stem upright and plumb. 15400-16 02012 by FEI G. Valve Schedule: 1. Sectional Valves: a. 2 -inch and Smaller: Ball valves. b. 2 -1/2 -inch and Larger: Gate valves. 2. Shut-off Valves: PILED a. 2 -inch and Smaller: Ball valves. FEB 21 b. 2 -1/2 -inch and Larger: Gate valves. '•'S9 fem 1012 I0C�YIty l! wa H. Valve Locations: Wa 1. Plumbing Piping: a. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves two (2) or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. b. Shut-off Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.05 VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULES 3.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Y -Type Strainers: Install Y -type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shut-off valve in strainer blow -down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2 -inch and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shut-off valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow -down connection. Locate Y -type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment: a. Pumps. b. Pressure reducing valves. C. Temperature or pressure regulating valves. 15400-17 ©2012 by FEI VALVES 2 -INCHES AND SMALLER SERVICE GATE BALL CHECK Domestic Hot & Cold Water 125 150 125 VALVES 2 -1/2 -INCHES AND LARGER SERVICE GATE CHECK Domestic Hot & Cold Water 125 125 3.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Y -Type Strainers: Install Y -type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shut-off valve in strainer blow -down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2 -inch and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shut-off valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow -down connection. Locate Y -type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhere as indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment: a. Pumps. b. Pressure reducing valves. C. Temperature or pressure regulating valves. 15400-17 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB Bl 201pielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and nonferrous piping. Comply with hF Sq Pit manufacturers installation instructions. City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 1. Install isolation valves upstream of all dielectric unions. 3.07 METERS AND GAUGES INSTALLATION A. Glass Thermometers: 1. General: Install glass thermometers in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor. 2. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: a. At inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater. B. Pressure Gauges: General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe at most readable position. 2. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated: a. At domestic water service entrance. 3.08 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS INSTALLATION A. Hangers and Supports: General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP -69. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP -69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. Piping shall not be supported from bottom cord of bar joist or from metal roof deck, unless approved by Structural Engineer. Piping may be supported at panel points of barjoists. 2. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 3. Powder -actuated fasteners shall be approved only for installation where load will be applied perpendicular to the fasteners. Powder -actuated fasteners shall not be used where load will be applied to axially to the fasteners. 4. Support fire -water piping independently of other piping. 15400-18 @2012 by FEI 5. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods. FILED B. Saddles and Shields: FEB 2 j `1,'59 Pet Z01Z 1. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements: c+ry clerk Iowa City, Iowa a. Shields: Where low -compressive -strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water piping, install coated protective shields. For pipe 8 -inch and over, install wood insulation saddles. b. Saddles: Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles. C. Cushion -Clamps: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Isolation Couplings: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.09 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive or appropriate fasteners on or near each major item of mechanical equipment Locate markers where accessible and visible. 2. Include markers for the following categories of equipment: a. Main control and operating valves. b. Pumps, water heaters, tanks, pressure vessels, humidifiers, water -treatment systems, and similar equipment. B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non - concealed locations. 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take -offs for fixtures; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non -accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 -feet along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25 -feet in congested areas of piping and equipment. 15400-19 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 Qty Oak Iowa Ciry, Iowa 3.10 A. B. 3.11 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. VIBRATION CONTROL INSTALLATION General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shut-off valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 -inches larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000 PSI, 28 day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement. 312 EXCAVATIONAND BACKFILL A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation. B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. 1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 -inches below finished grade elevation. C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances. D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip -line of trees indicated to remain. 15400-20 02012 by FEI 2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials gq�gccceptable for use as backfill or fill. tt j�� D F. Trenching: Excavate trenches for mechanical installations as follows: FEB 21 101 9:';? Pat 2 Ciry' 1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ampl�wvQ,4TPom and a minimum of 6- to 9 -inches clearance on both sides of pipe and equipment. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for piping to establish indicated slope and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to an elevation below frost line. 3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which pipe can be installed, tested, and the trench backfilled within the same day. 4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and pipe. 5. Excavate trenches for piping and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate elevations for support of pipe and equipment on undisturbed soil. a. For pipes or equipment 6 -inch or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of trench to fit bottom 1/4 of the circumference. Fill unevenness with tampered sand backfill. At each pipe joint over -excavate to relieve the bell or pipe joint of the pipe of loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the bearing surface. G. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35°F (2°C). H. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. 1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials. 2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. 4. For piping less than 30 -inches below surface of roadways, provide 4 -inch thick concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of piping, provide a 4 -inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase. 5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials. Backfill excavation as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 15400-21 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 : s'I eet City deck 1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded. Iowa city, town Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris. J. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 -inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 -inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. K. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. L. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of piping and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift. M. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below: Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 4253 and ASTM D 4254, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship (cohesionless soils). a. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 - inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 95% maximum density for cohesive material, or 98% relative density for cohesionless material. b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 95% maximum density for cohesive material, or 98% relative density for cohesionless material. C. Other Areas: Compact top 6 -inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85% maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90% relative density for cohesionless soils. 2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations. N. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas. 15400-22 02012 by FEI 3.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.14 GROUTING A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. FILED C. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required. FEB Q �: 5 P 2012 D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturers printed instructions. 3.15 PIPING TEST A. All domestic water piping shall be flushed, tested at 100 PSI and shall be left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 PSI for the balance of the construction period. 15400-23 02012 by FEI PILED FEB 21 2012 SECTION 15407 �' 'ir?CF1f1& Iowa C4, Iowa PLUMBING INSULATION PART1- GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Plumbing insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings, and by requirements of this section. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Furnish insulation and materials bearing the manufacturer's label. Only mechanics skilled at such work shall apply materials. Insulation and materials shall be by one of the manufacturers listed. Specialty material shall be of the manufacturer indicated or approved equal. Fire and smoke hazard classification ratings on insulation, jacket, and adhesive shall conform to NFPA 255, ASTM E 84, or UL -723 as follows: C. 1. Flame Spread Index not exceeding 25. 2. Fuel Contributed not exceeding 50. 3. Smoke Developed Index not exceeding 50. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (1) of the following manufacturers: 1. Armacell LLC 2. Dow Chemical Company 3. Einsulation, Inc. 4. Johns -Manville Corp. 5. Keene Corp. 6. Knauf Fiber Glass 7. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 8. Rubatex Corp. 9. Pittsburg Corning Corp. D. Thermal Conductivity Average Maximum in Btu-in/hr-ft' at 75°F Mean Temperature: 1. Fiberglass Board = 0.26. 2. Fiberglass Blanket = 0.30. 3. Fiberglass Preformed Pipe Insulation = 0.26 4. Cellular Glass = 0.30. 5. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular = 0.27. 6. Polyisocyanurate = 0.19. 7. Calcium Silicate = 0.60 @ 500°F. 15407-1 @2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 *:S9P,.'L City CClerk lm City. lriwa E. Vapor retarder film and tape shall have a maximum permeance of 0.030 perm. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION A. Piping insulation shall be as scheduled below: SYSTEM PIPE SIZE AND INSULATION AND JACKET LOCATION Storm and Storm Horizontal above ground 1 -inch 4-pcf density fiberglass Overflow/Emergency piping and drain sumps insulation with fire -resistive, ASJ Drainage vapor barrier jacket or 1/2 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film 2. Storm and Storm Vertical aboveground 1 -inch 4-pcf density fiberglass Overflow Drainage piping. insulation with fire -resistive, ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1/2 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film 3. Sanitary Drainage Above Ground Piping 1 -inch 4-pcf density fiberglass from drains serving insulation with fire -resistive, ASJ cooling coil vapor barrier jacket or 1/2 -inch fire condensate drainage retardant flexible elastomeric or ice machine closed -cell plastic foam insulation drainage and from or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed refrigerated water cell insulation with vapor retarder coolers film 4. Domestic Cold Water Piping in building through 1 -1/4 -inch 1 -inch 4-pcf density fiberglass insulation with fire -resistive, ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1/2 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. 5. Domestic Cold Water Piping in building 1-1/2 inch 1 -inch 4-pcf density fiberglass 15407-2 02012 by FEI SYSTEM PIPE SIZE AND LOCATION (including HVAC and larger Make-up Lines) 6. Domestic Hot and Piping in building through Recirculated Hot 2 -inch Water 7. Vent Piping Within Piping in building 2 -inch 10 Feet of Roof and larger Penetration FILED FEB 21 2012 "SJ P� ty clerk INSULATION AND JACKIv �P'ty' Iowa insulation with Ere -resistive, ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. 1 -inch 4-pcf density fiberglass insulation with fire -resistive, ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or ]-inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. 1/2 -inch 4-pcf density fiberglass insulation with fire -resistive, ASJ vapor barrier jacket or 1/2 -inch fire retardant flexible elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam insulation or 1 -inch polyisocyanurate closed cell insulation with vapor retarder film. B. All pre -formed fiberglass and elastomeric closed -cell plastic foam pipe insulation shall be provided with self -adhering and self-sealing overlapping flap. C. Handicapped Lavatory Drain and P -Trap Assembly and Hot and Cold Water Supply Pipe and Valve Assembly: Insulate handicap lavatory P -trap and angle valve assemblies with the premolded assembly as manufactured by "Truebro" Lav -Guard, Plumberex Pro -Extreme, or approved equal, white color with 3 -piece interlocking trap assembly and interlocking angle valve assemblies. Fasteners shall be nylon -type supplied with kit. D. Insulation of Piping Specialties on Cold Piping Services: Insulate unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, hoses, and expansion joints on cold piping services with flexible elastomeric cellular insulation. Thickness of elastomeric cellular insulation shall be equivalent to thickness of insulation on the piping service as specified in this Section or as shown on the drawings. Insulation shall be sealed to provide a vapor tight barrier. Cold piping services include domestic cold water systems. E. Piping Insulation Omitted: I. Insulation Omitted Plumbing Systems: Omit insulation on exposed plumbing fixture runouts from faces of wall or floor to fixture; on unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. F. Insulation Protection: 15407-3 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 1 2012 INSULATION THICKNESS y:59fM City Clerk Up to 1" Iowa City, Iowa 1. Pipe insulation exposed in finished areas shall be protected with 0.030 -inches thick ABS 1" plastic jacketing covers, Ceel-Co 100 Series or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with the MICA National Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose. B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to testing and acceptance of tests. C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. The appearance of the completed insulation shall be a significant factor in determining the acceptability of the work. D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered. E. Maintain integrity of vapor -barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage. F. Where vapor retarders are specified, elbows and fittings shall be wrapped with vapor retarder tape 3 - inches wide or shall have PVC jacketing. G. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory -molded, pre-cut or job - fabricated units (at installers option) except where specific form or type is indicated. H. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise indicated. I. Insulated piping systems shall be supported on the exterior of the insulation surface. Install protective metal shields and insulated inserts wherever needed to prevent compression of insulation. J. Metal shields: Conform to table below for minimum length of shield: PIPE SIZE INSULATION THICKNESS LENGTH OF SHIELD Less than I" Up to 1" 3" 1" — T, 1" 4 1/2" 1" — 2" 1 1/2" 5 1/2" 21/2"-4" 1" 61/2" 21/2"-4" 11/2" 71/2" 2 1/2" — 4" 2" 8 1/2" 21/2"-4" 21/2" 91/2" 15407-4 02012 by FEI K. Pipe Hanger, Trapeze, and Roller Support Insulation Insert Options: 1. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. Apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 -inch wide vapor barrier tape or band. 2. Pipe insulation shall be inserted inside coupling with insulation contacting internal wall. Secure using anchor channel. 3.02 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units. B. Protection: Insulation installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration. FILED FEB 21 2012 9: sq PM City Clerk Iowa city, Iowa 15407-5 02012 by FEI FILED FE8 21 2012 SECTION 15410 s9 vM CUY Clcrk PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of plumbing piping and equipment is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. B. Types of plumbing piping and equipment specified in this Section include the following: 1. Potable Water Piping. 2. Soil and Waste Piping. 3. Storm Piping. 4. Plumbing Equipment: a. Water Meters b. Backflow Preventers C. Water Hammer Arresters d. Thermostatic Mixing Valves e. Drainage Piping Products f. Grease Interceptors 5. Natural Gas Piping. a. Gas Valves and Stops. b. Flexible Connectors. C. Gas Line Pressure Regulators. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing piping and equipment -0f types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with plumbing piping, and equipment work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local, City, and State Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. 2. ADA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of American Disability Act for material construction and installation of products. 15410-1 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 pnl7 4:59 PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. 4. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to emergency plumbing equipment. 5. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which comply with UL and NEMA standards: 6. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: For the following equipment, comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction, and stamp with ASME Code symbol: a. Safety relief valves. b. Expansion tanks. 7. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code". 8. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install potable water and natural gas systems in accordance with Local Utility Company requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers plumbing piping and equipment specifications, including installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicated dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for all components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of plumbing piping and equipment. Include "trouble -shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed plumbing piping systems. 1.04 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.O1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS 15410-2 02012 by FEI A. General: Provide plumbing piping materials and equipment products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with applicable Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in potable water systems. Where more than one (t) type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 2.02 POTABLE WATER PIPING FILED (Pipe material selected shall be in compliance with all applicable codes.) FEB 21 2012 Y:5P r A. Interior Water Piping: C1 Clerk low ,Iowa 1. Tube Size 2 -inch and Smaller: Copper tube; Type L, hard -drawn temper; wrought -copper fittings, solder joints. 2. Tube Size 2 -1/2 -inch and Larger: Copper tube; Type L, hard -drawn temper; wrought -copper fittings, solder joints. 3. Pressfit Mechanical Joint Pipe and Fittings, '/z -inch through 4 -inch: Copper tube; Type L, hard -drawings temper; pressfit fittings. 4. High-density cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) piping, cold expansion compression sleeve fittings. Distribution manifold per piping manufacturers requirements. B. Exterior Water Piping and Piping Under Floor Slab: Tube Size 3/4 -inch and Smaller: Copper tube; Type K soft -annealed temper; cast -copper flared tube fittings. 2. Tube Size 1 -inch through 2 -1/2 -inch: Copper tube; Type K, soft -annealed temper; wrought -copper fittings, solder joints. 3. Pipe Size 3 -inch and Larger: Ductile -iron pipe, with cement -mortar lining; Class 150; ductile -iron fittings, with rubber -gasket joints. 4. High-density cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) piping, cold expansion compression sleeve fittings. 2.03 SOIL, WASTE AND STORM PIPING (Pipe material selected shall be in compliance with all codes.) A. Aboveground Soil, Waste, Vent and Storm Piping: Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 888 and CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, hub -and -spigot cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with neoprene compression gaskets conforming to ASTM C 564. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. 15410-3 02012 by FEI 2. Hubless Cast -Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with stainless steel shields and neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310. FILED All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. FEB 22W y,5�j PA 3. Galvanized Steel Pipe: Schedule 40; Class 125; galvanized cast-iron fittings, drainage Qty clerk pattern, screwed joints. Iowa Cuy, Iowa 4. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, Type DWV for pipe, and cast -bronze, drainage pattern fittings, with soldered joints. a. Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B 32, 50-50 tin -lead solder. B. Underground Building Drain and Storm Piping: Cast-iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Service weight, hub -and -spigot cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF International. a. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C 564 2. Hubless Cast-iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301, shielded couplings; ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion -resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and listed by NSF Intemational. Heavy duty shielded stainless steel couplings: With stainless steel shield, stainless steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 1540 rubber sleeve. 2.04 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Water Meter: Furnish and install meter as required by Local Utility Company. Provide roughing -in and bypass for meter in accordance with Utility Company requirements. Meter cost shall be included in Contractors bid. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water meters of one (1) of the following: a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Hersey Products Inc. C. Neptune Water Meter Co.; Subs. Neptune Intl. d. Rockwell Intl.; Municipal & Utility Div. e. Zurn Industries Inc.; Hays Fluid Controls Div. B. Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure principle assembly consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Bronze body construction up to 2" size, epoxy coated cast iron over 2" with bronze, plastic or stainless steel internal parts. Assemblies shall include test cocks, and pressure - differential relief valve located between two (2) positive seating check valves, and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013. 15410-4 02012 by FEI I . Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide backflow preventer of one (1) of the following: FILED a. Conbraco. b. Febco Sales, Inc.; Subs of Charles M. Bailey Co., Inc. FEB 212012 C. Hersey Products, Inc. y ; 6qp City d. ITT Lawler; Fluid Handling Div. Iowa lkna e. Watts Regulator Co. f. Zurn/Wilkins. C. Water Hammer Arrestors: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 PSI, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH -201. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water hammer arrestors of one (1) of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Josam Co. C. Mifab, Inc. d. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. e. Wade Division of Tyler Corp. f. Zum Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. g. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. It. Watts Drainage Products. D. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Mixing valve shall be of the thermostatic type with liquid filled motor. Valve shall be capable of maintaining outlet temperature at a minimum 2 GPM flow up to maximum flow. Provide single valve or multiple valve arrangement to accomplish flow requirements. Valve shall have bronze body construction with corrosion resistant components and shall employ a sliding piston control mechanism. Piston and liner shall be of stainless steel material. Valve shall come equipped with removable union end stop and check inlets with stainless steel strainers and discharge thermometer and shutoff valve. 1. Cabinet: Provide 18 -gage stainless steel cabinet. Body and door shall be 18 -gage type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermostatic mixing valves of one (1) of the following: a. PIT Lawler; Fluid Handling Div. b. Leonard Valve Co. C. Powers. d. Symmons Industries, Inc. e. T&S Brass and Bronze Work, Inc. E. Drainage Piping Products: 15410-5 02012 by FEI r.; I . General: Provide factory -fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated. FEB 2 1 7012 Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with , : S 9 f vL installation requirements and governing regulations. t_uc Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 2 Cleanout Plugs: Cast -bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head. 3. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame; cleanout plug; adjustable round top as follows: Nickel -Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit of the pattern and proper recess to fit floor finish. 4. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast -bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws. 5. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required. 6. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast -bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing. F. Grease Interceptors: Provide cast-iron grease interceptors, of size and capacity as indicated with cover and arrangement to match installation requirements. Conform to PDI G101, and provide PDI Seal of Approval. Construct unit of cast-iron, coated with acid -resisting rubber on outside and inside. Provide steel extension, coated with acid -resisting rubber, for recessed units. Provide flow control fitting. 2.05 NATURAL GAS PIP/NG A. Gas Service Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Black steel pipe; Schedule 40; wrought -steel buttwelding fittings. a. Wrapping: Machine wrap pipe using 50% overlap wrap, with polyvinyl chloride tape. Hand wrap fittings using 100% overlap wrap extending 6 inches beyond fitting onto wrapped pipe. Comply with tape manufacturer's installation instructions. b. Cathodic Protection: 17 pound prepackaged magnesium anode with No. 12 wire extension. C. Dielectric Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with Gas Utility Company requirements for use in service indicated, which effectively isolate underground piping from above ground piping (electrical conductance), to prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion. 2. Pipe Sizes 1/2 -inch through 12 -inch: Thermoplastic gas pressure pipe, tubing, and fittings complying with ASTM D 2513. 3. Pipe Sizes 2 -inch through 12 -inch: Reinforced epoxy resin gas pressure pipe and fittings complying with ASTM D 2517. 15410-6 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 `7".§f PM Iowa city, B. Building Distribution Pipe and Fittings: Y Iowa 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Electric -Resistance Welded or Type S, Seamless, Grade B, Schedule 40, black. 2. Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing: ANSI LC -1, complying with Standard for Fuel Gas Piping Using Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing (CSST), listed by CSA International. Tubing shall be manufactured with Type 304 stainless steel, nominal 0.010 -inch wall thickness. Tubing shall be jacketed with UV -resistant polyethylene meeting the requirements of ASTM E84 for flame spread and smoke density. 3. Malleable -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads conforming to ASME B 1.20.1. 4. Cast -Iron Fittings: ASME B 16. 1, Classes 125 and 250. 5. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt -welding type; and ASME B16.11, forged steel. 6. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.5. 7. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, black malleable -iron; female pattern; brass -to -iron seat; ground joint. 8. Corrugated Stainless Steel Fittings: ASTM B16 Type 360 brass fittings, double wall flare seal. C. Gas Valves and Stops: Gas Stops, 2 -Inch and Smaller: AGA -certified design for 2 PSIG or less natural gas, with AGA stamp, plug or ball type, bronze body and bronze plug or chrome -plated brass ball. Include flat head, square head, or lever handle and threaded ends. Include locking (tamperproof) feature. 2. Gas Valves, 2 -Inch and Smaller: ASME B16.33, 125 PSI WOG, cast-iron body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head, tapered -plug type, with threaded ends. Include locking (tamperproof) feature. 3. Gas Valves, 2 -1/2 -Inch and Larger: MSS SP -78, Class 125 or 175 WOG, lubricated plug type, semisteel body, wrench -operated, with flanged ends. Include locking (tamperproof) device feature. D. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24 or ANSI Z21.24a, copper alloy. E. Gas Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18 or ANSI Z21.18a, single stage, corrosion -resistant gas pressure regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2 -1/2 -inch and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow as indicated or required for service. 15410-7 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 v:5g PM PART 3 - EXECUTION City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF POTABLE, WASTE, AND STORM PIPING A. General: Install plumbing piping in accordance with all applicable specifications, and in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Potable, waste, vent and storm piping shall not be installed within any fire resistive rated assembly wall of two (2) hours or greater. C. Pressfit systems shall be installed with fitting ends pressed onto the pipe using press tool, jaws and ring sets equipped with the proper size press jaws in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. D. Cleanouts for soil, waste, and storm piping: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, as required by all applicable Plumbing Codes; and at each change in direction of piping greater than 90°; at minimum intervals of 50 -feet for piping 4 -inch and smaller and 100 -feet for piping larger than 4 -inch; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. 2. Provide on grade, exterior dual cleanouts on all building storm drains and building sanitary drains. Cleanouts shall be located within 5 -feet of exterior wall of building, shall be heavy duty type and shall be set in 24 -inch x 24 -inch thick concrete pad. 3. Provide access to all cleanouts. Install floor and wall cleanout covers or access panels/doors for concealed piping, select type to match adjacent building finish and as required for wall fire rating. E. Slope for Soil, Waste, and Storm Piping: Install piping pitched to drain at uniform slope not less than that indicated by governing plumbing code, or at a minimum, the following: I. Pipe Size 3 -inch and Smaller: 1/4 -inch per foot (2% slope). 2. Pipe Size flinch to 6 -inch: 1/8 -inch per foot (1% slope). 3. Pipe Size Larger than 6 -inch: 1/16 -inch per foot (0.5% slope). F. Solder Joints in Potable Water Systems: All solder for joints in potable water systems shall contain less than 0.2% lead and shall be 95% tin, 5% antimony as manufactured by M.C. Canfield and Sons of Union, New Jersey or approved equal. 15410-8 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 'Y:54 DO, Cny Clerk G. Hanger and Supports: Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports: Iowa City, Iowa PIPE MATERIAL HORIZONTAL IN VERTICAL IN FEET FEET Cast -Iron Soil Pipe 5 15 Copper Tubing — 1 -1/4 -Inches and Smaller 6 10 Copper Tubing- 1 -1/2 -Inches and Larger 10 10 Steel Pipe 12 15 H. Waste, Vent, and Water Connections: The minimum size of waste, vent, and water connections to the individual fixtures shall be as follows: Fixtures Waste Vent C.W. H.W. Water Closets (Flush Valve) 4" ]-12" 1" 25 Urinals 2" 1-I/4" 3/4" Lavatories 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1/2" 1/2" Sinks 1-1/2" 1-12" 12" 1/2" Janitors Sinks 3" 1-12" 12" 12" Water Coolers 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 12" 1/2" Water Hydrants 3/4" 2. The minimum size of underfloor waste connection from any individual fixture shall be 2 -inch pipe size, regardless of waste connection size to the fixture. I. Roof Drains: Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. Roof drain connections to storm drainage piping shall be made by no -hub connectors or neoprene gaskets for inside caulk outlets. Other methods of connection are not acceptable. J. Floor Drains: Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below with coordination with general construction and architectural drawings to provide proper slope to drain: RADIUS OF AREA DRAINED — FEET 1/2 5 3/4 10 1 15 1-1/4 20 1-12 25 Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer. 2. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 3. Coordinate drain location with equipment served. 15410-9 02012 by FEI FEB 21 2012 Y t5, 1y Pen Iowa City, Iowa 3.03 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Where plans indicate fixtures to be furnished by others, this Contractor shall provide all rough -in, furnish P -traps, stops and supplies and shall connect such fixtures to the plumbing system. Traps and tailpieces shall be of the same material as the pipe. B. Pipe and fittings exposed in finished areas shall be chrome plated. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Water Meter: Install water meter in accordance with Local Utility Company's installation instructions, and comply with requirements. B. Backflow Preventers: Install backflow preventers at water service entrance and at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate backflow preventer serving equipment in same room as equipment being connected. Pipe relief outlet without valves, to nearest floor drain. C. Water Hammer Arrestors: Install water hammer arrestors with isolation valve for all quick -closing type valves. Locate water hammer arrestors per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Interceptors: Install interceptors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. Anchor interceptors securely to substrate; locate so adequate clearance is provided to remove covers and sediment baskets. Set recessed units so top of cover is flush with finished floor. E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Install thermostatic mixing valve with inlet stops and discharge thermometer and shutoff valve. Provide hot water, cold water and recirculated water connections into mixing valve as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING A. Pipe Applications: Flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same or higher than system pressure rating may be used in applications below, except where specified otherwise. 2 -Inches and Smaller: a. Steel pipe, malleable -iron, threaded fittings and threaded joints. b. Corrugated stainless steel tubing and brass fittings. 2. 2 -1/2 -Inches and Larger: Steel pipe, butt -welding fittings, and welded joints. B. Installation of Piping: Install natural gas piping in accordance with all applicable specifications, and in compliance with all NFPA gas codes and Local Utility Company recommendations. Provide minimum of 24 -inches of cover over exterior gas line. 15410-10 02012 by FEI C. 2. Install corrugated stainless steel tubing and installation guides, and in compliance with accordance with ANSI LC -1. FILED FEB 21 2012 IS f c7t Cletk Iowa City, Iowa fittings according to manufacturer's design and all applicable codes. Test CSST systems in 3. Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within project, and bond tightly to grounding connection. 4. Vent ports from all gas pressure regulators shall be individually piped to outside the building with termination as required by Gas Utility Company. 5. Above -Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above -ceiling spaces (subject to approval of the authority having jurisdiction), whether or not such spaces are used as a plenum. Do not locate valves in such spaces. 6. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing against physical damage when it is installed inside partitions or hollow walls. This does not apply to tubing passing through partitions or walls. 7. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping may be installed in masonry walls (subject to approval of authority having jurisdiction). 8. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. This does not apply to accessible above -ceiling space specified above. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include outlets of gas meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use minimum -length nipple of three (3) pipe diameters, but not less than 3 -inches long, and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for removal of plug or cap. Gas Service: 1. General: Arrange with Local Gas Utility Company to provide gas service to indicated location with shut-off at terminus. Consult with Utility Company as to extent of its work, costs, fees and permits involved. Pay such costs and fees; obtain permits. 2. Extend service pipe from Utility Company's terminus to inside building wall, under Utility Company's direction. 3. Provide shut off outside building where indicated, in adjustable gas service valve box, with cover set flush to finished grade. 4. Provide shut off in gas service pipe at entry in building, extend pipe to gas meter location indicated; provide parts and accessories required by Utility Company to connect meter. 15410-I1 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 µ:51 PNt City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 5. Instal] gas meter in accordance with Local Gas Utility Company's installation instructions, setting meter on a concrete pad, or hang from wall as recommended. 6. Provide dielectric union at all underground to above ground piping connections. 7. Install cathodic protection anode and braze No. 12 connecting wire to underground gas line. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation piping systems until they have been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. B. Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and Purging" and Local Gas Utility requirements. 1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. 2. Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and the authority having jurisdiction. C. Test water distribution piping as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved for testing. 3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 PSIG above the operating pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four (4) hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action D. Drainage and Vent Piping System Tests: Test drainage and vent systems according to procedures or authority having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested. 15410-12 02012 by FEI 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose for testing work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing -in piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of 1 -inch water column. Use a U-tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects, using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. FILED FEB 21 2012 3.07 CLEANING -9, 5y PAA_ City Clerk A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: I°wa Ci'Y, Iowa I. Purge new potable water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AW WA C 651 or AW WA C 652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) and allow to stand for 24 hours. C. Drain system or part thereof of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three (3) hours. d. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system following allowed standing time. 15410-13 ©2012 by FEI e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination. 1-0to WE FEB 21 7012 y:5� PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 15410-1a 02012 by FEI SECTION 15420 FILED PLUMBING PUMPS FEB 21 2012 Iowa_City, Iowa PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of plumbing pumps is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. B. Types of plumbing pumps specified in this Section include the following: 1. In line Hot Water Recirculating Pumps 2. Hot Water Recirculation System Aquastat 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing pumps of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local, City, and State Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. 2. ADA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of American Disability Act for material construction and installation of products. 3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. 4. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which comply with UL and NEMA standards: 5. H.I. "Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps" for pump design, manufacture and installation. 6. UL 778 "Standard for Motor -Operated Water Pumps' for construction requirements. Include UL listing and labeling. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 15420-I 02012 by FEI FILED T12 4a1 e K City Clerk Iowa City, low& A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers pump specifications, including installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicated dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for all components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each pump. Include "trouble -shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle plumbing pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged plumbing pumps or components; replace with new. B. Store plumbing pumps and components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading plumbing pumps and moving them to final location. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide plumbing of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with applicable Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in potable water systems. Where more than one (1) type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 2.02 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT A. Inline Hot Water Recirculating Pumps: I. General Description: Circulators shall be horizontal inline, centrifugal, separately coupled, single -stage, all -bronze, radially split case design, with mechanical seals, and rated for 125 PSIG working pressure and 225°F continuous water temperature. 2. Casings: Bronze, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller than 2 -1/2 - inches, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections. 3. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung single suction, fabricated from Rolled Temper brass conforming to ASTM B 36, and keyed to shaft. 4. Pump Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil -lubricated copper sleeve. 15420-2 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 J�: Ci s� PM Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 5. Mechanical Seals: Carbon steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket. 6. Pump Bearings: Oil -lubricated, bronze journal and thrust bearings. 7. Motor Bearings: Oil -lubricated sleeve bearings. 8. Shaft Couplings: Flexible; capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. 9. Motors: Resiliently mounted to the pump casing. 10. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide in-line H.W. Circulating pumps of one (1) of the following: a. Amtrol Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. C. Grundfos d. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. e. Taco, Inc. B. Hot Water Recirculation System Aquastat: General: Where indicated, provide aquastat on domestic hot water recirculation line to enable hot water recirculation pump. Aquastat control range shall be 95°F to 115°F. Aquastat shall be Taco Model 563-2 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING PUMPS A. Inline Hot Water Recirculating Pumps: Install per manufacturers recommendations, with a non -slam check valve and ball valve on discharge, and ball valve and strainer on the suction side. 2. Support pump from hot water recirculation piping system. B. Hot Water Recirculation System Aquastat: I. General: Install hot water recirculation system aquastat on domestic hot water recirculation line adjacent to hot water recirculation pump, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 15420-3 02012 by FEI 2. Adjustment: Adjust aquastat to enable recirculation pump at 95°F hot water return temperature, and disable pump at 110°F. FILED FEB 2 t 212 y:5gt fn City Clerk Iowa City, inwa 15420-4 02012 by FEI SECTION 15440 FILEN FEB 21 2012 4: Sq p,K PLUMBING FIXTURES t: ry y !owa City, Iowa PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of plumbing fixtures is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. B. Types of plumbing fixtures, specified in this Section include the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures. 2. Stainless Steel Sinks: 3. Mop Service Basins: 4. Faucets: 5. Flush Valves: 6. Water Closet Seats: 7. Water Coolers: 8. Fixture Supports: 9. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, Interceptors, and Drainage Piping Products: 10. Hose Bibbs, Wall Hydrants, Yard Hydrants: 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fixtures, of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Local, City, and State Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. 2. ADA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of American Disability Act for material construction and installation of products. 3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. 4. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which comply with UL and NEMA standards: 15440-1 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 C ty PM Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers plumbing fixture specifications, including installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selection points clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicated dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of plumbing piping, fixtures, and equipment. Include "trouble -shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual. 1.04 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide factory -fabricated fixture products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with applicable Plumbing Codes. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in potable water systems. Where more than one (1) type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. General: Provide factory -fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated. For each type fixture, provide fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by their published product information; either as designed and constructed, or as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for a complete installation. Where more than one (1) type is indicated, selection is Installer's option; but all fixtures of same type must be furnished by single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing regulations. B. Materials: Unless otherwise specified, comply with applicable Federal Specification WW -P -541/ -Series sections pertaining to plumbing fixtures, fittings, trim, metals and finishes. Comply with requirements of WW -P -541/ -specification relative to quality of ware, glazing, enamel, composition and finish of metals, air gaps, and vacuum breakers, even though some plumbing fixtures specified in this Section are not described in WW -P-541/-. C. Supplies and Stops: All fixtures shall be provided with supplies with stops. Stops shall be chrome -plated solid brass with brass stems and chloramine -chlorine resistant washers. Stops shall be keyed when installed in public restrooms. 15440-2 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 P012 x: 51 PM City Clcrkt' JAM City, Iowa 2. Supplies shall be chloramine -chlorine resistant braided stainless steel flexible connectors. D. Traps: Traps shall be provided for all fixtures without integral traps. P -traps shall be adjustable chrome plated heavy cast brass with 17 gauge tubular wall end, brass slip nuts, and brass flanges. 2. Sink end waste kits shall have cast brass tee and 17 gauge tubular waste arm and brass slip nuts. E. Vacuum Breakers: All plumbing fixtures with hose attachment capability including hand held shower units with flexible hose shall be equipped with vacuum breaker. F. Fixture Carriers and Supports: Provide carriers and supports for all fixtures requiring same. Provide factory -fabricated carrier extension kits per manufacturers recommendations required to accommodate depth of wall or plumbing chase. G. Fixture Schedules: Comply with fixture requirements contained in fixture schedule as indicated on drawings. Plumbing fixtures shall be of one (1) of the manufacturers indicated and in accordance with the information and manufacturers catalog numbers indicated. Where manufacturer's catalog numbers have been updated or deleted, fixtures shall be of similar configuration and of similar or better quality than that indicated. H. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plumbing fixtures and trim of one (1) of the following: 1. Lavatories, Service Sinks, Water Closets, Urinals, Bath Tubs: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Crane Co. C. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co. d. Kohler. e. Toto. 2. Stainless Steel Sinks: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Elkay Mfg. Co. C. Moen; Div. of Stanadyne. d. Just Manufacturing Co. 3. Mop Service Basins: a. Acorn Engineering b. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. C. Bradley Corp. d. Crane Co. e. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co. 15440-3 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 4;SR PMS CQ Cterk Iowa City, Iowa f. Fiat Products. g. Mustee. h. Stets -Williams 4. Faucets: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products. b. Chicago Faucet Co. C' Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. d. Eljer Plumbingware Div.; Household International Co. C. Elkay Mfg. Co. f. Kohler. g. Moen. h. Speakman. i. Symmons. j. T & S Brass k. Toto. 1. Zum. 5. Flush Valves: a. Delta Faucet Co.; Div. of Masco Corp. b. Sloan Valve Co. C. Toto d. Zorn. 6. Water Closet Seats: a. Bemis Mfg. Co. b. Beneke Corp. C. Forbes -Wright Industries, Inc.; Church Products. d. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats. 7. Water Coolers: a. Acorn Engineering b. Elkay Mfg. Co. C. Filtrine Manufacturing Co. d. Halsey Taylor Div.; Household International Co. C. Haws Drinking Faucet Co. I. Oasis — Reg. Trademark of Ebco Mfg. Co. 8. Fixture Supports: a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Mifab, Inc. C. Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Zum Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 15440-4 02012 by FEI a 10. Floor Drains, Roof Drains, Interceptors, and Drainage Piping Products: a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Mifab, Inc. C. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Drainage Products. f. Zurn Industries, Hydromechanics Div. Hose Bibbs, Wall Hydrants, Yard Hydrants: a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. J.R. Smith Mfg. Co. C. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Drainage Products. e. Woodford Mfg. Co. f Zum Industries. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION FILED FEB 21 2012 Y: 5S P//��'� City MCI low Cuy, Iowa A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing fixtures, are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES A. General: Install plumbing fixtures of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights; in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, roughing -in drawings, and with recognized industry practices. Ensure that plumbing fixtures comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Comply with applicable requirements of the National Uniform Code pertaining to installation of plumbing fixtures. B. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to indicated supports or building construction; and ensure that fixtures are level and plumb. Secure plumbing supplies behind or within wall construction so as to be rigid, and not subject to pull or push movement. C. Protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period. Provide protective inserts for bathtubs and shower bases designed to prevent scratching of finished surface. D. Supplies and Stops: All fixtures shall be provided with supplies with stops. E. Traps: Provide traps for all fixtures without integral traps. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 15440-5 02012 by FEI A. Piping Systems and Fixtures: 1. Fill water piping. Check components and fixtures to determine that they are not air bound and -that piping is full of water. 2. Perform the following steps before putting into operation: a. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. FILED b. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. FEB 2 1 2012 C. Open throttling valves to proper setting. InCPQ lerk Iowa City, Iowa d. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. e. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 3. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments and operation. a. Water -Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 PSIG maximum, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Energize pumps and verify proper operation. 15440-6 02012 by FEI SECTION 15441 FILET? FEB 21 2012 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 17k: Sy PNL IO xa clly, 1n ox PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of domestic water heaters and equipment is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B. Types of equipment specified in this section include the following: Gas -Fired Water Heaters. C. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of electrical sections: Water heater manufacturer shall provide control wiring schematic for water heater shutdown switches located at mechanical room exit doors as shown on the drawings. Shutdown control system shall comply with ASME CSD -1, latest edition "Controls and Safety Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers". Mechanical Contractor shall provide the switches and all required control wiring. All wiring shall be in conduit. A stainless steel guard shall be provided to prevent accidental operation of switches. Switches shall have engraved nameplates to identify switch as "Water Heater Emergency Shutdown". 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of high efficiency gas-fired water heaters of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with high efficiency gas-fired water heaters similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: I. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local, City, and State Plumbing Code pertaining to plumbing materials construction and installation of products. 2. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and electrical components required as part of plumbing equipment, which have been listed and labeled by the following Underwriters Laboratories Standards and comply with NEMA standards: a. UL 1453, "Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters." 3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI Z223.1 (NFPA 54) "National Fuel Gas Code", as applicable to installation of gas-fired water heaters. 15441-1 ©2012 by FEI 4. AGA and NSF Labels: Provide gas-fired water heaters that have been listed and labeled by FILED American Gas Association and National Sanitation Foundation. FEB 21012 5. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: For the following equipment, comply with ASME Boiler and Ciry Clerk Pressure Vessel Code for construction, and stamp with ASME Code symbol: I_owa_C_iiy, Iowa a. Commercial water heaters. b. Safety relief valves. C. Expansion tanks. 6. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code". 7. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install potable water and natural gas systems in accordance with Local Utility Company requirements. 8. ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than prescribed in ANSI/ASHRAE(MS 90A. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's domestic water heaters, including installation and start-up instructions, and capacity and ratings, with selections clearly indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings indicated dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for all components, clearly indicating all required field electrical connections. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each item of domestic water heaters. Include "trouble -shooting' maintenance guides. Include this data in maintenance manual. E. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed domestic water heater systems. 1.04 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Water Heater Warranty Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace water heaters and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, coils, heat exchangers, and 15441-2 02012 by FEI burners. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract Documents. 2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years after date of Substantial Completion. C. Tank Warranty Period: Five (5) years after date of Substantial Completion. D. Labor Replacement Allowance: Provide Labor Replacement Allowance of $1,000 for installing contractor if water heater requires replacement during the initial three (3) year warranty. PART 2- PRODUCTS FILED 2.01 MATERIALSAND PRODUCTS FEB 21 2012 "A., s9 n•'L PART 3 - EXECUTION City Clerk I015"d City, towa 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which domestic water heaters are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. B. High -Efficiency Gas -Fired Water Heaters: I. General: Install gas-fired water heaters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes. 2. Support: Set units on concrete pads, orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access. Level and plumb unit. 3. Gas Supply: Connect to gas line with drip leg, tee, gas cock, and union; full size of unit inlet connection. Locate piping so as not to interfere with service of unit. 4. Install vent piping from gas train pressure regulators and valves to outside the building. Terminate vent piping with brass screened vent cap fitting. Do not combine vents except with approval of local authority. 5. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. 6. Start -Up: Start-up test, and adjust gas-fired water heaters in accordance with manufacturers start-up instructions, and Utility Company's requirements. Check and calibrate controls, adjust burner for maximum efficiency. 7. High Efficiency Venting: Install Sch. 40 PVC for combustion air piping and stainless steel AL294C positive pressure vent system or Sch. 40 PVC and vent piping in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Terminate combustion air piping with screened gooseneck; terminate vent piping with approved stack cap. Maintain UL -listed minimum 15441-3 ©2012 by FEI clearances from combustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories as indicated for complete installation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation domestic water heaters until they have been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. B. Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems according to NFPA 54, Part 4 "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and Purging" and Local Gas Utility requirements. C. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained. D. Report test results promptly and in writing to the Architect and the authority having jurisdiction. FILED FEB 2 t 7012 1�:;1 PM Iowa G , Iowa 15441-4 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 f: va PP SECTION 15530 Iowa c" _City, Iowa REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of refrigerant piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of refrigerant piping and specialties specified in this section include the following: I. Piping and Fittings. 2. Refrigeration Valves. 3. Refrigeration Specialties. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of refrigerant piping products, of types, materials and sizes required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with refrigerant piping work similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. ANSI Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI 1331.5 "Refrigeration Piping" and extend application lower pressure limits to pressures below 15 PSIG. 2. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with IAPMO "Uniform Mechanical Code". 3. ASHRAE Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. General: Provide piping materials and factory -fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ANSI B31.5 'Refrigeration Piping" where applicable; base pressure rating on refrigerant piping system maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and 15530-1 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 W.S9 PM City Clcrk Iowa City, Iowa equipment connections; provide fittings of materials, which match pipe materials used in refrigerant piping systems. Where more than one (1) type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. 2.02 PIPING AND TUBING MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Part 3, Article 'PIPE APPLICATION' for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, hard -drawn straight lengths, and soft -annealed coils, seamless copper tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping. C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard -drawn straight lengths and soft -annealed coils, seamless copper tubing. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Wrought -copper Fittings: ANSI B 16.22, streamlined pattern. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-I (Silver). 2.05 SPECIAL REFRIGERATION VALVES A. General: Special valves required for refrigerant piping include the following types: Ball and Check Valves: a. Ball Shutoff Valves: Forged brass, packed, back seating, winged seal cap, 300°F temperature rating, 500 PSI working pressure. b. Check Valves: Forged brass, accessible internal parts, soft synthetic seat, fully - guided brass piston and stainless steel spring, 250°F temperature rating, 500 PSI working pressure. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide globe and check valves of one (1) of the following: (1) Henry Valve Co. (2) Parket Hannifin Corp., Refrigeration & Air -Gond. Div. (3) Sporlan Valve Co. 2. Solenoid Valves: a. 2 -Way Solenoid Valves: Forged brass, designed to conform to ARI 760, normally closed, teflon valve seat, NEMA I solenoid enclosure, 24 -volt, 60 Hz., UL Listed, I/2 -inch conduit adapter, 250°F temperature rating, 400 PSI working pressure. 15530-2 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 k�K�Giy,lowa b. Manual Operator: Provide manual operator to open valve. C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide solenoid valves of one (1) of the following: (1) Alco Controls Div., Emerson Electric Co, (2) Automatic Switch Co. (3) Sporland Valve Co. 2.06 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES (Coordinate with condensing unit manufacturer) A. Refrigerant Strainers: Brass shell and end connections, brazed joints, monel screen, 100 mesh, UL Listed, 350 PSI working pressure. B. Moisture -Liquid Indicators: Forged brass, single port, removable cap, polished optical glass, solder connections, UL Listed, 200" F temperature rating, 500 PSI working pressure. C. Refrigerant Filter -Driers: Steel shell, ceramic fired desiccant core, solder connections, UL listed, 500 PSI working pressure. D. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Provide corrosion -resistant, spring loaded, stainless steel springs, pressure operated, evaporator pressure regulator, in size and working pressure indicated, with copper connections. E. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Provide discharge line mufflers as recommended by equipment manufacturer for use in service indicated, UL -listed. F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide refrigeration accessories of one (1) the of the following: Alco Controls Div., Emerson Electric Co. 2. Henry Valve Co. 3. Parker -Hannifin Corp., Refrigeration & Air -Conditioning Div. 4. Sporlan Valve Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which refrigerant piping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Use Type L or Type ACR drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints above ground, within building. Use Type K, annealed temper copper tubing for 2 -inch and smaller without joints, below ground and within slabs. Mechanical fittings (crimp or flair) are not permitted. 15530-3 ©2012 by FEI B. Install annealed temper tubing in pipe duct. Vent pipe duct to the outside. C. If other than Type ACR tubing is used, clean and protect inside of tubing as follows: 1. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through the tubing FILED by means of a wire or an electrician's tape. FEB 21 2012 2. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. City C e`k Iowa Cuy, Iowa 3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint. 4. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SPECIAL REFRIGERANT VALVES A. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 - "The Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." B. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop. C. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fittings as possible. D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection. E. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger or between pipes for insulation and installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation. F. Insulate suction lines. Liquid lines are not required to be insulated, except where they are installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit. 1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated. G. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically. H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2 -inch per 10 -feet downward slope away from the compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 -inch per 10 -feet downward slope to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends, which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging slugs. 15530-4 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 -7 P'o City Clerk Iowa Oily, Iowa 3. Install traps and double risers where required to entrain oil in vertical runs and in accordance with unit manufacturer's custom piping diagram. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections. K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated. L. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications. M. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. N. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joints, columns, walls and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1 -inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal. O. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 -inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 -inch and larger shall be sheet metal. Q. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. R. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down. Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve, hot gas bypass valve, compressor suction valve, and as required to protect refrigerant piping system components. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERATION A. Refrigerant Strainers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated, and in accessible location for service. B. Moisture -Liquid Indicators: Install in refrigerant liquid lines as indicated, and in accessible location for service. C. Refrigerant Filter -Dryers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated, and in accessible location for service. D. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Install in refrigerant suction lines or evaporator outlets as indicated. Adjust, if required, for proper evaporator pressure. 15530-5 ©2012 by FEI E. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Install as indicated, in horizontal or downflow portion of hot - gas lines, immediately after leaving compressor; not in riser. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping". Perform initial test with dry nitrogen, using soap solution to test all joints. Perform final test with 27 -inch Hg vacuum, and then 200 PSI using halide torch. System must be entirely leak -free. B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. 3.07 DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING SYSTEM A. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation. B. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 35°F is indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. C. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows and low spots in piping. D. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of five (5) hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system. E. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas; allow pressure to build up to 2 PSI. F. Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide full operating charge. FILED FEB 2 1 7012 15530-6 02012 by FEI SECTION 15670 CONDENSING UNITS PARTI- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED FILED FEB 21 2012 Y: 51 P lo City Clerk % low. A. Extent of condensing units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of condensing units specified in this section include the following: 1. Air-cooled condensing units. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of condensing units, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Codes and Standards: ARI Compliance: Provide capacity ratings for condensing units in accordance with Air - Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigeration system of condensing units in accordance with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". 3. ASHRAE Compliance: Condensing units shall meet or exceed the minimum COP/Efficiency levels as prescribed in ASHRAE 90A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design". 4. ASME Compliance: Construct and test water cooled condensing units in accordance with American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII. 5. UL Compliance: Provide condensing units which are listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and have UL label affixed. 1.03 SURM17TALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions. 15670-1 ©2012 by FEI FEB 2 1 7012 4:51 P M city cierL Iowa City, "ffa Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder -type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required for final installation of condensing units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory; including "Trouble -Shooting" Maintenance Guide; plus servicing, and preventive maintenance procedures and schedule. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual. D. Refrigerant Piping Schematic: Condensing unit manufacturer shall prepare and submit a customized refrigerant piping schematic for each condensing unit application. Schematic shall include pipe sizing, riser details and all required refrigerant accessories. 1.04 DELIVER Y, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for rigging. Replace damaged condensing units or components. B. Store condensing units and components in clean, dry place off the ground. Protect from weather, water and physical damage. 1.05 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of substantial completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. General: Provide factory -assembled and tested, air-cooled condensing units, consisting of compressor, condenser coil, fan, motor, refrigerant reservoir, and operating controls. Provide capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled. B. Casing: Provide galvanized steel casing finished with baked enamel. Provide removal panel for access to controls, and weep holes for water drainage. Provide base with mounting holes. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. C. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with built-in overloads and vibration isolation. Provide for compressor motor, thermal and current sensitive overload device, internal high-pressure protection, high and low pressure cutout switches, start capacitor and relay, 2 -pole contactor, crankcase heater, and temperature actuated switch and timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle. 15670-2 @2012 by FEI D. Condenser: Construct coil of copper tubes and aluminum fins, or aluminum tubes and aluminum fins; complete with liquid accumulator and liquid subcooler. Provide aluminum propeller fan, direct driven, with permanently lubricated fan motor with thermal overload protection. E. Accessories: Provide the following accessories: I. Low -voltage thermostat and subbase to control condensing unit and evaporator fan. 2. Insulated suction and liquid tubing of length required. 3. Head pressure control to modulate condenser fan motor speed for low ambient conditions. 4. Low voltage control transformer. F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide residential air-cooled condensing units of one (1) of the following: 1. BDP Co.; Div. Carrier Corp. 2. Carrier A/C; Div. Carrier Corp. 3. Fedders A/C USA; Fedders Corp. FILED 4. Lennox Industries, Inc. 5. Trane Co. (The); Div. American Standard Inc. FF H 2 1 2012 6. York; Div. York International. Y: S9 Pm City Clerk PART 3 - EXECUTION Iowa cit, Iowa 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof structure, mounting supports, and membrane installations are completed to the proper point to allow installation of roof -mounted units. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Support: Install ground -mounted units on 4 -inch thick reinforced concrete pad, 4 -inches larger on each side than condensing unit. Anchor unit to pad using inserts or anchor bolts. Install roof -mounted units on mechanical equipment stand, constructed in accordance with NRCA Handbook. Anchor unit to structural frame with removable fasteners. Install floor -mounted units on flinch high concrete pad, 4 -inches larger on each side than condensing unit. Cast anchor bolt inserts in pad. C. Electrical: Fumish electrical field -wiring diagrams to Electrical Installer for power wiring to condensing units and control wiring for field -mounted controls. D. Air -Cooled Condensing Units: Connect refrigerant piping to unit; maintain required access to unit. 15670-3 02012 by FEI Install furnished field -mounted accessories. E. Water -Cooled Condensing Units: Connect refrigerant piping to unit and condenser water piping. Maintain clear tube removal space. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil. B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation, product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest. 3.04 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owners maintenance personnel as specified below. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing and preventive maintenance. 2. Review data in the Maintenance Manuals. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven (7) days' advance notice. FILED FEB 21 7012 it: S9 PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 15670-4 02012 by FEI SECTION 15783 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR UNITS FILED PART 1 - GENERAL FEB 21 2012 'r.ss4ML 1.01 WORKINCLUDED .1oCity Cterk wa City, Iowa A. Extent of energy recovery ventilator units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of energy recovery ventilator (ERV) units and accessories specified in this section include the following: ERV units with energy recovery core. 1.02 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION A. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, in compliance with electrical specifications: Control and interlock wiring between operating controls, indicating devices and unit control panels. B. See Mechanical/Electrical Coordination Schedule on drawings for further clarification. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ERV units, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Codes and Standards: 1, Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." 2. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90. 1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low -Rise Residential Buildings." C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 15783-1 02012 by FEI V-ILED FES2 1Sol 7n12 tq clerk A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of Iowacm!'towa selected model clearly indicated, dimensions, required clearances, weights, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings detailing the installation of mounting, securing and flashing of the roof curb to the structure for roof -mounted ERV units. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring for ERV units. Submit manufacturers ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each ERV unit, control and accessory; including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide, servicing guide and preventive maintenance schedule and procedures. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle energy recovery ventilator units and components carefully to prevent damage. Do not install damaged ERV units or components; replace with new. B. Store ERV units and components in clean dry place off the ground and protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with Manufacturers rigging and installation instructions for unloading ERV units and moving them to final location. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation of roof mounting curb with roof structure. B. Coordinate roof and roof curbs opening locations and for mechanical and electrical connections. 1.07 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Warranty Period, Compressors: Manufacturers standard, but not less than five (5) years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- . PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the plans, schedules and specification, provide ERV units by the following: 1. ConsERV 2. Renewaire 15783-2 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 P012 3. Venmar. ,Cry FM Iowa City, Iowa 2.02 ER V UNITS WITH ENERGY RECOVERY CORE A. Energy Transfer: The energy recovery core shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy between air streams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin. B. Passive Frost Control: The energy recovery core shall perform without the occurrence of condensation or frosting under normal operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10°F and inside relative humidity below 40%). Occasional extreme conditions shall not affect the usual function or performance of the energy recovery core. C. Positive Air stream Separation: Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall at all times travel in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix. The exhaust air transfer ratio (EATR) shall be ARI -1060 certified as 0% at balanced pressure. D. Laminar Flow: Airflow through the energy recovery core shall be laminar, avoiding deposition of particulates on the interior of the exchange plate material. E. Construction: 1. The energy recovery core shall be of static plate, cross-flow construction, with no moving parts. 2. The unit shall be capable of operating in winter and summer conditions without generating condensate. No condensate pan or drain shall be required. 3. The unit cabinet shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20 -gauge steel, with lapped corners. 4. The exhaust and fresh air streams shall both be protected by MERV 8 rated, 2 inch pleated, disposable filters positioned before the ERV core. 5. The unit shall have single -point power connection. 6. Motors shall comply with the U.S. Energy Policy Act (EPACT) minimum efficiency standards. Motors shall have internal thermal protection or be provided with appropriately sized motor starters with over current protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine area for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and performance of ERV units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearance. 15783-3 02012 by FEI 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection FILED requirements: FEB 2 1 101?' Ground Equipment. 4:55 fM 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published CAy Clerk g g Iowa City, Iowa torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 COMMISSIONING A. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified. B. Complete manufacturers installation and startup checks and perform the following: 1. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. 2. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 3. Check that labels are clearly visible. 4. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 5. Remove shipping bolts, blocks and tie -down straps. 6. Verify that construction filters are removed and new filters are installed. 7. Check acoustic insulation. 8. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. 9. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report. 10. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences. 11. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. 12. Calibrate sensors and controls. 13. Check internal isolators. 14. Check outside -air damper for proper stroke and interlock with retum-air dampers (if applicable). 15. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. Supply -air volume. b. Exhaust -air volume. C. Outside -air intake volume. 16. After starting and performance testing, change filters, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension check operation of power vents. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owners maintenance personnel as specified below: B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing and preventive maintenance. 15783-4 02012 by FEI C. Review data in the maintenance manuals. D. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven (7) days' advance notice. 3.06 SPARE PARTS A. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each ERV unit: One (1) set filters for each unit. FILED FEB 21 2012 9: 59 t°'ti Iowa City, Iowa 15783-5 02012 by FEI SECTION 15785 ELECTRIC HEATING SYSTEMS FILED FEB 21 2012 11 57' PM Cl PART 1 - GENERAL IowaCity City, lerkows 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of electric heaters required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. ri. Types of electric heating systems and accessories required for this project include the following: Cabinet Heaters C. Refer to other sections for controls, specialties, testing, adjusting and balancing required with electric heating equipment. D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work: 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on unit. E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements of Division 26 sections. I. Cabinet and Unit Heaters: Provide motor starting device and electrical disconnect means at each unit. F. Refer to Division 23 Section 15000 for equipment certification requirements. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms who regularly engaged in manufacture of electric heaters, of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with electric heaters similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: I. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 15785-1 02012 by FEI FILED A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for electric heaters showing dimensions, weights, FEB 21 7012 capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and finishes of materials and installation 4f; 54 ?1,,instructions. City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight loadings, construction details, required clearances and field connection details. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturers electrical requirements for power supply wiring to electric heaters. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, "trouble -shooting" maintenance guide, motor and drive replacement and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 23 Section 23 05 00. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle electric heaters carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged electric equipment or components; replace with new. B. Store electric heaters in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading electric heaters and installing them to final location. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric heaters of one (1) of the following: I. Berko 2. Chromalux 3. Indeeco 4. King 5. Markel 6. Qmark 2.02 CABINET HEATERS A. General: Provide cabinet heaters in locations as indicated and of capacities, style and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis, coil, fan wheels, housing, motor and insulation. B. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of non -corrosive, molded, fiberglass -reinforced thermo-plastic material. Construct fan scrolls of galvanized steel. 15785-2 02012 by FEI C. Electric Resistance Heating Elements: Steel fins shall be copper brazed to steel -sheath tubular heating elements. Element shall be finished with aluminized paint. Arrange fins and elements in uniform grid pattern mounted adjacent to discharge opening. Two-stage thermostat control. D. Motors: Provide two -speed motors with automatic overload protection. E. Cabinet: Die -formed 16 gauge fumiture-grade steel. All metal surfaces of the cabinet shall be phosphatized and finished in baked enamel. Provide surface mounted unit witV LpiflEwdischarge air direction. jj jj PART 3 - EXECUTION FEB 21 2012 If., $gi PM S P rk 3.01 EXAMINATION Cityt Iowa City,, Iowa A. Examine areas and conditions under which electric heaters are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC HEATERS A. General: Install units as indicated and in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit designation. C. Support units with mounting brackets anchored to building substrate. D. Coordinate with other trades to assure correct size for wall mounted units. E. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean coils and inside of unit. B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory -finished cabinets, using finish materials famished by manufacturer. 15785-3 02012 by FEI SECTION 15790 AIR COILS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED FILED FEB 21 2012 '+: 5q FA -t City Clerk Iowa Iowa X__-- A. Extent of air coils required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division 23 sections. B. Types of coils and accessories required for this project include the following: 1. DX Cooling Coil 2. Electric Duct Heating Coil C. Refer to other sections for controls, specialties, testing, adjusting and balancing required with air coils. D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work: 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on unit. E. Refer to Division 23 Section 15000 for equipment certification requirements. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms who regularly engaged in manufacture of air coils, of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with air coils similar to that required for project. C. Codes and Standards: 1. ANSI/ARI 410 — Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air heating Coils. 2. ANSI/NFPA 70 — National Electric Code. 3. ANSUUL 1096 — Electric Central Air Heating Equipment. 4. SMACNA — HVAC Duct Construction Standards. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for air coils showing dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gages and finishes of materials and installation instructions. 15790-1 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7%12 y: 5 City Clerk Shop Drawings: Submit assembly -type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, weight loadings, �'ty Iowa construction details, required clearances and field connection details. Iowa City, C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturers electrical requirements for power supply wiring to electric coils. Submit manufacturer's ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 23 Section 15000. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle air coils carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged equipment or components; replace with new. B. Store air coils in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air coils and installing them to final location. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric heaters of one (1) of the following: Direct Expansion Coils a. Heatcraft b. McQuay C. Trane d. York 2. Electric Duct Heating Coil a. Berko b. Chromalux C. Indeeco d. King e. Markel f. Qmark 2.02 DIRECT EXPANSION (DX) COILS A. General: Provide DX coils in locations as indicated and of capacities, style and having accessories as scheduled. Extended surface type with seamless copper tubes and aluminum fins mounted in a galvanized steel casing. Coil to be constructed for 250 prig operation, a maximum velocity of 550 fpm and 144 fins per foot maximum. There shall be no water carry over at the scheduled airflow. 15790-2 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 ' ty Cl rk Iowa City, Iowa C. Coil to be installed in a section of ductwork that is constructed to be watertight with bottom section sloped and a drain connection. Provide clearance for coil removal. Z03 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATING COIL A. General: Provide electric coils in locations as indicated and of capacities, style and having accessories as scheduled. Provide ANSIfUL listed and labeled assembly with hinged cover type control box, coil, casing and controls. Casing to have channel frame and be made of galvanized steel. C. Coil to be exposed helical coil of nickel -chrome resistance wire with ceramic support bushings. D. Provide automatic reset thermal cut-out controls with built-in contactors, control transformer, airflow proving, step controller and fused disconnect switch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which electric heaters are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC HEATERS A. General: Install units as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit designation. C. Support units with mounting brackets anchored to ductwork. D. Coordinate with other trades to assure correct size for wall mounted units. E. Protect units with protective covets during balance of construction. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean coils. B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory -finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer. 15790-3 ©2012 by FEI SECTION 15820 FORCED AIR FURNACE AND CONDENSING UNITILED FEB 21 2012 PART 1 - GENERAL y: 5? PM Ciry clerk Iowa City, Iowa 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of furnace and condensing unit work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of furnace and condensing units specified in this section include the following: 1. Forced air gas-fired furnace. 2. Air cooled condensing unit. 3. Refrigerant piping and specialties. 4. Controls. C. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, in compliance with electrical specifications: 1. Control and interlock wiring between operating controls, indicating devices, and temperature control panels. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of furnace and condensing units, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Codes and Standards: AGA Compliance: Construct and install gas-fired furnace in accordance with "American Gas Association". 2. NFPA Compliance: Install fuel gas piping and gas-fired furnace in accordance with NFPA 54 "National Fuel Gas Code". 3. ARI Compliance: Provide capacity ratings for condensing units in accordance with Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Standard 210. 4. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of condensing units in accordance with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard ANSI/ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". 5. UL Compliance: Provide condensing units, which are listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and have UL label affixed. 15820-1 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 H City Clerk - 1.03 SUBMITTALS Iowa city, low, A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, weights, fumished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring for gas-fired furnace. Submit manufacturers ladder -type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory -installed and portions to be field -installed. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of furnace and condensing unit, control, and accessory; including "Trouble -Shooting" Maintenance Guide. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual. 1.04 PRODUCTDELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle furnace and condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged furnace and condensing units or components; replace with new. B. Store furnace and condensing units and components in clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. C. Comply with Manufacturers rigging and installation instructions for unloading furnace and condensing units, and moving them to final location. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: Gas Furnaces and Condensing Units a. Armstrong Air Conditioning, Inc. b. Bryant BDP Div., United Technologies. C. Carrier Corp. d. Heat Controller, Inc. e. Lennox Industries, Inc. f. Rheem Mfg. Co. g. Snyder General Corp. h. The Trane Co. The Williamson Co. 2.02 GAS FURNACE 15820-2 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 ! C rk Cityity Iowa C, lows A. General: Provide material gas-fired furnace as indicated, of type and minimum capacity as scheduled and as specified herein. Comply with ANSI 221.47, Gas -Fired Central Furnaces. B. Efficiency: AFUE 90%, minimum. C. Heater section shall be aluminized steel, all welded heat exchanger constructed in accordance with AGA. Provide bi-metal type flue dampers and pilotless ignition system. Secondary heat exchanger shall be constructed of aluminum fins fitted to stainless steel tubes. D. Evaporator Coil: Conform to ARI 210-240, "Unitary Air Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment." Matched with furnace as recommended by furnace manufacturer. Matched with remote condensing unit with type, capacity, and pressure drop ratings as indicated. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet. E. Evaporator Coil Enclosure: As recommended by furnace manufacturer to suit furnace and cooling coil. Steel cabinet with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet. F. Fan shall be multi -blade centrifugal type with adjustable pitch V -belt drive. G. Unit shall be furnished complete with controls, code required safety devices. Unit shall be pre -wired internally with accessible control junction box. All control wiring shall be by the Mechanical Contractor. Verify electrical characteristic before shipment of equipment. H. Filter shall be 1 -inch thick throw -away type. Unit shall be arranged for duct connection as shown on drawings. I. Unit shall be furnished with complete factory installed controls including starters, thermal overload protection, high and low pressure control and oil failure cutout. J. Ignition: Electric spark with flame sensor or direct -sensing silicon carbide hot surface igniter. 2.03 AIR-COOLED CONDENSING UNIT A. General: Provide factory -assembled and tested air-cooled condensing units as indicated, consisting of compressor, condenser coil, fan, motor, refrigerant reservoir and operating controls. Provide capacity and electrical characteristics as scheduled. B. Casing: Provide 18 -gage galvanized -steel casing finished with baked enamel. Provide removal panel for access to controls, and weep holes for water drainage. Provide base with mounting holes. Provide brass service valves, fittings and gage ports on exterior of casing. C. Compressor: Provide welded hermetic with built-in overloads and vibration isolation. Provide for compressor motor, thermal and current -sensitive overload device, internal high-pressure protection, high and low pressure cutout switches, start capacitor and relay, 2 -pole contactor, crankcase heater and temperature actuated switch and timer to prevent compressor rapid cycle. D. Condenser: Construct coil of copper tubes and aluminum fin, provided with liquid accumulator and liquid subcooler. Provide aluminum propeller fan, direct driven, with permanently lubricated fan motor with thermal overload protection. 15820-3 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 .f; GSyt'I`Prtk lAciry, lcv#xcessories: Provide the following accessories: 1. Low -voltage thermostat and subbase to control condensing unit and evaporator fan. 2. Precharged and insulated suction and liquid tubing of length indicated. 3. Head pressure control to modulate condenser fan motor speed for low ambient conditions. 4. Heat reclaim device providing preheating of domestic hot water with hot gas from condensing unit. F. Low voltage control transformer. G. Water -to -refrigerant heat exchanger. H. Low -ambient lockout control to prevent compressor operation below 45°F (adjustable). 2.04 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES A. Refrigerant piping shall be Type L, hard temper copper tubing degreased at the mill and sealed, with wrought copper fittings, suitable for sweated solder joints with tubing. Fittings shall be of not less than 98% copper and shall have a wall thickness equal to or greater than the tubing. Solder and flux shall be of silver solder for refrigeration piping service. All piping connections to compressor shall be made with copper metal flexible connectors with woven covers. A slow stream of dry nitrogen shall be passed through the pipe while soldering. Pipe shall be flushed with R-11 after soldering and evacuated. B. Refrigerant Specialties. Sight Glasses. Double port, brass body, screw cap, Henry Type M-20 or M-21 or equal, same size as line with moisture indicator. C. Pressure Relief Valves, angle type, spring loaded, adjustable pressure, Henry or equal. D. Check Valves, Henry Type 205 or equal. E. Globe Valves, Henry type 203 or 216 or equal, renewable seat, brass body. F. Purge Valves, Henry Type 927 or equal. G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves shall be Sporlan or equal, Type M or V with external equalizing connection. H. Filter -Drier shall be Sporlan "Catch -All' filter drier, replaceable core type, over 15 tons, activated aluminum cores, sized as recommended by manufacturer. Provide Owner with one (1) extra set of cores for each size of unit installed. Install unit with a 3 -valve bypass. Sealed type shall be used in sizes through 15 tons. Solenoid Valves, if required, Sporlan or equal, direct acting or pilot operated as required, size for duty to be performed based on 2 PSI drop through valve. Valve shall be suitable for 350 PSI working pressure and for use with refrigerant specified. Valve shall be positive closing type. 15820-4 02012 by FEI FILED J. Ansul "Dry Eye" moisture indicator. FEB 21 2012 LtM K. Insulation. 3/4 -inch foamed plastic on refrigerant suction. ' "r tty ctc Iowa Cny, Iowa 2.05 CONTROLS A. General: Include control components required for satisfactory operation of furnaces and auxiliary equipment in all seasons, including: 1. Control Transformer: 24V a.c. output, factory -installed and wired in furnace. B. Thermostat: 24V a.c. solid-state, programmable, microprocessor -based wall mounting unit with automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, multiple temperature presets selectable by day and time and battery backup protection of program settings against power failure. C. Burner Operating Controls: I. Provide low voltage, adjustable room thermostats, to control burner operation to maintain room temperature settings. 2. Provide high limit control, with fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, to de -energize burner on excessive bonnet temperature and energize burner when temperature drops to lower safe value. 3. Provide controls for supply fan in accord with bonnet temperatures independent of burner controls. Include manual switch for continuous fan operation. D. Refrigeration Operating Controls: Provide low voltage, adjustable room thermostat to control compressor, condenser fan, and supply fan to maintain room temperature setting. 2. Timed Off Circuit shall limit the number of compressor starts to 12 per hour. 3. Provide refrigerant pressure switch to cycle condenser fan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which furnace and condensing units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FURNACE A. General: Install gas-fired furnace as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions. 15820-5 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 L 7012 5 9 Pr" ' city clerk IoviaCrg,Icwa Extend gas piping to within 5 -feet from unit, provide drop with manual gas shutoff valve, 1/8 -inch NPT plugged test connection, tee, and drip pocket. Locate piping drop so as to not interfere with service of unit. Extend gas piping runout, full size of gas train inlet, from tee to gas train connection, provide union with sufficient clearance for unit removal and service. C. Connect condensate drain pans using Type M copper tubing with streamline drainage fittings and soldered joints. Extend to nearest equipment drain or Floor drain. Construct vented, deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. Terminate to suit local code requirements, except where stricter methods are indicated. D. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats where indicated. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDENSING UNITS A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Support: Install ground -mounted units on 4 -inch thick reinforced concrete pad, 4 -inches larger on each side than condensing unit. Anchor unit to pad using inserts or anchor bolts. Install roof - mounted units on roof curb or mechanical equipment stand, constructed in accordance with NRCA Handbook. Anchor unit to structural frame with removable fasteners. C. Electrical: Furnish electrical field -wiring diagrams to Electrical Installer for power wiring to condensing units and control wiring for field -mounted controls. D. Refrigerant Piping: Connect pre -charged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick -connect fittings. Run tubing so as not to interfere with access to unit. Suction lines running through building shall be completely isolated from building structure by rubber isolators. Install furnished accessories. E. Start-up condensing units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions and in presence of manufacturers representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.04 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. After completion of the work, the Contractor shall run a test over a sufficient period of time to provide the proper capacity and performance of all apparatus, etc. and of the systems as a whole. B. All controls and safety devices shall be thoroughly checked to assure proper operation and protection. C. Fan speeds shall be adjusted to provide required capacity and belt drives properly adjusted. D. Air systems for furnaces and exhaust fans shall be balanced and tabulated air Flow readings of grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be submitted to the Engineer before final payment will be authorized. E. Change pulleys, belts, and dampers, or add dampers as required for correct balance, as recommended by the Air Balancing Contractor, at no additional cost to Owner. 15820-6 02012 by FEI F. Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performance when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of Contract Documents for mechanical work. G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to signification system modifications and resubmit test results. 3.05 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one (1) four (4) hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of furnace and condensing units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least seven (7) day notice to Contractor and Engineer of training date. 3.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. General: Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Disposable Air Filters: Fumish clean filters in furnace and one (1) additional replacement set of filters installed. 2. Fan Belts: Furnish one (1) extra set of belts for furnace fans. FILED FEH 21 2012 sy Poyt City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 15820-7 02012 by FEI SECTION 15890 FILED AIR DISTRIBUTION 4FET f vr 2012 : fl Ciry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of air distribution work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section. B. Types of air distribution work specified in this section include the following: 1. Metal Ductwork: a. Fiberglass Duct liner. b. Non-fibrous duct liner. C. Flexible Duct. 2. Ductwork Accessories: a. Manual dampers. b. Turning vanes. C. Flexible connections. 3. Air outlets and inlets: a. Diffusers, registers and grilles. b. Louvers. 1.02 QUAUTYASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air distribution products of types, materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. B. Installers Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with air distribution systems similar to that required for Project. C Codes and Standards Compliance: 1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" 1995 2nd Edition. 2. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 3. NFPA 96 "Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protections of Commercial Cooking Operations". 15890-1 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 �4: S1 frA Ciry Clerk 4. NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Iowa Cuy, Iowa Systems". 5. UL Standard 555 "Fire And Smoke Dampers ". 6. AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters". 7. ASTM C 1071: Duct liner shall comply with ASTM C 1071. 8. NAIMA FGDLS: Install duct liner in accordance with NAIMA FGDLS (North American Insulation Manufacturers Association's Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard). 9. ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for method of testing and rating air filter units. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit submittals required as noted in Division 23 Section Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on all air distribution work, including performance data for air flow pressure drops through filters, noise criteria, air inlet, outlet and terminal room schedules, material construction and installation instructions. C. Submittals: Submit manufacturers assembly -type shop drawings, including dimensions, materials, finish, mounting details and methods of assembly for all air distribution equipment. Coordinate sound output of each air device and modify sizes or arrangements as required to meet sound criteria listed on drawings. D. Ductwork Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of ductwork and fittings. Reproduction of bid documents does not constitute a ductwork shop drawing. Shop drawing to include, but not limited to duct sizes, section lengths, weights, locations, elevations, offsets, wall/floor penetrations, and connections. Note ductwork that is lined or wrapped, including sheet metal dimensions. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials and rigidity are not reduced. E. Coordination Drawings: Submit drawings to general contractor consisting of ductwork layout drawings that have been coordinated with other trades to show structure, ceiling grid, light fixtures, fire sprinkler heads, etc. F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists, cleaning and trouble shooting instructions Include this data, product data and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual. G. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork, duct accessories and air outlets and inlets. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 15890-2 ©2012 by FEI A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air distribution equipment of one (1) of the following: 1. Round Spiral Ductwork and Fittings: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Flexmaster USA C. Lindab,Inc. d. Norlock. e. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. f. United McGill. g. Wesco. h. Wichita Sheet Metal. 2. Underslab Ductwork a. AKDUCT by CDC Enterprises, Inc. FILED 3. Fiberglass Duct Liner: FER 2 1 2012 *: S1 PM a. Johns Manville — Permacote Linacoustic City Clerk a Iowa City, Iowa 4. Non -Fibrous Duct Liner: a. AP Armaflex SA b. Nomaco K -Flex Gray C. Solcoustic. 5. Flexible Ductwork: a. Flexmaster USA. b. TechnaFlex Type 57-C. C. ThermaFlex Type M -KE. 6. Access Doors: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 7. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: a. Carnes b. Krueger C. E.H. Price d. Metal Aire C. Titus f. Tuttle & Bailey 8. Louvers: 15890-3 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEBa. Si ext b. Ciry Ct Iowa C. Iowa cub d. e. f. 9. h. i. Aerolite Airline Products Co. Airstream Products Division of Penn Ventilator Co. American Warming Greenheck Louvers & Dampers Inc. NCA Reliable Ruskin Safe-Air/Dowes 2.02 METALDUCTWORK A. Materials: 1. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting. 2. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated, packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A 700. 3. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock -forming quality, ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 90. All shipping labels, markings or identification tags shall be removed from galvanized steel upon installation. Where duct is indicated to be painted, provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view. Refer to architectural plans for extent of painted surfaces. All other surfaces of duct exposed to view shall have bright finish. 4. PVC -Coated Galvanized -steel: UL -181 Class 1 Listing. Lock -forming quality galvanized sheet steel with ASTM A 653, Coating Designation G 90. Provide with factory -applied, 4 MIL, PVC coating on the exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts and fittings for underground applications and I MIL PVC coating on the interior side of the ducts and fittings. Provide 4 MIL PVC coating on the interior of ducts and fittings for fume -handing applications. 5. Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, cold -rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish. 6. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480, Type 316, sheet form, with No. 4 finish on exposed surface for -- ducts exposed to view; Type 304, sheet form, with No. I finish forconcealedducts. 7. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one - side bright finish where ducts are exposed to view and mill finish for concealed ducts. 8. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized -steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials. 15890-4 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 7: soy PA Citerk B. Miscellaneous Materials: Iowa City, Iowa Tie Rods: Galvanized -steel, 1/4 -inch minimum diameter for 36 -inch length or less; 3/8 -inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 -inches. 2. Fiberglass Duct Liner: Fiberglass duct liner with durable fire-resistant, black coated mat surface on the air stream side, 1.5 ]bs/ft3 density, thermal conductivity no higher than .25 at 75"F mean temperature, complying with ASTM C 1071 and ASHRAE 90.1-]989, of thickness indicated in schedule on drawings. Air stream surface of duct liner shall contain an EPA registered anti -microbial agent. a. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide duct liner and adhesives with flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method, meeting requirements of NFPA 90A. b. Acoustical Performance: NRC not less than 0.65 for 1 -inch thickness, not less than 0.85 for 1 -1/2 -inch thickness and not less than 0.95 for 2 -inch thickness. C. Operating Limits: 250°F maximum temperature (ASTM C411) and 6,000 FPM maximum air velocity (ASTM C1071). 3. Non -Fibrous Duct Liner: Non-fibrous flexible polyimide foam insulation, acrylic anti- microbial coating, of thickness indicated in schedule on drawings. Air stream surface of duct liner shall contain an EPA registered anti -microbial agent. a. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide duct liner and adhesives with flame -spread index of 25 or less, and smoke -developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method, meeting requirements of NFPA 90A. 4. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916 "Specifications for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation". 5. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Article S2.11 on Page 2.25. 6. Joint and Seam Sealant: Indoor/Outdoor Water Based Duct Sealant shall be all purpose duct sealant for use on all types of metal duct, glass fiber duct board, and flex duct, as well as duct fabric and flexible tubing runouts. The sealant incorporates a built-in fiber reinforcement for exceptional strength, with UV inhibitors for outdoor use. UL 181A -M Listed / UL 181B -M Listed. Provide Versa -Grip 181 Hardcast or approved equal. 7. Flanged Joint Mastics: One -part, acid -curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. 8. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one -part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through - penetration fire -stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire -resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 15890-5 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 1A01 City `f : `ry. ter Iowa Cuy, Iowa C. 9. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot -dipped galvanized - steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, wire rope, trim and angles for support of ductwork. Hang all ductwork from the structure only. Do not hang from metal deck. 10. Flexible Duct: Factory pre -insulated duct composed of a corrosion -resistant reinforcing wire helix permanently bonded and enclosed in polyester film, then covered with 1 -1/2 -inch, 3/4 lb. density fiberglass insulation blanket sheathed in a vapor barrier of aluminum metallized polyester film laminated to glass mesh, elastomer back -coated. The duct must comply with the latest NFPA Standard 90A and be listed as a Class 1 Air Duct Material, UL Standard 181. Fabrication: 1. General: Fabricate rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1-3 through 1-16 and 1-21 through 1-25, including their associated details. 2. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct systems to the following pressure classifications: a. Supply Ducts: Where no specific duct pressure class designations are indicated, fabricate duct system for 2 inch water gage pressure class, except for ducts upstream from variable air volume boxes. Fabricate duct system components upstream from variable air volume boxes for 3 -inch WC pressure class. b. Ventilation Ducts: 2 inch WC pressure class. C. Outside Air and Mixed Air Ducts: 2 -inch WC pressure class. d. Return Ducts: 2 -inch WC, negative pressure. e. Exhaust Ducts: 2 -inch WC, negative pressure. 3. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations. 4. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive and fasten with mechanical fasteners. 5. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 -inches and larger and are 20 -gage or less, with more than 10 square feet of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard," Figure 1-4, unless they are lined or are externally insulated. 6. Rectangular Duct Fittings: Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1995 Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-8. a. Radius elbow limit as follows: 15890-6 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 '+: 54 PM rk (1) R/W=1.0 for 1000 FPM and below. Iowa City, ry I (2) R/W=1.5 above 1000 FPM. owa b. Square elbows with turning vanes only. Limit single thickness vanes to 36" maximum. (1) R = 2.0 for 1000 FPM and below. (2) R = 4.5 above 1000 FPM. C. Radius elbow limit R/W=1.0 for 1000 FPM and below; R/W=1.5 above 1000 FPM. d. Square elbows with turning vanes only. Limit single thickness vanes to 36" maximum. For 1000 FPM and below, R = 2.0; for greater than 1000 FPM, R = 4.5. e. Offsets limit 30" maximum. f. Branch connections 45 degree entry high efficiency type only. 7. Ductmate Fittings: Joints constructed in accordance with SMACNA Standards that use four (4) comer connections shall be equal to products manufactured by Ductmate Industries Inc., Ward Industries Inc. or an approved equal. Refer to manufacturer's guidelines. a. Radius elbows limit as follows: (1) R/W=1.0 1000 FPM and below. (2) R/W=1.5 above 1000 FPM. b. Square elbows with turning vanes only. (1) Double thickness R=4.5 above 1000 FPM. C. Radius elbows limit R/W=1.0, 1000 FPM and below and R/W=1.5 above 1000 FPM d. Square elbows with turning vanes only. Limit single thickness .... Double thickness R=4.5 above 1000 FPM. D. Round Concealed Ductwork: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC" Duct Construction Standards, "1995 Edition, Figure 3-1, RL -1, RL -4 or RL -5. Seams Types RL -2 or RL -3 may be used if spot-welded on 1 -inch intervals. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC" Duct Construction Standards", Table 3-2A and 3-2B for galvanized -steel gages. 1. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 degree laterals and 45 degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees. E. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all non-gasketed longitudinal seams. 15890-7 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 y: S1 Pry_ City clerklowa Iowa City, 2. Snap -lock seams are acceptable when provided with a rubber gasket. Duct pressure loss shall be limited to 0.05 -inches H2O per 50 linear feet of duct. 3. If SMACNA seal Class A or B is specified, the longitudinal seam shall be sealed from the inside. F. Seal Fittings: Provide double legged EPDM gasketed seal fitting for spiral duct. Gasket shall be mechanical attached to fitting with 180 degree hemmed edge. Fitting shall be inserted in spiral duct and fastened with self -tapping sheet metal screws. 1. Seal fitting shall be pressure tested to SMACNA leakage Class III for -2-inches WC to +10 - inches WC. Fittings shall be manufactured by Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. or approved equal. G. Round Exposed Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by the following methods and in minimum gages listed: DIAMETER MINIMUM GAGE METHOD OF MANUFACTURE 3 -inch to 14 -inch 26 Spiral Lockseam 15 -inch to 26 -inch 24 Spiral Lockseam Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gages listed. Provide continuous welds along seams. DIAMETER 3 -inch to 36 -inch 20 2. Transverse spiral and round duct joints for all exposed ductwork shall be made with the Spiralmate round duct connector or an approved equal. The Spiralmate components shall be of standard catalogue manufacture as supplied by Ductmate Industries, Inc., Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc., Ward Industries Inc. or an approved equal. 3. The installation of the spiral duct connector shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruction and installation manuals. 4. The spiral duct connector consists of the following components: a. Two (2) mating round duct connector flanges with an integral sealant. b. A gasket between the two (2) mating flanges. C. A roll -formed closure ring that is drawn tight with a bolt and nut. 2.03 UNDERSIABDUCTWORK A. Underslab Ductwork: Ductwork placed under slabs on grade shall be constructed as follows: 15890-8 ©2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 yt: sq PN\_ city Clerk Iowa City Iowa Provide elbows, pipe, diffusers, plenum, clamp & gasket, boots, saddle registers, caulk, water gauge test and adapters as required by drawings for underground installation. Provide manufacturers 10 -year parts warranty. 2. Ductwork shall be HDPE, food grade, closed cell plastic material that is recyclable, does not emit volatile organic compounds and conforms to ASTM -D2412. Ductwork shall be resistant to mildew, mold (UL 181B), and radon gas (BSS 7239-88). Ductwork shall not rust or crack under external stress or strain. Ductwork shall have R-10 thermal insulation value without the use of external insulation. Fiberglass style ductwork or PVC coated galvanized steel ductwork shall not be acceptable. 3. All joints shall be gasketed and sealed. Clamps and gaskets shall be used on ductwork without flanges. Clamps shall be polyethylene with 410 stainless steel plated and stainless steel screws. Gaskets shall comprise of 1/a" thick butyl rubber sealant tape with Tedlar facing that is water and UV resistant and shall not stain. Gaskets shall comply with ASTM -E84 for flame and smoke spread. 4. Flanged joints and duct branches shall use a co -polymer adhesive caulking sealant that is water and UV resistant. Flanges shall be connected with stainless steel bolts. 5. Assembled ductwork shall be able to maintain +/- 10" static pressure with no leakage. 6. Assembled ductwork shall be approved for installations 27" below flood plain elevation without water intrusion. 2.04 DUCTWORKACCESSORIES A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Low Pressure Duct Standards". B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1 -1/2 -inch wide curved blades set at 3/4 -inch O.C., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 24nch O.C. and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork. Accepted Manufacturers: Ductmate Prorail. 2. Turning Vane and rail system. 3. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. C. Flexible Duct Connections: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to - - vibration isolated equipment:—Construct flexible -connections of neoprene -coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. D. Connectors shall comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems" and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems". 15890-9 02012 by FEI 1. Indoor installations shall be of a UL 214 Listed, fire -retardant vinyl coated woven nylon or I1 Jr Neoprene coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density of vinyl is 22 ounces/sq. yd. and 1 f rated to 180 F. Minimum density of Neoprene 30 ounces/sq. yd and rated to 200°F. FEB 21 2012 2 Outdoor installations shall be of a UL 214 Listed UV -resistant Hypalon coated woven t 5q P� fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 24 ounces/sq. yd. and rated to 250°F. 3. High Temperature Applications shall be a UL 214 Listed, silicone coated satin weave fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 17.5 ounces/sq. yd. and rated to 500°F. 4. Chemical Resistant Applications shall be of Teflon coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density 18 ounces/sq. yd. and rated to 500°F. 5. Connector shall be Ductmate Proflex or approved equal. 2.05 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air diffusers, registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation. Include seal bearing AMCA certified rating. 2. Performance: Provide air diffusers, registers, and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data. 3. Ceiling and Wall Compatibility: Provide diffusers, registers, and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling and wall systems which will contain each type of air diffuser, register and grille. 4. Finish: Diffusers, registers and grilles shall have an off-white factory applied finish, unless shown otherwise. 5. Dampers and Accessories: See schedule on drawings for required dampers and accessories. 6. Types: Unless designated herein, provide diffusers, registers, and grilles of type, capacity and with accessories and finishes as listed on schedules and details, shown on drawings. 2.06 LOUVERS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturers standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated and as required for complete installation. 15890-10 02012 by FEI FEB 21 2012 `y:' 5g Fns City Clcrk Iowa City, Iowa B. Performance: Provide louvers that have 50% minimum free area, and .10 -inch maximum pressure drop for each type as listed in manufacturers current data. C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver. D. Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. Louver shall bear the AMCA Seal. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. Louver finish shall be acrodized with color to match building window frames. Provide five (5) year warranty on finish. E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2 -inch square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames. F. Blade: Blade shall be 6 -inches in depth and of drainable type construction for sizes larger than 24 - inches x 24 -inches. Louver sizes below 24 -inches x 24 -inches shall have a 4 -inch blade depth of drainable construction. G. Manufacturer: Provide a Ruskin ELF6375DX (6 -inch) louver or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which air distribution systems will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3 -inches WC and under; I% for systems rated over 3 - inches WC) and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8 -inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true -to -shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. Comply with all SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. B. The Contractor shall form and erect all ductwork to avoid joists, beams, pipes, light fixtures, etc., and shall maintain fixed ceiling heights and clearances. Provide all drops, raises or offsets in ductwork as required by conditions at building: - -- - -- - C. All openings for ductwork in new and existing construction shall be provided by the General Contractor; however, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to properly layout and locate all openings required for the installation of these items. All patching and refinishing shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. 15890-11 02012 by FEI D. Sealing of Rectangular Ductwork: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing requirements as defined on Page 1-8, of the 1995 SMACNA Manual, Second Edition. E. Flexible Ducts: Maximum installed length (from diffuser or grille to sheet metal ductwork), shall be 3 -feet -inches. F. Underslab Ductwork: Underslab ductwork shall be encased in sandfill or concrete all around outside FILED areas of the duct system as indicated. FEB 21 2012 1. Install underslab ducts in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standards," Figures 3-11 and 3-12 and as indicated. 'f. cityPM cityClerk Iowa city, Iowa 2. Protect ducts from damage by powered vibrators and other equipment used in placement of concrete on or around ducts. 3. Provide temporary protection for duct openings. G. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on four (4) sides by at least 1 -1/2 -inch. Fasten duct and substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA Standards and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B. Provide additional dampers where indicated on drawings. Dampers shall be at least one (1) gage heavier than ducts in which installed, have stiffened edges, shall operate freely and not rattle in any position. Each damper shall have accessible indicating locking quadrant. For concealed quadrants provide 6 -inch diameter hand access opening with cover plate flush with finish surface. C. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FIBERGLASS DUCT LINER A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with NA1MA FGDLS SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Duct liner thicknesses and locations are specified in duct insulation schedule on drawings. Where duct liner is required the sizes shown on drawings shall be inside clear of liner. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF NON-FIBROUS DUCT LINER A. General: Install non-fibrous duct liner in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Duct liner thicknesses and locations are specified in duct insulation schedule on drawings. Where duct liner is required the sizes shown on drawings shall be inside clear of liner. 3.06 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING 15890-12 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 `f; 5q Pn,` A. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows: Iowa CiCerk rY, Iowa B. Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 -Inch WC: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations. C. Pressure Classification 2 and 3 -Inch WC: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams. D. Pressure Classification Less than 2 -Inch WC: Transverse joints only. E. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation. 3.07 CONNECTIONS A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-5 and 2-6. C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-14 through 2-16. D. Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figure 2-17. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. B. Locate diffusers, registers and grilles in center of acoustical ceiling modules. C. Repair all marred surfaces with manufacturers touch-up paint. 3.09 INSTALLATION OF LOUVERS A. General: Install louvers in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that product serves intended functions. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean ductwork internally, unit -by -unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal or where ductwork is to be painted. C. Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. 15890-13 @2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 `h: 51 Pn SECTION 15952 city clerk Iowa City, Iowa CONTROLS AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of electric control system work required by this section is indicated by drawings and by requirements of this section. B. Sequence of operation is hereby defined as the manner and method by which controls function. Requirements for each type of control system operation are specified in this section. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each system automatically controlled, containing the following information: 1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, coils, dampers and control devices. 2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. B. Maintenance Data: Include copy of shop drawings in each Maintenance Manual. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric control systems of one (1) of the following: 1. Alerton Technologies by Control Management Inc. 2. Andover Controls by Control Services Inc. 3. ASI Controls by Proctor Mechanical. 4. Automated Logic Controls by Control Logic. 5. Honeywell by Engineered Controls, Inc. 6. Metasys Systems by Johnson Controls, Inc. 7. Reliable Controls Corporation by Woodman Controls. S. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 9. Staefa Controls by Woodman Controls. 10. Trane Company 2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide electric control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of dampers, humidistats, clocks, sensors, controllers, and other components as required for complete installation. 15952-1 ©2012 by FEI Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard control system components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer. Provide electric control systems with the following functional and construction features as indicated. B. Dampers: Provide automatic control dampers as indicated, with damper frames not less than formed 13 -gage galvanized steel. Provide mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper blades not less than formed 16 -gage galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of g inches. Equip dampers with motors, with proper rating for each application. FILED 1 Secure blades to 1/2 -inch diameter zinc -plated axles using zinc -plated hardware. Seal off FEB Z j y,�l against spring stainless steel blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of nylon and provide Z thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade linkage hardware of zinc -plated '+: 55 P,w steel and brass. Submit leakage and flow characteristic, plus size schedule for controlled y ou-a City, 1, dampers. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From -20"F to 200°F. 3. For standard applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by manufacturer's sizing techniques) with optional closed -cell neoprene edging. 4. For low -leakage applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by manufacturers sizing techniques) with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm/sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches w.g. when damper is being held by torque of 50 inch -pounds. C. Electronic Sensors: 1. Temperature sensors shall be of the thermistor (NTC) type with a high resistance change versus temperature change to insure good resolution and accuracy. Sensors shall be available for room, duct or well mounting. Room type sensors shall be available with built-in setpoint adjustment, occupancy override, and communication port. Sensors shall be available in various ranges to properly suit the application. a. Duct Sensors: Duct sensors shall be single point or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall be a minimum of 1.5 m (5 ft) in length per I m (10 ftZ) of duct cross- section. 2. Humidity sensors shall be of the solid state type utilizing hygroscopic plastic as the sensing element. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a change in relative humidity. Sensors shall be available for room mounting. Room type sensor shall be available with built in setpoint potentiometer. D. Fan Speed Controllers: Provide solid-state fan speed controllers, to maintain room ventilation by varying fan speed of fan units, in response to occupancy sensor signal. Provide proportioning control of motor speed, from maximum down to minimum of 35% (field adjustable). Equip controller to provide on-off action below demand for minimum fan speed, to prevent low -speed operation and ensure normal motor life. Design controller to apply full -voltage for brief period each time motor is started, to bring motor up to minimum speed rapidly. Equip controller with filter circuit to eliminate objectionable radio interference. 15952-2 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 --f:97 P&A - - airy Clerk Io city, Iowa E. Electric Heat Current Controllers: Accomplish switching of load current with semiconductor devices located in load circuit of operation controller, and not by mechanical or mercury relays. Provide controllers which operate on zero -voltage switching principle, to minimize radio frequency interference; do not substitute devices incorporating phase control firing. Arrange power controller, for loads of 10 kw or larger, for 3-phase operation. Incorporate solid-state switch for loads of 48 amps per phase or larger, in each ungrounded line of load circuit. 1. Refer to heating equipment specifications for integral high temperature limit controllers. F. Electric Contactors: Provide contactors for operating or limit- control of electric heating loads which are UL -listed for 100,000 cycles of resistive loads. Equip with replaceable molded coils and replaceable silver cadmium oxide contacts. Coat core laminations with heat -resistant inorganic firm to reduce core losses. Provide line and load terminals on contactors with higher -than -35 -amp rating, or provide one-piece formed -and -welded pressure type. Provide screw-type contactors for 35 -amp -or -lower rating. Equip field -mounted contactors with suitable steel enclosures; and provide open -type mounting for those installed in factory- fabricated panels. G. Application Descriptions: Unitary Controllers a. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems to address specific applications described in the "Execution" portion of this specification, and for future expansion: (1) Packaged Energy Recovery Ventilators. (2) Control Dampers. b. Unitary Controllers shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs: (1) Heating and Cooling Outputs: I to 3 Stages. Analog Output with two -pipe logic. (2) Fan Output: Variable Speed Logic Control. C. Unitary Controllers shall support the following library of control strategies to address the requirements of the sequences described in the Execution portion of this specification: (1) Occupancy Mode. (2) Multiple Speed Control. (3) Economy Mode: Standby Mode. Unoccupied. Shutdown. 15952-3 02012 by FEI Occupancy Sensor Interlock to Economy Mode. FILED d. Occupancy -based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each Unitary Controller shall have a provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of FEB 217012 an occupancy sensing device, the Unitary Controller shall automatically select either y ;5R 4 Standby or Ventilation mode to minimize the heating and cooling requirements while city Clot satisfying ventilation conditions. Iowa City, Iowa e. Alarm Management: Each Unitary Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary communications. 2.03 OPERATOR INTERFACE 1. Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator Workstation interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting, English language point identification, and industry standard PC application software. 2. Text -Based Displays: Operator Workstations shall provide consistent text -based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all workstations. 3. Password Protection: Multiple -level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display and database manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. 4. Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: a. Start-up or shutdown selected equipment. b. View and Adjust Equipment Properties: Operators shall be able to view controlled equipment status and to adjust operating parameters such as setpoints, PID gains, on and off controls, and sensor calibration per their access level. C. Enable/Disable process execution. d. Change time/date. C. Enter/Modify analog warning and alarm limits as well as view and respond to alarms. Operators shall be able to view a list of currently active system alarms, to acknowledge each alarm, and to clear (delete) unneeded alarms. f. View limits. PART 3 - EXECUTION 15952-4 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 -4: sq P,t Ciry Clerk 3.01 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR CONTROL SEQUENCES bW a "JON A. The energy recovery ventilator fans will be energized on a signal from any one of the following electrical contractor provided and installed occupancy sensors: 1. Two sensors Room A 104 2. Two sensors in Room B 105 3. One sensor in Corridor 101 4. One sensor in Corridor outside Men's and Women's restrooms The manufacturer provided variable frequency drives will ramp the energy recovery ventilator fans up to the set point. The unit fans will be de -energized when no occupancy is sensed. Occupancy sensors are provided and installed by the electrical contractor. Coordinate locations and connection with the electrical contractor. C. Whenever the fans are energized the associated (manufacturer provided) backdraft dampers shall open. Dampers shall close when fans shut down. D. Discharge air temperature sensors in the ductwork downstream of the associated coils will maintain discharge air temperature. 3.02 COOLING COIL CONTROL SEQUENCES A. When the energy recovery ventilator is energized and the ventilation air discharge temperature is 750F (adjustable) and above, DX condensing unit shall be operative. A solid state discharge controller furnished with condensing unit shall sequence the DX condensing unit to maintain 75°F (adjustable) discharge air. 3.03 DEHUMIDIFICATION CONTROL A. When the humidistat located in Room A 104 indicates the humidity level is above 50% (adjustable) and above, DX condensing unit shall be operative. A solid state discharge controller furnished with condensing unit shall sequence the DX condensing unit to maintain 55°F (adjustable) discharge air. The heating coil will raise discharge air temperature to 65F (adjustable). 3.04 HEATING COIL CONTROL SEQUENCE A. When the energy recovery ventilator is energized and the ventilation air discharge temperature is 657 (adjustable) and below, the electric heating coil shall be staged by the discharge controller to maintain 65"F (adjustable) discharge air. 3.05 AIR DAMPER CONTROL SEQUENCE TYPES - A. Control dampers in the ventilation and exhaust air ductwork for Room A 104 and Room B 105 will be controlled by the two occupancy sensors in each room. The energy recovery ventilator ventilation and exhaust fan variable speed drives will be adjusted to provide the required air balance. 15952-5 02012 by FEI When the energy recovery ventilator is energized and occupancy is sensed the normally closed ventilation and exhaust air dampers shall operate to full open position. The dampers shall close and the ERV shall ramp down when no occupancy is sensed. FILED FEB 21 7n12 S1 Pry City Clerk IOwa City, Iowa 15952-6 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 SECTION 15990 clerk TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section; and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus of mechanical work. The work consists of setting speed and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by Contract Documents. B. Component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this section includes the following as applied to mechanical equipment: Air Distribution Systems a. Furnaces. b. Ductwork systems. C. Diffuser, registers and grilles. 1.02 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Tester's Qualifications: Firm certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) in those testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this Project and may also be the original Installer of system to be tested. B. Codes and Standards: I. NEBB Compliance: Comply with NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" as applicable to mechanical air hydronic distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus. 2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASI-IRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting and balancing, except as otherwise indicated. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit certified test reports signed by Test and Balance Supervisor who performed TAB work. In addition, have report certified by Professional Engineer who is familiar with TAB work and also with Project, and who is registered in jurisdiction where testing is being conducted. B. Include identification and types of instruments used, and their most recent calibration date with submission of final test report. 15990-1 02012 by FEI FILED Figr 17 012 Ciry Cleric iowa CbY� load C. Submit biographical data on Engineer who is to directly supervise testing, adjusting and balancing work. D. Maintenance Data: Include in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports, identification of instruments and data on Engineer. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is not latent residual work still to be completed. B. Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE VENDORS A. Vendors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide testing, adjusting and balancing work by one (1) of the following: 1. Precision Test and Balance, Des Moines, IA. 2. River Place Technologies. 3. Systems Management and Balancing, Inc., Des Moines, IA. 4. Technical Enterprises, Inc. 5. Waldinger, Des Moines, IA. 2.02 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jigs and similar purposes. 1. At Testers option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. 2.03 TEST INSTRUMENTS A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of type, precision, and capacity as recommended in the following TAB Standards: NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 15990-2 02012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 PART 3 - EXECUTION W. 59 Pe City C er Iowa Cay,_kIowa 3.07 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Tester. 3.02 GENERAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards. 3.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards. B. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in a manner recommended by original Installer. C. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. D. Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of Contract Documents for mechanical work. E. Retest, adjust and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications and resubmit test results. 15990-3 02012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16010 FEB 21 2012 '+:64 PM GENERAL ELECTRICAL lo �'ty",ti' Cur, PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Bidding Requirements, Conditions of Contract, General Specifications and General Requirements, and this Division shall be binding on the Contractor and shall apply to all electrical work to be completed under this section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the work from the date of his Contract until its acceptance by the Owner and must make good all damages sustained from whatever cause. He shall use proper care and diligence in bracing and securing all parts of the work and shall in all cases judge as to the amount of protection required. 1.02 ORDINANCES, LAWS AND CODES A. All work shall conform to the rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code, Local Code, "Occupational Safety and Health Act" and the State Fire Marshall's Office. All certificates of approval shall be delivered to the Architect before final payment will be made. B. Should any change in the drawings and/or specifications be required to conform to the above mentioned laws and ordinances, the Architect shall be notified by the Bidder prior to the Bid Date, that the necessary changes may be completed. After the Bid Date, all work necessary to meet the requirements shall be at Contractor's expense, with no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall pay all fees, permits or taxes for inspections, etc., in connection with the work under this Contract. 1.03 DATA AND MEASUREMENT A. The data given herein and on the drawings is as exact as could be secured insofar as building construction and existing conditions are concerned. Extreme accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings and specifications are intended for the assistance of the Contractor in achieving the end result. Exact locations, measurements, distance, levels, etc., will be governed by conditions at the Job Site. B. The Contractor shall verify that the size of the equipment supplied by the selected manufacturers does not exceed the available mounting space. C. The Architect reserves the right to change location or size of conduits, outlets, fixtures or other pieces of equipment as may be necessary to avoid conflicts. No extra compensation will be allowed for such changes unless additional cost to the Contractor is caused. 16010-1 © 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 f : 5ry Clerk lowa Cup, lowa D. The Bidder shall visit the Project Site that he may have knowledge of conditions at the Job Site and adapt his work to such conditions. 1.04 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Anything mentioned in this specification and not shown on the drawings or vice versa shall be of like effect, as shown or mentioned in both. In any case of discrepancy or differences in the figures, drawings or specifications, the Bidder shall promptly report such discrepancies to the Architect who shall make a decision in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without this decision shall be at the expense of the Contractor. 1.05 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP A. The Contractor shall give his personal superintendence and direction to the work. He shall also keep a competent foreman or superintendent on the Project. B. All equipment, controls and junction boxes shall be located for ready access, operation, repair or maintenance. C. Any additional drawings necessary for the prosecution of the work will be furnished by the Architect as promptly as possible. The Contractor shall request any additional instructions needed and shall do no work without drawings and instructions. D. Any discrepancies between the Mechanical, Electrical and Architectural Drawings shall be reported to the Architect prior to the Bid Date. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee all materials, workmanship and the successful operation of all apparatus furnished and installed by him for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance of the whole work, and shall guarantee to repair or replace at his own expense any part of the apparatus which may show defect during that time, provided such defect is, in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not to carelessness or improper operation. Guarantee period for the replacement shall begin with the date of replacement. B. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any failure of any part or parts which occur during the guarantee period. C. The Contractor shall also guarantee the systems and the apparatus to be working properly to meet all conditions as specified. 1.07 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph "Shop Drawings' of the General Conditions. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings of all fabricated work and equipment to be purchased. Data shall be sufficiently completed to permit evaluation and comparison with specified equipment and material. Each item shall be prepared as a separate submittal, not grouped or bound with other items. 16010-2 0 2012 by FEI B. All drawings shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval and must be dated C. Shop Drawings shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Lighting Fixtures. 2. Contactors and Time Clocks. 3. Lamps. 4. Panelboards. 5. Circuit and Motor Disconnects. 6. Fuses. 7. Wiring Devices — Switches, Receptacles, Device Wallplates. 8. Enclosures FILED FEB 21 2012 '�•'S9 P.vl Iowa_OLY, Iowa D. A notation shall be made on each item submitted as to its specified use or description of specific location in the work. E. None of the preceding items shall be purchased, delivered to the site or installed until the item has been properly submitted in writing and reviewed by the Architect. F. Submittals shall be made even though the item is exactly as specified. G. Should the Contractor fail to comply with any of the requirements as stated, the Architect reserves the right to select a full line of materials, appliances and equipment, which shall be final and binding upon the Contractor. 1.08 SUBMITTAL DATA A. Review of submittal data is only for general conformance with the design concept of the Project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: Dimensions, which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that of all other trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. B. Contractor will be limited to one (1) review on a singular piece of equipment. C. The listing of a manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic compliance with Contract Documents. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to insure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for equipment/systems, which meet or exceed the specifications included herein. 1.09 EQUAL MANUFACTURERS/EQUIPMENT A. Any requests for manufacturer/equipment to be considered as equal other than as specified herein shall be submitted to the Engineer not less than 10 days prior to Bid Date. B. Requests for review shall be sufficiently complete to permit evaluation and comparison with specified equipment and material. 16010-3 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 ?m2 City Clerk 1.10 AUTOCAD DRAWING FILE REQUESTS IQ" City' Iowa A. As an instrument of service to aid in Shop Drawing Submittals, Farris Engineering (FE) will provide AutoCAD drawing files upon request. The files will be sent upon return receipt of the "Request for Drawings" agreement signed by an Officer of the requesting firm. FE does not assure that the drawings represent all changes, addenda items, change orders or modifications that may have occurred. The drawings are simply a tool for use in producing shop drawing submittals. B. The drawing files will be "cleaned -up" by having the FE logo, Professional Engineer seal and all extraneous notes and details removed. FE must be compensated for this additional service by the requesting firm. A minimum fee of $200.00 for up to eight (8) sheets and $25.00 per sheet for each additional requested drawing will be invoiced to the requesting firm once the signed agreement is received. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTION OF FIXTURES AND WARES A. This Contractor shall apply the necessary protective coverage to fixtures and other equipment to prevent scratches and mars to such equipment as a result of falling objects or work of other trades. 2.02 STORAGE A. This Contractor shall provide and be responsible for safe storage of his materials and such storage shall not interfere with the work of others or progress of the Project in any manner. 2.03 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. Provide enclosures, which mate properly with the equipment to be enclosed and are NEMA rated to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings. B. Equipment in corrosive atmosphere shall be rated NEMA 4X. All NEMA 4X equipment shall be fabricated from suitable non-metallic material or shall be stainless steel. Painted steel is not acceptable for NEMA 4X applications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Before installing any work, this Contractor shall coordinate the electrical work with all other Contractors on the Project, with the Electric Utility Company and the City Code enforcing department. B. All electrical work shall be installed in proper sequence and so arranged with other trades that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of all piping systems and mechanical equipment. 16010-4 0 2012 by FEI C. This Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper fitting of equipment and conduit as indicated without major alteration. If alterations are required, a detailed drawing of the proposed departure due to actual field conditions or other causes shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. D. Whenever interferences might occur, before installing any of the work in question, the Electrical Contractor shall consult with other Contractors and shall come to an agreement with them as to the exact location and level of his conduit bus duct, light fixtures and/or parts of his installation. E. All changes in the work of this Contractor, caused by his neglect to follow these instructions, shall be made at this Contractor's expense. 3.02 DITCHING, EXCA VA TION AND BA CKFILLING A. Contractor shall do all excavation required to install conduits and equipment shown on drawings or required for proper operation. Excess excavation below the required level shall be backfilled with earth and thoroughly tamped. 3.03 CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Coordinate the hook up of the following equipment with the Contractor required to furnish and install them. See the appropriate sections in the General Construction Work specifications for further information. FILED Mechanical Equipment FEB 21 2012 Cabinetry Equipment lf� t PCllera City k Owner Furnished Equipment Iowa city, Iowa B. Verify fuse and/or circuit breaker requirements for electrical connections to equipment and provide overcurrent devices accordingly. C. The plans indicate the locations of system devices. The Contract shall include the wiring system required to interconnect the indicated devices to result in a complete, operating system. The interconnecting wiring shall be in conformity with the requirements of the manufacturer of the equipment as well as with other requirements set out herein. The basic wiring method to be employed is indicated herein. The Contractor's Shop Drawing submittal shall indicate the specific routing and type of wireway and the number and type of conductors to be installed. 3.04 TEMPORARY WIRING A. This Contractor is to provide a temporary electrical service having a main disconnect and distribution panel. The size of the service shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. From the panel provide wiring for luminaires and receptacles. All receptacles shall be equipped with ground fault circuit protection in accordance with NEC requirements. Provide welding circuits as required. B. The Contractor shall verify with the serving utility existing conditions available for temporary power. 16010-5 0 2012 by FEI FILED I. The Electrical Contractor shall pay all installation charges by Utility Company to connect and F655 Pr?OjZ disconnect the temporary service. City ClerkIowa Iowa city, 2. All charges for electrical energy will be paid by the General Contractor. C. All materials for the temporary service and wiring may be used and remains the property of the Electrical Contractor. D. Temporary wiring materials are not to be installed as part of the permanent wiring system. E. Wiring need not be installed in conduit, but must be adequately installed and protected from mechanical injury to prevent shock. F. Permanent wiring including feeders, panels, receptacles, etc., may be used as soon as installed. G. The Electrical Contractor shall bear all installation costs necessary to connect and disconnect the temporary service. 3.05 CLEANING A. This Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free of all waste or surplus materials, rubbish and debris which is caused by his employees or resulting from his work. B. After all equipment and fixtures have been installed and building is ready for occupancy, the Electrical Contractor shall remove all stickers, rust stains, labels, temporary covers, plaster marks, paint spots, etc. All foreign matter shall be blown out or flushed out of all conduits, panels, motors, devices, switches, fixtures, etc. C. Identification plates and trims on all equipment shall be free of paint and polished. D. The Contractor shall leave the electrical portion of the work in a safe clean and very neat condition ready for operation. 3.06 REBATES A. The Contractor shall assist the Owner with filing of applicable forms to obtain rebates. This shall include but not be limited to determination of qualifying materials and furnishing invoices for materials with corresponding quantities. 3.07 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date set of plans and specifications on the Job Site. He shall mark all Addendum Items and any field changes on this set and see that a copy of all changes is furnished to the Architect at the end of the Project. B. The drawings shall also include as -built conditions such as equipment locations, routing of service entrance and major feeders, etc. 16010-6 0 2012 by FEI 3.08 INSTRUCTION IN OPERATION BOOKS AND SPARE PARTS A. After all tests and adjustments have been made, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary qualified personnel to place the special systems in continuous operation, during which time he shall provide complete Operating and Maintenance Instructions to the Owners representative with an outline of instructions in written form. These personnel shall reserve adequate time to instruct an Owners representative on proper operation (including all phases of the system and each of its component parts). B. Contractor shall furnish Owner with two (2) sets of all operating instructions, maintenance instruction and spare parts lists of all equipment furnished under this Contract. Lists shall include current unit prices and source of supply for each item of operable equipment. 3.09 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. B. During the progress and after completion of the work included under this specification, the Contractor shall make all required tests at his own expense in the presence of the Architect as required hereinafter and by local ordinances, codes, laws and regulations. Such tests shall be in accordance with other sections of this division. The Architect shall be notified five (5) days in advance as to the time when such tests are to be performed that a representative of the Architect may be present. HLED FEB 21 2012 4+: Sq PAIL City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 16010-7 2012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16110 Frit 212012 14" S4 PNt- cry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa RACEWAYS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. All wiring shall be installed in continuous raceways as specified herein except where specifically noted otherwise. B. Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 4. Rigid metal conduit. 5. Rigid nonmetallic conduit. C. MC Cable is not approved for this project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Provide rigid steel, zinc -coated, threaded type conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Provide zinc coating fused to inside and outside walls. 1. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: Rigid metal conduits shall have threaded couplings when installed in concrete or direct burial in the ground. Other installations in dry locations may be threadless rigid fittings. 2. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Provide rigid steel zinc -coated with additional external coating of PVC conforming to ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN 1. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide flexible metal conduit conforming to UL 1. Formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc -coated strip steel. 1. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel conduit of threadless hinged clamp type. 16110-1 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 erk �P� Iowa a. a. Straight Terminal Connectors: One-piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit and male threaded end provided with locknut. b. 45° or 90° Terminal Angle Connectors: Two-piece body construction with removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for securing conduit and male threaded end provided with locknut. D. Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid -tight flexible metal conduit conforming to UL 360; construct of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double -wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside; coat with liquid -tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated throat. E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide electrical metallic tubing conforming to ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. EMT Fittings: Fittings for EMT shall be steel and may be of the screw or compression type except that in poured concrete the screw type is not acceptable. All EMT connectors shall be of the insulated throat type. Die-cast or indenter fittings are not acceptable. EMT connectors shall be fastened to box or enclosure with locknuts. Snap - in fittings are not acceptable. 2. Steel EMT connectors with male threads on the locknut and female threads on the connector equal to Cooper Crouse -Hinds Space -Saver connectors may be used in lieu of insulated throat type connectors. F. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC requirements. Construct conduit bodies with threaded -conduit -entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or of galvanized steel and corrosion -resistant screws. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit and fittings of types, sizes and weights as specified. B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 40, 90 C, UL Rated, construct of polyvinyl chloride and conforming to NEMA TC -2, for direct burial, or normal above ground use, UL Listed. C. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit and tubing duct accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturers published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing. PART 3- EXECUTION 16110-2 ® 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 St:S7 pnt. Iowa1C.Clerk 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS uy, Iowa A. General: Install raceways as indicated; in accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions, and in compliance with NEC and NECA's "Standards of Installation". Install units plumb and level and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B. Coordinate with other work including wirestcables, boxes and panel work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS A. General: All conduits shall be concealed unless noted otherwise. Install concealed conduits either in walls, slabs or above hung ceilings. In existing work where conduits can not be concealed in finished areas, surface metal raceways shall be used. 1. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for conductors to form continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly. 2. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling. 3. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece unions, split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application. Install expansion fittings in raceways every 200 -feet linear run or wherever structural expansion joints are crossed. 4. Use roughing -in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after receiving review of dimensions and after checking location with other trades. B. Conduit Installation: Provide rigid conduit where embedded in concrete on or below grade, in direct contact with earth or fill below slab, wet locations, or installed outdoors. Follow minimum requirements in other areas as follows: 1. Use rigid steel zinc -coated conduit in spaces where exposed below 4 -feet -0 -inch height in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Electrical Equipment Rooms, Penthouses and in service splines. Other areas include warehouse spaces where exposed below 18 -feet -0 - inch height, on floors of crawl spaces and locations subject to mechanical injury. 2. Where acceptable to all authorities having jurisdiction, intermediate metal conduit may be used in lieu of rigid steel conduit in non -hazardous locations when in compliance with NEC. 3. Use PVC coated rigid steel conduit and fittings where installed in corrosive atmosphere. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. 16110-3 0 2012 by FEI FEB 2 1 4. Use steel zinc -coated EMT for raceway systems except as specifically specified y ; 5g 9A 4. cuy wort: previously, where not allowed by NEC or noted on drawings. Additionally EMT shall mwa City, Iowa not be acceptable below grade, in or under slabs on grade, or in wet locations. 5. Use flexible conduit in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to recessed lighting fixtures in accessible ceilings, and final 24 -inches of connection to motors, or control items subject to movement or vibration, and in cells of precast concrete panels. The maximum leneth for flexible conduit shall not exceed 6 -feet. 6. Use liquid -tight flexible conduit where subjected to one (1) or more of the following conditions: a. Exterior location. b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. C. Pump motors. d. Corrosive atmosphere. e. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease. 7. Rigid Non -Metallic Conduits: a. Rigid non-metallic conduits may be used below grade or embedded in concrete on or below grade only. b. Rigid non-metallic conduits shall not be used for exposed stub -ups above floor. Where acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, rigid non-metallic conduits may be stubbed -up 6 -inches above floor where concealed within walls. In masonry walls, non-metallic conduits may be extended to a maximum of 48 - inches above floor. C. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer. d. Install rigid non-metallic conduits in compliance with NEC, local utility practices, and all other authorities having jurisdiction. C. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling thread inside the plugs and set flush with the finished grade. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 -inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this Contract, install screwdriver -operated threaded flush plugs flush with floor. D. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise from grade. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished grade. E. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200 lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 -inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 16110-4 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 212012 •r 57 p Iowa'CtClerkt C4, Iowa F. Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. G. Field -bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal diameter. H. Size conduits to meet NEC requirements and as shown on drawings or specified herein, except no conduit smaller than 3/4 -inch shall be embedded in or below concrete or in masonry walls. Fasten rigid conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures with locknuts inside and outside enclosure or with threadless rigid box connectors and terminate with bushing. J. Conduit terminations in wet locations shall be of the threaded hub type or other sealing type fittings UL Listed for use in wet locations. K. Conduit shall be properly supported as specified herein and as required by NEC. L. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where required, use 3 -piece union or split coupling. M. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. N. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL Listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations. 2. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces. 3. Where required by the NEC. O. Provide sleeves for conduits passing through foundation or other load bearing walls. Conduits installed underground which extend through the foundation walls shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of moisture through the foundation walls. All conduits extending through the exterior walls of a building in areas below grade shall be provided with a hydrostatic seal such as Link Seal or equal. Q. Concealed Conduits: 1. Conduits in finished areas shall be installed concealed. 16110-5 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 l km2 W.I ty cMx 2. Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or outside are to have Iowa Cuy,Iowa conduit threads painted with corrosion inhibiting compound before couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and conduit sufficiently tight to ensure watertightness. 3. For floors -on -grade, install conduits under concrete slabs. 4. Install underground conduits minimum of 24 -inches below finished grade. 5. Rigid steel conduit buried in direct contact with the earth shall be coated with an asphaltum base paint prior to installation and all scratches shall be repainted after installation before backfilling. R. Conduits in Concrete Slabs: Conduits shall not be installed in concrete slabs without prior approval/direction from the Structural Engineer regarding maximum conduit sizes, minimum cover, locations, etc. S. Exposed Conduits: In unfinished areas such as Janitor Closets, Storage, Mechanical Equipment Rooms, etc., conduit may be run exposed. Prior permission shall be first obtained from the Architect. All exposed conduit shall be installed in a neat manner following the building lines. Horizontal runs shall be close to the ceiling and shall be installed above mechanical piping as much as possible. Single hung conduits shall be supported with strap or rod hangers, wire is not an acceptable hanger. Multiple hung conduits shall be strapped to the channel to hold it in place. 2. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit systems neatly, parallel with or at right angles to walls of building. 3. Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps or clips. Support conduits on each side of bends and on spacing not to exceed following: Up to 1 -inch: 6 -feet -0 -inch; 1- 1/4 -inch and over: 8 -feet -0 -inch. 4. Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors for supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement. 5. Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space above hung ceilings, and in crawl spaces except that spacing of supports for conduits up to 1 - inch shall not exceed 8 -feet -0 -inch. - - - - T. Conduit Fittings: 1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging into metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. 2. Plastic insulating bushings for terminating rigid conduits smaller than 1 -1/4 -inch are to have ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation. 16110-6 O 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 *:sti PA1 Cih C erk Iowa City, Iowa 3. Install metallic insulated type bushings for terminating rigid conduits 1 -1/4 -inch and larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. 4. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece unions, split couplings and plugs to be specifically designed for their particular application. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS A. General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures, and raceways for conductors to form continuous electrical conductor, and connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling. 2. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion joints are crossed. 3. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway manufacturer. No field bends of two-piece type raceway sections will be permitted. 4. Field bends of single piece raceway shall be permitted for small offsets only where the use of fittings supplied by the manufacturer is not possible. Field -bend raceway with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal diameter of raceway. Raceway shall be installed so as to avoid field bends wherever possible. 5. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported. 6. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall not be permitted for use with surface raceway installations. 16110-7 (D 2012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16120 FEB 21 2012 4: sq PAA. WIRES AND CABLES Iowan Iowa PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wires and cables shall be single, insulated conductors, field -installed in continuous raceways unless specified otherwise. B. Types of electrical wire, cable and connectors specified in this section include the following: 1. Copper conductors. 2. Tap type connectors. 3. Wirenut connectors. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.O1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (1) of the following (for each type of wire, cable and connector): Wire and Cable: a. Apex Wire and Cable Corp. b. American Insulated Wire Corp. C. American Wire and Cable Co. d. Belden Div; Cooper Industries. e. Brand -Rex Div; Pyle National Co. f. Cerro Wire and Cable Corp. g. Cleveland Insulated Wire Co. h. General Cable Corporation. i. Helix Wire Corporation. j. Houston Wire k. Indiana Insulated Wire Inc. 1. Laribee Wire Manufacturing Co., Inc. m. Madison Wire and Cable Corp. n. Okonite Co. o. Pirelli Cable Corp. P. Radix Wire Co. q. Rothe Cable Corp. r. Southwire Company. S. Triangle PWC, Inc. 16120-1 0 2012 by FEI 2. Connectors: 2.02 WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS A. General: All reference to size in these specifications or on drawings is for copper conductors. Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20°C (680F). B. Building Wires: Provide factory -fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity rating, and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. C. Cables: Provide UL -type factory -fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials and jacketing/sheathing as indicated for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. D. Connectors: Provide UL -type factory -fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.03 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 16120-2 0 2012 by FEI a. AMP, Inc. FILED b. Appleton Electric Co; Emerson Electric Co. C. Buchanan Co. F�BS21 7(I12 d. Bumdy Corporation. ff fM e. Brand -Rex Div. Pyle National Co. Cay clerk f. Electrical Products Div; Midland -Ross Corp. Iowa Cny, Iowa g General Electric Co. h. Gould, Inc. L Ideal Industries, Inc. j. Leviton Mfg Company. k. 3M Company 1. O-ZtGedney Co. M. Southport Industries Inc. n. Square D Company. o. Thomas and Betts Corp. 2.02 WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS A. General: All reference to size in these specifications or on drawings is for copper conductors. Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation and for application indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20°C (680F). B. Building Wires: Provide factory -fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity rating, and materials for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper wire selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. C. Cables: Provide UL -type factory -fabricated cables of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials and jacketing/sheathing as indicated for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. D. Connectors: Provide UL -type factory -fabricated, metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project's installation requirements, NEC and NEMA Standards. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.03 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 16120-2 0 2012 by FEI B. The normal minimum size shall be 12 AWG. All wire No. 10 and smaller to be solid, all No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. C. All service entrance, feeder and branch circuit wiring shall be type THHN/THWN. D. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one (1) is being installed in same raceway. E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use of soap will not be permitted as pulling lubricant. F. Insulation on conductors shall be permanently marked with wire size, insulation type, voltage range and manufacturer's name. The insulation on conductors shall be color coded as follows: 1. 120/240 -volt circuit: Phase A - Black; Phase B - Red., Phase C — Blue. G. The phase conductors shall be tagged and shall remain the same throughout the circuit. FILED H. Switch legs shall be color coded to distinguish them from Hot or Phase Conductors. FER 2 12012 .9'.64F PM I. Switch legs occurring in the same box or enclosure shall be color coded separately. Ciry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa J. Exceptions to the color coding as listed above shall be as follows: 1. Wiring for special systems shall be color coded or labeled as required by the manufacturer. K. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway. L. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible. M. Keep conductor splices to minimum. N. Install splices and taps which possess equivalent -or -better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. O. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. P. All splices and taps shall be made in outlet, junction and pull boxes. Splices on circuit wiring shall be of the pigtail type using solderless connectors. Larger sizes of conductors requiring uninsulated connectors of the bolt type shall be taped with pressure sensitive vinyl tape. Q. For branch circuit wiring, conductor fill per conduit run shall not contain more than eight (8) current carrying wires, provided the wire size is derated as required by the National Electrical Code. Conduits containing both circuit switch legs and/or traveler wires may contain more than the number stated above, providing the conduit is of adequate size and the wire size is derated as required by the National Electrical Code. Whenever a 120 -volt, single phase branch circuit is over 70 -feet in length and the load is in excess of 50% of the branch circuit protective device, the conductors shall be increased one (1) size to the first outlet box unless specifically noted 16120-3 0 2012 by FEI otherwise. For special systems conductor fill of conduit is per manufacturers specifications furnished with each system, noted on the drawings or shall be as required by code. R. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A and B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. FILED FEB 21 2012 CiClerk Iowa City, lows 16120-4 C 2012 by FEI SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS FILED FFR 21 7012 4,Z am City Clerk PART 1- GENERAL Iowa City, Iowa 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1. Outlet boxes. 2. Junction boxes. 3. Pull boxes. 4. Bushings. 5. Locknuts. 6. Knockout closures. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS A. Outlet Boxes: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical," and UL 514B, "Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes." Boxes shall be of type, shape, size and depth to suit each location and application. 1. Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports." Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs. B. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion -resistant cast -metal raintight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast -metal face plates with spring -hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion -resistant plugs and fasteners. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. D. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications. 16135-1 ® 2012 by FEI FILED FEB Y, 1 71112 4: Citsq PM Y Clerk PART 3 - EXECUTION Iowa City, Iowa 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Surface -mounted device boxes in unfinished areas shall be a minimum of 4 -inch square knockout type. Surface -mounted boxes in finished and exterior areas, shall be cast metal, threaded hub similar to Crouse Hinds "FS" or "FD" condulet box. C. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wiretcable, wiring devices and raceway installation work. D. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. E. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. F. Install electrical boxes in those locations, which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. Junction boxes shall not be installed above non -accessible ceilings. G. Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 24 -inch separation. H. Avoid installing aluminum products in concrete. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. J. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces. K. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Box support shall be independent of conduit. L. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. M. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage. 3.02 POSITION OF OUTLETS A. The Electrical Contractor shall consult with Mechanical and General Contractor prior to rough -in outlets and shall set boxes to avoid interference with equipment installation in walls or ceilings. B. Outlets shall be centered with respect to paneling, trim, furring, etc. Outlets improperly located shall be corrected at Contractor's expenses. Outlets shall be set plumb, secured firmly in place with face of box or plaster ring extending to finished surface or wall, ceiling or floor as the case may be. 16135-2 0 2012 by FEI FILED Fi-H 21 2012 s5 f1m Clty CCrk 14 Iowa City, Iowa C. Washers or bushings shall be installed between recessed box and device strap to make a flush rigid installation of the device installed. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Upon completion of installation work, ground electrical boxes as required by NEC and other Division 16 Sections. 16135-3 C 2012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16143 FEB 21 2012 1/-: S9 PAA City Clerk WIRING DEVICES Iowa City, Iowa PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems, which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following: 1. Receptacles. 2. Ground -fault circuit interrupters. 3. Switches. 4. Wallplates. 5. Plugs and connectors. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices of one (1) of the following (for each type and rating of wiring device): 1. Arrow Hart 2. Bryant Electric Co. 3. Cooper Wiring Devices 4. Daniel Woodhead Co. 5. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co. 6. General Electric Co. 7. Hubbell Inc. 8. Leviton Mfg Co. 9. Pass and Seymour Inc. 2.02 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES A. General: Provide factory -fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors and electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA Standards Pub/No. WD 1. Provide gray color devices except as otherwise indicated; color selection to be verified by Contractor with Architect. All devices shall be specification grade. B. Receptacles: 16143-1 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 +f:511 OM city clerk lowa 1. Ground -Fault Interrupters: Provide "feed-thru" type ground -fault circuit interrupters, Iowa Cuy, with heavy-duty duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, and of being installed in a 2 -3/4 -inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type UL Rated Class A, Group 1, rated 20 -amperes, 120 -volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground -fault sensing and signaling; with 5 - milliamperes ground -fault trip level; equip with NEMA configuration 5-20R. C. Plugs and Connectors: Plugs and Connectors: Provide plugs and connectors with required amperage ratings, voltage ratings and NEMA configurations, which are designed to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings. All plugs and connectors shall be manufactured by Daniel Woodhead Company or approved equal by one (1) of the following manufacturers: a. Hubbell Inc. b. Pass and Seymour Inc. D. Switches: 1. General: Switches shall be provided as specified in this section. Additional features such, as key operator, rocker and lighted toggle shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. 2. Single -Pole: Provide heavy-duty flush single -pole AC quiet, self -grounding type switches, 20 -amperes, 120/277 -volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, toggle switch handle, and side -wired screw terminals. 3. Double Pole: Provide heavy-duty flush double -pole AC quiet, self -grounding type switches, 20 -amperes, 120/277 -volts, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, toggle switch handles and side -wired screw terminals. 2.03 WIRINGDEVICEACCESSORIES A. Wallplates: Provide wallplates for single and combination wiring devices, of types, sizes and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Select plates which mate and match wiring devices to which attached. Construct with metal screws for securing plates to devices; screw heads colored to match finish of plates; wallplates colored to match wiring devices except as noted below. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features: Finished Areas: Material and Finish: 0.04 -inch thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel 16143-2 0 2012 by FEI �ILED FEB 21 2012 �: S4 Prot City chrk Iowa City, Iowa 2. Unfinished Areas: Material and Finish: Steel plate, galvanized. 3. Surface -mounted boxes in unfinished areas shall be furnished with 4 -inch square raised covers, with openings to fit device or devices to be installed. B. provide metallic weatherproof covers for receptacle installed outdoors, in wet locations or shown as weatherproof. Provide "in -use" type weatherproof covers where required per NEC. C. Finish plates provided for switches controlling exhaust fans shall be stainless steel and engraved as follows "EXH FAN" in 1/4 -inch high black filled letters. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes, which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt and debris. D. Install wallplates after painting work is completed. E. The continuity of branch circuit conductors shall not depend on device connections such as lampholders, receptacles, etc. where the removal of the device would interrupt the continuity. Branch circuit conductors shall be spliced with Jumpers to connect the device. F. Connections of wire to devices shall be screw tightened (except devices with built-in connector/leads). Connections using only spring pressure are not acceptable. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. H. All switches and receptacles with exposed terminals shall be wranoed with insulating tape equal to Scotch No 33 such that no live parts are left exposed. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WALLPLA TES AND RECEPTACLES 16143-3 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 l 2012 J. ;SPM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items, which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs and those, which are not clean and free from paint, dirt and debris. 3.03 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3.04 TESTING A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements. 16143-4 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 sq Pnk City Clerk SECTION 16170 Iowa City, im CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this section include the following: Equipment disconnects. C. Wires/cables, raceways and electrical boxes and fittings required in connection with circuit and motor disconnect work are specified in other Division 16 Sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide technical cut sheet and dimensional drawings for each type of disconnect switch shown on plan. Clearly indicate model and intended use for each disconnect on the submittal sheets. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide circuit and motor disconnects of one (1) of the following: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D Company. 4. Cutler -Hammer. 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Heavy -Duty Disconnect Switches: Provide surface -mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet -steel enclosed switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated for system voltage 60 Hz, with required number of poles and solid neutral incorporating quick -make, quick -break type switches. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high -conductivity copper, with silver -tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips where fusing is required. The enclosure shall be NEMA 4X (stainless steel) and of the manufacturer's standard finish. When used as service disconnect, provide with UL. markings indicating "suitable for use as service equipment". 16170-1 C 2012 by FEI B. Fuses: Provide fuses for disconnect switches, as recommended by switch manufacturer, of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway work, location of equipment and as necessary for proper interface. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground as required by NEC and in Grounding Section of Division 16. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at Project Site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units and retest. FILED FEB 2 L 7012 Lt., Sq PM c y Clcrk Iowa City. Iowa 16170-2 0 2012 by FEI SECTION 16190 FILED SUPPORTING DEVICES FEB 21 P012 Iowa Ciry,lowa PART1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals and associated fastenings. 1. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for additional specific support requirements that may be applicable to specific items. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: Slotted Metal Angle and U -Channel Systems: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. American Electric. C. B -Line Systems, Inc. d. Cinch Clamp Co., Inc. e. GS Metals Corp. f. Haydon Corp. g. Kin -Line, Inc. h. Unistrut Diversified Products. 2. Conduit Sealing Bushings: a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. b. Cooper Industries, Inc. C. Elliott Electric Mfg. Corp. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. f. Madison Equipment Co. g. L.E. Mason Co. h. O-Z/Gedney. 16190-1 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 rk Iowa; ikowa i. Producto Electric Corp. j. Raco, Inc. L Red Seal Electric Corp. 1. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. or. Thomas & Betts Corp. 2.02 COATINGS A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot -dip galvanized. 2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded Cclamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps. B. Fasteners: Types, materials and construction features as follows: 1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. Plastic expansion anchors (for conduit 1 -inch and smaller only). 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 3. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended service. C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory -fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps and cap screws. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable -iron casting with hotdip galvanized finish. E. U -Channel Systems: 16 -gage steel channels, with 9/16 -inch diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 - inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match the U - channel and are of the same manufacturer. 2.04 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Shop- or field -fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from Uchannel components. B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. 16190-2 ® 2012 by FEI FILER FEB 21 2012 Y-.'59 P,v\ City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one (1) of the following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. 3 -inches and smaller: 20 -gage. b. 4 -inch to 6 -inches: 16 -gage. C. Over 64nches: 14 -gage. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 3. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements: 1. Conform to manufacturers recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four (4). Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support. 3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U -bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. 4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze -type hangers. 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 -inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4 -inch diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. 6. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 -foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where 16190-3 ® 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 t ?0JZ 'V -:!5q em City Clerk box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made Iowa City, Iowa with chase nipples or threadless box connectors. 7. In vertical runs, arrange support so that load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers and other devices. F. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. G. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other firerated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated -wall or floor construction, apply UL Listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables. H. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. I. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches and control components in accordance with the following: Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring -tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws. 2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1 -1/2 -inch in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 -inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. 3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25% of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock -resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. 16190-4 0 2012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16195 FEB 21 2012 4: Sj j*N ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION mwac;ry;Iowa a PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of electrical identification is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following: 1. Buried cable warnings. 2. Electrical power, control and communication conductors. 3. Operational instructions and warnings. 4. Danger signs. 5. Equipment/system identification signs. C. Refer to Division 1 General Requirements Section, Identification Systems, for equipment and system nameplates and performance data; not work of this section. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturers standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than one (1) single type is specified for an application, selection is Installers option, but provide single selection for each application. B. Plasticized Tags: 1. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre- printed accident -prevention and operational tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 -1/4 -inch x 5 -5/8 -inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large -size primary working, e.g., DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE. C. Self -Adhesive Plastic Signs: General: Provide manufacturer's standard, self-adhesive or pressure -sensitive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application, e.g., 208V, EXHAUST FAN, RECTIFIER. a. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide orange signs with black lettering. 16195-1 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 .p:sy PNt, City Clerk Iowa Ciry, Iowa D. Baked Enamel Danger Signs: General: Provide manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on 20 -gage steel; of standard red, black and white graphics; 14 -inch x 10 -inch size except where 10 -inches x 7 -inches is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and except where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard explanation wording, e.g., HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP AWAY, BURIED CABLE, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH. E. Engraved Plastic -Laminate Signs: 1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L -P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black face and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. a. Thickness: 1/164nch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 -inch length; 1/8 -inch for larger units. b. Fasteners: Self -tapping stainless steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. F. Underground -Type Plastic Line Marker: General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed plastic tape, intended for direct -burial service; not less than 6 -inch wide x 4 MILS thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service or buried cable. 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATIONAND INSTALLATION A. General Installation Requirements: Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC. 16195-2 C 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 4J -'c ry cP� Iowa City, Iowa 2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. 3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for identification of electrical work. B. Operational Identification and Warnings: 1. General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes. C. Danger Signs: General: In addition to installation of danger signs required by Governing regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as constituting similar dangers for persons in or about Project. a. High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is possible, under any circumstances, for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages higher than 250 -volts. b. Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of property where instructed by Architect. D. Equipment/System Identification: 1. General: Install engraved plastic -laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/controltsignal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Signs for disconnect switches, motor starters, contactors and similar equipment shall indicate the load served. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2 -inch high lettering on 1 -1/2 -inch high sign (2 -inch high where two (2) lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work. a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities. C. Disconnect switches. d. Motor starters. e. Contactors. 16195-3 Q 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 At -.61 PN\, aclerk Iowuy. Iowa 2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate. E. Underground Cable Identification: 1. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground electrical, signal or communication cable, install continuous underground -type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 -inch to 8 -inch below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16 -inch, install a single line marker. 2. Install line marker for every buried cable, regardless of whether direct buried or protected in conduit. F. Cable/Conductorldentification: General: Apply cable/conductor identification in each box/enclosure/cabinet, except where another form of identification (such as color -coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project electrical work. 16195-4 0 2012 by FEI PART1- GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. PART 2 2.01 SECTION 16420 SERVICE ENTRANCE FILED FFR 21 2012 5� s9 PM City Cleric Iowa city, Iowa SUMMARY Electrical services will come from a pad mounted transformer located where shown on the Project Drawings. The electrical services to the service entrance equipment from the transformer shall be by Division 16 in accordance with the one -line power riser diagram. Additional requirements for service -entrance work are indicated by drawings and schedules. Wires/cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings are specified in Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Sections, Wires and Cables, Raceways and Electrical Boxes and Fittings and are work of this section. PRODUCTS SERVICE -ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide service -entrance equipment and accessories; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information and as required for complete installation and as herein specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE -ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. Coordinate all service—entrance work at existing transformer with Owner and power utility. Install service -entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service -entrance equipment fulfills requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC, Power Utility, and NEMA Standards. B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including utility company wiring, as necessary to interface installation of service -entrance equipment work with other work. C. Install fuses, if any, in service -entrance equipment. 3.02 GROUNDING 16420-1 0 2012 by FEI A. Provide equipment bonding and grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground, for service -entrance equipment as required by NEC, the Grounding Section of Division 16 and as indicated on drawings. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. Touch-up scratched or marred enclosure surfaces to match original finishes. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of service -entrance equipment and electrical circuitry, energized circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. FILED FEB 21 7012 U:s.-) Ptr k City Iowa Iowa Cuy, 16420-2 O 2012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16452 FEB 212012 1'. set PM GROUNDING 4., fir,% PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings, schedules and as specified herein. B. Types of grounding specified in this section include the following: 1. Solid grounding. C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Materials and Components: 1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE and established industry standards for applications indicated. B. Conductors: Provide copper electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. All conduits shall contain a minimum of one (1) separate equipment grounding conductor identified and sized according to NEC. C. Ground Rods: 1. Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, 5/8 -inch dia. x 8 -feet (Unless otherwise noted). D. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat -shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated. 16452-1 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 i 7nt2 4: s4 Prt City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa E. Exothermic Welded Connections: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work. Provide welded connections where grounding conductors connect to underground grounding rods/electrodes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding connections are to be made and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. The equipment grounding conductor shall be connected directly to the equipment grounding screw provided on receptacles. C. At switch outlets, where self -grounding type switches are installed in metal boxes, the equipment grounding conductor shall be connected directly to the metal box. D. Where switches installed in non-metallic boxes have metallic cover plates or screws, provide switches with green hexagonal equipment ground screw and connect to the equipment grounding conductor. E. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work. F. Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding rods/electrodes. (Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable). G. Install clamp -on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms or less, by driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance. 16452-2 0 2012 by FEI SECTION 16470 FILED PANELBOARDS FEB 21 ,t: 51 Pm City Clerk PART 1 - GENERAL Iowa City, Iowa 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes is indicated by drawings and schedules. Types of panelboards and enclosures in this section include the following: 1. Power -distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards. C. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for cable/wire, connectors and electrical raceway work required in conjunction with panelboards and enclosures; not work of this section. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panelboard products of one (1) of the following: 1. General Electric Company. 2. Siemens. 3. Square D Company. 4. Cutler -Hammer. 2.02 PANELBOARDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and auxiliary components, of types, sizes and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated. B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide circuit breaker type dead -front safety constructed power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and with arrangement shown; with anti -tum (solderless pressure) type main lug connectors approved for copper or aluminum conductors. Equip with tin-plated aluminum bus bars with not less than 57% conductivity and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide 16470-1 0 2012 by FEI BALED FEB 2 ) 7012 l -:s91 Pa% City ctrK Iowa City, Iowa molded -case circuit -breakers for each branch circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multipole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one - pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Panelboard enclosures shall be not less than 8 -inches deep. Provide panelboards with UL markings indicating "suitable for use as service -entrance equipment". Breakers in panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than as listed on the panelboard schedule. 2. Circuit Breaker Distribution Panelboards shall be: General Electric Siemens Square D Cutler -Hammer Spectra Series S4,S5 I -LINE Pow -R -Line 4B C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead -front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti -tum solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper or aluminum conductors; equip with tin-plated aluminum bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt -on type heavy-duty, quick -make, quick -break, single -pole or multi -pole circuit- breakers, as indicated, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Multipole breakers shall be provided with a common trip. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards shall be type: 2. Breakers in panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than as listed on the panelboard schedule. D. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, minimum 20 -inches wide and 5 -3/4 -inches deep, code -gage, minimum 16 -gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush metal locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike. Equip with interior circuit -directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed or surface - mounting as indicated. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed and are NEMA rated to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings. 16470-2 0 2012 by FEI 240V Bolton General Electric AQ Siemens S1 Square D NQOD Cutler -Hammer PRLI, PRL2 2. Breakers in panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have an interrupting capacity of not less than as listed on the panelboard schedule. D. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, minimum 20 -inches wide and 5 -3/4 -inches deep, code -gage, minimum 16 -gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush metal locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike. Equip with interior circuit -directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed or surface - mounting as indicated. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards to be enclosed and are NEMA rated to suit the atmospheric conditions of the equipment surroundings. 16470-2 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 �M City C7crk Iowa City, 10µ•a 1. Furnish six (6) spare keys for each type of panelboard cabinet lock E. Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, cartridge and plug time -delay type fuses, circuit -breakers, ground -fault protection units, etc., as recommended by manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. F. Panelboard Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to, cartridge and plug time -delay type fuses, circuit -breakers, ground -fault protection units, etc., as recommended by manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PANELSOARDS A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC Standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B or manufacturer's torque requirements when more stringent. D. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. E. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. F. Provide factory panelboard circuit directory cards upon completion of installation work. Circuit directory cards shall be arranged with even numbered circuits separated by group or card from odd numbered circuits. All circuits, including spares and spaces, shall be labeled. All identification shall be at a minimum typewritten. Hand lettering is not acceptable. G. All wiring within panelboards shall be arranged in a neat and organized manner. 3.03 GROUNDING 16470-3 C 2012 by FET A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required by NEC and other Division 26 Sections. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B to assure permanent and effective grounds. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications. B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short-circuits. D. Subsequent to wire and cable connections, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance. FILED FEB 212812 yc6 ry C�] lerk Iowa City, Iowa 16470-4 0 2012 by FEI SECTION 16477 FUSES PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of fuse work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of fuses specified in this section include the following: FILED 1. Class L time -delay. FEB 2 2012 2. Class RKl time -delay. 41 Se, ( 3. Class RK5 time -delay. City clerk 4. Plug fuses. Iowa city, Iowa PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one (1) of the following: 1. Bussman Div; McGraw -Edison Co. 2. Littelfuse Co. 3. Gould Shawmut. B. Fuse types listed below are for Bussman Co. Fuses by Littelfuse Co. or Gould Shawmut shall be equal to types indicated. 2.02 FUSES A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time/current and peak let -through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials and construction in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations. B. Class L Time -Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class L time -delay fuses rated 600V (Type KRP-C), 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes 601 -amperes and larger. C. Class RK] Time -Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK] time -delay fuses rated 250V (Type LPN -RK) for voltages under 250V and 600V (Type LPS-RK) for voltages 250-600V, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes 100- through 600 -amperes. 16477-1 0 2012 by FEI D. Class RK5 Time -Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK5 time -delay fuses rated 250V (Type FRN -R) for voltages under 250V and 600V (Type FRS -R) for voltages 250-600V, 60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for sizes .1 -through 90 -amperes. E. Plug fuses shall be permitted only for single -pole fuseholder with switch units. Plug fuses shall be dual -element Type S fuses. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLA770N OF FUSES A. Install fuses as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA Standards for installation of fuses. B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of fuses with other work. C. Install fuses in fused switches, if any. D. Short-circuit protection dual -element fuses installed in individual motor circuits with separate overload protection shall be sized at 150% of motor nameplate current rating or the next standard fuse size. Where excessive ambient temperature, high inertia motor loads or frequent "on-off' cvcline requires lareer fuses. consult the electrical eneineer. Use fuse reducers where fuse Bans are larger than fuse dimension. E. All fuse sizes shall be coordinated with manufacturer's requirements for each unit of equipment to be connected. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization of fusible devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short-circuits. Correct malfunctioning units and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. FILED FEB 21 7012 Ci Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 16477-2 0 2012 by FEI SECTION 16510 FILED LIGHTING FIXTURES FEH 21 7w q' -S5 P M CClcrk Iowa i ty, Iowa PART1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Extent of lighting fixture work is indicated by drawings and schedules. B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section might include the following: 1. LED. 2. High -intensity -discharge (HID). 3. Fluorescent. 4. Incandescent. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: The type and manufacturer of all lighting fixtures shall be as indicated on the fixture schedule and drawings. 2.02 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, ballasts, starters and wiring. B. No labels on fixtures shall be placed where same will be conspicuous or where same will mar the appearance of the units. The complete units and all components for fluorescent, HID and incandescent fixtures shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label. C. All fixture and pole finishes shall be factory applied unless specifically noted otherwise. D. All ballasts shall have ratings suitable for the atmosphere for which they are to be installed. Fixtures installed in low ambient temperature areas shall have ballasts specifically designed for low temperature starting. E. Linear fluorescent lamps shall be low mercury TCLP compliant. 2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPES A. General: The fixture types are designated by letters (A.B.C. etc.) near each outlet and refer to the description as listed in the Fixture Schedule. 16510-1 0 2012 by FEI �ILEI� FEB 2 t 1012 4-:5;1 j7q / City Clcrk Iuwa Gry, Iowa B. All lamps shall be of type specified on the Fixture Schedule. This Contractor shall furnish lamps for all fixtures as shown on the plans and fixture schedule. These lamps shall be new at the time of building acceptance by the Owner. Any lamps used for construction lighting shall be replaced prior to acceptance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed and substrate which will support lighting fixtures. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA Standards and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work. C. Where recessed fixtures are specified, Contractor shall provide plaster frames or other framing devices to the Ceiling Contractor prior to the installation of the fixtures and shall be responsible to see that the proper fixtures are furnished for the specific ceiling used. D. Where bollards are used, fasten fixtures securely to base; and ensure that bollards are plumb. E. Where the drawings indicate ballaststlamps to be separately switched, the lamps within fixture shall be wired with the outermost lamps on the same ballast, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given room, each switch shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp pairs) in all fixture units that are being controlled. The switch nearest the door shall control the outermost lamps. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation. Protect installed fixtures from damage during construction period. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting. 3.05 GROUNDING 16510-2 C 2012 by FEI A. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting fixtures as required by NEC and other Division 26 Sections. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. FILED FEB 21 2012 ti; SQ P,y IowaCi Cty 1 ry,lowa 16510-3 2012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16722 FEB 21 2012 y:4 P City Clerk FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Iowa city, Iowa PART1- GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials and performance of all operations in connection with the installation of an electrically supervised closed loop and addressable 24 -volt DC Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. The system shall include but not be limited to all control panels, power supplies, alarm initiating devices, alarm signaling devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all auxiliary accessories required to provide a complete and operating system which shall be left in first class operating condition. The system shall be approved by the various regulatory bodies. B. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. C. The items of equipment furnished under this specification shall be listed as a product of a single Fire Alarm manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories and shall meet the applicable requirements of NFPA Standards, Life Safety Code 101, National Electric Code Article 760 as well as those standards set by the authorities having jurisdiction. The system controls shall be listed under UL Standard 864 (Control Units). In addition, the system controls shall be UL Listed for Power Limited applications per NEC 760. All circuits must be marked in accordance with NEC Article 760. The Fire Alarm and detection equipment shall not be modified or installed to alter or void the Underwriters Laboratories label or listing. Fire alarm control panel shall UL 9" Edition listed. D. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL864 requirements. Where Fire Alarm circuits leave the building, additional transient protection must be provided for each circuit. Devices must be UL Listed under Standard #49713(Isolated Loop Circuit Protectors). E. Provide power connections, detection devices, etc., where auxiliary equipment is required, such as remote power supplies, voice annunciation panels, and other equipment necessary for a complete and operating system. Where the Fire Alarm Control Panel is shown connected to an emergency power system, all auxiliary equipment shall also be connected to the emergency power system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit shop drawings and product data to the Architect -Engineer in accordance with the General Conditions and General Requirements. Shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Complete descriptive product data including UL Listing for all system components and detailed manufacturer's drawings on the: Fire Alarm Control Panel, Remote Annunciators, Manual Fire Alarm Station, Automatic Fire Detection Devices, Alarm Signaling Devices, Wiring and Cable. 16722-1 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEb 21 7012 .} . S q P/A City Clerk low& Cay, Iowa 2. Terminal connection diagram of the Fire Alarm Control Panel showing all wiring connection points including typical field wiring circuit diagrams. 3. Layout drawings showing the exact location of all Fire Alarm equipment and the interconnection between the devices. 4. A complete step-by-step description of the operation of the system. 5. Certification by the manufacturer that the battery installation meets the operating requirements specified herein. B. All Submittal data on this system must be approved by the State Fire Marshall and/or the authority having jurisdiction before it is submitted to the Architect for approval. C. The Contractor shall fumish to the Owner, upon final acceptance of the system, four (4) sets of written Operating and Maintenance Instructions which shall include copies of all designated approved shop drawings, wiring diagrams, layout drawings and installation and operating instructions. The manual shall contain procedures to follow for drills, troubleshooting, resetting the system and other functions normal to, and inherent in, the Fire Alarm and detection system. 1.03 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Activation of any manual Fire Alarm station, verified smoke detector, heat detector or any other automatic alarm initiating device, shall provide the following automatic operation: 1. An alarm shall be displayed on the 80 character LCD display. The top line of 40 characters shall be the custom point label and the second line shall be the device type identifier and point status indicator. The custom point label shall identify location of the device. The nomenclature used to describe the device location shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall correspond to zone indication plaque nomenclature. The system alarm red LED shall flash on the Control Panel and remote annunciator until the alarm has been acknowledged at the Control Panel. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the Control Panel. The LCD display shall show the new alarm information. 2. All audible alarm indicating devices shall sound a uniform code 3 temporal pattern and all visual devices shall activate and have the flash rate synchronized until silenced at the Fire Alarm Control Panel or remote annunciator. The system will include provisions for silencing the signaling devices, allowing for re-initiation following a subsequent alarm, but only after the signaling devices have operated initially for not less than three (3) minutes. (The inhibit feature shall be adjustable from 0-5 minutes). Systems that do not have resound capabilities will not be acceptable. 3. All circuits of doors normally held open by door control devices shall release after a five (5) second delay. 4. A supervised signal to notify the Local Fire Department or an approved central station shall be activated. 16722-2 C 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 ,' � CirYsgerk l 5. All air handling units over 2,000 CFM shall deactivate and all smoke and firea/1&mpers shall close. 6. Light an alarm indicator lamp on smoke detectors which have initiated an alarm B. The activation of any (system operated) area smoke detector shall initiate an alarm verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alar activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alar as described previously. If no second alar occurs within one (1) minute the system shall resume normal operation. The alar verification shall operate only on area smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alar verification operation shall be selectable by zone or addressable detector and shall allow the zones (detectors) to be divided into seven (7) different groups whereby only two (2) zones from a group will confirm the first activation and cause the panel to follow programmed alarm sequence. Alar verification SHALL NOT be applied to Duct Smoke Detectors. The Control Panel shall have the capability to display the number of times a zone or addressable detector has gone into a verification mode. C. The System Control Panel must be capable of communicating with the types of addressable devices specified below. The location of addressable devices will be selected along with conventional devices to optimize the system layout in order to provide the level of protection, zone identification and control as shown on the drawings. D. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all addressable devices, monitoring, signaling and control circuits individually for maintenance and testing purposes. E. Alar and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the Control Panel from Alphanumeric LCD display. If more than one (1) alar or trouble is in the system, the operator may scroll to display new alarms. F. A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the systems alar indicating devices. Other control circuits shall not be activated. However, an alar shall be processed as described previously. G. The Control Panel shall include a system testing capability to help ensure that zoning and supervision have been maintained throughout the system. The actuation of the enable walk test program at the Control Panel shall activate the "Walk -Test" mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur: 1. The city connection circuit shall be disconnected. 2. Control relay functions shall be bypassed. 3. The Control Panel shall show a trouble condition. 4. The alar activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible signals to code a number of pulses to match the zone number. 5. The panel shall automatically reset itself after code is complete. 16722-3 0 2012 by FEI FILED 1 PIZ FEB 'L q-:SuS �Prkl 6. Any momentary opening of alarm initiating or alarm indicating circuit wiring shall cause the Iowa cuy, Iowa audible signals to sound continuously for four (4) seconds to indicate the trouble condition. H. The system shall be capable of logging and storing 300 events in an alarm log and 300 events in a trouble log. These events shall be stored in a battery protected random access memory. Each recorded event shall include the time and date of that event's occurrence. The system shall have the capability of recalling alarms, trouble conditions, acknowledgements, silencing and reset activities in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. The TrueAlarm smoke sensor shall be a smoke density measuring device having no self contained alar set -point. The alarm decision for each sensor shall be determined by the control panel. The control panel shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values. The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors smoke chamber value. Systems that do not automatically maintain a constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each detector by compensating for environmental factors are deemed not acceptable. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each sensor: 1. Primary status. 2. Device type. 3. Present average value. 4. Present sensitivity selected 5. Peak detection values * 6. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc. * Values shall be in "percent of smoke obscuration" format so that no interpretation is required by the operator. K. An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the capability to manually control the following for each sensor. 1. Clear peak detection values. 2. Enable or disable the point. 3. Clear verification tally. 4. Control a sensor's relay driver output. L. It shall be possible to program the control panel to automatically change the sensitivity settings of each sensor based on time -of -day and day -of -week. (For example, to be more sensitive during unoccupied times and less sensitive during occupied periods.) There shall be seven (7) sensitivity settings available for each sensor. M. The control panel shall have the capability of being programmed for a pre -alar or two-stage function. This function allows an indication to occur when, for example, a 3% sensor reaches a threshold of 1.5% smoke obscuration. 1.04 SUPERVISION A. When a trouble of any nature is detected, an audible trouble signal shall sound at the Fire Alar Control Panel until the trouble is corrected or until it is manually silenced. In addition a "System 16722-4 ® 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 P012 ,V-: 97 P City Clerk Iowa city, Iowa Trouble" LED shall be illuminated and shall remain "On" until the trouble condition is corrected. A subsequent trouble condition received after manually silencing shall cause the audible trouble signal to "resound". Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discreet LCD readout to indicate disarrangement condition in that circuit. B. Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed time intervals to act as reminder that the Fire Alarm System is not 100% operational. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be programmable to suit the Owner's application. C. The system shall contain independently supervised initiating circuits so that a fault in any one (1) zone shall not affect any other zone. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. D. The alarm indicating device circuits shall be independently supervised and fused so that disarrangement of any circuit shall not affect the operation of the other circuits. E. The system shall annunciate, at the Control Panel, the following trouble conditions for each addressable point within the system: open, short and device failed/missing. Should a device fail it will not hinder the operation of other system devices. F. All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be returned to the normal automatic position to clear system trouble. G. The power supply for the system shall be supervised so that loss of the incoming power, a low battery voltage condition or a battery disconnection will cause a trouble condition in the system. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. H. Wiring to the remote annunciator(s) shall be supervised for open and ground conditions. The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, a "Dirty Sensor" trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "Dirty Sensor" is left unattended and its average value increases to a second predetermined value, an "Excessively Dirty Sensor" trouble condition shall be indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. It shall be possible, at the control panel, to determine if any sensors are "Almost Dirty" to aid in maintenance of the system. The control panel shall automatically perform a daily self -test on each sensor. Checking the electronics in the sensor's base ensures the accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. A sensor which fails the self -test will cause a "Self Test Abnormal" trouble condition at the control panel. A sensor self -test which must be manually initiated by the operator shall not be acceptable. 1.05 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. The Control panel shall receive 120 VAC power (as noted on the plans) via a dedicated circuit. An approved earth ground connection to the Control Panel shall also be provided. 16722-5 O 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 7012 .�;SPrt cloyR clerk Iowa City, Iowa B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with five (5) minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. C. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the Control Panel. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment furnished under this specification shall be the standard product of the Simplex Grinnell Company whose catalog and model numbers are used to indicate the type and quality of design and materials as well as operating features required. The manufacturer's specification sheets of each item so listed shall be considered to be a part of these specifications and binding herein. Each component of the system shall display this manufacturer's name as well as a UL Label. B. Similar equipment as manufactured by Notifier, Edwards Systems Technology, Gamewell-FCI, or Siemens (Pyrotronics) subject to compliance with these specifications may be considered as equal. 2.02 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Where shown on the plans, provide and install a Simplex Type 4010 Fire Alarm Control Panel. Construction shall be modular with solid-state, microprocessor based electronics. An 80 character LCD display shall indicate alarms, supervisory service conditions and any troubles. Keyboards or keypads shall not be required to operate the system during fire alarm conditions. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be in an enclosed metal surface -mounted cabinet specifically designed for public areas. It shall have a locked, hineed front door with two (2) master keys that also fit all other fire alarm apparatus utilizing keys for access. B. The Control Panel shall be provided with alarm initiating circuits as required. Trouble and alarm conditions shall be indicated on the LCD display. C. All fire alarm components and wiring systems shall be Class B. D. The Control Panel shall provide communication with individually addressable initiating and control devices as indicated on the drawings. All of these devices will be individually annunciated at the Control Panel. There shall be no limit to the number of detectors, stations or Zone Adapter Modules, which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. E. Alarm signaling circuits shall be provided as required. Each circuit shall be separately fused and indicated on the LCD display. The number of circuits required shall be determined by a method which ensures that the end device received no less than 21 VDC operating power and in no case shall the circuit be initially loaded in excess of 80% of it's rated capacity. F. Control panel shall have digital alarm communicating transmitter for central station monitoring of alarms, troubles and supervisory conditions with specific point identification. Also provide contact closure digital communicating transmitter for off-site monitoring. Provide wiring to closest telephone 16722-6 0 2012 by FBI FILED FEB 21 2012 5F: SR Pkk Ciry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa termination board for off-site annunciation. The selection of a central monitoring agency, its fees and the fees for the leased lines are the responsibility of the Owner. G. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system shall be capable of on site programming to accommodate and facilitate expansion, building parameter changes or changes as required by local codes. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete addressable devices are unacceptable. H. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a multi-level password protection capability which can be applied to various system functions such as; alarm silence, alarm reset, manual control, disable/enable and walk test. Access to a level will only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level plus all actions of lower levels, not higher levels. The access level shall be in effect until the operator manually logs out or the keypad has been inactive for 10 minutes at which time the access level returns to its lowest level. The "Control' module for the Fire Alarm System shall include annunciator supervision circuitry, earth ground detection, low or no battery voltage trouble monitoring and reporting and adjustable alarm silence inhibit capability as well as the reset, alarm silence, trouble silence switches and audible and visual trouble indicators. The Control Panel shall electrically supervise facilities for automatic Fire Department notification. Relays shall be provided to accomplish the various control functions as specified in the system operation section and shall be capable of being bypassed for testing purpose. J. The communication format to the addressable devices must be a completely digital poll -response protocol to allow t -tapping of the circuit wiring. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation. The system must verify that proper type device is in place and matches the desired software configuration. K. Standby power for the system shall be provided by low maintenance sealed lead acid batteries specifically designed for Fire Alarm use and shall be kept fully charged by an automatic battery charger. Automotive type construction wet cell storage batteries or other non -fire alarm type batteries will NOT be acceptable. 2.03 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual stations shall be Simplex Type 2099-9795 addressable stations. Manual stations shall be constructed of high impact, red lexan with raised white lettering and a smooth high gloss finish. Stations shall be keyed alike with the Fire Alarm Control Panel. When the station is operated, the handle shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate quick visual identification of the activated station. Addressable stations shall contain electronics that communicate the device status to the Control Panel over two (2) wires which also provide power to the station. The address location of the station will be field programmed at the station via a dip switch. B. Furnish and install where indicated on the plans, Simplex Type 4098-9714 Photoelectric TrueAlarm smoke sensor with addressable sensor base. The sensors shall communicate the actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel. The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 for both ceiling and wall mount applications and shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to which it is connected. Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every four (4) seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in an alarm or 16722-7 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 f .4 4: 5 a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steady L+:51 Pindicating the abnormal condition. Sensors which do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal Iowa City, Iowa condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable. Sensor bases, as shown on the plans, shall be provided with a relay driver output that is to be controlled either automatically or manually from the control panel. Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location. Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a "wrong device" trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI or RFT. C. Automatic heat detectors shall be combination rate -of -rise and fixed -temperature type. Heat detectors shall be Simplex Type 4098-9733 TrueAlarm sensor addressable detectors. In high hazard areas with high temperature, furnish Simplex Type 2098-9427 (200°F) fixed temperature detector with the appropriate Zone Adapter Module. Detectors shall be of the replaceable element type and shall visually indicate an alarm condition when operated. 2.04 ALARM SIGNALING DEVICES A. Alarm homs shall be Simplex Type 4901 (Semi -flush) Series. The homs shall be polarized and shall be operated by 24 VDC. Each hom assembly shall include separate terminals for in/out wiring for each leg of the associated signal circuit. T -tapping of signal device conductors to signal circuit conductors shall NOT be accepted. Alarm annunciation dB levels shall meet the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), UL, NFPA and local codes. B. Alarm speakers shall be Simplex Type 4902 square series. Combination alarm speakers/visual devices shall be Simplex 4903 Series. Alarm speakers shall produce a temporal pattern. Alarm annunciation dB levels shall meet the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), UL, NFPA and local codes. C. Visible alarm indicating devices shall be entirely solid state and comprised of Xenon flashcube. Visual alarm units shall meet the photometric requirements of the Americans with Disabilities (ADA), UL, NFPA and local codes. The unit shall be complete with a tamper-resistant Lexan lens and the word "FIRE" in red letters. The drawings indicate areas requiring visual devices. The intensity level of each device, exact quantity and location per area shall be determined by manufacturer and devices provided accordingly. 2,05 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A. Provide a Simplex 4603 Series flush -mounted remote annunciator at each location shown on the drawings. B. Annunciator(s) shall have 80 character LCD display (two (2) lines, each line 40 characters) with control switches for System Acknowledgements, Alarm Silence and System Reset. There shall be 16722-8 O 2012 by FEI '~ILEI) FEB 21 2012 Lf-� 5y gM City CIC! Iowa �� IM LampA.CD test and four (4) programmable control switches with windows for s4fp-tn labels. Mounting screws shall be tamperproof. C. A key switch activated "ENABLE" feature shall be provided. All switches on the annunciator shall be inoperable without the "ENABLE" switch activated. The key shall be removable in the disabled position only. D. The display shall provide clear English language information to include point status, type of alarm (smoke detector, manual station, etc.), number of alarms, supervisory conditions, troubles in the system and a custom location label. 2.06 AREA INDICATION PLAQUE A. Provide an area indication plaque wall mounted adjacent to each remote annunciator and also at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. The display shall be a scaled representation of the facility with each area/room in the facility shown on the plaque and labeled accordingly. Coordinate size and nomenclature of areas with Owner and program control panel and annunciator displays to correspond with nomenclature of plaque. The plaque shall be approximately 18 -inch square (exact quantity and size of plaque(s) shall be detemrined by size of Project) with stainless steel or anodized aluminum frame and plexiglass cover over display. The plaque itself shall be reverse -engraved silk-screened plastic sheet of 3/16 -inch minimum thickness or CADD generated on Mylar. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Door holders shall be provided by Others. Electrical connections to door holders shall be provided as work of this section. B. Provide connection to smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers. C. Fan shutdown relays shall be provided as required and shall be compatible with the unit being controlled. D. Provide connection to kitchen hood extinguishing system. 2.08 WIRE A. All wire and wiring shall be in strict compliance with all of the provisions of the National Electrical Code, Article 760, the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring diagrams. The Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for a complete installation. All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the local authority having jurisdiction and shall be installed in conduit throughout. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "FIRE ALARM'.. Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. 16722-9 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 :51, PM Iowa Ay B. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the Contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate Subcontractors. C. Cover all smoke detection devices with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness, if field conditions so require. D. The Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation. 3.02 FINAL CONNECTIONS, TESTING, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE A. The Contractor shall, under this Contract, obtain the services of a factory trained representative of the system manufacturer to supervise the installation and it's progress, supervise final connections to the equipment and provide testing to assure that the system is in proper operating condition and is in compliance with all applicable regulations. A complete functional test of the system in accordance with NFPA 72H shall be performed and a written report shall be submitted to the Contractor attesting to the proper operation of the completed system. The Contractor shall have present representatives of the manufacturer of the Fire Alarm System, authorities having jurisdiction and the Architect during final inspection. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of all parties that the system installed meets the specification requirements. All changes, modifications and adjustments to the installed system needed to meet the specification requirements will be made at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Upon completion of the installation, printed system operating instructions and as -built wiring and layout drawings will be furnished to the Owner. C. The manufacturer will provide an authorized representative to instruct and train the Fire Department and the Owner's personnel in the operation of the system. This service will be made available for two (2) one (1) hour sessions as scheduled by the Owner. 3.03 GUARANTEE AND AFTER SERVICE A. The Contractor shall warrant the completed Fire Alarm System wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use. B. Upon satisfactory completion of all tests, the manufacturer's representative will present to the Owner a proposal to provide inspections and testing of the system in compliance with the requirements of the state and local fire codes. C. The system's vendor must employ factory trained technicians and maintain a service organization within 50 miles of the Job Site. This organization must have a minimum of 10 years experience servicing Fire Alarm Systems and provide 24 hour emergency service. D. The vendor shall provide a maximum of four (4) hour response to the Owner's request for service. The vendor will demonstrate this capability to the Owner and will provide this minimum response under all reasonable circumstances. 16722-10 © 2012 by FEI FILED SECTION 16950 FEB 21 �: S9 PM 12 OCCUPANCY SENSORSIod'c }ierl, PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, power packs, sensor, wire, junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein. B. Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 16. C. Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this Section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC Systems and Building Management Systems. 1.02 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION A. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed. B. All components shall be UL Listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements. C. Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The objective of this Section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits. C. Contractor shall warrant all equipment famished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship and in conformance with the specifications. The Supplier's obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the Owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or nonconforming and returned to the Supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the Owners acceptance of the Project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year. 16950-1 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 2 1 2012 �,.:59y P C 1111 Iowa City, Iowa 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this Specification by supplying the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this Specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted. B. Submit paper prints of CAD -generated lighting plans prepared by manufacturer showing proper product, location, and orientation of each sensor and location and quantity of power packs. Electronic files are not acceptable. C. Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. D. Submit standard catalog literature, which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. E. Submit any timing and sensitivity settings literature for each type of proposed device. F. Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic ballasts. 1.05 SYSTEM OPERATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all proper adjustments to ensure Owners satisfaction with the occupancy system. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide occupancy sensor products of one (1) of the following: 1. Hubbell 2. SensorSwitch 3. Leviton 4. Watt -Stopper 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Provide the following type of sensor per area unless otherwise noted on the drawings: 1. Concessions and Storage: Dual Technology. 2. Restrooms: Ultrasonic ceiling -mounted or Microphonic ceiling -mounted. B. Wall switch sensors shall have manual ON/OFF capability. C. Wall switch sensors shown to control two (2) lighting zones in the same space shall be provided with two (2) manual ON/OFF switches. 16950-2 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEtj 21 2012 11-15 P Ci Clerk Iowa ity, Iowa D. Ultrasonic sensors shall utilize advanced signal processing to adjust the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and airflow throughout controlled space. E. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with ballasts/lamp systems as shown on the drawings. F. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor. G. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. H. All sensors shall be UL rated. I. Provide power packs and remote power packs where required for proper operation of sensor. Faceplate material/finish and wall -mounted sensor color shall match finish/colors of other wiring devices in the same room or space. (See Specification Section 26 27 26 for material and finish). 2.03 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE - CU A. Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2 -inch knockout on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low -voltage power. B. Relay Contacts shall have ratings of: 1. 13A - 120 VAC Tungsten 2. 20A - 120 VAC Ballast 3. 20A - 277 VAC Ballast C. Refer to Specification Section 26 05 33 regarding routing of power and control wiring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the area provided with detection. B. It shall be the Manufacturer and Contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have 90% to 100% coverage to completely cover the controlled area. Sensors shall be located such that detection does not extend beyond corresponding room or area. 16950-3 0 2012 by FEI FILED FEB 21 2012 Iowa City, Iowa C. The Manufacturer and Contractor shall provide additional sensors, power packs and miscellaneous equipment as required to properly and completely cover the respective controlled area. Where there are multiple switches or zones of control in the room or area, a separate relay/power pack shall be provided for each switch leg or zone of control to maintain the control functions shown. 2. Where the Contractor provides a ceiling -mounted sensor in lieu of a wall -mounted sensor as shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall provide a wall switch for manual on/off control of the space. The switch shall be located where the wall -mounted occupancy sensor is shown on the drawings. D. The Contractors shall arrange a pre -installation meeting with the manufacturers factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. E. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome location difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The Manufacturer and Contractor shall also, provide, at the Owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems. F. Coordinate locations of remote power packs with accessible ceiling locations. Where no accessible ceiling space is available, provide sensors with integral power packs or line -voltage type sensors. 3.02 FACTORY COMMISSIONING A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturers factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy -based lighting control system. B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the Electrical Engineer with 10 working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the systems fine tuning the factory -authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the Owners personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors. 16950-4 ® 2012 by FEI APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FILED FEB 2 12012 y:59 (-M IowaClerk City, Iowa FILED FEB 21 2012 `l 5 PIM wa City, Iowa Geotechnical Engineering Report Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 (Proposed Lodge Building) Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 Prepared for: Snyder & Associates, Inc. Ankeny, Iowa Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc. Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 Snyder & Associates, Inc. 2727 SW Snyder Boulevard Ankeny, Iowa 50023 Attn: Mr. Clay Schneckloth, ASLA P: 515-964-2020 F: 515-964-7938 E: cschneckloth(asnyder-associates.com Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 (Proposed Lodge Building) Iowa City, Iowa Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 Dear Mr. Schneckloth: 1 Terracon FEB 21 2012 4:SJ PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) has completed the subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services for the above referenced project. These services were performed in general accordance with our Proposal No. P06110205R dated October 3, 2011. This geotechnical engineering report presents the results of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical recommendations concerning earthwork and the design and construction of foundations and floor slabs for the proposed structure, as well as the preparation of pavement subgrades and recommended minimum pavement thicknesses. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. If you have any questions concerning this report, or if we may be of further service, please contact us. Sincerely, Terracon Consultants, Inc. d�� Bachan K. Sinha, M.S., E.I. Brett E. Bra fied, Project Engineer/Project Manager Iowa No. 20703 BKS/BEB/N:\Projectst2011106115631\PROJECT DOCUMENTS (Reports -Letters -Drafts to Clienls)\06115631.01.docx Copies: 3 — Client Terracon Consultants, Inc. 2640 120^ Street SW Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404 If eutec 11111 cal 0 Environmental oit s t r u ti on Materials ■ Ficilitir. FILED Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable FEB 21 2012 y -c SS Pnr� Ciry Clerk Iowa City, Iowa TABLE OF CONTENTS Page EXECUTIVESUMMARY...............................................................................................................i 1.0 INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION...............................................................................................2 2.1 Project Description................................................................................................2 2.2 Site Location and Description................................................................................2 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS..........................................................................................3 3.1 Typical Subsurface Profile.....................................................................................3 3.2 Groundwater Conditions........................................................................................3 4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION.......................................4 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations.................................................................................4 4.1.1 Existing Fill Consideration..........................................................................4 4.1.2 Groundwater Consideration.......................................................................5 4.1.3 Subgrade Disturbance Consideration.......................................:................5 4.2 Site Preparation and Earthwork............................................................................5 4.2.1 Excavation Considerations........................................................................6 4.2.2 Fill Types...................................................................................................7 4.2.3 Compaction Requirements........................................................................7 4.2.4 Grading and Drainage...............................................................................9 4.3 Foundation Considerations...................................................................................9 4.3.1 Spread Footings with Overexcavation and Backfill...................................9 4.3.2 Ground Improvement Systems.................................................................9 4.3.3 Drilled Shaft Foundation Option................................................................9 4.4 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations..................................................10 4.4.1 Spread Footing Design Recommendations.............................................10 4.4.2 Spread Footing Construction Considerations..........................................10 4.5 Seismic Considerations.......................................................................................11 4.6 Floor Slab............................................................................................................12 4.6.1 Floor Slab Design Recommendations.....................................................12 4.6.2 Floor Slab Construction Considerations..................................................13 4.7 Pavements..........................................................................................................13 4.7.1 Pavement Subgrades..............................................................................13 4.7.2 Pavement Design Recommendations......................................................14 4.7.3 Pavement Design Considerations............................................................16 4.7.4 Permeable Base & Longitudinal Subdrains.............................................16 4.8 Frost Considerations...........................................................................................17 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS.................................................................................................17 Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Table of Contents (cont.) Appendix A — Field Exploration Exhibit No. SiteLocation Plan................................................................................................ A-1 BoringLocation Plan............................................................................................ A-2 Subsurface Soil Profile.........................................................................................A-3 BoringLogs..........................................................................................................A-4 Field Exploration Description............................................................................... A-5 Appendix B — Laboratory Testing Laboratory Test Description................................................................................. B-1 Appendix C — Supporting Documents GeneralNotes......................................................................................................0-1 Unified Soil Classification System........................................................................0-2 FILED FEB 21 2012 4sq Ciryry�leik Iowa Ciry, Iowa Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report 1%rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 a Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 FILED EXECUTIVE SUMMARY AFH 2 ( t 2012 S ( ?n1 hill C.CK 10"a Qfy,IGWa A geotechnical exploration has been performed for the referenced project in Iowa City, Iowa. Terracon's geotechnical scope of work for this phase of the project included drilling and sampling four (4) borings to depths of about 15 to 40'/ feet below the existing site grades. Based on the results of this exploration and our previous experience with other explorations and construction on other phases of site development, it is our opinion that there are limitations for the proposed improvements, and special design and construction measures will be necessary to develop this site for the proposed construction.. The following geotechnical considerations were identified: ■ Existing and possible existing fill materials were encountered in the borings to depths of about 15 feet (or more) to 18 feet below the existing site grades. These fill materials are variable in terms of the nature and consistency and are primarily composed of lean clay and/or sand with varying amounts of gravel, organics, concrete & brick pieces, rubble, and foam pieces. Stiff to hard native sandy lean clay, trace gravel (glacial till) soils were encountered in the deeper borings 3 and 4 at depths of about 17'/2 to 18 feet below grade. ■ Due to the risks associated with support of the structure on existing variable fill materials, we recommend all foundations extend through the variable fill materials and bear either directly on suitable, native soils or new engineered fill following the overexcavation and backfill procedure. This would require mass overexcavation of the existing fill soils encountered throughout the site. ■ As an alternative to removing and replacing the fill, the proposed structure could be supported on reinforced ground system such as "Geopiero Rammed Aggregate Piers", "Vibro-Replacement Stone Columns®", or other similar aggregate pier systems that extend through the fill soils to suitable native soils. These subgrade soil improvement systems are proprietary systems designed by licensed contractors who could provide further information regarding these support options. ■ The proposed structure can also be supported by a deep foundation system of drilled shafts extending to suitable native soils beneath the existing fill. ■ Rubble or large debris buried within the fill could make the excavations for aggregate pier system or drilled shafts difficult. Contingencies for delays and expenses due to the obstructions should be anticipated. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report l�erracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 ■ The existing fill materials also pose a risk for floor slabs and pavement settlement and possible distress. As a minimum, we recommend the area be surficially compacted with a heavy-duty, steel -drum, vibratory roller and at least 18 inches of properly compacted structural fill be provided below the slabs and pavement. The owner must be accepting the risks of support of these elements above the existing fill. ■ Depending on weather and seasonal conditions at the time of construction and possibility of perched water conditions within variable existing fills, we recommend adequate dewatering measures should be planned on this project. ■ Earthwork on the project should be observed and evaluated by Terracon. The evaluation of earthwork should include observation and testing of engineered fill, subgrade preparation, foundation bearing materials, and other geotechnical conditions exposed during construction. This summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report for design purposes. It should be recognized that details were not included or fully developed in this section, and the report must be read in its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. The section titled GENERAL COMMENTS should be read for an understanding of the report limitations. FILED FEB 21 7012 LI: 59 PM i,,w;, Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 (PROPOSED LODGE BUILDING) IOWA CITY, IOWA FILED Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 FFR 21 2012 October 26, 2011 4'-: 69 p,vl C11Y Clerk Iowa city, f� 1.0 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of our subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering services performed for the referenced project in Iowa City, Iowa. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to: ■ subsurface soil conditions, ■ groundwater conditions, ■ site preparation and earthwork, ■ excavation considerations ■ foundation design and construction, ■ seismic site classification per IBC, ■ floor slab design and construction, ■ pavement design and construction Our geotechnical engineering scope of service for this phase of the project consisted of drilling and sampling four (4) borings at predetermined locations at the site to depths of about 15 to 40'/2 feet below the existing grades. A Site Location Plan (Exhibit A-1), a Boring Location Plan (Exhibit A-2), a subsurface soil profile (Exhibit A-3) and the boring logs (Exhibit A-4) are included in Appendix A of this report. The results of the laboratory testing performed on soil samples obtained from the site during the field exploration are included on the attached boring logs. Descriptions of the field exploration and laboratory testing are included in their respective appendices. Terracon performed a previous geotechnical exploration near this site for the proposed Marina Building & Shelter in August 2010 (Terracon Project No. 06105656.01, geotechnical report dated August 25, 2010), and also observed test pit excavations and other foundation overexcavations during the construction of the project. The information from this prior exploration was used in developing the recommendations contained in this report. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 1 Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 FILED 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION FEB 21 2012 y: sk QN. city Clerk 2.1 Project Description Iowa City, Iowa Item Description Site layout Refer to the Site Location Plan (Exhibit A-1) and Boring Location Plan (Exhibit A-2) in Appendix A. The project is in planning stage at this time and limited project information was provided at the time of preparation of this report. ■ A single -story lodge building; Proposed Construction ■ The proposed facility will have kitchen, conference room, and restroom areas; ■ Ancillary parking and drive areas — Parking lot will have capacity of about 140 passenger vehicles; ■ Sidewalks and trails. Structure Type ■ Lightly loaded, wood -framed structure; ■ Approx. plan area: 7,500 square feet. Finished floor elevation ■ We assume the finished floor elevation of the building will be within 2 feet of the existing grade elevation. ■ Column Loads: 75 kips (assumed) Maximum loads ■ Walls: 2 klf. (assumed) ■ Floor Slab Load: 125 psf (assumed) Maximum allowable ■ Total: 1 inch (assumed) settlement ■ Differential: Two-thirds (2/3) of total settlement (assumed) Assumed grading ■ Minimal cut/fill thickness of 3 feet or less (assumed); ■ Cut and fill slopes: No steeper than 3H: 1V (assumed). 2.2 Site Location and Description Item Location Existing site features Site topography Description ■ The project site is located at the southwest quadrant of Gilbert Street and McCollister Boulevard in Iowa City, Iowa. ■ Existing fills and made up ground. The following information is based on elevation contours on the supplied site plan and the surveyed boring elevations. ■ Building area: Relatively flat with existing grade elevations of about 643 and 644 feet at the boring locations; ■ Parking, drive, and other locations: Existing grade elevations across the site vary between about 639 feet (south/southeast) and 647 feet (north/northeast). Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 2 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 �err�con Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS `f 6 l 1 2012 3.1 Typical Subsurface Profile x.55 °M4 1 u1v3 Specific subsurface conditions encountered at the boring locations are indicated on the individual boring logs attached with this report. Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate locations of changes in soil types. In-situ, transition between native materials may be gradual. Based on the results of this exploration, the subsurface soil conditions on this site can be generalized as follows: 1. borings 1 ana z tenronmea in stratum -i at aepms or , o reeL 2. Bottom of Borings 3 and 4. Please review the attached boring logs for a detailed description of the subsurface conditions encountered at the individual boring locations. 3.2 Groundwater Conditions The borings were observed for the presence and level of groundwater during drilling and sampling. The observed groundwater levels are presented in the table below. After completion of the drilling operations, the boreholes were backfilled with a mixture of sand and on-site soils. Water Level Observations (feet) Boring No. Approximate 2 3 Description Depth to Bottom of Material Encountered Consistency/Density 14 Stratum (feet) VVD/WS- While Drilling/SarrDlina Variable existing fill materials - Lean clay and/or fine to coarse Stratum 1 14 to greater than sand with varying amounts of N/A 15' gravel, organics, concrete & brick pieces, and/or rubble 171/z to 18 Possible existing fill soils - primarily Soft to stiff Stratum 2 (Borings 3 and 4) composed of lean clay 40% Sandy lean clay, trace gravel Stiff to hard Stratum 3' (Borings 3 and 4) (glacial till) 1. borings 1 ana z tenronmea in stratum -i at aepms or , o reeL 2. Bottom of Borings 3 and 4. Please review the attached boring logs for a detailed description of the subsurface conditions encountered at the individual boring locations. 3.2 Groundwater Conditions The borings were observed for the presence and level of groundwater during drilling and sampling. The observed groundwater levels are presented in the table below. After completion of the drilling operations, the boreholes were backfilled with a mixture of sand and on-site soils. Water Level Observations (feet) Boring No. I7 2 3 4 WD/WS I None 14 14 14 VVD/WS- While Drilling/SarrDlina These water level observations provide an approximate indication of the groundwater conditions existing on the site at the time the borings were drilled. Longer-term observations using cased Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 3 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rr�con Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 FEB 2 1 2012 grading plans, consideration should be given to completely removing the existing fill materials within the proposed building pad area. As alternative to complete removal and replacement of existing fills with properly compacted structural fill, consideration may be given to support the structure either on intermediate foundation system of aggregate piers or a system of drilled shaft foundation extending to suitable native soils. Provided the owner is willing to accept the risk and the resultant potential for adverse performance, in our opinion, the floor slabs and pavements could be supported over portions of the existing fill. However, as a minimum we recommend at least 18 inches of properly compacted structural fill be constructed directly below the floor slabs and pavements. 4.1.2 Groundwater Consideration Depending on weather and seasonal conditions at the time of construction and possibility of perched water within existing variable fills, dewatering during excavations should be anticipated at this site. This would likely be accomplished with a series of wells and pumps. More extensive dewatering measures, such as well points and sheeting may be required for excavations extending into water bearing sandy soils. Controlling groundwater would also improve site conditions and reduce disturbances to bearing soils prior to the mass earthwork operations. The groundwater level should be maintained at least 2 feet below the excavation level. 4.1.3 Subgrade Disturbance Consideration It should be noted that the site soils are susceptible to disturbance from construction activities, particularly if the soil has high natural moisture content or is wetted by surface water or seepage. Care should be taken during construction to minimize disturbance of the bearing soils. 4.2 Site Preparation and Earthwork Existing variable fill materials, organic matters, buried debris and rubble, concrete and brick pieces, and any otherwise unsuitable materials should be removed from the proposed construction area. Existing fills should be removed to depths of at least 1% feet below planned floor slab and pavement subgrades. Wet or dry material should either be removed or moisture conditioned and recompacted. Soft, dry and/or low-density soil should be removed or compacted in place prior to placing new fill. After rough grade has been established, the exposed subgrade should be proofrolled by the contractor and test probed by Terracon. Proofrolling on clay subgrades could be accomplished by using heavy, rubber -tired construction equipment or a tandem axle dump truck, while in sandy soils, by using a vibratory drum roller. This surficial proofroll would help to provide a stable base for the compaction of new structural fill, and delineates low density, soft, or disturbed areas that may exist below subgrade level. Soft or loose areas should be undercut, Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 5 Geotechnical Engineering Report l�erracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 ED moisture conditioned, and recompacted or replaced with approved structural fill. Subgrade conditions should be observed by a geotechnical engineer during construction. =8L 1 201Z tity Clalcr Dewatering measures during excavations should be planned at this site. Sump pits and pumps, city, Iowa, would generally be adequate for dewatering excavations in clay soils. However, more extensive dewatering measures, such as well points and sheeting may be required for excavations extending into water bearing sandy soils. Due to the variability of the existing fill materials at the site, corrective measures will likely be required to increase the subgrade stability during subgrade preparation where the existing fill is not removed and replaced. The owner should budget for additional costs to provide the required corrective measures. Based on our experience in soils of these types, crushed stone thicknesses up to 2 feet could be required to stabilize the subgrade soils. A geotextile stabilization material could also be placed below.the crushed stone to help stabilize the subgrade soils. As an alternative, the unstable subgrade soils could be undercut, moisture conditioned on-site, and placed and compacted up to final subgrade elevation in accordance with Section 4.2.3 (Compaction Requirements) to provide a uniform thickness of well - compacted material. Upon completion of filling and grading, care should be taken to maintain the subgrade moisture content prior to construction of grade supported slabs and pavements. Construction traffic over the completed subgrade should be avoided to the extent practical. The site should also be graded to prevent ponding of surface water on the prepared subgrades or in excavations. If the subgrade should become frozen, desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the affected material should be removed or these materials should be scarified, moisture conditioned, and recompacted prior to slabs and pavement construction. 4.2.1 Excavation Considerations All excavations should comply with the requirements of OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations" and its appendices, as well as other applicable codes. This document states that the excavation safety is the responsibility of the contractor. Reference to this OSHA requirement should be included in the project specifications. Slope heights, slope inclinations and/or excavation depths should in no case exceed those specified in local, state or federal safety regulations, including current OHSA excavation and trench safety standards. If any excavations extend to a depth greater than 20 feet, according to OHSA regulations, side slopes and/or bracing must be designed by a professional engineer. We recommend excavations be shored or braced to maintain stability. The bracing or sheet piles should be designed to resist the lateral earth pressures and would reduce the potential for caving or sloughing of the site soils. Sloped excavations could be considered if the lateral extent would not impact any adjacent utilities, pavements or structures. Where soft soils and/or Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 6 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1(�rr�con Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 FILED FEB 2 1 Z01Z poorly compacted fill materials are encountered, flatter slopes than those required by OHSA Sq PM could be required to maintain the stability of the excavation(s). Cir. C Clerk ows Iowa city. 4.2.2 Fill Types New fills placed in building and pavement areas should be low volume change cohesive soil or granular soil. Fill placed in confined excavations and utility trenches should consist of relatively clean and well -graded granular material. This should provide for greater ease of placement and compaction in confined areas where larger compaction equipment cannot be operated. The use of granular fill in these isolated and potentially deeper excavations would reduce the potential for differential settlement for building components. Most of the inorganic soils at the site, as encountered in the borings, are considered suitable for use as site mass grading fill. However, significant amount of sorting will be required to remove the concrete and brick rubble, organic matters, debris, and other deleterious material from the existing variable fills. Structural fill should meet the following material property requirements: Fill Type' USCS Classification Acceptable Location for Placement Low Plasticity Cohesive' CL -ML, CL General site grading fill. Granular GW, GP, GM, GC General site grading fill below foundations, slabs, and SW, SP, SM, SC pavement. Unsuitable MH, OL, OH, PT Green (non-structural) locations CL -CH, CH Most of the on-site inorganic soils (as encountered in Onsite Soils' CL, SC, SP the borings) generally appear suitable for reuse as structural fill. 1. Structural fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter and debris. Frozen material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. A sample of each material type should be submitted to the geotechnical engineer for evaluation prior to use on this site. 2. Low plasticity cohesive soils (CL, CL/ML) would have a liquid limit less than 45 and a plasticity index of less than 23. 3. Significant amount of sorting should be anticipated. Unsuitable materials such as buried rubble, concrete & brick pieces, and organic matters should not be used as fill. 4.2.3 Compaction Requirements Significant amount of sorting and moisture conditioning of the site soils will be required if they are used as engineered fill. Appropriate laboratory tests, including Atterberg limits for cohesive soils and standard Proctor (ASTM D698) tests should be performed on proposed fill materials prior to their use as engineered fill. Organic content tests should be performed on dark colored Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 soils and/or those that exhibit a noticeable odor. Further evaluation of any on-site soils or off- site fill materials should be performed by Terracon prior to their use as structural fill. FILED Recommended degree of compaction and moisture content criteria for engineered fill matePIS 2 are as follows: s�pM2012 City UCrk Per the Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 698) llY, Iowa Material Type and Location Minimum Compaction Requirement (%)' Range of Moisture Contents for Minimum I Maximum Beneath foundations and within 1 foot of finished 98 -2% +3% pavement subgrade Above foundations, below floor slabs, and more 95 -2% +3% than 1 foot below pavement subgrade Granulate' Beneath foundations, and within 1 foot of finished 9B -3% +3% pavement subgrade Above foundations, below floor slabs, and more 95 -3% +3% than 1 foot below pavement subgrade 1. We recommend that structural fill be tested for moisture content and compaction during placement. Should the results of the in-place density tests indicate the specked moisture or compaction limits have not been met, the area represented by the test should be reworked and retested as required until the specified moisture and compaction requirements are achieved. 2. If the granular material is a coarse sand or gravel, or of a uniform size, or has a low fines content, compaction comparison to relative density may be more appropriate. In this case, granular materials should be compacted based on relative density (ASTM D 4253 and D 4254). 3. Specifically, moisture levels should be maintained at levels satisfactory for compaction to be achieved without the granular fill material bulking during placement or pumping when proofrolled. We recommend that fill be placed and compacted on stable subgrades in lifts of 9 inches or less in loose thickness when heavy, self-propelled compaction equipment is used. Lift thickness should be reduced to 4 inches in loose thickness when hand equipment (e.g., jumping jack, vibratory plate compactor, etc.) is used. A vibrating smooth drum compactor should not be used Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 L ILE� on clay soils. All new fill placement and compaction should be observed and tested by Terracon personnel. FEB 21 7012 . •.pJ `em 4.2.4 Grading and Drainage Iowa city, Iowa Final surrounding grades should be sloped away from the structure and pavements on all sides. In addition, roof drainage should be collected by a system of gutters and downspouts and transmitted by pipe to the storm water drainage system or discharged a minimum of 5 feet away from the structure. As an alternative, splash blocks may be used as long as the ground surface is paved and slopes away from the structure. 4.3 Foundation Considerations 4.3.1 Spread Footings with Overexcavation and Backfill As discussed earlier in this report, due to the risks associated with supporting the structure on existing variable fill materials at this site, we recommend the spread footings should extend through the existing fill and bear either directly on suitable, native deposits or new engineered fill following the overexcavation and backfill. This would require mass overexcavation of the existing fill soils encountered throughout the site. Frequent observations and testing such as test pits should be performed by the contractor and observed by Terracon personnel during excavations and backfill operations to ensure that all existing fill is properly removed prior to placing the structural fill. 4.3.2 Ground Improvement Systems As an alternative to mass excavation and/or overexcavation and backfill, the structure could be supported on intermediate foundation system. In this system, the shallow foundations can be designed to bear on reinforced site soils that have been improved with methods such as "Geopiero ImpactTm Piers, Vibro-Replacement Stone Columns""', or other similar aggregate pier systems that extend through the fill soils to suitable native soils. These soil improvement systems are typically proprietary and are designed by licensed contractors who could provide further information regarding these support options. Typically, foundations supported on aggregate pier systems can be designed with net allowable bearing pressures in excess of 3,000 psf. The design bearing pressure is provided by the soil improvement contractor. 4.3.3 Drilled Shaft Foundation Option Alternatively, consideration may be given to support of the structure on a system of drilled shaft foundations extending into the native stiff to hard glacial till soils. However, due to the planned structure type and the anticipated loading conditions, drilled shaft foundations and associated grade beams may not be an economically viable option on this project. We would be pleased to provide recommendations for drilled shaft foundations upon request, if this option is chosen. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 9 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1(�rr�con Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 rtb 21 2012 4.4 Shallow Foundation Design Recommendations ^5 pnf City Clerk Iowa City, lowa The design parameters presented below are for shallow foundations supported on properly compacted structural fill extending to suitable native materials, or on the site soils that have been improved with methods such as aggregate piers, as discussed above in Sections 4.3.1 and 4.3.2. 4.4.1 Spread Footing Design Recommendations Description Value Foundation type ■ Shallow/Intermediate foundations. ■ Properly compacted structural fill extending to suitable native soils following removal of existing Bearing material fill materials or on suitable native soils; ■ Existing materials (native and fill) improved with aggregate piers. Net allowable Bearing pressure ■ 2,000 psf - for overexcavation and backfill option ■ 4,000 to 6,000 psf -Aggregate Pier Option Minimum dimensions ■ Columns: 30 inches, ■ Load bearing walls: 16 inches. Minimum embedment depth below finished ■ 42 inches - perimeter footings and other footings grade in unheated areas, ■ 24 inches - interior footings in heated areas. Settlement ■ Total: 1 inch ■ Differential: % of total settlement 1. The net allowable soil bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum surrounding overburden pressure at the design foundation base elevation. 2. Bearing pressure will be determined by aggregate pier designer. Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within five feet of the foundation for perimeter (or exterior) footings and finished floor level for interior footings. The allowable foundation bearing pressures apply to dead loads plus design live load conditions. The design bearing pressure may be increased by one-third when considering total loads that include wind or seismic conditions. Footings, foundation walls, and masonry walls should be reinforced as necessary to reduce the potential for distress caused by differential foundation movement. The use of joints at openings or other discontinuities in masonry walls is recommended. 4.4.2 Spread Footing Construction Considerations The subsurface soil conditions at and below the foundation bearing depths should be observed and thoroughly tested by Terracon to confirm that the soil conditions are suitable for support of the foundations. The excavations should be probed or otherwise sampled at each isolated Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 10 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 spread footing and at regular intervals along continuous footings. Should the soils at the bearing level become disturbed, the affected soil should be stabilized or removed prior to placement of concrete. Existing variable fill materials are anticipated in the foundation excavations at this site. If variable fills and/or otherwise unsuitable soils are encountered at the foundation bearing level, the excavations should be deepened to native suitable bearing material. Overexcavation for compacted backfill placement below footings should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footings at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation depth below footing base elevation. For the anticipated depths of existing fill, the overexcavations would be on the order of 25 feet wide for footings. Overexcavation of the entire building area at the onset of the site development may be best suited. The overexcavation should then be backfilled up to the footing base elevation with approved structural fill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 4.2.3 (Compaction Requirements). The overexcavation and backfill procedures are shown in the figure below. ILE j_ Value 2006 International Building Code Site Classification (IBC)' 1 Design i00 Site Longitude Footing Level FEB 21 20L2 COMPACTED STRUCTURAL • FILL 4 try�Urd RecemmeMed Iowa Ciry,lowa Eatavalbn Level �— ;=111=11 Overexcavation / Backfill NOTEExcavallons in sketches shown verllcal for convenience. Excavations should be sloped as necessary for safety, The base of all foundation excavations should be free of water and loose or -soft soils prior to placement of concrete. Should the soils at the foundation bearing level become disturbed, the affected soil should be stabilized or removed prior to placement of concrete. If encountered, groundwater should be lowered and controlled to a minimum depth of 2 feet below the excavation elevation. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after excavating to minimize disturbance of bearing soils. 4.5 Seismic Considerations Description Value 2006 International Building Code Site Classification (IBC)' CT Site Latitude N 41' 37' 36.7" Site Longitude W910 31'40.3" Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 11 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 Description I Value ' Note: In general accordance with the 2006 International Building Code, Table 1613.5.2. IBC Site Class is based on the average characteristics of the upper 100 feet of the subsurface profile. 2 Note: The 2006 International Building Code (IBC) requires a site soil profile determination extending to a depth of 100 feet for seismic site classification. The current scope does not include the required 100 foot soil profile determination. The borings were extended to a maximum depth of 401/2 feet, and this seismic site class definition considers that stiff to hard, glacial till soils continue below the maximum depth of the exploration. Additional exploration to deeper depths or seismic velocity testing is recommended to confirm the conditions below the current depth of exploration. f-: f T n r -: 4.6 Floor Slab 4.6.1 Floor Slab Design Recommendations FEB 21 2012 4csq Pm City Clehc Iowa City, Iowa DESCRIPTION VALUE Interior floor system ■ Slab -on -grade Portland cement concrete. ■ Minimum of 18 inches of properly compacted structural fill Floor slab support be provided below the floor slabs. Unheated areas subject to frost ■ Minimum of 3'/2 feet of clean (less than 6% passing the U.S. No. 200 sieve) material below slabs. ■ 100 pounds per square inch per inch (psi/in). The modulus Modulus of subgrade reaction was obtained based on our experience with similar subgrade conditions. The use of a vapor retarder should be considered beneath concrete slabs on grade that will be covered with wood, tile, carpet or other moisture sensitive or impervious coverings, or when the slab will support equipment sensitive to moisture. When conditions warrant the use of a vapor retarder, the slab designer should refer to ACI 360 for procedures and cautions regarding the use and placement of a vapor retarder. Where floor slabs are tied to perimeter walls or turn -down slabs to meet structural or other construction objectives, our experience indicates that any differential movement between the walls and slabs will likely be observed in adjacent slab expansion joints or floor slab cracks that occur beyond the length of the structural dowels. The structural engineer should account for this potential differential settlement through use of sufficient control joints, appropriate reinforcing or other means. It should be noted that settlements of floor slabs supported on existing fill materials cannot be accurately predicted, but could be larger than normal and result in some cracking. Any unsuitable subgrade materials observed during construction should be overexcavated and replaced with new structural fill. Frequent control joints are recommended in the floor slabs where existing fill materials are present to help control any cracking. A higher than normal percentage of steel reinforcement should be considered in floor slabs to provide additional Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 12 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 strength and help control crack displacement. Additional replacement of existing fill materials FILED below the slab areas with new structural fill could also be considered to help reduce the risk and to provide a more uniform bearing surface. A high modulus geogrid (e.g. Tensar TriAx TX 140) FEB 2 1 7012 placed between the subgrade and base course could also be used to improve the degree and y: 51 ?M uniformity of subgrade support. However, all below -grade construction should be completed city clerk Iowa city, Iowa before the geogrid is placed. 4.6.2 Floor Slab Construction Considerations On most project sites, the site grading is generally accomplished early in the construction phase. However as construction proceeds, the subgrade will likely be disturbed due to utility excavations, construction traffic, desiccation, rainfall, etc. Correction to subgrades prior to placement of base rock and concrete should be anticipated, particularly where subgrades consist of and/or are underlain by high moisture content clay soils. The floor slab subgrade should be prepared in accordance with Section 4.2 Site Preparation and Earthwork of this report. Care should be taken to maintain the subgrade moisture content, prior to construction of the floor slabs. If the subgrade should become desiccated, the affected material should be removed or these materials should be scarified, moistened, and recompacted prior to floor slab placement. In addition, we recommend the placement of the new fills for floor slab support be placed as far in advance of slab construction as possible to allow settlement of the underlying soils from the weight of the new structural fill, and thereby, reduce post -construction total and differential settlements. Where practical, we recommend "early -entry" cutting of crack -control joints in floor slabs. Cutting of the concrete in its 'green" state typically reduces the potential for micro -cracking of the slabs prior to the crack control joints being formed, compared to cutting the joints after the concrete has fully set. Micro -cracking of slabs may lead to crack formation in locations other than the sawed joints, and/or reduction of fatigue life of the slabs. 4.7 Pavements 4.7.1 Pavement Subgrades The subgrade for pavements should be prepared in accordance with Section 4.2 (Site Preparation and Earthwork) of this report. In addition to the scarification and compaction recommended, we recommend the exposed subgrade be proofrolled. Proofrolling clay subgrades could be accomplished by using heavy, rubber -tired construction equipment or a tandem axle dump truck. This surficial proofroll would help to provide a stable base for the compaction of new structural fill, and delineates low density, soft, or disturbed areas that may exist below subgrade level. Unsuitable material encountered below subgrade level should be further undercut and replaced with structural fill. Due to the presence of existing fill on this site and in order to reduce the owner's risk of adverse pavement performance, as a minimum, the upper 1 foot of subgrade Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 13 Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rr�con Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 material should be compacted to at least 98 percent of the material's maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. If there is a delay between subgrade preparation and paving, the pavement subgrades should be carefully re-evaluated as the time for pavement construction approaches. Within a few days of the scheduled paving, we recommend the pavement areas be proofrolled again with a loaded tandem axle dump truck (gross weight of 20 to 25 tons) in the presence of Terracon personnel. Particular attention should be given to the areas that were rutted and disturbed earlier during construction operations and frequent movement of construction equipment. Areas where unsuitable conditions exist should be repaired by removing and replacing the materials with properly compacted fill. FEB 21 ?012 4.7.2 Pavement Design Recommendations sg f�^t Traffic load information was not available at the time of this report; therefore, a formal pavement design is not provided. Some typical pavement sections are provided below. Asphaltic cement concrete pavement thicknesses are based on the Asphalt Paving Association of Iowa (APAI) Asphalt Paving Design Guide and local design practice. Portland cement concrete thicknesses are from the American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 330R-08 – Guide for the Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots. Thickness recommendations for Passenger Vehicle Parking sections are based on light passenger vehicle (gross weight less than 4 tons) traffic only, and only occasional truck traffic such as snow removal trucks (APAI Class II, ACI Traffic Category A). As part of the layout design of the project we recommend the designer use signs and preventive structures to restrict heavy truck traffic from entering these areas. The Main Drives & Truck Access sections are based on less than 25 trucks per day (APAI Traffic Class III, ACI Traffic Category B). As a minimum, we suggest the following typical pavement sections be considered. Recommended Pavement Section Thickness' (inches) Traffic Area Alternative Asphaltic Portland Aggregate Cement Cement Base Total Concrete' Concrete Course" Passenger Vehicle A -- 5 5 5 Parking (Vehicles less than 4 tons) B 4 — 6 10 Driveways 8 Delivery A — 6 --5 6 Truck Access' B 6 1 -- 6 12 1. All materials should meet the current Iowa Department of Transportation (IDOT) Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction. ■ Asphaltic Surface - IDOT Type A Asphaltic Cement Concrete: Section 2303 ■ Asphaltic Base - IDOT Type B Asphaltic Cement Concrete, Class I: Section 2303 Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 14 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 ■ Concrete Pavement - IDOT Portland Cement Concrete Type C: Section 2301 FILETS 2. In areas of anticipated heavy vehicles, fire trucks, delivery trucks, or concentrated loads (e.g. dumpster pads), and areas with repeated turning or maneuvering of heavy vehicles, a minimum FEB 212012 concrete thickness of 7 inches is recommended but should be evaluated further when loading x:59 p ,� conditions are known. Iowa c ty, Iowa 3. A minimum 1.5 inch surface course should be used on ACC pavements. 4. The granular base course materials (if used) should be placed on a stable subgrade and compacted to at least 98 percent of the materials Standard Proctor maximum dry density. 5. A 4 inch (or greater) granular base should be considered below PCC pavements to help reduce potential for slab cud, shrinkage cracking, and subgrade "pumping" through joints, unless the subgrades are stabilized with hydrated lime or Class C fly ash. The estimated pavement sections provided in this report are minimums for the assumed design criteria, and as such, periodic maintenance should be expected. Areas for parking of heavy vehicles, concentrated turn areas, and start/stop maneuvers could require thicker pavement sections. Edge restraints (i.e. concrete curbs or aggregate shoulders) should be planned along curves and areas of maneuvering vehicles. A maintenance program that includes surface sealing, joint cleaning and sealing, and timely repair of cracks and deteriorated areas will increase the pavement's service life. As an option, thicker sections could be constructed to decrease future maintenance. All concrete for rigid pavements should have a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 4,000 psi, and be placed with a maximum slump of 4 inches. Although not required for structural support, a minimum 4 inch thick base course layer is recommended to help reduce potential for slab curl, shrinkage cracking, and subgrade "pumping" through joints. Proper joint spacing will also be required to prevent excessive slab curling and shrinkage cracking. All joints should be sealed to prevent entry of foreign material and dowelled where necessary for load transfer. Where practical, we recommend "early -entry" cutting of crack -control joints in Portland cement concrete pavements. Cutting of the concrete in its 'green" state typically reduces the potential for micro -cracking of the pavements prior to the crack control joints being formed, compared to cutting the joints after the concrete has fully set. Micro -cracking of pavements may lead to crack formation in locations other than the sawed joints, and/or reduction of fatigue life of the pavement. Terracon has observed dishing in some parking lots surfaced with ACC. Dishing is usually observed in frequently -used parking stalls (such as near the front of buildings), and occurs under the wheel footprint in these stalls. The use of higher -grade asphaltic cement, or surfacing these areas with PCC, should be considered. The dishing is exacerbated by factors such as irrigated islands or planter areas, sheet surface drainage to the front of structures, and placing the ACC directly on a compacted clay subgrade. Responsive ■ Resourceful a Reliable 15 Geotechnical Engineering Report 11'�rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 4.7.3 Pavement Design Considerations Long term pavement performance will be dependent upon several factors, including pavement and subgrade thicknesses, maintaining subgrade moisture levels and providing for preventive maintenance. The following recommendations should be considered the minimum: ■ Site grading at a minimum 2% grade away from the pavements, FEB 2 1 X012 55 PM ■ PCC joint spacing and reinforcement per ACI 330R-08, I ■ The subgrade and the pavement surface have a minimum '/4 inch per foot sjope to promote proper surface drainage, ■ Consider appropriate edge drainage systems, ■ Install joint sealant and seal cracks immediately, ■ Seal all landscaped areas in, or adjacent to pavements to minimize or prevent moisture migration to subgrade soils, ■ Placing compacted, low permeability backfill against the exterior side of curb and gutter, ■ Placing curb, gutter and/or sidewalk directly on subgrade soils without the use of base course materials. Preventive maintenance should be planned and provided for through an on-going pavement management program. Preventive maintenance activities are intended to slow the rate of pavement deterioration, and to preserve the pavement investment. Preventive maintenance consists of both localized maintenance (e.g. crack and joint sealing and patching) and global maintenance (e.g. surface sealing). Preventive maintenance is usually the first priority when implementing a planned pavement maintenance program and provides the highest return on investment for pavements. Prior to implementing any maintenance, additional engineering observation is recommended to determine the type and extent of preventive maintenance. 4.7.4 Permeable Base & Longitudinal Subdrains Due to presence of frost susceptible soils at site and in order to prolong the service of life of the pavements, consideration could be given to installing longitudinal shoulder subdrains and permeable base below the pavements. A permeable base will help prevent infiltrated surface water from ponding beneath pavements and softening the pavement subgrade. Longitudinal subdrains should drain the permeable base and help increase the overall roadbed stability and decrease the potential for frost heave. A permeable granular base should consist of a minimum 6 inch thickness of coarse, well -graded free -draining granular material meeting [DOT Specifications 4121 (Gradation No. 12), 4123 (Gradation No. 14), or 4132 (Gradation No. 30). Longitudinal subdrains should be extended a minimum of 4 feet below pavement subgrade and should be backfilled with free -draining, granular material meeting IDOT Specification 4131 (Gradation No. 29). The subdrain lines should be perforated and placed near the base of the excavation and surrounded with at least 6 inches of the drainage material. The drains should be hydraulically connected with the permeable base and sloped to provide positive gravity drainage to a reliable discharge point. Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 16 Geotechnical Engineering Report l��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 The Longitudinal drains should be constructed in accordance with IDOT Standard Road Plan RF -19C. 4.8 Frost Considerations The site soils are frost susceptible and small amounts of water can affect the performance of the grade supported slabs and pavements. Exterior slabs should be anticipated to heave during FEB 2 1 ?n17 winter months. If frost action needs to be eliminated in critical areas, we recommend the use of y:•517 W\, non -frost susceptible structural or structural slabs (e.g., structural stoops in front of building doors). Placement of non -frost susceptible material in large areas may not be feasible; however, the following recommendations are provided to help reduce potential frost heave: ■ Providing surface drainage away from the structure and slabs and toward the site storm drainage system; ■ Installing drain tiles around the perimeter of the building, stoops, below exterior slabs and pavements, and connect them to the storm drainage system; ■ Grading clayey subgrades such that groundwater potentially perched in overlying more permeable subgrades, such as sand or aggregate base, toward the site drainage system; ■ Placing non -frost susceptible fill as backfill beneath slabs and pavements that are critical to the project; ■ Placing a 3 horizontal to 1 vertical (3H: 1V) transition zone between non -frost susceptible soils and other soils; As an alternative to extending the non -frost susceptible fill to the full frost depth, consideration can be made to placing extruded polystyrene or cellular concrete under a buffer of at least 2 feet of non -frost susceptible fill. 5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation and testing services during grading, excavation, foundation construction and other earth -related construction phases of the project. The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings, across the site, or due to the modifying effects of weather. The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 17 Geotechnical Engineering Report �erracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. Support of floor slabs and pavements on or above existing fill soils is discussed in this report. However, even with the recommended construction testing services, there is an inherent risk for the owner that compressible fill or unsuitable material within or buried by the fill will not be discovered. This risk of unforeseen conditions cannot be eliminated without completely removing the existing fill, but can be reduced by performing additional testing and evaluation. The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or nal under my direct persision and that I am a d SS 10, �i���profess oval Engineerounder her laws of the State of Iowa. my licensed RRFiT E. BRADFIEI D;— _ �F:rih/ 10/26111 C 20703 Z= Brett E. Bradfield, P. Date Ow p.. My license renewal date is December 31, 2012. r ILEL FEB 21 2012 q: $I PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable 18 FEB 21 1012 x:55 OM APPENDIX A Iowa City, Iowa FIELD EXPLORATION Mer . 110CV'eeepm &ft s ei fA z.'4.+ J Iowa City Municipal, Q Ya Airport 4 CaVorTm Ave O to CJ 0 c FaBrnesdowe Z L14 o Park H Wetherby m MOfR,OFS Trek t3Nd Park McCe6�,r Sp" Ridge Dr w 0 P Twain 3 Wood N m F N CW 2' PROJECT LOCATION 30 218 Wods a sons v (P ■ K b m Q3 NORTH SITE LOCATION PLAN rA leKs 7c rerracon PROPOSED TERRY TRUEBLOOD '^' consunrp EnglRRera uW Sdmuata RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 RASE DRAWING FROM GOOGLE IMPS o 5R as>>M3t-0t INTERSECTION GILBERT ST&McCOLLISTER BLVD THIS DRAWING IS INTENDED FOR GENERAL LOCATION MM AYIMT bS AOW.MA5196 PURPOSES ONLYµppaMµSTE G jTE PII, 0I9I5D l FACNry W])F IOWA CITY 1001A - - - - - - ------ - --- ---------------- -swift i EL = 848 PHASE 3 AREA 0 ` 0 \ B2 i/ EL = 644 EL =643 / r Normal Water ` :�• B-2 `\ % Elevator 635.80 ` EL = 641 P AREA i .�. B-4 LAKE \` 1111,`` \ BS G N ` B-6 LEGEND - APPROXIMATE BORING LOCATION AND ELEVATION -APPROXIMATE BORING LOCATION (06105856.01) NORTH H 1 1 BORING LOCATION PLAN rA-2 ELEVATIONS BARED ON CONTOURS FgOMpDF P l��rcon PROPOSED TERRY TRUEBL000 040&111110253.pdf RECEIVED FROM SNYDER AND ASSOCIATES 6K$ PCBASE DRAWING FROM PDF'1110253 Ph35o11 Bodng Lou...pol' Mr' COnsWtlng Enginean and SdanOsls RECREATION AREA-PHASE3 RECEIVEDFROM SNYDER AND ASSOCIATES 0 150•0611561THISDRAYANISMTENOEp FOR GENERAL LOCATION �� - mw.wwnrieEsl p,,.,�p1.pM.,S INTERSECTION GILBERT ST B MCCOLUSTER BLVD PURPOSES ONLY 1VPpOAIM5IEOM SCALE BORING ld N PN.p19JSA]3!] F/.IL0111aNam• IOWA CITY IOWA 650 650 1 CN N N..._12 WC DD 4 645 _. .. ___ .... ...._ .N. 3.... __ _. _.. Qu N --. WC... Do 645 26 2 4u WC DD 13 13 ou N WCDo 28 10 13 11 640 _.._ ... .__ ... e... 7 ....._ .._.. ... _..... ___.. _.. _. _.7..... ..,N _... 640 5 13 3 18 3 19 5 it 4 23 635 __.. _.. ...___ ..... _...._ __. ...._..... _..._ _. ....._._ _.__.. _.. _.3.. 23.. 635 13 14 10 17 3 23 630 ....... .. __ ._... ___..... .__ __ _._... _....... _. _.. 9. :. 20.. 630 < 500 4 19 5 x 21 ami 625 _ .. ....._ .,__ _. _.__ .. ._........ _.... __... _.. •4000 6- 15 625 W '5000 15 15 620 ..... ...... ...... •3000 7 17 620 '40DD 12 15 615 - '5500 21 14 615 '9000+ 18 14 610 - •9000+ 46 11 610 '9000+ 40 10 605 _. •9000+ 42 10 605 '9000+ 31 10 600 600 E Ti S SUBSURFACE SOIL PROFILE n z J1 r�i Exhibit A-3 ' ' r tTj Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 S. Gilbert Street &McCollister Boulevard N Iowa City, Iowa TI NO DATE PLATE erracon 06115631 Oct 2011 1 LOG OF BORING NO. 1 Pae 1 of 1 CLIENT OWNER Snyder &Associates, Inc. City of Iowa City SITE S. Gilbert Street & McCollister Boulevard PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION 00 i w a x _U X C cr W 2 ~ ~ LL~ a w m W O ?� W� Piz Approx. Surface Elevation.: 646 It W o N D D z w ¢ a� m Co ¢O 3 U ¢F, o a z� =0 0 PA FILL. FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH 1 SS 10 26 12 CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL & ORGANICS, Brown Gray and Dark Brown PA 2 SS 16 13 13 5 6 sao PA FILL, CLAYEY FINE TOMEDIUM SAND 3 SS 0 3 18 WITH FOAM PIECES, TRACE GRAVEL AS & ORGANICS, Brown Gray to Gray 10 Pp 4 SS 13 10 17 15 631 15 BOTTOM OF BORING FILED FEB 21 2012 y: 51 FCity Mr. Iowa City, Iowa The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140H SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft Irerracon BORING STARTED 10-12-11 WL 4 NI WD IT NI AB BORING COMPLETED 10-12-11 RIG 977 FOREMAN Sz Y WL Backfilled s WL Exhibit A-4 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06115631 LOG OF BORING NO.2 Page 1 of 1 CLIENT OWNER Snyder &Associates, Inc. City of Iowa City SITE S. Gilbert Street & McCollister Boulevard PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 SAMPLES TESTS 0 DESCRIPTION Z zF = rn m u�l > f Zfn K�il 5 0Z of y a w xs a0 �z Z� 0 Approx. Surface Elevation.: 641 ft 1A o 0 D z z m rn 3 0 o a DO PA FILL. FINE TO MEDIUM SAND WITH CLAY TRACE GRAVEL & ORGANICS, 1 SS 5 6 7 Brown Gray and Dark Brown 3.5 637.5 PA 2 SS 7 3 19 5 PA 115 FILL. LEAN CLAY WITH SAND. GRAVEL & BROKEN CONCRETE PIECES, Brown 3 SS 10 3 23 to PA 1 4 SS 9 5 21 626 16 BOTTOM OF BORING 11L U FEL 1 2012 �a The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140H SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft Irerracon BORING STARTED 10-12-11 WL -V 14 WD 11 14 AB BORING COMPLETED 10-12-11 RIG 977 FOREMAN SZ WL 2 Backfilled Q WL Exhibit A-4 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06115631 LOG OF BORING NO. 3 Page 1 of 2 CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates, Inc. City of Iowa City SITE S. Gilbert Street & McCollister Boulevard PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION m y w rz z LL F = R S F N W W m W > O Zr ?� MW W H 2 Z D ZZ O W 0 Approx. Surface Elevation.: 643 ft w o W D D z o. w 0: 1- 0c -Z rn in az0 U X t o a z- Z) 0 HIS 1 SS 8 28 10 HS FILL. FINE TO COARSE SAND & LEAN CLAY WITH BROKEN 2 SS 10 8 13 CONCRETE PIECES, TRACE 5 HS GRAVEL & ORGANICS, 3 SS 11 5 11 Gray Brown and Brown Gray HS 4 SS 7 13 14 10 HS 14 529 _ LEAN CLAY WITH SAND. CL 5 SS 10 4 19 < 500 15 TRACE GRAVEL fPossibie Fill), HS Brown Gray to Gray, Soft to Medium Stiff 17.5 625.5 CL 6 SS 14 15 15 '5000 20 HS SANDY LEAN CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL, Gray to Brown Gray, Stiff to Hard CL 7 SS 10 12 15 "4000 25 HS FEB 21 2012 JF! 15� R -A I CL 8 SS 15 18 14 '9000+ HS Continued Next Page The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. **CME 140H SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft Nerracon BORING STARTED 10-12-11 WL J�Z 14 WD " 14 AB COMPLETED BO -11 WL Y Backfilled R GRING OREMANIO-12Sz WLl Exhibit A-4 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06115631 LOG OF BORING NO.3 Page 2 of 2 CLIENT OWNER Snyder &Associates, Inc. City of Iowa City SITE S. Gilbert Street & McCollister Boulevard PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION E z z� ZN W111 0Z L) it K 0 o D z � aim QO 3L) on Dy HS CL 9 SS 17 40 10 '9000+ SANDY LEAN CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL, 35 Gray, Hard HS CL 10 SS 19 31 10 '9000+ 40.5 g02,g 40 BOTTOM OF BORING y:S p The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines *Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140H SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft 1 ��rr�con BORING STARTED 10-12-11 WL SZ 14 WD -1 14 AB BORING COMPLETED 10-12-11 RIG 9771 FOREMAN SZ WL 3 Backfilled IT- WL I Exhibit A-4 APPROVED BKS I JOB # 06115631 LOG OF BORING NO.4 Page 1 of 2 CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates, Inc. City of Iowa City SITE S. Gilbert Street & McCollister Boulevard PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Terry Trueblood Recreation Area- Phase 3 SAMPLES TESTS U, U a DESCRIPTION Approx. Surface Elevation.: 644 ft ci H Q. O J m N m 0 K m a D z w a y W w ff : ?3 o -U m m wW <O 3 L) D wt O n w= oz w z� Z)w HS 1 SS 9 1 13 11 FILL. FINE TO COARSE SAND HS & LEAN CLAY WITH GRAVEL. TRACE ORGANICS, Dark Brown 5 2 SS 8 7 11 and Brown Gray HS 3 SS 10 4 23 HS Brick pieces in Sample 4 4 SS 8 3 23 10 HS Rubble @ about 12 to 14 feet. 14 630 5 SS 11 9 20 FILL. LEAN CLAY, TRACE SAND. 15 GRAVEL & CRUSHED LIMESTONE HS PIECES, Brown Gray 18 626 CL 6 SS 7 6 15 "4000 20 HS SANDY LEAN CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL, Gray to Brown Gray, Stiff to Very Stiff CL 7 SS 12 7 17 '3000 25 HS FILED FEHL 1 7012 44:5 � PM 30 CL 8 SS 14 21 14 '5500 HS lava Gly, i,:H_ Continued Next Page The stratification lines represent the appro>amale boundary lines 'Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140H SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, it rerracon BORING STARTED 10-12-11 WL 7 14 WD = 14.5 AB1 BORING COMPLETED 10-12-11 Y WL Backfilled Y RIG 977 FOREMAN SZ WL Exhibit A-4 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06115631 LOG OF BORING NO.4 Page 2 of 2 CLIENT OWNER Snyder & Associates, Inc. City of Iowa City SITE S. Gilbert Street & McCollister Boulevard PROJECT Iowa City, Iowa Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 SAMPLES TESTS DESCRIPTION w U a C } N ix m W z3 of LL w p D oW 2 a p �p Q. < W (7 O D � K 3U Q n DV) HS CL 9 SS 13 46 11 '9000+ SANDY LEAN CLAY, TRACE GRAVEL, 35 1 140.5 Gray, Hard HS CL 10 SS 15 42 10 '9000+ 803,8 BOTTOM OF BORING 40 I L U FEB 21 2012 v: q PA I ry Cie low City, Iowa The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary lines *Calibrated Hand Penetrometer between soil and rock types: in-situ, the transition may be gradual. "CME 140H SPT automatic hammer WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS, ft lf�rracon BORING STARTED 10-12-11 WL =14 WD 114.5 All BORING COMPLETED 10-12-11 3 WL Backfilled - RIG 977 1 FOREMAN SZ WL Exhibit A-4 APPROVED BKS JOB # 06115631 Geotechnical Engineering Report 1(erracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 Field Exploration Description The field exploration consisted of performing four (4) soil borings at predetermined locations on the project site. The borings were extended to depths of about 15 to 40Y2 feet below the existing site grades. The boring locations were selected and laid out in the field by Snyder and Associates, Inc. personnel. The approximate boring locations are indicated on the attached Boring Location Plan. The ground surface elevations at the boring locations were also provided by Snyder & Associates, Inc. personnel; however, the elevations on the boring logs and the Boring Location Plan have been rounded to the nearest 1/2 foot. The locations and elevations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the means and methods used to define them. The borings were drilled with an ATV -mounted, rotary drilling rig using continuous flight, solid - and hollow -stemmed augers to advance the boreholes. Samples were obtained using split - barrel sampling procedures. In the split -barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2 -inch O.D. split - barrel sampling spoon is driven into the ground with a 140 -pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. A CME automatic SPT hammer was used to advance the split -barrel sampler in the borings performed for this project. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches of a normal 18 -inch penetration is recorded as the standard penetration resistance value. These values are indicated on the boring logs at the corresponding depths of occurrence. The samples were sealed and returned to the laboratory for testing and classification. Field logs of the borings were prepared by the drill crew. Each log included visual classification of the materials encountered during drilling as well as the driller's interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples. The boring logs included with this report represent an interpretation of the field logs by a geotechnical engineer and include modifications based on laboratory observation and tests on select samples. FILED FEB 2 t 1n12 6MP41 Clark Iowa City, Iowa Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Exhibit A-5 APPENDIX B LABORATORY TESTING Geotechnical Engineering Report 1 ��rracon Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3/Lodge Building ■ Iowa City, Iowa October 26, 2011 ■ Terracon Project No. 06115631.01 Laboratory Testing Soil samples were tested in the laboratory to measure their natural water contents. A hand penetrometer was used to estimate the unconfined compressive strength of some cohesive samples. The hand penetrometer provides a better estimate of soil consistency than visual examination alone. The results of the laboratory tests are shown on the boring logs, adjacent to the soil profiles, at their corresponding sample depths. As a part of the laboratory testing program, the soil samples were classified in the laboratory based on visual observation, texture, plasticity, and the limited laboratory testing described above. Additional testing could be performed to more accurately classify the samples. Portions of the recovered samples were placed in jars, and the samples will be retained for at least 1 month in case additional testing is requested. The soil descriptions presented on the boring logs for native soils are in accordance with our enclosed General Notes and Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). The estimated group symbol for the USCS is also shown on the boring logs, and a brief description of the Unified System is attached to this report. FILED FEB 2 12012 �' PM E) Clerk Iowa City, Iowa Responsive ■ Resourceful ■ Reliable Exhibit B-1 APPENDIX C SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS rtl.ELa FES 21 2012 .f; 5`I PM Iowab Clerk City, low The number of blows required to advance a standard 2 -inch O.D. split -spoon sampler (SS) the last 12 inches of the total 18 -inch penetration with a 140 -pound hammer falling 30 inches is considered the "Standard Penetration" or "N -value". WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WL: Water Level WS: While Sampling BCR: Before Casing Removal WCI: Wet Cave in WD: While Drilling ACR: After Casing Removal DCI: Dry Cave in AB: After Boring N/E: Not Encountered Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the times indicated. Groundwater levels at other times and other locations across the site could vary. in pervious soils, the indicated levels may reflect the location of groundwater. In low permeability soils, the accurate determination of groundwater levels may not be possible with only short-term observations. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION: Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non -plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS GENERAL NOTES Compressive or N -value (SS) Consistency DRILLING & SAMPLING SYMBOLS: Dense <500 0-1 SS: Split Spoon - 1-%" I.D., 2" O.D., unless otherwise noted HS: Hollow Stem Auger ST: Thin -Walled Tube— 2" O.D., 3" O.D., unless otherwise noted PA: Power Auger (Solid Stem) RS: Ring Sampler - 2.42" I.D., 3" O.D., unless otherwise noted HA: Hand Auger DB: Diamond Bit Coring - 4", N, B RB: Rock Bit BS: Bulk Sample or Auger Sample WB Wash Boring or Mud Rotary The number of blows required to advance a standard 2 -inch O.D. split -spoon sampler (SS) the last 12 inches of the total 18 -inch penetration with a 140 -pound hammer falling 30 inches is considered the "Standard Penetration" or "N -value". WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYMBOLS: WL: Water Level WS: While Sampling BCR: Before Casing Removal WCI: Wet Cave in WD: While Drilling ACR: After Casing Removal DCI: Dry Cave in AB: After Boring N/E: Not Encountered Water levels indicated on the boring logs are the levels measured in the borings at the times indicated. Groundwater levels at other times and other locations across the site could vary. in pervious soils, the indicated levels may reflect the location of groundwater. In low permeability soils, the accurate determination of groundwater levels may not be possible with only short-term observations. DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION: Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles, gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a #200 sieve; they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and silts if they are slightly plastic or non -plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency. CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS Unconfined Standard Penetration Compressive or N -value (SS) Consistency Strength. Qu, vsf Blows/Ft. Dense <500 0-1 Very Soft 500-1,000 2-4 Soft 1,000-2,000 4-8 Medium Stiff 2,000-4,000 8-15 Stiff 4,000— 8,000 15-30 Very Stiff 8,000+ > 30 Hard RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL Desertptive Ternri Percent of of other constituents Dry Weight Trace <15 With 15-29 Modifier �: 30 RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES Descriptive Term(s) Percent of of other constituents Dry Weight Trace < 5 With Modifier Rev 04/10 lrerracon RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS Standard Penetration or N -value (SS) Relative Density Blows/Ft 0-3 Very Loose 4-9 Loose 10-29 Medium Dense 30-50 Dense > 50 Very Dense GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY Major Component Particle Size of Sample Boulders Over 12 in. (300mm) 5-12 > 12 FILEL Cobbles 12 in. to 3 in. (300mm to 75mm) Gravel 3 in. to #4 sieve (75mm to 4.75mm) Sand #4 to #200 sieve (4.75 to 0.075mm) Silt or Clay Passing #200 Sieve (0.075mm) FEB 212012 y: 51P City clerk Iowa City, Iowa PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION Term Plasticity Index Non -plastic 0 Low 1-10 Medium 11-30 High > 30 Exhibit C-1 UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests" Group symbol Soil Classification Group Names Coarse Grained Soils: o More than 50 k retained Gravels: More than 50% of coarse fraction retained on No. 4 sieveMore Clean Gravels: Less than 5% fines ° Cu i 4 and 1 5 Cc <31; —4 GVV I We gravel Cu < and/or 1 > Cc > 3 GP Paorly graded gravel Gravels with Fines: ° than 12% fines Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey gravel on No. 200 sieve Sands: 50% or more of coarse fraction passes No. 4 sieve Clean Sands: Less than 5% fines ° Cu 2:6 and 1 5 Cc 5 3 SW Well -graded sand Cu < 6 It ld or 1 > Cc > 3 SP Poorly graded sand Sands with Fines: More than 12% fines ° Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand Fines Classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand ' Fine -Grained Soils: 50% or more passes the Sites and Clays: Liquid limit less than 50 Inorganic: PI > 7 and plots on or above "A" line' CL Lean day PI <4 or plots below'A" One' ML Sitt Organic: Liquid limb - oven dried I <0.75 OL Organic day ' Organic silt Liquid limit - not dried No. 200 sieveInorganic: Sifts and Clays: Liquid limit 50 or more PI plots on or above "A" line CH Fal clay PI plots below "A" line MH FJastic Sitt • Organic: Liquid limit- oven dried <0.75 OH I Organic day ' Organic silt Liquid limit - not dried Highly organic sons: Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor I PT I Past A Based on the material passing the 3 -in. (75 -mm) sieve e If field sample contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add "with cobbles or boulders, or both" to group name. c Gravels with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW -GM well -graded gravel with silt, GW -GC well -graded gravel with clay, GP -GM poorly graded gravel with silt, GP -GC poorly graded gravel with clay. ° Sands with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: SW -SM well -graded sand with sift, SW -SC well -graded sand with clay, SP -SM poorly graded sand with silt, SP -SC poorly graded sand with clay eCu=DeWDto Cc. (Da°)x D, x D, ` If soil contains t 15% sand, add "with sand" to group name. ° If fines classify as CL -ML, use dual symbol GC -GM. or SC -SM. F LEl FEB 21 2012 y-:55 PM City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa 60 50 a tu 40 Z > 30 U to20 EL 10 7 4 9 0 " If fines are organic, add "with organic fines" to group name. If soil contains 2 15% gravel, add "with gravel" to group name. ' If Afterberg limits plot in shaded area, soil is a CL -ML, silty clay. " If soil contains 15 to 29% plus No. 200, add "with sand" or "with gravel," whichever is predominant. t If soil contains 2 30% plus No. 200 predominantly sand, add "sandy' to group name. " If soil contains 2 30% plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add 'gravelly` to group name. " PI z 4 and plots on or above "A" line. ° PI < 4 or plots below "A" line. ° PI plots on or above "A" line. ° PI plots below "A" line. For classification of fine-grained soils and fine-grained tractlon of coarse-grained soils Equation of'A'-line �,F�,p �� Honzontal at PI_4 to LL=255. ' then P1-0.73(LL-20) �d' Equation of'U' - line Venical et L1=16 to PI.7, - then P1=0.9 (LL -8) — I MH or OH ML or OL I 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 e0 90 100 110 LIQUID LIMIT (LL) 1 rarracon Exhibit C-2 APPENDIX B NPDES CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS FILED FEB 21 ?012 Iowa tY Cierk Y Iowa NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN FOR TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA PHASE 3 & 4 IMPROVEMENTS City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa Project No. 111.0253 NPDES Permit Discharge Authorization Number: IA -. December 15, 2011 HLEU FEB 21 7012 y; S1 PK City Clerk Iowa City, Iowa Prepared by: Snyder & Associates, Inc. 5005 Bowling Street S.W. Suite A Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 Ankeny, Iowa 50023 319-362-9394 IMPORTANT NOTICE This Pollution Prevention Plan shall be retained on the construction site from the date the construction activities begin to the date of final stabilization. In addition, all contractors shall be supplied with a copy of the pollution prevention plan. It shall be the duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that these requirements are met. JA2011 _Projects\111.0253\Correspondence\Specs\S W PPP\14a_SWPPP.doc Table of Contents PART 1 SITE DESCRIPTION PART2 CONTROLS PART 3 CONSTRUCTION / IMPLEMENTATION PART 4 FINAL STABILIZATION / DISCONTINUATION PART 5 CERTIFICATION APPENDIX A NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 APPENDIX B CHECKLISTS APPENDIX C INSPECTION REPORTS FILED FEB 21 7012 4: Sq PM IowaClerk City, Iowa Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 8 4 Improvements - 111.0253 PART 1 SITE DESCRIPTION FILED F18 212012 'V -'S1 Pµ Iowa h Clerk City. Iowa Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 SITE INFORMATION: Project Name TERRY TRUEBLOOD REC. AREA PH. 3 & 4 IMPROVEMENTS Project Location NE 1/4 Sec 27, T79N, R06W (address, lat./long. or City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa Section -T -R Owner Name City of Iowa City Representative 410 E. Washington Street FEB 2 j 7012 Owner Address/Phone Iowa City, Iowa 52240 P&� 319-356-5010 Site Area 160.0 Acres Disturbed Area 10.0 Acres Final Runoff Coefficient 0.51 Soil type / Loam and loamy fine sand w/ moderate susceptibility to characteristics sheet & rill erosion (perNRCS Soil Survey of Johnson Co., Iowa Receiving Waters Runoff discharged to the Iowa River from Sand Lake via public storm sewer. Description Project consists of recreation area development with (purpose and types of soil associated grading and paving. disturbing activities) Soil disturbing activities include clearing and grubbing, stabilized construction entrance, site grading, storm sewer and utilities installation, building foundations, private parking lot paving. Expected Sequence of 1. Install stabilized construction entrance, staging area Major Construction controls & perimeter silt barrier Activities 2. Clear and grub for detention/sediment basin installation (subject to change; any 3. Construct initial detention/sediment basin deviations shall be noted on 4. Clear and grub for earthwork operations this plan) 5. Continue grading operations beginning with topsoil stockpiling (interior silt barrier installation) 6. Stabilize denuded areas and stockpiles within 14 days of last construction activity in that area 7. Install utilities & storm sewer 8. Install curb & gutter, paving 9. Backfill / finish grading 10. Temporary seeding / stabilization 11. Building construction 12. Permanent seeding/stabilization 13. Final completion, removal of temporary erosion control measures Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 PART 2 CONTROLS FILED FEB 21 2012 *: cily Per Iowa City, Iowa Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 FEB 21 2n17 v: sq pn� A. Erosion and Sediment Controls Measures to be used for controlling erosion and sediment throughout the construction project. Includes stabilization measures for limiting soil erosion from disturbed areas and structural controls to divert runoff and remove sediment. Contractor/subcontractor is responsible for the implementation and management of control measures specific to this site. As work progresses, field investigation may indicate additional erosion control measures may be required as determined by the contractor, owner, engineer, city or other governmentally regulated agencies. 1. Stabilization a. Preserve existing vegetation in areas not disturbed during construction b. The total area of soil disturbed by construction operations at any time shall be held to a minimum. c. Soil Compaction — compaction of soils in areas to be seeded or sodded will be kept to a minimum to increase infiltration of storm water runoff into the groundwater, reducing the amount of runoff. d. Temporary Stabilization - areas where construction activity is not planned to occur for at least 21 days will be stabilized within 14 days of ceasing construction activities in that area by one or more of the following temporary erosion control measures. • Topsoil stockpiles and disturbed portions of the site will be stabilized with temporary seed and mulch. • Areas of the site to be paved will be temporarily stabilized with geotextile and stone sub -base until pavement can be installed. • Frequent watering during construction in dry weather shall minimize wind erosion from exposed soil. e. Permanent Stabilization - areas where construction activity has permanently ended will be stabilized within 14 days of ceasing construction activities in that area by one or more of the following permanent erosion control measures. • Sodding or permanent seeding/mulch and mulch in all unpaved areas where final grading is complete. • Permanently seed drainage swales and install erosion control matting where required immediately upon reaching final grades to decrease erosion and facilitate sediment deposition in surface runoff. f. Vegetative buffer strips • Vegetation strip will be planted along the downstream boundary of the site to increase infiltration and sediment deposition by reducing runoff velocity. g. Protection of Trees and Natural Vegetation • Undisturbed areas will utilize existing vegetation as a natural buffer zone to increase infiltration and sediment deposition by reducing runoff velocity. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 h. Dust control • Mulch or surface watering will be utilized to control wind erosion of susceptible soils during and/or immediately after mass site grading operations. Outlet Stabilization • Rock / riprap and engineering fabric installed at storm sewer outlets to prevent erosion. 2. Structural Controls a. At all areas where runoff can move offsite, silt fence or approved equal will be installed along the perimeter of the project downstream of soil disturbing activities and storm water discharge points prior to site clearing and grading operations as required and/or shown on the plans. b. Temporary sediment basins are provided at the rate of 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre for disturbed areas over 10 acres. If not attainable, a combination of silt fences, multiple sediment traps, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all side slopes and downslope boundaries of the disturbed area. c. Silt fence, sediment traps or equivalent measures for all side slopes and downslope boundaries of the disturbed area provided for disturbed areas of 10 acres or less. d. Silt barrier enclosures will be installed around all area intakes and flared end section inlets to protect storm sewers from sediment immediately after construction of inlet. e. All storm water street intakes will be protected from silt with Type I inlet filters or equivalent sediment protection measures after paving. f. Silt fence, temporary silt basins, earthen dikes and ditch checks will be installed along concentrated drainageways to control flow velocity and FEB 2 1 9012 encourage sediment deposition. g. Storm water detention/retention facilities will retain flows and act as temporary sediment basin with the installation of a temporary outlet riser. • Installed prior to commencing upstream grading operations and storm sewer installation. h. Curb & gutter will divert storm water once installed. i. Drainage swales • Permanently seeded immediately upon reaching final grade to facilitate sediment deposition in surface runoff. • Convey runoff to sediment basins/acceptable outlet. • Used in conjunction with sediment traps, ditch checks, or other control measures to trap sediment. j. Surface roughening k. Additional erosion control measures may be required on embankments, stockpiles and other areas to ensure runoff control. Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Teny Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 8 4 Improvements — 111.0253 B. Other Controls FEB 21 7012 Al..S� ?AJ Measures for controlling other sources of potential pollution that may exist on the construction site. During the course of construction, it is possible that situations may arise where unknown materials will be encountered. When such situations occur, they will be handled according to all applicable federal, state, and local regulations in effect at the time. Waste materials a. Disposal of unused construction materials and construction material wastes shall comply with applicable state and local waste disposal, sanitary sewer, or septic system regulations. In the event of a conflict with other governmental laws, rules and regulations, the more restrictive laws, rules or regulations shall apply. 2. Hazardous waste a. Hazardous waste materials will be disposed of in accordance with applicable local, State, and/or Federal regulations. b. Equipment refueling and maintenance operations will be carried out in such a manner so as to prevent any spills and contamination to the soil and groundwater. c. Potentially hazardous materials will be used with great care to prevent spillage in any volume. Sanitary waste A portable restroom facility may be located onsite at the contractor's discretion. Wastes will be collected and disposed of in complete compliance with local, state and federal regulations. This facility will be located in an area where contact with the storm water discharge is minimal. 4. Vehicle tracking a. Stabilized construction entrances and/or vehicle washing racks will be installed at all site access points to reduce vehicle tracking of sediment offsite. b. Paved streets adjacent to the site will be inspected daily and cleaned as necessary to remove any excess mud, dirt or rock tracked from the site. c. Dump trucks hauling material from the site will be properly covered with a tarpaulin. d. Dust control measures will be utilized as necessary. 5. Non -storm water discharges a. Expected sources of non -storm water discharges from the site during construction may include: Potable water sources including water line flushings, irrigation drainage and fire fighting activities. Pavement/building wash waters where no spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have occurred and excluding Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 8 4 Improvements — 111.0253 FEB q PAZ detergents. y : Uncontaminated groundwater from de -watering excavation. • Natural springs, wetland, water sources. • Foundation or footing drains where flows have not been exposed to solvents. b. Non -storm water discharges will be directed to the sediment basin or other appropriate control measure prior to discharging off-site. C. Storm Water Management Post -construction storm water drainage will be facilitated by curb and gutter, storm sewer, intake structures, and established drainage swales for the developed areas. Runoff will be directed to onsite storm water management controls and/or the City of Iowa City public storm sewer/drainage ditch. Measures implemented to control pollution of storm water after construction is complete include the following: Open channels a. Vegetated Swales and natural depressions will reduce storm water runoff by increasing infiltration and increase sedimentation by reducing runoff velocity. b. Riprap placed as channel lining in high-flow drainage ditches to prevent erosion and increase sedimentation by reducing runoff velocity. c. Permanent erosion control or turf reinforcement mats will be placed in drainage swales to prevent erosion. d. Concrete drainage flumes installed at channel flowlines to reduce erosion of channel in small storm events. 2. Undeveloped areas will be graded at the slopes indicated and have permanent seeding and/or landscaping designed to reduce runoff velocities and increase infiltration. 3. Approximately 150.0 acres of the site will remain undisturbed and in its original vegetative state, limiting the amount of exposed soil and providing a continuous vegetation buffer zone that will reduce runoff velocities and increase infiltration. 4. Outlets of all storm sewer systems and culverts will be stabilized with riprap aprons underlain by engineering fabric or non -rock outlet protection measures to dissipate flow velocities and prevent erosion. Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 FILED FEB 2 !o Cary Clerk wa Citylow, CONSTRUCTION / IMPLEMENTATION Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 6 4 Improvements — 111.0253 A. State and Local Requirements FEB 21 2012 y*.sJ PM The storm water pollution prevention plan reflects the State of Iowa requirements for storm water management and erosion and sediment control, as established in 161A.64 Code of Iowa, State of Iowa Statutory Requirements Pertaining to Erosion Control Plans. Prior to initiating a land disturbing activity, a person engaged in land disturbing activity shall file a signed affidavit with the soil and water conservation district that the project will not exceed the soil loss limits. 3. All work shall be done in accordance with Division 9 of the latest edition of the Statewide Urban Standard Specifications (SUDAS). 4. Code Compliance: The contractor shall comply with the soil erosion control requirements of the Iowa Code, the Iowa DNR NPDES permit and all local ordinances. B. Timing of Controls/Measures 1. Install down-slope and side -slope perimeter silt fence prior to commencing land -disturbing activity. 2. Install construction entrance and vehicle tracking controls. 3. Construct temporary sediment basins or detention basin as sediment basin and route all runoff from disturbed areas to the basin and/or erosion control measures at storm water discharge points — sediment traps/basins, riprap channel lining, erosion control mat. 4. Do not disturb an area until necessary for construction to proceed. 5. Install interior silt fences, earthen dikes, sediment traps, etc. as grading progresses. 6. Cover or stabilize disturbed areas and stockpiles as soon as possible and no later than 14 days after ceasing construction for more than 21 days or permanently. 7. Place swale control measures (erosion control mats, silt traps, ditch checks, seed & mulch) in drainageways as soon as final grades are achieved and before storm sewer is installed where possible. 8. Construct outlet stabilization measures at storm outlets and place silt barriers at storm sewer inlets immediately after storm sewer is installed. 9. As areas reach their final grade, provide additional silt fence, sediment traps, earthen dikes, ditch checks or filter sock as necessary. 10. Complete permanent stabilization seeding/mulch or sod stabilization as soon as possible after work is complete in an area. 11. Remove temporary sediment controls and accumulated sediment once entire site is stabilized. Re-seed/mulch any areas disturbed during removal. Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Teny Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 PROJECTED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE / CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS: PHASE A — GRADING Anticipated Start -End April 2012/ June 2012 FILET FEB 2 k 2m2 4 .sl c,c ��Cr;'" Iowa cuy.lnwa Initial control measure installation sediment basin, construction entrance, perimeter silt fence Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date April 2012 Anticipated End Date April 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Initial Grading Operations (clearing/grubbing, topsoil stripping/stockpiling/stabilization) Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date April 2012 Anticipated End Date April 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Major Grading Operations (mass grading, sediment/detention basins, pond, interior silt barrier, temporary stabilization Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date April 2012 Anticipated End Date June 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date PHASE B — UNDERGROUND UTILITIES Anticipated Start -End May 2012/ June 2012 Sewer / Water installation (sanitary sewer, water main Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date May 2012 Anticipated End Date May 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Storm System storm sewer/structures, culverts, outlet structures Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date May 2012 Anticipated End Date June 2012 Actual Start Date I Actual End Date Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements - 111.0253 PHASE C — PAVING / FINE GRADING June 2012/ pp 2 1 7012 ity Clerk .r Ciry, Iowa Paving sub rade prep, curb 8r gutter, street, sidewalk, drive, parking lotpaving) Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing utility companies working on the site Anticipated Start Date June 2012 Anticipated End Date July 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Franchise Utilities electric, gas, tele hone, cable, Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing utility companies working on the site Anticipated Start Date June 2012 Anticipated End Date July 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Finish Grading backfill, finish gradin ernporary seed stabilization Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing any individual lot ownership transfers Anticipated Start Date July 2012 Anticipated End Date August 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date PHASED —BUILDING CONSTRUCTION Anticipated Start -End July 2012/ September 2012 Building Construction basement excavation, uilding construction, driveway paving, sod stabilization Operator Responsible Attach additional sheets listing any individual lot ownership transfers Anticipated Start Date July 2012 Anticipated End Date October 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date PHASE E— FINAL STABILIZATION Anticipated Start -End October 2012/ November 2012 Permanent Stabilization final seeding / sod stabilization, temporary erosion control measure removal Operator Responsible Anticipated Start Date October 2012 Anticipated End Date November 2012 Actual Start Date Actual End Date Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 8 4 Improvements — 111.0253 C. Inspection & Maintenance All documents related to the storm water discharge permit shall be kept on site at all times and must be presented to the Iowa DNR or EPA upon request. Including but not limited to the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, Notice of Intent, Proof of Publication, and project inspection diary. 2. The contractor will be responsible for selecting a "qualified" inspector to conduct the inspections. "Qualified" is defined as a person knowledgeable in the principles and practices of erosion and sediment controls who possesses the skills to assess conditions at the construction site that could impact storm FEB 2 t 2nt7 water quality and to assess the effectiveness of any sediment and erosion y: 5A P�1 control measures selected to control the quality of storm water discharges from the construction activity. The project area and control devices will be inspected by personnel assigned by the contractor every seven calendar days and within 24 hours after each rain event of 1/2" or greater or heavy snow melt. The findings and any actions taken as a result of this inspection shall be recorded in the project diary with a copy submitted weekly to the owner or owner's representative during the project. a. Inspect silt fence for depth of sediment, tears, fabric securely attached to posts and posts firmly in the ground. b. Inspect sediment basins for depth of sediment. c. Inspect diversion dikes for any breaches. d. Inspect seeding for bare spots, washouts and healthy growth. 4. This pollution prevention plan shall be revised as construction progresses to reflect current ownership, responsibilities, operations and findings. a. The plan will be revised due to any deficiencies in the plan or changes in conditions noted during an inspection and the contractor will implement any and all revisions as soon as practical but no later than days after the inspection. b. Maintain record of major construction operations start and ending dates and operators responsible for the various phases. c. The plan will be modified within 14 calendar days of a hazardous condition, describing the release, the date of release and the circumstances leading to the release. Steps to prevent the reoccurrence of such releases will be identified in a plan revision and implemented. Maintain all temporary and permanent erosion control measures in good working order by cleaning, repairing, replacement and sediment removal throughout the permit period. Any necessary repairs will be initiated within 24 hours of report. a. Built up sediment will be removed from silt barrier or the silt barrier replaced when it has reached 1/2 the height of the barrier. b. Built up sediment will be removed from sediment basins when it reaches 25% of the design capacity or at the end of the project. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 8 4 Improvements — 111.0253 c. Accumulation of earth, silt or debris on adjoining properties or streets will be minimized. Remove any accumulation of earth, silt or debris immediately and take remedial actions for prevention. d. Minor spills of potentially hazardous materials will be cleaned up by removing and disposing of contaminate soils properly. Major spills shall be reported in accordance with 45513.386 Code of Iowa with clean up procedures dependant on the severity of the spill. 6. Hazardous substance spill prevention and response a. The contractor is responsible for training all personnel in the proper handling and cleanup of spilled materials. No spilled hazardous materials or wastes will be allowed to come into contact with storm water discharges. If contact does occur, the storm water discharge will be contained on site until appropriate measures in compliance with all Federal, State, and local regulations are followed to dispose of the hazardous substance. b. In addition to Good Housekeeping and material management practices, the following practices shall be done to minimize the potential for hazardous material spills and to reduce the risk of the spill coming in contact with storm water. • Manufacturer's recommended methods for spill cleanup will be clearly posted and site personnel will be trained regarding these procedures and the location of the information and cleanup supplies. • Materials and equipment necessary for spill control, containment and cleanup will be provided onsite in a material storage area. Equipment and materials will include but not be limited to brooms, dust pans, mops, rags, gloves, goggles, kitty litter, sand, sawdust, and plastic and metal trash containers. c. In the event of a spill, the following procedures will be followed: • All spills will be cleaned up immediately following discovery. • The spill area will be kept well ventilated and personnel will wear appropriate protective clothing to prevent injury from contact with the hazardous substance. • Spill of toxic or hazardous material will be reported to the appropriate state or local governmental agency and to the project manager and engineer, regardless of the size of the spill, d. In the event the construction site has a release of a hazardous substance or oil in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined at 40 CFR Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, or 40 CFR Part 302 then the permittee shall: • Person in charge of the site at the time of the spill shall call the EPA National Response Center to report the spill (800-424- 8802, or 202-426-2675). • Modify the Pollution Prevention Plan accordingly within 14 days of the spill including the items mentioned below. • Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release including: a description of the release, type of material, estimated amount of spill, date of release, explanation of why Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 PILED FEB 21 2012 CItY 'Y S1 CerkM Iowa City, Iowa the spill happened, and a description of the steps taken to prevent and control future releases. D. Materials Management Site sources of pollution generated as a result of this work related to silts and sediment which may be transported as a result of a storm event. However, this SWPPP provides conveyance for other (non -project related) operations. These other operations have storm water runoff, the regulation of which is beyond the control of this SWPPP. Materials or substances expected to be present onsite during construction: a. Concrete b. Detergents c. Paints d. Tar e. Soil stabilization additives FEB 2 1 2n12 f. Fertilizers 4:S5 PrA g. Petroleum based additives h. Cleaning solvents i. Wood i. Solids and construction wastes 2. Material Management Practices — the following is a list of practices that will be used onsite to minimize the risk of spills or other accidental exposure of materials and substances to storm water runoff. a. Good Housekeeping • An effort will be made to store onsite only enough products required to complete the job. • All materials stored onsite will be kept in a neat, orderly manner and in their appropriate containers. If possible, products shall be kept under a roof or other enclosure. • Materials will be kept in their original containers with the original manufacturer's label. • Substances will not be mixed with one another unless recommended by the manufacturer. • Whenever possible, all of a product will be used up before disposing of the container. • Manufacturer's recommendations for proper use and disposal will be followed. • The job site superintendent will be responsible for daily inspections to ensure proper use and disposal of materials. b. Hazardous Products • Products will be kept in their original containers with the original manufacturer's label. • The original labels and material safety data will be kept for each of the materials as they contain important product information. • Disposal of any excess product will be done in a manner that Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 follows all manufacturers', federal, local and state recommended methods for proper disposal. 3. Product Specific Practices — the following is a list of potential sources of pollution and specific practices to reduce pollutant discharges from materials or sources expected to be present during construction. a. Petroleum Storage Tanks • All onsite vehicles shall be inspected and monitored for leaks and receive preventative maintenance to reduce the chance of leakage. • Steps will be taken by the contractor to eliminate contaminants from storage tanks form entering ground soil. Any petroleum storage tanks kept onsite will be located with an impervious surface between the tank and the ground. b. Fertilizers — shall be applied in minimal amounts as recommended by the manufacturer. It shall be worked into the soil as to minimize the contact with storm water discharge. c. Paints, paint solvents and cleaning solvents — Excess paints and solvents shall not be discharged into the storm sewer system. The contractor shall refer to the manufacturer's instructions and federal regulations on the proper disposal techniques. d. Concrete wastes • Concrete trucks will be allowed to washout or discharge excess concrete only in specifically designated areas which have been prepared to minimize contact between the concrete and storm water discharge from the site. • The hardened product from the concrete washout areas will be disposed of as other non -hazardous waste materials or may be broken up and used on the site for other appropriate uses. e. Solid and construction wastes — All trash and construction debris shall be deposited into a dumpster that will be emptied as necessary. No construction waste materials will be buried on site. The dumpsters must be put in a location where the contact with storm water discharge is minimized. Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 B 4 Improvements — 111.0253 y: 5Y Pn.1 C .I FINAL STABILIZATION / DISCONTINUATION Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 8 4 Improvements —111.0253 A. Final Stabilization / Discontinuation The storm water discharge from a construction activity is no longer considered to be a discharge subject to the storm water permit requirements when final stabilization has been reached and temporary erosion and sediment controls have been or will be removed. A permittee must submit a Notice of Discontinuation (NOD) to inform the IDNR that storm water discharge from the site will no longer need to be covered by the general permit. 2. "Final Stabilization" — the point at which all soil disturbing activities are complete, and a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% of the cover for unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures has been established or equivalent permanent stabilization measures have been employed. 3. Notice of Discontinuation should be mailed to the following address: Storm Water Coordinator Iowa Department of Natural Resources 502 E. 9th Street Des Moines, Iowa 50319-0034 4. All plans, inspection reports and other related documents must be retained for a period of three years after project completion. The contractor shall retain a record copy and provide the original documents to the owner upon issuance of the NOD. FILED FPH 212012 J): C,`Pn� Iowa City, Iowa Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements - 111.0253 Name of the owner or facility to which the storm water discharge general permit coverage was issued. List the complete permit authorization number for the discharge. This number is provided on the bottom of the authorization sheet. IA - List the date the construction site reached final stabilization. The following certification must be signed in accordance with the signatory requirements of the general permit (see back side). I certify under penalty of law that disturbed soils at the identified facility have been finally stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time. I understand that by submitting this Notice of Discontinuation, I am no longer authorized to discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities by Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 and that discharging pollutants from storm water associated with industrial activity to waters of the United States is unlawful under the Clean Water Act where the discharge is not authorized by an NPDES permit. I further certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for known violations. Return to: (print) Signature Storm Water Coordinator Department of Natural Resources 502 E. 9th Street Des Moines, IA 50319-0034 (over) Title TILED NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION FEB 2 2012 4:Me.v OF A STORM WATER DISCHARGE city clerk t°wa City, COVERED UNDER IOWA NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 Iowa FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Name of the owner or facility to which the storm water discharge general permit coverage was issued. List the complete permit authorization number for the discharge. This number is provided on the bottom of the authorization sheet. IA - List the date the construction site reached final stabilization. The following certification must be signed in accordance with the signatory requirements of the general permit (see back side). I certify under penalty of law that disturbed soils at the identified facility have been finally stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time. I understand that by submitting this Notice of Discontinuation, I am no longer authorized to discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities by Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 and that discharging pollutants from storm water associated with industrial activity to waters of the United States is unlawful under the Clean Water Act where the discharge is not authorized by an NPDES permit. I further certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for known violations. Return to: (print) Signature Storm Water Coordinator Department of Natural Resources 502 E. 9th Street Des Moines, IA 50319-0034 (over) Title Final Stabilization means that all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed, and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% for the area has been established or equivalent stabilization measures have been employed. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS All Notices of Intent, storm water pollution prevention plans, reports, certifications or information either submitted to the Department or the operator of a large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system, or that this permit requires be maintained by the permittee, shall be signed in accordance with rule 567-64.3(8) of the Iowa Administrative Code as follows: 64.3(8) Identity of signatories of operation permit applications. The person who signs the application for an operation permit shall be: a. Corporations. In the case of corporations, a principal executive officer of at least the level of vice-president. b. Partnerships. In the case off a partnership, a general partner. C. Sole proprietorships. In the case of a sole proprietorship, the proprietor. d. Public facilities. In the case of a municipal, state, or other public facility, by either the principal executive officer, or the ranldng elected official. e. Storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from construction activity. In the case of a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from construction as identified in 40 CFR 122.26(b)(14)(x), either the owner of the site or the general contractor. FILED FEB 2 1 2012 ss 1M Iowa Cav, lows PART 5 CERTIFICATION FILED FFR 2 +&-SI 2012 Io a'ty C h. Iowa Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Certification This project is subject to section 402(b) of the Clean Water Act and IAC 455 B.174 Subrule 567-64.4 (projects disturbing one or more total acres) and requires inclusion in the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit No. 2 or individual NPDES Permit for storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities. The Contractor shall perform all pollution prevention measures as identified in the plans and specifications. A copy of the storm water pollution prevention plan (SWPPP) must be kept at the construction site from the time construction begins until the site has reached final stabilization. 2. The owner and prime contractor must sign the following certification statements. By doing so, the prime contractor becomes co -permittee with the owner and other co -permittee contractors. The prime contractor must identify which contracting entity will be responsible for each portion of the pollution prevention plan and maintain the site in compliance with the plan and NPDES Permit. The certification must be signed in accordance with the signatory requirements found in the general permit; i.e., principal executive officer, vice president, general partner, proprietor, elector official, and will be incorporated into the pollution prevention plan. All subcontractors, including short-term contractors and subcontractors must sign the appropriate certification statement before conducting any work at the site. The certification must be signed in accordance with the signatory requirements found in the general permit; i.e., principal executive officer, vice president, general partner, proprietor, elector official, and will be incorporated into the pollution prevention plan. 4. Upon signing the certification, the contractor or subcontractor becomes a co - permittee with the owner and other co -permittee contractors. In signing the plan, the authorized representative certifies that the information is true and assumes liability for the plan and its implementation. Note that Section 309 of the Clean Water Act provides for significant penalties where information is false or the permittee violates, either knowingly or negligently, the permit requirements. Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN CERTIFICATION (Owner certification) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 & 4 Phone 319-356-5010 Improvements Project Location Signature (address, lat./long., Sec: T -R) NE % Section 27, T79N, R6W City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction of supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co -permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co -permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Owner City of Iowa City Address 410 E. Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 Phone 319-356-5010 Representative Title Signature Date FEB 2 i 7012 `f:_TJ PM. Storrs Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements —111.0253 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 & 4 Address Improvements Project Location Title y (address, lat./long., Sec. -T -R) NE '% Section 27, T79N, R6W City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction of supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co -permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co -permittee, I understand that 1, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Sub -contractor Responsible for Address Phone F Representative Title y Signature Date Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 & 4 Address FEB 21 2012 Improvements Project Location Title (address, lat./long., Sec. -T -R) NE 1/< Section 27, T79N, R6W City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction of supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co -permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities' at the identified site. As a co -permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Sub -contractor Responsible for Address FEB 21 2012 Phone Representative V. Title Signature Date Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with NO authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 & 4 Address Improvements Project Location Title (address, lat./long., Sec: T -R) NE % Section 27, T79N, R6W City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co -permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co -permittee, I understand that 1, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Subcontractor Responsible for Address Phone Representative Title Signature Date FILED F� s 212012 t nk City erk Iowa city. Iowa Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements - 111.0253 CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION (for contractors with NO authority to modify SWPPP) Project Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 & 4 Address Im rovements Project Location Title (address, lat./long., Sec. -T -R) NE 1/4 Section 27, T79N, R6W City of Iowa City, Johnson County, Iowa I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co -permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co -permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. Contractor / Sub -contractor Responsible for Address Phone Representative Title Signature Date FILED FEB `L 1 2012 ,t Iowa Cay, Iowa Stonn Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements - 111.0253 2 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN APPENDIX A NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 FILED NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 F P4 21 M2 TABLE OF CONTENTS y-ci Clerk Iowa City, Iowa PART I. COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT A. PERMIT AREA................................................................................................................................1 B. ELIGIBILITY ....................................................................................................................................1 C. REQUIRING AN INDIVIDUAL PERMIT.............................................................................................1 D. AUTRoRImnm............................................................................................................................2 PART IL NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI) REQUIREMENTS.............................................................2 A. DEADLINES FOR FILING A NOTICE OF INTENT.............................................................................2 B. FAILURE To NOTIFY......................................................................................................................3 C. CONTENTS OF THE NOTICE OF INTENT........................................................................................3 D. WHERE TO SUBMIT........................................................................................................................4 E. RENOTIFICATION.......................................................................................................»..................4 F. TRANSFER OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT..........................................................................4 G. NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION ..................... _.............................................................................. 4 PART III. SPECIAL CONDITIONS, MANAGEMENT PRACTICES, AND OTHER NON- NUMERICLIMITATIONS.................................................................................................................5 A. PROMEMON ON NON -STORM WATER DISCIARGES..................................................................5 B. RELEASES IN EXCESS OF REPORTABLE QUANTITIES...................................................................5 PART IV. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS...............................................5 A. DEADLINES FOR POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN PREPARATION AND COMPLIANCE.................5 B. SIGNATURE AND PLAN REVIEW.....................................................................................................5 C. KEEPING PLANS CURRENT...........................................................................................................6 D. CONTENTS OF THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN....................................................................6 PART V. RETENTION OF RECORDS PART VI. STANDARD PERMIT CONDITIONS...........................................................................10 A. DUTY TO COMPLY........................................................................................................................10 B. CONTINUATION OF THE EXPIRED GENERAL PERMIT................................................................10 C. NEED TO HALT OR REDUCE ACTIVITY NOT A DEFENSE...........................................................10 D. DUTY TO MITIGATE.....................................................................................................................10 E. DUTY TO PROVIDE INFORMATION.............................................................................................. I1 F. OTHER INFORMATION................................................................................................................. 11 G. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................... I1 H. CERTIFICATION........................................................................................................................... 11 I. OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE LIABILITY.............................................................................. I1 J. PROPERTY RIGHTS....................................................................................................................... 11 K. SEVERABILITY............................................................................................................................. 12 L. TRANSFERS..................................................................................................................................12 M. PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE................................................................................ 12 N. INSPECTION AND ENTRY............................................................................................................. 12 O. PERMIT ACTIONS........................................................................................................................12 P. ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS.............................................................................................................. 12 PART VII. REOPENER CLAUSE....................................................................................................12 PART VIII. DEFINITIONS...............................................................................................................12 FEB 21 7012 a: 51 Pr1 si Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED wrB INDUsrRNL ACTiv TY FOR CMMUC ION AC WITEES EFFECTIVE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TD OCTOBER 1, 2007 PART I. COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT A. PERMrr AREA. This permit covers all areas of the State of Iowa. B. ELIGIBILITY. 1. A. Except for discharges identified under Parts I.B.2. and I.B.3., this permit may authorize the discharge of storm water associated with industrial activity from construction sites, (those sites or common plans of development or sale that will result in the disturbance of one or more acres total land area), (hereafter referred to as storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities) occurring after the effective date of this permit (including discharges occurring after the effective date of this permit where the construction activity was initiated before the effective date of this permit), including storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from areas that are dedicated to producing earthen materials, such as soils, sand and gravel, for use at a single construction site. a This permit may authorize storm water discharge from a construction site that is mixed with storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from sources other than construction activities provided that the storm water discharge from the industrial (non -construction) source is in compliance with the terms of a NPDES general permit, other than this general permit, or individual permit authorizing such discharge. In addition, the storm water other than from construction, shall be in compliance with Part rV.D.6. of this permit. 2. LIMITATIONS ON COVERAGE. The following storm water discharges associated with industrial activity for construction activities are not authorized by this permit: A. storm water discharges that are mixed with sources of non -storm water other than FEB 21 2012 discharges identified in Part III.A.2. of this t•si Pit permit; : r,c Iowa City, lae.. B. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity for construction activities which are covered by an existing individual NPDES permit or which are issued a permit in accordance with Part I.C. of this permit. Storm water discharges authorized by an existing individual NPDES permit will be eligible to apply for coverage under this general permit as the existing individual permit expires; and c. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity for construction activities that the Iowa Department of Natural Resources has determined to be or may reasonably be expected to be contributing to a violation of a water quality standard. 3. ExCLusloNs. The following "storm water discharges associated with industrial activity" from construction activities do not require a NPDES permit: discharges from agricultural and silvicultural activities including storm water runoff from orchards, cultivated crops, pastures, range lands, and forest lands, but not discharges from concentrated animal feeding operations as defined in 40 CFR 122.23, concentrated aquatic production facilities as defined in 40 CFR 122.24, discharges to aquaculture projects as defined in 40 CFR 122.25, and discharges from silvicultural point sources as defined in 40 CFR 122.27. C. REOUIRING AN INDIVIDUAL PERMIT 1. The Department may require any person authorized by this permit to apply for and obtain an individual NPDES permit. The Department may require any owner or operator authorized to discharge under this permit to apply for an individual NPDES permit only if the owner or operator has been notified in writing that a permit application is required. This notice shall include a brief %ILEI) FEB 21 7012 ,q:59 Pr Tc Iowa City, Iowa IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMr No. 2 STORM WATER DIscnARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIA. ACITVTr' FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES statement of the reasons for this decision, an application form, a statement setting a deadline for the owner or operator to file the application, and a statement that on the effective date of the individual NPDES permit, coverage under this general permit shall automatically terminate. If an owner or operator fails to submit an individual NPDES permit application required by the Department under this paragraph, coverage of this general permit automatically is terminated at the end of the day specified for submittal of the individual NPDES application. 2. Any person authorized to discharge under this permit may apply for an individual NPDES permit. In such cases, the discharger shall submit the following in accordance with the requirements of subrule (567)--64.3(4) in the Iowa Administrative Code: A. an individual application, using DNR Form 1 and EPA Form 2F, and, B. all applicable fees identified in rule (567)-64.16 in the Iowa Administrative Code. 3. When an individual NPDES permit is issued to a discharger covered under this general permit, the applicability of this general permit to the individual NPDES permittee is automatically terminated on the effective date of the individual NPDES permit. EFFECTIVE DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 I.B. of this permit to be authorized to discharge under this general permit. 2. Unless notified by the Department to the contrary, dischargers who submit a Notice of Intent (NOI) in accordance with the requirements of Part II of this permit are authorized to discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities under the terms and conditions of this permit on the date the completed Notice of Intent was received by the Department or the date construction is scheduled to begin as provided on Form 542- 1415 (Notice of Intent) whichever is later. Upon review of the Notice of Intent, the Department may deny coverage under this permit and require submittal of an application for an individual NPDES permit. PART H. NOTICE OF INTENT (NOI) REQUIREMENTS A. DEADLINES FOR FILING A NOTICE OF INTENT. 1. Except as provided in Parts U.A.2. and II.A.3. of this permit, Individuals who intend to obtain coverage for an existine storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities which expired on or after October 1, 2002, shall submit a complete Notice of Intent (NOI) in accordance with the requirements of Part H.C. on or before April 1, 2003. When an individual NPDES permit is denied to a discharger otherwise subject to this 2. permit, the applicability of this permit to the individual NPDES permittee is automatically terminated on the date of such denial, unless otherwise specified by the Department. D. AuTmRiwnom For storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities where construction begins after October 1, 1992, the NOI requirements specified in Part H.C. of this permit shall be submitted to the Department at least 24 hours prior to the start of construction. 1. A discharger must submit a Notice of Intent 3. DEFERMENTS. The application deadline and (NOI) in accordance with the requirements of requirements for storm water discharge Part II of this permit in order for storm water associated with industrial activity for discharge associated with industrial activity construction activities in which the discharge for construction activities pursuant to Part is owned or operated by a municipality IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL. RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL. PERMfr No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES serving a population less than 100,000 have been waived until March 10, 2003. B. FAILURE To NOTIFY. Dischargers who fail to notify the Department of their intent to be covered, and discharge pollutants to water of the United States within Iowa, without an NPDES permit, are in violation of the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa. C. CONTENTS OF THE NOTICE OF INTENT. A complete Notice of Intent shall include the items described in Parts II.C.1., II.C.2., and II.C.3. of this permit. 1. A completed Notice of Intent (NOI) form, DNR Form 542-1415, signed in accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit. The information on the form shall include the following: A. Name, address, and location of the construction site for which this notification is submitted. The location should be provided as the 1/4 section, township, range, and the county in which the storm water discharge is located. B. The owner's name, address, telephone number, and status (federal, state, private, public or other entity). C. The name, address and telephone number of any operator (contractor) that has been identified as having a role in the storm water pollution prevention plan for the site required under Part IV.D.7. of this permit. Contractors (operators) identified after the submittal of the completed Notice of Intent shall be identified in the pollution prevention plan. D. The type of discharge (new or existing as related to October 1, 1992); whether or not the discharge is to a municipal separate storm sewer system; the date the discharge is to commence; the permit status of the discharge; and, the name of the receiving waters. EFFECTIVE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 E. An indication if any existing quantitative data is available describing the FER 212 Wentration of pollutants in storm water J/: S9 CM discharges and a summary of available .' existing data. (Existing data should not be included as part of the NOI, it should retained as part of the Pollution Prevention Plan). F. A brief description of the project; an estimated timetable for major activities; and, an estimate of the number of acres of the site on which soil will be disturbed. G. A certification that compliance with G.(1) through G.(4). are met: G.(1). the pollution prevention plan has been developed before this Notice of Intent is submitted to the Department; G.(2). the pollution prevention plan will be implemented on October 1, 1992 for any existing storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities. For a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities that commence after October 1, 1992, the pollution prevention plan shall be implemented with the start of construction activities; G.(3). this Notice of Intent will be included and incorporated into the pollution prevention plan and will be updated as required; and, G.(4). the storm water pollution prevention plan provides compliance with section 467A.64 of the Code of Iowa and local sediment and erosion plans and are consistent with the requirements of Part IV of this general permit. 2. APPLICABLE FEES. The applicable fees specified in Iowa Administrative Code 567 -- 64.16(455B). 3. PUBuc NOTIFICATION. A demonstration that the public notice specified in Iowa Administrative Code 567--64.6(1)"c"(2) was published at least one day, in at least two IowA DEPARTMENT of NATURAL REsouacEs NPDES GENERAL PERMrr No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL. ACTIVITY FOR CONS RUCDON AC iVInEs FEB 21 7012 IpKa iSl}'. �`w l newspapers with the largest circulation in the area in which the facility is located or the activity will occur. D. WHERE TO SUBMIT. Facilities which discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities must submit items described in Pans D.C.I., 2., and 3. of this permit to the Department at the following address: Stone Water Coordinator Iowa Department of Natural Resources Henry A. Wallace Building 502 E. 9th St. Des Moines, IA 50319-0034 E. RENOTIFICATION. Within 180 days after this general permit expires, the permittee is required to resubmit a completed Notice of Intent with the Department for coverage under the new general permit. If a general permit has not been reissued within 180 days after expiration, the storm water discharger must apply for an individual NPDES permit according to the procedures identified in Iowa Administrative Code 567-64.3(4). F. TRANSFER OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT. For storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities where the ownership changes, the Department must be notified of the title transfer within 30 days. If a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities is covered by this general permit, the new owner(s) shall be subject to all terns and conditions of this general permit. A copy of the notice Of transfer that was sent to the Department shall be included in the pollution prevention plan. For construction activity which is part of a larger common plan of development such as a housing or commercial development project, if a pemlittee transfers ownership of all or any part of property subject to this permit, both the permittee and transferee shall be responsible for compliance with the provisions of this permit for that portion of the project which has been transferred EFFEcnvE DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 To OCMBER 1, 2007 including when the transferred property is less than five acres in area. If the new owner(s) agree in writing to be solely responsible for compliance with the provisions of this permit for the property which has been transferred, then the existing permittee(s) shall be relieved of responsibility for compliance with this permit for the transferred property, from and after the date the Department receives written notice of transfer of responsibility. A copy of the notice of transfer of responsibility shall be included in the pollution prevention plan. G. NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION. 1. Within 30 days after final stabilization at a construction site (as defined in Part VIII of this permit), the operator or owner of the facility shall submit a Notice of Discontinuation to the Department. 2. The Notice of Discontinuation shall include the following information: A. the name of the owner/operator to which the permit was issued; B. the general permit number and permit authorization number; C. the date the construction site reached final stabilization; and, D. the following certification signed in accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit: "I certify under penalty of law that disturbed soils at the identified facility have been finally stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time. I understand that by submitting this Notice of Discontinuation, that I am no longer authorized to discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities by Iowa Department of Natural Resources General NPDES Permit No. 2. and that discharging pollutants from storm water associated with industrial activity to waters of the United States is unlawful IOWA DEPARTMENr OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERAnT No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACI7VMFS under the Clean Water Act where the discharge is not authorized by a NPDES permit." PART III. SPECIAL CONDITIONS, MANAGEMENT PRACTICES, AND OTHER NON -NUMERIC LIMITATIONS A. PROHIBITION ON NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES. 1. i4 B. All discharges authorized by this permit shall be composed entirely of storm water except for non -storm discharges listed in Part 11I.A.2. Discharges from fire fighting activities; fire hydrant flushings; waters used to wash vehicles in accordance with Part IV.D.2.C.(2).; potable water sources including waterline flushings; irrigation drainage; routine external building washdown which does not use detergents; pavement washwaters where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred (unless all spilled material has been removed) and where detergents are not used; air conditioning condensate; springs; and foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with process materials such as solvents; may be authorized by this permit provided the non -storm water component of the discharge is in compliance with Part W.D.5. of this permit. RELEASES IN EXCESS OF REPORTABLE QUANTITIES. Any owner or operator identified in the pollution prevention plan is subject to the spill notification requirements as specified in 455B.386 of the Iowa Code. Iowa law requires that as soon as possible but not more than six hours after the onset of a "hazardous condition" the Department and local sheriffs office or the office of the sheriff of the affected county be notified. The storm water pollution prevention plan described in Part IV of this permit must be modified within 14 calendar days of knowledge of the release to provide a EFFECTIVE DATE - OCTOBER I, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 HLEP description of the release and the FEB 21 204umstances leading to the release and to +f :SR PAq identify and provide for the implementation City Clerk Town Cay, I,X steps to prevent the reoccurrence of such releases and to respond to such releases. PART IV. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS A storm water pollution prevention plan shall be developed for each construction site covered by this permit. Storm water pollution prevention plans shall be prepared in accordance with good engineering practices. The plan shall identify potential sources of pollution which may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of the storm water discharge from the construction activities. In addition, the plan shall describe and ensure the implementation of practices which will be used to reduce the pollutants in stone water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities at the construction site and to assure compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. Facilities must implement the provisions of the storm water pollution prevention plan required under this part as a condition of this permit. A. DEADLINES FOR POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN PREPARATION AND COMPLIANCE. 1. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN PREPARATION DEADLINE. The pollution prevention plan shall be completed prior to the submittal of an NOI to the Department to be covered under this permit and shall be updated as appropriate. 2. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN COMPLIANCE DEADLINE. The pollution prevention plan shall provide for compliance with the terms and schedule of the plan with the initiation of construction activities. B. SIGNATURE AND PLAN REVIEW. 1. The plan shall be signed in accordance with Part VI.G., and be retained at the construction site from the date construction activities begin to the date of final stabilization. FIIS E L i IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES FEB 21 7012 y , 51 PIA. (:it}Gcrk Iowa City, tnwa 2. The permittee shall make plans available to the Department upon request, or in the case of a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities which discharge through a large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system with an NPDES permit, to the municipal operator of the system. 3. The Department may notify the permittee at any time that the plan does not meet one or more of the minimum requirements of this Par. After such notification from the Department, the permittee shall make changes to the plan and shall submit to the Department a written certification that the requested changes have been made. Unless otherwise provided by the Department, the permittee shall have 7 days after such notification to make the necessary changes. 4. All storm water pollution prevention plans received by the Department from the permittee are considered reports that shall be available to the public under Section 308(b) of the CWA and Chapter 22 of the Code of Iowa. However, the permittee may claim any portion of a storm water pollution plan as confidential in accordance with Chapter 22 of the Code of Iowa and Iowa Administrative Code (561)-2.5. C. KEEPING PLANS CURRENT. The permittee shall amend the plan whenever there is a change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance, which has a significant effect on the potential for the discharge of pollutants to the waters of the United States and which has not been addressed in the plan or if the storm water pollution prevention plan proves to be ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants from sources identified in Pan IV.D.2. of this permit, or in otherwise achieving the general objectives of controlling pollutants in storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities. In addition, the pollution prevention plan shall be updated to: include contractors identified after the submittal of the Notice of Intent as CO - permittees, described in Pan IV.D.7. of this EFFECTIVE DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 permit; identify any change in ownership or transference of the permit and permit responsibilities; or, if required, by the occurrence of a hazardous condition (as defined in Pan VIII of this permit). Amendments to the plan may be reviewed by the Department of Natural Resources in the same manner as Pan IV.13.2. D. CONTENTS OF THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN. The storm water pollution prevention plan shall include the following items: 1. SITE DESCRIPTION. Each plan shall, provide a description of the following: A. a description of the nature of the construction activity; E. estimates of the total area of the site and the area of the site that is expected to be disturbed by excavation, grading, or other activities; C. an estimate of the runoff coefficient of the site after construction activities are completed and existing data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; D. a site map indicating drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities, areas of soil disturbance, the location of major structural and nonstructural controls identified in the plan, the location of areas where stabilization practices are expected to occur, surface waters (including wetlands), and locations where storm water is discharged to a surface water; and E. the name of the receiving water(s) and the ultimate receiving water(s). 2. CONTROLS. Each plan shall include a description of appropriate controls that will be implemented at the construction site. The plan will clearly describe the intended sequence of major activities and for each activity, the appropriate control measures and the timing during the construction process IOWA DEPARTMENTOFNATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMrr No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACITVrrY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFEcnVE DATE -OcroBER 1, 2002 To OcroBER 1, 2007 that the measures will be implemented. (For protection, rock outlet protection, reinforced example, perimeter controls for one portion soil retaining systems, gabions, and of the site will be installed after the clearing temporary or permanent sediment basins. and grubbing necessary for installation of the Structural practices should be placed on measure, but before the clearing and grubbing FILE rWland soils to the degree attainable. The for the remaining portions of the site. installation of these devices may be subject to Perimeter controls will be actively maintained FEB 2 1 2Jfgtion 404 of the CWA. until final stabilization of those portions of Y: 5q PM the site upward of the perimeter control. City (�, _' A.(2).(a). For common drainage locations Iowa Cirythat Temporary perimeter controls will be serve an area with more than 10 disturbed removed after final stabilization). The acres at one time, a temporary (or permanent) description of controls shall address the sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of following minimum components: storage per acre drained, or equivalent control measures, shall be provided where attainable A. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS. until final stabilization of the site. The 3,600 cubic feet of storage area per acre drained A.(1). STABILIZATION PRACTICES. A does not apply to flows from offsite areas and description of temporary and permanent flows from onsite areas that are either stabilization practices, including site-specific undisturbed or have undergone final scheduling of the implementation of the stabilization where such flows are diverted practices. Site plans should ensure that around the sediment basin. For drainage existing vegetation is preserved where locations which serve more than 10 disturbed attainable and that disturbed areas are acres at one time and where a temporary stabilized. Stabilization practices may sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of include: temporary seeding, permanent storage per acre drained, or equivalent control seeding, mulching, geotextiles, sod is not attainable, sediment traps, silt fences, or stabilization, vegetative buffer strips, equivalent sediment controls are required for protection of trees, preservation of mature all sideslope and downslope boundaries of vegetation, and other appropriate measures. the construction area. Except as precluded by snow cover, stabilization measures shall be initiated on all A.(2).(b). For drainage locations serving disturbed areas as soon as practical but in no 10 or less acres, sediment traps, silt fences or case where construction activity will not equivalent sediment controls are required for occur for a period of 21 or more calendar all sideslope and downslope boundaries of days later than the 14th day after no the construction area or a sediment basin construction activity has occurred on such providing storage for 3,600 cubic feet of area. Where the initiation of stabilization storage per acre drained. measures by the 14th day after no construction activity occurs is precluded by B. STORM WATER MANAGEMENT. A snow cover, then stabilization measures shall description of measures that will be installed be initiated as soon as practicable thereafter. during construction to control pollutants in storm water discharges that will occur after A.(2). STRucruRAL PRACTICES. A construction operations have been completed. description of structural practices t0 the The installation of these devices may be degree attainable, to divert flows from subject to Section 404 of the CWA. This exposed soils, store flows or otherwise limit permit only addresses the installation of runoff from exposed areas of the site. Such storm water management measures, and not practices may include silt fences, earth dikes, the ultimate operation and maintenance of brush barriers, drainage swales, sediment such structures after the construction traps, check dams, subsurface drains, pipe activities have been completed and the site slope drains, level spreaders, storm drain inlet has undergone final stabilization. PemTittees T T IOWA DEPARTME rr OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GviERAL PERMIT No. 2 FILE] ILEI_ STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES FEB 21 2n12 Lf: 99 PM City Card Iowa City, 10w4 are only responsible for the installation and maintenance of storm water management measures prior to final stabilization of the site, and are not responsible for maintenance after storm water discharges associated with industrial activity have been eliminated from the site. a(1). Such practices may include: storm water detention structures (including wet ponds); storm water retention structures; flow attenuation by use of open vegetated swales and natural depressions; and infiltration of runoff onsite; and sequential systems (which combine several practices). A goal of 80 percent removal of total suspended solids from those flows which exceed predevelopment levels should be used in designing and installing storm water management controls (where practicable). Where this goal is not met, the permittee shall provide justification for rejecting each practice based on site conditions. B.(2). Velocity dissipation devices shall be placed at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel as necessary to provide a non-erosive velocity flow from the structure to a water course so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected (e.g. maintenance of hydrologic conditions, present prior to the initiation of construction activities).. C. OTHER CONTROLS. C.(1). WASTE DISPOSAL. All wastes composed of building materials must be removed from the site for disposal in permitted disposal facilities. No building material wastes or unused building materials shall be buried, dumped, or discharged at the site. c.(2). Off-site vehicle tracking of sediments shall be minimized. C.(3). The plan shall ensure and demonstrate compliance with applicable State EFFECTWE DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 To Ocroam 1, 2007 or local waste disposal, sanitary sewer or septic system regulations. D. APPROVED STATE OR LOCAL PLANS. Facilities which discharge storm water associated with industrial activity for construction activities must include in their storm water pollution prevention plan procedures and requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or storm water management plans approved by State or local officials. Applicable requirements specified in sediment and erosion plans, site permits or storm water management plans approved by State or local officials that are applicable to protecting surface water resources are, upon submittal of an NOI to be authorized to discharge under this permit, incorporated by reference and are enforceable under this permit even if they are not specifically included in a storm water pollution prevention plan required under this permit. Operators of facilities seeking alternative permit requirements shall submit an individual permit application in accordance with Part I.C.2. of this permit along with a description of why requirements in approved State or local plans should not be applicable as a condition of an NPDES permit. 3. MAu rENANcE. A description of procedures to maintain in good and effective operating conditions vegetation, erosion and sediment control measures and other protective measures identified in the site plan. 4. INsPECrim Qualified personnel (provided by the discharger) shall inspect disturbed areas of the construction site that have not been finally stabilized at least once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm that is 0.5 inches or greater. A. Disturbed areas and areas used for storage of materials that are exposed to precipitation shall be inspected for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. Erosion and sediment control measures identified in the plan shall IOWA DEPARTMENT of NATURAL REsoORees NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIR TY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACHVI TES be observed to ensure that they are operating correctly. Where discharge locations or points are accessible, they shall be inspected to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. Locations where vehicles enter or exit the site shall be inspected for evidence of offsite sediment tracking. B. Based on the results of the inspection, the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the plan in accordance with paragraph IV.D.1. of this permit and pollution prevention measures identified in the plan in accordance with paragraph N.M. of this permit shall be revised as appropriate as soon as practicable after such inspection. Such modifications shall provide for timely implementation of any changes to the plan within 7 calendar days following the inspection. C. A report summarizing the scope of the inspection, name(s) and qualifications of personnel making the inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating to the implementation of the storm water pollution prevention plan, and actions taken in accordance with paragraph IV.D.4.B. of the permit shall be made and retained as part of the storm water pollution prevention plan for at least three years or until project termination. The report shall be signed in accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit. 5. NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES. Except for flows from fire fighting activities, sources of non -storm water listed in Part IH.A.2. of this permit that are combined with storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from construction activities must be identified in the plan. The plan shall identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for the non - storm water component(s) of the discharge. 6. ADDITIONAL REOUIREMENTs FOR STORM WATER DISCHARGE FROM INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITIES OTHER THAN CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING DEDICATED ASPHALT PLANTS. AND DEDICATED CEMENT PLANTS. This EFFECTIVE DATE - OCTOBER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 permit may only authorize a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from a construction site that is mixed with a storm water discharge from an industrial source other than construction, where: A. the industrial source other than construction is located on the same site as the construction activity; FILER storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the areas of the site FEB 21 2DYpere construction activities are occurring are Lk-% PM in compliance with the terms of this permit; City Clerk and, Iowa City, low, C. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the areas of the site where industrial activity other than construction are occurring (including storm water discharges from dedicated asphalt plants and dedicated cement plants) are in compliance with the terms and conditions, including applicable NOI or application requirements, of a different NPDES general permit or individual permit authorizing such discharges. 7. CONTRACTORS. A. The storm water pollution prevention plan must clearly identify for each measure in the plan, the contractor(s) and/or subcontractor(s) that will implement the measure. All contractors and subcontractors identified in the plan must sign a copy of the certification statement in Part IV.D.7.B. of this permit in accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit. Upon signing the certification, the contractor or sub -contractor is a co -permittee with the owner and other co -permittee contractors. All certifications must be included in the storm water pollution prevention plan. R. CERTIFICATION STATEMENT. All contractors and subcontractors identified in a storm water pollution prevention plan in accordance with Part IV.D.7.A. of this permit shall sign a copy of the following certification statement before conducting any FEB 21 7012 �t; 5cj fM IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUS171AL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES professional service at the site identified in the storm water pollution prevention plan: "I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further, by my signature, I understand that I am becoming a co -permittee, along with the owner(s) and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications, to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co -permittee, I understand that I, and my company, are legally required under the Clean Water Act and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit." The certification must include the name and title of the person providing the signature; the name, address and telephone number of the contracting firm; the address (or other identifying description) of the site; and the date the certification is made. PART V. RETENTION OF RECORDS A. The permittee shall retain copies of storm water pollution prevention plans and all reports required by this permit, and records of all data used to complete the Notice of Intent to be covered by this permit, for a period of at least three years from the date that the site is finally stabilized. B. If there is a construction trailer, shed or other covered structure located on the property the permittee shall retain a copy of the storm water pollution prevention plan required by this permit at the construction site from the date of project initiation to the date of final 10 EFFECTIVE DATE - OCrORER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 stabilization. If there is no construction trailer, shed or other covered structure located on the property, the permittee shall retain a copy of the plan at a readily available alternative site approved by the Department and provide it for inspection upon request. If the plan is maintained at an off-site location such as a corporate office, it shall be provided for inspection no later than two business days after being requested. C. ADDRESSES. All written correspondence to the Department should be sent to the following address: Storm Water Coordinator Iowa Department of Natural Resources Henry A. Wallace Building 502 E. 9th St. Des Moines, IA 50319-0034 PART VI. STANDARD PERMIT CONDITIONS A. DImr TO COMPLY. 1. The permittee must comply with all conditions of this permit. Any permit noncompliance constitutes a violation of the Code of Iowa and the Clean Water Act and is grounds for enforcement action; for termination of coverage under this general permit; or, for denial of a request for coverage under a reissued general permit. 2. Tolac POLLUTANTS. The permittee shall comply with effluent standards or prohibitions established under section 307(a) of the Clean Water Act (CWA) for toxic pollutants within the time provided in the regulations that establish these standards or prohibitions, even if this permit has not yet been modified to incorporate the requirement. B. CONTINUATION OF THE EXPIRED GENERAL PERMIT. This permit expires on October 1, 2007. An expired general permit continues in force for 180 days after the expiration date. Only those facilities authorized to discharge under the expiring general permit are covered IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL, RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PER No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION AC WIT1E5 EFFECTIVE DATE -OCTOBER 1, 2002 TO OCTOBER 1, 2007 by the 180 -day continuation of the expired general permit. C. NEED TO HALT OR REDUCE ACTIVITY NOT A DEFENSE. It shall not be a defense for a permittee in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity in order to maintain compliance with the conditions of this permit. D. DurY TO MITIGATE. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit which has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. E. Duff TO PROVIDE INFORMATION. The I -11L E1 j permittee shall furnish to the Department, within a reasonable time, any information FEB 21 Z0) onstruction as identified in 40 CFR which the Department may request to 22.26(b)(14)(x), either the owner of the site y:54 PHt determine compliance with this permit. The cnc c';z;,, or the general contractor. permittee shall also furnish to the Department upon request copies of records required to be kept by this permit. a. Corporations. In the case of corporations, a principal executive officer of at least the level of vice-president. b. Partnerships. In the case off a partnership, a general partner. c. Sole proprietorships. In the case of a sole proprietorship, the proprietor. d. Public facilities. In the case of a municipal, state, or other public facility, by either the principal executive officer, or the ranking elected official. e. Storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from construction activity. In the case of a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity from F. OTHER INFORMATION. When the permittee becomes aware that he or she failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in the Notice of Intent or in any other report to the Department, he or she shall promptly submit such facts or information. G. SIGNATORY REountEMENTS. All Notices of Intent, storm water pollution prevention plans, reports, certifications or information either submitted to the Department or the operator of a large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system, or that this permit requires be maintained by the permittee, shall be signed in accordance with Wile 567-64.3(8) of the Iowa Administrative Code as follows: 64.3(8) Identity of signatories of operation permit applications. The person who signs the application for an operation permit shall be: 11 The person who signs NPDES reports shall be the same, except that in the case of a corporation or a public body, monitoring reports required under the terns of the permit may be submitted by the person who is responsible for the overall operation of the facility from which the discharge originated. H. CERTIFICATION. Any person signing documents under paragraph VI.G. shall make the following certification: "I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false FILEDIOWA DEPARITAENr OF NAMRAL RESoURcrs NPDES GENERAL PERMrr No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCnON ACTIVITIES FEB 21 9012 EFFECTIVE DATE - OCroHER 1, 2002 To OCroaER 1, 2007 �q Prk �Ciry Clerk Iowa City, lows information, including the possibility of fine to achieve compliance with the conditions or and imprisonment for knowing violations." this permit. 1. OIL AND _HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE LIABILITY. Nothing in this permit shall be construed to preclude the institution of any legal action or relieve the permittee from any responsibilities, liabilities, or penalties to which the permittee is or may be subject under section 311 of the Clean Water Act. J. PROPERTY RIGHTS. The issuance of this permit does not convey any property rights of any sort, nor any exclusive privileges, nor does it authorize any injury to private property nor any invasion of personal rights, nor any infringement of Federal, State or local laws or regulations. K. SEVERABIIITY. The provisions of this permit are severable, and if any provision of this permit, or the application of any provision of this permit to any circumstance, is held invalid, the application of such provision to other circumstances, and the remainder of this permit shall not be affected thereby. L. TRANSFERS. This permit is not transferable to any person except after notice to the Department. The Department may require the discharger to apply for and obtain an individual NPDES permit as stated in Part I.C. M. PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control (and related appurtenances) which are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit and with the requirements of storm water pollution prevention plans. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures. Proper operation and maintenance requires the operation of backup or auxiliary facilities or similar systems, installed by a permittee only when necessary 12 N. INSPECTION AND ENTRY. The permittee shall allow the Department or an authorized representative of EPA, the State, or, in the case of a facility which discharges through a municipal separate storm sewer, an authorized representative of the municipal operator or the separate storm sewer receiving the discharge, upon the presentation of credentials and other documents as may be required by law, to: 1. Enter upon the permittee's premises where a regulated facility or activity is located or conducted or where records must be kept under the conditions of this permit; 2. Have access to and copy at reasonable times, any records that must be kept under the conditions of this permit; and, 3. Inspect at reasonable tunes any facilities or equipment (including monitoring and control equipment). O. PERMIT ACTIONS. Coverage under this permit may be terminated for cause. The filing of a request by the permittee for a permit discontinuance, or a notification of planned changes or anticipated noncompliance does not stay any permit condition. P. ENVIRONMENTAL LAws. No condition of this permit shall release the permittee from any responsibility or requirements under other environmental statutes or regulations. PART VII. REOPENER CLAUSE If there is evidence indicating potential or realized impacts or water quality due to any storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities covered by this permit, the owner or operator of such discharge may be required to obtain individual permit in accordance with Part LC of this permit. IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PFRMr No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 �TLEL FEB 21 2012 "Hazardous substance" means any PART VIII. DEFINITIONS 'Y.5^; PM substance or mixture of substances that presents a , danger to the public health or safety and includes, "Best Management Practices" ('BMPs") means schedules of activities, prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the pollution of waters of the United States. BMPs also include treatment requirements, operating procedures, and practices to control plant site runoff, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal, or drainage from raw material storage. "CWA" or "Clean Water Act" means the Federal Water Pollution Control Act. "Dedicated portable asphalt plant" means a portable asphalt plant that is located on or contiguous to a construction site and that provides asphalt only to the construction site that the plant is located on or adjacent to. "Dedicated portable concrete plant" means a portable concrete plant that is located on or contiguous to a construction site and that provides concrete only to the construction site that the plant is located on or adjacent to. "Dedicated sand or gravel operation" means an operation that produces sand and/or gravel for a single construction project. "Department"means the Iowa Department of Natural Resources. "Final Stabilization" means that all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed, and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% for the area has been established or equivalent stabilization measures have been employed. "Hazardous condition" means any situation involving the actual, imminent, or probable spillage, leakage, or release of a hazardous substance on to the land, into a water of the state, or into the atmosphere, which creates an immediate or potential danger to the public health or safety or to the environment. 455B.381(2) 1991. Code of lows 13 but in not limited to, a substance that is toxic, corrosive, or flammable, or that is an irritant or that, in confinement, generates pressure through decomposition, heat, or other means. The following are examples of substances which, in sufficient quantity may be hazardous: acids; alkalis; explosives; fertilizers; heavy metals such as chromium, arsenic, mercury, lead and cadmium; industrial chemicals; paint thinners; paints; pesticides; petroleum products; poisons, radioactive materials; sludges; and organic solvents. "Hazardous substances" may include any hazardous waste identified or listed by the administrator of the United State Environmental Protection Agency under the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, or any toxic pollutant listed under section 307 of the federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended to January 1, 1977, or any hazardous substance designated under section 311 of the federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended to January 1, 1977, or any hazardous material designated by the secretary of transportation under the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act (49 CFR 172.101). 455B.381(l), 1991 Code of Iowa "Large and Medium Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System" means all municipal separate storm sewers that are either: (i.) located in an incorporated place with a population of 100,000 or more as determined by the latest Decennial Census by the Bureau of Census; or (ii.) located in the counties with unincorporated urbanized populations of 100,000 or more, except municipal separate storm sewers that are located in the incorporated places, townships or towns within such counties; or (iii.) owned or operated by a municipality other than those described in paragraph (i) or (ii) and that are designated by the Director as part of the large or medium municipal separate storm sewer system. ILE- i' FEB ��� IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERWr No.2 t STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES I-tc1 -CsCPAk EFFEcnvE DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 ityIowa City, lova "Municipality" means a city, town, borough, county, parish, district, association, or other public body created by or under State law. "NOP' means Notice of Intent to be covered by this permit (see Part II of this permit.) "Runoff coefficient" means the fraction of total rainfall that will appear at the conveyance as runoff. "Storm Water" means storm water runoff, snow melt runoff, and surface runoff and drainage. "Storm water discharge associated with industrial activity" means the discharge from any conveyance which is used for collecting and conveying storm water and which is directly related to manufacturing, processing or raw materials storage areas at an industrial plant. The term does not include discharges from facilities or activities excluded from the NPDES program under 40 CFR part 122. For the categories of industries identified in paragraphs (i) through (x) of this definition, the term includes, but is not limited to, storm water discharges from industrial plant yards; immediate access roads and rail lines used or traveled by carvers of mw materials, manufactured products, waste material, or by-products used or created by the facility; material handling sites; refuse sites; sites used for the application or disposal of process waste waters (as defined at 40 CFR part 401); sites used for the storage and maintenance of material handling equipment; sites used for residual treatment, storage, or disposal; shipping and receiving areas; manufacturing buildings; storage areas (including tank farms) for raw materials, and intermediate and finished products; and areas where industrial activity has taken place in the past and significant materials remain and are exposed to storm water. For the categories of industries identified in paragraph (xi) of this definition, the term includes only storm water discharges from all the areas (except access roads and rail lines) that are listed in the previous sentence where material handling equipment or activities, raw materials, intermediate products, final products, waste materials, by- products, or industrial machinery are exposed to storm water. For the purposes of this paragraph, material handling activities include the storage, 14 loading and unloading, transportation, or conveyance of any raw material, intermediate product, finished product, by-product, or waste product. The term excludes areas located on plant lands separate from the plant's industrial activities, such as office buildings and accompanying parking lots as long as the drainage from the excluded areas is not mixed with storm water drained from the above described areas. Industrial facilities (including industrial facilities that are Federally, State, or municipally owned or operated that meet the description of the facilities listed in these paragraphs (i) -(xi) of the definition) include those facilities designated under 40 CFR 122.26(a)(1)(v). The following categories of facilities are considered to be engaging in "industrial activity" for purposes of this definition; (I) Facilities subject to storm water effluent limitations guidelines, new source performance standards, or toxic pollutant effluent standards under 40 CFR Subchapter N (except facilities with toxic pollutant effluent standards which are exempted under category (m) of this definition); (ir) Facilities classified as Standard Industrial Classifications 24 (except 2434), 26 (except 265 and 267), 28 (except 283 and 285), 29, 311, 32 (except 323), 33, 3441, 373; (M). Facilities classified as Standard Industrial Classifications 10 through 14 (mineral industry) including active or inactive mining operations (except for areas of coal mining operations no longer meeting the definition of a reclamation area under 40 CFR 434.11(1) because the performance bond issued to the facility by the appropriate SMCRA authority has been released, or except for areas of non -coal mining operations which have been released from applicable State or Federal reclamation requirements after December 17, 1990) and oil and gas exploration, production, processing, or treatment operations, or transmission facilities that discharge storm water contaminated by contact with or that has come into contact with, any overburden, raw material, intermediate products, finished products, byproducts or waste products located on the site of such operations; (inactive mining operations are mining sites that are not being actively mined, but which have an identifiable owner/operator; inactive mining sites do not include IOWA DFYARTMENr OF NATDRAL REsouRcEs NPDES GENERAL PERhvr No. 2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL. ACrMTY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES sites where mining claims are being maintained prior to disturbances associated with the extraction, beneficiation, or processing of mined materials, nor sites where minimal activities are undertaken for the sole purpose of maintaining a mining claim); (iv) Hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal facilities, including those that are operating under interim status or a permit under Subtitle C of RCRA; (v) Landfills, land application sites, and open dumps that receive or have received any industrial wastes (waste that is received from any of the facilities described under this subsection) including those that are subject to regulation under Subtitle D of RCRA; (w) facilities involved in the recycling of materials, including metal scrap yards, battery reclaimers, salvage yards, and automobile junkyards, including but limited to those classified as Standard Industrial Classification 5015 and 5093; (vii) Steam electric power generating facilities, including coal handling sites; (viii) Transportation facilities classified as Standard Industrial Classifications 40, 41, 42 (except 4221-4225), 43, 44, 45 and 5171 which have vehicle maintenance shops, equipment cleaning operations, or airport deicing operations. Only those portions of the facility that are either involved in vehicle maintenance (including vehicle rehabilitation, mechanical repairs, painting, fueling, and lubrication), equipment cleaning operations, airport deicing operations, or which are otherwise identified under paragraphs (i) -(vii) or (ix) -(xi) of this definition are associated with industrial activity; (ix) Treatment works treating domestic sewage or any other sewage sludge or wastewater treatment device or system, used in the storage treatment, recycling, and reclamation of municipal or domestic sewage, including land dedicated to the disposal of sewage sludge that are located within the confines of the facility, with a design flow of 1.0 mgd or more, or required to have an approved pretreatment program under 40 CFR 403. Not included are farm lands, domestic gardens or lands used for sludge management where sludge is 15 EFFEcTm DATE- OCTOBER 1, 2002 To OCTOBER 1, 2007 beneficially reused and which are not physically located in the confines of the facility, or areas that are in compliance with 40 CFR 503; (x) Construction activity including clearing, grading and excavation activities except: operations that result in the disturbance of less than one acre of total land area which are not part of a larger common plan of development or sale; (xi) Facilities under Standard Industrial Classifications 20, 21, 22, 23, 2434, 25, 265, 267, 27, 283, 285, 30, 31 (except 311), 323, 34 (except 3441), 35, 36, 37 (except 373), 38, 39, 42214225, (and which are not otherwise included within categories (ii) -(x)); "Storm water discharge associated with industrial activityfor construction activities" means activities that fall under subparagraph (x) in the definition of storm water discharge associated with industrial activity. FILED 11-1-121 sq PM X12 !ow Try Clerk d chy, Iowa STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN ►O . CHECKLISTS r/ rl 12012 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 8 4 Improvements — 111.0253 Appendix A EPA BASELINE CONSTRUCTION GENERAL PERMIT REQUIREMENTS PRE - CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans 1. A site description, including: C The nature of the activity? ❑ Intended sequence of major construction activities ❑ The total area of the site ❑ The area of the site that is expected to undergo excavation O The runoff coefficient of the site after construction is complete ❑ Existing soil or storm water data ❑ A site map with: ❑ Drainage patterns ❑ Approximate slopes after major grading ❑ Area of soil disturbance ❑ Outline of areas which won't be disturbed ❑ Location of major structural and non-structural controls �11 2 1 %QRZ ❑ Areas where stabilization practices are expected to occur ' Sy Par ❑ Surface waters ❑ Storm water discharge locations ❑ The name of the receiving water(s) 2. A description of controls: 2.1 Erosion and sediment controls, including: ❑ Stabilization practices for all areas disturbed by construction ❑ Structural practices for all drainage/discharge locations 2.2 Storm water management controls, including: ❑ Measures used to control pollutants occurring in storm water discharges after construction activities are complete. ❑ Velocity dissipation devices to provide nonerosive flow conditions from the discharge point along the length of any outfall channel. 2.3 Other controls including: ❑ Waste disposal practices which prevent discharge of solia materials to waters of the U.S.? ❑ Measures to minimize offsite tracking of sediments by construction vehicles ❑ Measures to ensure compliance with State or local waste disposal, sanitary sewer, or septic system regulations 2.4 ❑ Description of the timing during the construction when measures will be implemented. 3. ❑ Are State or local requirements incorporated into the plans? 4. ❑ Are maintenance procedures for control measures identified in the plan? 5. ❑ Identification of allowable non -storm water discharges and pollution prevention measures. 6. ❑ Contractor certification. 7. ❑ Plan certification. September 1992 A-1 Appendix A EPA BASELINE CONSTRUCTION GENERAL PERMIT CHECKLIST Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Construction/implementation Checklist Maintain Records of Construction Activities, including: ❑ Dates when major grading activities occur ❑ Dates when construction activities temporarily cease on a portion of the site ❑ Dates when construction activities permanently cease on a portion of the site ❑ Dates when stabilization measures are initiated on the site 2. Prepare Inspection reports summarizing: ❑ Name of inspector ❑ Qualifications of inspector ❑ Measures/areas inspected ❑ Observed conditions ❑ Changes necessary to the SWPPP 3. Report Releases of Reportable Quantities of Oil or Hazardous Materials lif they occur): ❑ Notify National Response Center 800/424-8802 immediately ❑ Notify permitting authority in writing within 14 days ❑ Modify the pollution prevention plan to include: - the date of release - circumstances leading to the release - steps taken to prevent reoccurrence of the release 4. Modify Pollution Prevention Plan as necessary to: ❑ Comply with minimum permit requirements when notified by EPA that the plan does not comply ❑ Address a change in design, construction operation or maintenance which has an effect on the potential for discharge of pollutants 1 ❑ Prevent reoccurrence of reportable quantity releases of a hazardous material or oil EPA BASELINE CONSTRUCTION GENERAL PERMIT CHECKLIST Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Final Stabilization /Termination Checklist 1 . ❑ All soil disturbing activities are complete 2. ❑ Temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time 3. ❑ All areas of the construction site not otherwise covered by a permanent pavement or structure have been stabilized with a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a density of 70% or equivalent measures have been employed A-2 September 1992 Appendix A POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN FOR STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL SELECTION CHECKLIST INSTRUCTIONS: THIS CHECKLIST LISTS THE MINIMUM SEDIMENT EROSION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS UNDER THE USEPA GENERAL PERMIT. CHECK I✓I EACH ITEM AND FILL IN THE BLANKS BELOW TO EVALUATE COMPLIANCE FOR EACH DRAINAGE AREA AND LOCATION. NOTE: THIS CHECKLIST WAS PREPARED FOR THE USEPA GENERAL PERMIT. REQUIREMENTS FOR STATE GENERAL PERMITS MAY VARY. Stabaization Practices ❑ Stabilization will be initiated on all disturbed areas where construction activity will not occur for a period of more than 21 calendar days by the 14th day after construction activity has permanently or temporarily ceased. Stabilization measures to be used include: ❑ Temporary Seeding p Sod Stabilization ❑ Permanent Seeding ❑ Geotextiles ❑ Mulching ❑ Other Structural Practices ❑ Flows from upstream areas will be diverted from exposed soils. Measures to be used include: ❑ Earth Dike ❑ Pipe Slope Drain ❑ Drainage Swale ❑ Other ❑ Interceptor Dike and Swale Drainage locations serving less than 10 Drainage locations serving 10 or more disturbed acres disturbed acres ❑ Sediment controls will be installed ❑ A Sediment Basin will be installed Sediment controls include: ❑ A Sediment Basin is not attainable on the site; therefore, the following ❑ Sediment Basin sediment controls will be installed: ❑ Sediment Trap Sediment Trap ❑ Silt Fence or equivalent Silt Fence or equivalent controls along all sideslope controls along the sideslope and downslope boundaries I and downslope boundaries Sediment Basin Runoff Storage Calculation acres area draining to the sediment basin X 3,600 cubic feet of storagefacre cubic feet of storage required for the basin. FILED FEB 21 7012 v; Sq P4" Luaa Cig, Icua September 1992 A-3 FILED FEB 21 2012 ,/ 5`j Pnti City Clcrk Iowa City, Iowa STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN APPENDIX C INSPECTION REPORTS Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Terry Trueblood Recreation Area Phase 3 & 4 Improvements — 111.0253 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MONITORING REPORT Project: TERRY TRUEBLOOD REC. AREA PH. 3&4 IMPROVEMENTS Date of Inspection: Prime Contractor: Permit No: Inspector: Project No: Reason for Inspection: ❑ Weekly ❑ Rainfall Event ( in.) ❑ Other EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MONITORING Area Inspected: Inspection of Best Management Practices: Control Maintenance/ Control Maintenance/ Practice Modification Practice Modification BMP Effective Required BMP Effective Required Y N N/A Y N N/A Y N N/A Y N N/A Silt Fencing ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Stockpile Stabilization ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Ditch Checks ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Mulching ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Rip Rap ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Erosion Matting ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Inlet Protection ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Temporary Seeding ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Drainage Swales ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Permanent Seeding ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Construction Site Exits ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Sodding ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Project Schedule ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Staging Area ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Grading Practices ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Other ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Good Housekeeping ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Other ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ OBSERVATION COMMENTS / RECOMMENDATIONS Note: Any'Control Practice Effective' box checked 'N' or'Maintenance/Modification Required' box checked'Y' must have comments, recommended improvements, and date implemented. Any modifications must be sketched, described, dated, and initialed on the drawing included with the Pollution Prevention Plan. ITEM COMMENTS/RECOMMENDED IMPROVEMENTS DATE IMPLEMENTED FEB 21 7012 )OV ❑ See reverse side for sketches or additional comments/recommendations CERTIFICATION Copy to: ❑ Onsite Pollution Prevention Plan ❑ Owner ❑ Project Engineer ❑ Project Observer "I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations" Signature of Monitor Fro) Prepared by: Josh Slattery, Public Works, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5149 RESOLUTION NO. 12-69 RESOLUTION SETTING A PUBLIC HEARING ON MARCH 6, 2012 ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, DIRECTING THE CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH NOTICE OF SAID HEARING, AND DIRECTING THE CITY ENGINEER TO PLACE SAID PLANS ON FILE FOR PUBLIC INSPECTION. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA: That a public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-mentioned project is to be held on the 6th day of March, 2012, at 7:00 p.m. in the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. 2. That the City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice of the public hearing for the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the City, not less than four (4) nor more than twenty (20) days before said hearing. 3. That a copy of the plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-named project is hereby ordered placed on file by the City Engineer in the office of the City Clerk for public inspection. Passed and approved this 21st day of February 20_J2__. CITY tLERK pwengVes%setph-TuebloodRecArea-phase3.doc MAYOR dG- -)6(N Resolution No. 12-69 Page 2 It was moved by Champ] on and seconded by Throgmorton the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton 0 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 Improvements Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the & day of March, 2012, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street In said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Printer's Fee $ CIL1j_ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN FED.ID#42-0330670 being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): Legal erk Subscribed and sworn to a4me this �'�'ilay of A.D. 20J�. Notary Public 4N•Ls LINDAKROTZ P Commission Number 73261 • My Commission Expires • e*• Janua 27, 2014 AND I THE THE CITY OF IOWA Cn Y. luvw. TO ALL TAXPAYERSOr THE CITY AND TO OF IOWA CITY, IOWA. OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice Is hereby given that the city Council of the CRY of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost -for the construction of the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 Improvements Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the 6th day of March, 2012, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in the City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk Said plans, specifications, forth of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be Inspected by any interested persons. Any Interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments con - contract orithe lost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa Crty, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK February 28, 2012 r7i V 06-128 Prepared by: Mike Moran, Parks & Rec., 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 356-5100 RESOLUTION NO. 12-98 RESOLUTION APPROVING PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CON- TRACT, AND ESTIMATE OF COST FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, ESTABLISHING AMOUNT OF BID SECURITY TO ACCOMPANY EACH BID, DIRECTING CITY CLERK TO PUBLISH ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS, AND FIXING TIME AND PLACE FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS. WHEREAS, notice of public hearing on the plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project was published as required by law, and the hearing thereon held. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY. IOWA THAT: 1. The plans, specifications, form of contract and estimate of cost for the above-named project are hereby approved. 2. The amount of bid security to accompany each bid for the construction of the above- named project shall be in the amount of 10% (ten percent) of bid payable to Treasurer, City of Iowa City, Iowa. 3. The City Clerk is hereby authorized and directed to publish notice, not less than 4 and not more than 45 days before the date for filing the bids, for the receipt of bids for the construction of the above-named project in a newspaper published at least once weekly and having a general circulation in the city. 4. Sealed bids for the above-named project are to be received by the City of Iowa City, Iowa, at the Office of the City Clerk, at the City Hall, before 10 a.m. on the 10th day of April, 2012. At that time, the bids will be opened by the City Engineer or his designee, and thereupon referred to the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, for action upon said bids at its next regular meeting, to be held at the Emma J. Harvat Hall, City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa, at 7 p.m. on the 17th day of April, 2012, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. Passed and approved this 6th day of March _'20 12 ATTEST:,,2 7e CITY CLERK wN gVesWpprovplanstrueblood-ph3.doc r MAYOR� . Appr ed by ii (CityAttorftey's 'lice' Resolution No. 12-98 Page 2 It was moved by Mims and seconded by Dickens the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: NAYS: ABSENT: Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton NOTICE TO BIDDERS TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE3IMPROVEMENTS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until April 10, 2012, at 10:00 a.m. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 p.m., April 17, 2012, or at special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: Base Bid: Construction of the park improvements to include, but not limited to, site demolition, grading, erosion control, utilities, drives, parking, trails, lodge building, park shelters, pavement, walls, prairie seeding, surface restoration and associated work. Add Alternate No. 1: The additional cost for providing rubberized composite shingles for the lodge, park shelters and associated work. Add Alternate No. 2: The additional cost for providing three fishing jetties improvements and associated work, Add Alternate No. 3: The additional cost for providing the canoe launch improvements and associated work, and Add Alternate No. 4: The additional cast for providing the 'prairie style' planters and associated work. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Snyder & Associates, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Bidders are encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference on Thursday, March 22ntl, 2012, at 2:00 pm local time in the social hall in Robert A Lee Community Recreation Center, located at 220 S. Gilbert Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful performance of the contract and mainte- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: April 26, 2012 Specified Completion Date: May 31, 2013 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifi- cations and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the office of Snyder & Associates, Inc., Cedar Rapids, 5005 Bowling Street SW, Suite A, Cedar Rapids, Iowa, phone: 319-362-9394 upon receipt of $100, which is refundable. The deposit shall be forfeited if the contract documents are not returned within 14 days after the award of the project in re -usable condition. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals at (515) 281-5796 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239- 1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcon- tract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quanti- ties, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully re- quired under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Printer's Fee $ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN FED.ID#42-0330670 I, Q A 2 - being duly sworn, say that I am the legal cleric of the IOWA CITY PRESS-CITIZEN,a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I time(s), on the following date(s): ARC9 � �� Satz Legal erlc Subscribed and sworn to afore me this />-4-dayof A.D. 201,x. Notary Public LINDAKROTZ e� Commission Number, 73261 My Commission Expires x . ««• • Janua 27, 2014 OFFICIAL PUBLICATION NOTICE TO BIDDERS TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA— PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, until April 10,2012, at 10:00 a.m. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this dead- line will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meet- ing to be held In the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 p.m., April 17, 2012, or at special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will Involve thefollow- ing: Base Bid: Construction of the park Improvements to Include, but not limited to, site demolition, grading, erosion control, utilities,drives, parking, trails, lodge building, park shelters, pavement, walls, prairie seeding,surface restoration and associated work. Add Alternate No. 1: The additional cost for pro- viding rubberized composite shin- gles for the lodge, park shelters and associated work. Add Alternate No. 2: The additional cost for providing three fishing jetties improvements and associated work, Add Alternate No. 3: The additional cost for providing the canoe launch improvements and associated work, and Add Alternate No. 4: The additional cost for providing the 'prairie style' planters and associated work. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Snyder& Associates, Inc., of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have hereto- fore been approved by the City Council, and are an file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. Bidders are encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference on Thursday. March 22nd, 2012, at 2:00 pm local time in the social hall in Robert A Lee Community Recreation Center, located at 220 S. Gilbert Street, Iowa City, Iowa 52240. Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a sealed envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CIN, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the City Council's award of the contract and post bond satisfactory to the City ensuring the faithful perfor- mance of the contract and mente- nance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the previsions of this notice and the other contract doc- uments. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection Is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond In an amount equal to one hundred per- cent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be Issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the . operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the Improvement for a period of one (1) year from and after its completion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Specified Start Date: April 26 2012 Specified Completion Date: May 31.2013 Liquidated Damages: $500 per day The plans, specifications and pro- posed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at the office of Snyder & Associates, Inc.,Cedar Rapids, 5005 Bowling Street SW, Suite A,Cedar Rapids, Iowa, phone: 319-362-9394 upon receipt of $100, which is refund- able. The deposit shall be forfeited It the contract documents are not returned within 14 days after the award of the project in re -usable condition. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections End Appeals at (515) 281-5796 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422 Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder Intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the con- tract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed sub- contractors, together with quantities,unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to prod- ucts and previsions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder prefer- ence law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive techni- calities and Irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Pc .11 March 12, 2012 Printer's Fee $ QI.aQ CERTIFICATE OF PUBLICATION STATE OF IOWA, JOHNSON COUNTY, SS: THE IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN �F�ED.D.I/D#42-0330670 being duly sworn, say that I am the legal clerk of the IOWA CITY PRESS -CITIZEN, a newspaper published in said county, and that a notice, a printed copy of which is hereto attached, was published in said paper I_ time(s), on the following date(s): P062t4"!? 1$124tL Legal erk Subscribed and sworn to b fore me this �4 Hay of A.D. 20_Jc3L. Notary Public ALL a F LINDA KROTZ Commission Number 73261 • • My Commission Expires '•• January27.2014 ONTRACT AND COST FOR THE THE CIN OF IOWA CIN, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct public hearing on plans, specifications, cost -for thaorm Of t construract ction estimated Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 Improvements Project in said city at 7:00 p.m. on the 6th day of March, 2012, said meeting to be held in the Emma J.10 Et Hall in the City Hall, 4 Washington Street in said city, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications. form of contract an estimated cost am. now on file in the office of the City Clerk in the Ciry all in Iowa City, Iowa, and maybe inspected by any Interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments con- cerning said plans, specifications, ccnVact ort a cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa CMARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK February 23, 2012 _ ENGINEERS & PLANNERS Z IOWA I MISSOURI I NEBRASKA I SOUTH DAKOTA I WISCONSIN FACSIMILE TRANSMITTAL To: PLANHOLDERS & PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS Date: APRIL 2, 2012 From CITY OF IOWA CITY AND SNYDER & ASSOCIATES, INC. RE: TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS IOWA CITY, IOWA ADDENDUM #1 PAGES: 27 (including this one) Enclosed is one copy of Addendum No. 1 for the above referenced project. Acknowledge receipt of this addendum on page FP -1 of the "Form of Proposal' section prior to submission. Please also acknowledge receipt of this addendum by signing below and returning this letter to us by fax. Fax: 319-362-9448 To: Snyder & Associates, Inc Attn: Sara Blong We hereby acknowledge receipt of Addendum No. I for the above referenced project. Company: Signature: Title: BID DATE: APRIL 10, 2012 BID TIME: 10:00 A.M. N N ;�J n The information transmitted in this facsimile message is intended to be confidential and for the use of only the individual or entity named above. If the reader of this message is not the intended recipient, you are hereby notified that any retention, dissemination, distribution or copy of this telecopy is strictly prohibited. If you have received this facsimile in error, please notify us immediately by telephone and return the original message to us at the address above via the mail service (we will reimburse postage). Thank you. Snyder & Associates, Inc. — 5005 Bowling Street S.W. — Suite A — Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 www.snyder-associates.com Addendum No. 1 Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 Improvements Iowa City, Iowa Bid Date: April 10, 10:00 a.m. Project No.: 111.0253 From: Snyder & Associates, Inc. 5005 Bowling Street S.W. Suite A Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 Phone 319-362-9394 Contact: Sara Blong To: All Plan Holders of Record This Addendum is issued to clarify, revise, add to, or delete information in the original Bidding Documents or in previous addenda and forms a part of the Contract Documents. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Proposal Form. Failure to do so may subject bidder to disqualification. The bidder has the singular responsibility to make this Addendum available to sub - bidders that are not plan holders of record. This Addendum consists of 26 pages all of which are included as follows: ITEM # 1 Sheet SP 15 — Lodge Patio Details Detail No. 7/SP15 • Add construction note: "Contractor can create a temporary coffer dam along the lake shore in the area of the patio wall to allow for patio wall footing construction. Contractor to submit a plan and schedule for dewatering for patio footing and wall construction to Engineer prior to construction." • Add construction note: "Contractor shall provide granular backfill below patio pavement. Place three (3) surface monuments to monitor settlement prior to patio pavement installation, as approved by Engineer." • Add construction note: "Contractor to provide rock and filter fabric along patio wall shoreline for a distance of 60 In. ft. at 5' width by 12" depth. Construction to be as per 1/SP 16 detail." • Add construction note: "Contractor to install 4" perforated drain tile along inside of patio wall above lake water elevation. Place at minimum 0.5% slope and outlet to daylight through the concrete retaining wall. Submit shop drawings for Engineer's approval in coordination with rebar replacement. ITEM #2 SP 8 — Grading and Storm Water Sewer Plan — Area No. 1 Grading Plan General Notes Add Note: "K. Existing soil stockpile located north of this site, as shown on sheet SP3, contains a volume of approximately 11,800 cubic yards. This soil can be used for this project for general site grading and topsoil. If soils in stockpile area are desired to be used below pavements, soil testing and approval will be required by Terracon Consultants, at the Contractor's expense." h� �7; '. Z y This Addendum is issued to clarify, revise, add to, or delete information in the original Bidding Documents or in previous addenda and forms a part of the Contract Documents. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the Proposal Form. Failure to do so may subject bidder to disqualification. The bidder has the singular responsibility to make this Addendum available to sub - bidders that are not plan holders of record. This Addendum consists of 26 pages all of which are included as follows: ITEM # 1 Sheet SP 15 — Lodge Patio Details Detail No. 7/SP15 • Add construction note: "Contractor can create a temporary coffer dam along the lake shore in the area of the patio wall to allow for patio wall footing construction. Contractor to submit a plan and schedule for dewatering for patio footing and wall construction to Engineer prior to construction." • Add construction note: "Contractor shall provide granular backfill below patio pavement. Place three (3) surface monuments to monitor settlement prior to patio pavement installation, as approved by Engineer." • Add construction note: "Contractor to provide rock and filter fabric along patio wall shoreline for a distance of 60 In. ft. at 5' width by 12" depth. Construction to be as per 1/SP 16 detail." • Add construction note: "Contractor to install 4" perforated drain tile along inside of patio wall above lake water elevation. Place at minimum 0.5% slope and outlet to daylight through the concrete retaining wall. Submit shop drawings for Engineer's approval in coordination with rebar replacement. ITEM #2 SP 8 — Grading and Storm Water Sewer Plan — Area No. 1 Grading Plan General Notes Add Note: "K. Existing soil stockpile located north of this site, as shown on sheet SP3, contains a volume of approximately 11,800 cubic yards. This soil can be used for this project for general site grading and topsoil. If soils in stockpile area are desired to be used below pavements, soil testing and approval will be required by Terracon Consultants, at the Contractor's expense." ITEM #3 Specifications Section 01100 — Summary 1.07 — Permits, Fees, Inspections, and Regulatory Requirements. Revision: "B. Permit/Fees: Contractor shall obtain and coordinate building and utility inspection review and permits with the City of Iowa City requirements. Fees for building permit, water meter, water usage, and special inspections will be waived." ITEM #4 Project Schedule Contractor shall complete the following items by May 31, 2012: A. Marina building: Apply sealer to limestone wall as per plans and specifications. B. Marina building: Install lighting as per plans and specifications. C. Sanitary sewer: Construct sanitary improvements below McCollister Boulevard including the manhole located north of the street to allow for marina sanitary sewer operation. ITEM #5 - a� Specifications Section 15440 — Plumbing Fixtures: A. Add "Comfort Seats" as an acceptable manufacturer for water closet seats., n B. Add "Leonard" as an acceptable manufacturer for emergency mixing valves...' C. Add "Zum" as an acceptable manufacturer for water closets and urinals. D. Electric Water Cooler EWC-1 to be Acorn Model Al 12408F dual level stainless steel unit or approved equivalent. See specification section 15440 for approved equal manufacturers. E. Drinking Fountain DF -I to be Acorn Model A132400B-FRA4 dual level stainless steel unit or approved equivalent. See specification section 15440 for approved equal manufacturers. ITEM #6 Sheet P 1 — Plumbing Fixture Schedules: A. Plumbing keynotes - Add keynote #2: 2" grease waste pipe up thru floor slab into wall cavity above. See sheet P2 for continuation of piping. ITEM #7 Sheet P2 — Partial Plumbing Floor Plan (Kitchen 004): A. Plumbing Keynotes - Change keynote #2 to read: 1-1/2" grease waste pipe down. B. Plumbing Keynotes - Change keynote #17 to read: 1/2" domestic cold water pipe down thru floor slab, 1/2" branch domestic cold water pipe to sink faucet and 1/2" branch domestic cold water pipe in wall cavity to electric water cooler, and up to above ceiling in pipe chase. See sheet p and p3 for continuation of piping. C. Plumbing Keynotes - Change keynote # 19 to read: 1/2" domestic hot water pipe down thru floor slab, 1/2" branch domestic hot water to sink faucet and 1/2" domestic hot water pipe up in wall cavity to above ceiling. See sheets pl and p3 for continuation of piping. D. Partial Plumbing Floor Plan (Kitchen 004) - Delete lavatory L-1 and sink SS=1 from plan. Sink and lavatory are integral to the countertop and furnished by others. Plumbing contractor shall furnish and install faucets, strainers and waste piping as specified. ITEM #8 Sheet P5 — Plumbing Fixture Schedules: A. Delete the sink schedule B. Faucet Schedule - the faucet for sink SS=1 is for double compartment sink fumished by general contractor. ITEM #9 Sheet E5 — Electrical Details and Schedules: A. Luminaire Schedule — add the following as an acceptable manufacturer for the respective lighting fixture Type/Mark: 1) Type DD Lumenpulse Lumenfacade 2) Type JJ Lumenpulse Lumenfacade 3) Type F2 Nulite CPS ITEM#10 Sheet Sl - Structural Notes A. Add to Structural Wood: "17. Provide Galv. Simpson bearing plate at all sill plate anchors. Locate edge of plate withing'/s" of sheathed edge of sill plate." B. Add to Structural Wood: "18. Bolts used for Glulam connections only maybe A307 bolts. Refer to steel notes for all other connections." ITEM#11 Sheet S2 — Footing and Foundation Plan — Lodge A. Slab on Grade note should read: "4 inch concrete slab on minimum 18 inch free draining granular material, reinforcing 6X6 — W 1.4 X W l A W.W.F., refer to civil exhibit for additional soil information." ITEM#12 Sheet S3 — Roof framing plan — Lodge A. Add notes: Glulam Beams/Frame shall be designed for the following deflections: n U' rn i. Vertical: Total Load: L/240; Live Load: L/360 c -. ii. Horizontal: H/400, with max. of 3/8 inches w/ 0.5LL + 0.7 WL loading C-.3 ITEM # 13 Sheet S6 — Sections and Details A. Section 3/S6, change "Simpson EG5 hanger conn. (typical) to USP GHF511651F conn. (typical) route beam for flush connection." ITEM#14 Sheet S7 — Structural Plans — Shelter A. Tongue and Groove Solid Wood Decking Note 2. shall read: "Decking shall be placed in controlled random layup with all joints over supports." ITEM#15 Revision: Sheet A102, 4-A102 Enlarged Scale Kitchen Floor Plan and Section 11400-FoodService Equipment; delete 3 compartment sink and single bowl prep sink, provide double compartment sink, and change hand wash sink from rectangular to round. Refer to attached supplemental drawing RO1. 1. Sheet A 10 1 and Enlarged Plan 4-A102; revise sink layout as indicated on attached drawing R-0 1. 2. Section 11400 — FoodService Equipment; 3.06 Food Service Equipment Schedule, delete paragraph D. Pot and Pan Sink, and revise paragraph E. as follows: D. Not Used E. Work Sink 1. Features: a. Sink compartments: 2 compartments at 14"wide x 18"deep x 10" high with plate divider between compartments. Punch each sink compartment for basket and strainer, and attachment of garbage disposal b. Punch holes as required for plumbing fixtures 2. Accessories: a. SS Drain and strainer; provided by plumbing contractor, refer to sink schedule on sheet P5. Coordinate with garbage disposal at left sink compartment. b. Faucets: provided by plumbing contractor, refer to faucet schedule on sheet P5 3. Garbage Disposal a. Insinkerator Evolution Excel, or approved equal b. 1 HP, single phase, 120 V, 60 Hz, 10.2 A c. Stainless steel grind chamber and components d. Auto -reverse grind, permanently lubricated upper and lower bearings e. SoundSeal Plus; Anti -vibration mount, quiet collar sink baffle, multi -layer sound limiter insulation f. Multi -grind Plus; Grindshear ring, Tri -action lug system, undercutter disk, and jam -sensor circuit g. Manual reset motor overload protection ITEM#16 Add; Sheet AlllRoof Plan, detail 3-A502, 2-A302, and 13-A504, and Section 07620 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: 1. Add metal cap flashing to top and edge of glue -laminated framing exposed to weather at open trellis and exposed rafter tails at south, including: a. 5 1/8 x 16 %2 exposed glu-lam rafters at open trellis; top and north/south edge of rafter. b. 5 1/8" x 16'/2" exposed east -west glulam beams at Grid line AC at trellis; top of beam. c. 5 1/8" x 16 Y2" exposed east -west blocking between rafters at open trellis; top of beam (typical for 2 lines of blocking) d. 5 1/8" x 16 %2" horizontal glulam beam @ +10'-0 at open trellis, typical at grid lines 13, 14, 15, and 16; top of beam. e. 5 1/8" x 16'/2" exposed rafter tails at south side of roof; top and edge of rafter. 2. Refer to attached drawings R-02.1 and R-02.2. 3. Metal flashing to be 24 ga. prefinished aluminum flashing, med bronze. Fabricate to profiles indicated. 4. Insect screen shall be Cor -A -Vent PS -400 soffit vent or equal, www.cor-a-vent.com, 1" width, %" height, x 4'-0", black, 10 sq in net free ventilating area per I.f. 5. Wood strips shall be lx 6" treated wood spaced at 24" oc. ITEM#17 Revision; Change top of seat at south, partial west and partial east sides of Room A 104/Room B 105 from soapstone to '/2" composite material. 1. Building section 2-A301, wall section 1-A311, and detail 9-A501; delete soapstone material and provide %2" composite surface material.' 2. Section 06410 -Custom Cabinets; a. Paragraph 2.06, A. 3 change to the following: 3. Window Sills, Seat Tops and Other Components Thickness: '/2" ngrynkum: ° -- --+ C-) b. Paragraph 3.05 Schedules; add sub paragraph E as follows: E. Window Seat Top: Composite Surface color CS -3 j b" ITEM#18 — Revision; Section 04852 — Stone Masonry Veneer, paragraph 2.05 Stone Fabrication subparagraph D, change to the following: D. Backs: Sawn. At contractor's option backs may be split face to match front. ITEM#19 Revision: Section 06150 — Wood Decking; 1. Wood decking to be solid wood decking. Change "glue laminated" wood decking references throughout section to "solid wood" wood decking. 2. Wood decking at Lodge Building to remain as indicated. Wood decking at Open Shelters to be specified length with joints over framing members. a. Paragraph 2.02, B, sub paragraph 5; change to the following: 5. Deck Length: a. Lodge Building: Random Length Continuous b. Open Shelters: Specified Length b. Paragraph 3.03, add sub -paragraph E as follows: < m E. Specified Length Installation 1. Min 18' length with additional lengths as required for cantilevers. 73 2. Decking shall be continuous over three or more spans with end joints occurring over framing members. 3. End joints may align between adj boards. ITEM#20 Revision: Section 06181 — Glued -Laminated Structural Units, 1.04 Design Requirements, revise paragraph B as follows: B. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: Refer to structural drawings. ITEM#21 Revision; Section 07210 — Board and Batt Insulation, 2.02 Nailable Base Insulation, Sheet A002, Roof Ceiling Assembly RC -1, and details 3&7-A502. Change nailable base insulation to vented panel with 1.5" airspace: 1. Section 07210, paragraph 2.02 Nailable Base Insulation, subparagraph D, change to the following: D. ACFoam Cross Vent Nail Base Insulation 1. Closed cell HCFC free polyisocanurate insulation board with 1.5" vent spacer strips separating 7/16" APA/TECO rated OSB from polyisocanurate foam board to create a cross ventilating airspace. 2. Net Free Ventilating Air/LF: 13.5 sq in 3. Compressive strength: 20 psi 4. LTTR 12.7, nominal thickness 2.5", 4'x 8' panel 5. ASTM C 1289, Type V 2. Sheet A002, Roof Ceiling Assembly RC-1Nailable base insulation; Nailable base insulation to be vented with 1.5" air space. Details 3&7-A502; Add continuous intake vent at roof lower edge and continuous exhaust vent at peak. Refer to attached drawing R-02.1 for revised detail 3-A502 lower roof edge. Roof peak edge, detail 7-A502, similar. a. Continuous vent material to be Cor -A -Vent PS400 soffit vent or equal, www.cor-a- vent.com. 1" width, %" height, x 4'-0", black, 10 sq in net free ventilating area per Lf, b. Revise metal fascia/flashing to incorporate vent as indicated on attached drawing. ITEM#22 Clarification: Section 07311 — Shingles, paragraph 2.02 Synthetic Shingles (Alternate #1 Lodge and Shelters); 1. Subparagraph 7, change to: 7. Warranty: Gold Star 50 year labor and material warranty. 2. Add sub -paragraph 8 as follows: 8. Fire Classification: as required for warranties, Class C minimum. ITEM#23 Add: Provide manual roller shades at window units 5 and 6 in Room A 104 / Room B 105. Add attached specification section 12490— Window Shades. ITEM#24 Manufacturer/Product Approvals The following manufacturers have requested approval to bid and have been conditionally approved. It is the manufacturer's responsibility to verify compliance with all requirements of the project manual and contract documents: Section Product Approved Manufacturers 03356 Polished Concrete Floor Densifier Euclid UltraSil Li 03356 Polished Concrete Floor Enhancer Euclid UltrGuard 03390 Membrane Curing Compound S ecChem Cure & Seal WB 25 06150 Wood Decking Filler King Company 06181 Glued -Laminated Structural Units Filler King Company 07210 Extruded Polystyrene Board Insul Diversifoam Certifoam 25 and 40 07210 Nailable Base Insulation Cornell Corporation 07260 Cold Fluid Applied Air Barrier Coating HenryAir-Bloc 31 MR TK-AirMax2104 VP 07900 General Purpose Exterior Sealant Sikaflex 2c NS Ez-Mix 07900 Interior Floor Joint Sealant Sikaflex lc SL 08351 Operable Panel Partitions Moderco 742 08410 Aluminum Doors and Storefront Tubelite Manko 06181 Glue Laminated Structural Units Western Archrib Timber Systems 10170 Toilet Compartments & Urinal Screen Bradley ITEM #25 Clarification: Limestone blocks and cubes and associated work shown on the plans near the lodge are to be included in the base bid in bid item 25. — Site Furniture. ITEM#26 Architectural Specifications Add Section 12490. See Attached 12490-1 to 124904. ITEM #27 Structural Specifications Replace Section 31623. See Attached 31623-I to 31623-9. ITEM #28 Clarification: Lodge Building Subsurface Treatment. See Attached Exhibit 1-3. ITEM#29 Clarification: R -01.4/A102 Enlarged Kitchen Floor Plan. See Attached Exhibit I ITEM#30 Clarification: R-02.1 Glu -Lam Cap Detail. See Attached Exhibit 1-2. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 N 7 SECTION 12490 WINDOW SHADES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Window shades and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail brackets. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS m A. ASTM D4674 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to Indoor Office Environments; 2010. B. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2010. C. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2010. (ANSI/WCMAA101.1) 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work related to products of this section; require attendance of all affected installers. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken. 2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details. D. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings. G. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each 12490-1 opening. B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty from the Date of Substantial Completion, covering the following: 1. Shade Hardware: one year. 2. Fabric: one year. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manually Operated Roller Shades: 1. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc: www.lutron.com. 2. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com. 3. Graber, division of Springs Window Fashions: www.graberblinds.com. 4. Mecho Shades 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WINDOW SHADE APPLICATIONS A. Shades: Hunter Douglas FR Series Manual Roller shades. 1. Type: Roller shades. 2. Fabric: Glacier Screen HD1010. a. Max. Fabric Width: 118" b. Fabric Weight: 16.3 ortyd c. Fabric Thickness: 0.026" d. Openess Factor: 10% e. Composition: 78% vinyl, 22% polyester f. Fire Classification: NFPA 701-2004 TM #1 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of colors. 4. Mounting: Outside (face of jambs). 5. Operation: Manual. 2.03 ROLLER SHADES C�l �n M �a 0 A. Roller Shades: Fabric roller shades complete with mounting brackets, roller tubes, hembars, hardware and accessories; fully factory -assembled. 1. Drop: Regular roll. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings and in schedule at end of this section. 3. Comply with WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2010. (ANSVWCMA A101.1) B. Roller Tube: As required for type of operation, extruded aluminum with end caps. 1. Dimensions: Manufacturers standard, selected for suitability for installation conditions, span, and weight of shades. 2. Wall thickness: 0.055' 3. Finish: Baked enamel; color from manufacturers standards. 4. End Plug: Heat stabilized fiber reinforced plastic outside sleeve and center shaft provide bearing surfaces on which the roller rides ensuring smooth, wear resistant operation. C. Hembars: Wall thickness designed for weight requirements and adaptation to uneven surfaces, to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat. 1. 2" , fabric wrapped, sealed pocket hembar 12490-2 Sa rn 0 D. Manual Operation: 1. R16 clutch, continuous loop operation, with #10 stainless steel ball chain (90 Ib test) 2. Clutch shall develop no more than 1/2 Ib drag 3. Side by side mounting. Coordinate clutch control side with window configuration E. Mounting Hardware 1. Manufacturers .07", C1008/1010 cold rolled steel brackets including end plug bracket with lock down retainer device. 2. Baked enamel painted finish, bronze color F. Accessories 1. Front fascia, height as required for tube size, baked enamel painted finish, bronze color. 2. End caps at exposed locations, baked enamel painted finish, bronze color. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances. 1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/2 inch space between bottom bar and window seat top. 2. Horizontal Dimensions - Outside Mounting: Cover window frames, trim, and casings completely. B. At openings requiring continuous multiple shade units with separate rollers, locate roller joints at window mullion centers; butt rollers end-to-end. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under the project conditions. B. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions and approved shop drawings, using mounting devices as indicated. B. Installation Tolerances: 1. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/16 inch. C. Adjust level, projection and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure shades for smooth operation. h, 3.04 CLEANING "y a i =xi A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufact&jf' , �� rn B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to "like new" condition. 3.05 PROTECTION 3.06 SCHEDULE _ A. Provide roller shades for the following windows: Refer to Sheet A601 for window opening sizez and framing configuration 1. Window Opening 5 @ west side Room A 104 a. Provide shade for window are at north side of dropped beam. b. Cover with single width shade 2. Window Opening 6 @ south side Room A 104 / Room B 105 12490-3 a. Center butt joints in shades over window mullion. Maximize width of shade to coordinate with mullion layout. Assumed 16 individual shade units. b. Provide shade for transom above door. Shade not required to come below top of door frame. c. Window space between double doors will require 2 shades due to glass divider panel at interior of center window mullion, refer to 14-A504 END OF SECTION N C7 N a C-) c, 1i� 'LLE5 {ymg��' • • , CD lig 12490-4 SECTION 31623 RAMMED AGGREGATE PIER SOIL REINFORCEMENT PART 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provision of all equipment, material, labor, and supervision to design and install RAP elements. Design shall rely on subsurface information presented in the project geotechnical report. B. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions, and Division 1 Specifications, apply to the work in this specification. C. Work shall consist of designing, furnishing and installing rammed aggregate pier elements or vibroflot stone columns to the lines and grades designated on the project foundation plan and as specified herein. The aggregate pier elements shall be constructed by compacting aggregate in an excavated hole using special high-energy impact densification equipment. The stone columns shall be constructed using a dry bottom feed vibroflot. The piers and stone columns shall be in a columnar -type configuration and shall be used to reinforce soils for the support of spread footings. 1.3 APPROVED INSTALLERS A. Installers (Specialty Contractors) of RAP Foundation Systems shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience with the installation of RAPS and shall have completed at least 50 projects. B. Installers shall have demonstrated experience in the construction of similar size and types of projects. The RAP Installer shall be approved by the Owner's Engineer and must be approved two weeks prior to bid opening. The Installer shall adhere to all methods and standards described in this Specification. C. Installers currently approved for these works in the Iowa, Illinois, area are: 1. Peterson Contractors, Inc. — Reinbeck, Iowa (Licensed Open -Shop Installer) 2. Foundation Service Corporation — Hudson, Iowa (Licensed Union -Shop Installer) 3. Subsurface Constructors — St. Louis, Missouri 4. Helitech Civil Construction Division — Belleville, IL 31623-1 N O 1.1 DESCRIPTION (� n N Dy Work shall consist of designing, furnishing and installing Rammed Aggregate Pier (R?,ii� elements to the lines and grades designated on the project foundation plan and 2S specified herFilri The RAP elements may be either vibro stone columns or rammed piers. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provision of all equipment, material, labor, and supervision to design and install RAP elements. Design shall rely on subsurface information presented in the project geotechnical report. B. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions, and Division 1 Specifications, apply to the work in this specification. C. Work shall consist of designing, furnishing and installing rammed aggregate pier elements or vibroflot stone columns to the lines and grades designated on the project foundation plan and as specified herein. The aggregate pier elements shall be constructed by compacting aggregate in an excavated hole using special high-energy impact densification equipment. The stone columns shall be constructed using a dry bottom feed vibroflot. The piers and stone columns shall be in a columnar -type configuration and shall be used to reinforce soils for the support of spread footings. 1.3 APPROVED INSTALLERS A. Installers (Specialty Contractors) of RAP Foundation Systems shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience with the installation of RAPS and shall have completed at least 50 projects. B. Installers shall have demonstrated experience in the construction of similar size and types of projects. The RAP Installer shall be approved by the Owner's Engineer and must be approved two weeks prior to bid opening. The Installer shall adhere to all methods and standards described in this Specification. C. Installers currently approved for these works in the Iowa, Illinois, area are: 1. Peterson Contractors, Inc. — Reinbeck, Iowa (Licensed Open -Shop Installer) 2. Foundation Service Corporation — Hudson, Iowa (Licensed Union -Shop Installer) 3. Subsurface Constructors — St. Louis, Missouri 4. Helitech Civil Construction Division — Belleville, IL 31623-1 1.4 RELATED WORK A. Earth Moving B. Cast -In -Place Concrete C. Geotechnical Report and Recommendations N U 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS 3> A. Modulus and Uplift Testing cz� i 1. ASTM D-1143 –Pile Load Test Procedures7< 4 r� U' 2. ASTM D-1194 –Spread Footing Load Test = Q O 3. ASTM -D-3689 –Uplift Load Test - — B. Materials and Inspection ASTM D-1241 –Aggregate Quality 2. ASTM STP 399 – Dynamic Penetrometer Testing 3. ASTM D-422 – Gradation Soils 1.6 CONFLICTS INSPECIFICATIONSIREFERENCES Where specifications and reference documents conflict, the Architect/Engineer shall make the final determination of the applicable document. 1.7 CERTIFICATIONSAND SUBMITTALS A. The installer shall submit detailed design calculations and construction drawings prepared by the RAP Designer (the Designer) to the Owner or Owner's Engineer for approval at least 2 week(s) prior to the start of construction. All plans shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer in the State in which the project is constructed. B. The RAP Designer shall have Errors and Omissions design insurance for the work. The insurance policy should provide a minimum coverage of $2 million per occurrence. C. Test Data - The Installer shall furnish the General Contractor a description of the installation equipment, installation records, complete test data, analysis of the test data and recommended design parameter values based on the modulus test results. The report shall be prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer. D. Daily RAP Progress Reports – The Installer shall furnish a complete and accurate record of RAP installation to the General Contractor. The record shall indicate the pier location, length, average lift thickness and final elevations of the base and top of piers. The record shall also indicate the type and size of the densification equipment used. The Installer shall immediately report any unusual conditions encountered during installation to the General Contractor, to the Designer and to the Testing Agency. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 31623-2 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aggregate used for piers constructed above the water table shall be Type I Grade B in accordance with ASTM D-1241-68, or shall be other graded aggregate selected by the Installer and used in the modulus tesVsuccessful initial RAP element. It shall be compacted to a densification and strength, which provides resistance to the dynamic penetration test (ASTM STP 399) of a minimum average of 15 blows per 1.75 -inch vertical movement. B. For aggregate used for piers constructed below the water table, the gradation shall be the same as Type I Gradation B, except that particles passing the No. 40 sieve shall be eliminated. Alternatively, No.57 stone or other stone selected by the RAP Installer may be used. Dynamic penetration resistance testing is inappropriate for this material. C. Potable water or other suitable source shall be used to increase aggregate moisture content where required. The General Contractor shall provide such water to the Installer. D. The General Contractor will provide adequate and suitable marshalling areas on the project site for the use of the Installer for the storage of aggregate and equipment. PART 3 - DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 3.1 RAP DESIGN— RAMMED AGGREGATE PIER OR STONE COLUMNS A. The RAP elements shall be designed for an RAP stiffness modulus of 150 pci. The stiffness modulus value shall be verified by the results of the RAP modulus test, described in this specification. B. RAPS shall be designed in accordance with generally -accepted engineering practice and the methods described in Section 1 of these Specifications. The design shall meet the following criteria. Maximum Allowable Bearing Pressure for RAP Reinforced Soils 3,000 psf Total Long -Term Settlement for Footings: < I -inch Long -Term Differential Settlement of Adjacent Footings: < %_ ind8 4 r7 cry Minimum Aggregate Pier Stiffness Modulus Value: 150 pci <'- a C. The design submitted by the Installer shall consider the bearing capacity -and seftlement of all footings supported by RAPS, and shall be in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and these specifications. Total and differential settlement shall be considered. The design life of the structure shall be 50 years. RAP installer shall warranty all work to meet the listed design bearing capacity and settlement criteria for a minimum of 5 years from the date of acceptance. D. The RAP system shall be designed to preclude plastic bulging deformations at the top-of— pier design stress and to preclude significant tip stresses as determined from the shape of the telltale test curve from telltales installed in modulus test piers. The results of the modulus test shall be used to verify the design assumptions. 3.2 DESIGNSUBMITTAL 31623-3 The Installer shall submit 4 sets of detailed design calculations, construction drawings, and shop drawings, (the Design Submittal), for approval at least 2 week(s) prior to the beginning of construction. A detailed explanation of the design parameters for settlement calculations shall be included in the Design Submittal. Additionally, the quality control test program for RAPS, meeting these design requirements, shall be submitted. All computer-generated calculations and drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State where the piers are to be built. PART 4 - CONSTRUCTION Specific equipment and procedural specifications are left to the Installer to achieve the specified criteria. However, the following minimum guidelines shall be used. A. Rammed Aggregate Piers 1. Special high-energy impact densification apparatus shall be emplp-jed4a denlipy the Aggregate pier elements during installation. The apparatusslndI aj#y di p;) downward impact energy to each lift of aggregate. 2. A minimum tamper energy CIMA rating of 1200 foot-pounds of force pt:r blow applied by the energy source. 3. The bottom of the excavation shall be densified prior to the placement of the aggregate. If wet, soft or sensitive soils are present, open -graded aggregate, such as ASTM No.57 stone or other, shall be placed at the bottom of the excavation and compacted to stabilize the element bottom and may serve as the initial lift. 4. Densification shall be performed using a beveled tamper. The beveled tamper foot is required to adequately increase the lateral earth pressure in the matrix soil during installation. 5. Downward pressure shall be applied to the tamper shaft during tamping. 6. Each lift of aggregate shall be tamped for a minimum of 10 seconds. 7. The specialty impact short aggregate pier contractor shall be pre -approved prior to bidding and have a minimum of five (5) years experience as a specialty short aggregate pier contractor. B. Stone Columns If a vibroflot is used to construct the piers, the Installer shall use an electric down -hole vibroflot capable of providing at least 80 HP of rated energy and a centrifugal force of 15 tons. An appropriate metering device should be provided at such a location that inspection of amperage build-up may be verified during the operation of the equipment. Metering device may be an ammeter directly indicating the performance of the vibroflot tip of the eccentric. Complete equipment specifications should be submitted to the Engineer prior to commencement of the fieldwork. 2. To minimize surface soil heave, identify the bearing strata, to allow for penetration of the vibroflot into stiff cohesive soils and to minimize weakening of cohesive soils when vibrated, all holes should be predrilled to the design depths. 3. The Specialty Contractor shall be pre -approved prior to bidding and have a minimum of five (5) years experience with the installation of vibroflot stone columns. 4. After penetration to the required depth, the vibroflot shall not be withdrawn more 31623-4 than 4.0 feet at any time unless the stone stops flowing to the bottom of the vibroflot. 5. Redriving the vibroflot into the treated depth shall be attempted at approximately 2.0 to 4.0 foot intervals to observe resistance to penetration and amperage build- up. During redriving, the vibroflot tip shall penetrate to within 2 feet of the previous redriving depth. 6. Amperage build-up and backfill quantities will be contingent upon the type of vibroflot used and procedures. Prior to commencement of work, the contractor shall discuss the equipment capabilities with the Engineer to determine if trial probes will be necessary. PART 5 - TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Rammed Aggregate Piers r 1. A modulus test shall be performed to verify the parameter valyes seledted faL l design. The modulus tests shall be of the type and installed in a-`iiWerepecifirt - herein. The test shall be performed at the location of the boring' -with the lowp blow counts over the length of the proposed pier as approved- by-the=Engineer. Testing shall be performed based on the highest design pier streiS a6d the test shall be run to a stress level of 150% of this design stress. _D 2. A telltale shall be installed at the bottom of the test pier so that bottom -of -pier deflections may be determined. Acceptable performance is indicated when the bottom of the pier deflection is no more than 20% of the top of pier deflection at the design stress level. 3. ASTM D -I 143 general test procedures shall be used as a guide to establishing load increments, load increment duration, and load decrements. 4. With the exception of the load increment representing approximately 115% of the design maximum top of Aggregate pier stress, all load increments shall be held for a minimum of 15 minutes, a maximum of I hour, and until the rate of deflection reduces to 0.01 inch per hour, or less. 5. The load increment that represents approximately 115% of the design maximum stress on the Aggregate pier shall be held for a minimum of 15 minutes, a maximum of 4 hours and until the rate of deflection reduces to 0.01 inches per hour or less. 6. A seating load equal to 5 percent of the total load shall be applied to the loaded steel plate prior to application of load increments and prior to measurement of deflections to compensate for surficial disturbance. 7. Aggregate pier modulus testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements outlined in the Design Submittal. The results of the modulus test shall show that the modulus at the test location exceeds the minimum modulus required for the design criteria. If actual modulus measured does not meet these criteria then piers shall be added and/or lengthened to meet the settlement criteria at the Installer's expense. B. Stone Column I. Testing to determine specification compliance will be provided by the Installer, and will consist of a Static Load Test. All testing to determine specification compliance will be provided by the geotechnical engineer and paid by the 31623-5 Owner. 2. The load test shall be performed at a sacrificial location chosen by the Engineer. The test shall be performed at the location of the boring with the lowest blow counts over the length of the proposed column. The test foundation size to be tested should be similar in size to the specific project foundation size. The test shall be performed to reflect that the performance of the most heavily loaded column will meet the settlement criteria. 3. The load test shall be erected and performed for by the contractor at contractor's expense. The owner shall pay for all costs associated with monitoring of the test by the Engineer. 4. The load test shall be performed in general accordance with ASTM D-1143 Quick Test procedures as modified herein. The test foundation shall be loaded to 1.5 times the design load of 3000 psf. Settlements of the test foundation shall be measured halfway between the center and each of the four comers. The average of the four readings shall be used to confirm acceptance of the required settlement criteria. The contractor shall submit load test detail and setup. 5. The Engineer will provide site inspection to insure performance of the stone column work. This inspection may include the following: observance of the Specialty Contractor's procedures, recording of backfill quantities, and recording of ammeter information. 6. A sample of the type of backfill material should be submitted to the engineer for a grain size distribution analysis to establish the suitability, the cost of which will be borne by the owner. C. If the results of the load tests or modulus testing do not meet the criteria in Part 3, additional column reinforcement and additional load tests will be required ,at no additional expense to the Owner until the requirements of Part 3 have been.met. C. :. C-; PART 6 - RESPONSIBILITIES OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR �n rn 6.1 PREPARATION <rrrJ ?n- M _ o A. The Contractor shall locate and protect underground and aboveground utilities aPA other structures from damage during installation of the RAP elements. B. The General Contractor will provide the site to the Installer, after earthwork in the area has been completed. C. Site subgrade shall be established by the General Contractor within 6 inches of final design subgrade, as approved by the Design Engineer. D. A working surface will be established and maintained by the General Contractor to provide wet weather protection of the subgrade and to provide access for efficient operation of the RAP installation. 6.2 LAYOUT OF THE RAP ELEMENTS The General Contractor shall provide layout (construction staking) of the RAPS. The General Contractor shall provide ground elevations in sufficient detail to estimate drilling depth elevations to within 2 inches. 31623-6 6.3 6.4 6.5 RAP EXCAVATION The Contractor is altered to the fact of possible existing obstructions. The Contractor is responsible to explore the site for additional soil information. Should any obstruction be encountered during drilling or excavation for RAPs, the General Contractor shall be responsible for removing such obstruction, or the pier shall be relocated or abandoned. Obstructions include, but are not limited to, boulders, timbers, concrete, rebar, utility lines, etc., that prevent installing the RAPS to the required depth, or cause the RAP to drift from the required locations. Dense natural rock or weathered rock shall not be deemed obstructions, and piers may be terminated short of design lengths on such materials. If the General Contractor cannot or does not remove such obstructions within one hour from the time the Installer reports the obstruction to the General Contractor, the Installer may remove such obstructions with his own means. Should this occur, the Installer shall receive an extra to the contract to account for their additional expenses, including delay time involved to crew and equipment; this extra excludes any additional payment from the owner. The rammed aggregate pier soil lump sum price shall include all labor, material, equipment, any casing holes, excavation of any unsuitable material, drilling obstructions, delays, and testing. UTILITY EXCAVATIONS The General Contractor shall coordinate all excavations made subsequent to RAP installations so that at least five feet of horizontal distance remains between the edge of any installed RAP and the excavation. Protection of completed RAP elements is the responsibility of the General Contractor. In the event that utility excavations are required at horizontal distances of less than five feet from installed RAPs, the General Contractor shall contact the RAP Designer to develop construction solutions to minimize impacts on the installed RAPs. Recommended procedures may include: A. Using cement -treated base to construct portions of the RAPS subject to future excavations. B. Replacing excavated soil with compacted crushed stone in the portions of excavations where the RAPS have been disturbed. The placement and compaction of the crushed stone shall meet the following requirements. 1. The crushed stone shall meet the gradation specified by the Designer. 2. The crushed stone shall be placed in a controlled manner using motorized impact compaction equipment. 3. The aggregate should be compacted to 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor method (ASTM D698). 4. The Testing Agency shall be on site to observe placement, compaction, and provide density testing. The test results shall be submitted to the Designer and the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall provide notification to the Testing Agency and the Designer when excavation, placement, and compaction will occur and arrange for construction observation and testing. ^—'. u v SUBGRADE PREPARATIONAND FILL PLACEMENT n� =- y n rn r A. Subgrade preparation and fill placement on RAP reinforced soils shall-bepierfetined 07 accordance with the site preparation earthwork section of the projectspeci Satiorgj which contains the following recommendations regarding: 31623-7 1. Gradation/type of engineered fill soils. 2. Methods for fill placement including, but not limited to, type of compaction equipment, moisture content requirements, maximum lift thickness, and compactive effort. 3. Testing frequency and requirements for engineered fill, o 4. Minimum dry density as determined by the (ASTM D-1557/698). 6.6 FOOTING BOTTOMS A. Excavation and surface compaction of all footings General Contractor. modified/standarEProctdtf metholl., s n o n ii � -= m r M='i-1 r - shall be the responsibility, of the B. Foundation excavations to expose the tops of RAP elements shall be made in a workmanlike manner, and shall be protected until concrete placement, with procedures and equipment best suited to (1) prevent softening of the matrix soil between and around the RAP elements before pouring structural concrete, and (2) achieving direct and firm contact between the dense, undisturbed RAP elements and the concrete footing. C. Recommended procedures for achieving these goals are to: 1. Limit over -excavation below the bottom of the footing to 3 -inches (including disturbance from the teeth of the excavation equipment, 2. Compaction of surface soil and top of RAP elements shall be prepared using a motorized impact compactor ("Jumping Jack," or similar impact tamping equipment). Sled -type tamping devices shall not be used. Compaction shall be performed over the entire footing bottom to compact any loose surface soil and loose surface pier aggregate. 3. Place footing concrete immediately after footing excavation is made and approved, preferably the same day as the excavation. Footing concrete must be placed on the same day if the footing is bearing on expansive or sensitive soils. 4. If same day placement of footing concrete is not possible, place a minimum 3 -inch thick lean concrete seal (`mud mat") immediately after the footing is excavated and approved. D. The following criteria shall apply, and a written inspection report sealed by the project Geotechnical Engineer shall be furnished to the Installer to confirm: 1. That water (which may soften the unconfined matrix soil between and around the RAP elements, and may have detrimental effects on the supporting capability of the RAP reinforced subgrade) has not been allowed to pond in the footing excavation at any time. 2. That all RAP elements designed for each footing have been exposed in the footing excavation. That immediately before footing construction, the tops of all the RAP elements exposed in each footing excavation have been inspected and recompacted as necessary with mechanical compaction equipment, and that the tops of any RAP elements which may have been disturbed by footing excavation and related activity have been recompacted to a dry density equivalent to at least 98% of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor method (ASTM D698). 31623-8 4. That no excavations or drilled shafts have been made after installation of RAP elements within horizontal distance of five feet from the edge of any pier, without the written approval of the Installer or Designer. D. Failure to provide the above inspection and certification by the project Geotechnical Engineer, which are beyond the responsibility of the RAP Installer, may void any written or implied warranty on the performance of the RAP system. PART 7 - QUALITY CONTROL / QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALITY CONTROL - The Installer shall have a full-time Quality Control (QC) representative to verify and report all QC installation procedures. The Installer shall immediately report any unusual conditions encountered during installation to the Design Engineer, the General Contractor, and to the Testing Agency. The QC procedures shall include the preparation of Progress Reports completed during each day of installation and containing the following information: I . Footing and aggregate pier or stone column location. 2. Aggregate pier or stone column length and drilled diameter. 3. Planned and actual elevations at the top and bottom of the element. 4. Average lift thickness for each aggregate pier element. 5. Relative ammeter increases for stone columns 6. Soil types encountered at the bottom of the aggregate pier and along the length of the element. 7. Depth to groundwater, if encountered. 8. Documentation of any unusual conditions encountered. 9. Type and size of densification equipment used. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE - The Owner or General Contractor is responsible for retaining an independent engineering testing firm to provide Quality Assurance services. The Testing Agency should be the Geotechnical Engineer of Record, if possible. 1. The Testing Agency shall monitor the Installer test(s). The Installer shall provide and install all dial indicators and other measuring devices. 2. The Testing Agency shall monitor the installation of aggregate pier elements or stone columns to verify that the production installation practices are similar to those used during the installation of the test elements. 3. The Testing Agency shall report any discrepancies to the Installer and General Contractor immediately. END OF SECTION o ti_z •-i ca m r-ry c =` t-� r � t N 0 31623-9 0 0 0 0 LODGE o FFE 66].90 0 0 0 0 a � 0 0 0 0 o C %r p u 0 LODGE BUILDING - PLAN VIEW NOSME 9-ZIQZ 03111 TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 LODGE BUILDING - SUBSURFACE TREATMENT EXHIBIT SNYDER & ASSOCIATES Engineers and Planners 1 0i 3 111.0253 NO SCALE 0110112 WC 9 on EXIST. GRADE 644.0± OVEREXCAVATE A— MINIMUM OF 6" TO REMOVE ANY EXISTING ORGANIC/ VEGETATION LODGE BUILDING - SECTION A -A' NO SCALE c STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL TENSAR TRIAX TX 140 GEOGRID LIFFE=647.90LI NOTE: STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL TO BE LOW PLASTICITY COHESIVE OR GRANULAR MATERIAL AS PER GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT. 4' 01 Alli VAi O I );lulo ),1I3 OZ :ol klv 9- adY lloz MIN. FILL EXIST. GRADE 642.0 ± (1311:1 TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA • PHASE 3 %EEr z OF a LODGE BUILDING • SUBSURFACE TREATMENT EXHIBIT SC 111.0253 SC1lE: NO SCALE SNYDER & ASSOCIATES IM 04W12 Engineers and Planners 1EOt GIC I FFE =6a 7.90 •.. _. ... , r ---------------i—A___--___ EXIST. GRADE 645.03 OVEREXCAVATE A — MINIMUM OF 6" TO REMOVE ANY EXISTING ORGANIC/ VEGETATION A113 d;n �i'J310 Alfa 00 :014 9- W'i lioz G311J TENSAR TRIAX 140 GEOGRID STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL MIN. 18" GRANULAR FILL BELOW SLAB LODGE BUILDING- SECTION B - B' NO SCALE NOTE: STRUCTURAL FILL MATERIAL TO BE LOW PLASTICITY COHESIVE OR GRANULAR MATERIAL AS PER GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT. EXIST. GRADE 643.5* TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 SHO 3 OF 3 LODGE BUILDING - SUBSURFACE TREATMENT EXHIBIT Rt 111.0m scuE: NoscuE SNYDER & ASSOCIATES DME 041DY12 Engineers and PWnn TEDt GJC 12 YA102 ws I YWi :�;313.11I oz =or r� s -ads 1107 13 A502 Q W 2'f" 2'$' 2 Q 10 1/2"5 1/2" 5'-0 1/2" 2'-0 5/8" KITCHEN A421 103 617FE N" �t M21 o oO iv 1p'_1" V M O STEEL TUBE COLUMN. SEE STRUCTURAL 8 ASIO N ENLARGED KITCHEN FLOOR PLAN 1/4" = r-0° TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 R -01.4/A102 ENLARGED KITCHEN FLOOR PLAN ASK Studio Slur 1 OF 1 PN 111.0253 SLUE: IM'"1'-0' OATS 01103/12 TECH AVA ADHERED FINISH TO FACE w6 OF GLUE -LAM COLUMN I I I Elc q I N I I I 13 A502 Q W 2'f" 2'$' 2 Q 10 1/2"5 1/2" 5'-0 1/2" 2'-0 5/8" KITCHEN A421 103 617FE N" �t M21 o oO iv 1p'_1" V M O STEEL TUBE COLUMN. SEE STRUCTURAL 8 ASIO N ENLARGED KITCHEN FLOOR PLAN 1/4" = r-0° TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 R -01.4/A102 ENLARGED KITCHEN FLOOR PLAN ASK Studio Slur 1 OF 1 PN 111.0253 SLUE: IM'"1'-0' OATS 01103/12 TECH AVA 1-3I3IJPJ I1 Zl01 it.3411Z, FLASHING AT EXPOSED GLU-LAMS - (SHADE STRUCTURE SIM) 1-1/2 l.-0„ TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 R-02.1 GLU-LAM CAP DETAIL ASK Studio SHEET 1 OF 2 PH'. 1110253 SCALE: 1-17 =1'-0' DATE: 04103112 TECH: AVA -��7aa,tlfa �IzOi�f� p-dduzioz IR SPACE l TOP CAP DETAIL 3" = I'-0" „ \ END CAP DETAIL 3" = 1,-0" 4STEN 7;-Idiffilff �lill[R]Wi16 111010G112M ETAL CAP WITH INSECT SCREEN AIR SPACE METALCAP- FASTEN SEALANT TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 R-02.2 GLU-LAM CAP DETAILS ASK Studio SHEET 2 OF 2 PN: 111.02S3 SCALE: 3' =1'0' DATE: 04W12 TECH: AVA lr_oJ Prepared by: Josh Slattery, Civil Engineer, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319)356-5149 RESOLUTION NO. 12-185 RESOLUTION AWARDING CONTRACT AND AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR TO SIGN AND THE CITY CLERK TO ATTEST A CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT. WHEREAS, Tricon General Construction of Dubuque, Iowa has submitted the lowest responsible bid of $3,341,000 (base bid plus add alternate No. 1) for construction of the above-named project; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area account #4152. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT: 1. The contract for the construction of the above-named project is hereby awarded to Tricon General Construction, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 2. The Mayor is hereby authorized to sign and the City Clerk to attest the contract for construction of the above-named project, subject to the condition that awardee secure adequate performance and payment bond, insurance certificates, and contract compliance program statements. 3. The Parks & Recreation Director is authorized to execute change orders as they may become necessary in the construction of the above-named project. Passed and approved this 17th day of April 20 12 ATTEST: 91 - i2J CITY CLERK MAYOR Approved by L'G City Attorney's Office It was moved by Payne and seconded by trims the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: X X _ X X X X X Pwerg/res/awrdwn tr blood-ph3improv.dm 4112 NAYS: ABSENT: Champion Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and Tricon General Construction. Inc. ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents dated the 15th day of February , 2012, for the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 Improvements Project ('Project'), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1. The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2. This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a. Addenda Numbers 1 ; b. "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, as amended; C. Plans; d. Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; e. Notice to Bidders; f. Note to Bidders; g. Performance and Payment Bond; h. Contract Compliance Program (Anti -Discrimination Requirements); i. Proposal and Bid Documents; and j. This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG -1 3. The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit prices, and extended dollar amounts, are as follows (or shown on an attachment): Concrete Paving — Streb - $344.118 Mechanical — Kondora - $302.000 Electrical — Onley - $249,726 Excavation — PCI - $350,717 Aggregate Piers — PCI - $58,500 Site Utilities — Maxwell - $167,987 4. Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 5. The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of: Three Million, Two Hundred and Seventy -Two Thousand Dollars ($3,272,000.00); City will also award Add Alternate #1 — Rubber Composite Shingles in the amount of: Sixty -Nine Thousand Dollars ($69,000.00 ; For a Total contract amount of: Three Million, Three Hundred and Forty -One Thousand Dollars ($3,341.000.00). DATED this 17th day of April, 2012 (date of Council Award). I_�c�: City By ,4 -.cam /A a -i+-h e- Li ;U- 65 W Mayor ATTEST: City Clerk AG -3 Contractor By Ronald L Richard Owner ATTEST: (Title) (Company Official) Approved By: ity Attorney's Office I: FORM OF PROPOSAL TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA — PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF IOWA CITY NOTICE TO BIDDERS: PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder Tricon General Construction Address of Bidder 2245 Kerper Blvd Suite 2 Dubuque IA 52001 TO: City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 E. Washington St. Iowa City, IA 52240 The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $ Ten Percent (10%) , in accordance with the terms set forth in the "Project Specifications." The undersigned bidder, having examined and det ermined the scope of the Contract Documents, hereby proposes to provide the required labor, services, materials and equipment and to perform the Project as described in the Contract Documents, including Addenda 1 , and , and to do all work at the prices set forth herein. We further propose to do all "Extra Work" which may be required to complete the work contemplated, at unit prices or lump sums to be agreed upon in writing prior to starting such work. ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT EST UNIT EXTENDED QUAN PRICE AMOUNT 1. Mobilization 2. Clearing and Grubbing 3. Site Demolition and Removals— Rubble 4. Site Demolition and Removals — Debris 5. Earthwork 6. Sail Import 7. Erosion Control LS 1 $ /o0 000 $ 100, 000 LS 1 $ 13,Oyo $ 131000 EA 450 $ / 8 $ qq 100 EA 50 sl/60 $ 031gV0 LS 1 $ /90000 $ /90,000 CY 4,500 $ 13 $ 5-6)0 LS S. Rammed Aggregate Pier Soil Reinforcement LS 11 Storm Sewer Water Service LS LS FP -1 1 $ 18,000 $ 1 $661000 $�00 1 $ 61f 000 $ 611000 1 $ 3 000 $ 3900 11. Sanitary Sewer Service LS 1 $ 67 000 $ 6 7 000 12. Site Electrical LS 1 s/0,000 $ / / 3� 000 13. 7° Depth PCC Pavement SY 4,960 $ 32 $ ,S$ -7 20 14. 60 Depth PCC Pavement SY 3,990 $ 29 $ 1/5-7/0 15. 5" Depth PCC Pavement SF 3,790 , $ 16. 7" Depth Decorative PCC Pavement SF 1,260 $ / Z $ /s / ZO 17. 5" Depth Decorative PCC Pavement SF 5,765 $ )0. $ 5 p 18. Lodge Building LS 1 $46961 71/0 $ /, 6$6, 7ye) 19. Lodge Patio and Wall LS 1 $ /50� 000 $ I r0F Coo 20. Open Shelter EA 2 $ 6 boo $ 7Z� 000 21. Donor and Accent Walls LS 1 $ 00b $ 15"000 22. Trash Enclosure LS 1 $Z�00o $ 2y� O00 23. Park Sign LS 1 $34Geo $ 13r 000 24. Limestone Retaining Wall LS 1 $ y9�006 $t/g0,90 25. Site Furniture LS 1 $ 1-00 $ S, So 0 26. Shoreline Stabilization LS 1 $ /%coo $ 1770o0 27. Irrigation Installation LS 1 $ I,goo $ 9 28. Plantings LS 1 $ 4,000 $ go, 000 29. Seeding LS 1 $ Zy006 $ 2y 000 BASE BID TOTAL EXTENDED AMOUNT $ 30. Add Alternate 41 - Rubber Composite Shingles LS 1 $ 6 9, 000 $ 6 9 oon 31. Add Alternate #2 - Fishing Jetty LS 1 $ I $ Doo $ /330 000 32. Add Alternate #3 - Canoe Landing LS 1 $ 24000 $ 2/1, oop 33. Add Alternate #4 — Planters EA 7 $ 3� SO6 $ 2- FP-2 FP-2 F r The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the n..Mw..nL.nnL .�.e .c Fnll..nc• e S M1 -. 00 /:K rrl.a N I �' 'N ndo 114M50rnvv /Oov/o- — 45 /%� 000 NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. Finn: Tricon General Construction Signature: Printed Name:. Ron Richard Title: Owner Address: 2245 Kerper Blvd, Suite 2 Dubuque, 1A 52001 Phone: 563.588.9516 Contact: Ron Richard FP -3 Bond No. 08975990 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BIOND Tricon General Construction, Inc. 2245 Kerper Blvd., Suite 2, Dubuque, IA 52001 (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) as Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Three Million, Three Hundred Forty -One Thousand. and 00/100 Dollars ($3,341,000.00) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of April 17,2012 entered into a (date) written Agreement with Owner for Terry Trueblood Recreation Area — Phase 3 Improvements Project; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Snyder & Associates. Inc.. of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B. Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1. Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2. Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even i though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient i am funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C. The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of One U years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D. No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS 20 DAY OF April 2012 IN THE PRESENCE OF: Tricon General Construction, Inc. (Priv ipal) ora-cr�ichard Witness (Title) Owner Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland �ety) Witness Todd Schaap, (Title) Attomey-in-Fact 1400 American Lane (Street) Schaumburg, IL 60196 (City, State, Zip) (262) 798.2297 (Phone) PB -2 Power of Attorney FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, a corporation of the State of Maryland, by DAVID S. HEWETT, Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant Secretary, in pursuance of authority granted by Article Vl, Section 2, of the By -Laws of said �y, which aze set forth on the reverse side hereof and are hereby certified to be in full force and effect on the d ereby nominate, constitute and appoint Thomas O. CHAMBERS and Todd SCHAAP jjep, sin, EACH its true and lawful agent and Attorney -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal 0 and as its act and deed: any and all bonds and undertakings, and t a ve h p gs in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Co y,@ a I IA d nd purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged b 1 cted pany at its office in Baltimore, Md., in their own proper persons. Th�a re ehalf of Thomas 0. CHAMBERS, Todd SCHAAP, dated March 5, 2008.�uu� ��� The said Assistant Sr�es4ieYeby certify that the extract set forth on the reverse side hereof is a true copy of Article VI, Section 2, of the By-LWvs said Company, and is now in force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Vice -President and Assistant Secretary have hereunto subscribed their names and affixed the Corporate Seal of the said FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, this 24th day of February, A.D.2010. ATTEST: 'ro orvosr o a tn� 4'�+m State of Maryland1 ss: City of Baltimore f FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND Gregory E. Murray Assistant Secretary By: David S. Hewett Vice President On this 24th day of February, A.D. 2010, before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Maryland, duly commissioned and qualified, came DAVID S. HEWETT, Vice President, and GREGORY E. MURRAY, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, to me personally known to be the individuals and officers described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and they each acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly swom, severally and each for himself deposeth and saith, that they are the said officers of the Company aforesaid, and that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Company, and that the said Corporate Seal and their signatures as such officers were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporation. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal the day and year fust above written. `pomun,� Maria D. Adamski Notary Public My Commission Expires: July 8, 2015 POA -F 184-0010 EXTRACT FROM BY-LAWS OF FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND "Article VI, Section 2. The Chairman of the Board, or the President, or any Executive Vice -President, or any of the Senior Vice -Presidents or Vice -Presidents specially authorized so to do by the Board of Directors or by the Executive Committee, shall have power, by and with the concurrence of the Secretary or any one of the Assistant Secretaries, to appoint Resident Vice -Presidents, Assistant Vice -Presidents and Attomeys-in-Fact as the business of the Company may require, or to authorize any person or persons to execute on behalf of the Company any bonds, undertaking, recognizances, stipulations, policies, contracts, agreements, deeds, and releases and assignments of judgements, decrees, mortgages and instruments in the nature of mortgages .... and to affix the seal of the Company thereto." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is still in full force and effect on the date of this certificate; and I do further certify that the Vice -President who executed the said Power of Attorney was one of the additional Vice -Presidents specially authorized by the Board of Directors to appoint any Attorney -in -Fact as provided in Article VI, Section 2, of the By -Laws of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND. This Power of Attorney and Certificate may be signed by facsimile under and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the FIDELITY AND DEPOSIT COMPANY OF MARYLAND at a meeting duly called and held on the 10th day of May, 1990. RESOLVED: "That the facsimile or mechanically reproduced seal of the company and facsimile or mechanically reproduced signature of any Vice -President, Secretary, or Assistant Secretary of the Company, whether made heretofore or hereafter, wherever appearing upon a certified copy of any power of attorney issued by the Company, shall be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." IN TESTIMONY WhIEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Company, this 20 day of April 1 2012 . 4a -7 At Assistant Secretary STATE OF WISCONSIN ) COUNTY OF Racine ) ON THIS 20th day of April _'2012 before me, a notary public, within and for said County and State, personally appeared Todd Schaap to me personally known, who being duly sworn, upon oath did say that he is the Attorney -in -Fact of and for the Fidelity and Deposit Company of Maryland , a corporation of Maryland , created, organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Maryland ; that the corporate seal affixed to the foregoing within instrument is the seal of the said Company; that the seal was affixed and the said instrument was executed by authority of its Board of Directors; and the said Todd Schaap did acknowledge that he/she executed the said instrument as the free act and deed of said Company. L. Gedeme'r" Notary Public, Racine Cot My Commission Expires 211 P1��O L. GEDEMER OP ID: BW1 ,a` oRo CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE MIDD DATE ( 04/126/12611 WY) 2 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: It the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the pollcy(les) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terns and condItions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER 563-587-600 Cottingham & Butler, Inc. 563-583-733 800 Main Street 563-583-7339Ea<; Dubuque, IA 52001 Aaron Krogman AN PHFAX No: ADDRESS: PRODUCER CUSTOMFRID,TRICON2 INSURERS) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC0 INSURED Tricon General Construction, INSURERA: Hartford Casualty Ins Co. 29424 INSURERS: Great American Insurance Group Inc.; Tricon Concrete Contractors, Inc. 2245 Kerper Blvd Dubuque, IA 52001 INSURERL: NSURERD: NSURER E: 83UENOE5024 COVERAGES CERTIFICATENUMBER: REVISION R: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCEpOLILYNUMBER 410 E Washington Street ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Iowa City, IA 52240-1826 MI00YEFF OLIC WODIM LIMITS GENERAL LIABILTY EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,00 A X COMMERCA. GENERAL LIABILITY 83UENOE5024 11/01/11 11/01/12 PREMISESEeoecumnce $ 300,00 CLAIMS -ME O OCCUR M MED EXP (My one person) $ 10,00 PERSONAL &MV INJURY $ 1,000,00 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,00 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,00 $ POLICY X PRo- LOC A AUTOMOSILELUIBILRY X ANY AUTO 83UENOE5024 11/01/11 11/01112 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ 1,000,00 (Ea nccldeN) BODILY IMAM (Par person) $ ALLOWNEDAUTOS BODILY INJURY(Per sccident) $ SCHEDULED ALTOS HIREDAUS TO PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ NON-OWNED AUTOS $ X UMBRELLA LIAR X OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000,00 AGGREGATE $ B E%LESS LII CLAIMS-hNDE T00019046302 11/01/11 11101112 DEDUCTIBLE $ $ X RETENTON 0 1 WORKERS COMPENSATION 1 X I WC A O OR A AND EMPLOYERS' UABRrY IN ANY PROPRIETORIPARINERADO=CUIIVE Y 83WEOE5023 11/01/11 11/01/12 EL. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,00 EL. DISEASE -EA ENPLO $ 1,000,0D OFRCERIMEMBER EX UDEDI (Mandatory In NH) NIA EL. DISEASE-POLICVLIMR $ 1DDD DD DIf Etll sc obe0undr A NSO DESCMPTIONOFOPERATONSILOCATIONSIVE!OGLES (AlIach ACORD 101, AddIdonal Remarks Schedule, If mom space is mclulrad) RE: Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase 3 Improvements City of Iowa City heggeneral and auto liability policies include a blanket automatic dditional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status on a rimaryand non-contributory basis onV when there is a written contract neerrnn nTe unr nvo nAMnCI I ATInhI CIOFIA6 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE City City Of IOWA CI THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN 410 E Washington Street ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Iowa City, IA 52240-1826 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE O 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2009/09) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NOTEPAD: HOLDER CODE CI0FIA6 TRIM,z INSURED'smme Tricon General Construction, OP ID: BWt PAGE 2 DATE 04/26112 02-1 5d(3) mm=mm� Prepared by: Josh Slattery, Civil Engineer, 410 E. Washington St., Iowa City, IA 52240 (319) 358-5149 RESOLUTION NO. 14-31 RESOLUTION ACCEPTING THE WORK FOR THE TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT WHEREAS, the Engineering Division has recommended that the work for construction of the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area - Phase Three Improvements Project, as included in a contract between the City of Iowa City and Tricon General Construction of Dubuque, Iowa, dated April 17, 2012, be accepted; and WHEREAS, the Engineer's Report and the performance and payment bond have been filed in the City Clerk's office; and WHEREAS, funds for this project are available in the Terry Trueblood Recreation Area account # R4152; and WHEREAS, the final contract price is $3,587,042.34. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, THAT said improvements are hereby accepted by the City of Iowa City, Iowa. Passed and approved this 18th day of February , 20_L4___. MAYOR Approved by ATTEST: CITY CL RK City Attorney's Office lq 1 � It was moved by trims and seconded by Payne the Resolution be adopted, and upon roll call there were: AYES: Pweng/masters/acptwork, dm 1/14 NAYS: ABSENT: Botchway Dickens Dobyns Hayek Mims Payne Throgmorton WE i I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed �ptE OF /p� Professional Landscape Architect 5 q under the laws of the State of Iowa. DONALD P. MARNER �/4!I'L q� LANDSCAPE Donald P. Morner. ASLA Date r^ ARCHITECT `✓�O 31 q �Qv License Number 314 y9l /ANDS�pPages or sheets covered by this seal: S 1- 5 S 1 J, License Expires: Seib- 5e2( June 30, 2012 y�`J QPpF ESS lOp4� Fyc `r TROY A. gym, CULVER A I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer un er the laws 0 t State of Iowa. 2 � 2 roy . Culver. P.E. ate License Number 20165 My License Renewal Date is Decenber 31, 2013 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: J%75 - SP91 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly li ensed rofessional Engineer QPpFESSlpyq� un er th ow:sof the State of Iowa. 414 IZ TIMOTHY J. Ti 6tIMatson, P.E. Date MO SON A Licens umber 12103 12103 My License Renewal Date is Decenber 31, 2012 IOWA * Pages or sheets covered by this seal: 0��F ESS I py9l''. JUSTIN B. OLSON m 19500 2 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. signatu711 Justin B. Olson 19500 My license renewal date is December 31, 20IZ, Pages or sheets covered by this seal: ZJIyll2 date I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed .."""""i'i•i Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. e�6ERRY W.�l °'�nat Ger Wilwerdin � / date WILWERDING sm g 16783 g 16743 c s . My license renewal date is December 31,A/2 Pages or sheets covered b this seal: N NOT TO SCALE CONSTRUCTION PLANS FOR TE' R T EME M99EC' EATIOO AREA pG�/Q�C� �3 D�M]pG30OMC�fM]C��1�� IOWA CITY, IOWA IOWA CITY, IOWA VICINITY MAP INDEX OF SHEETS SP1. TITLE SHEET SP2, GENERAL INFORMATION SP3. PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SITE MAP SP4. SITE LAYOUT PLAN - AREA NO. 1 SP5. SITE LAYOUT, GRADING AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN - AREA NO.2 SP6. SITE UTILITY PLAN -AREA NO. 1 SP7. SITE DIMENSION PLAN -AREA NO. 1 SP8. GRADING AND STORM SEWER PLAN -AREA N0. 1 SP9, STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN -AREA NO. 1 SP10, LANDSCAPE PLAN -AREA N0. 1 SP11. 1 HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE PORTION OF THIS SP12. TECHNICAL SUBMISSION DESCRIBED BELOW WAS •„�a;'1;'�i+as:� �s)r�f°�f PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION Q , ........ •.�•..�?a AND THAT I AMA DULY LICENSED ARCHITECT UNDER ,`,e•����(jf Q; THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF IOWA. , mom.-, SP15. u a° NOICH".7l J. o's'r. I MICAAEL J. KASTNER, AIA DATE -`i• 534 �`ra� SITE p e � •� DISCIP41NE: ARCHITECTURE SITE LAYOUT PLAN -AREA N0. 3 'oiy� ®....>•• pe0`` IOWA REGISTRATION NO.: 5346 (�hnl�Jo 4151511*SS SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL: A6r+•- Arx)i I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly licensed �ptE OF /p� Professional Landscape Architect 5 q under the laws of the State of Iowa. DONALD P. MARNER �/4!I'L q� LANDSCAPE Donald P. Morner. ASLA Date r^ ARCHITECT `✓�O 31 q �Qv License Number 314 y9l /ANDS�pPages or sheets covered by this seal: S 1- 5 S 1 J, License Expires: Seib- 5e2( June 30, 2012 y�`J QPpF ESS lOp4� Fyc `r TROY A. gym, CULVER A I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer un er the laws 0 t State of Iowa. 2 � 2 roy . Culver. P.E. ate License Number 20165 My License Renewal Date is Decenber 31, 2013 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: J%75 - SP91 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly li ensed rofessional Engineer QPpFESSlpyq� un er th ow:sof the State of Iowa. 414 IZ TIMOTHY J. Ti 6tIMatson, P.E. Date MO SON A Licens umber 12103 12103 My License Renewal Date is Decenber 31, 2012 IOWA * Pages or sheets covered by this seal: 0��F ESS I py9l''. JUSTIN B. OLSON m 19500 2 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. signatu711 Justin B. Olson 19500 My license renewal date is December 31, 20IZ, Pages or sheets covered by this seal: ZJIyll2 date I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed .."""""i'i•i Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. e�6ERRY W.�l °'�nat Ger Wilwerdin � / date WILWERDING sm g 16783 g 16743 c s . My license renewal date is December 31,A/2 Pages or sheets covered b this seal: N NOT TO SCALE CONSTRUCTION PLANS FOR TE' R T EME M99EC' EATIOO AREA pG�/Q�C� �3 D�M]pG30OMC�fM]C��1�� IOWA CITY, IOWA IOWA CITY, IOWA VICINITY MAP INDEX OF SHEETS SP1. TITLE SHEET SP2, GENERAL INFORMATION SP3. PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SITE MAP SP4. SITE LAYOUT PLAN - AREA NO. 1 SP5. SITE LAYOUT, GRADING AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN - AREA NO.2 SP6. SITE UTILITY PLAN -AREA NO. 1 SP7. SITE DIMENSION PLAN -AREA NO. 1 SP8. GRADING AND STORM SEWER PLAN -AREA N0. 1 SP9, STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN -AREA NO. 1 SP10, LANDSCAPE PLAN -AREA N0. 1 SP11. PAVEMENT JOINTING PLAN -AREA NO. 1 SP12. SITE DETAILS SP13. SITE DETAILS SP14. SITE DETAILS SP15. LODGE PATIO DETAILS SP 16. SITE DETAILS SP17. SITE DETAILS SP18. SITE LAYOUT PLAN -AREA N0. 3 SP 19. DIMENSION PLAN -AREA NO. 4 SP20. GRADING PLAN -AREA NO. 4 SP21, FISHING JETTIES A001, ABBREVIATIONS AND ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS A002. WALL TYPES A101. FLOORPLAN A102. UPPER AND ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS A111, ROOF PLAN A201. EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A301. BUILDING SECTIONS A302. BUILDING SECTIONS A311. WALL SECTIONS A312. WALL SECTIONS A313. WALL SECTIONS A314. WALL SECTIONS A421. INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A422, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FES 21201 A431. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A501. DETAILS A502, DETAILS A503 DETAILS A504, DETAILS A510. INTERIOR DETAILS A601. WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES A602. WINDOW AND DOOR DETAILS A701. SHELTER PLAN AND DETAILS A801. WALL AND ENCLOSURE DETAILS S1, STRUCTURAL NOTES S2. FOOTING AND FOUNDATION PLAN - LODGE S3. ROOF FRAMING PLAN -LODGE S4. SECTIONS AND DETAILS S5. SECTIONS AND DETAILS S6. SECTIONS AND DETAILS S7. STRUCTURAL PLANS - SHELTER P1, PLUMBING FOUNDATION PLAN P2 PARTIAL PLUMBING FLOOR PLANS P3, PARTIAL PLUMBING CEILING PLANS P4. PLUMBING DETAILS P5. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULES P6. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULES MG1, MECHANICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND & GENERAL NOTES M1, HVAC FLOOR PLAN M2. HVAC DETAILS M3. HVAC SCHEDULES ES1. ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN - AREA NO. 1 ES2, ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN - AREA NO, 4 E1. LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN E2. POWER FLOOR PLAN E3. SPECIAL SYSTEMS FLOOR FLAN E4, ELECTRICAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES E5. ELECTRICAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES m a � o (Ii M V J N (n � LO U r N M O w '6 � Y r m M U a LO N V U O t- C7 C o m Z U D G G Z 12 W H a- iLL O Q N OBD N J N d `r` d in ib cn 0� W o � M N M" N W Oo O a W M W ca C) CD Q 0UJI _LON N 1 o c U)r � a Z Y t`QN N a1 W , Q Z o L, a � W Q V V W 0 Q Ot/) o a J In old W LU H Uj W VUj yj 111,0253 Sheet SP1 >w P C GENERALNOTES A. THE UTILITIES SHOWN HAVE BEEN LOCATED FROM FIELD SURVEY INFORMATION AND/OR RECORDS OBTAINED. THE SURVEYOR MAKES NO GUARANTEE THAT THE UTILITIES SHOWN COMPRISE ALL SUCH UTILITIES IN THE AREA, EITHER IN SERVICE OR ABANDONED. THE SURVEYOR FURTHER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE UTILITIES SHOWN ARE IN THE EXACT LOCATION INDICATED. VERIFY LOCATION OF ALL UTILITIES BEFORE CONSTRUCTION, B. NOTIFY UTILITY PROVIDERS PRIOR TO BEGINNING ANY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES AND COORDINATE WITH UTILITY PROVIDERS AS NECESSARY DURING CONSTRUCTION. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DETERMINING EXISTENCE, EXACT LOCATION, AND DEPTH OF ALL UTILITIES. PROTECT ALL UTILITY LINES AND STRUCTURES NOT SHOWN FOR REMOVAL. ANY DAMAGES TO UTILITY ITEMS NOT SHOWN FOR REMOVAL OR MODIFICATION SHALL BE REPAIRED TO THE UTILITY OWNER'S SPECIFICATIONS AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE, C. CONSTRUCTION OF ALL STREET, DRIVES AND UTILITY IMPROVEMENTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE IOWA CITY MUNICIPAL DESIGN STANDARDS AND THE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. D. LENGTH OF UTILITIES SHOWN ON PLANS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE TO CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE AND INCLUDE FLARED END SECTIONS. E. ALL TRAFFIC CONTROL SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH IOWA CITY REQUIREMENTS AND AS SET FORTH IN THE MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES (MUTCD). WHEN CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES OBSTRUCT PORTIONS OF ANY PUBLIC STREET ROADWAY FLAGGERS SHALL BE PROVIDED, WHICH CONFORM TO THE MUTCD IN APPEARANCE, EQUIPMENT AND ACTIONS. F. NOTIFY OWNER, ENGINEER AND CITY OF IOWA CITY AT LEAST 48 HOURS PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK, G. CONSTRUCT MANHOLES AND APPURTENANCES AS WORK PROGRESSES. BACKFILL WITH SUITABLE MATERIAL AND COMPACT AS SPECIFIED. H. IN THE EVENT OF A DISCREPANCY BETWEEN THE QUANTITY ESTIMATES AND THE DETAILED PLANS, THE DETAILED PLANS SHALL GOVERN, I. PROPOSED IMPROVEMENTS OF THIS SITE ARE BASED ON AVAILABLE INFORMATION AT THE TIME OF LAYOUT. ANY DEVIATIONS OR CONFLICTS BETWEEN THIS PLAN AND FIELD CONDITIONS ARE TO BE REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY AND PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OF IMPROVEMENTS. J. ALL FIELD TILES ENCOUNTERED DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE RECONNECTED AND NOTED ACCORDINGLY ON THE AS -BUILT DOCUMENTS, K. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR LAYOUT VERIFICATION OF ALL SITE IMPROVEMENTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. L. CONTRACTOR TO LOAD AND TRANSPORT ALL MATERIALS CONSIDERED TO BE UNDESIRABLE AND NOT TO BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO AN APPROVED OFF-SITE WASTE SITE. M. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MAINTAINING A SAFE SITE AND OPERATING SAFELY IN AND OUT OF THE PROJECT SITE. THE MAIN ENTRANCE, PERIMETER TRAIL, EXISTING MARINA BUILDING AND ASSOCIATED PARKING AND BOAT RAMP WILL REMAIN OPEN TO THE PUBLIC THROUGHOUT THE YEAR. N. ALL PROPOSED CONTOURS AND SPOT ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE FINISHED GRADES AND/OR TOP OF PAVING SLAB (GUTTER), UNLESS 0. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CLEANING DIRT AND DEBRIS FROM PUBLIC STREETS, PARK DRIVES, SIDEWALKS, AND TRAILS CAUSED BY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES IN A TIMELY MANNER. P. THE ADJUSTMENT OF ANY EXISTING UTILITY APPURTANENCES TO FINAL GRADE IS CONSIDERED INCIDENTAL TO THIS PROJECT. Q. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE NATURAL GAS, ELECTRICAL, TELEPHONE AND ANY OTHER FRANCHISE UTILITY SERVICES WITH UTILITY SERVICE PROVIDER AND THE OWNER PRIOR TO, AND THROUGHOUT, CONSTRUCTION. R. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY CROSSINGS AND MAINTAIN MINIMUM 18" VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE BETWEEN UTILITIES. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE UTILITY ROUTING AND VERIFY CONNECTION LOCATIONS AND INVERTS TO ALL BUILDING STRUCTURES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. S. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBSERVING SITE TO UNDERSTAND EXISTING CONDITIONS, PROJECT CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WORK PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF BID. T. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE ANY DEBRIS OR RUBBLE WHICH EXIST WITHIN THE PROPOSED IMPROVEMENTS OR ENCOUNTERED DURING CLEARING AND GRUBBING OR GRADING ACTIVITIES. DEBRIS OR RUBBLE TO BE HAULED OFF AND PROPERLY DISPOSED OF AS INDICATED IN CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. SEE BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS. U. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL SOIL EROSION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS OF THE IOWA CODE. THE IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES (DNR)NPDES PERMIT, AND LOCAL ORDINANCES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL NECESSARY STEPS TO PROTECT AGAINST EROSION AND DUST POLLUTION FROM THIS PROJECT SITE AND ALL OFF-SITE BORROW OR DEPOSIT AREAS DURING PERFORMANCE OR AS RESULT OF PERFORMANCE, TEMPORARY SEEDING, MULCHING AND SITE STABILIZATION IS CONSIDERED INCIDENTAL TO THIS PROJECT. V. THE OWNER WILL OBTAIN THE IOWA DNR NDPES PERMIT FOR THE PROJECT OF WHICH THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO BECOME A CO -PERMITTEE. THE CONTRACTOR WILL ALSO BE REQUIRED TO FOLLOW AND UPDATE THE STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN AS NECESSARY FOR THE PROJECT THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION AND UNTIL THE 'NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION' IS APPROVED . W. CONTRACTOR TO SEED ALL AREAS DISTURBED BY CONSTRUCTION. X. CONTRACTOR TO CONSTRUCT SUBGRADE OF ALL PROPOSED BUILDINGS, FOOTINGS, AND PAVEMENTS AS PER PLANS, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT. Y. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL A 6' HIGH TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK CONSTRUCTION FENCE AROUND AREAS N0.1 & 2 AS SHOWN AND NOTED ON PLANS, PLACE SWING GATES AT SITE ENTRANCE AND AS NECESSARY FOR ACCESS WITH EQUIPMENT. GATES TO BE CLOSED AND LOCKED AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY. TEMPORARY ORANGE CONSTRUCTION FENCE SHALL BE PLACED AROUND AREAS NO.3 AND NO.4 AS NECESSARY TO KEEP PUBLIC OUT OF CONSTRUCTION AREAS, CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL FENCING AT THE END OF THE PROJECT. Z. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING SIGNS FOR THE PROJECT SITE TO NOTIFY THE PUBLIC. CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO PROVIDE A MINIMUM 5'X 5' PROJECT SIGN ON POSTS WITH THE PROJECT NAME, CONTRACTOR NAME, AND A COLORED GRAPHIC OF THE PARK SITE. THE COLORED GRAPHIC WILL BE PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR. BENCHMARKS BM#231. JOHNSON COUNTY BENCHMARK NORTH=600758.53 EAST=2178847.45 ELEVATION= 652.83 BERNTSEN TOP SECURITY ROD MONUMENT WITH 2-1/2" DIA. DOMED SURVEY CAP AND PERMANENT MAGNET ENCASED IN 6" DIA. PVC PIPE WITH NGS STYLE ALUMINUM ACCESS COVER. CONTROL POINTS CP#1. FOUND 5/8" REBAR WITH YELLOW CAP#8165 NORTH=597786.14 EAST=2178211.57 ELEVATION =648.90' CP#2. FOUND 5/8" REBAR WITH YELLOW CAP#8165 NORTH=598682.05 EAST=2178337.49 CP#3, FOUND 5/8" REBAR WITH ORANGE CAP NORTH=599130.78 EAST=2178622.64 ELEVATION =649.05 EROSION CONTROL NOTES: A. EROSION PROTECTION 1. CODE COMPLIANCE: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL POTENTIAL 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS POLLUTION AND SOIL EROSION CONTROL REQUIREMENTS OF THE IOWA CODE, THE IOWA OF THE GENERAL PERMIT AND SWPPP, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES (IDNR) NPDES PERMIT, THE U.S. CLEAN WATER FOLLOWING: ACT AND ANY LOCAL ORDINANCES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL NECESSARY STEPS TO PROTECT AGAINST EROSION AND POLLUTION FROM THIS PROJECT SITE AND a. INSTALLING PERIMETER AND FINAL SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES DOWNSTREAM ALL OFF-SITE BORROW OR DEPOSIT AREAS DURING PERFORMANCE OR AS A RESULT OF OF SOIL DISTURBING ACTIVITIES PRIOR TO SITE CLEARING AND GRADING OPERATIONS. PERFORMANCE. 2. DAMAGE CLAIMS: THE CONTRACTOR WILL HOLD THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT/ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY TYPE WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM DAMAGES TO ADJOINING PUBLIC OR PRIVATE PROPERTY, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY FEES INCURRED TO OWNER, FURTHER, IF THE CONTRACTOR FAILS TO TAKE NECESSARY STEPS TO PROMPTLY REMOVE EARTH SEDIMENTATION OR DEBRIS WHICH COMES ONTO ADJOINING PUBLIC OR PRIVATE PROPERTY, THE OWNER MAY, BUT NEED NOT, REMOVE SUCH ITEMS AND DEDUCT THE COST THEREOF FROM AMOUNTS DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR. B. STORM WATER DISCHARGE PERMIT 1. THIS PROJECT REQUIRES COVERAGE UNDER THE NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 FOR STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES FROM THE IDNR, AS REQUIRED BY THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA). THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ALL SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH AND FULFILLMENT OF ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 INCLUDING CREATING OR MAINTAINING THE STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP). 2. ALL DOCUMENTS RELATED TO THE STORM WATER DISCHARGE PERMIT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE NOTICE OF INTENT, PROOF OF PUBLICATIONS, DISCHARGE AUTHORIZATION LETTER, SWPPP, SITE INSPECTION DIARY, AND OTHER ITEMS, SHALL BE KEPT ON SITE AT ALL TIMES AND MUST BE PRESENTED TO ANY JURISDICTIONAL AGENCIES UPON REQUEST. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THE NPDES PERMIT REQUIREMENTS IS IN VIOLATION OF THE CLEAN WATER ACT AND THE CODE OF IOWA. 3. A "NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION" MUST BE FILED BY THE OWNER WITH THE IDNR UPON FINAL STABILIZATION OF THE DISTURBED SITE AND REMOVAL OF ALL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MEASURES. ALL PLANS, INSPECTION REPORTS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS MUST BE RETAINED FOR A PERIOD OF THREE YEARS AFTER PROJECT COMPLETION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL RETAIN A RECORD COPY AND PROVIDE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS TO THE OWNER UPON SUBMITTAL OF THE NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION. C. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN: 1. THE STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP) IS A SEPARATE DOCUMENT IN ADDITION TO THESE PLAN DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD REFER TO THE SWPPP FOR ADDITIONAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS AND MODIFICATIONS TO THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN MADE DURING CONSTRUCTION. 2. THE SWPPP ILLUSTRATES GENERAL MEASURES TO BE TAKEN FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE PROJECT'S NPDES PERMIT COVERAGE. ALL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES REQUIRED AS A RESULT OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE ALL ACTIONS NECESSARY FOR COMPLIANCE WITH PERMIT REQUIREMENTS. b. PRESERVING EXISTING VEGETATION IN AREAS NOT NEEDED FOR CONSTRUCTION AND LIMITING TO A MINIMUM THE TOTAL AREA DISTURBED BY CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS AT ANY TIME. c. MAINTAINING ALL TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL MEASURES IN WORKING ORDER, INCLUDING CLEANING, REPAIRING, REPLACEMENT, AND SEDIMENT REMOVAL THROUGHOUT THE PERMIT PERIOD. CLEANING OF SILT CONTROL DEVICES SHALL BEGIN WHEN THE FEATURES HAVE LOST 50% OF THEIR ORIGINAL CAPACITY. d. INSPECTION OF THE PROJECT AREA AND CONTROL DEVICES BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ASSIGNED BY THE CONTRACTOR EVERY SEVEN CALENDAR DAYS AND WITHIN 48 HOURS AFTER EACH RAIN EVENT OF 1/2 INCH OR GREATER OR HEAVY SNOW MELT. THE FINDINGS OF THESE INSPECTIONS AND ANY RESULTING ACTIONS SHALL BE RECORDED IN THE SWPPP WITH A COPY SUBMITTED WEEKLY TO THE OWNER DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVISE THE SWPPP AND IMPLEMENT ANY RECOMMENDED MEASURES WITHIN 7 DAYS. e. PREVENTING ACCUMULATION OF EARTH AND DEBRIS ON ADJOINING PUBLIC OR PRIVATE PROPERTIES, INCLUDING STREETS, DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CONSTRUCTION DRAINAGEWAYS, OR UNDERGROUND SEWERS CAUSED BY ACTIVITIES. REMOVE ANY ACCUMULATION OF EARTH OR DEBRIS IMMEDIATELY AND TAKE REMEDIAL ACTIONS FOR FUTURE PREVENTION. f. PROVIDING NECESSARY CONTROL MEASURES SUCH AS SILT BARRIERS, EROSION CONTROL MATS, MULCH, DITCH CHECKS OR RIPRAP AS SOON AS AREAS REACH THEIR FINAL GRADES. PROVIDING INLET AND OUTLET CONTROL MEASURES AS SOON AS STORM SEWERS ARE INSTALLED. ADDITIONAL CONTROL MEASURES FROM THOSE SHOWN ON THE PLAN MAY BE REQUIRED, INSTALL AS CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS PROGRESS TO ENSURE RUNOFF CONTROL. g. SEEDING AND MULCHING UNDEVELOPED, DISTURBED AREAS WITH COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE TEMPORARY SEED MIX OR PERMANENT SEED MIX/SOD AS SOON AS PRACTICAL UPON COMPLETION OR DELAY OF GRADING OPERATIONS. SEED MIXTURE AND MULCH APPLIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SUPPLIER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. h. COORDINATING LOCATIONS OF STAGING AREAS WITH THE OWNER AND SWPPP. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN THE SWPPP, STAGING AREAS SHOULD CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING: JOB TRAILERS, FUELING / VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AREA, TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES, MATERIALS STORAGE, AND CONCRETE WASHOUT FACILITY. CONTROL RUNOFF FROM STAGING AREAS WITH DIVERSION BERMS AND/OR SILT BARRIERS AND DIRECT TO A SEDIMENT BASIN OR OTHER CONTROL DEVICE WHERE POSSIBLE. WATER FROM CONCRETE WASHOUT TO BE CONTAINED AND NOT ALLOWED TO RUNOFF AWAY FROM WASHOUT FACILITY. i. REMOVAL OF ALL TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MEASURES AND SITE WASTE PRIOR TO FILING OF THE "NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION". LEGEND Features Existinq Proposed Spot Elevation 93 FEB i 2012 Contour Elevation �-93` /93J y: sq em Fence (Barbed, Field, Hog) —xx— 0 Fence (Chain Link) — m Fence (Wood) • JQ Fence (Silt) m .r Filter Sock d1=Tr Tree Line Tree Stump fi �✓ Deciduous Tree or Shrub Q Coniferous Tree or Shrub T 0 Underground Telephone T — T — Overhead Telephone _0T— — OT — Fiber Optic Telephone FO —FO— FO— Underground Electric Underground E — E — Overhead Electric OE —OE — Underground Television TV —TV— Overhead Television OTV— —OTV— Cos Main with Size 4" G— —4" G— High Pressure Gas Main with Size —4" HPG— —4" HPG— Low Pressure Gas Main with Size —4" LPG— —4" LPG— Water Main with Size 8" W_ S" W _ Sanitary Sewer with Size 8" S Sanitary Manhole o O CITY FILE N0. PA 261 12" ST 12" ST Storm Sewer with Size N Storm Manhole 0 Single Storm Sewer Intake O 0 Double Storm Sewer Intake E:= m Fire Hydrant JQ Fire Hydrant on Building m .r Water Main Valve oa Water Service Valve Well O �✓ Utility Pole Guy Anchor T t Utility Pole with Light o -a Utility Pole with Transformer Or Street Light o Yard Light (� Electric Box 11 EB Electric Transformer ❑ 0 Traffic Sign AIL Telephone Junction Box ETI L Telephone Manhole OO Gas Valve �Gp Gas Manhole 0 Gas Apparatus Cable TV Junction Box O Cable TV Manhole O Fence Post or Guard Post • Underground Storage Tank =T) Above Ground Storage Tank CAST L U Sign -0- Satellite Dish cy Mailbox f U Soil Boring + CITY FILE N0. PA 261 O ME _Ld - au _ Ll0 v Mm US W W M C9 C9 U W a O N � Q L M a w U M W CO 0 Oct W N N Z�M zL6 a (6YLr) tiz C-4 N a W Q Z Q W I== � W Q 0 W C) Q Z O O cn O a Q C W O W= 9 W Q M W Z W 'W V 111.0253 Sheet SP2 r m N o m .r U N �✓ m � t U) N 0 U L Z N M O L U W M LO N U U O a U F C 29 U o Z Z Y n W + It LL O ME _Ld - au _ Ll0 v Mm US W W M C9 C9 U W a O N � Q L M a w U M W CO 0 Oct W N N Z�M zL6 a (6YLr) tiz C-4 N a W Q Z Q W I== � W Q 0 W C) Q Z O O cn O a Q C W O W= 9 W Q M W Z W 'W V 111.0253 Sheet SP2 I Y PROJECT DESCRIPTION TERRY TRUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA - PHASE 3 IMPROVEMENTS, CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING: BASE BID1 CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARK IMPROVEMENTS TO INCLUDE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, SITE DEMOLITION, GRADING, EROSION CONTROL, UTILITIES, DRIVES, PARKING, TRAILS, LODGE BUILDING, PARK SHELTERS, PAVEMENT, WALLS, PRAIRIE SEEDING, SURFACE RESTORATION AND ASSOCIATED WORK. ADD ALTERNATE NOA: THE ADDITIONAL COST FOR PROVIDING RUBBERIZED COMPOSITE SHINGLES FOR THE LODGE, PARK SHELTERS AND ASSOCIATED WORK. ADD ALTERNATE NO.21 THE ADDITIONAL COST FOR PROVIDING THREE FISHING JETTY IMPROVEMENTS AND ASSOCIATED WORK. ADD ALTERNATE NO.3: THE ADDITIONAL COST FOR PROVIDING CANOE LAUNCH IMPROVEMENTS AND ASSOCIATED WORK. ADD ALTERNATE NO.4: THE ADDITIONAL COST FOR PROVIDING THE 'PRAIRIE STYLE' PLANTERS AND ASSOCIATED WORK. PARK TO BE OPEN TO PUBLIC THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OPERATING IN A SAFE MANNER WHEN MOVING EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IN AND OUT OF THE PARK SITE. THE PARK WILL BE OPEN TO THE PUBLIC AT BOTH ENTRANCES FOR USE OF THE MARINA BUILDING AND ASSOCIATED PARKING AND BOAT RAMP. THE PERIMETER TRAIL WILL ALSO BE AVAILABLE FOR PUBLIC USE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONSTRUCTION FENCING AND SIGNAGE AS NECESSARY DURING CONSTRUCTION. THE PLANS REFLECT RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FENCING AND SIGNAGE. FILED FEB 21 2012 e�� P tl: f'iq C�.k 1oHa City, Iowa SITE MAP 0 250 SCALE (FEET) ti I CITY FILE N0. PA 261 } tL o > M a 9t F M a 0m 0N o !' Y m CJ) �^'+ _ 0,6 I _m d W Q� W Z ZO z U) a 1' Z W N lU) l M o a V U U) N, FE O W N, W a W� Q. Y 0(s V ch Np Z t U p M Lo am N U U a O C9 F Eo Z U Y c_ Z < m U m w w ta ii W a > a 9t cn a p 0m 0N cl)o we a9 _ 0,6 I V♦ V Um W Z ZO z ¢N a 1' Z W — lU) l M o a N m N w FE os W V W a o o� 0(s V ch Np Z cc N M am o a�= wm U W > a 9t cn a � cl)o Lu C) N zom() co C�) W Z z Y a 1' Z o z 0 Q � o a N w FE os W V W Z O U) a 9t W a � a co C�) W o z a to o z 0 � o a a 0o FE os W V W o W V cc o Z H a cl) 0253 Sheet SP3 LLJ cn W J F.L.=642.64 12'' RCP FES V O 7A SITE PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES grass 1B 3 3G -------------- 2B �_- 20o, 1L+ _-- \l 1B 1.1 _- -- -- -__--- x VU 2A vv v Storm Manhole 16 w, 647.81 _ 1B 2F 1B 7C 3B 1A �, 3M 3A 1A 36 3C 4A TYR 3C r 6C 3J / �, 3E N�� NO CURB 3K TY 4C 3E�� / / I 'Ilk 4B 31 / / 3C 3C TYP. r7_71 3K TM3J 31 3C D 31 7G e 0 0 0 �ot)* o a 6A 7L o � e TYR I 5A 31 / 31 7B TYR O\ 31 71) TYR J -yR 3L)TYP 4A)TYR 3D 3F 7F 3C Grass Storm Manhole Rirn=647.71 go Area Intake Rim=643.73 \ \ \ \ \ 3A 'w 8/ 3M 1A\`. E13� 7D 1 1 LINE / pp,, IiIEL FEB 21 2012 Grass � 1A ° l;�n�ret ° 2A Retaining Wall—i 71 aIIT71 TYP. i O i SA i 0013 00 i i Y m Lu F d a - o I W y cn V ^W` L- W L c- 04 0 D: L0 U O_ \ (-4 rn m :O w � 0_ Y rm M U 0 N U (� O F- T F- 0 Z U .1 C E N Z w` IL LL O�Ld �N a"' L V ♦ Ci s co Z � O ¢ N W LL tN') LL N J N 01 `u a Oa N Q, Q L h a w U M Q W co o v♦ m a LugN Lu o _ zs zI a YLO N Q C4 N Q uj cn W W a r � o Caw) W LU Z O p w Ocfj J Z W a 1\ Fes- p W W 111.0253 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet SP4 1. EXISTING FEATURES; PROTECT THE FOLLOWING 5. SIGNS; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: A. PROTECT EXISTING PAVEMENTS TO REMAIN. A. A BLUE SIGN WITH HANDICAP SYMBOL READING "PARKING ONLY'', B. PROTECT EXISTING TREES. "3200 FINE FOR IMPROPER USE" AND "VAN ACCESSIBLE". SECURE SIGN TO C. PROTECT EXISTING UTILITIES. 2 -INCH SQUARE STEEL CHANNEL POST WITH ENAMEL FINISH IN 12 -INCH DIA. CONCRETE FOOTING. SIGN TO BE MOUNTED 60" HIGH. 2. DEMOLITION; REMOVE THE FOLLOWING: B. TRAIL CLOSED SIGN ON WOOD POST. A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR CLEARING AND GRUBBING EXISTING C. 'CONSTRUCTION SITE, DO NOT ENTER' SIGN ON WOOD POST. TREES AND VEGETATION WITHIN CONSTRUCTION LIMITS. B. EXISTING PAVEMENT TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH SAME DEPTH, 6. BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING; WIDTH AND FINISH AS EXISTING. A. LODGE BUILDING. SEE ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND C. REMOVE EXISTING FLARED END SECTION. SEE SHEET SP8. ELECTRICAL PLANS. D. REMOVE EXISTING BAT POLE AND HOUSE. B. SHELTER. SEE ARCHITECTURAL, ELECTRICAL AND STRUCTURAL PLANS, E. LOAD, HAUL, AND PLACE CLEAN SAND FROM EXISTING STOCKPILE TO CANOE C. TRASH ENCLOSURE. SEE ARCHITECTURAL, ELECTRICAL AND STRUCTURAL PLANS. LAUNCH AREA ALONG SHORELINE. F. REMOVE EXISTING FENCE POSTS ALONG EXISTING TREE LINE AND NORTH 7. SITE AMENITIES; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: PROPERTY LINE. A. LIMESTONE RETAINING WALL. SEE DETAIL. G. B. PLANTING BED LIMESTONE EDGER. SEE DETAIL, 3, PAVEMENTS; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: C. LIMESTONE BLOCK. SEE DETAIL. A. FUTURE PARKING AREA. D. PARK ENTRY SIGN. SEE DETAIL. B. PROVIDE 7" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT. E. DONOR WALL. SEE ARCHITECTURAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS. C. 6" PCC CURB. SEE DETAIL. F. ACCENT WALL. SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. D. PROVIDE 6" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT WITH INTEGRAL WALK/CURB WHERE SHOWN. G. INSTALL GLASS RAILING SYSTEM. SEE DETAIL. SEE DETAIL. H. INSTALL WOOD RAILING. SEE WOOD RAILING DETAIL. E. PROVIDE 6" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT. I. ADD ALTERNATE NO. 4: PROVIDE (7) "PRAIRIE PLANTERS" IN LOCATIONS F. PROVIDE 5" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT. SHOWN. SEE DETAIL. G. PROVIDE 7" DEPTH PCC DECORATIVE PAVEMENT. COLOR TO BE 'CHARCOAL' AT J. PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL FOOT & SHOWER TOWER W/DRINKING FOUNTAIN. FULL DEPTH WITH 'SANDSTONE' PATTERN AS PER SCOFIELD SYSTEMS OR SEE DETAIL. APPROVED EQUAL. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. K. PROVIDE (7) BIKE RACKS, SEE DETAIL, H. PROVIDE 5" DEPTH PCC DECORATIVE PAVEMENT. COLOR TO BE L. PROVIDE WOOD BENCH. SEE DETAIL. 'BARCELONA BROWN' AT FULL DEPTH WITH 'RIVER STONE' PATTERN AS PER SCOFIELD SYSTEMS OR APPROVED EQUAL. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. 8. CONSTRUCTION FENCE; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING I. PEDESTRIAN 6' RAMP, SEE DETAIL. WITH A MAXIMUM SLOPE OF A. PROVIDE 6' HIGH TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCE WHERE SHOWN. 8.337.. WHERE SHOWN. B. PROVIDE ORANGE CONSTRUCTION FENCE SECURED TO POSTS AS NECESSARY J. PROVIDE TRUNCATED DOMES AS SHOWN, INSTALL AS PER MANUFACTURER'S FOR VARIOUS CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES, ALONG WITH NECESSARY SIGNAGE RECOMMENDATION. TO NOTIFY PUBLIC. LOCATIONS TO BE DETERMINED DURING CONSTRUCTION K. TAPER CURB IN 6' DISTANCE. FOR AREAS OUTSIDE OF AREA NO. L L. PROVIDE PRECAST PCC PARKING BARRIERS. SEE DETAIL. M. DROP CURB. 4. PAVEMENT MARKINGS; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: A. PAINT PARKING STALL LINES. B. PAINT STATE OF IOWA APPROVED HANDICAP SYMBOL. C. 45° STRIPING AT SON CENTER SPACING WHERE SHOWN. e 0 0 0 �ot)* o a 6A 7L o � e TYR I 5A 31 / 31 7B TYR O\ 31 71) TYR J -yR 3L)TYP 4A)TYR 3D 3F 7F 3C Grass Storm Manhole Rirn=647.71 go Area Intake Rim=643.73 \ \ \ \ \ 3A 'w 8/ 3M 1A\`. E13� 7D 1 1 LINE / pp,, IiIEL FEB 21 2012 Grass � 1A ° l;�n�ret ° 2A Retaining Wall—i 71 aIIT71 TYP. i O i SA i 0013 00 i i Y m Lu F d a - o I W y cn V ^W` L- W L c- 04 0 D: L0 U O_ \ (-4 rn m :O w � 0_ Y rm M U 0 N U (� O F- T F- 0 Z U .1 C E N Z w` IL LL O�Ld �N a"' L V ♦ Ci s co Z � O ¢ N W LL tN') LL N J N 01 `u a Oa N Q, Q L h a w U M Q W co o v♦ m a LugN Lu o _ zs zI a YLO N Q C4 N Q uj cn W W a r � o Caw) W LU Z O p w Ocfj J Z W a 1\ Fes- p W W 111.0253 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet SP4 j a GRADING PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. SEE SHEET SP2 FOR GENERAL INFORMATION AND EROSION CONTROL NOTES. B. ALL SLOPES 3 TO 1 OR STEEPER TO HAVE EROSION MATTING INSTALLED. TEMPORARY ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCT (RECP),TYPE 2.8. INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURES RECOMMENDATIONS. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE FOR ALL AREAS WITHIN CONSTRUCTION LIMITS. D. ALL FIELD TILES ENCOUNTERED DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE RECONNECTED AND NOTED ACCORDINGLY ON THE AS -BUILT DOCUMENTS. E. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR LAYOUT VERIFICATION OF ALL SITE IMPROVEMENTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. F. CONTRACTOR TO LOAD AND TRANSPORT ALL MATERIALS CONSIDERED TO BE UNDESIRABLE TO BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO AN APPROVED OFF-SITE WASTE SITE. G. CONTRACTOR TO STRIP AND STOCKPILE TOPSOIL FROM ALL AREAS TO BE CUT OR FILLED. RESPREAD TO MINIMUM 6" DEPTH TO FINISH GRADES. H. ALL PROPOSED CONTOURS AND SPOT ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE FINISHED GRADES AND/OR TOP OF PAVING SLAB (GUTTER), UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. I. CONTRACTOR TO CONSTRUCT SUBGRADE OF ALL PROPOSED BUILDINGS, FOOTINGS, AND PAVEMENTS AS PER PLANS, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT. SITE LAYOUT - AREA NO. 2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES 1. EXISTING FEATURES; PROTECT THE FOLLOWING A. PROTECT EXISTING TREES. S. PROTECT EXISTING PCC TRAIL. 2. DEMOLITION; REMOVE THE FOLLOWING: A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR CLEARING AND GRUBBING EXISTING TREES AND VEGETATION WITHIN CONSTRUCTION LIMITS, 3. FILTER SOCK, SEE DETAIL. 4. TYPE 1 SEEDING - PRAIRIE MIX: INSTALL 'SHORTGRASS PRAIRIE SEED MIX FOR DRY SAND' SEED MIX AS SUPPLIED BY PRAIRIE MOON NURSERY, 1-866-417-8156. INSTALL AT A RATE OF 12.78 LBS. PER ACRE AS PER SUPPLIER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 5. TYPE 2 SEEDING - WATERWAY MIX: SEEDING. INSTALL 'WATERWAY MIX' SEED MIXTURE AS SUPPLIED BY BIG COUNTRY SEED, NORTH LIBERTY, IOWA - 1-319-560-3263. 6. CONSTRUCTION FENCE; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: A. INSTALL 6' HIGH TEMPORARY CHAIN LINK FENCE WHERE SHOWN. THE PERIMETER PUBLIC TRAIL IS TO BE OPEN WHEN CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES DO NOT AFFECT THE TRAIL, Fnd.5/8` Rebar w/Yellow Cap 8165 MMS Tr0d SIOn if r-� / / ,a, A F' ' A. 113 / i,i• �f F o m 6, a LL I ca m y.-. m Y .. Property Line / _- �- ;{ ' / ��1y ,��. k- !f Y %�-/,• �', /' � 7- fit.,. W .r LAKE r11I' Ili I i /ii / , i Io� t1 1 Ilri 11 11 � / r l I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 l l a l 1 i Ii I illll Ill i� 1 1,� �' I III! x111 i, IIII 111{ jj11 i 111 rill f1f1 i II 11111 iir1l i i 1 1 1 1 j �— Property lrinI j i I! I l � III I i�'l �111� 1111 � it I! I �l Ill _' LE FEB 21 2012 0 30 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE N0. PA 261 w f o m 6, a LO ca m y.-. m c- IL c- U) N 0 U z \ m p w� ' L V a O LO LO N UU O a c) F_ ma U o z C t U d 'O z m w I- (L` IT C) ry — W as = N J N d w to M cn Ute" H a Z o ¢N W lLLL M N m M N U_ r W s so o �FM ci cq a rn Z N rr 0:'? Q 1� w M a N d - Z CO W w o cl) m o vvp/Q w LO N 1 O CDN O ' a Z U) CM U)Z (hY r-- z Ca aN uj J Q z O U to Z LU �— O C o a U W U W aO Z o a cl) o Z � 0 o a ca W W W LLI F- ui Cl) 111.0253 Sheet SP5 F.L.=642.64 12" RCP FES \_ ---- _ , NV • 641 WER UTILITY CROSSING ,-' -�-��-_ ---- MANHOLE 5.0' FORCEMAINS TO HAVE 18" 50 L ARANCE BELOW ��-' _ - _ 3D II 16 DIP W7fTER)fiaN- -- - - - - - - -- -__� -------- - ---INV._- - _, _INV. • 643.50 (VERIFY) �- - _ � - -_- II----------- 16 - _ _ EXISTING _-_- - ------ _ - / 16" VU --- -- - - - -- -- - -- - -- - 12" DIA. CASING PIPE - - _ INV. • 642.75 (VERIFY) -----------87 L.F. OF 3" FORCE MAIN- - --_ 2D _-_ AND - -_ m / - @7 L.F. OF 1.5" FORCE MAIN - - - - `-�SEWER ------------- _ MANHOLE cCOLLISTER -- -BL - - - - - ---------- SANITARY - , - - 1 6� 5.74 _ RIM • 650.50 = - Y 642 50 I 12'1 RCP FESS , ------------- I _ _1C I Grass � -�v I / - �lrT `. � a a R � !� � PRpF I I I 1 1 / =6FC F P ES Grass ?r � - - - \ UTILITY CROSSING 1 18" STORM INV. • 640.15 V WATER INV, • 638.50 SITE PLAN UTILITY CONSTRUCTION NOTES ' 1. EXISTING FEATURES; PROTECT THE FOLLOWING A. EXISTING PAVEMENTS TO REMAIN. B. PROTECT EXISTING TREES, C. PROTECT EXISTING UTILITIES. D. PROTECT EXISTING FENCE. E. PROTECT EXISTING PCC TRAIL 2. DEMOLITION; REMOVE THE FOLLOWING A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR CLEARING AND GRUBBING EXISTING TREES AND VEGETATION WITHIN CONSTRUCTION LIMITS. B. EXISTING PAVEMENT TO BE REMOVED AND DISPOSED OF OFF-SITE, C. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF RUBBLE ENCOUNTERED DURING UTILITY TRENCHING ACTIVITIES OFF-SITE, BACKFILL TRENCH WITH APPROVED MATERIAL. SEE BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS. D. REMOVE EXISTING 1.5" FORCEMAJN AND SUPPORTS INSIDE EXISTING CASING PIPE. INSTALL PROPOSED 3" FORCEMAIN ALONG WITH NEW 1.5" FORCEMAIN. INSTALL SUPPORTS TO HOLD BOTH PIPES INSIDE EXISTING CASING PIPE. E. VERIFY LOCATION OF EXISTING 1.5" FORCEMAIN. INSTALL COUPLING CONNECTION AFTER NEW MANHOLE IS INSTALLED. 3, SANITARY SEWER SERVICES; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING A. 4" SANITARY SEWER LINE. B. SANITARY SEWER CLEANOUT. C. 3" SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LINE FORCE MAIN. PROVIDE A MINIMUM COVER OF 5.5' ALONG ALONG FORCE MAIN. FORCE MAIN TO BE INSTALLED WITH A POSITIVE UPHILL GRADIENT FROM GRINDER PUMP LIFT STATION TO DISCHARGE MANHOLE, D. SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE. VERIFY INVERTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. E. SANITARY GRINDER PUMP LIFT STATION. F. LIFT STATION CONTROLLER. SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS. G. REFER TO PLUMBING FOUNDATION PLAN FOR CONNECTION DETAIL, H.6" SANITARY SEWER LINE. 4. WATER SERVICE; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING A. INSTALL 6" X 6" STAINLESS STEEL TAPPING SLEEVE AND VALVE. B. 6" WATER LINE, C. 3" DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE LINE. D. 1" DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE LINE, E. INSTALL 4" PVC SLEEVE PIPE UNDER PAVEMENT, F. FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY WITH VALVE AND VALVE BOX. G. DEAD END FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY WITH VALVE AND VALVE BOX, H.6" GATE VALVE AND VALVE BOX. 1.4 FIRE LINE ISOLATION VALVE. J. 3" DOMESTIC LINE ISOLATION VALVE. K. 1" DOMESTIC LINE ISOLATION VALVE. L. SEE PLUMBING PLANS FOR BUILDING CONNECTIONS FOR 4" FIRE SERVICE, M. SEE PLUMBING PLANS FOR BUILDING CONNECTIONS FOR 3" DOMESTIC SERVICE, 5. ELECTRICAL; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: A. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND COORDINATE WITH THE UTILITY OWNER AND PROPERTY OWNER FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICE FROM EXISTING TRANSFORMER. SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS. SANITARY SEWER LIFT STATION RIM • 647.50 INV.• 637.40 ON -SE) �� UTILITY CROSSING: '- - "15" STORM INVy' 641.54 6" SAO TARY INV'. • 639.118 4 / with Dat hoJ I 1 i� 4D UTILITY CROSSING: 6" STORM INV. • 640.88 1" WATER INV. • 639.25 3C �F 6., O ��) Storm Manhole -------------m=647_81 _-- \ \ ^ Grass \ Area Intake Rim=643.73 � _ Grass , !i ; r l 1 yam`\ 1 d UTILITY CROSSING' 1 ,' \ 15" STORM INV. • 641.65? 11N, \ 4G 6" WATER INV, • 639.60 / \ Pal with at N\ T l >( ITARY SEW�R / MANHOLE RIM a 645.0 INV. = 640.90 (IN -S) INV, • 639.35 (IN -SE) INV.• 639.25 (OUT -NW) J, UTILITY CROSSING' 3A 6' STORM 'INV. • 644.10 4" SANITARY INV. • 642.15 s rl� Sand Pile 4K ° A INV 8 INVERT 0 BUILDING o g • 642.40 °O 1...A FFF O1) GF o 0 o ° 4j 90 E0 41H r 413 4F `.\ 4B CLEANOUT RIM 647.0 IMV • 64186 $0 L F,_OF 4-SAAFFa ' SEWER 1.rlt MINIMUM �3GV/ o r�NVERT642 40 DNG.q`,mz ii '• •v I 41 4C /wj C3• / , , ( { � � `:, I - , o � '\•its . + N / \� \\ i 4M4E 413 4E IRRIGATION LEGEND�' \\ _ ` ✓// N � ;, . _I j _____ _ NOTE: IRRIGATION MATERIALS TO BE PROVIDED BY THE OWNER AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR.\ - �\� -1••.� SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. \\ Qp \� • HUNTER, 1-25 SERIES, GEAR DRIVEN ROTOR, W/ 13 NOZZLE O HUNTER, PRO SERIES, 4" POP UP W/ MPR NOZZLE \\\ Q��\O 4E HUNTER OCV QUICK COUPLING VALVE V UTILITY CROSSING: 12" STORM INV. • 642.20 6" WATER INV. • 640.0 E E 1 ® HUNTER, ICV -101, SERIES, ELECTRIC VALVE, 1" HUNTER, ICV -201 SERIES, ELECTRIC VALVE, 1" ��A� i �,. HUNTER, ACC 99D, ACC SERIES, 2 -WIRE DECODER CONTROLER 0'\ Q HUNTER, ICD 100, SINGLE STATION DECODER Retain g Wall � �� Jr IDI N \� / HUNTER, WRC - CLIK SENSOR-\\ TAP LOCATION BACKFLOW _�__�• - '1 J C ' --- PVC MAINLINE, CLASS 200, BE, 18" BURY, SIZE 2" `' � c __...__ ® a QIt I - PVC LATERAL, CLASS 200, BE, 12" BURY, TYPICAL SIZE AS SHOWN LAKE ------ ---- = PVC SLEEVING, CLASS 200, BE, 18" BURY, SIZE AS SHOWN �11 Grass Grass F.L.=6 12" R( LINE 'FILED EEB 2 1 2012. I- t St 0 0 30 SCALE (FEET) r m w d � m ,m L C/) N D: L0 U t O_ \ N rn m O wa Y U Mm U 0 L0 N U 'U O Q 3 c o Z U 4Lu� a)Z 8_a- LLL O OBD 2Lu N J � W o(6 ♦^ o ib Z0' ¢N W o lL M LL N J N m M N W a o y O a 2 N M M Q Lu a U M W m o Of N N Q D N a z Y N Q C4 N W oC - a z O u.l a � W a O W z O Q Lu p a to o a Im 5 Z 06 W n IL c W J Q W W V/ 111.0253 CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet SP6 l F.L.=642.64 % 12'' RCP FES —� IJ Gross E 2,178,713.26 =6 0 e McCOLLISTER BLVD. Storm Manhole `------- -- Fim=647.81 -- `. ARCHITECTURAL PLANS 1 I i� 11 pO 00• 1` 1 p RADIUS PT. N 598.869.72 `f*' N 598,768.91 ° - E 2,179,020.82 �3.a• SEE GRID LINE 'A' ON p _ --- ARCHITECTURAL PLANS -- RADIUS PT. - _ N 598,751.30 - E 2,179,021.11 RADIUS PT. N 598,690.68 E 2,179,054.39 R 7.0' 4.0' LAKE o0 2 DIMENSION PLAN GENERAL NOTES: A. COORDINATE POINTS SHOWN FOR THE LODGE BUILDING AND THE SHELTER ARE FOR ESTABLISHING BUILDING ORIENTATION PURPOSES ONLY, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXACT DIMENSIONS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. RADIUS PT. N 598,926.77 E 2,179,229.51 o 0 5.0' Storm Manhole Rim =647.71 I Area Intake Rim=643.73 __.RADIUS PT.-� � - - _ - N 598,602.00 LINE CITY FILE N0. PA 261 r m W C) m ti c"' a Y QI m � v N co V J N U z 0 N w m o w U p U-) N U U O Q � C7 '- c o m z U Y t U z U O N .2 W F d LL O J OD N J N W 'Q _ �a 06 z O ¢N W LNL M LL N m M N W Q u O U --, [rnpp Z N Q W U W >M M O a WAN a N O } 1 a Z T%!YL0 N Q N a W o� - a z cn O W a r � ■ W W Z W w � CC q O o a cf) 1 Q Z Cf) O Oct a W p � n V/ cc H w W 0 HLu Z vi 111.0253 Sheet SP7 1 I i� 11 1 1` 1 RADIUS PT. N 598.869.72 `f*' __.RADIUS PT.-� � - - _ - N 598,602.00 LINE CITY FILE N0. PA 261 r m W C) m ti c"' a Y QI m � v N co V J N U z 0 N w m o w U p U-) N U U O Q � C7 '- c o m z U Y t U z U O N .2 W F d LL O J OD N J N W 'Q _ �a 06 z O ¢N W LNL M LL N m M N W Q u O U --, [rnpp Z N Q W U W >M M O a WAN a N O } 1 a Z T%!YL0 N Q N a W o� - a z cn O W a r � ■ W W Z W w � CC q O o a cf) 1 Q Z Cf) O Oct a W p � n V/ cc H w W 0 HLu Z vi 111.0253 Sheet SP7 _ \ -- __a- --- -- - MCCOLLISTER QVD_ _- - --- - -- m co `- -_ - �- - _ _ ♦ / \ � - � 650 -650- Corte 04 ass \\\ /ll \ \l \ -- - - ------------_ _ -- -� --- -----��� to ;♦ U°,--\ \ -- -- -- -- - -- - - - --° - _ - PROPERTY LINE Lo ��� ��✓� -w�-v Lo rlkole / '✓ti�Y� / z CV o / � m 0 S orm Manhole -------- r Corm fvlal�hoie Y _�\ - ---- -----------i----== m_6T181 ---- ------ \ Rim=647.7 m d n J - / PROP -643 3�� ���^��1i _MJ - _� - -F - -- - ,v v 6� o ♦' d / 211 - ' \ - cam, --- -- - � i GO ST -13 = -- _ - \\ F_ r CIRCULAR STORM-__---- - --- -��,_ � crop; / \ I I I LC} SEWER MANHOLE - --mo z - � m RIM= 645.50 \I; '' - i Y 647 v d INV, = 642.65 (EXIST. -N); \ � \ _ � I � '� � d WV. 641:00 (OUT -S) i Ex. Ex 648 \ /Lu IT LL 646.84 X646.84 (Verify) ((Venfy)_.,.5696 64.00 i ( \ `\ `\ Sn9 646.97 �'� h� i i i f r r v v Area lntOkC LLL ✓fi/ / 7 (Verify) i i f ' i i v `� �� � � Q / - _ A Rim 64315- 0 0 LLJ\� Ex- i i it i 1 I O gm �N F .-642.64 I Sr - N 646.99 �,� 647.75 f � r i • Jo l \ � \ � -- I I w m = ° 211 RCP FES /'. ; ---'% __ (Verify) - RECTANGULAR J / 1 I I I I J N w N AREA INTAKE --- - - _ _ E.. 648.00 _ i , A �`v i �� ! 0 V 646.89 RIM- 646.50 - - v / i d < d �� �IV,h v s� (Verify) 648,0 INV. • 642,35 (IN -SE) 647.35 --�` /-----_- ¢ c r m Lij__/ 648.5 647.0 647.30 \ -� (p \ 647.9 647,75 INV. = 642.10 (DHT SW) 64-7.50 , �\ 'LL -I i `\ \ ( 647.70'. - - i.._'... 647.35 64 ; f i II 64 .00 647.50 6 i `v ♦ / I 1 o 64 .90 48.75 i 64 Lu 647.75 s. 5 64;, J N Ll__I i - --- 648.00 50 Z /: / d� _ 64735 . ., \ \ y 6" FL OR DRAIN 0 s,� I v� / 0 o _. RIM m J y J _?o 64 NV. = 42.0 8.20 648.00 47 0 646.70 q .00 0V v 3 �S \ ■ v 6q 0 4 \ 6 6 647.75 / CF 5 0 '� ST -1 I �, �� o 648. 6 a R30 ^ r ��� �' RECTANGULAR v / ♦ / / ¢ o 3 ^ rn ST -3 CP •ol 64� �r tl� E,7t F _ .� AREA INTAKE (� 4 sq3 15' F S W/F00 s ao 648.00 tO C p5p � So s e'Js ' RIM= 646.50. \ / !% / I J r�, ?5 .' INV_ • 643.00 (OUT -W) T / I E� R- O x 643 z0 Y,n - D ON G ( 47.05 64>, s> - ` ! N M TW , s43. c LF.of 4" 646.60 - g 70 05 - , / • / / / / Q - - - ga2 • 643 3 3p 643 P @ 4.9% 6.50 I - 41.00 647, 5 .' a, `�\ �) ;' I` FF� Q, r a �= W M 6644 , 6 k 0 643 08 64 .60 X 01. 64> (o , A �/ V (/r P �`, 00 6x6.70 5 'O i ST -14 = 06 0643.30 4„ OUTLET 646.60 4jOS sxB) sF `\ y CIRCULAR STORM x 6q W/RODENT GUARD -, A 0 64 15 647.75 { 646.8 646 % LF . -- oe INV: 640.20 64745 sal v a-- 4i's' SEWER MANHOLE 3 rn RIM= 642.15 a 646.60 646 0 sa i. 65 INV. = 638.30 (IN -N) �4t 642.60 1 P - i�-i- ; 4 35 sq so 64$50 INV. = 632.30 (OUT -S) 6 4(} TG T 542.30 co 646. 4 647 54,60- P 6' 'O 37 020 646, 4 0646.6 e, 6a ?S ? Bp I 635_ - s - i34 p s > s e �uj �4>>S3S � ^ r� �j/ / � �j� m o ST -2A 6, A>> sv (p y.k v $ __-,' / /i ix Lo N ST -14A INV. • 632.00 a o 15" FES W/FOOTING ^ s* p, / w ¢ o �� s .zo 53 wL48 q f. 1A INV, APRON GUARD a v �Js 's s s mss s R' r �' 64s sD Q o o `�' _ ,� - d. (Verity) 645 w,. 'eo �\ ,cve ` INV = 640.61 ST 4D -- >" o Fs Z ��� > 646 ss� �' 3 35 LF.of 15" N \ 53 �- Ex. w n RCP @ 0.86% o, -� saa.ao cq Y D CLEANOUT ST 4C s $ �/ 6'¢ 47 RIM = 6�44,1j� �CLE OUT - 6S ' ,�Ak(Ve y Q o/ 6 (63 (Verify) @ G$ RIM 647.50 e� s 9 " ci 6 _ AA\1 INV.= 644.50 - l•' 1 Ex. �\ i' T 4> 0 .. ) � �, �I V, � S6iSj. � � 648 3 / Lu ST -5 o ( 6q 6 60 �f� r �� �i 11 �j 53.50 CIRCULAR ul�a .> 4j9 *r' /Iw' 6 N v ♦ O _ AREA INTAKE 6 It . a 64> ° k6 o 9 v 2 0 Z RIM = 639.00 st (° it 0 o sg _ �. INV. = 632.30 (OUT -SW) @ �`�3 ? �i r� ��'! o ao 651 ` �. 646.z3 `\ Q ST -5A ? �� 1 ° }-� �v 65 6 �, Verify) INV. = 632.00 � � � 6' AD � T�4> 0 6q>6 a sq / � � \ 0 A8 �� \� 6 �, o yj ° �� $ � - _ 647 649 Ex.. Z .SO FF O 6 450 _ -- - ,...64 45 ,...x6 1 \� ST 4D J o q> (p j dVerify INN/.= 641.81- � --64? � � � 646. a � � sq6 648 0 18" FES W/FOOTING( 4?9 0 80x (o 645.0 AND APRON GUARD J� _ - sq 5p° O o 6 i W INV.= 640.05 - _ � �."•`. o _- "-e _ ST 645.0 ��� . ---- _- __-� .,,.. - I � `� 648.00 ST -4C � - -- - o s �°_ ST 7 � �7 ., 4� CIRCULAR \ \ -- ' � � (Verify) Z CIRCULAR STORM /L l`OZ� s�)9 ° 4> °s5 AREA INTAKE (ay 6 SINGLE GRATE INTAKE % / ♦ \ a _ SEWER MANHOLE $ l�" io _ -0 90 ° 46 y \ RIM= 646.10 �Bpgis"per sq> ° ° ATE= 643.50 35 1 T/C 646.85 INV. = 640.50 (IN S)- Z pC�'`•�, So INV- 40.40 (OUT E) INV.= 6x2.65 SW) INV. = 640.25 (IN NE) /� 0 Bq6� a� 645 �A'i INV. = 640.17 (OUT -SW) \\ \ k'50 -•TY0 fi►,�J[, // 6 64 4 F 64 \' ! ST -46 \.\ \ 6 rr "61 4 s TW 4 4,Z 4,3x 0/ 4 OAll CLEANOUT i 6¢ S 646 46?35"., , TG • 645.60 „� , t` h 646 T RIM = 646.50 \,`/ 644 64) 0 6q> CP ® o ST 8 ST 9 \ --> 6 ° ?o > OS h --ORCULAR CIRCULAR /w� w INV.= 641.90 B4 4� q6• s4 x 5 i AREA INTAKE ♦ \ �■ TW : 3,so AREA INTAKE GRATE= 644.0 ♦ \ sq?. x 6436p --- RATE= -NV- 637.70 ON•W) \ `\uj VON - g£x. s V. = 640.25 �IN N) ♦ / - 6 6q3 6 d3,go a4 s4 INV: --640.10, dIN-W) INV;' = 637.45 (OUT- 64 OUT S) / - • 6a h� 64 6, q3 0 15 ZF INV. = 640.OQ_(OUT-E) �';ift stall O -6 6 2 xor/ p,. R ------ .4 g6 GRADING PLAN GENERAL NOTES: ST 4A G •sas• 6q2 CLEANOUT ��„ � � `�`�sr,, � � 63) � 641 A. SEE SHEET SP2 FOR EROSION CONTROL NOTES. RIM = 647.00 Grass ♦ O 90 • 643. \ B. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE FOR ALL AREAS INV.�`\\`\ 6�� y �°� � �od WITHIN CONSTRUCTION LIMITS.6 64 uj C. LENGTH OF UTILITIES SHOWN ON PLANS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM 42 64 4 AS . p CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE TO CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE INCLUDE *\ \\\\\ 2 FLARED END SECTIONS. LAKE \\ \ \ \\\ sJ ♦X 6a6.2o �` ii 'Verify) D. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR LAYOUT VERIFICATION OF ` \\AV A`° y �s6 s 64r- _ ,o y ��� �� ui ^� l �n .)le \ ALL SITE IMPROVEMENTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. \ \ \ ?S i'% 640 e, - E. CONTRACTOR TO LOAD AND TRANSPORT ALL MATERIALS CONSIDERED TO BE UNDESIRABLE TO BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO AN APPROVED `\ \\ ® 633 640 \ , OFF-SITE WASTE SITE. SEE BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS.bl'I�, 640 CI 646 F. CONTRACTOR TO STRIP AND STOCKPILE TOPSOIL FROM ALL AREAS TO BE CUT OR FILLED. RESPREAD TO MINIMUM 6" DEPTH TO FINISH GRADES. ALL AREAS DISTURBED TO BE SEEDED.38:4 638.60 \ v ��v �O 639 G. ALL PROPOSED CONTOURS AND SPOT ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE FINISHED GRADES V`��� vV 638.45 --fin �'\ AND/OR TOP OF PAVING SLAB (GUTTER),UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. `` ` \ ui 636.'25 H. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL UTILITY CROSSINGS AND MANTAIN MINIMUM 18" \ \ -J V y��A V_ I� ® 638.25 �_. - _ - =� ♦ �� �� VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE BETWEEN UTILITIES. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE UTILITY ROUTING TO BUILDING AND VERIFY CONNECTION LOCATIONS N AND INVERTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. '' I \ -- f ♦ ���y - �, I. CONTRACTOR TO CONSTRUCT SUBGRADE OF ALL PROPOSED BUILDINGS, FOOTINGS, AND PAVEMENTS AS PER GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT. J. SEE SHEET SP9 FOR SILT FENCE AND FILTER SOCK LOCATIONS. =� �s ST -96 ST -9A_,__ INV. = 632.00 CIRCULAR STORM - -- GRADING PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES: RETAINING WALL KEY: RIM- 6 MANHOLE RIM= 643.00 TW ELEVATION AT TOP OF EXPOSED WALL. INV. = 633.70 � \\ 1. PROVIDE CLASS "D" RIPRAP WITH ENGINEERING FABRIC. = (IN N) - A. 10 TONS, 10'x10'x1.5' DEPTH. TG = ELEVATION OF GRADE ALONG WALL. INV. = 632.18 (OUT S) `� , B. 20 TONS, 15'x15'x1.5' DEPTH. 0 30 SCALE (FEET) V:111.0253 CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet Spg MCCOLLISTER 'B -LVD. - _ _—= - ------ \ - Spm � - -- - -- - _ 9 EL eso 1 CO Grass —u J - c�� I \ PROPERTY LINECc Atc � L0_ - - / - ---- r - _ �f > m S orrn Mahhole / w � �- I \Storm Manhole ---- PROPE --- — a � _' =64 .3"��-\-�-������i`'`-f_-- - �-- ----- -------___�------FNT'm- �/�81 — --I- - , — �� I 6� o Ln 04--- = ' i I U 3 F- ul Grass O SO z \ / 647._. pY —_� =j -_ 1 W F d \�C,b�-w / � ,.."...._. ..,,,^..^-648 wv v �..v Cn Area Intake Ld RIIT1=643,13- I I I O O W ' F .642.64 O �� I 2" RCP FES �i; / — , - i wm =� / -� ------ - . i� 1 vvv - = Lj Cn 00 Lu W ri" P WI�I at 2U � U EL 6n 21 loll Oz N Q ( ,, `,, •. / \ 4 e , i _ = i it / C I— N a WIt ,Ger U c� / p //•'1A A v / \ "off "a. - �O� i'CV � 11 \ � � ' \ —_ �s1oWd ��" v�. Q / 3 GENERAL NOTES: A. SEE SHEET SP2 FOR EROSION CONTROL NOTES. B. LOT SIZE: 160 ACRES C. DISTURBED SITE 10 ACRES D. IMPACTED LOCAL WATERWAY: IOWA RIVER FROM SAND LAKE VIA STORM SEWER. E. TURF REINFORCEMENT MATTING TO BE 'LANDLOK 450' PRODUCT, COLOR GREEN, AS MANUFACTURED BY 'GEOTEXTILE SYSTEMS BY PROPLEX'OR APPROVED EQUAL, INSTALL AS PER MANUFACTURE'S RECOMMENDATIONS. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. ALL SLOPES 5 TO 1 OR STEEPER TO HAVE TURF REINFORCEMENT MATTING INSTALLED. 2. SILT FENCE, SEE DETAIL. 3. FILTER SOCK, SEE DETAIL. 4. SOIL STOCKPILE LOCATIONS. 5. CONCRETE WASHOUT LOCATION, TEMPORARY ABOVE GRADE STRUCTURE. 6. EQUIPMENT STORAGE. 7. CONSTRUCTION WASTE DUMPSTER. 8. PORTABLE TOILET. 9. LOCATION OF INSPECTION DOCUMENTS WILL BE IN A MAILBOX NEXT TO THE JOB TRAILER. 10. PROVIDE 30'X 50' TIRE CLEANING AREA INTO CONSTRUCTION ZONE WITH 3" DIA. ROCK AT 10" DEPTH. 11. PROVIDE ROCK ON SHORELINE ALONG WALKWAY. SEE WALKWAY AT LAKE EDGE DETAIL. 12. PROVIDE DRAINAGE SWALE FOR OVERLAND FLOW. SWALE TO BE 12" DEPTH WITH MINIMUM 2X SLOPE AND 6:1 SIDE SLOPES. �.t"•Wlth But haus qtr:''' ,�••�°.�, r#� �, .�%".,. �,�' `".M".,..... � \V �, ;; .' ♦♦ cli z CIO w C14 45 ---� �� '� �� Q N 14- 102 W LO sso 4 7 1(r vv Z wv i s> 519 5 1;. •vr "• �" � '. (I(I III vVA 1A\� —� __/ �.� �9 � I �� � i'� N 01 W 5 1 � 1 . ®•. San � / � /„� /, / \ -'__.y,"'"••. 65 v 1 6 650 10 IL • _ A __./// 7 \ .liJl . •.. Q d� to e -'/ I � � � � _ f \ 647 6 e \ Z Z -�64a 90 ,:gg � 3 4 + � W • LU 644. v � V oc �Hr^. Lu CL tt Stag O Cn 4 a 3 v v vv °• ez•-m-•..._.. 3 Ewa\Gross f ca Ill Old 44 us o aLLI \ � \ \\\\ �•" -' 647 \ \---- %i �' cO + LAKE \\\\ �� ��` `•.•'• O 6�1- -- —\ \ ,. Concrete 1\ '` Q W v v`vvvyvv --- 640 VA 1 yv v�� 3g v v v 640`````vv RetaWell - vv v v sv vvv O vv a 640 V 6¢6 639 \ \ 3 -- - - f 11 v v vvvv v..y A 4 \ \ / S �\ \uj Cn 11 , 1 I V JV 111.0253 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE NO. PA 261 Sheet SP9 l v > n J -- ' _ -"` _ _ -_ _-------- ------ ------ --- - -- -]� - = (D r' ; - \ \ ---- __ � � \ � _� _ F L 645 �4 y / j` / _ �� ---4 ' - - -- McCOLLISTER V� - ---" - BL ---- -- F, -- N -- - i - -- \ _� - - - -- _ - - � 11, \ \ . I �� - r Yi� --{ _ /! -- _ - / �- -._�6J 1 _ r -Y ss� i \ \ -- i �� --- _ - - - --' - - -- - " - - _ _ - . _ a ����� _ ale - -- -- - . ,, - - - - _ _ - --- I \ \JL - - -- \ y`� Storm anh f �� F M' f \ - - , , \ i I -11 PROPERT `- - '� m 4 -- - !- - , - , - )l CLL - - - - _, _ -.-r, \ I 1 ;h i t _ - _. -"bGS __ ____--------------------------- -._._.__ _-_-- _.--._-.-_._____ -. __ �- ._.___-- 1 ,-_ . - - _' \ \ I , � 8 _ f PROPERTY LINE yrr';�;I;: ;,r:",-,--- i _ \ l AG x , I �, I (' :. '/,, . i . /, ✓- ,P-., - I - 1 a \ ✓a, , / 1 i 3 ._ 1 I i Fs�ai, ;_ i / I - - V11,- :.♦ /' : -:_'Gid - `\ / - - - - - _ �. - -- \\ \ _ _ - I 11 ,. _ , " ,(,;a . ,' , `\ Area Intake - _. ti`; -' �„ , `'/}�J`� -y=-�. ' ; ;. - i ; r Rim -643.73 \, 1. o , - ":,� - -, ,,-, �", -� - - ��, �,-- � / �,'l l- - - � �-, . �� \ -- , - ; - r )` 1 \' F , - - - , _ ', ' ' - _ s r . , \ ' % r r �r r' r ' --_- \ .L .h z 2 -UF .r `11 " y 7. ' '11 , n �i _ 14-z I\ \ /- - \` i - r Vr r T •l: 2-G - Ir s :f, 4= - v - A _ '\r ' �r F` ` X - Y'/ - _ , , :. �}. : . � : - i- - -', : : - , . -%, : - - _ _ 1, , - _ - qtr: .�. _ _ :'�I Y, \ �- I �, _ :: _ ` , _ _ _, _.. _ _ ,_ .. + _ •"\ , ,�� tom.- ., `\ \. \ 1 -UF , r 'I.,C d - i _ _ 'G _ 1 y i , - i a , TY 4 ' / 5 P� :: :, r _ _ - , - ---�. _ r - - - - - -- - - - ViC I'a I� > - �` _ \ ' 'F-` _ _ -" y.; _ __- p - - - _ -MA .,.tea, W' \ \ �1 «; i _ ;r,• 'i _ \ /' y,' _ - W' `Y- �. WWWWW v\W• I \ �`\_;` , I \ Z-UIF \. ,it \�.\ /I `-Y, �•�,, ' 0., W Wf11W 1` / L W .V� W W \ \ \\ �� / _1 'Y �/ t r WWW W W W `Y " W\ \W W W W - - 11 -- \ V• W W \` _c /! r r e' _ J _ _ t _ _ 4 W WWWW WW� (` WW W W W\W �/ •\\ - ayµ$$ rrPI -1` --\_ Z -GT _ /l` '/ \ / I -1/I))/ Y - _ _� 1 W WWW W`W W W \ `( O '4) (� 1'w y _ ' J-, _ V i _ t WWW W W W W W WWW WW W W W' `,� ^-\ \ W \2 \} ♦ •� � )jJ(/l _ ^gw v+,/ \ I�' O W W W W W W `W W y WWWWW,Y `rW ',• \K"" ` \ /• t} W W W W W W W W WW'/ {� \ !\ l / \(. 6 / \ u `\ WI . d+IofY ,, '�\ _--._' \ __ - \ _ ../ r-� \ / ..I S `V1 I` W W W (� i� JvY W W W WWW •Yi+W (W'1•-• •,- yla4 Y •W�+y� `"'� 6 \�\�,, , j'' I vIIIyI _ _ _ _ _ _ S`' '-� ` W W W W W \,W \'Y "+ " ! t S `Y. _ �` Y T,'I ` VY,'j.1 W\ -�-_\ '^'V _ \ I µ,: iWV r W +Y, /-W W / W W W `YV W W Y _ O 1 _ r - ! W W W \WW WW WWGF,L' '`W, l,Y \ \ - ` ' \ 1v i �� y _ Yom. ' t-'+ te' \ ` I ""l," -- y -r '� \" „ , ,' ,. , W +/r,+• j.s-Y"+„.� ' W,1 vY W W Vr,. W {J,��•�• \V r\:1 t yr, ` r'Jr�YT 2 _ y� � _ �(��YT \ y ���`. �:{, Y+Irr. 1' W W W JII"4--�-y' Y• W W W W W W W W W' W Y. <; A" - Wer Y .•y -r IIS •' ._ - i..,,((� W W �V W' a� • + W V\V'(`+`r• 1 �' I W W W , W/ V 6,Ji-''•1`�♦rY'Yl t. a II,*. . ••' •D'-_ \iV lY W W W W W W -, ,, W W `� W W W /j/ ,\ \ ,r, r '/ + } j ✓ +. 't - JfT 1•,++�� _-`aY';--r- W W W y p, ` _ _ /�rr.a 11. • a`, r�; .>o� _�- \ / ' .,.� \ / 'iPi' '\ '\ I.-,-,./.,[ -'./ 'Il }q i.M�a-- 'VI,S•'.W `+V'YS Y •vi y� \ �:1 W C V/'vN Fri Y,aT �' •`T 1V VY Lr•.W`a e rr y•��,r,.Vvl, `1'+J -Y' -_.+Y W -IY-' W W W W W W ,/ r.. 7'.i y' .�\ �.{ r •� i 'Y.1, :Y + -v'NIV- 1'.' lV�jy� i,N J` W W ,�l r 1 W i+• V ' ' YWV WSW. W W J�'%t\l•' W- WW WWW W W W W ' - \ �? -' ` r f _ y ' •.t• •:�•: 1 {-t • .}- ''-' Via'. i` \ W +t' /1 t`�"Wa ;W Y,: ;- +",',v,:X w ,�, + ,w ,%jj \ \ i _ l /( i •. - �'!� L . ra�.1 J, a�,-'v'Y•V- '++ ,•� VL v =A., J'--' ` W W W W W- 1 r� yy,� msµ., _ W W W W W W W W W W W W W l J �/ .iiv) is - i.: YT,,. _ Z-'y.+`.r _ik.-_ WI/ i«r -� R'V`W I•T.•.W - YW..-...'iW \ I B \ /\_. �:< - • 1 W' •Yi r `•}w'; r..3+.i�+;4-'ti 1 [4 i` 'Y�'!f �W, W W /+4 .+M{ WWW 11� a •j`1\ ,n- •:r.y�('yy+ �p1• - •;y,'• 'IUJ•W �u'W W WbW' _ F ', /` l\ 1 .,j! ��) r'L d Ti (� P W 1 W W W( ,Y W W W ♦ -I a i• l+ •J' ! W V%"Je _ W- W W W W W W W W W W W }„ / I I \ '+'W W \ \ `- {S� 'rte+ ♦ 4 vS j!aT+ i YV rV•' / \ 'II i\' `_ D •`,1,{`� tY `PY♦V W W W W W W W \ W\ W W W W W W -+Y-IY W W W W - W / _ - T 1 - S•`=''Y• 'W W W W W W Z G W W' Y V j-/ r� 2 j 1 rWf I a�T,y� ,y 't W• W W „( . _C _% a /,,. ,, ., i ' F _ J v • "<`. r+' •i- :('- it a L. `' j i�Y W W W 'w W W W 'W'. W W W W W W W W W W I I ... ( _ ! ,�.w .'�V �W"l'•Y'• V(• �WI V.S.-. �l♦ ii':yL+: +yrVi.D+�r Wa! �W WWW `AW Wi'I�',' `�• � ,tiv{,v'VI\i+,V•• ,YW W W,LW WWWWWW WWWWWWW _ - ,`L♦'_ _ _/ li --�, ' YG": 'Y°I-a 1 ...1 Y . •�, •r'w' Y I. W � "'.V, W/WWW.r.. ,YW ,YW W W im' i ,y - WWW - ,( •I �h- '( + R♦` W• -I-, fp` a•� * W W W '!`vW , ' \ WWWW W/W /W WWWW W WW W W W W W W WWW -/ WWW W 6 YP, W W j' \/ `I, %_' yY•IVW -' YVS •I v'V -�uv-t ,O- W W W W W W W W Wr I �G. /s`}\ \: ' �1� ,f(y/ _W �_ + i• •� WWWWWWW WWW �1 W `�w , W�'W, -Yom{-1'' t ♦Y�.{p,� _ _ W W W rA_ �4/ _ SVY,V l K - Yi \ yT�Y WYr •+Y,_k.,tT•Ya ,S W W( 'WW W ♦\ / _ ,II , - ( 'Y +S F 1 `, t `�„ .'IV 'YY� W W y W W W y .w W cYi•. W, / •l: 7' � `2 •I.r`+Y( �1. 11 W 'v T (� /�. �� \ __ - {r - I / _ :/., r S , ♦ Y .•i• y\ v \• ., +, J \ +�' W W 'V _ a W •L'.♦W--, S v1{ • W W/ W ' W W W W W W W W W W W W W W Y 'Y r W .. r _ % _, 'r 1 % ,f 'Il- '� / Y' W W W W t�i.1: W+ - _ cC%J •t v\Ir• rJN-1 --v�r'.v�r Y '�. �. � , `tea`. \ \,! \- 'r/'` WW W - -,l_,:1 'Y__`VI vF "' - f aii/Y 16: ^I•• _Y• A. • Wja W W ,W W W iw • W .Y i.\.; r ^�`( % 'K'` ,I I.• "S' i'• •r - \ ,,f W , .r1 WI __ / _ _-J /` .`• y. •V •�. � Y��((.. +\ Y"'t'•`--Y��t �,. •`�Ni �. ,):I W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W %� ` %+' -\ `� _ _ ___ t {I 4 -RF W\ 1` W W W W WX' V+ W. ✓a : W l 5✓ \ \ ✓ W W , Y `` \ ,S: `h ' l : _ _ J - ' , r r f`•(a T • ` W Y W W W W 'I W W W W W , J; '• „' •Y 'rL y _ 1 _ _ _ _ _ _ W \ _ _'-Y i W l \ ..2 \ , > W W W `h W ll' _ _ /,•/,;, jjy/,(J•},,/- •-I I •.�1 ,,1 'a� r, • , •{y/�{j ` YR,,` 1W W WW . "WWWWW WWW W WWW . t_ ^ W •Z 'T` \ - _ '/' ,/ \ • W , IYa W \W W W V+ W W W W f - _ - , ' ', W W ♦ _ _ ,_ v,Y ,rwV //• a • V • y, .,, W W S v4 - _W W \v, ♦ W W Y•� W .\•'' ,J` `Yl ''Y,,\ \ \ �v, •1 ,-`/r' ' J 'J• r� /' J • •'• W ' • W W WW W ,/f WyW WWW W, r r, .,. i , r a v Y{ v/ Y r •.+C-_ \ W W - a 1 I• W P a' 4., W W W W W W W W W W W W W . W W -,-,-%,:_l_ W..J, W Y'-.. W - W -.W W W W W W W W /:y W W W W : \ _ • X \. ,� :\ rte" ,/ i' Yv Nri r -.r iWih�`i;'+'L` / W W-- _ w vaw •Y ---W' j•.Y�E%'.E _ ! W .a\ >: "r, by - \ _ _' : W W \ W"' W W W W W Y W ml, „' # W \ 1 G T` W i W 1,:, W '\ ` ' l.• r-, I• f .,: .'Y / ♦ ♦. .. ♦ \ � °Y 1 �' °I ••'f'.•e, 1 '�- ^.., 44WW W ,fir �,S VS Ww Y=W�y v- .i, .Y r., y.,v I. �)'W,•Y i,,.,_ .\ I_ / L `Y W Wild W ,4W r'•Vrl• -a /W"' WW W vY,WW 4R1 W`W, W W \-, _/rl�-:fr f{',/'"J V',1 S Y VIa' vR W _ // ..W WWW W W'YaW WWWll, W. WW µ.W WyV,WWWW WWWWW \ .` - `S' I „' W't �'' `YV ♦W W ` • }�%v. •L+ 1 I _ M W W W W W W..WW WW W W W W W'TXf'', J W W a� ,li'i W ': F, I, �i, ''!Y♦ rr SI `\ \W •,'Q� �:.�-/+"•'9S v_•+r ♦ V + W W W. y. W.y W W:W 5 W W W I _ HIVD "' W , \ _! Wr / WWW WWW WWWyW-`WW W WWWWWWWWWW W W WWW J'' / \ W v %' ..I �, r('•. J 1/E va / � ' �. r`♦I -1.♦ W /. •.1�-�r�1a`�. �� - � W iW W� LW W W WW WW WW W _ _ ,. \ -_ _ : : : / ,,. • W, �- rY • i \\\\ •� rF v V �� •�� ��Y--r�-t, .h.'..W W W ,r} ♦ _ W,,4. V' W W i W W •Y v WT iP W W_ -,/\, -/ _ +`W+YW1 -• W' •VhV .• W♦ W W W +Y W W W - J" `� • W W _/ _ W WWWWWW J, W W W W W WWW W W W W W WWWW J r/ \\ \, \�--1--W R' Y.:.+c WI W W W J+ W W W W W ,`L' �W W W %Y, 1�` 1 - A V' W "' W ti+a I l y W / W , W w- W W W ; W W W -W W\ ! Tl(P.`` 60 C W' \ - - /F`,i:/ Y�•V]yY(- ` r/•, % .. ` v\�.,\ �Wr ' • YY✓ry•V W W W W W� W W 'I' W W W'Y W W W J, W W I, •� N'\' { .W W •V• W\ W W W W 'W W �- W W W W �\ W W W W W� W W W W W W _ ,_ V � `/i /�: 'a W/ • t,V \ \\\, ay , • • ry + •• Wim. W W W W '' .,W \�. W`\ WW WWWWWWW, ( W ` , �W ,\ \ r j W • - i ,, :,% , t` rr N r 1 / \ C I W IW W W y' Wi W `�. 4'15 �\ , riJ •T TJ�r W W W� 1 W\. W W W _ \� 1 `- 1. H 4S ` _ / $ a )G a v� V,y \ ` ",\ iv N. .• ♦V\,I� W W W:. W 'W W W W - N• ° - 4Y W W w � -� 209 -SH Y , �` 1 /�" -/�� V'J'I Ii. / 1 • w\.\\ W W W W W W W W W WWWW W W W.; WW WW �/_�, i ♦1 +r / \ •\I V :1 W W SI• •L W ,, ,, 'W WI W ,, _ = W.yW.yW y.W--.1* . W , ,\i AR � \W WWWWWW W WV -W W W W W WW WW jW /W (!Fj V� •7•$� W W W` W W W W�'W fV W WW W `%" \\` W W W WWW v v YyY W O \ W P \/ *`; W WW1W W IJ 4\ �,/: ' YY''✓iY/. ♦ + 'Ya "3 P ; W Ty O W W W W W -YW_.. WW .L `/ . ` • , Y _ \: r W WWW Y, j W�.W WW WW WW W 1 yG1� /W �rWW \ \ {% •i'/IT••v tV 4,Y,, I\\ 1 W1� •l't 1 1W ��l W �V•W'-- •� \•, ' / 6 TIr ``,\,`,WWWW `V T1��♦T 'W( WW WW if \ • YyV Wt/ S, yvy. / r a +r Jf W W W W V` W ` ° \ "� W W / ' 1` W(, V W W T W " �_ .. \ \ t/Y-vI, 'C�v_ �:L ''•` I �.WW`BW WW WW,, WW W I _ _ - W W / J ' _ -�. W\ WW l+Y_ W W W WW WW`L.WWWwWW r..0 ' W+a"�i IvV'`a,+A •'I(ry H\ ,, W W W J` \, Y` _ �� W W W W W W W W W �' .\\ \\ , W i r , W. u __ _ •y J, 'r - tel• �+iX.�:' I . `, \ • ♦ S (•� .W W W W �Y •Y W W O -0,v W W W W W W �'d� _ - _ _ T r - Y W ri C L W W ;, r _ r"111.'` 11j- + a•• +1 •• '„•• I v. 6� ° � U.1 _, T "�.- �W •Y .Y ♦YW .Y `YW - ;_ \ z .7I 1 . r / ; ' r :fie ° 2s eP ' _ ;y s %, ��,� i'. .. _ . Jj�,`�� , 1 \ .W .. ° / / y. v - a 9 ,� - . •1p JSvv i ��A: � , , - >•- + sa I \\�:\ W.. W'1 ,, ,� N W `Y W W i v'� / \. \ \ \\\\, r,J r.^•_,,'.-"-.- '" V" "+.. a�` ;Y r . _ Y /' , � • -I ' ' _ _ , a r - \ - _ _ - _`�' ` " , ' \ %; \ w W W / \ V -•'Y _ M �C //�� W W WWW Y W W / Nh \ ,\ \ � ,• W. v ♦I�.,, ♦'{:i' _ - a1P ..y`l, 1W 1 4 _ • r \ �j � may,. 5 -BN \.\ '\`,\ W _ qv 6 ' -,e ^8 W W W W W W \.. W N \.\\ \ - r, I \ \`- \ '••V'W+• \ �I ° W W W-. �W' _ i`�_T'- W W W -`X _.W"WWW _`L=W \\\\- � \ iW +W'YSYu \r +'+ ,-i,�e� `: TYP. WW W err W W W�`4 1W-�- W,, JY -_W �-W WSW W WWW W W F y RF 5' / \ \\\\ \\ �\ �" • y / � -�'� a j``i tj•I,'�rJy/'� `' r- \` r� W W � W W- �p @. T• W .-i1' / \. \ ` / V••�� :Ii ' ,V {W(•Y\q�i iV.Y +.W 2 31 -SN W W W _ _ W W ,A W.1Y, W ,y W.y \,,,V V W W W W „✓� W W W W W WWW WWWWWW ` \ .\`. \ \\\• ,. I ')•rt`' L '_W"a'1`•• a ', ° W W W _ �� W \W 1 p/ .-.\ \Ltq�5��\ \- • Y'i: W f• M • a i 'V I W �.I,W` ♦ _- I O W' W W W W -.� W W W W r -'', ., W W W W W W W - W WWWW W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W = \ --_ '�`{ �-� � �- � � `' �+ •'� � W +• '+ W W W W W W W W W W W W W WWW W W /W W W 1 W W W W ��--- --. \- :M(, `la- W 1 •` , W •W W W W W W -_`,r W W W W W `\ W W W W W W W W W W W W - .', TYP, ^ 1 'V ,Y3•WVWI� YV t, • Y •� W Wl,yri^"V W W W/.1Y'W W W W W W W W W W W W\ W W/ W W W W W W W W W W \\ 8 \` 1 \y ryi 1•i �i l_ +-{ ,�• • `w• +, ••+ W W�0- W W W- W WI W - W / W W W W W W\ W W W W W W _�-•Y. W W \ 4 ♦ w YV ♦�,- 1 '�` \ 'a v�„Y_ W •St++ +"\ ••Y'r v I W W W V!. wlw� W �`Y W `V� W W W `k•. -W- W- \W C W W W W W W W "Y W W W W W `Y'-, W `,W W - , -- _ Y i .. lJ W \ V %• r " W W W_ JJ W W W W / W \ W V- _ ! W W W W W, `- _ --' WIF + V m WSW W W _ ' Y W W W W W W W W W W _ 1' • ,y�/�, 'yam _ lL� / 11� PLANT SCHEDULE 4 Y +' a i ` - Y W JV �T iW W 6 I W- C, W W, W W WI W W W . W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W -- e, - ..``� l� •'� V •'r'�' T W ', 4-, W W W W... W �' `, ,, ' `, \ �•v w V W _ W W W W W W W f W W W 1 �F `� Z Cyya ` _ _ WW� WW, _s..>_. �'- \�I'll \♦`` ,: +' 1� rY +y .�,,. 'Lri +a"V , ,Y W y"J' `"G''L-W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W �{: . ,\-- .Y WWW W \\ l W W W W W W W WWW WWW' W W W W -,WWWW W , , 3- N � \ \\\ y �, • W W W W W. W W � ' ' W` _ V W -\ ♦\ \ i• YWS W4• Z�� 1 W W - W W _ _ r_ / ^' : ,y6 ,,, _. W `,,,, W yWW W , ."',-,"I", // \ \ '`\ . S 6°r• W r q V - \ W _ ``\'' T'�r- , W W W W Y W ,<: c, - , , ��i 1 y/]1,,./ -l/ • t V. Y ; ,V/ .--1r- W W W W _ - _ ,- ' \..�-' _ _ _ _ W \, _ `Z_ W 1. ) % 'Y _ _ _ _ \ _ - WWWWWWWW �W _ - _ - -I r 1, \ ♦ \ \\\\\\ i� •"1'V1 `+• a v y W W WWWW W W \ \, �,j" • • r ` �' . W W \W " I _ \�. \ \\\\\ VI Iy`W -_-`, S-�i ' ,-,, '-v�..a _ WW W V`4ya�W 5 `W ��\W V% WWWWW -TFr •I \ LI C\\\\\\ •,•� W ' ,' , - - - \. ,. - W W W W W W J\ W W-- W W W W A\W W �W 11 W V` W W W W -� j� \ \ Q, \\\\�\ ( +,y� �`�. ' ^ '' `4 r _ - W W W •Y\ W W W W W - W �" W W W 1 ` / \'\ \ \ �' \ \\ ` vV �+ - •\\- ,.. LLT '/(] _ T\ \,' '' . W W W W W W W W `W`\ W W W W W W WWW W, W W W W W,, 1 W W -Y-W W W 1 \\,\ \ 6 1 i i'' ,♦; , /i 1, , W-T•_'_,m_'_W-.aY.__W\ W W W W W \ W - Y W W 8 -SP % PLANTING PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES: ,`\; fz -\o : J -' ;� y' - W W W W W W`��-\\W WWWW WWW WWWW W W W \ a �\ O - \ - WW W\WWWWWWW W\W W W WWW WW WW`Y�. . �✓WW \\W WW e `\� - - 6 -, `' ' -•- , ,,, - W W W W WWW W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W INSTALL 'SHORTGRASS PRAIRIE SEED MIX FOR D \ �\ 6 V J�J,- Y t4 W W - V W W W �W�W W W W S W W W i O DRY SAND' SEED MIX AS SUPPLIED BY PRAIRIE MOON NURSERY, 1-866-417-8156. ; 4 ,: J \ . \ , , <p\ (j ' _�K' �' -' .h 0 W WW W W \WW WWWW W W WWWWW W' W WWW W\ W W W W1 \:, 12 -MA h \ \ ♦\ V \ \\ \ V \ \ O \�_ _ _ _ r' W W \ W W W W W `W W W W\ \��\ \\\, \\ \��y - - ?\T :`C, _ - _ /�,i_ W W W W W W \ W W W `U\ W W W W-. - j % 2. TYPE 2 SEEDING WATERWAY MIX \ \ \ j��] - _ _ _ _ - _ _ - `' \ W W W W \ W W W W\\W W W W W W W W V / SEEDING. INSTALL 'WATERWAY MIX' SEED MIXTURE AS SUPPLIED BY BIG O \°�\\�- �- I31 - - } f __ _ _' �- -'-�-' - \ -1 Y W W \W W�W W� WWWWWW \\ \ \\� \`\ \ \ - 4 - .K- �' _J-=-� W W W W W�Pj•Y vV'� +-'-y' \.\ I COUNTRY SEED, NORTH LIBERTY, IOWA 1-319-560-3263. \\ \\ `~\ \ \\� v e _ "'fi 9 �- \ - - _- W \c \ F J l \- 3. TYPE 3 SEEDING LAWN MIX .,.• Y \•\ \\\ \ ly::� - --.---.__ t+::.': a LAKE \ \ " \°-a,�;,tr �`? W W y �` - - TO BE APPLIED BY HYDRAULIC SEEDING WITH TACKIFIER. c:..`++ ..+..` ` �\ \ � - _ _- _ \ \ 4. PROVIDE 2" RIVER ROCK AT 4" DEPTH ON COMMERCIAL GRADE WEED BARRIER WHERE SHOWN. -- _ - _ - - - - -��_ - - _, , 5. PROVIDE SHREDDED BARK MULCH AROUND ALL INDIVIDUAL PLANTS AT 3" DEPTH. - - -- - -- - ----_- - _ - - - - - \ \\� b `= - --- - , __ _ -- -- -. -- 6. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS SHREDDED BARK MULCH IN PLANTING BEDS AND ROWS AT 3" DEPTH. _----_----- - - ~ ✓ 1 -_-1 - -.-- I __ 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL STAKE LOCATIONS OF PLANT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR OWNER -_,. APPROVAL. GROUPINGS CAN BE STAKED AT PERIMETERS. 46- N - 8. CONTRACTOR TO MINIMIZE CUT IN TURF REINFOCEMENT MATTING. - 0 30 SCALE (FEET) ILE N0. PA >- to O � j Ta 0- o n 1 U) m CA u- -- N of "l,U U In O\ N L m O w � Y 8 m rn U a N Qo 0 F m r9 Z Y c c � 2 . € f? m I 91 W F a LL O �m 2" dv) w h _ �d o -M H9 �� �W Z p aN ^O W LLN �� m ,4 N_ U A LU c Q `c{ W O O O ti_oq am �V fD N Ir A a wM a 2 _ M W 6 co Octj 04 In<N O � N 1 O Z a Z Ic N a W _ Z cl) O W a W Oct cc V.. 0 - V W Ir Z Q IW C) O o a Oct ED W 5 ots M a w 1= LU m W ~ a 0 Z P 111.0253 Sheet SP10 KEY BOTANICAL NAME COMMON NAME SIZE COMMENTS BN Betula nigra Cully' RIVER BIRCH 8' HT. SINGLE B&B GT Gleditisio triocanthos 'Skyline' SKYLINE HONEYLOCUST 2" CAL. B&B N GD G mnoclodus dioicus 'Espresso' ESPRESSO KENTUCKY COFFEE TREE 2" CAL. B&B w MA Maackio cmurensis AMUR MAACKIA 1-1/2" CAL. B&B OB Quercus bicolor SWAMP WHITE OAK 2" CAL. B&B QM Quercus macrocarpa BUR OAK 1-1/2" CAL. B&B OF Ulmus frontier FRONTIER ELM 1-1/2" CAL. B&B AG Acer ,inn Io AMUR MAPLE 6' HT. CLUMP B&B JS Juniperus sobina 'Colgar Carpet' CALGARY CARPET JUMPER _ _ 24" SP CONT. < SP Syringo patulo 'Miss Kim_' MISS KIM LILAC 24" HT. CONT. VC Viburnum corlesii KOREANSPICE VIBURNUM 24" HT. CONT. L1 VD Viburnum dentatum 'Ralph Senior' AUTUMN JAll ARROWWOOD VIBURNUM 36" HT. CONT. CA Colomo rostis acutiflora 'KarlFoerster' KARL FOERSTER FEATHER REED GRASS 18" HT. CONT. w ER Erianthus ravennce RAVENNA GRASS 36 HT. CONT. Q PV Panicum vir atum 'HeavyMetal' HEAVY METAL SWITCH GRASS 18" HT. CONT. c6a SH S orobolus heferol is PRAIRIE DROPSEED 18" HT. CONT. BV Baptisio x variicolor 'Starlite' STARLITE PRAIRIEBLUES FALSE INDIGO 1 GAL., 12" CONT. CV Coreopsis verticillota 'Zagreb' ZAGREB COREPOSIS 1 GAL., 12" CONT. 10 EP Echinacea purpurea 'Magnus' MAGNUS PURPLE CONEFLOWER 1GAL.,12" CONT. z LS Liatris spicata 'Kobold' KOBOLD GAYFEATHER 1 GAL., 12" CONT. W RF Rudbeckia fulgida 'Goldsturm' GOLDSTURM BLACK EYED SUSAN 1 GAL., 12" CONT. CL SN Solvia nemorosa 'May Night' --- - --- - MAY NIGHT SALVIA _ _ _ --- 1 GAL., 12" CONT. SS Sedum spectobile Motrono MATRONA SEDUM 1 GAL., 12" CONT. YF Yucco flamentoso 'Bright Edge' BRIGHT EDGE YUCCA 1 GAL., 12" CONT. _s..>_. �'- \�I'll \♦`` ,: +' 1� rY +y .�,,. 'Lri +a"V , ,Y W y"J' `"G''L-W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W �{: . ,\-- .Y WWW W \\ l W W W W W W W WWW WWW' W W W W -,WWWW W , , 3- N � \ \\\ y �, • W W W W W. W W � ' ' W` _ V W -\ ♦\ \ i• YWS W4• Z�� 1 W W - W W _ _ r_ / ^' : ,y6 ,,, _. W `,,,, W yWW W , ."',-,"I", // \ \ '`\ . S 6°r• W r q V - \ W _ ``\'' T'�r- , W W W W Y W ,<: c, - , , ��i 1 y/]1,,./ -l/ • t V. Y ; ,V/ .--1r- W W W W _ - _ ,- ' \..�-' _ _ _ _ W \, _ `Z_ W 1. ) % 'Y _ _ _ _ \ _ - WWWWWWWW �W _ - _ - -I r 1, \ ♦ \ \\\\\\ i� •"1'V1 `+• a v y W W WWWW W W \ \, �,j" • • r ` �' . W W \W " I _ \�. \ \\\\\ VI Iy`W -_-`, S-�i ' ,-,, '-v�..a _ WW W V`4ya�W 5 `W ��\W V% WWWWW -TFr •I \ LI C\\\\\\ •,•� W ' ,' , - - - \. ,. - W W W W W W J\ W W-- W W W W A\W W �W 11 W V` W W W W -� j� \ \ Q, \\\\�\ ( +,y� �`�. ' ^ '' `4 r _ - W W W •Y\ W W W W W - W �" W W W 1 ` / \'\ \ \ �' \ \\ ` vV �+ - •\\- ,.. LLT '/(] _ T\ \,' '' . W W W W W W W W `W`\ W W W W W W WWW W, W W W W W,, 1 W W -Y-W W W 1 \\,\ \ 6 1 i i'' ,♦; , /i 1, , W-T•_'_,m_'_W-.aY.__W\ W W W W W \ W - Y W W 8 -SP % PLANTING PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES: ,`\; fz -\o : J -' ;� y' - W W W W W W`��-\\W WWWW WWW WWWW W W W \ a �\ O - \ - WW W\WWWWWWW W\W W W WWW WW WW`Y�. . �✓WW \\W WW e `\� - - 6 -, `' ' -•- , ,,, - W W W W WWW W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W INSTALL 'SHORTGRASS PRAIRIE SEED MIX FOR D \ �\ 6 V J�J,- Y t4 W W - V W W W �W�W W W W S W W W i O DRY SAND' SEED MIX AS SUPPLIED BY PRAIRIE MOON NURSERY, 1-866-417-8156. ; 4 ,: J \ . \ , , <p\ (j ' _�K' �' -' .h 0 W WW W W \WW WWWW W W WWWWW W' W WWW W\ W W W W1 \:, 12 -MA h \ \ ♦\ V \ \\ \ V \ \ O \�_ _ _ _ r' W W \ W W W W W `W W W W\ \��\ \\\, \\ \��y - - ?\T :`C, _ - _ /�,i_ W W W W W W \ W W W `U\ W W W W-. - j % 2. TYPE 2 SEEDING WATERWAY MIX \ \ \ j��] - _ _ _ _ - _ _ - `' \ W W W W \ W W W W\\W W W W W W W W V / SEEDING. INSTALL 'WATERWAY MIX' SEED MIXTURE AS SUPPLIED BY BIG O \°�\\�- �- I31 - - } f __ _ _' �- -'-�-' - \ -1 Y W W \W W�W W� WWWWWW \\ \ \\� \`\ \ \ - 4 - .K- �' _J-=-� W W W W W�Pj•Y vV'� +-'-y' \.\ I COUNTRY SEED, NORTH LIBERTY, IOWA 1-319-560-3263. \\ \\ `~\ \ \\� v e _ "'fi 9 �- \ - - _- W \c \ F J l \- 3. TYPE 3 SEEDING LAWN MIX .,.• Y \•\ \\\ \ ly::� - --.---.__ t+::.': a LAKE \ \ " \°-a,�;,tr �`? W W y �` - - TO BE APPLIED BY HYDRAULIC SEEDING WITH TACKIFIER. c:..`++ ..+..` ` �\ \ � - _ _- _ \ \ 4. PROVIDE 2" RIVER ROCK AT 4" DEPTH ON COMMERCIAL GRADE WEED BARRIER WHERE SHOWN. -- _ - _ - - - - -��_ - - _, , 5. PROVIDE SHREDDED BARK MULCH AROUND ALL INDIVIDUAL PLANTS AT 3" DEPTH. - - -- - -- - ----_- - _ - - - - - \ \\� b `= - --- - , __ _ -- -- -. -- 6. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS SHREDDED BARK MULCH IN PLANTING BEDS AND ROWS AT 3" DEPTH. _----_----- - - ~ ✓ 1 -_-1 - -.-- I __ 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL STAKE LOCATIONS OF PLANT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR OWNER -_,. APPROVAL. GROUPINGS CAN BE STAKED AT PERIMETERS. 46- N - 8. CONTRACTOR TO MINIMIZE CUT IN TURF REINFOCEMENT MATTING. - 0 30 SCALE (FEET) ILE N0. PA >- to O � j Ta 0- o n 1 U) m CA u- -- N of "l,U U In O\ N L m O w � Y 8 m rn U a N Qo 0 F m r9 Z Y c c � 2 . € f? m I 91 W F a LL O �m 2" dv) w h _ �d o -M H9 �� �W Z p aN ^O W LLN �� m ,4 N_ U A LU c Q `c{ W O O O ti_oq am �V fD N Ir A a wM a 2 _ M W 6 co Octj 04 In<N O � N 1 O Z a Z Ic N a W _ Z cl) O W a W Oct cc V.. 0 - V W Ir Z Q IW C) O o a Oct ED W 5 ots M a w 1= LU m W ~ a 0 Z P 111.0253 Sheet SP10 6'• TYPE 'C ITYPI (SEE LOM?oFNTiO�DETAIU H P) y �'- - - - - - - McCOLLISTER BLVD.= -- TYPE 'C' JOINT (TYP) +4kj u £Vf OY M.�ACf� �f `E'0 DY *,, TYPE 'C' JOINT (TYP) m LU cn a CL o !' co Y ^' U) m N ll L U) N_ N \ U U O_ \ N U) m O w r M U DLo N U U O Q � � U Lo o z U C C N Z m W F d ILL a OOHO N J N d L9 m W 6 N ca r �_ �O� z o <N LU - N J N {il � 0.- 0 w O ¢tq Ng g Uc4 am Z N M cc K Q O M a i i M WM J O m Q CDN N O aZ (n Y � ^ Q N a w oC - Q z r Q W aZ J�Mmm W a V a V w10 z o 5 cn p a t/) o Z Q W Z ob O H W Z in w CC W w a z H a cn 0 30 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE N0. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet SP11 z m LU cn a CL o !' co Y ^' U) m N ll L U) N_ N \ U U O_ \ N U) m O w r M U DLo N U U O Q � � U Lo o z U C C N Z m W F d ILL a OOHO N J N d L9 m W 6 N ca r �_ �O� z o <N LU - N J N {il � 0.- 0 w O ¢tq Ng g Uc4 am Z N M cc K Q O M a i i M WM J O m Q CDN N O aZ (n Y � ^ Q N a w oC - Q z r Q W aZ J�Mmm W a V a V w10 z o 5 cn p a t/) o Z Q W Z ob O H W Z in w CC W w a z H a cn 0 30 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE N0. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet SP11 1 a B� Sr fill ld(D Refer to the contract documents for specific material Lowest and placement requirements. Flowline Q Required only when specified in the contract documents or when directed by the Engineer. OD' Outside diameter of pipe D = Inside diameter of pipe TW= Trench width at top of pipe d = Depth of bedding material below pipe TRENCH BEDDING AND BACKFILL ZONES NO SCALE Frame Notes: Size and spacing of lugs and flanges may vary. Cover Notes: Roughness pattern and text style may vary. Minimum one concealed pickhole. Chimney Seal - 12" miry ►�12,, Oj When the contract documents require the Gasket 26" min. ►I 1 /2" frame to be attached to the structure, drill Sea four 7/6" diameter holes or slots, equally spaced around frame. 7" min. 24" min. I+ 35 %6" min. Anchor TYPICAL SECTION �41 CASTING FOR SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE NO SCALE Conti 3' Ab Minim Corn 24" Belo Type 'A' Casting Adjustment Rings (typ.) anhole Invert 6" min. 8" min. TYPICAL SECTION Top t Sealant (typ.) Location Static Precast Riser Sections -Precast Base with Integral Riser Section — Flexible Pipe Connection (typ.) Class 1 Bedding Materia CIRCULAR SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE NO SCALE TYPE A Two-piece fixed casting PLAN PLAN 8" 12"X 3"X3/6" Tube Steel With I/4" Steel —� Plate and End Caps, Weld and Grind Smooth, Hot DIP Golovonizecl Light Fixture (See Electrical Plans) Letters By Others Copper Flashing Face on Treated 2"x4". Inset 1" Simpson A35 0 2'-0" O.C. Typical with 29 SD Screws 4 -SDS x 3" Screws @ Each A35 into Glue -Lam 5 1/8" X 13 1/2" Glue -Lam Beam 1" Chamfer Precast Stone Cap Reinforced Concrete Column Air Space 4" Limestone Veneer to Match Lodge Mortar Net Throught Wall EPDM Flashing CC Cd.... CL...L.:.... TAPER FROM 6'-0" TO 4'-0" I/ 2" X 2" SQUARE POWDER COAT LE] D D •DDD;• D; v 6" DEPTH PCC i ----- - 1" X 3" STEEL TUBE POWDER COAT BLACK PORTABLE RESTROOM UNIT (NOT IN CONTRACT) i i I I I I I I � I � I 4'-4" PORTABLE RESTROOM ENCLOSURE DETAIL NO SCALE SURFACE MOUNT BRACKET TO PCC PAD. Preacost Stone Cap r0ulzy MUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA Limestone Veneer to =ry Match Lodge Building v 18'-4" 4' 0.. i —Precast Stone Cop r - i i ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- FRONT ELEVATION SANITARY GRINDER STATION NO SCALE POWDER COAT BLACK SECTION A -A " Dia. Anchor Bolts z 24" O.C. 7" Min. Embedment Chamfer Existing - Grade 45 Bars 12" O.C.E.W. Existing — Grade 6 90° STD. Hoak b 1¢ N LU -4- 1, Z; 3" CLR Q SIGN FOOTING O W a � W a cc — W o oc o � o o a J to Ca W J a W >= W LU H Z Maximum Pipe Diameter Q Manhole (inches) for 2 Pipes Diameter At 180° At 90 (inches) Separation Separation 48 24 18 60 36 24 72 11 2 30 84 1 48 36 96 1 60 42 8" 12"X 3"X3/6" Tube Steel With I/4" Steel —� Plate and End Caps, Weld and Grind Smooth, Hot DIP Golovonizecl Light Fixture (See Electrical Plans) Letters By Others Copper Flashing Face on Treated 2"x4". Inset 1" Simpson A35 0 2'-0" O.C. Typical with 29 SD Screws 4 -SDS x 3" Screws @ Each A35 into Glue -Lam 5 1/8" X 13 1/2" Glue -Lam Beam 1" Chamfer Precast Stone Cap Reinforced Concrete Column Air Space 4" Limestone Veneer to Match Lodge Mortar Net Throught Wall EPDM Flashing CC Cd.... CL...L.:.... TAPER FROM 6'-0" TO 4'-0" I/ 2" X 2" SQUARE POWDER COAT LE] D D •DDD;• D; v 6" DEPTH PCC i ----- - 1" X 3" STEEL TUBE POWDER COAT BLACK PORTABLE RESTROOM UNIT (NOT IN CONTRACT) i i I I I I I I � I � I 4'-4" PORTABLE RESTROOM ENCLOSURE DETAIL NO SCALE SURFACE MOUNT BRACKET TO PCC PAD. Preacost Stone Cap r0ulzy MUEBLOOD RECREATION AREA Limestone Veneer to =ry Match Lodge Building v 18'-4" 4' 0.. i —Precast Stone Cop r - i i ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- FRONT ELEVATION SANITARY GRINDER STATION NO SCALE POWDER COAT BLACK SECTION A -A " Dia. Anchor Bolts z 24" O.C. 7" Min. Embedment Chamfer Existing - Grade 45 Bars 12" O.C.E.W. Existing — Grade 6 90° STD. Hoak b 1¢ N LU -4- 1, Z; 3" CLR Q SIGN FOOTING O W a � W a cc — W o oc o � o o a J to Ca W J a W >= W LU H Z J m a In J N W im co PCC PCC ♦ /� � � � � m z N Z 40 Uj = a- W o 0) U) N m" Y FILA o 1$m FfB 212012 ¢ y.1�2012 05 LL ti � a rn NM 0 atz N W M 0 Notch Glue -Lam as Required for Bolts 0 CC _ 414 M U L0 Z W \ N U)' m O C) ��CD 0 N M CLR Lu Y 2" 2" x 6" T ZI Keyway i Ly >_T Ln Ln am U C) N U U I,- Z O Q O H m8 U Z Y IX If .� L y 2 o m W I I a LL O J m a In J N W Precast Stone Ca 3 #5 Bars P Continuous Bottom Reinforced Concrete Column Air Space 4" Limstone Veneer to Mach Lodge Mortar Net Throught Wall EPDM Flashing SS Edge Flashing Grout Solid i I -I ____ CITY FILE N0. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet SP12 co PCC PCC ♦ /� � � � � m Z 40 O W U_ P1 N m" FILA o FfB 212012 ¢ y.1�2012 � ti � a rn NM 0 atz W M 0 Notch Glue -Lam as Required for Bolts _ 414 M W M M o 0 C) ��CD 0 N M CLR z O 2" 2" x 6" T ZI Keyway i >_T 6 am cn Y I,- Z Precast Stone Ca 3 #5 Bars P Continuous Bottom Reinforced Concrete Column Air Space 4" Limstone Veneer to Mach Lodge Mortar Net Throught Wall EPDM Flashing SS Edge Flashing Grout Solid i I -I ____ CITY FILE N0. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet SP12 Te 6 Casting �12 4 =; T,14" 14� Adjustment Rings 44 Bars at 15" o.c. Each Way' /4" * ODUUUUUl1UUUlJUUUt1U 24 30 Q # 9 pipe 1 Install four 4 diagonal boys of all i e 7 I/s 11j [�I I�I I�11 Cost -in-place base shown. If base is precast integral LIiiUFF U ll ll with walls, the footprint of the base is not required 33�� to extend beyond the outer edge of the walls. /4 1 /8:: Form Grade Q 12 inch minimum wall height above all pipes. 4" fir Slope I/2" per foot TYPE 6 CASTING #4 bars I Short Woll - 611 I� 2 O„ 6„ SECTION A -A RECTANGULAR AREA INTAKE NO SCALE ------------- RCP apron section ----------------------- MAXIMUM PIPE DIAMETERS Pipe Location Precast Cast -in-place Structure Structure Short Wall 15" 18" Long Wall 24" 30" 12" min. Location Station Type 6 Casting I 1 bedding material of Boro pJ #4 Bars at 12" o.c. Each Way ng Wall 3'-0"- 4'_0"- PLAN REINFORCING BAR LIST ELEVATI N D W Mark Size Length Count 12" 2' 4" 4fl 4 2'-0" 3 4f2 4 T-8" 2 15" 2'-101/2' 4111 4 21-6 %2' 3 -4f2 4 3'-8" 2 18" 3' S" 41`1 4 3'-1" 3 41[2 4 3'4" 3 24" 4'-6" 4f1 4 4'-2" 3 41`2 4 T-8" 3 30" 5'-7" 4fl 4 5'-3" 3 41`2 4 3' 8" 4 36" 6'-8" 4fl 4 6'-4" 3 4f2 4 3'-8" 5 42" 7' 3" 4fl 4 6'-11" 3 4f2 4 3'-8" 5 RCPAPRON SECTION FOOTING NO SCALE D W MarkSize 45° BEND Len th Count 48'. 7' 10" 4f1 4 T-6" 3 4f2 4 3'-8" 6 54" 8'-5" 4f1 4 8.4. 3 4f2 4 3' 8" 6 60" 81-111, 4f1 4 8'-7" 3 4f2 4 3'-8" 6 66" 8' 11" 411 4 8'-7" 3 4f2 4 S-8" 6 72" 10'-0" 4fl 4 9' 8" 3 4f2 4 Y-8" 7 7811 10'-7" 4fl 4 101-3" 3 02 4 3'-8" 7 84" 11' 1" 4fl 4 10'-9" 3 4f2 4 86.4 THRUST BLOCK QUANTITIES (SQUARE FEET) PIPE SIZE DEAD END OR TEE 90° BEND 45° BEND I1-If4 BEND 'r2 -1d2 BEND 4' 14 119110 He 1.0 110 6' 2.8 44 211 1,1 1.0 S' 4,8 6.8 3.7 119 1.0 10' 73 103 5,8 218 1.4 12' 1013 14,5 7.9 4.0 210 16' 17.8 2512 13.6 7,0 3.5 20' 27.5 38,9 21.0 10.7 5.4 24' 39,2 55,5 30.0 15.3 7.7 30' 60.3 85.3 1 46.2 23,5 11.8 36' 86.4 12e,e 66.1 33,7 16.9 42' 116.6 165,0 89.3 45.5 22.9 48' 152.0 215,0 11613 59,3 299 54' 1 192,1 271,6 147,0 74,9 374 THE ABOVE AREAS ARE BASED UPON A SOIL BEARING CAPACITY OF 2000 PSF OF UNDISTURBED SOIL, IF ACTUAL SOIL BEARING STRENGTH IS LESS THAN 2000 PSF, THE THRUST BEARING AREA SHALL BE INCREASED BASED ON ACTUAL SOIL BEARING STRENGTH, THRUST BLOCKS NO SCALE n 0 18" ;r BUILDING ort Wall 2'-0" I 3' Q Install four #4 diagonal bars at all pipe openings. Type R Costing. O3 Cast -in-place base shown. If base is precast integral with walls, the footprint of the base is not required to extend beyond the outer edge of the walls. ® 12 inch minimum wall height above all pipes. ry Costing© Form Grades tional Bornstruction REINFORCING BAR LIST Short Wall nt (typJIII Mork Size "21 He Count Spacing 4wl 4 Walls 8" min. 14 \L141b2 4b1 4w2 hort Long Walls 6" Wall 6" 2'-0" T-O" 4w3 SECTION A -A Short Walls 3"X4" Dow I 11 i BUILDING r2' �/z I i i 3"X4" 1 i SINGLE GRATE INTAKE NO SCALE Lo -`' Downspou I/ i Downspout Shoe 3 3/4 X 5 1/4 " NEENAH Viz" 12 R-4927 Adapter Downspout Shoe 3 3/4 X 5 1/4 " NEENAH R-4927 Adapter 6" PVC itOKe 12" Depth 6" mir TYPICAL DOWNSPOUT CONNECTION TO STORM SEWER NO SCALE GATE VAL. IHRUS'BLOCK -t PLUG L BLOCK --- SWIVEL OR PLAN MAXIMUM PIPE DIAMETERS Pipe Location Precast Structure REINFORCING BAR LIST Short Wall 15" Mork Size Location Shoe Length Count Spacing 4wl 4 Walls Wall Height minus 4" 14 12" 4w2 4 Long Walls 3'-8" Varies 12" 4w3 4 Short Walls 2' 8" Varies 12" 4bl 4 Base 4'-2" 4 10" 02 4 Base 3'-2" 5 10" 3"X4" Dow I 11 i BUILDING r2' �/z I i i 3"X4" 1 i SINGLE GRATE INTAKE NO SCALE Lo -`' Downspou I/ i Downspout Shoe 3 3/4 X 5 1/4 " NEENAH Viz" 12 R-4927 Adapter Downspout Shoe 3 3/4 X 5 1/4 " NEENAH R-4927 Adapter 6" PVC itOKe 12" Depth 6" mir TYPICAL DOWNSPOUT CONNECTION TO STORM SEWER NO SCALE GATE VAL. IHRUS'BLOCK -t PLUG L BLOCK --- SWIVEL OR PLAN MAXIMUM PIPE DIAMETERS Pipe Location Precast Structure Cost -in-place Structure Short Wall 15" 18" Long Wall 24" 30" TYPICAL SECTION CIRCULAR AREA INTAKE NO SCALE HOLDING SPOOL OR RODDED OR MEGA LUG CONCRETE i' THRUST BLOCK Afd HGR TEE I 1 AS \�"� THRUST BLOCK cc � g� -THRUST BLOCK \ HYDRANT FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY - DEAD-END INSTALLATION ing TYPICAL SECTION r3 CIRCULAR SINGLE GRATE INTAKE NO SCALE Inlet Elevation -0-11978" f %e" I*25Y8" Hole Optional Hole Optional 1" min. 46/8- min. 1" min. // 6 7g" min. 10" max. 1 �UQQ���� 10" max. TYPE 3A TYPE 3B -� For Placement on 18" RCP For Placement on 24" RCP lass 3 RCP Risers TYPE 3 (Light Duty) Q Precast (shown) or cost-in-ploce base: • Precast: 6 -inch thick concrete with #6 welded wire mesh on 4 -inch centers (WWF 4"x 4"). Center mesh vertically within base. Cast-in-ploce: 8 -inch thick non -reinforced concrete. 12 -inch minimum riser height above oil pipes. care Edge Base NO SCALE 102 If �5 CUR? SIDEVALK I�PROPERTY LINE EX M is TRACER WIRE CURB Bax '°nE f CURB Bax ROD SERVICE PIPE- ' TYPE K COPPER L NEW SERVICE :IPE /-CURB STOP «MALL BE I" 'T {COPPER OR LARGER. ' ---BRICK SUPPORT _.---CORPORATION CDCK THRUST BLOCK SERVICE SADDLE IS REQUIRED ON PVC MAIN AND ALL I I/Z' AND e' TAPS MATER DTSTRIBUTTON MAIN NO SCALE INTAKE SIZE - CASE 1 Outlet Pipe Minimum Diameter, D1 Riser Diameter, D2 12" m 15" 24" 18" Q Type R Costing.Lu 21" 30" 24" 30" 27" Z p 36 96 60 42 01 For use at curb drops for driveways. Use � N only when specified in the contract 0 N J � documents. m N Cost-in-placebase shown, Base may be square. If M 0 points, grotes with vanes both W directions of flow are allowed. base is precast integral with walls, the footprint of the < W co For details of boxout pavement, refer to base is not required to extend beyond the outer edge N 00 0 of the walls. m QFor additional configurations, maintain a minimum of 12m LL L inches of concrete between vertical edges of pipe openings. N 012 inch minimum riser height above all pipes. = U Z N Station > o stment Rings Location (Back of Curb) m LU Precast Top o o � ( m C � O Z U < U O d Precast Riser 2 Lu a` iT Sections '0 PLAN y W N �m a,n Lu FEB 21 2012 ~ TYPICAL SECTION r3 CIRCULAR SINGLE GRATE INTAKE NO SCALE Inlet Elevation -0-11978" f %e" I*25Y8" Hole Optional Hole Optional 1" min. 46/8- min. 1" min. // 6 7g" min. 10" max. 1 �UQQ���� 10" max. TYPE 3A TYPE 3B -� For Placement on 18" RCP For Placement on 24" RCP lass 3 RCP Risers TYPE 3 (Light Duty) Q Precast (shown) or cost-in-ploce base: • Precast: 6 -inch thick concrete with #6 welded wire mesh on 4 -inch centers (WWF 4"x 4"). Center mesh vertically within base. Cast-in-ploce: 8 -inch thick non -reinforced concrete. 12 -inch minimum riser height above oil pipes. care Edge Base NO SCALE 102 If �5 CUR? SIDEVALK I�PROPERTY LINE EX M is TRACER WIRE CURB Bax '°nE f CURB Bax ROD SERVICE PIPE- ' TYPE K COPPER L NEW SERVICE :IPE /-CURB STOP «MALL BE I" 'T {COPPER OR LARGER. ' ---BRICK SUPPORT _.---CORPORATION CDCK THRUST BLOCK SERVICE SADDLE IS REQUIRED ON PVC MAIN AND ALL I I/Z' AND e' TAPS MATER DTSTRIBUTTON MAIN NO SCALE INTAKE SIZE - CASE 1 Outlet Pipe Minimum Diameter, D1 Riser Diameter, D2 12" 18" 15" 24" 18" 24" 21" 30" 24" 30" 27" 36" TYPE R(2) Curb Inlet Grate (Minimum open area 180 in 2 ae Manhole Diameter (inches) Maximum Pipe (inches) for 2 Diameter Q Pipes at 180 ° Separation of 90 ° Separation 48 24 18 60 36 24 72 1 42 30 84 48 36 96 60 42 /-HYDRANT TRACER WIRE TERMINAL BOX <DAYLIGHT BOX) 2-j' I.D. - LOCKABLE C.I. LID 3`-0 NOTEi TRACER WIRE TERMINAL DOX CDAYLIGH' 2ADIAL i % MUST BE ONE FDC7 (i`) AWAY FROM H CLEAR ' I SPACE / VALVE BOX AND l 6' GATE VALVE MAIN FINAL PLAN 351/4" to 351/2' --I �- 3" max, �I 36" to 361/4" 421/4" to 43" SECTION B -B CASTINGS FOR GRATE INTAKES NO SCALE TRENCH I GRADE TRENCH :;E BACKFILL I 1 WATER .0 HOLDING ~' I TP 3L OR j MAIN MAELG _THRUSTEGU f BLOCK I.w .:Y°::111.:1::' .;I. t ...: d AS REG `D LTHRUSTANCHORING TEE OR STANDARD . BLOCK TEE AND 'ROTO RING` (SWIVEL ADAPTOR). (SWIVEL TEE PREFERRED) L12'xl2'x4' CONCRETE PAD ,LBACKFILL W/ 2' OR LARGER CLEAN GRANULAR FILL TO IS' ABOVE BOTTOM. OF HYDRANT STAND PIPE FIRE HYDRANTASSEMBLY NO SCALE Form Grade 6 to 9 } T LID vMiic Box EXTENSION BACIK9 L YATK_ SAND MATERIAL cuacNE ei zr�c TRACM WRE (FASTEN TO WAW MAID X LON ILL 0 N O Z 2 LD LU � Y � I� z N Q N a W -23%2' to 241/8" 0 Slope of X5%4" to 61/8" Adjacent --Pavement 17y4" -y4.- Z ------ ---- - - i 6" to 61/2' OLU 2"R or 3"R TYPICAL SECTION W a W � O Cn �.-- mist€ CdtWND - O 4,0' 06 W J II II II W 1I 11 I TRACER ,RARE . II i1 I I WATER MAIN SIDE VIEW - 11U0T1lI"hili( - NOTES PLAN VIEW 1, FASTEN TRACER WIRE TO WATER MAIN. 2, VALVE BOX EXTENSION SHALL NOT SIT DIRECTLY ON TOP OF WATER MAIN. 3. EXTEND TRACER WIRE 3.0'BEYOND TOP OF VALVE BOX EXTENSION. PLACE EXCESS TRACER WIRE NEATLY INSIDE OF VALVE BOX EXTENSION AND INSTALL LID. 4, USE EXTREME CAUTION TO NOT DAMAGE TRACER WIRE WHILE BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. 111.0253 TRACER WIRE SYSTEM NO SCALE CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet SP13 o O U .q a rn Z N <[,�"' a' a Qn �c' U 01 For use at curb drops for driveways. Use � N only when specified in the contract 0 N J � documents. m N Q2 Provide bicycle -safe vane -style grate. At low facing M 0 points, grotes with vanes both W directions of flow are allowed. < Form Grade 6 to 9 } T LID vMiic Box EXTENSION BACIK9 L YATK_ SAND MATERIAL cuacNE ei zr�c TRACM WRE (FASTEN TO WAW MAID X LON ILL 0 N O Z 2 LD LU � Y � I� z N Q N a W -23%2' to 241/8" 0 Slope of X5%4" to 61/8" Adjacent --Pavement 17y4" -y4.- Z ------ ---- - - i 6" to 61/2' OLU 2"R or 3"R TYPICAL SECTION W a W � O Cn �.-- mist€ CdtWND - O 4,0' 06 W J II II II W 1I 11 I TRACER ,RARE . II i1 I I WATER MAIN SIDE VIEW - 11U0T1lI"hili( - NOTES PLAN VIEW 1, FASTEN TRACER WIRE TO WATER MAIN. 2, VALVE BOX EXTENSION SHALL NOT SIT DIRECTLY ON TOP OF WATER MAIN. 3. EXTEND TRACER WIRE 3.0'BEYOND TOP OF VALVE BOX EXTENSION. PLACE EXCESS TRACER WIRE NEATLY INSIDE OF VALVE BOX EXTENSION AND INSTALL LID. 4, USE EXTREME CAUTION TO NOT DAMAGE TRACER WIRE WHILE BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. 111.0253 TRACER WIRE SYSTEM NO SCALE CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet SP13 o O U .q a rn Z N <[,�"' a' a Qn �c' U 01 For use at curb drops for driveways. Use only when specified in the contract documents. Q2 Provide bicycle -safe vane -style grate. At low facing M points, grotes with vanes both directions of flow are allowed. W For details of boxout pavement, refer to N 31" SW -514. 00 0 Form Grade 6 to 9 } T LID vMiic Box EXTENSION BACIK9 L YATK_ SAND MATERIAL cuacNE ei zr�c TRACM WRE (FASTEN TO WAW MAID X LON ILL 0 N O Z 2 LD LU � Y � I� z N Q N a W -23%2' to 241/8" 0 Slope of X5%4" to 61/8" Adjacent --Pavement 17y4" -y4.- Z ------ ---- - - i 6" to 61/2' OLU 2"R or 3"R TYPICAL SECTION W a W � O Cn �.-- mist€ CdtWND - O 4,0' 06 W J II II II W 1I 11 I TRACER ,RARE . II i1 I I WATER MAIN SIDE VIEW - 11U0T1lI"hili( - NOTES PLAN VIEW 1, FASTEN TRACER WIRE TO WATER MAIN. 2, VALVE BOX EXTENSION SHALL NOT SIT DIRECTLY ON TOP OF WATER MAIN. 3. EXTEND TRACER WIRE 3.0'BEYOND TOP OF VALVE BOX EXTENSION. PLACE EXCESS TRACER WIRE NEATLY INSIDE OF VALVE BOX EXTENSION AND INSTALL LID. 4, USE EXTREME CAUTION TO NOT DAMAGE TRACER WIRE WHILE BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING. 111.0253 TRACER WIRE SYSTEM NO SCALE CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet SP13 T/2 O 2" Thru Curbs { Top of Curb Resilient L12 Joint Filler L Top DOWEL PLACEMENT of Slab ► + 1" Nominal (Applies to all joints unless otherwise detailed.) B 'E' -See Detail H JOINT IN CURB (View at Back of Curb) 1 Width (See --T I+ Top of Curb B Flexible Foam® Joint Filler table below) 'CF' JOINT Top Pavement Thickness OT OA ED Standard 8" or greater of Slab IF 24 Narrow TYPE WIDTH 1 2" Diameter saw. CF -1 2" 15 ` 'C' or 'CD'joints. Place no closer than 5 feet to a'C' or Saw Cut`s placement limits. Coat the free end of dowel bar to SECTION B -B I� 2" Nominal prevent bond with pavement. At intake locations, dowel CF -2, 22 bars may be cast -in-place. B� 16 CF-3 3" Crack or Joint Line EE' Material 17 Compact tire buffings by spading with a square -nose DETAIL A JOINT IN CURB _._. CF -4 32" (View at Back of Curb) (Saw cut formed by conventional B See Detail F esilient R Top of Curb 1" Thru Curb Joint Filler Top of Slab Curb 11 See Detail E Resilient Match'E' Joint Joint Filler t1" Nominal in Pavement Slab B E' (TYPE 2) 1" EXPANSION JOINT ES' JOINT IN CURB (View at Back of Curb) Detail F or Detail G Joint Filler Material 16 (See Doweled Expansion (See Doweled Expansion Joints Table) Joints Table) PRECAST CONCRETE CURB TSHOULD O18" -►i it Width Long Dowel at 12" Centers (See Doweled Expansion Joints Table) 'ED', 'EE', 'EF' 15 DOWELED EXPANSION JOINT JOINT DETAILS (EXPANSION) B USED FOR INSTALLATIONS E NO SCALE TIE BAR PLACEMENT (Applies to all joints unless otherwise detailed.) lO DETAIL E :)r-8' KEYWAY DIMENSIONS Keyway Type Pavement Thickness OT OA ED Standard 8" or greater 14 IF 24 Narrow Less than 8" 1" 1 2" See Bar Size Table Joint Sealant TYPE WIDTH (See Detail F) ED 14 Edge with 1/4 inch tool for length of joint indicated if EE 2" Flexible Foam (Detail F) formed; edging not required when cut with diamond blade Joint Filler Flexible Foam (Detail G) Diameter saw. Locate'DW' joint at a mid -panel location between future n� 15 See Dowel Assemblies for fabrication details and 'C' or 'CD'joints. Place no closer than 5 feet to a'C' or Saw Cut`s placement limits. Coat the free end of dowel bar to SECTION B -B 'CD' joint. prevent bond with pavement. At intake locations, dowel ® bars may be cast -in-place. 2' Joint Sealant 16 Predrill or preform holes in joint material for appropriate 14 Crack or Joint Line dowel size. Material 17 Compact tire buffings by spading with a square -nose DETAIL A _._. 09 shovel. DETAIL F 14 z' Joint Sealant Material 777 1 plywood or 4. pressed wood spacer required for'EF' joint. DETAIL G Flexible Foam Joint Filler 16 14 F 12Joint Sealant Material DETAIL H EXPANSION See Detail C c: 13 PLAIN JOINT (Abutting Pavement Slabs) l 11 'BT' ABUTTING PAVEMENT JOINT - RIGID TIE � 17 Tire Buffings DOWELED EXPANSION JOINTS TYPE WIDTH FILLER MATERIAL 16 ED 1" Resilient (Detail F) EE 2" Flexible Foam (Detail F) EF 32" Flexible Foam (Detail G) BAR SIZE TABLE 1" t 1 " Saw Cut 4 16 <8 z 8" but z10„ 1„ q *8 10 <10„ 4 Dowel 3.. 1F 14 11' 12 Diameter 4 Locate'DW' joint at a mid -panel location between future n� See Detail C y 9 OT O30" Long Tie Bar T/2 O at 12" Centers DW O ®O U2 ??? ??? PLAIN JOINT DAY'S WORK JOINT(Non-working) L (Abutting Pavement Slabs) BAR PLACEMENT Pavement Edge- (Applies to all joints unless otherwise detailed.) 24" min. See Detail A or B Header Boar Plastic or Tarpaper Wrapped F7'T OT O T/3 Joint Sealant 1" t 1 " Saw Cut 4 16 Bars \&Pyl NO SCALE Material 1„ 1„ q *8 10 See dowel assemblies for fabrication details. 4 BT -2' ensure the bar remains in a horizontal position in the See Bar Size Table. OT 24" Long at 15' Centers ( Locate'DW' joint at a mid -panel location between future n� 1 2' #11 'C' or 'CD'joints. Place no closer than 5 feet to a'C' or Saw Cut`s 11 Sawing or sealing of joint not required. 'CD' joint. #5 Bars at 12" Centers ® Place bars within the limits shown under dowel A assemblies. Crack or Joint Line 'KT -2' and 'L-2' O Edge with 1/4 inch tool for length of joint indicated if DETAIL A formed; edging not required when cut with diamond 09 When tying into old pavement, DT represents the depth blade saw. Remove header block and board when (Saw cut formed by conventional of sound PCC. second slab is placed. C. © O30" Long Tie Bar Header Block Top of Curb Saw Cut concrete sawing equipment.) CONTRACTION JOINT at 12" Centers 'HT' ®O Bottom of Saw Cut 1 2' © Unless otherwise specified, use'CD' transvers� HEADER JOINT contraction joints in mainline pavement when l!J i End Rigid Pavement Joint Sealant greater or equal to 8 inches. Use'C' joints when �T is ( g ) Material Top of Slab less than 8 inches. 1" to 5' Saw Cut Joint Sealant 8 16 Pavement Edge r Material 1., t Ill q 707 'RT' joint may be used in lieu of'DW' joint at the end of See Data C T 4 8 the days work. Remove any pavement damaged due to See Detail A or B " min.9" mi . �l �" 'C' JOINT IN CURB the drilling at no additional cost to the Contracting 1 it 1Authority. O (Match 'CT', 'CD', or'C' joint in pavement.) 4 4 ® Saw'CD' joint to a depth of T/3 t 1/4"; saw'C' joint to a 1„ 0 q depth of T/4 t 1/4". �18" Long Dowel Hole Diameter 8 18" Long Dowel Crack or Joint Line at 12" Centers Larger than Dowel at 12" Centers DETAIL B 09 When tying into old pavement, OT represents the depth CD' 1Q®© RD' ®� (Saw cut formed by approved of sound PCC. DOWELED CONTRACTION JOINT ABUTTING PAVEMENT JOINT �2" to 4" early concrete sawing equipment.) Top of Pavement Sealant 1 1 Pavement Edge Joint Sealant-► . t Saw Cut 4 16 "Mi 15" min. See Detail A or B ' SECTION A -A 9 8 2 T O2 (Detail at Edge of Pavement) �30" Lon Tie Bar Hole Diameter 24" Long Tie Bar at 12" Centers Larger than Dowel at 12" Centers. .CT. ® 'RT' TIED CONTRACTION JOINT ABUTTING PAVEMENT JOINT RIGID TIE 21 JOINTS (TRANSVERSE Spacing Joint Bars \&Pyl NO SCALE #5 Bars' See Detail E-\ 11 30" Long at� 1 ® Bar supports may be necessary for fixed form paving to PP Y ry p 9 12" Centers a 8" BT -2' ensure the bar remains in a horizontal position in the 36" Long at 30" Centers OT 24" Long at 15' Centers plastic concrete. 1 22 T/4 1 2' #11 r T 11 Sawing or sealing of joint not required. 'KS -1' #5 Bars at 12" Centers The following joints are interchangeable, subject to the [Single Reinforced Pavement (Bridge Approach)] pouring sequence: 'BT -1','L-1', and 'KT -1' 'KT -2' and 'L-2' ' 'KT 3' and 'L 3' 09 When tying into old pavement, DT represents the depth = of sound PCC. k� III I L PINS 1® Sealant or cleaning not required. 11 See Detail E #5 Bars 30" Long at 12" Centers #6 Bars at 12" Centers ft5 Bars at 12" Centers OT Joint Bars Bar Length and Sp < 8" 'BT -1' #4 36" Long at 30" Centers a 8" BT -2' #5 36" Long at 30" Centers 4" Dia. Hole for BT -3 11 and BT4 Joint 5" Dia. Hole for BT -5 �T Joint Sealant -4 ±16 Saw Cut joint Material 9" min. 15" min. Ft .4 'BT ABUTTING PAVEMENT JOINT - RIGID TIE (Drilled) T/3 t 4IF' 0 Joint Bars Bar Length and Spacing < 8" 'BT -5' #4 24" Long at 30" Centers z 8" 'BT -3' #5 24" Long at 30" Centers 'BT -4- 24" Long at 15' Centers Crack or Crack in Joint Line Joint Line DETAIL D-1 DETAIL D-2 red when the Department of Transportation (Required when the Department of Transportation is the Contracting Authority, or when is not the Contracting Authority, or when specified in the contract documents.) specified in the contract documents) NO SCALE GROUND SURFACE (OR OTHER See Detail D-1 or D-2 See Detail E J KEYED JOINT FOR ADJACENT SLABS (Where T is 8" or more) 22, 21' 2 #8 Bars at #5 Bars at 12" Centers 12" Centers 'KS -2' [Double Reinforced Pavement (Bridge Approach)] See Detail E-\ 11 See Detail D-1 or D-2 r. CONTRACTION JOINT CONTRACTI OT Joint Bars Bar Length and Spacing < 8" 'L-1' #4 36" Long at 30" Centers a 8 L-2' z 8" but 36" Long at 30" Centers L-3' 36" Lon at 15" Centers 'KT' 10 1© ABUTTING PAVEMENT JOINT - KEYWAY TIE �T Joint Bars Bar Length and Spacing < 8" 'KT -1' #4 30" Long at 30" Centers a 8" 'KT -2- z 8" but 30" Long at 30" Centers KT -3' 30" Long at 15" Centers ANCHOR PINS ql„ 1"MIN. 2"MAX ANCHOR PINS 8"+ 1/4" PROVAL OF ANY ALTERNATE METHOD MUST BE RECEIVED BEFORE INSTALLATION IS BEGUN. SERVICE IS ANTICIPATED. PRECAST P.C. CONCRETE CURB THE COMPLETED INSTALLATION SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. NO SCALE 2.0' (TYP.) III. EARTH BACKFILL � WITH SOIL (TYP.) _ UNDISTURBED EARTH - (TYPICAL) TYPICAL PAVEMENT SECTION - 7" DEPTH PCC NO SCALE SEE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOR SUBGRADE REQUIREMENTS EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH. PROVIDE A VX 5' SITE MOCK-UP — PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. EARTH BACKFILL WITH TURF (TYP.) Material 1„ 4 4' t 4' Saw Cut Crack or Joint Line DETAIL C BAR SIZE TABLE UTAMLILK + vu" HEADLUPIN ONLY f ._.Ir Diameter Size < 8" 6"+ 1/4" #6 z 8" but 1" < 10" T/2� #10 T/4 1 2' #11 77"777- P AN ,+i T ' ANCHOR 1" �I = k� III I L PINS = tt15 BARS 4"MIAX. -'-- GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. (TYPE 2) ANCHOR PINS SECTION A -A Ai PRECAST CONCRETE CURB TSHOULD LPLAN �� SIDE VIEW TYPICAL B USED FOR INSTALLATIONS E 1"MIN., 2"MAX. INSTALLATION WHERE NORMAL TYPE OF SERVICE ANTICIPATED. 6"MIN. 1'-0"MIN. SPECIAL NOTE (PRECAST CONCRETE CURBS) 12"+_ 1/2" O MINIMUM EMBEDMENT FOR SURFACE CONDITIONS SUITABLE FOR DRIVEN ANCHOR PINS SHALL 1-1/2"MIN., ANCHOR PINS BE 24 INCHES. WHERE CURB IS TO BE INSTALLED IN A LOCATION IMPRACTICAL TO 3"MAX. 3/8"MIN. DIA. GALVANIZED ACCOMMODATE DRIVEN ANCHOR PINS, ALTERNATE METHODS OF PLACEMENT MAY BE CON- SIDERED AS FOLLOWS: �I (HEADED TYPE 0 PIN ONLY) 1) AN EPDXY RESIN GLUE OF A TYPE AND MANUFACTURE APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER MAY uNfF 8"+ 1/4" BE USED. THE GLUE SHALL BE PREPARED ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS. .` AND APPLIED TO THE PORTION OF THE CURB TO BE IN CONTACT WITH THE PAVEMENT FACE. N " SURFACES TO COME IN CONTACT WITH GLUE SHALL BE PREPARED AS DIRECTED BY THE ENG INEER, AND PLACEMENT OF GLUED SURFACES SHALL BE DONE AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER, 2) A MINIMUM OF 2 HOLES (3 HOLES ON UNITS MEASURING MORE THAN 5 FEET BARS 5"MAX. ISOMETRIC VIEW LONG) SHALL BE DRILLED IN THE PAVEMENT SURFACE A MINIMUM OF 6 INCHES DEEP (TYPE 1) EITHER HEADED OR NON -HEADED TO ACCOMMODATE ANCHOR PINS. THE HOLES SHALL BE AT LEAST THE DIAMETER OF THE SECTION A -A TYPE ANCHOR PIN MAY BE USED. ANCHOR PINS PLUS 1 INCH. THE ANCHOR PIN SHALL BE EMBEDDED WITH NON -SHRINK MORTAR GROUT IN THE DRILLED HOLE. THE TYPE 1PRECAST CONCRETE CURB SHOULD BE USED FOR INSTALLATIONS 3) ANY OTHER METHOD MAY BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR CONSIDERATION AP WHERE THE MOST SEVERE TYPE OF PROVAL OF ANY ALTERNATE METHOD MUST BE RECEIVED BEFORE INSTALLATION IS BEGUN. SERVICE IS ANTICIPATED. PRECAST P.C. CONCRETE CURB THE COMPLETED INSTALLATION SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. NO SCALE 2.0' (TYP.) III. EARTH BACKFILL � WITH SOIL (TYP.) _ UNDISTURBED EARTH - (TYPICAL) TYPICAL PAVEMENT SECTION - 7" DEPTH PCC NO SCALE SEE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOR SUBGRADE REQUIREMENTS EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH. PROVIDE A VX 5' SITE MOCK-UP — PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. EARTH BACKFILL WITH TURF (TYP.) Material 1„ 4 4' t 4' Saw Cut Crack or Joint Line DETAIL C BAR SIZE TABLE O Dowel Tie Bar Diameter Size < 8" 4" #6 z 8" but 1" < 10" 1 4 #10 z 10" 1 2' #11 5.0' TYPICAL WIDTH 2.0' (TYP.) 7" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT PREPARE SUBGRADE. AS PER GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. SLOPE VARIES (SEE GRADE PLAN) , EXPOSED AGGREGATE BAND NO SCALE EARTH BACKFILL WITH TURF (TYP.) DEPTH PCC BAND (SEE PLAN FOR LOCATIONS) EARTH 'ARE SUBGRADE AS PER TECHNICAL REPORT. 6" DEPTH PCC SIDEWALK NO SCALE SEE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOR SUBGRADE REQUIREMENTS 7 511 4.5" 3"R 3"R 6" PCC INTEGRAL CURB EARTH FEB 21 2012 Y 57 P �, CITY FILE N0. PA 261 C0 Z co F O o U) m m •- v_ 0 V m W co iL L 04 co LO U Z (V D' .O m w � O_ Y m m M U U7 N U U Q H 0 ID v Z C C Z W F� a- if 44 O TOWD MN N Jr N d r�d 0,6 2 6 I Fmm Z¢N W O 6N N m M N_ U� W a o F_ �o ci'9 a rn Z IN N M Q W M a U Ci M W M o a UJI ��N D N 2O , U) >_CD a Lu usV r--C'I<Z N a W Q Z O W a �- W a U C> W � o o a J In Old W Cn W >I= W WLU Z 111.0253 Sheet SP14 PCC DEPTH VARIES (SEE PLAN) 1,0' (TYP.) WIDTH VARIES (SEE PLAN) r(SEE SLOPE VARIES 77"777- P AN ,+i J'r1 �I = k� III I L lu = PREPARE SUBGRADE AS PER -'-- GEOTECHNICAL REPORT. 6" DEPTH PCC SIDEWALK NO SCALE SEE GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FOR SUBGRADE REQUIREMENTS 7 511 4.5" 3"R 3"R 6" PCC INTEGRAL CURB EARTH FEB 21 2012 Y 57 P �, CITY FILE N0. PA 261 C0 Z co F O o U) m m •- v_ 0 V m W co iL L 04 co LO U Z (V D' .O m w � O_ Y m m M U U7 N U U Q H 0 ID v Z C C Z W F� a- if 44 O TOWD MN N Jr N d r�d 0,6 2 6 I Fmm Z¢N W O 6N N m M N_ U� W a o F_ �o ci'9 a rn Z IN N M Q W M a U Ci M W M o a UJI ��N D N 2O , U) >_CD a Lu usV r--C'I<Z N a W Q Z O W a �- W a U C> W � o o a J In Old W Cn W >I= W WLU Z 111.0253 Sheet SP14 START GLASS RAILING SYSTEM ❑ F ❑ ❑ 0 PATIO AREA 72' L 8.69' i 11 a STONE o I 'I VENEER o I FACE I; ------- - I 11 EDGE OF FOOTING (TYP.) J 1 1 1 I STONE VENEER FACE LODGE PATIO PLAN VIEW N N 2'-0" C) TYP. N LODGE END GLASS RAILING SYSTEM O —PATIO AREA r - I I � 1I I ii i 9.86' - J 11 I C 'II o STONE r--------------_---- I, I VENEER F — FACE I II I I * i STONE VENEER FACE I I I 1 I I 1 I 1 -PATIO AREA 11 1 GLASS \\ RAILING �– SYSTEM 5 P1 SCALE: 1"= 10'-0" 15" 3-5/8" 1-3/8" 3/4" CHAMFER STRIPS STONE AIR GAP AT CORNERS (TYP.) 2" CLR STONE VENEERJLEDGE---"/ INCLUDE THRU FLASHING AND #7 BAR @ 9" O.C. VERT GROU 1 UNDEz 11 tt5 BAR @ 12"O.C. HOR. ST5LR o3/4CHAMFER STRIPS N AT CORNERS (TYP.) tt5 BAR LODGE PATIO STONE LEDGE DETAIL s LODGE PATIO PLAN - CORNERS NO SCALE P1 NO SCALE 2" STONE LEE 2 #5 BAR @ 12" O.C.E 2 X 6 KEYW tt5 DOWELLS @ 12" 0.1 iwl 1 1'-1' I ZU" I J' -J" 'Al 1'61 LODGE PATIO TYPICAL WALL SECTION SCALE: 1"= 2'-0" DP TRANSEVERSE 'OP LONGITUDINAL 2" CLR 3" CLR OTTOM GLASS RAILING SYSTEM EXPANSION 1_2`0'' JOINT 18" LONG %4" DIA. 12" SMOOTH DOWEL 12" O.C. 1" RADIUS o #5 DOWELS o O 12" O.C. �I I —2 #5 BARS CONT. #7 BARS @ #5 BARS @9" O.C. VERTICAL 12" 0, C.E.W tt5 BARS @ :12" O.C. HOR. 1 11 i 1 I LODGE PATIO TOP OF WALL DETAIL NO SCALE TEMPERED GLASS LODGE PATIO RAILING DETAIL NO SCALE PROVIDE AND INSTALL DRY GLAZE TAPER -LOC GLASS RAILING SYSTEM. AS MANUFACTURED BY C,R. LAURENCE CO., INC. (800) 421-6144, www.crlourence.com. INCLUDING 1/2" THICK TEMPERED GLASS, BASE SHOE WITH DRAIN BLOCKS BRUSHED STAINLESS FINISH, CAP RAIL 1 1/2" DIAMETER BRUSHED STAINLESS FINISH, AND ALL ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM. CUSTOM MITER BASE SHOE AND CAP RAIL IN 8' SECTIONS 4'-0" TO MATCH PROPOSED 24.5' RADIUS AT CENTERLINE OF RAILING, SURFACE MOUNT TO CONCRETE PATIO AS PER MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS. o ;ILE)" FEB 21 2012 Al' Sa pM LODGE PATIO SIDE ELEVATION SCALE: 1" = 4'-0" SUPPORT AND FOUNDATION. } m Z L0 O m Q Y C4 VJ En w U z CV Lm C] W [L ) r M U Lf) fV U .0 F- o z t5 0U Y c c m Z 2 W H Q- i 9 0 O N N J W 0- n J W `y U r �o O� U mm Z o aN W LL WN M tV N_ U� a O aly NT oM ti ly grn Z N < M Q I� < M C W 5 U 0 Ww o J ND m a c:) 1_0 D � N O a Z� Cn Y � z¢ flN a W a z cn O u.l a � Oct oc — (0)cml) WC) o� o cn o cl) cf) J o a a m W ca uj o O C= a W � a p LJ.I o Z j 111.0253 CITY FILE NO. PA 261 Sheet SP15 f u4 BARS 18" O.C. EACHWAY I/2" X 8" STAINLESS STEEL PIN, MIN. 2 PER BLOCK EQUALLY SPACED 5" DEPTH INTO BLOCK, MAX.%" HOLE SIZE 10' 0" IDOT 4123 MODIFIED SUBBASE J GRADATION a14 AGGREGATE. COMPACTED SUBBASE WALKWAYAT LAKE EDGE DETAIL SCALE: I"= 5'-0" LIMESTONE BLOCKS 18" H x 3' L x 2'W. NATURALLY CLEFT BEDS TOP AND BOTTOM. SPLIT FACE ALL 4 SIDES. PLACE 2 PER GROUP WITH 12" SEPARATION WHERE SHOWN. SLIGHT BROOM FINISH 2'-0" a4 BARS �( 12" DEPTH. 3" 5" OVERSIZED RIVER ROCK • 1?"0" MATERIAL. ROCK SHALL BE WASHED PRIOR n • TO INSATLLATION. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SAMPLE FOR ENGINEER APPROVAL. V-6" V-0" FILTER FABRIC ❑ LS 9105 PRAIRIE PLANTER 48 2" x 8" LAMINATED WOOD RAILING 22" HIGH X 48" SQ. X 36" SQ. BASE DECORATIVE PLANTER AS MANUFACTURED BY LONGSHADOW, INC. (1-618-8934831) (www.longshadow.com). 2" x 6" LAMINATED WOOD RAL SUPPORT MODEL: PRAIRIE PLANTER 48 & BASE 36, IN NATURAL DRY CAST BUFF LIMESTONE. 2" x 6" LAMINATED WOOD MID RAL SURFACE MOUNTPOST 6" x 6" LAMINATED WOOD POST PAVEMENT— PRAIRIE PLANTER NO SCALE MT MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS, INC. �Q 00 N� N BSTEEL P PE (STAINLESS PIES OPTIONAL) 3/8' NYLON REINFORCED NYLONBRAIDTUBING W1112' MIP (WATER SUPPLY) H MOST DEPENDABLE FOUNTAINS INC. 5705 COMMANDER DR. P.O. BOX 587 ARLINGTON, TN 38002-0587 TOLL FREE: 1-800-552-0331 PHONE: (901) 867-0039 FAX: (901) 867-0159 www. mosildependable.com N 11/7 PVC BY MOF ACCESS DOOR '4 OPTIONAL V SS SURFACE CARRIER e 112' X 12" LNC PLATED ROD MODEL 550 SM FOOT 8 SHOWER TOWER WIDRINKING FOUNTAIN. NOTES: 1. DRINKING FOUNTAIN MEEfSADAREGULATIONS. 2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. 3. INSTALLATION TO BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 4. OPTIONAL STAINLESS STEEL SURFACE CARRIER RECOMMENDED ON SURFACE MOUNT INSTALLATIONS 3354-103 REVISION DATE 24108f201, PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT -DIVJ06 www.CADdetlilsxom MODEL 550 SM FOOT & SHOWER TOWER W/ DRINKING FOUNTAIN \kl!IV NO SCALE SHOWN WI OPTIONAL 8' SS SURFACE CARRIER WOOD RAILING DETAIL NO SCALE NO SCALE -ADD ALTERNATE NO. 3 FINISH GRADE SEE PLANS ANAMOSA LIMESTONE (SPLIT FACE: RUNNING BOND) 2' - 5' LENGTHS, 12" HEIGHT & WIDTH CONTRACTOR TO SAW CUT ENDS AT JOB SITE. 84 0.0(0�V 4c� 76 S NSee aPOWDER 55 View z COATING cn Q 1/2" X 8" STAINLESS L �� STEEL PIN, MIN. 2 PER 9Z w BLOCK; MAX. 5/8" v � HOLE SIZE RANGE AT AN ADDITIONAL COST) FINISH GRADE SEE PLANS OTHER FINISHES: GALVANIZED, STAINLESS STEEL (SPECIAL QUOTE NEEDED) 22' NOTES: 2-3/6" —) 1. DRAWINGS NOT TO SCALE. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. 2. MODEL BK -6, COLOR TO BE SILVER AS MANUFACTURED BY VICTOR STANLEY, INC. (1-800-368-2573) (www.victorstanley.com).Uj 2-BnV0)0) OD 3. ALL FABRICATED METAL COMPONENTS ARE STEEL SHOTBLASTED,ETCHED, N io NO SCALE -ADD ALTERNATE NO. 3 FINISH GRADE SEE PLANS ANAMOSA LIMESTONE (SPLIT FACE: RUNNING BOND) 2' - 5' LENGTHS, 12" HEIGHT & WIDTH CONTRACTOR TO SAW CUT ENDS AT JOB SITE. 84 OPTIONS: 4c� 76 S NSee aPOWDER 55 View z COATING cn Q 1/2" X 8" STAINLESS L �� STEEL PIN, MIN. 2 PER 9Z w BLOCK; MAX. 5/8" v � HOLE SIZE RANGE AT AN ADDITIONAL COST) FINISH GRADE SEE PLANS 4" PERFORATED DRAN TILE. CONNECT TO STORM SEWER OR \ DAYLIGHT TO SLOPE, COMPACTED BACKFILL (TYP) UNDISTURBED SOIL (TYP.) TYPICAL LIMESTONE WALL SECTION NO SCALE LQ I- —11�T1UNDISTURBEDSOIL (TYP.) COMPACTED GRANULAR BASE (12" DEPTH MIN) 2" x 8" LAMINATED WOOD RAILING 2" x 6" LAMINATED WOOD RAL SUPPORT 6" x 6"LAMINATED WOOD POST PAVEMENT SURFACE MOUNT POST ppnNOTEA. RALING AND POST MATERIALS TO MATCH LODGE LAMINATED WOOD. B. FASTEN RAILING WITH EXTERIOR GRADE SCREWS. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT FASTENERS TO ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL. LIMESTONE - 3'x4'x2'HIGH IRREGULAR SHAPE (TYP.) EPTH GRANULAR MATERIAL LIMESTONE BLOCKS SECTION A -A / CONSTRUCTION NOTES 1. REMOVE EXISTING VEGETATION AND OVER EXCAVATE. 2. FINISH GRADE ON EXISTING SLOPES. 3. PROVIDE GRANULAR MATERIAL AS SHOWN ON DETAIL. 4. LAWN SEEDING. INSTALL "WATERWAY MIX" SEED MIXTURE. 5. PROVIDE LIMESTONE BLOCKS WHERE SHOWN. 3'X4'X2'HIGH IRREGULAR SHAPE. 6. PROVIDE TREES. SEE PLANTING SCHEDULE, SHEET SP10. Lu O C11- 12" x 8" ANAMOSA LIMESTONE WALU SET o O aVERTICAL; LENGTHS La 2'-5' CONTRACTOR CTO SAW CUT JOINTS AT JOB SITE.SEAL JOINT WITH SELF LEVELING m a))POLYURETHANE CAULK. VULCUM v) iL U)45 SSL. LIMESTONE COLOR. (n2" MULCH PLANTING BED ZSEE SITE LAYOUT PLAN 04 FOR PAVEMENT. If U `n0 04 PLACE TOPSOIL i % `%\%\ \\%\\%\ \\\\\ U a f2' 0MDEPTH)////////\ \j\\\/\\\\\\\\,mz° A\jA/�AjAAjA�COMPACTED c t y z//�/�// / SUBGRADEI�.E�_wr a i,FEB 21 2012 Sl em0LC9 L9 WPLANTING BED LIMESTONE EDGERP1 NO SCALE SECURE SITE HOLE IS ONLY PRESENT WHEN D E S I G NTM L.L.C.Z GALVANIZED OPTION IS SPECIFIE O TOLL FREE (USA & CANADA): 1 -888 -ANTI -RAM (888-268-4726)W Iii n 410-286-3375 : FAX 410-479-0175 P.O. BOX 60910, m VIEW A POTOMAC, MD 20859 U.S.A. O n 3-3/4' O.D.V " O.D. INFO@SECURESITEDESIGN.COM .HOLE SPACIWWW. SECURESITEDESIGN. COM 518" 0. D. > c FORMED FROM 2-3/8' O.D. MOUNTINGS OPTIONS: SCHEDULE 40 STEEL PIPE STANDARD IN -GROUND AND SURFACE MOUNT WITH ROUNDO P.L. DRAWER 330 Victor Stanley, Inc TEL (301) 855-8: (1-800-368-2573;PRUNCT SPECIFICATIONSSAGEUMETRIC SERIES SQUARE SHAPED CH -96 STANDARD PERMANENTNMUUNT Dimensions For Specified Bench For your convenience, each section is factory -assembled, precision - cut, and carefully finished, assuring proper fit and installation SIX VICV ---------------------------- Finished grade All fabricated components PERSPECTIVE are steel shot -blasted, etched, phosphatized and electrostatically powder -coated wiTGIC polyester powder coatings. Ax96 FLANGE(AS SHOWN)zAVAILABLE 57 81 90 51 72 84 OPTIONS: 64 76 S NSee aPOWDER 55 View COATING 66 27 38 U 213054 11 AVAILABLE COLORS, CUSTOM COLORS (INCLUDING THE RAL a v 9 13 RANGE AT AN ADDITIONAL COST) OTHER FINISHES: GALVANIZED, STAINLESS STEEL (SPECIAL QUOTE NEEDED) 22' NOTES: 2-3/6" —) 1. DRAWINGS NOT TO SCALE. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. 2. MODEL BK -6, COLOR TO BE SILVER AS MANUFACTURED BY VICTOR STANLEY, INC. (1-800-368-2573) (www.victorstanley.com).Uj OD 3. ALL FABRICATED METAL COMPONENTS ARE STEEL SHOTBLASTED,ETCHED, N io PHOSPHATIZED,PREHEATED, AND ELECTROSTATICALLY POWDER-COATEDCn m o CD 17-114' WITH T.G.I.C. POLYESTER POWDER COATINGS. PRODUCTS ARE FULLY a LU Q a CLEANED AND PREHEATED, PREHEATED AND COATED WHILE HOT TO FILL c1I m CREVICES AND BUILD COATING FILM. COATED PARTS ARE THEN FULLY Z O CURED TO COATING MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. THE THICKNESS --------- GROUND _LEVEL ------- -------------------- OF THE RESULTING FINISH AVERAGES B•10 MILS (200-250 MICRONS). 4. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO LOCATE ANCHOR BOLTS UNTIL THE BIKE a Z LO W Ln 1R 6 - RACK IS IN PLACE. THIS SECURE SITE DESIGN, L.L.C. PRODUCT ti Z CENTER -TO -CENTER MUST BE PERMANENTLY AFFIXED TO THE GROUND. CONSULT YOUR Q LOCAL CODES FOR REGULATIONS. N 5. ANCHOR BOLTS NOT PROVIDED BY SECURE SITE DESIGN L.L.C. 6. ALL SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE. CONTACT MANUFACTURER FOR DETAILS. W COPYRIGHT 2008 SECURE SITE DESIGNTML.L.C. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 7. THIS PRODUCT IS SHIPPED FULLY ASSEMBLED. REV. 1117108 DRAWN J.D.R. 2008-528 s BIKE RACK DETAIL Q P1 NO SCALE 0 u, P.L. DRAWER 330 Victor Stanley, Inc TEL (301) 855-8: (1-800-368-2573;PRUNCT SPECIFICATIONSSAGEUMETRIC SERIES SQUARE SHAPED CH -96 STANDARD PERMANENTNMUUNT Dimensions For Specified Bench For your convenience, each section is factory -assembled, precision - cut, and carefully finished, assuring proper fit and installation SIX VICV ---------------------------- Finished grade All fabricated components PERSPECTIVE are steel shot -blasted, etched, phosphatized and electrostatically powder -coated wiTGIC polyester powder coatings. Ax96 57 81 90 51 72 84 4 64 76 39 55 72 33 47 66 27 38 U 213054 l52148 9 13 2' x 2' Hightensile strength square tubular steel 5/16' x 1-1/2' lag screws fasten legs and linear brackets to 2' x 3' (nominal) woodslats. 7. SAND BEACH. PLACE EXISTING CLEAN SAND FROM SITE INTO NOTE: 12" DEPTH EXCAVATED BED WITH VERTICAL SIDES. SAND TO MODEL GSB-96, 1/2 THE SQUARE 'L' SHAPE ONLY WIYH SQUARE ENDS. MAHOGANY WOODEXTEND INTO WATER. 8. PROVIDE 6" DEPTH PCC. �g� WOOD BENCH DETAIL NO SCALE Factory Installed 1/4' x 1-1/4' wood screws fasten 2' x 4' (nominal) woodslats to linear brackets. CITY FILE NO. PA 261 Q W a U CW) W 0 o a 0 J od W J a W W LU 111.0253 Sheet SP16 Y v i Variable (201 for a normal 10' wide ditch. Post spacing Post spacing Fo�e.Ri (5'-0" max.) (5'-0" max.) ■ ■ ■ n u n Y TYPICAL SILT FENCE DITCH CHECK Instoll "J -hook" at each end of an Installparallel to Individual section of silt fence ground contour 610 -- -- - - - --- TYPICAL SILT FENCE INSTALLATION ON LONGITUDINAL SLOPES (Plan View) 11 SILT FENCE DETAIL NO SCALE eel SILT FENCE GENERAL NOTES: Installsilt fence according to the requirements of contract documents and at locations shown on the pion documents or as directed by the Jurisdictional Engineer. ® Insert 12 in. of fabric a minimum of 6 in. deep (fabric may be folded below the ground line) IS Compact ground by driving along each side of the silt fence as required to sufficiently secure the fabric in the trench to prevent pullout and flow under the fence. © In ditches, extend silt fence up side slope so the bottom elevation at the end of the fence is a minimum of 2 in. higher thon the top of the fence in the low point of the ditch. ® Steel posts to be embedded 20 in. unless otherwise allowed by the Jurisdictional Engineer. (D Secure top of engineering fabric to steel posts usingwire or plastic ties (50 Ib. min.). See details of "Attachment to Posts." GENERAL NOTES: Construct "J -hook" at epc Berm shown is typical for slopesflatter than 3:1. For end on an individual sectio steeper slopes, increase berm size as directed by the of sock or berm. Jurisdictional Engineer. Place berm in uncomppotedwindrow perpendicular to the i slope at locations specified n the contract documents. Disturbed area , "1 Filter sock diameter as specified in the contract documents. if. Place berm or sock Watefl w I I perpendicular to slope Stakes (Typ.) _\ E Q\veo ^(_� 'T' steel fence p 4'-0" minimum I 1 Area to be protected For perimeter contrololong street For sediment and slope control TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF BERM OR SOCK FILTER BERM & FILTER SOCK NO SCALE Wire or(F) cable tie ATTACHMENT TO POST w r p wn DETAILS OF SILT FENCE ON LONGITUDINAL SLOPES 0 'Reduce post spacing to 5'-0" at water concentration areas, or as required to adequately support fence TYPICAL SILT FENCE INSTALLATION ON LONGITUDINAL SLOPES (Profile View) 1"x2" wood stake - (or approved equal) Fill material 1 Place additional filter material or soil to fill the seam between the tube and the ground WN e E1oW FILTER SOCK Filter material �1 _ Ater t1oW �i 24. FILTER BERM TREE STAKE TREE "T" STEEL POST TREE STAKE TO BE SUPPLIED BY OWNER SET TOP OF R( 3" ABOVE FINISI 2" MIN. MULCH 5"x 5" EARTHEN SAUCER I ROUGHEN SIDES BOTTOM OF HO FINISH GRADE FERTILIZER TAE DECIDUOUS TREE STAKING DETAIL NO SCALE IRRIGATION DETAILS NO SCALE 2:1 TRANSITION SLOPE FEB 21 2012 4:sR PAJ SET TOP OF ROOT BALL �y 1 -INCH ABOVE FINISH GRADE �2" DEPTH MULCH 5"x 5" EARTHEN SAUCER RING FINISH GRADE �--3X ROOTBALL--� LEVEL PLANTING PIT DETAIL EEXISTING SLOPE "3, - Fwiila1�� SET TOP OF ROOT BALL 1 -INCH ABOVE FINISH GRADE 2" DEPTH MULCH 5"x 5" EARTHEN SAUCER RING �-3x ROOTBAU=- SLOPE PLANTING PIT DETAIL PLANTING PIT DETAILS NO SCALE FERTILIZER TABLETS CITY FILE NO. PA 261 } m ?Z 7 II` o m r' U, x a o Co U) ai _;2 .� 8 d � U) (V UL) O \ N m O LU D (D U LO CV U U O Q � F CO c o m Z U c 'c Z U O w a _` ii O M% MN LL W = " 0 tov� ZO U) N W LL M � N m N U� W U O go a2 tiM aw I Z N M rr a - LU a M W I C14 > cn CO o a USN � � N _ USM Z'1' a le Z I Q N a W a Z CJ) o W a � W a w W o CIO o a O J M old W CCJ � 000010 W W � W W '�FnAA Z 111.0253 Sheet SP17 PLASTIC VALVE %Ix WITH COVER T FINISH GRADE — IAN rFINISH GRADE III WIRE PATH TWISTED TU NEXT DECODER FINISH GRADE DBY (2) -. -. '... I w \s, TWO BLACK WIRES TO ' YALVE SOLENa1D SPRAY HEAD — � MODEL ICD -ION CONTROL WIRE T— _... DECODER MODEL 1-25 ROTOR HEAD—................ DBR-6 (3) i PREFABRICATED SWING JOINT -"' i'. ill .FIRE PATH FROM CONTROLLER LATERAL TEE OR ELL------ry -- -_ ALL13W 5 FT SLACK f{ ........ ;...__ PER DECEDER SWING JOINT LATERAL. PIPE MAINLINE FITTING_' , ,r TO EARTH GRJuN➢ INSTALL"' PER ASIC GAIELINES. I PER PVC TEE _........ : i- 12 DECOLI'RS OR FVFRY 1000 FT. PVC LATERAL LINE TO SPRINKLERS MAIN SUPPLY LINE FATE, ALL ICD -100 DECODERS SHALL HAVE THE FCB.LaWINa ADDRESS AND CaRRESF'i3NOIMa COLOR !ADDRESS 1 = BLACK PVC LATERAL LINE POP-UP SPRAY SPRINKLER HUNTER I-25 ROTOR REMOTE CONTROL VALVE HUNTER ICD -100 DECODER SCHEMATIC I ................ SECTION VIEW MAINLINE, LATERAL, MAINLINE LATERAL WIRING AND WIRING IN PIPE PIPE ., THE SAME TRENCH Ift - 3 4' MIN. CLEARANCE PAVING i£ l2' Y4 gg = an A43 ��77 i s - Ix W i ' •. ;. v`yL�, _ pif 61 � Nr r {xa+ sFss.'iN. f.e f9.s,nTWf� .`�.°'1..= SLEEVES PLAN VIEW ... ....__WRC RECEIVER 1 ` ? ?asoma g S MODEL Witt: .�. ... Pt" I,ra x' ...MOUNTING WALL `^ I i 18' MIN. 4 a 111 E7.j ilr' i r .. ..� .0 _ ._,_ .�... .+- PVC CAP PAVINGRUN WIRING UNDER ALL PLASTIC PINING NATE: ' MAINLINE TAPE AND TO BE SNAKED INALL�WIRINGP AT MOUNT SENSOR ON ANY SURFACE WHERE IT WILL BE EXPOSED TO ! I ` BUNDLE AT 10' O.C. TRENCH AS SHOWN CHANGES OF UNOBSTRUCTED RAINFALL, BUT NOT IN PATH OF SPRINKLER SPRAY. Nu MORE THAN 3OW FROM RECEIVER UNIT. HOVNT RECEIVER LIMIT NO FURTHER THAN 6' FROM CONTROLLER. J "---�°""'—•... Tigm II^ DIRECTION Cr 30 fiNl'!E' AF TER ALL j '^OI g CONNECTIONS s n r 1 � r}i� HAVE BEEN MADE a PVC CAP ma LHUNTER WRFC WIRELESS RAIN SENSOR QUICK COUPLING VALVE IRRIGATION SLEEVING PIPE AND WIRE TRENCH IRRIGATION DETAILS NO SCALE 2:1 TRANSITION SLOPE FEB 21 2012 4:sR PAJ SET TOP OF ROOT BALL �y 1 -INCH ABOVE FINISH GRADE �2" DEPTH MULCH 5"x 5" EARTHEN SAUCER RING FINISH GRADE �--3X ROOTBALL--� LEVEL PLANTING PIT DETAIL EEXISTING SLOPE "3, - Fwiila1�� SET TOP OF ROOT BALL 1 -INCH ABOVE FINISH GRADE 2" DEPTH MULCH 5"x 5" EARTHEN SAUCER RING �-3x ROOTBAU=- SLOPE PLANTING PIT DETAIL PLANTING PIT DETAILS NO SCALE FERTILIZER TABLETS CITY FILE NO. PA 261 } m ?Z 7 II` o m r' U, x a o Co U) ai _;2 .� 8 d � U) (V UL) O \ N m O LU D (D U LO CV U U O Q � F CO c o m Z U c 'c Z U O w a _` ii O M% MN LL W = " 0 tov� ZO U) N W LL M � N m N U� W U O go a2 tiM aw I Z N M rr a - LU a M W I C14 > cn CO o a USN � � N _ USM Z'1' a le Z I Q N a W a Z CJ) o W a � W a w W o CIO o a O J M old W CCJ � 000010 W W � W W '�FnAA Z 111.0253 Sheet SP17 SITE PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTESCD m 1. EXISTING FEATURES; PROTECT THE FOLLOWING W > o A. PROTECT EXISTING PCC TRAIL p zl o U) \ NAD96 482.47 ` 1 1 1 \ 2. DEMOLITION: REMOVE THE FOLLOWING m __ _ __ _ _ _ _ j t, 1 \ `t I, A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR CLEARING AND GRUBBING EXISTING m TREES AND VEGETATION WITHIN CONSTRUCTION AREA. R m 2,179,495.56 I \ \\\ B. COORDINATE WITH GRADING AND SEEDING IMPROVEMENTS. rK LL --9- U) E - I 6A 1 1 3. PAVEMENTS; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING (V A. PROVIDE 6" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT. af v - , 4. BUILDING IMPROVEMENTS; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING U / \\ ------ �f \ \ \\ A. SHELTER. SEE ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL PLANS. D N - - - ------ ------------- _ _ - -- " TANGENT PTI , '� \ _ 5. SITE AMENITIES; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: W O --- ----- ------ - A. LIMESTONE RETANING WALL, SEE DETAIL. / N 596 334.7�,_� 't \ - ------ E 2,179,403:53 N 596,331.77 ar9 R 130.0' / E 2,179,404.14 6. CONSTRUCTION FENCE PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING U p --- TANGENT PT. - MATCH A. INSTALL ORANGE TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE ALONG EXISTING M J' i / \--------- �y� N 596,389.24 EXISTING TRAIL. THE PERIMETER PUBLIC TRAIL IS TO BE OPEN WHEN CONSTRUCTION U U _1 / E 8.06 3A TANGENT RT.j t N 596,329.75., ACTIVITIES DO NOT AFFECT THE TRAIL. F 2 179 37 -� , E 2,179,394.35 \ __- � N 596,3326 7. PROVIDE 4 LIMESTONE BLOCKS. SECURE AS SHOWN IN DETAILS. c o LAKE R 150.0' E 2,ns,3s.7a 1A \\ m z /-----_-� 1 ra V A Y C c d Z _ ----- --- I V A Q m .Q m MATCH - 5 R G VA \\ 12 W LL \ g a A C TANGENT PT, 2A 2BII EXISTING C N 596,383.02 \\ - --- ------ ------ I E 2,179,370.2 ! w -- - - I� 2A �a - _ \ - A w � EVENLY SPACED I V d o a$�b a.00' I 2A / 110.0' MAX) R 160 iO' �� � 6A � � � V / a.00' SPACED \ I I I 18.010' 4A EVENLY MAX) �'----------- 0 i --Lu \ T �N o C / i// ��� '� - ������ v\\_ vv vv\ vvv VILEL S m E g �� / �� �� �' v� V �` �1 FEB 21 2012 3A V Z, / �'--- 01v cn �� _ -I _ \ �� \ 1 1 1 *:59 PMuj IUS Pt.� �I / - v� vv NA596,308.44 �� _-- 1 a I C t0.a3 26 �^ `.E 2,179,276.22`, � S o o g, �� - - ' / �i j� 63� .� �� I / Z A A � j � � II moll 11 1 11 7 TYPr I IV A i M AREA NO. 3 - LAYOUT PLAN W 0 M CO Z �- wQCD N z O , 0 30 = tZn} L� a Z Y Lo I� z SCALE (FEET) N a W -�� r- ------ / Ob9- - -cn RADIUS PT. ! N 596,774.99 ! m / \ - ui / E 2,179,411.88 TANGENT PT. I I !! l!1 Il / // l - -- --- ---- -- - -- - - -- - ---- - \� MATCH st / a N 596,533.30 / / / /' --- - - -- --- \ EXISTING R 160.0' E 2,179,354.44 / / / / _----_ _ p 1 l ! 1 TW=644.60 ?f G• 644.30 �%} ! N I 64470 OAR/ / LU Z �a TANGENT PT. o� RADIUS PT. TANGENT PT. N 596,536.69 a 845.00 644.90 N 596,907.83 I I N� TANGENT PT. N 596.694.65 E 2,179,345.03 8 Nf E 2,179,280.84 E 2,179,322.75 A 645 3 / /// ao i W N 596,820.87 150.0' I �I � � Qcn E 2,179,293.50 2 2 0 /\ / o COLUMN CENTER DI bay 0 2X SLOPE / \ / i / it cn N 596,875.62 R 120.0' w•fia4. 64 x� X x-645 25 MATCH I 0 2� 022_ E 2,179,291.22 R 140.0' 645,30 \ EXISTING - _ /moi ,i I i X % 5,30 6a5.30 \ TANGENT PT. II 64¢.7 O 0 6A5 --- W N 596,790.46 �I 1 645.0 O 64 644.90 - N E 2,179,292.88 TANGENT PT. 645.00 ' / N 596,687.95 I LAKE 4.0' o E 2,179,315.32 AIIK I _ i i i i 63 5 Q I�lil I �I 11 40 ' R 30.0' 0 644.70 Lu a I II r r } as iG• 6 ,30 r / Q CD TANGENT PT. R 130.0 --- R 130, N 596,791.75 'V A'�� / 22� E 2,179,282.96!! / / / /LLJ 20 \ H 0 N 596,863.72 TANGENT PT. COLUMN CENTE E 2,179,279.65 N 596,819.99 �,o / / / c N 596,898.20 E 2,179,283.53 EROSION CONTROL NOTES: ,� i r \' /'� , E 2,179,274.16 SEE SHEET SP2 FOR EROSION CONTROL NOTES _ / j /' li W z RADIUS PT. i'� / / / - Lu N 596,587.52 GRADING PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES: E 2,179,203.90 v 1. CONTRACTOR TO STRIP AND STOCKPILE TOPSOIL ON ALL AREAS TO BE CUT OR FILLED. RESPREAD TOPSOIL TO MINIMUM 6" DEPTH TO FINISH --- GRADES. 2. PROVIDE EROSION FILTER SOCK WHERE SHOWN. RADIUS PT. N 596,808.85 3. SEED ALL AREAS DISTURBED BY CONSTRUCTION WITH 'WATERWAY MIX SEED.' E 2,179,154.09 RETAINING WALL KEY: -- �- - -��__------ TW = TW =ELEVATION AT TOP OF EXPOSED WALL, j / �/ ///-__vim _ �\ i ,/ , / � 1 / I � 1 � •t A ,, DIMENSION PLAN GENERAL NOTES: TG = ELEVATION OF GRADE ALONG WALL. -Aar --.NEW 1 A. COORDINATE POINTS SHOWN FOR THE LODGE BUILDING AND THE SHELTER ARE FOR ESTABLISHING BUILDING 111lg11 0 30 ORIENTATION PURPOSES ONLY. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXACT DIMENSIONS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS. 0 0 30 SCALE (FEET) 111.0253 AREA NO. - DIMENSION PLAN scALE; FEET) AREA NO. 3 - GRADING PLAN Sheet SP18 CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Uj CJo A v SOUTHEAST PARKING AREA JOINTING PLAN SYCAMORE STREET 0 30 SCALE (FEET) 1 \ m Rim -647. 6 \ A A v F.L.=633. 6 24" RCP W F.L.=633.3 24" RCP N 1 1 Concrete \, Q \\ 0 1 \ RADIUS P N 59 7 1.T. 1 \ .L.=6.�Q i \ \\ 6 17 1 1 - - / E 2,180.616.39 � 4 RCP FES / / vI �� .v 0- / \ 1 I_� SC�, 01\Y1p�. H OCer \ �� �''+ / rTT 7T, l ° ( i v vv �v � I FEB 21 2012 � L1:6q PM �l \ w � f \ 6A �� 8 \ 4J\3 ♦ \ \ \ O O 11 R 20.0, V 6 < LAKE 1 E 180\ 2617 67�, A \ "R 20A o' moo" 3C A 1 7A ' 6D �� 3B 6C v 3CAV ♦ �� °, .� 8 36 _ o \ F.L. 64\4.95 � E 3D ��� \ �\ �� � ,. 2o'PVCw � jf °. 3C ,G A V Y ♦ �\ w 3D 4A i % C� 1 ✓ ��.. R 10.0' '9�. on 1 / C,o� 5A j I��. i �� / / i,', �� 4C R 261.0' �� �so 2F - - \ f / , / ,E a 413 RADIUS RT. SYCAMORE / °� R15.0' N 596.535.83 2E ro ,tih \ E 2.180,825.69 _ \ \ 6u \,� 1 A �+ ♦�6A � A D,rectional Arrow STRE T1 3B� 850.0• A 6A tet' � — �\ A \ 3C 3B 0 C\1RB1 v 1 l R25.0 i �` 3D 313 -- 3C 6ATelephone Manhole �' \ 2D RADIUS PT. /_R-75.0- ,F �i f N 596,471,92 E 2,180,950.: RADIUS PT. „ Wood parking barrier \ 7 i O / N 596,466.28 - bS E 2,180,753.83' ' Sand Lake Parking Hours 2E \ Dawn to Dusk \' Dogs Must Be on Leash -I _ - Gravel I 213 / 6A I / 2B /'�\ L- c , \ SITE PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES 26 �� ; " �v �i V � 1. EXISTING FEATURES, PROTECT THE FOLLOWING: \\ "" A, EXISTING PAVEMENTS TO REMAIN. ;'+~ r1DD B.PROTECT EXISTING TREES, s sem" C. PROTECT EXISTING UTILITIES. sss 2E.D �1 DE. PROTECT EXISTING PCC .PROTECT EXISTING C TRAIL. + + + s s 1G F. PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE. rf \-Wood parking r,arrler Cr, 1 % \ G. PROTECT EXISTING SIGN. 2. DEMOLITION; REMOVE THE FOLLOWING: ! FOR CLEARING AN RUBBING EXISTING _ A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE 0 CLE G D G TREES AND VEGETATION WITHIN CONSTRUCTION LIMITS INCLUDING AREA OF ADD ALTERNATE NO.3. r / B. CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF EXISTING GRAVEL SURFACE i EXCAVATED TO A 6" DEPTH AND REPLACED WITH TOPSOIL FROM SITE C GRADING OPERATIONS. DISPOSE OF OFF-SITE. _ C. REMOVE PCC CURB AND GUTTER AS SHOWN. VERIFY REMOVAL EXTENT_ - WITH OWNER PRIOR TO REMOVAL. / D. REMOVE EXISTING WOOD PARKING BARRIER AND POSTS. E. REMOVE EXISTING FENCE. i ��Gravel F. RELOCATE EXISTING SIGN. VERIFY WITH OWNER NEW LOCATION. * " G. OVER EXCAVATE PROPOSED SAND AREA TO 12" DEPTH. ++"Lf r" ?,ONO Wood parking barrier- . 3. PAVEMENTS. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING r A. PROVIDE 7" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT, G B. PROVIDE 6" DEPTH PCC PAVEMENT. s + �+ +; nI,N�` Dead Fnd C.6" PCC CURB. SEE DETAIL. `\ ++�; V� Private Road D. TAPER CURB. E. PEDESTRIAN RAMP WITH A MAXIMUM SLOPE OF 8.337. AS SHOWN, i \.------------ -6 - 1 43 _---- 4. ' 4. PAVEMENT MARKINGS, PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING � ,- "� '" A, PAINT PARKING STALL LINES. "'"""'"" B. PAINT STATE OF IOWA APPROVED HANDICAP SYMBOL. = "% " PROPERTY LINE 0 C. 45° STRIPING AT NON CENTER SPACING WHERE SHOWN. 5. SIGNS PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: A. A BLUE SIGN WITH HANDICAP SYMBOL READING "PARKING ONLY", "1200 FINE FOR IMPROPER USE" AND "VAN ACCESSIBLE". SECURE SIGN TO 2 -INCH SQUARE STEEL CHANNEL POST WITH ENAMEL FINISH IN 12 -INCH DIA. CONCRETE FOOTING. 6. SITE AMENITIES; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING A. SEED AREAS WITHIN 10' OF PAVEMENT WITH TYPE '2' SEED MIX. ALL REMAINING AREAS TO BE SEEDED WITH TYPE '1' SEED MIX, B. ADD ALTERNATE NO, 3: CANOE LAUNCH IMPROVEMENTS. SEE DETAIL 8, SHEET SP16. C. PORTABLE REST ROOM WITH PRIVACY WALL. SEE DETAIL 3, SHEET SP12, D. PLACE SAND FROM EXISTING STOCKPILE AT 12" DEPTH. CLEAN OUT ANY WEEDS OR DEBRIS FROM SAND, 7. CONSTRUCTION FENCE; PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING A, INSTALL ORANGE TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE ALONG EXISTING TRAIL, THE PERIMETER PUBLIC TRAIL IS TO BE OPEN WHEN CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES DO NOT AFFECT THE TRAIL, 8. BASE BID IN THIS AREA INCLUDES CLEARING AND GRUBBING, SEEDING, AND SAND PLACEMENT FROM STOCKPILE AT NORTH END OF PARK, A \ Warning Gas Pipeline Speed Limit \ W Eagle Nood onoret 'v 1 � 1 .1 I, \ 0 30 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE N0. PA 261 r m W M m Vim! v `1 a U) m (D _ L U) (V CY 1.A U o N � a O [D W Y t m U O N U U O Q C� Z U Y c t y Z WC U a. H d LL 0 0 m O N Ld a Nn N W ♦� ,3 0,6 V♦ �i < o r� z p us aN W LL � � N J [C N 0 � W o 0 O E rn EL pp Z N < n w a M Ci Co CD a N N O z � a Yto N Q N a W a z O W W a W p Z 13 4 CIO W C/311 O R O a a J ' Co Z W 5 D a o uJ ' n cc z CC W >= W 2 Z o W 111,0253 Sheet SP19 s 1\ \ V A \ V I m 1 1 1 \ I °' , � 1 > Ct \ \ 1 1 P 1 1 L _—_ 4" RCP FES L }• rn �/ I I 1 1 li'I w� l I II I 1 A I I I 141 11 LAKE \ 1 \ V A 11 1 \ \ W .'r�,..a: 11 1 v Ex: t , - ' {Ver( t x 64Z 75 , I' t(Verify) I Cvr I r <0 I I I % 1 Ex. .00 643.0 'Ex (Verify) 3. 643.28 �Cv / / 642.80 G V / E" 64317 \ / F,L.-633.15 VA / Concrete \ \ V A Soccer -�ompl x \\ \ \ (�A ty) 644—)AV A V A �O 643.85 GG s4S \\\ \ 1 v 45.55 TC 645.05 G " rV A / ,°j / / ,�0 642.00 I tF _ "" � / �, .(Verify 64 .25 TC 1,0 ST -12A 9715 , w / // / 64 .00 643.9 INV. = 632.00 2 \ 6°6 49 W // / 641.75 644.25 / 1'* G 644.25 T m , ST -12 10 ` 6k5 Q0 , CIRCULAR 643. TIC S GRATE INTAKE 43,18)i� m �- a • GRATE- 641,75 6a2:25 GC \ / // // / �, = 632,64 (OUT -NW) 64a / /� r�/ u f-� ele�l-`g4 . 'Cul—,ole - / � pM Y 646 lC / / `O / / , , ,L i // eg / Woo parking barrier Cil �/� / Sand Lake rking Hours a / Dawn to Dusk i / � / All Dogs Must e on Leash Z01 ; 15,9 \-Wood parking b - 1 ���,----� --W1�9 Eagle fR, ad / \ / / � � � Cana t ----- CrCVeI \ Wood parking barrier• 0 i Dead End P'iva.e Road ----642 -- ,= PROPERTY LINE ❑T -640 \ r \ 7 G Uj 7 .. C10 GRADING PLAN GENERAL NOTES A. SEE SHEET SP2 FOR EROSION CONTROL NOTES. B. CONTRACTOR TO STRIP AND STOCKPILE TOPSOIL ON ALL AREAS TO BE CUT OR FILLED. RESPREAD TO MINIMUM 6" DEPTH TO FINISH GRADES. SPREAD EXCESS SOILS IN AREAS WHERE GRAVEL IS TO BE REMOVED TO MATCH EXISTING GRADES AND POSITIVE DRAINAGE. C. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE FOR ALL AREAS WITHIN CONSTRUCTION LIMITS. D. LENGTH OF UTILITIES SHOWN ON PLANS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE TO CENTERLINE OF STRUCTURE INCLUDE FLARED END SECTIONS. E. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR LAYOUT VERIFICATION OF ALL SITE IMPROVEMENTS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, F.CONTRACTOR TO LOAD AND TRANSPORT ALL MATERIALS CONSIDERED TO BE UNDESIRABLE TO BE INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO AN APPROVED OFF-SITE WASTE SITE. G. CONTRACTOR TO STRIP AND STOCKPILE TOPSOIL FROM ALL AREAS TO BE CUT OR FILLED. RESPREAD TO MINIMUM 6" DEPTH TO FINISH GRADES, H.ALL PROPOSED CONTOURS AND SPOT ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE FINISHED GRADES AND/OR TOP OF PAVING SLAB (GUTTER),UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. L CONTRACTOR TO CONSTRUCT SUBGRADE OF ALL PROPOSED BUILDINGS, FOOTINGS, AND PAVEMENTS AS PER GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT. GRADING PLAN CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. SILT FENCE, SEE DETAIL. 2. FILTER SOCK, SEE DETAIL FEB 21 2012 4:5F PM SF 0 30 Y m O W M c CV Cn m mm CD .� �o N U) [E U) N U z \ N S m O wccv m m M U LO N Q � F To .9 z C C N21 Z W 12 1 0- M b 0m ON N J_ N d w _ �6o(6 Y / C) < n m Z p ¢N W D r C9 m 2 m N 01 W 0 a o� a M WM M O a �LON N O CID r th a Z � Y LO N Q1 � N a W a z O W a � W a W C:) O O w CIO o � a 0o a WZ m 5 1= a W ~ 0 0 Z >= W cc ♦cZ V 111.0253 SCALE (FEET) CITY FILE N0. PA 261 Sheet SP20 VA 3=.UF \\ �•`'•.,, A `. � � 1 I 1 f I I I v V � V A AA •� ��' 5 v V A it 3-13 7 \ \v \V A A f 5� \ 4 1 -GT,; n r /ol C P� _ .� g I n 2 5 TYP. \ S V A \ 4 -MA i \ co � / 4 8 CONSTRUCTION NOTES CONSTRUCTION NOTES / `"�•[/ „ 6 / 1, REMOVE EXISTING VEGETATION AND OVER EXCAVATE AS NECESSARY. 1. REMOVE EXISTING VEGETATION AND OVER EXCAVATE AS NECESSARY. 7 /!�••�„� •` 2. FINISH GRADE ON EXISTING SLOPES. 2. FINISH GRADE ON EXISTING SLOPES. 3. PROVIDE GRANULAR MATERIAL AS SHOWN ON DETAIL. 3. PROVIDE GRANULAR MATERIAL AS SHOWN ON DETAIL. /3 -BN ,` / C) 4. SEEDING. INSTALL "WATERWAY MIX” SEED MIXTURE. 4. SEEDING. INSTALL "WATERWAY MIX" SEED MIXTURE. 5, PROVIDE LIMESTONE BLOCKS WHERE SHOWN. 3'X4'X2' HIGH IRREGULAR SHAPE, 5. PROVIDE LIMESTONE BLOCKS WHERE SHOWN. 3'X4'X2' HIGH IRREGULAR SHAPE. 6. PROVIDE TREES. SEE PLANTING SCHEDULE. 6, PROVIDE TREES. SEE PLANTING SCHEDULE. 7. CONSTRUCTION FENCE: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING 7. CONSTRUCTION FENCE: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING: INSTALL ORANGE TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE ALONG EXISTING INSTALL ORANGE TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE ALONG EXISTING TRAIL. THE PERIMETER PUBLIC TRAIL IS TO BE OPEN WHEN CONSTRUCTION TRAIL. THE PERIMETER PUBLIC TRAIL IS TO BE OPEN WHEN CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES DO NOT AFFECT THE TRAIL. ACTIVITIES DO NOT AFFECT THE TRAIL. 8. PROVIDE LIMESTONE WALL AS DETAILED. 8. PROVIDE LIMESTONE WALL AS DETAILED. FISHING JETTY -ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 20 SCALE ANAMOSA LIMESTONE (SPLIT FACE: RUNNING BOND) 2' - 5' LENGTHS, 12" HEIGHT & WIDTH 1/2" X 8" STAINLESS STEEL PIN, MIN. 2 PER BLOCK: MAX. 5/8" HOLE SIZE LAKE 12" DEPTH - w �rCLASS "D" RIP -RAP EN FP FISHING JETTY - SECTION -ADD ALTERNATE NO. 2 SECTION B -B FISHING JETTY -ADD ALTERNATE NO.2 20 SCLAE 8 5 - ♦ -L4 w h �- M v 'l' 3 - — 5 rM �c� 1a 7 ys " p 6 O7.' 3 BN C�00 2 -GT 2 4 4 3 , ^0179 1, .�.,�,• - PROVIDE 6" DEPTH LIMESTONE _ _ -_" I - - i OUTCROPPING SLABS - - - - _ -- ". -. . --- "CONSTRUCTION NOTES ACROSS TOP - IOWA CLASS "N' / —. � -"_. --------- C) CRUSHED ROAD STONE - 1. REMOVE EXISTING VEGETATION AND OVER EXCAVATE AS NECESSARY. 637.5 ) T ti - -_ 2. FINISH GRADE ON EXISTING SLOPES. 3. PROVIDE GRANULAR MATERIAL AS SHOWN ON DETAIL. 4. SEEDING. INSTALL "WATERWAY MIX" SEED MIXTURE. • 6" DEPTH 5. PROVIDE LIMESTONE BLOCKS WHERE SHOWN, 3'X4'X2' HIGH IRREGULAR SHAPE. UNDISTURBED o SOIL (TYP.) 6. PROVIDE TREES. SEE PLANTING SCHEDULE. " 4PERFORATED DRAIN TILE 7 7. CONSTRUCTION FENCE. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING DAYLIGHT TO EDGE OF WATER 1' INSTALL ORANGE TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE ALONG EXISTING IJ= TRAIL. THE PERIMETER PUBLIC TRAIL IS TO BE OPEN WHEN CONSTRUCTION COMPACTED GRANULAR ACTIVITIES DO NOT AFFECT THE TRAIL. INEERING BASE (12" DEPTH MIN) RIC 8. PROVIDE LIMESTONE WALL AS DETAILED. FEB 21 2012 q: G9 iM 5F 0 20 SCALE (FEET) OG CV Lu CL N (L cn '^ O �I ;m; m •r (h LL L Cn N U Lil O N c m O w U U L0 N Q � C9 o .0 Z W H d LL 0 w a J � W cs 0,6 Z o QN W " mD C1 � O_� W U m Q m Oq a Z N C? a - LL, `h a M W Lo 00 cli0 w- N a o N _ �0-0_ z L6 Cn Y ul I-- Z � Q N a W a z cn O W a �- W Oct ui O cn O U) o Oct iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiijW W LLI W CC Z Lu LLn LL FISHING JETTY -ADD ALTERNATE NO.2 20 SCALE 111.02 53 CITY FILE NO. PA 261 Sheet SP21 ABBREVIATIONS A/C AIR CONDITION AB ANCHOR BOLT ACC ACCESSIBLE ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE ADA AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ADC AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSER ADDL ADDITIONAL ADDM ADDENDUM ADJ ADJACENT, ADJUSTABLE ADMIN ADMINISTRATION AFC ABOVE FINISHED COUNTER AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AFS ABOVE FINISHED SLAB AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT ALLOW ALLOWANCE ALNMT ALIGNMENT ALT ALTERNATE ALUM ALUMINUM AMT AMOUNT ANOD ANODIZE APP APPEARANCE APPROX APPROXIMATE APT APARTMENT AR AS REQUIRED ARCH ARCHIITECT ARF ARCHITECTURAL FINISH ASC ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILING ASPH ASPHALT ASSY ASSEMBLY ASU AIR SUPPLY UNIT ASYM ASYMMETRICAL ATTN ATTACHMENT AUTO AUTOMATIC AV AIR VENT, AUDIO VISUAL AVE AVENUE AW ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK AWT ACOUSTICAL WALL TREATMENT BALC BALCONY BB BASEBOARD, BULLETIN BOARD BC BACK OF CURB, BETWEEN CENTER BD BOARD BDRY BOUNDRY BFF BELOW FINISH FLOOR BI FLD DR BIFOLDING DOORS BITUM BITUMINOUS BLDG BUILDING BLKHD BULKHEAD BLVD BOULEVARD BLW BELOW BM BEAM, BENCHMARK BN BULLNOSE BO BOTTOM OF BOC BOTTOM OF CEILING BPRF BULLETPROOF (BULLET RESISTANT) BR BEDROOM BRCG BRACING BRIG BEARING BRKT BRACKET BRZ BRONZE BS BOTH SIDES BSMT BASEMENT BT BATHTUB BTWN BETWEEN BW BOTH WAYS C TO C CENTER TO CENTER CAB CABINET CANTIL CANTILEVER CATW CATWALK CAV CAVITY CB CARRIAGE BOLT CB CERAMIC BASE, CORNER BOARD CBB CEMENTITIOUS (BACKER) BOARD CD CONSTRUCTION / CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CER CERAMIC CERT CERTIFY CF CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CF/CI CONTR FURNISHED / CONTR INSTALLED CF/OI CONTR FURNISHED /OWNER INSTALLED CFE CONTRACTOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENT CFLG COUNTERFLASHING CG CORNER GUARD CH COAT HOOK CH BD CHALKBOARD CI CURB INLET CID CAST -IN-PLACE CIRC CIRCULAR CJ CONSTRUCTION JOINT, CONTROL JOINT CK TP COOK TOP CL CENTER LINE CLDG CLADDING CLG CEILING CLG DIFF CEILING DIFFUSER CLG GRL CEILING GRILLE CLG HT CEILING HEIGHT CLG REG CEILING REGISTER CLKJ CALKED JOINT CLL COLUMN LINE CLO CLOSET CLR CLEAR, COLOR CLRM CLASSROOM CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CNCL CONCEALED CNR CORNER CNTR COUNTER COL COLUMN COM COMMON COMM COMMUNICATION CONIC CONCRETE CONF CONFERENCE CONT CONTINUE CONTR CONTRACTOR COORD COORDINATE CORR CORRIDOR CPT CARPET CR CONTROL ROOM, COAT RACK CRT YD COURT YARD CS CAST STONE CSB CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK CSK COUNTER SUNK CSMT CASEMENT CT CERAMIC TILE CT STN CUT STONE CTB CERAMIC TILE BASE CTF CERAMIC TILE FLOOR CTR CENTER CUH CABINET UNIT HEATER CURT CURTAIN CUST CUSTODIAN CW CASEMENT WINDOW, CLOCKWISE CYL CYLINDER D DEEP DAP DUCT ACCESS PANEL DAT DATUM dB DECIBEL DBL DOUBLE DEMO DEMOLITION, DEMONSTRATION DEPT DEPARTMENT DET DETAIL DETN DETENTION DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN DH DOUBLE HUNG DIA DIAMETER DIAG DIAGONAL DIM DIMENSION DIST DISTANCE DOC DOCUMENT DR DINING ROOM, DOOR, DRAIN DS DOWNSPOUT DT DRAIN TILE DW DISHWASHER DWG DRAWING E EAST EA EACH EGSB EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD EH ELECTRIC HEATER EHD ELECTRIC HAND DRYER EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM EJ EXPANSION JOINT EL EACH LAYER, ELEVATION ELEC ELECTRIC ELEV ELEVATOR ELAST ELECTROMAGNETIC EVER EMERGENCY ENCL ENCLOSURE ENTR ENTRANCE EOS EDGE OF SLAB EP ELECTRICAL PANEL EPDM ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER EPS EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE BD (INSULATION) EQ EQUAL EQUIP EQUIPMENT ETC AND SO FORTH, ET CETERA EW EACH WAY EXIST EXISTING EXP EXPANSION, EXPOSED EXT EXTERIOR, EXTINGUISHER EXT LT EXIT LIGHT FA FIRE ALARM FACP FIRE ALARM PANEL FAS FASCIA FCO FLOOR CLEAN OUT FD FLOOR DRAIN FDC FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION FDTN FOUNDATION FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FF FINISH FACE FF&E FURNITURE, FIXTURE, AND EQUIPMENT FFA FROM FLOOR ABOVE FFB FROM FLOOR BELOW FH FIRE HOSE, FIRE HYDRANT FHP FULL HEIGHT PARTITION FIN FINISH FIXT FIXTURE FL FLOORLINE FLASH FLASHING FLDG FOLDING FLEX FLEXIBLE FLG FLANGE, FLOORING FLMT FLUSH MOUNT FLR FLOOR FN FENCE FO FACE OF FOUNT FOUNTAIN FP FLAGPOLE FPL FIREPLACE FR FIRE RATING, FRAME FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCES PLASTIC FRZ FREEZER FT FEET, FOOT FTD FACIAL TISSUE DISPENSER FTG FOOTING FURN FURNACE, FURNITURE FUT FUTURE FW FIRE WALL, FLOOD WALL FWRK FORMWORK GA GAGE GALV GALVANIZED GB GRABBAR GDR GUARD RAIL GEN GENERAL GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER GFRC GLASS -FIBER -REINFORCED CONCRETE GL GLASS, GROUND LEVEL GLU LAM GLUED LAMINATED WOOD GLZ GLAZING GLZ CMU GLAZED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT GR BM GRADE BEAM GSB GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD GT GROUT GUT GUTTER GWT GLAZED WALL TILE GYM GYMNASIUM GYP GYPSUM HB HOSE BIB HC HANDICAP HD HAND DRYER HD JT HEAD JOINT HDBD HARDBOARD HDR HEADER HDW HARDWARE HM HOLLOW METAL HNDRL HANDRAIL HORIZ HORIZONTAL HIS HAND SINK HT HEIGHT HYD HYDRANT IBC INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE ID IDENTIFICATION, INSIDE DIAMETER IIC IMPACT ISOLATION CLASS INSTL INSTALL INSUL INSULATION INSUL PNL INSULATED METAL PANEL INT INTERIOR IS INSECT SCREEN JAN JANITOR JS JANITOR'S SINK KIT KITCHEN KPL KICK PLATE L ANGLE LAB LABORATORY LAM LAMINATE LAU LAUNDRY LAV LAVATORY LIB LIBRARY LKR LOCKER LMST LIMESTONE LNDSCP LANDSCAPE LP LIGHT POLE LR LIVING ROOM LSC LIFE SAFETY CODE LVR LOUVER MACH MACHINE MAINT MAINTENANCE MATL MATERIAL MAX MAXIMUM MB MAIL BOX MBH MOP/BROOM HOLDER MBR MASTER BEDROOM MC MANHOLE COVER, MEDICINE CABINET MDO MEDIUM DENSITY OVERLAY MECH MECHANICAL MEL MELAMINE MEMS MEMBRANE MEZZ MEZZANINE MFD MANUFACTURED MIN MINIMUM MIRR MIRROR MISC MISCELLANEOUS MKBD MARKER BOARD MK/TKBD MARKER/TACK BOARD MLWK MILLWORK MO MASONRY OPENING MOD MODIFY MT MOUNT MTL METAL MTLD METAL DOOR MULL MULLION MULT MULTIPLE MVBL MOVABLE N NORTH NA NOT APPLICABLE NFPA NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NO NUMBER NOM NOMINAL NP NO PAINT NS NARROW STILE NUM NUMERAL OC ON CENTER OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF/CI OWNER FURNISHED/CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OFD OVERFLOW DRAIN OFF OFFICE OF/OI OWNER FURNISHED/OWNER INSTALLED OH OVERHANG OH DR OVERHEAD DOOR OPNG OPENING OPP OPPOSITE OR OUTSIDE RADIUS ORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN PART PARTIAL PB PAINTED BASE, PANELBOARD, PANIC BAR PBD PARTICLEBOARD PCC PRECAST CONCRETE PCCP CONCRETE PAVEMENT PCT PERCENT PE -1 PREMOLDED EXPANSION JOINT PEND PENDANT PERF PERFORATED PERIM PERIMETER PGBD PEGBOARD PL PROPERTY LINE PLAM PLASTIC LAMINATE PLAS PLASTER, PLASTIC PLYWD PLYWOOD PMTL PAINTED METAL POLY POLYETHYLENE PR PAIR PREFAB PREFABRICATE PREFIN PREFINISH PRELIM PRELIMINARY PRKG PARKING PRMLD PREMOLDED PROP PROPERTY PT PAINT PTAC PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER PTD PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER PTN PARTITION PV PAVED PVC POLYVINYL CLORIDE PVG PAVING PW PASS WINDOW QT QUARRY TILE QTB QUARRY TILE BASE QTR QUARTER QTY QUANTITY R RADIUS, RISER R&D RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT RA RETURN AIR RB RESILIENT BASE RB HK ROBE HOOK RCP REFLECTED CEILING PLAN RD ROAD, ROOF DRAIN RDC REDUCER REBAR REINFORCING STEEL BARS REC RECESSED, RECREATION REF REFRIGERATOR REP REPAIR REQ REQUIRE RESIL RESILIENT REST RESTROOM RET RETURN REV REVISION RF RESILIENT FLOORING RH ROOF HATCH RLG RAILING RM ROOM RND ROUND RO ROUGH OPENING RS ROUGHSAWN RTU ROOF TOP UNIT RV ROOF VENT RVL REVEAL S SOUTH SALV SALVAGE SAN SANITARY SATC SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SB SPLASH BLOCK SCHED SCHEDULE SCP SCUPPER SCR SHOWER CURTAIN ROD SD SMOKE DETECTOR, SOAP DISPENSER, STORM DRAIN SECT SECTION SF SQUARE FOOT (FEET) SGL SINGLE SHFT SHAFT SHR SHOWER SHRD SHOWER DRAIN SHT SHEET SHV SHELVING SIM SIMILAR SJ SLIP JOINT SLNT SEALANT SLV SLEEVE SM SHEET METAL, SMOOTH SND SANITARY NAPKIN DISPENSER SNDU SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL UNIT SNSR SENSOR SP STAND PIPE, SUMP PUMP SPEC SPECIFICATION SPR SPRINKLER LINE SQ SQUARE SST STAINLESS STEEL ST STAIRS, STREET STC SOUND TRANSMISSION CLASS STD STANDARD STL STEEL STOR STORAGE SUPVR SUPERVISOR SURF SURFACE SURR SURROUND SUSP SUSPEND SV SHEET VINYL SVCE SERVICE SW SIDEWALK SWR SEWER T TREAD T&B TOP AND BOTTOM T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE T/S TUB/SHOWER TB THROUGH BOLT, TOWEL BAR TC TERRA COTTA TD TOWEL DISPENSER, TRENCH DRAIN TEL TELEPHONE TEMP TEMPERATURE TER TERRAllO TFA TO FLOOR ABOVE TFB TO FLOOR BELOW TFF TOP OF FINISH FLOOR THK THICK THRES THRESHOLD THRU THROUGH TK BID TACKBOARD TMPD TEMPERED TN TRUE NORTH TO TOP OF TOB TOP OF BEAM TOC TOP OF CONCRETE, CURB TOF TOP OF FLOOR, FOOTING TOJ TOP OF JOIST TOL TOLERANCE TOM TOP OF MASONRY TOP TOP OF PARAPET, PAVEMENT TOPO TOPOGRAPHY TOS TOP OF SLAB, STEEL TOT TOP OF TRUSS TOW TOP OF WALL TP TELEPHONE POLE TPD TOILET PAPER DISPENSER TR TOWEL RACK TRANS TRANSPARENT TRNBKL TURNBUCKLE TRTD TREATED TS TUBE STEEL TSTAT THERMOSTAT TV TELEVISION TYP TYPICAL UGND UNDERGROUND UR URINAL UTIL UTILITY VAN VANITY VAR VARIES VB VINYL BASE VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VEH VEHICLE VENT VENTILATE VERT VERTICAL VEST VESTIBULE VG VERTICAL GRAIN VIF VERIFY IN FIELD VNR VENEER VR VAPOR RETARDER VRFY VERIFY VS VENTSTACK VWC VINYL WALL COVERING VWF VINYL WALL FABRIC W WEST W/ WITH W/O WITHOUT W/W WALL TO WALL WB WHITE BOARD, WOOD BASE WBL WOOD BLOCKING WC WALL COVERING, WATER CLOSET WCLR WATER COOLER WD WOOD, WOOD DOOR WDW WINDOW WF WIDE FLANGE WFS WOOD FURRING STRIPS WGL WIRE GLASS WH WALL HUNG, WATER HEATER, WEEP HOLE WO WHERE OCCURS WS WEATHERSTRIP WT WATER TABLE, WEIGHT WTR WATER WWF WELDED WIRE FABRIC X CROSS XFMR TRANSFORMER XPS EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE BOARD YD YARD w Z 2 L O N 6" MAX TOE KNEE MIN. CLEAR SPACE PAPER TOWEL HMIRROR DISPENSER MIN, CLEAR TYPICAL ACCESSIBLE CLEARANCES FOR PUBLIC LAVATORIES ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS M qg X-Ou MIN. III III V-0" <4 iM o M 01 Z (4 2'-0" 1'$" MIN. MIN. TYPICAL ACCESSIBLE CLEARANCES FOR PUBLIC TOILETS MATERIALS LEGEND BATT INSULATION BRICK CONCRETE CONCRETE BLOCK STONE GRAVEL/GRANULAR FILL ® PLYWOOD RIGID INSULATION STEEL O EARTH WOOD TRIM DIMENSION LUMBER GYPSUM BOARD FEB 21 2012 SYMBOLS 11:51 l.,uK Iowa City, Iowa (D KEYNOTE 061 DOOR NUMBER OWINDOW TYPE W7 WALL TYPE E~ WALL PROFILE OFFICE ROOM NAME 101 AND NUMBER OVER COUNTER ADA CEWEROF REQUIRED HEIGHTS UPPER RECEPTACLE �B— COUNTER HEIGHT b m 2 BUILDING SECTION REFERENCE DIRECTION OF VIEW 1 SECTION NUMBER ASI SHEET NUMBER WALL SECTION REFERENCE DIRECTION OF VIEW 1 SECTION NUMBER A3tt SHEET NUMBER ELEVATION REFERENCE DIRECTION OF VIEW I ELEVATION NUMBER Azol SHEET NUMBER DETAIL REFERENCE 1 DETAIL NUMBER Amt SHEET NUMBER OPEN WALL ADA REQUIRED HEIGHTS ACCESSIBLE HEIGHTS FOR ELECTRICAL NOTE: 1. VERIFY ALL DISCREPANCIES OR ITEMS NOT SHOWN WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 2. PROVIDE SOLID BLOCKING AT ALL GUARDRAILS AND WALL MOUNTED FIXTURES City File No. PA 261 U) W W 0 ^r M Lu V J I..L 1 Q W Z 0 W cr U w 0 0 MJ W W Z) cr W } m W � mO a a w C' Y U 0 o Q N y IL W KD c N D � r N w C' Y U r1� � U N T r KD c c � p z m Q 2 Lu uD F 0- N Q 0 Q H- H J m N t� Lu U Q Q Q t/) O Q Lu m m Q 3N ri L� a z 4a� UU M U ci j N J CD Lu C40 D CD O rn >: lu� Tn LU Lo N ZQ n N V W U r0 c rn V J m W V 111.0253 Sheet A001 Rcl ROOF CEILING ASSEMBLY RATING: NONE 12 ---12.5 COPPER SIDING - SEE SPEC A. DRAINAGE BOARD RATING: NONE SHINGLES OVER ICE AND WATER SHIELD R-20 NAIL BASE INSULATION I" PLYWOOD v 2x6 LAMINATE WOOD DECKING GLU-LAM BEAM - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ROOF CEILING ASSEMBLY RATING: NONE ADHERED MEMBRANE }" DENS DECK R-20 MIN POLY ISO INSULATION VAPOR BARRIER 1'" METAL DECKING STEEL FRAMING - SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FURRING CHANNEL " GYPSUM BOARD OR SUSPENDED CEILING - SEE A431 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN. 4 ROOF/CEILING ASSEMBLIES 1 /2" = l' -O' Fl FLOOR ASSEMBLY RATING: NONE 4" CONCRETE SLAB VAPOR BARRIER 4" COMPACTED DRAINAGE GRAVEL DRAINAGE TILE PREPARED SUBGRADE 3 FLOOR ASSEMBLIES wv INTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE v INTERIOR FINISH (REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION) m A. GYP BOARD B. fig" GYP BOARD AND PLYWOOD TYPE A; C. CERAMIC TILE OVER? CEMENT BOARD 2x6 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) wl EXTERIOR WALL ® EXTERIOR RATING: NONE O i 4 • OF ..,�■i■8,i■»: r u..yrr¢�e�}nlxrrx�a �rcrr}s� w3 EXTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE rn w4 EXTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE ws EXTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE LIMESTONE VENEER 4" AIR SPACE AIR BARRIER 8" CMU 1� AIR SPACE LIMESTONE VENEER LIMESTONE VENEER If AIR SPACE 24" RIGID INSULATION AIR BARRIER 8" CMU 14" AIR SPACE LIMESTONE VENEER FEB 21 2012 EXTERIOR FINISH (REFER TO EXT. ELEVATION) A. TONGUE AND GROOVE SIDING B. I" PLYWOOD TYPE A t' WOOD FURRING STRIPS, VERTICAL AT STUDS - SEE DTL 14IA502 AIR BARRIER 1" CONTINUOUS INSULATION 2x6 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) BATT INSULATION - R19 VAPOR BARRIER INTERIOR FINISH (REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION AND FINISH SCHEDULE FOR LOCATIONS) A. �' GYP BOARD B. PLYWOOD TYPE A OVER B" GYP BOARD C. CERAMIC TILE OVER CEMENT BOARD D. CEDAR SIDING OVER g1" GYP BOARD *REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR AREAS TO RECEIVE ADDITIONAL PLYWOOD SHEATHING AT INTERIOR SIDE OF STUD. COPPER SIDING - SEE SPEC J" DRAINAGE BOARD AIR BARRIER 1" INSULATED SHEETING 2x6 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) BATT INSULATION - R19 2" PLYWOOD VAPOR BARRIER COPPER SIDING - SEE SPEC INTERIOR WALL E COPPER SIDING - SEE SPEC A. DRAINAGE BOARD RATING: NONE AIR BARRIER INTERIOR FINISH (REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION AND FINISH 112"' INSULATED SHEETING 2x6 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) v SCHEDULE FOR LOCATIONS)" PLYWOOD A. GYP BOARD AIR BARRIER B. GYP BOARD AND PLYWOOD TYPE A; l DRAINAGE BOARD C. CERAMIC TILE OVER }'CEMENT BOARD COPPER SIDING - SEE SPEC 2x4 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) " GYP BOARD z O fA T wb EXTERIOR WALL I1 INTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE N RATING: NONE = COPPER SIDING - SEE SPEC INTERIOR FINISH (REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION AND FINISH SCHEDULE FOR LOCATIONS) 2" DRAINAGE BOARD AIR BARRIER A. B" GYP BOARD M B7 1" INSULATED SHEETING B. e' GYP BOARD AND PLYWOOD TYPE A; D 2X2 VERTICAL WOOD FURRING - SPACE ACCORDING TO 2x6 FRAMING O 2x6 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) C. CERAMIC TILE OVER 2' CEMENT BOARD BATT INSULATION - R22 2x6 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) VAPOR BARRIER INTERIOR FINISH (REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION) g" GYPSUM BOARD A. GYP BOARD z a Z B. g1" GYP BOARD AND PLYWOOD TYPE A; C. CERAMIC TILE OVER'"' CEMENT BOARD W 'REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR AREAS TO RECEIVE ADDITIONAL LL PLYWOOD SHEATHING. 12 INTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE INTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE 31 1'11010-I,I 2 WALL ASSEMBLIES 112" = I ,_o„ INTERIOR FINISH (REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION AND FINISH SCHEDULE FOR LOCATIONS) A. I" GYP BOARD B. J" GYP BOARD AND PLYWOOD TYPE A; C. CERAMIC TILE OVER J" CEMENT BOARD 2x4 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) " GYP BOARD, OR COPPER SIDING OVER I" PLYWOOD 2x8 FRAMING AT 12" O.C. - 24" O.C. (SEE STRUCTURAL) w� EXTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE O COPPER SIDING - SEE SPEC OD z" DRAINAGE BOARD AIR BARRIER " PLYWOOD 2x8 FRAMING (SEE STRUCTURAL FOR SPACING) W6 EXTERIOR WALL RATING: NONE © " 0 4 A ASSEMBLIES " = I ,( LIMESTONE VENEER 1�' AIR SPACE AIR BARRIER Z" PLYWOOD 2x8 FRAMING (SEE STRUCTURAL FOR SPACING) City File No. PA 261 r m N a a o Y O Q U) N N N z O fA T N w � Y m M B7 U D N O r z o Z d Z d W I LL O 0;d ON W CO = N J dLLI N > 0 U �m CD Q vJ O <N O C LL N z J N m � N W W V in d M N O W M U ciMJ N 0 W LLJ CD N O N W z o ZI Q r Lb i. �Z W u7 N Z n Q N 1 W Z 0 V Q W W C) U O 00 cn J 0< ca 06W N W LLJ CL M � J Z > VJ 111.0253 Sheet A002 12'-8" 12'-B" 12'-8" 12'-8" 34'-5 1/8" 53'-9 314' 2 2 A301 A201 9'-6" 7,9718" 1T -11l4" 3'f 7/8" 48'-0" 4 4 W 1 A6�az W 2 A313 A102 4 --- ---- - �4to v LOBBY p � to2 It- � r A421 '/\ (^_'' \/� N ' M 103B FEC O ' 11 N 10 ElI ! t03A KITCHEN tOaA 105A '�� toa O iro B M® a � '171717'_ _$ 0 11 _ _ —14' 3/4" 8'-" 4'-8 8'-0"N 17'-4" Aalz 1 1Dac 8 31/2" 31/2" I 2'-2 3/" I 87' -9318- A422 7' -9318"A422 l`04 A374 A201 � pp m ROOM A ROOM B c� ID4 ' 105 a N I MOVABLE PARTITION WALL I LAMINATED GLASS INFILL, I CONTINUE TO DECK ABOVE, REFER TO 14/A504 AND 3/A311. 5> SILICONE BUTT GLAZE O � / IOSB Asda O 88'-5 7/8" 6'-5" 12'-B" 1'-8 718"1 —5 1/8" 139'-1" 12'-8" 1 15'-3 1/8" 12'-8" 4 A312 2 3 A602 A602 1 /2 _ 1008 100A 2'-2- A311 -2"A314 3'5" 12'-8" 50'-9 3/4" ®® ■ ■ „ ■ ® 11 ■ ■ s � _ I, %��. o'• 3 ee.o ♦ee••w.v n'�n '•}o ✓ooeo,. Mode. 000nafe p'e eoeo:,e eo }'• ♦C 3'br:i9?:S•:'.:{SC:•:S•Jom'•e'Y..e_ +•e��_ �1L71�Itlll�ul � _� I' ® ® (0 II lid o) 7-6 114" 48'-0 7/8" m� 12'-8" 11'-0 3/8" 10'-8" CLR fV ip 12'-8" E `r I D GENERAL NOTES 1. SLOPE EXTERIOR SLAB AWAY FROM BUILDING -ALL SIDES. 2. FLOOR PLAN DIMENSIONED FROM WOOD STUD OR CMU EDGE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED WITH REQUIRED CLEARANCE. 3. PROVIDE 4" PERFORATED DRAINAGE TILE WITH FILTER FABRIC IN GRANULAR FILL AT BASE OF UNDER SLAB DUCTWORK. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION AND DETAILS. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL 4" PERFORATED DRAINAGE TILE WITH FILTER FABRIC IN GRANULAR FILL AT CENTER OF BUILDING. CONNECT TILES TOGETHER AND DRAIN TO DAYLIGHT- REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR DETAIL. 12'-8" 39'-15/8" FLOOR PLAN 1 /8" = 1'-0" LEI 13'-2 7/8" FEB 21 2011 4 . cl PN/ E A301 1 L 0 City File No. PA 261 Y m r UJI a O o r Y Q u m ND -o m N tll LL � N O 04o to (n T w N m M r m In U O (V 0 r r c o L' 0 Z m 'c ii m Z 'a T - W F- d i.LL Q O �� Mgj N W > 6 0,6 >- d 0,6 Q VJ O <N O LL M N Z J� m N w�� Lu U o a m ZN�0% o Ld Q � W Na U �C G M om rn Lu � N LLI N ��//�� OW V ) Q O Z th T N W LO y^ N Q 1..` N Lu Z o C, Q w Lu Ir C.) U O 0 C/3 O ♦ � O � w F— Z W I Q w °o rz^ F- LL V 3 111.0253 Sheet A 101 I 2'-11518" 6'4" V-2 MOP HOLDER 6 A503 _ 2'-2 3r4" ADJUSTABLE SHELVES, 314"X12" DEEP MELAMINE, TYP. FOR 5 EACH, WITH WALL 1 STANDARDS AND SHELF SUPPORTS I W13 00 I 1/2" 6'-5 1/4" 3 1/2" 3'-4 518" 4'-0 5/B' � Uih N D 4 PREP ROOM As,o 4 7'-51/4" 9 u MECHANICAL 71 OB F - CONTINUOUS 1" INSULATION ALONG OUTSIDE PERIMETER TO BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK ABOVE. CONTINUE AIR BARRIER AND VAPOR BARRIER ALONG PERIMETER. I ♦ 1 3 (� A503 A503 w7 w� 1 � ♦ ASD3 � 5'-0 3/8" 0 1 11 ENLARGED PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN 4 T Y `r 12 A502 ADHERED /4 3 18 LINE OF BULKHEAD ABOVE 17 W5 FINISH TO FACE A502 A602 A602 wb OF GLUE -LAM a0 i� �--� COLUMN I 1 ♦ . . . . . . . . . . . 11 �L — 1 N O O ry W 2'-6" Z-6" 2' co cl) m HAND DRYER tc to 10 1l2" 5'-0 1/2" 112" 2'-0 5/8" KITCHEN A� o ° 1 103 u 1/ \ 1 Q o 0 FE g7 FE q ® I 0 � m m W9 ® _ A421 � 1'-105/81, A421 N MEN'S n T a HAND DRYER J J 11 O - il 7�e4 . U U 111 1co W3 N Q o ,n eO N 10'-1" 0 - 1 co M A510 l W 3 q WOMEN'S MILLWORKii °O- Jm U U q n iv M SOAP DISPENSE q q SOAP DISPENSER M N STEEL TUBE COLUMN. N > 7 SEE STRUCTURAL Lo 8 o m a N\ jo 1 A510 wl OR V D ly cloq n SOAP En M Asloit DISPENSER A421 0 NA42, V V ENLARGED KITCHEN FLOOR PLAN to HAND DRYER 4 � III II I M 1 /4" = 1'-0" `_2 HAND DRYER 5._p" `4 � II W3 l v II II I L7 MILLWORK PLUMBING WALL BELOW GLU-LAM ABOVE T-1" 5'-0" 2'-2" T-1" GLU-LAM ABOVE 2T-1" N N 7 8 9 l0 11 2 ENLARGED RESTROOM FLOOR PLAN 6 A602 4 8 A602 A602 O A602 A602 CLERESTORY PLAN @ ENTRANCE 1/8'. = 1'-0" 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FEB 21 2012 y:51 r&I N UPPER PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN 1/B''= F -a' City File No. PA 261 r m v a ® o STORAGE FIREPLACE INSERT m a N q log � I I C1) N N � I 20'-0 314" A503 I u MECHANICAL 71 OB F - CONTINUOUS 1" INSULATION ALONG OUTSIDE PERIMETER TO BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK ABOVE. CONTINUE AIR BARRIER AND VAPOR BARRIER ALONG PERIMETER. I ♦ 1 3 (� A503 A503 w7 w� 1 � ♦ ASD3 � 5'-0 3/8" 0 1 11 ENLARGED PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN 4 T Y `r 12 A502 ADHERED /4 3 18 LINE OF BULKHEAD ABOVE 17 W5 FINISH TO FACE A502 A602 A602 wb OF GLUE -LAM a0 i� �--� COLUMN I 1 ♦ . . . . . . . . . . . 11 �L — 1 N O O ry W 2'-6" Z-6" 2' co cl) m HAND DRYER tc to 10 1l2" 5'-0 1/2" 112" 2'-0 5/8" KITCHEN A� o ° 1 103 u 1/ \ 1 Q o 0 FE g7 FE q ® I 0 � m m W9 ® _ A421 � 1'-105/81, A421 N MEN'S n T a HAND DRYER J J 11 O - il 7�e4 . U U 111 1co W3 N Q o ,n eO N 10'-1" 0 - 1 co M A510 l W 3 q WOMEN'S MILLWORKii °O- Jm U U q n iv M SOAP DISPENSE q q SOAP DISPENSER M N STEEL TUBE COLUMN. N > 7 SEE STRUCTURAL Lo 8 o m a N\ jo 1 A510 wl OR V D ly cloq n SOAP En M Asloit DISPENSER A421 0 NA42, V V ENLARGED KITCHEN FLOOR PLAN to HAND DRYER 4 � III II I M 1 /4" = 1'-0" `_2 HAND DRYER 5._p" `4 � II W3 l v II II I L7 MILLWORK PLUMBING WALL BELOW GLU-LAM ABOVE T-1" 5'-0" 2'-2" T-1" GLU-LAM ABOVE 2T-1" N N 7 8 9 l0 11 2 ENLARGED RESTROOM FLOOR PLAN 6 A602 4 8 A602 A602 O A602 A602 CLERESTORY PLAN @ ENTRANCE 1/8'. = 1'-0" 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 FEB 21 2012 y:51 r&I N UPPER PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN 1/B''= F -a' City File No. PA 261 r m v 0 to (%1 T 03 N w y U m U 0 u') N 0 e— r— c p 0 z Y u 4) Z �1W Fm- d i.LL J 0 � 2 :�N W W = N J N d W O >6 0,Am Of � � m O a N F o lei cN•1 D Z J O] N W O Lu 0 Um am N 2' O ¢ O 1 U �C C M �C m �o W w 2N i�N C`^] c/ / } Z Qr YLo C-4 Z Q N 1 Lu Z o cn Q L.LJ W Q U w ZU CC JCL [ ) p Cid 0 J QJ L` W CZ � Q �J Lu W L Lu W CL CLV 111.0253 Sheet A 102 a O o rnY r Q m a N C1) N 0 to (%1 T 03 N w y U m U 0 u') N 0 e— r— c p 0 z Y u 4) Z �1W Fm- d i.LL J 0 � 2 :�N W W = N J N d W O >6 0,Am Of � � m O a N F o lei cN•1 D Z J O] N W O Lu 0 Um am N 2' O ¢ O 1 U �C C M �C m �o W w 2N i�N C`^] c/ / } Z Qr YLo C-4 Z Q N 1 Lu Z o cn Q L.LJ W Q U w ZU CC JCL [ ) p Cid 0 J QJ L` W CZ � Q �J Lu W L Lu W CL CLV 111.0253 Sheet A 102 GENERAL NOTES 1. PLUMBING VENTS, FURNACE FLUE VENTS AND OTHER MISC. MEP ROOF PENETRATION NOT INDICATED. REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PRECAST STONE CAP - ALIGN JOINTS WITH GRIDLINES AND CENTER LINE 14 BETWEEN GRIDLINES A501 $ 16 COPPER CAP FLASHING 4-2. 6'-4"6,4„ 6,�„ 6'-4- 6,�„ 6,�„ 6,� 6'-6" A501 I � E A501 a iL a ROOF D ,SEE MECH. RAWINGS J v _------------- J � - --- I -_.. __ .--------- COPPER CAP FLASHING v 0 r N c 8 2 ------------------------— ------------ PE - _ A502 A302 D �— -- SLOPE ® SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE SLOPE P. A501 v 'r' _- O 64" V-4" 6'-4" 6'-4" 6'-4" 741/8" ---- -_--------- w _ _ XT Ty d w -- _ _ - n J: - O --- J Q in a I --------------- _ FLASH MEMBRANE ROOF 3 __- __ _ -_ -- - - -_ 12 ! TO GLUE -LAM COLUMNS,--------------- li A501 REFER TO15/A5Q2 A501 A501 -_- - _ - _ -_ _ _ ABOVE ABOVE ABOVE --- - -- -- --- -- -- - -- CRICKET AND STEP FLASHING - _ - _ - --- W N W N a a I =-_ -_- __ O �j I�� I ,�_-__ __ - __ __ _ __ __ -_ __ _ - __ __ - _ __ C N N N ! ___ __ ___ __ - -_ _ _ METAL CHIMNEY CAP 1 12 - - - ---------------- WITH-- A503 MEMBRANE ROOF __ _ _ ASPHALT AND FLASHING BELOW ASPHALT7 A504 = SHINGLES _) 11 SHINGLES -__ -- ----- ---_ --_ ----- - A503-- ---- ---------- ----- ---- --- -- -- - --_ S FIREPLACE FLUE VENTS =_ PREFINISHEDSTEPFLASHINGAND ---------- -----__ _ _ _- MEMBRANE ROOFING COUNTER FLASHING AT BASE OF --_ -- -- -_ AND FLASHING CHIMNEY PENETRATION = _ _ _ _-- - - - --- -------------------------------_..-----------_...------- -----� -- -- - - - I oe __ --- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------ 4 BUILDING BELOW -- __ -- --- --_ --- __--- --_ 0 N D.S. PREFINISHED GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUTS D.S. 3 D.S. PREFINISHED GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUTS D.S. A502 FEB 21 20g 6°7 mn Ciry Clerk Iowa Ciry,imva GLU-LAM BEAM BELOW PRECAST STONE CAP - ALIGN JOINTS WITH GRIDLINES AND CENTER LINE BETWEEN GRIDLINES o (V 7'-45- 13 A501 BLOCKING - SEE STRUCTURAL 2X6 COMPOSITE LUMBER - FASTEN WITH CLIPS BETWEEN GLU-LAM BEAMS, REFER TO 12/A504 AND 13/A504. GLU-LAM BEAM BELOW ALT #1 1. DELETE ASPHALT SHINGLES AND PROVIDE SYNTHETIC SHINGLES. TYP FOR LODGE AND SHELTER BUILDINGS. REFER TO 07311 -SHINGLES. ROOF PLAN 1/9' = 1'-0" City File No. PA 261 00 F a ao Y Q rM: z O w N Y M U 0 N N O r o m z Y C L m z W F d LL Q O M N Jd J N w 4 d � ( b C/) O sN LLI? LL N z N J CD N W Lu Q Y o tQ ;zw U c/r LL M M J 0 M W Of<N /A] � Lul < N v Q z U)YLn CL N Z I -- CM 1 LLI Q Q Z O Cn W W c C) U C) C/3 O C/:) O W06 cr Z W J C) L Lu o z 0 cf) 111.0253 Sheet A 111 r m LuQ cL m � mNe 10 � LL N � O O r cn a w ca N U W Ln KEY NOTES: U o T Qi LIMESTONE VENEER zQ 1x8" TONGUE AND GROOVE SIDING ii 0 A301 5 tt STEP FLASHING5 tt A301 2 COPPER SIDING m t o 17-8" BAY r m Z 12 13 11 4 9 3 11 3 11 11 4 7 13 O CEDAR PLYWOOD < W F a IL W V O T _ �w.� .. .... y EQQEEQ�EQ EQ y EQEQ 1 _.__ _ -_._ rte p+ - 1 6 1/4" 6 1 4" O5 METAL MESH/ CHIMNEY CAP, REFER TO 10/A503 '7I A� 7 f 7I' - - _ Oe STOREFRONT WINDOW VENT 3. 7 --. _ t PRECAST STONE CAP -SLOPE TO DRAIN Om Ow 11 Jm G QFGN m� 2x6 LAMINATE DECKING T > L? O � s v J N W 17 17 1'-5. 1'-51,-5"_- 1„X"CEDAR BATTENS U� Nm - - ---— O SHINGLES, ASPHALT BASE 81D, SYNTHETIC ALT #1. PRE -FINISHED MTL FLASWNG11 jj� 102 t036 _ _. O - IOTA O - O 100A 'Z GLUE LAMINATED COLUMN ; - L �f �F r C6 N S 7/8" 118° 9 1'-9” — li _ _ 3 GLUE LAMINATED BEAM m m J _ to PRE -FINISHED MTL FASCIA O V `SEE ELEVATION AND FLOORPLAN FOR WINDOW LOCATIONS W U 2 4 3 3 12 2 13 1 3 1a POST BASE -SEE STRUCTURAL 15 INSTALL BATTEN AT PLYWOOD OO 4x6 DOWN SPOUT. TIE INTO UNDERGROUND 4 BEHIND COLUMN CENTERED STORM, REFER TO CIVIL DWGS. ¢ o BETWEEN MULLIONS W v a r n 5-112- X 6" GUTTER `J z 1s SHADE STRUCTURE. REFER TO ROOF PLAN AND BATTEN PATTERN ELEVATION WEST ELEVATION 3 EAST ELEVATION 12/Aso4,13/Asoa. O a M 70 M >M J Q m ILEIa W LU CD N LU N FEB 21 2012 r � Q � 0 T Y 5 1 2 y A201 A302 A301 Q PREFINISHED METAL N COUNTER FLASHING 18 13 14 ADHERED MEMBRANE 4 B 13 11 14 40 FLASHING — _ ... i=t6 6 - Toa or oiwgrn - _- 'ln 1 7 l� 1L B 9 B 0 9 B O7 wu 7 ❑ ❑ TA.W. 9 9 �. _ — — — _ _ TAW 0 T - 12 W 1 3 1 3 9 2 V W U °C O 2 NORTH ELEVATION o C/30 J Q m N W p 2 1 A301 A302 Lu W 10 4 17 1 5 11 10 17 1 ` Lu Q 18 r � O � -.. __ .. ..._ ...-.. ._ m_. _....... ... ... -. -.-... �a -... .._..- �.�.�_.-_...__- C ... ._.. _. .. .. .. ._ ._.. _ ... ... ... _... Lu -_ ITW Z X - TflenE� ~ L11 17 1,. 13 r O 1058 1 i 16 6 6 4 9 16 4 6 6 4 16 3 16 2 16 (D2�UTH ELEVATION 1 1' o° 111.0253 City File No. PA 261 Sheet A201 } m F- d 0 D to Y GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR GLU-LAM FRAMING AND N CONNECTIONS. Q N 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DW GS FOR FOOTINGS AND FOUNDATIONS. O U) a ca N U O LO N O T L: m C Q Y c m Z Q C O d � W H LL LL 1 2 Om 0 A301 A314 m 2 Law d ,6 Lu U) A311 ob , s 7 U aCD 00 Q Aso2 . — — — ♦ �/"� i: vJ O LL I Ain 7 m N WINMDOW HHEA I I I L �= 1611--10-12ui T_O. GLU LAM BEAM - 1 1 F F ( 21 2012 17'- 5-114"- - — 12.5 v: 59 PNl Q A 0 C6 Li a , sN LL 315 1 1 3 uiz 1 A502 A31 1 I I a� o •, WINDOW SILL-_ — — — — #TOPOFCMU 12'_ o,; 1 1 I I 1 C T.O. GLU-LAM BEAM 1 1 ------- - ---- ---- ♦ 1 ------------------------------- ----- ------ ---- ---------t---- r 1 l 1 M �" I I I 1 I I ♦- _-� W o 1 I I 1 W"'N 1 I 1 r^h 1 I 1 I 1 I V J Z 1 I 1 I 1 I cn �wuo 1 I I I I 1 N 1 I I T.O. W. 04 1�e 1 1 I T.O. SLAB* 9- 0• ui I I 1 I I I 2" EXTRUDED POLY 1 I Q I I STYRENE (TYP.) Vu j 2 BUILDING SECTION @ ROOM A / ROOM B W Q U - w U 2 A301 ) 2 1 cn A313 A313 O O / ♦ T.O. STEEL h 1 11 10_11.Y w to 1 --1 - - 1 i j D O �- ! T.O.W.� 1- - 1 1 Lu 0 1 1 I Z 1 I J L 1 T.O. SLAB V- 0. 1 I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 I I 1 ♦ / ♦ I -----i Lm BUILDING SECTION @ LOBBY 111.0253 City File No. PA 261 Sheet A301 1$ } m N a d O o Q Y ro GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR GLU-LAM FRAMING AND N cn CONNECTIONS. 0 N 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DWGS FOR FOOTINGS AND FOUNDATIONS. Z In O > v a w N M r m Lr) v o N O c p m Z (D 3 o Y c m Z n w` F a GLU-LAM BLOCKING, REFER TO STRUCTURAL Q T.O. GLU-LAM BEAM ® ® % Ld J w 17'-5-1/4" -.__.__.. ® ® ® 13 o ® ® ® ® ® ® A504 TRELLIS, REFER TO A111 AND Q ® ® ® i 12/A504,13/A504 TOP OF CMU 12'-0" GLU-LAM BEAM `� % ® ® m o^ 101- 011 ® ® T.O. GLU-LAM BEAM Sw 3� oa a s POCKET GLU-LAM BEAM INTO CMU, REFER TOw 4 � ) STRUCTURAL EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB, REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS. co oM J C. w � < N N FEB 21 2012 (n >- uJ Lo N Z N 04 a 2 BUILDING SECTION @ SHADE STRUCTURE1/4 Q 2 Z A312 O 0 c/:) W --, w F- 7 1 1 1 4 WINMDOW HEADER A502 I I I 19- 1-1/2" 1 1 A501 T_.O GLU-LAM BEAM1 - 12 A312 W C 1T- 5-1/4" r 1 ' 2.5 V ' o I 1 3 1 I I A502 V 1 O I WINDOW SILL 12-4-1/2" 1 1 314" PLYWOOD, PAINTED I / 1 I I I J 1 T.O._-STUD WALL 1 T.O. GLU-LAM BEAM 10 0" w cn 1 I I 1 l 1 Z O 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 I 1 w L JJ 1 1 1 to Q 1 1 I Z I I 1 ' 1D vJ 1 I I I 1W T.O. SLAB o0 0-0 r 1 1 1 2" EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION (TYP.) 1 1 I I 1 I I I I 1 BUILDING SECTION @ RESTROOM 111.0253 7 City File No. PA 261 Sheet A302 WALL SECTION 3/4" = I'-0" I 5 A501 SIM WALL SECTION 3/,V'= Y-0" 1 1 I I I I I 1 I 1 7 A501 1 I I I 1 I I I I I 11 I A502 1 I 1 1" PLYWOOD, PAINTED TRACK BY PARTITION MNFR. 5/8" GYP BOARD VINYL BASE WALL SECTION 3/4" = F-0" 2' POLYSTYRENE ALONG PERI DOWN FO WALL SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" FILED FEE 21 2012 •l, 59 0,7 city Clerk 10*2 Qoll lova 10 A501 LAMINATED GLASS a50 (.airy Fie Na PA 261 } WLU > N (') s a ® a 3 � m (D m mD IIL _C O N C40 Q 0� �l MLa W � W O < � ® CIO 0 vo ` ' J c%4 m °}C mW CD N O N O®c,) W i < so i WI b Ne N Q A N W Z O C/3 LLI /W I..L w U °C O o U3 O CO O ca cildW N p W �- U Cl N >m � J Z J> CO 111.0253 > N s a M I[i n N O c Y � c a Z � g un F dL WL Q 0� �l MLa W � W O < � ® CIO 0 vo ` ' J c%4 m °}C mW CD N O N O®c,) W i < so i WI b Ne N Q A N W Z O C/3 LLI /W I..L w U °C O o U3 O CO O ca cildW N p W �- U Cl N >m � J Z J> CO 111.0253 / 1< 0 LLi a J ro W A5(03 3 A501 U) O lNL N ci 1 LLN(� J iy A504 I � ■ ■ A503 I 3 o vS g, /e — —`y I rill W z j�STONE VENEER -HOLD SHORT BEHIND BEAM. CONTINUE VENEER ALL THE {.�. WAY TO DECKING AT SIDES. C cM -- M mo W°u"'CDN O Lu � N } O Q } rn df ' 518" GYP BOARD 2 U5 Y 'n CORNER BEAD - TYP +� N ZQ N HEADER W 2'-9 5/8" C -CHANNEL LINTEL - WELD IN 7 5 718" PLACE AND SET IN MORTAR REB 21 1012 Z AT STONE VENEER O - V cD W DIRECT VENT FIREPLACE- INSTALL PER MNFR W INSTRUCTIONS. VERIFY ALL /Y iv COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL L.L r CERAMIC TILE MEET MNFR RECOMMENDED i CLEARANCES. `J W U N 2" CEMENT BOARD OR 1" O M BOARD PER MNF RECOMMENDATION Q O �J A501 J M SIM I M W ° ° d __- Z 0 Lu Lu _ V) W Q z Cn WALL SECTION AT PARTITION 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION AT FIREPLACE STONE 3X= 1'-G' WALL SECTION AT FIREPLACE COPPER 3/4" = 1'-0" City File No. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet A314 } 00 � o a r (y) JL m Q d m ^` W fj) LL N O o ul 5 a N w03 m M to C) ❑ N O r r r c {D p Z Lu H a` I 0 LLi a J ro W A5(03 3 A501 U) O lNL N ci 1 LLN(� J iy A504 I � ■ ■ A503 I 3 o vS g, /e — —`y I rill W z j�STONE VENEER -HOLD SHORT BEHIND BEAM. CONTINUE VENEER ALL THE {.�. WAY TO DECKING AT SIDES. C cM -- M mo W°u"'CDN O Lu � N } O Q } rn df ' 518" GYP BOARD 2 U5 Y 'n CORNER BEAD - TYP +� N ZQ N HEADER W 2'-9 5/8" C -CHANNEL LINTEL - WELD IN 7 5 718" PLACE AND SET IN MORTAR REB 21 1012 Z AT STONE VENEER O - V cD W DIRECT VENT FIREPLACE- INSTALL PER MNFR W INSTRUCTIONS. VERIFY ALL /Y iv COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL L.L r CERAMIC TILE MEET MNFR RECOMMENDED i CLEARANCES. `J W U N 2" CEMENT BOARD OR 1" O M BOARD PER MNF RECOMMENDATION Q O �J A501 J M SIM I M W ° ° d __- Z 0 Lu Lu _ V) W Q z Cn WALL SECTION AT PARTITION 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" WALL SECTION AT FIREPLACE STONE 3X= 1'-G' WALL SECTION AT FIREPLACE COPPER 3/4" = 1'-0" City File No. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet A314 N Bi BRACING ABOVE DIVIDERS D 30" X 32" FRAMED MIRROR 2-1/2" VINYL BASE PREP] 09 ELEVATIONS 0 N 4 ao C. �� LOBBY SOUTH ELEVATION HALLWAY WALL EXTENDS TO BOTTOM OF GLU-LAM RAFTERS, SPACE BETWEEN RAFTERS OPEN GYP BOARD BULKHEAD Tr R �n O N HANDI INST..-- 1/4" = 1'-0" ""' ' '"'"" `"'"' ' 'XTENDS TO BOTTOM OF GLU-LAM BETWEEN RAFTERS OPEN HEAD C. N tV 4 CD GLU-LAM BEAM R N A. NSER ADA COMPLIANT HAND DRYER GLU-LAM TIMBER LIGHT VALANCE. REFER TO ELEC FOR FIXTURE. 24" x 48"MIRROR B. TISSUE DISPENSER ADA COMPLIANT HAND DRYER RANGE HOOD REFER TO SPEC CONTROL JOINTS AT GYP GYP BD ENCLOSURE AROUND RANGE MICROWAVES - N.I.C. 11 HOOD EXHAUST DUCT TO ABOVE P C. B 30 TRASH BINS AND REFRIGERATOR N.I.0 OVEN CABINET WITH END PANEL GA. STAINLESS STEEL HEAT SHIELD, INTEGRALSTAINLESS 1111. " N in 0 N r � ROOM B EAST ELEVATION Tm" 114!'= 1'-0" GLU-LAM TIMBER LIGHT VALANCE. REFER TO ELECTRIC FOR FIXTURE. 24"x48" MIRROR A510 cc O 4 lV 7 18"X 66" S.S."SOAP WRAP PIPES SPLASH GUARD - COORDINATE DIM. ENSER WITH HAND DRYER RESTROOM 111 ELEVATION / 1/4" = V-9' *REFER TO SHEET A001 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS FEB 21 2012 1� 1411 111 4 18' X 66" S.S. SOAP DISPENSER SPLASH GUARD - ADA COMPLIANT COORDINATE DIM. HAND DRYER WITH HAND DRYER RESTROOM 110 ELEVATION , u ql• C. B 30 TRASH BINS AND REFRIGERATOR N.I.0 OVEN CABINET WITH END PANEL GA. STAINLESS STEEL HEAT SHIELD, INTEGRALSTAINLESS 1111. " N in 0 N r � ROOM B EAST ELEVATION Tm" 114!'= 1'-0" GLU-LAM TIMBER LIGHT VALANCE. REFER TO ELECTRIC FOR FIXTURE. 24"x48" MIRROR A510 cc O 4 lV 7 18"X 66" S.S."SOAP WRAP PIPES SPLASH GUARD - COORDINATE DIM. ENSER WITH HAND DRYER RESTROOM 111 ELEVATION / 1/4" = V-9' *REFER TO SHEET A001 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS FEB 21 2012 1� 1411 111 4 18' X 66" S.S. SOAP DISPENSER SPLASH GUARD - ADA COMPLIANT COORDINATE DIM. HAND DRYER WITH HAND DRYER RESTROOM 110 ELEVATION / 1/4!" = 1' -0 -- *REFER TO SHEET A001 FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS 8 A510 4 co O N (V Ilk A. 4" VINYL BASE S.S. WORK COUNTER WITH UNDERSHELF KITCHEN ELEVATIONS City File No. PA 261 f11 a Iq ❑ Q Y No 9 W N LL L N CJi 04O z 1n 0 a \ w m N Y ui M v ❑ N O c o m Z g w 12 a - < i O m" Lu cn Q U) O s LL LL ry Z J CoN w d, G s w L; � O � U a rn g ='m z 0 wM U I� LL M >�' J N m� Li) L�nl /A] C Lu N v / Z 0 U) >T Ln_ Y LO CL Z " Q N Q _ ui Z O C/:) Q W C) U m C) 0 V\ 0 Vim♦ ■/ 0 � W z ozS O j E— W W J Q W cy _O Q:�Lu ui Z z C/:) 111.0253 Sheet A421 GYP BULKHEAD CEDAR BATTEN BUTT JOINT AT PLYWOOD SID CEDAR PLYWOO LAMINATED GLASS ELEVATION 1 /4" = 1'-0" 8 718" 7 �-4 1'-0 112" LAMINATED GLASS ELEVATION STONE VENEER CORRIDOR 101 NORTH ELEVATION 114' = 1' -G- ID SURFACI 1 TRIM ,IAI i uuvu,wii rvroLIMo T^or.r &A r0v 1Ii, Au FOLLOW MULLION PATTERN (TYP) v r� ROOM A/ROOM B WEST ELEVATION 114. = 1'-0" CORRIDOR 101 SOUTH ELEVATION 1 /4" = 1'-0" ROOM A/ROOM B EAST ELEVATION 114, = 1 '-0' ....,...... PARTITION ENCLOSURE I "FILEl.s" FEB 21 2012 9:59 PM 5 F City CI rk .Q,,va Chy, Iowa PLYWOOD TYPE A WITH BUTT JOINTS AND SEALANT 1/2" VINYL BASE ROOM A/ROOM B NORTH ELEVATION 114' = 1 '-0" City File No. PA 261 } ao CV a a 04 ❑ Q ca m U. c- 04 04 f/) 04O z Ln O65 r w N O Y ui M m LO v ❑ N O o z Y C z g W H d T Q O mm mg� LL W d J Nw a o� U Qr�c rm Q VJ O sN O LL � � N Z ca R] N W o 2 :1v w s0 0O om U d rn C o �� Q A W M CL MNJ in O W Lu"N 4 N U) } 0 3 zm Lh_ C,5Y Ln ^ N Q I..V N W Z O C/3 Lij W F- cr Q< Lu U °C O 0 C13 O C/3 O w Z 06 O H Q L` r1: J Lu Q _0 Lij Lu Z V J 111.0253 Sheet A422 16 DETAIL— ANCHOR BOLT - SEE STRUCTURAL TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE ON SILL SEAL 8" CMU CURB - GROUT FULL CONCEALED TAP CONS PROVIDE HOLES FOR DRAINAGE AT STARTER STRIP Q DETAIL 1-1/2'= F-0" TREATED 2X, ;UT TO SLOPE ,'ONTINUOUS COPPER :OUNTER FLASHING SEALANT iSS TUBE -SEE STRUCTURAL EXPANSION JOINT WITH SEALANT DETAIL 1-1/2" = 1'-0" CAST STONE CAF THROUGH WALL EPDM FLASHINC OVER MTL FLASHING DRIP EDGE - BOTH SIDES S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP EDGE Wtf1 DETAIL 1-1/2.= I.-0., 1x2 CEDAR TRIM BO' DETAIL / 1-1/2"=1'-0" LEAVE OPEN BETWEEN VERTICAL FURRING STRIPS FOR DRAINAGE SEAL TERMINATION BAR AT TOP PRE -FINISHED COUNTER FLASHING " ROOF BOARD FASTEN PER MNFR. N HOT AIR WELD CONTINUOUS MEMBRANE RC2 ROOF DETAIL PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A ON VAPOR BARRIER 2x6 FRAMING R19 BATT INSULATION 1" INSULATED SHEETING 1 X2 CEDAR TRIM I—� SEALANT AND BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES SOUTH STOREFONT HEAD 1-1/2"= 1'-0' SEALANT SOAP STONE SILL MELAMINE 5!8" LAMINATED TRIM VAPOR BARRIER PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A 1" RIGID INSUL. WITH 1" WD BLKG AT 24" OC 314" PLYWOOD 2�" VINYL BASE F1 1X2 CEDAR TRIM - BOTH SIDES FLASHING RC2 CONTINUOUS ADHERED MEMBRANE ' TREATED PLYWOOD HSS TUBE - SEE STRUCTURAL WRAP MEMBRANE DOWN FASCIA PRE -FINISHED METAL COPING 20 GA. BREAK METAL BATT INSULATION FILL TREATED 2x10 BLOCKING 20 GA. BREAK METAL 1" RIGID INSULATION DRIP EDGE MTL Z CHANNEL ALUMINUM ANGLE - CAULK SOFFIT EDGE CEMENT BOARD SOFFIT 8 DETAIL 1-1 /2" = 1'-9' 1x2 CEDAR TRIM SEALANT AND BACKER ROD -BOTH SIDES SEALANT GLU-LAM BEAM BEYOND DETAIL 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" SEALANT AND BACKER ROD - BOTH SIDES EPDM THROUGH WALL FLASHING CAST STONE CAP 10" WINDOWSILL M BACKER ROD AND SEALANT - BOTH SIDES MTL FLASHING WINDOWILL +1 , -1/2 TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE ON SILL SEAL PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A WITH BATTEN STRIP GROUT FULL MTL FLASHING EXPANSION JOINT WITH SEALANT i 111 111-1 till 11 d c' SOUTH STOREFRONT SILL 1-1 /2" = V-0" DRIP EDGE S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP RAKE BACK MORTAR JOINT AND CAULK MORTAR NET THROUGH WALL EPDM FLASHING GROUT FULL WEEP S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP EXPANSION JOINT WITH SEALANT SEALANT AT FRAME PERIMETER 6vZ" SOLID SURFACE SILL 2x6 BLOCKING WOOD TRIM BULKHEAD BEYOND - LINE UP TOP EDGE WITH TOP DF STONE W2 DETAIL @ STONE WALL 1-1/2"= 1'-0' G G 4 d. a 4 DETAIL @ STONE WALL BASE 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" W2 J19.10111211141 z"EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE }"EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE a DETAIL 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" GLU-LAM BEYOND - LEAVE OPEN ABOVE WALL CONTINUE GYP BOARD TO BOTTOM OF GLU-LAM WOOD SHIM AT GLU-LAM BEAMS CASING BEAD AT TOP EDGE WALL DETAIL BTWN CLERESTORY WINDOW 1-1/2"= 1'-0" Z" PLYWOOD - A - BOTH SIDES ;EE STRUCTURAL FEB 21 2012 v' ST ell 2 DETAIL @ RESTROOM WALL J'PLYWOOD - SEE STRUCTURAL CERAMIC TILE OVER CEMENT BOARD - SEE INT. ELEV FOR LOCATION 1" RIGID INSULATION WITH 1" WOOD BLOCKING AT 24" OC }" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FF - 1] 1 POLYSTY'R UDED NER(TYP) STAINLESS STEEL ANCHOR CAST STONE CAP 10" THROUGH WALL EPDM FLASHING OVER MTL FLASHING PRE-FISHED m COUNTER COUNTER FLASHING v SEAL TERMINATION BAR AT TOP DRIP EDGE - BOTH SIDES 2" RIGID INSULATION WITH GALV. METAL Z FURRING S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP EDGE - BOTH SIDES j" TREATED PLYWOOD FASTEN PER MNFR RAKE BACK MORTAR JOINT AND CAULK HOTAIRWELD R02 STONE VENEER CONTINUE 24' RIGID INSULATION DETAIL 1-1/2" = 1'-0" CAST STONE CAF THROUGH WALL EPDM FLASHINC OVER MTL FLASHING DRIP EDGE - BOTH SIDES S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP EDGE Wtf1 DETAIL 1-1/2.= I.-0., 1x2 CEDAR TRIM BO' DETAIL / 1-1/2"=1'-0" LEAVE OPEN BETWEEN VERTICAL FURRING STRIPS FOR DRAINAGE SEAL TERMINATION BAR AT TOP PRE -FINISHED COUNTER FLASHING " ROOF BOARD FASTEN PER MNFR. N HOT AIR WELD CONTINUOUS MEMBRANE RC2 ROOF DETAIL PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A ON VAPOR BARRIER 2x6 FRAMING R19 BATT INSULATION 1" INSULATED SHEETING 1 X2 CEDAR TRIM I—� SEALANT AND BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES SOUTH STOREFONT HEAD 1-1/2"= 1'-0' SEALANT SOAP STONE SILL MELAMINE 5!8" LAMINATED TRIM VAPOR BARRIER PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A 1" RIGID INSUL. WITH 1" WD BLKG AT 24" OC 314" PLYWOOD 2�" VINYL BASE F1 1X2 CEDAR TRIM - BOTH SIDES FLASHING RC2 CONTINUOUS ADHERED MEMBRANE ' TREATED PLYWOOD HSS TUBE - SEE STRUCTURAL WRAP MEMBRANE DOWN FASCIA PRE -FINISHED METAL COPING 20 GA. BREAK METAL BATT INSULATION FILL TREATED 2x10 BLOCKING 20 GA. BREAK METAL 1" RIGID INSULATION DRIP EDGE MTL Z CHANNEL ALUMINUM ANGLE - CAULK SOFFIT EDGE CEMENT BOARD SOFFIT 8 DETAIL 1-1 /2" = 1'-9' 1x2 CEDAR TRIM SEALANT AND BACKER ROD -BOTH SIDES SEALANT GLU-LAM BEAM BEYOND DETAIL 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" SEALANT AND BACKER ROD - BOTH SIDES EPDM THROUGH WALL FLASHING CAST STONE CAP 10" WINDOWSILL M BACKER ROD AND SEALANT - BOTH SIDES MTL FLASHING WINDOWILL +1 , -1/2 TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE ON SILL SEAL PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A WITH BATTEN STRIP GROUT FULL MTL FLASHING EXPANSION JOINT WITH SEALANT i 111 111-1 till 11 d c' SOUTH STOREFRONT SILL 1-1 /2" = V-0" DRIP EDGE S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP RAKE BACK MORTAR JOINT AND CAULK MORTAR NET THROUGH WALL EPDM FLASHING GROUT FULL WEEP S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP EXPANSION JOINT WITH SEALANT SEALANT AT FRAME PERIMETER 6vZ" SOLID SURFACE SILL 2x6 BLOCKING WOOD TRIM BULKHEAD BEYOND - LINE UP TOP EDGE WITH TOP DF STONE W2 DETAIL @ STONE WALL 1-1/2"= 1'-0' G G 4 d. a 4 DETAIL @ STONE WALL BASE 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" W2 J19.10111211141 z"EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE }"EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE a DETAIL 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" GLU-LAM BEYOND - LEAVE OPEN ABOVE WALL CONTINUE GYP BOARD TO BOTTOM OF GLU-LAM WOOD SHIM AT GLU-LAM BEAMS CASING BEAD AT TOP EDGE WALL DETAIL BTWN CLERESTORY WINDOW 1-1/2"= 1'-0" Z" PLYWOOD - A - BOTH SIDES ;EE STRUCTURAL FEB 21 2012 v' ST ell 2 DETAIL @ RESTROOM WALL J'PLYWOOD - SEE STRUCTURAL CERAMIC TILE OVER CEMENT BOARD - SEE INT. ELEV FOR LOCATION 1" RIGID INSULATION WITH 1" WOOD BLOCKING AT 24" OC }" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE FF - 1] 1 POLYSTY'R UDED NER(TYP) DETAIL @ WALL BASE 1-1 /2' = 1'-0" eo W3 ANCHOR BOLT - SEE STRUCTURAL TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE ON SILL SEAL 6" DRAINAGE AND VENTILATION MAT AT BOTTOM PERIMETER BETWEEN FURRING STRIPS WEEP SCREED FLASHING GROUT FULL City File No. PA 261 7LU a O Q Y U d Qi m LL L N U) O O pp a w a N U O U) N c o m Z . 'o M w a` li 0 0� 0� N a S' o NNcd C LL m � N z J `2 m N a w em 6 cp `/cn N O ati Wm U M>�' m S W ��N C/A' N �./ / cnr i _ c6zLo c6 Y Lo N Q N W cc Q Z O Cn W ui m m< w U O o U, om C45 Q w Lu `m J oC Q �z^ Q V 111.0253 Sheet A501 4Q v Q DETAIL @ WALL BASE 1-1 /2' = 1'-0" eo W3 ANCHOR BOLT - SEE STRUCTURAL TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE ON SILL SEAL 6" DRAINAGE AND VENTILATION MAT AT BOTTOM PERIMETER BETWEEN FURRING STRIPS WEEP SCREED FLASHING GROUT FULL City File No. PA 261 7LU a O Q Y U d Qi m LL L N U) O O pp a w a N U O U) N c o m Z . 'o M w a` li 0 0� 0� N a S' o NNcd C LL m � N z J `2 m N a w em 6 cp `/cn N O ati Wm U M>�' m S W ��N C/A' N �./ / cnr i _ c6zLo c6 Y Lo N Q N W cc Q Z O Cn W ui m m< w U O o U, om C45 Q w Lu `m J oC Q �z^ Q V 111.0253 Sheet A501 GLULAM COLUMN SEALANT STAINLESS STEEL CLAMP PER MNFR. METAL RAIN HOOD FLASHING PER MNFR - HOT AIR WELD DETAIL AT COLUMN AIR BARRIER BUTYL AT FASTENER PENETRATIONS 1X WOOD FURRING STRIP TYPICAL FURRING DETAL 1 1/2" = V-0" OVER 2" COPPER END CAP - FASTEN C -CLIP AND ATTACH END CAP OVER DETAIL 1-1 /2" = l' -G' COPPER SIDING 1/2" PLYWOOD OVER 2x6 FRAMING COPPER END CAP - FASTEN C -CLIP AND ATTACH END CAP OVER FOAM CLOSURE -TYP \ ?PLYWOOD COPPER SIDING FOAM CLOSURE COPPER J-CHANEL SEALANT AND BACKERROD SUB -FLASHING AT INSIDE CORNER CONDITION DETAIL 1-1 /2" = V -D' 2" W1 SEALANT AND BACKER ANCHOR BOLT SEE ROD - BOTH SIDES W6 FLASHING WITH DRIP EDGE SEAL TERMINATION STRUCTURAL BAR AT TOP WINDOWSILL + 12'-44" TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE PRE -FINISHED COUNTER FLASHING ' TREATED PLYWOOD WITH SILL SEAL }" RIGID INSULATION FASTEN PER MNFR. HOT AIR WELD ANCHOR STARTER STRIP CONTINUOUS MEMBRANE E XPANDED POLYSTYRENE RC2 WOOD BLOCKING 24" OC CLOSE VOID WITH EXPANDED FOAM INSULATION " PLATE - SEE STRUCTURAL BATT INSULATION PROVIDE 2X WOOD HEADER TO SUPPORT WINDOW 1" RIGID INSULATION WITH Z FURRING AT 24" O.C. CEMENT BOARD SOFFIT PRE -FINISHED ALUMINUM ANGLE, VW x ?" D x' - CAULK AT SOFFIT EDGE DETAIL DETAIL 1-1/2"= I'-0" RC3 SEALANT AT WINDOW PERIMETER SOLID SURFACE SILL SEE INT. ELEV AND FINISH SCHEDULE 1-1 /2" = V-0" BACKER ROD AND SEALANT - BOTH SIDES COPPER FLASHING WITH DRIP EDGE AND COPPER COUNTER FLASHING SEALANT DETAIL 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" ANCHOR BOLT - SEE STRUCTURAL TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE ON SILL SEAL ANCHOR STARTER CLIP 4 a In DETAIL AT WALL BASE 1-1/2"= F -Y' DE CONTINUOUS Z BARRIER - SEAL TO KITH ALUMINUM TAPE :ING NT AND BACKER BOTH SIDES )FINER BEAD EALANT 'PER CAP FLASHING H HEMMED EDGE INSTALL ROW OF SHINGLES OVER TOP FLASHING PRE -FINISHED METAL FLASHING OVER SHINGLE EDGE PRE -FINISHED METAL FLASHING 1X TREATED WOOD FASCIA GLULAM BEAM TRIM GLU-LAM DETAIL 1-1/2"= V-0" DETAIL 1-1/2"= V-0" W3 LAP AIR BARRIER OVER FLASHING THROUGH WALL COPPER FLASHING W1 DRIP EDGE AND CONTINUOUS COPPER COUNTER FLASHING SEALANT DETAIL 1-1 /2" = V-0" SUSPENDED CEILING T-8" RCI jPREFNDPERRY STARTER WOOD FASCIA NED METAL FLASHING GUTTER GLU-LAM BEAM 6" 2'_9 112" 2' -1Q" DETAIL 1-1/2"= F-9, FEB 21 2012 Y: ST PNJ DETAIL AT TOP OF WALL DETAIL - WALL BASE 1-1/2" = V -C' DETAIL - WALL BASE 1-1/2" = 1'-0" J"x8" CEDAR TRIM - TYP AT BASE 1" RIGID INSULATION WITH 1" WOOD BLOCKING AT 24" OC 4" VINYL BASE 1/2" EXTRUDED F1 POLYSTYRENE THERMAL BREAK D a a a a City File No. PA 261 } m N a 0 ❑ Y L L N CD O N. O to V5 w N tr � ci M L W In v ❑ N O Ep 0 Z Y c c mZ m 'S m W IT iL ILL 4 J Lu �'sD d O',6 C%) o ¢ N N LL z J fO N Lu d� w u e� to ❑M `/ d cv O r N L m Q I� W M U ^c^ M >m J C m wLLI 04 /A, ❑ N v ) r Z O cp m 7-rn YLn N Z 0. a N 1 Lu Q z O C/:) Lu w �— wU or o M O 0co Q w w ` ) J /% Ir <Lu �`^ v J 111.10253 Sheet A502 ANCHOR BOLT SEE W6 STRUCTURAL W4 TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE WITH SILL SEAL }" RIGID INSULATION W3 1" RIGID INSULATION WITH 1" ANCHOR STARTER STRIP E XPANDED POLYSTYRENE WOOD BLOCKING 24" OC " EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE 8" CMU CURB - GROUT FULL THERMAL BREAK ANCHOR BOLT - ` }" EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE SEE STRUCTURAL WOOD STARTER STRIP - WRAP COPPER UP TO SEAM EXPANSION JOINT WITH SEALANT THERMAL BREAK TREATED WOOD SILL PLATE WITH SILL SEAL }" EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (TYP) 6" DRAINAGE AND VENTILATION a a 1 a MAT AT BOTTOM PERIMETER a BETWEEN FURRING STRIPS a WEEP SCREED FLASHING g" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE - <1 TrHERMALBREAK i, a D a a a a 4 n a zi a DETAIL - WALL BASE 1-1/2" = V -C' DETAIL - WALL BASE 1-1/2" = 1'-0" J"x8" CEDAR TRIM - TYP AT BASE 1" RIGID INSULATION WITH 1" WOOD BLOCKING AT 24" OC 4" VINYL BASE 1/2" EXTRUDED F1 POLYSTYRENE THERMAL BREAK D a a a a City File No. PA 261 } m N a 0 ❑ Y L L N CD O N. O to V5 w N tr � ci M L W In v ❑ N O Ep 0 Z Y c c mZ m 'S m W IT iL ILL 4 J Lu �'sD d O',6 C%) o ¢ N N LL z J fO N Lu d� w u e� to ❑M `/ d cv O r N L m Q I� W M U ^c^ M >m J C m wLLI 04 /A, ❑ N v ) r Z O cp m 7-rn YLn N Z 0. a N 1 Lu Q z O C/:) Lu w �— wU or o M O 0co Q w w ` ) J /% Ir <Lu �`^ v J 111.10253 Sheet A502 PARTITION GLASS DTL 1-1/Z1=11-91 ao q STRUCTURAL SEALANT kES LAMINATED GLASS SET IN STRUCTURAL SEALANT LIGHT GAGE METAL ANGLES - FASTEN GYPBOARD THREADED RODS -CONTINUE THROUGH TUBE STEEL - PRE -PUNCHED HOLES AT TOP AND BOTTOM BY STEEL SUPPLIER HSS TUBE -SEE STRUCTURAL BLOCKING LIGHT GAGE MTL ANGLE - FASTEN GYP BOARD CORNER BEAD AT GYP BOARD CORNERS - TYP ALUM. TRACK BY OPERABLE DOOR SUPPLIER MOVABLE PARTITION - SEE SPEC MOVABLE PARTITION BEAM DTL 1-1 /2" = l'-0" u MEMBRANE LAMINATED METAL FLASHING - HEAT WELDED 2" RECOVERY BOARD ON T" TREATED PLYWOOD CONTINUE MEMBRANE DOWN DETAIL AT ROOF 1-1 /2' = 1'-0" FASTEN PER MNFR MEMBRANE FLASHING - HEAT WELD 3/4" TREATED PLYWOOD 2" RECOVERY BOARD - SLOPE PER FT TO DRAIN(TYP) MEMBRANE LAMINATED METAL FLASHING - HEAT WELDED SUPPORT ANGLES AT TOP AND BOTTOM CUSTOM FABRICATED METAL CHIMNEY CAP MTL SCREEN BETWEEN SUPPORTS TO ALLOW AIR FLOW FIREPLACE DIRECT VENT LOW PROFILE VERTICAL TERMINATION CAP - INSTALL WEATHER TIGHT PER MNFR RECOMMENDAIONS. MEMBRANE FLASHING HEAT WELD }" RECOVERY BOARD - SLOPE J" PER FOOT } TREATED PLYWOOD MEMBRANE LAMINATED METAL FLASHING CONTINUE MEMBRANE OVER BLOCKING DETAIL - FIREPLACE VENT 1-1/2'= 1'-0" SELF ADHEARING EPDM FLASHING EPDM FLASHING - FASTEN ANGLE - SEE STRUCTURAL WEEP S.S. FLASHING WITH DRIP COUNTER FLASHING STEP FLASHING ENCLOSE AT ROOF PENETRATION AND INSULATE RC1 DETAIL - STONE AT ROOF SOAP STONE SILL v M PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A - BUTT JOINTS AND SEAL MELAMINE LAMINATED TRIM AT REVEALS N a 4 4 4 CONTINUE 2X8 THROUGH ROOF - SEE STRUCTURAL AIR BARRIER - LAP OVER COUNTER FLASHING METAL FLASHING WITH DRIP EDGE, SLOPE TO DRAIN " PL E 1/2" PLYWOOD 2X8 FRAMING CONTINUE STONE VENEER TO DECKING AT ENDS DETAIL - COPPER @ ROOF 1-1/2„ = V-0„ PLAN DETAIL - STONE AT FIREPLACE FIREPLACE UNIT / 1-1 /2' = 1'-0" SEALANT CERAMIC TILE FIREPLACE COPPER J -CHANNEL D L 4 d 4 n DETAIL - FIREPLACE HEARTH 1-1/2'= 1'-0" PLAN DETAIL - COPPER AT FIREPLACE 1-1 /2' = 1'-0" SELF ADHERING MEMBRANE MEMBRANE FLASHING SLOPE 1/8" PER FT TO DRAIN }" RECOVERY BOARD ON J" TREATED PLYWOOD MEMBRANE LAMINATED METAL FLASHING - HEAT WELDED DETAIL @ COPPER CHIMNEY ROOF EDGE 1-1/2"= l'-0" PLAN DETAIL @ COPPER AND TBG 1-1/2 = I' -U' SEALANT AND BACKER//j ROD - BOTH SIDES COPPER J -CHANNEL SUB - FLASHING AT INSIDE CORNERS FOAM CLOSURE W7 FEB 21 2012 CONTINUOUS 1" RIGID INSULATION AT BUILDING ENVELOPE STOREFRONT WIND. JAMB @ COPPER WALL 1-1 /2" = V-9' CLIP ON TRIM SO AS T CONCEAL FASTNER COPPER CORNER TRI FOAM CLOSUR COPPER WALL CORNER 1-1/2" = 1'-0" City File No. PA 261 } OD M E O o Lr) Y Q �Xm V, z 04 O 04 O r N w U v Y � r ciM ccLO U ❑ N O T c C m 73 pZ �' Z Y Q c Lu F S a m LL Q O L =N J N WU d L � Q O ¢ N N N LL N z J N co � N W W go U� O a s 0 wM U Er C� C M oM J Q m W Lu N N /^, v I r Q Zoe Ui Y Lo N Z ,' a N 1 W z O c �\ �. u Lu 1= U - L/ Lu U L O 0 C/3 O Cn 0m 06 Q W 1 W 0 J w Lu �z 1 Q C C/3 111.0253 Sheet A503 m a a O o Q iC RC1 PRE -FINISHED STYLE D ROOF EDGE FLASHING co LL PRE -FINISHED NU) MTL FLASHING .- 1X TREATED WOOD BLOCKING N LOWER T' FROM% Z TOP OF GLU-LAM —'� knO U a w N Y 0 0 a y U 04 N O 6" DRAINAGE AND VENTILATION }" PLYWOOD -SEE STRUCTURAL 2X6 COMPOSITE MAT BETWEEN FURRING STRIPS o SEALANT m Z FRAMING FLASHING WITH DRIP EDGE Y c m z SOLID SURFACE SILL GALVASIMPSNIZED N - WRAP MEMBRANE OVER ROOF BOARD WOOD TRIM g w FT a GALVA SEAL TERMINATION BAR AT TOP FUR OUT WITH r GYP BOARD Q PRE -FINISHED COUNTER GLU-LAM BEAM FLASHINGLIMESTONE WALL BEYOND Q Lag � N SEALANT AND BACKER —nl " TREATED PLYWOOD ROD - BOTH SIDES is U) 1" RIGID INSULATION U o FASTEN ROOF MEMBRAND PER MNFR. ROOF DETAIL AT SHADE STRUCTURE HOT AIR WELD cJ///''J��� 12 t-1/2"=1'-0" - O rnN CONTINUOUS MEMBRANE r n� Z n� RC1 ADJUST PLACEMENT OF MULLIONS Lu WITH GLU-LAM BEAM _ W s� F N ROOF DETAIL STOREFRONT JAMB DETAIL @ GLU-LAM s o a� oM IK:E 1X2 CEDAR TRIM PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A WOOD TRIM W3 TYPE A PLYWOOD p M MO M -_ CD t7i,} N N Zc A = NWLo N FEB 21 2012 � N Q 4,G5 rro 1 W3 Ilk TYPE A PLYWOOD GLU-LAM COLUMN 1 1 DETAIL 1x1 CEDAR TRIM 1_1/2 = 1'-0" GLU-LAM BEAM W NOT USED if TEMPERED GLASS - WALL DETAIL @GLU-LAM Z STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL SEALANT W3 SEALANT I EXPANSION JOINT 3 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" O HEADER - SEE STRUCTURAL CEDAR BATTEN - SEE V J ELEVATION FOR LOCATIONS PLYWOOD SIDING TYPE A Lu W3 Lu 6" DRAINAGE AND VENTILATION MAT 1 Ila" O . BETWEEN FURRING STRIPS m w W PREFINISHED MTL FLASHING O U - Lu w U _ c DIVIDER DETAIL 0 CEDAR TRIM PRE -FINISHED ALUMINUM CHANNEL 003 PLYWOOD SIDING O r ^ ALUMINUM ANGLE - CAULK SOFFIT EDGE TYPE A WITH BATTONS CAST STONE CAP BELOW O V J CEMENT BOARD SOFFIT -SEE INT. ELEVATION CROSS BRACING - SEE STRUCTURAL" PLYWOOD - SEE W3 J STRUCTURAL �y1 SOLID SURFACE NOT USED L.LI w5 1' 0" 2x6 COMPOSITE WOOD 1 DETAIL AT SOFFIT SILL BELOW 2 s/a„ = t -0„ w w 6 PLAN DETAIL AT CORNER � 1' 0" 1-1 /2° = t' -0U' CEDAR SIDING Q WOOD TRIM TYPE A PLYWOOD 4" J < �■ Q z W9 W Lu Lu W3 Q SEALANT SEALANT 1 \ , r � i MITER SIDING SECURE WITH BRACKET TYPE A PLYWOOD CORNERS- TYP GLU-LAM BEAM W3 WOOD TRIM W3 CEDAR SIDING &3OT USED ROOF DETAIL AT SHADE STRUCTURE PLAN DETAIL AT SIDING TRANSITION (K__)fPLAN,?D1TAIL AT SIDING TRANSITION ,-1/2"=t'o" 1-t/2"=r-0" t -t/2"= 111.0253 City File No. PA 261 Sheet A504 Y m C) H d r LO Q r2 m � S.S. ANGLE - FASTEN TO HM FRAME m TYPE A PLYWOOD - FASTEN TO S.S. N `ANGLE AND UNDER COUNTER C SPLIT SYSTEM - SEE MECHANICAL p in 1-J-- X 1 a" X e" > m N SUPPORT ANGLE AT UJ — TOP AND SIDES m ❑ LOO N SEE SCHEDULE FOR 1X2 WOOD LOUVERS DOOR TYPE r SEE PLAN FOR WALL TYPE Y c m Z 2 W N d LL KITCHEN WALL PANEL DTL 1 -1/2"=r -0"O 0 0 1X CEDAR TRIM o OPEN JOISTS CEDAR PLYWOOD TYPE A V r i 14" x 1-4" ALUMINUM CHANNEL Q EDGE PROTECTION (%J O ¢ N ACT CEILING O ,N., LL 1 N m� W� SEALANT - BOTH SIDES AT FRAME o G GYP BOARD CEILING PREP ROOM 3� oil ❑ M F FL Cv 108 1 LOUVER AT SPLIT SYSTEM > N 3Lu 3 L DETAIL @ PREP CEILING — o M W �< N L11 Q O SEALANT AND BACKING ROD 314" 314 " = Z 1 2Q12 IX CEDARTRIM ♦� r O c Y:Sf vM STONE VENEER BELOW Q Z - rn 6 �r5 T Y i i CEDAR PLYWOOD TYPE A y Z N "a PLYWOOD - FLUSH WITH GYP BOARD N " GYP BOARD" ' CONTROL JOINT STAINLESS STEEL PLATE - ui INSERT EDGE AT EXPANSION JOINT. ADHERE TO WALL 2X8 BEAM a M z S.S AT EXPANSION JOINT DTL 4v/„ O HOLD .11 YP DETAIL AT INTERIOR BEAM cn BOARD END - Z1-1 /2” = 1 -0" FINISH WITH 5/8" ' W CORNER BEAD W SEALANT c INTEGRAL STAINLESS CERAMIC TILE. CONTINUE STEEL BACKSPLASH PLAN DETAIL @ GYP BULKHEAD / STONE BEHIND COUNTERTOP U 1'-0" MIRROR - SET IN SEALANT w IU CONTINUE CONTERTOP THROUGH AT PASSTHROUGH DOOR INTEGRAL 4"SOLID SURFACE BACK O SPLASH STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOP AND SUPPORT LEGS AM ON 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD SOLID SURFACE Q AM EDGE AND 1/X BLOCKING SCRIBE TO WALL COUNTERTOP AND EDGE W/ TREATED PLYWOOD BACKING O X 1-? X j STEEL SUPPORT O VGLE, SUPPORT WITH CLEAT AT WALL EACH SIDE EASE FRONT EDGE OF COUNTERTOP J MATCH PLYWOOD LAYER ORIENTATION W \ eN J N CONTINUOUS. 8 J W 2x4 W/ 3} X 1 j" X j L g SUPPORT Q Q 1X CLEAT O CLEAT j EACH SIDE� O O fr A510 ? TREATED 2x2 CLEATW L PROVIDE ` N X PIPE WRAP Z — v N MAINTAIN ADA ' c CLEARANCES 1'-9 314" 11" m REST! KITCHEN COUNTERTOP PREP COUNTERTOP RESTROOM COUNTERTOP 1 111.0253 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" 1-1 /2" 1'-0' City File No. PA 261 Sheet A510 r m a a � o Q Y DOOR SCHEDULE N Cly AS SCHEDULED C AS SCHEDULED AS SCHEDULED 2" AS SCHEDULED 2" N O � �N N T wca N m w r m In w w o v o N J J w O O 0 r Lu w w tOn u0i uvi o m rn z Q Q Q Y t Z Lu a M D1 D2 D3 F1 Q FLUSH PANEL FULL LITE HALF LITE HM FRAME O 0� L4a a� DOOR AND FRAME TYPES > a o,6 1 114" = 1'-0„ V < y m Q (%J O ¢ N o 7 w m LL N A501 Z m ih 1'-10" W v �= ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE - 4 w U m a m z"VN 3 O gN Qd "' A60.i FEB 21 2012 a v Y: 51 rev — 1'-7112" 1'-11" V-11" l'-71/2" A602 C ci— J NO m M � N a >_ O7 Q �> Z 4 N 6 �Yu� ao ap A602 N Z n Q N 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - W — O Z ,D 1D o rn Asm Asci — V OPERABLE VENTING UNIT WITH SCREEN OPERABLE VENTING UNIT WITH SCREEN 88'-1 1/4" W -- W 2 A503 r , v Lu r w U 0 14 m �./ Adoz W TZ LL F L-JHUHCUi') C/3 --- o cn 3'-7 3/8" 3'-73/8A" 3'-7 3I8" 3'-7 318" 3'-7 318" 3'-7 318" 3'-7 318" 2'4" 6'-2" 3'-0" 3'-0' 6'-2' 2'4" 3'-7 318" 3'-7 3/8" 3'-7 3/8" 3'-7 318" 3'-7 3/8" 3'-7 318" 3'-7 318" N 9 O 9 w O 1'-2 1/2" 1'-1 7/8" 1'-1 7/8' Asoi 1'-1 7I8" 6 1'-1 7!8" 1'-1 718" Asci 1'-1 7/8" 1'-0 1/8" 1 10 10 10 10 W L' Asci 10'-0 518" Am SIM Aso2 SIM Asoz SIM REMOVABLE MULLION W SIM iv Q 6'-11 3/4" 2'-0 314" 14'x" 18'-6" cc OC o � A5w 9 g 4 W Z A602 A602 AbV2 r [u 14 v J AbD2 13 pp p� p� A5112 p� A602 p) W 3 2 A602 A602 5 , N A602 A602 A602 3'-7 318" l'-1 7/8" Y-7 3/8" 11 718" EQ Eq 6'-0" T-2" 6'-2" 9 A501 O O O 1'-10" 1'-10" 1'-10" O 1'-10" 1'-10" 1'-10" 1 V-10" V-10" C�AWINDOW TYPES 111.0253 " = 1'-0" City File No. PA 261 Sheet A601 ROOM SIZE DOOR FRAME DETAILS HRDWR NUM NUM NOTES NAME yy H MAT ELEV FINISH MAT ELEV FINISH HEAD JAMB SILL GROUP 10DA VESTIBULE 6'-0"PR 8'-0" ALUM D2 PREFIN ALUM 1 PREFIN - - 10/A6D2 100A 1A 1008 VESTIBULE 6'-0" PR 8'-0" ALUM D2 PREFIN ALUM 2 PREFIN - - - 1006 2 101A CORRIDOR 3'-0" 8'-0" ALUM D2 PREFIN ALUM 7 PREFINII/A602 - - 101A 16 1016 CORRIDOR 6'-0" PR 7'-0" HM D1 PAINT HM F1 PREFIN - - - 1018 7 101C PLUMBING CHASE 1'-10" 7'-0" HM D1 PAINT HM F1 PAINT 12/A6D212/A602 - 101C 4 102 LOBBY 3'-0" 7'-0" ALUM D2 PREFIN ALUM 4 PREFIN - 13/A50210/A602 102 1B 103A KITCHEN 3'-0" 7'-0" WOOD D1 STAIN HM Fl PAINT 12/A60212/A602 - 103A 4 1036 KITCHEN 3'-0" 7'•0" HM D1 PAINT HM F1 PAINT i6/A602 15/A602 1038 3 103C KITCHEN 6'-0" 7'-0" WOOD D1 STAIN - - - - 71A51D - 103C B 104A ROOM A 6'-0" PR 7'-0" WOOD D3 STAIN HM F1 PAINT 13/A60213lA602 - 104A 6 1046 ROOM A 6'-0" PR 8'-0" ALUM D2 PREFIN ALUM 6 PREFIN - - 10lA602 1048 to 105A ROOM B 6'-0" PR 7'-0" WOOD D3 STAIN HM F1 PAINT 13/A60213/A602 - 105A 6 1056 ROOM B 6'-0" PR 8'-0" ALUM D2 PREFIN ALUM 6 PREFIN - - 10/A602 1056 1A 106 MECH 3'-0" 7'-0" WOOD. D1 STAIN HM F1 PAINT 12/A602 - 106 4 107 STORAGE 6'-0' PR 7'-0" WOOD D1 STAIN HM Ft PAINT 12/A60212/A602 - 107 9 1078 IT ROOM 6'-0" PR T-0" WOOD D1 STAIN HM F7 PAINT 21A60212/A602 – 1078 9 108 MECH 3'-0" 6'-8" HM D1 PAINT HM F1 PAINT 12/A60212/A602 – 108 4 109 PREP 3'-0" 7'-0" WOOD D1 STAIN HM F1 PAINT 12lA60212/A602 – 109 4 110 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 3'-0" 7'-13. 0 0 FLOOR WALLS CEILING NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST ROOM ROOM x ROOM NOTES NUMBER NAME NUMBER MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH FINISH BASE MATERIAL FINISH 100 VESTIBULE CARPET VINYL COPPER - - - STONE - - PREFIN GYP PAINT 100 1D1 CORRIDOR POLISH CONC VINYL LV/PLWD/GYP -/STWPNT GYP/PLWD PAINT/STAIN GYP PAINT GYP PAINT EXP STAIN 101 102 LOBBY POLISH CONC VINYL STONE - - - GYPlT&G PAINT/STAIN GYPITB,G PNTlSTN GYP PAINT 1D2 103 KITCHEN POLISH CONC VINYL GYP EPDX PT GYP EPDX PT GYP EPDX PT GYP EPDX PT ACT - 103 104 ROOM A POLISH CONC VINYL LWD/TBG/GYP STN/STWPNT - - PLYWOOD STAIN WOOD STAIN EXP STAIN 104 105 ROOM B POLISH CONC VINYL LWDlTB:G/GYP STN/STN/PNT T8G1LV/CPR STN/-!- PLYWOOD STAIN - - EXP STAIN 105 106 MECH SEALED CONC VINYL GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT 106 107 STORAGE SEALED CONC VINYL GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT EXP STAIN 107 1076 IT ROOM SEALED CONC VINYL " WOOD D1 STAIN HM F1 PAINT 12/A60212lA602 – 110 5 GYP 111 MEN'S RESTROOM 3'-0" 7'-0" WOOD D1 STAIN HM F1 PAINT 12/A60212/A602 - 111 5 VINYL 0 FLOOR WALLS CEILING NORTH EAST SOUTH WEST ROOM ROOM x ROOM NOTES NUMBER NAME NUMBER MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH MATERIAL FINISH FINISH BASE MATERIAL FINISH 100 VESTIBULE CARPET VINYL COPPER - - - STONE - - PREFIN GYP PAINT 100 1D1 CORRIDOR POLISH CONC VINYL LV/PLWD/GYP -/STWPNT GYP/PLWD PAINT/STAIN GYP PAINT GYP PAINT EXP STAIN 101 102 LOBBY POLISH CONC VINYL STONE - - - GYPlT&G PAINT/STAIN GYPITB,G PNTlSTN GYP PAINT 1D2 103 KITCHEN POLISH CONC VINYL GYP EPDX PT GYP EPDX PT GYP EPDX PT GYP EPDX PT ACT - 103 104 ROOM A POLISH CONC VINYL LWD/TBG/GYP STN/STWPNT - - PLYWOOD STAIN WOOD STAIN EXP STAIN 104 105 ROOM B POLISH CONC VINYL LWDlTB:G/GYP STN/STN/PNT T8G1LV/CPR STN/-!- PLYWOOD STAIN - - EXP STAIN 105 106 MECH SEALED CONC VINYL GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT 106 107 STORAGE SEALED CONC VINYL GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT EXP STAIN 107 1076 IT ROOM SEALED CONC VINYL GYP PAINT GYP PAINT PLYWOOD - GYP PAINT EXP STAIN 1076 108 MECH SEALED CONC VINYL GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT EXP. STAIN 108 109 PREP CARPET VINYL GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT GYP PAINT 109 110 WOMEN'S RESTROOM POLISH CONC CT GYPICT EPDX PTI- GYPICT EPDX PT/- GYPICT EPDX PTI- GYPICT EPDX PTI- EXP/GYP STN/ EPDX PT 110 111 MEN'S RESTROOM POLISH CONC CT GYP/CT EPDX PT/- GYPICT EPDX PT/- GYPICT EPDX PTI- GYPICT EPDX PTI- EXP/GYP STN/ EPDX PT 111 ABBREVIATIONS 1. NO VINYL BASE AT STONE AND COPPER WALLS. ACT ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE PNT PAINT CONC CONCRETE PLYWD PLYWOOD CT CERAMIC TILE PREFIN PREFINISHED GYP GYPSUM BOARD STN STAIN FINISH CPR COPPER T&G TONGUE AND GROOVE SIDING EXP EXPOSED EPDX PT EPDXY PAINT LV LIMESTONE VENEER 0 w O w x Q _ LU a � SEAL AT FRAME - TYP 20 GA. PRE-FINISHED Q BRAKE MTL TO MATCH m r -" STONE CAP BELOW 318" STEEL SILL BELOW MTL CAP BELOW7 WINDOW FINISH. WRAP m a N COLUMN AND BLOCKING m Ir L W3 CEDAR BATTEN AT EXTERIOR. 20 GA. PRE-FINISHED N BRAKE MTL TO MATCH C SEALANT AND BACKER WINDOW FINISH. 1 1/4" 11y114" ROD - BOTH SIDES I MTL CAP BELOW v zOIt- � wN SEAL WINDOW _ o FRAME-TYP SEAL AT WINDOW PERIMETER - WOOD TRIM c BOTH SIDES _ ° j Z - L4 CORNER BEAD L rn 2 7 SOLID SURFACE SILL BELOW 9 STOREFRONT CORNER DETAIL AT COLUMN SIDING SEAM BELOW w a LL STONE WALL LEDGE BELOW 1-1 /2" = V-0" WOOD TRIM WINDOW SUPPLIERS .08" EXTRUDED ALUMINUM AT 20 GA. PRE-FINISHED Q CORNER, METAL AND FINISH TO MATCH ALUM FRAME BREAK MTL TO MATCH WINDOW FINISH. WRAP O � a I COLUMN AND BLOCKING — a IN STOREFRONT JAMB DTL @ CLERESTORY STOREFRONT CORNER 20 GA PRE-FINISHED AT EXTERIOR �C9 W 1 9 BRAKE MTL TO MATCH > �i 0 1-t /r' = 1'-0" 14 MTL CAP BELOW WINDOW FINISH. WRAP Vr COLUMN AND m SEALANT AND BACKER BLOCKING. STOREFRONT COLUMN DETAIL SEE PLAN FOR 4 1 /2" = 1'-0" V J 0 a o CONTINUE GYP BOARD ROD -BOTH SIDES WALL TYPE BEHIND FRAME CONTINUE GYP BOARD SEE SCHEDULE FOR BEHIND FRAME DOOR TYPE 00 w 1 w SIDING SEAM BELOW a 3 o aS a W4 W o 0 m _ M IT STEEL TUBE COLUMN - SEAL WINDOW > g N m SEE STRUCTURAL FRAME-NP <'r a d - . Q r Ocn WOOD TRIM \ O v SEALANT - BOTH SIDES v CONTINUE SIDING UNDER FRAME FEB 21 2012 STOREFRONT COLUMN DETAIL v: sf PM STOREFRONT JAMB DETAIL @ GYP WALL 8 1-1/z'=1'-0" 1 g HM DOOR JAMB ATT 8� G HEAD SIM STEEL TUBE COLUMN- O] SEE STRUCTURAL �N SEALANT AND BACKER �+•+ uJ Q o 20 GA. PRE-FINISHED �^ 0 ?� c� BRAKE MTL TO MATCH ROD -BOTH SIDES V) Z O 9 SEALANT AND BACKER SEE PLAN FOR MTL CAP BELOW WINDOW FINISH. WRAP � r 0) CONTINUE GYP BOARD ROD - BOTH SIDES WALL TYPE COLUMN AND AT EXTERIOR. BLOCKING T IZ I BEHIND FRAME CONTINUE SIDING SEE SCHEDULE FOR 2 r z BEHIND FRAME DOOR TYPE 1 1" INSULATION 3 STOREFRONT JAMB DETAIL @COPPER WALL r Q W5 � Lu SEALANT- BOTH SIDES Q SEAL WINDOW FRAME -TYP W4 ::::::Z, HM DOOR JAMB AT GYP HEAD SIM)WOOD TRIM 12 1.1,2"=,'-0'o Wg (DLT OREFRONT COLUMN DETAIL -1-0 w WALL TRANSITION @ DOOR 101 A7 w 17 1-1 /2" = F- Q Wg ` SIDING SEAM BELOW W3 GROUT CELLS FULL 1" RIGID INSULATION ui 6" DRAINAGE AND VENTILATION MAT AT DOORJAMB SEALANT AND BACKER BETWEEN FURRING STRIPS ( SEALANT PLYWOOD TYPE A 1" RIGID INSULATION RODS -BOTH SIDES FLASHING HEADER-SEE STRUCTURAL 2X2 BLOCKING • ' Q �^ SEALANT - BOTH SIDES CEMENT BOARD SOFFIT O J V CORNER BEAD 58" GYP RETURN HEADER-SEE ,� STOREFRONT JAMB DETAIL @COPPER WALL O w TREATED WOOD BLOCKING BLOCKING STRUCTURAL J Q CONTINUE GYP 211 " BEHIND FRAME SEALANT AND BACKER ROD - BOTH SIDES w O }" THERMAL BREAK SEALANT AND BACKER WINANCHOR JAMB @ EXTERIOR W2 RODS -BOTH SIDES TREATED WOOD BLOCKING- HM DOOR HEAD @ KITCHEN EXTERIOR 1 1 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" ANCHOR TO CMU 161-1 /2" 1'-0" SEALANT AND BACKER ROD - W2 TREATED WOOD BLOCKING - W = SEE DOOR TYPE BOTH SIDES ANCHOR TO CMU Q Q SEE DOOR TYPE GROUT CELLS FULL AT DOOR ` THRESHOLD -SET IN THRESHOLD-SET IN JAMB T SEALANT SEALANT }"EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE STOREFRONT JAMB DETAIL @STONE WALL � O THERMAL BREAK }" EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE 6 1'-0" Q 7 SET OUTSIDE F1 F 1 THERMAL BREAK Z L CONCRETE DOWN 1/4" SET OUTSIDE CONCRETE FROM TOP OF SLAB DOWN 1/4" FROM TOP OF SLAB STEEL TUBE - SEE STRUCTURAL C/3 COPPER SIDING 1" RIGID INSULATION SEALANT AND BACKER a a ° 4 1" RIGID INSULATION ROD-BOTH SIDES ° a a ° ° ° 112" PLYWOOD OVER • 2x6 FRAMING Q <1 COPPER END CAP - FASTEN C-CLIP AND a a ATTACH END CAP OVER a 1/2" EXTRUDED 1/2" EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENEPOLYSTYRENE n THERMAL BREAK a ° THERMALBREAK FOAM CLOSURE -TYP W4 n PLYWOOD 15 THRESHOLD 2 10 THRESHOLD 1 STOREFRONT JAMB DETAIL @ STONE WALL STOREFRONT JAMB DETAIL @ STONE WALL 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" 1-1 /2" = 1'-0" 5 1-1 /2" = 1 -0" 1 1-1 /2" = 1 •-0" 111.0253 City File No. PA 261 Sheet A602 a' DECORATIVE STEEL PLATE, WELDED TO STEEL RODS 3/4" STEEL ROD, THREADED @ SHINGLES EACH END. LAMINATED 5/8" BOLT BEYOND WOOD DECKING STYLE D DRIP EDGE, MILL FINISH ALUM. OZ117_W.1101% WOOD BLOCK FILLER 1'-0" WIDE @ CTR. OF GLU-LAM BEAM 2x4 STRAP. DETAIL - SECTION Q 2x4 CROSS BRACE SCALE: 3'= V-0" 8" N I 12 7701 BENT ANGLE - BOLT INTO RIDGE BEAM & GLU-LAMS 1/2"x 4" STEEL PLATE - WELD TO STEEL RODS, PAINT. 4" STEEL ROD, THREADED 0 EACH END DETAIL - DECORATIVE END PANELS SCALE: 1" = V-0" KEYNOTES: O STONE VENEER COLUMNS O2 PRECAST STONE CAP O FIBERGLASS SHINGLES - SEE SPEC. ALT. - SYNTHETIC SHINGLES O STEEL COLUMN - SEE STRUCT. FOR DETAILS O GLU-LAM BEAM O METAL BRACKET O 2x TIES, STAINED O CONC. SLAB- SEE CIVIL h T.O. ROOF Y+12'-10 1/,V T.O. MASONRY mss' 1 vz° DETAIL - TYP. ROOF EDGE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" PRECAST STONE CAP MASONRY VENEER COLUMN BELOW CONTROL JOINT, RAKE BACK JOINT AND PROVIDE SEALANT 6'-0„ STEEL TUBE COLUMN 1'-1 O" --7 I I I II I I I I I 1 0 r I I I DETAIL - COLUMN CAP SCALE: 1" = V-0" RIDGE CAP SHINGLES RAKE FLASHING, MILL FINISH ALUM. 312"x7-21" GLU-LAM BEAMS 2" x 6" ANGLE W/ 4" LAG BOLTS, EACH SIDE DECORATIVE METAL BRACKET- @ ENDS ONLY - SEE DETAIL 12/A701 DETAIL - ROOF RIDGE SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" SHINGLES LAMINATED WOOD DECKING 32„x72., GLU-LAM BEAM @ 6-0” O.C. 2x4 BOTH SIDES W/ 4' THREADED ROD, WASHERS, AND ACORN NUTS 7 GA ANGLE W/ LAG SCREWS, BOTH SIDES - NOTCH 2x4s AS NEEDED TO HIDE LAG SCREW 64"x132" GLU-LAM BEAM STEEL BRACKET BEYOND, SEE STRUCT. CONT. MTL FLASHING STEEL TUBE COLUMN, SEE STRUCT. DETAIL - TYP. BEAM TO ROOF SCALE: 1 1/2" = l'-0" 3 ELEVATION ILj 5 4 q 6" 0 STEEL TUBE COL. - SEE STRUCT. SEALANT PRECAST STONE CAP =DE SS FLASHING EDGE STEEL PLATE W/ ANCHOR BOLTS CAST INTO CONC. COLUMN, SEE STRUCT. REINFORCED CONC COLUMN- SEE STRUCT, 4" 10" 1' 4" �� DETAIL -TYP. COLUMN CAP SCALE: 1 1 /2'= 1'-0" AIR SPACE 4" STONE VENEER MORTAR NET 10x10 REINFORCED CONC. COLUMN, SEE STRUCT FOR DETAILS THROUGH WALL EPDM FLASHING SS EDGE FLASHING GROUT SOLID EXPANSION JOINT W/SEALANT 6" CONC. SLAB ON 4" GRANULAR FILL ON PREPAREDSUBGRADE FOOTING, SEE STRUCT. FOR REINFORCING 4" 1" 10" 1" 4" DETAIL - TYP. COLUMN FOOTING SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 42'-0" EPDM THRU WALL FLASHING, ADHERE TO PIPE COLUMN D-�ISECTION - COLUMN SCALE: F7�Q 91 zai2 24'-0' EDGE OF ROOF ABOVE 6'$" GROUND LEVEL - - 1. SEE CIVIL FOR CONCRETE PAD AND CONTROL JOINTING 2. MULTIPLE SHELTERS INCLUDED IN PROJECT - SEE CIVIL FOR QUANITY AND LOCATION 2 ELEVATION 0FLOOR PLAN 1/4" = F-9' City File No. PA 261 m w o c:) a r�' o Q JL m m ) � � L N O 04 O N rn a w N tf m M t m 1n U o N O c o m Z m U of c Z m e w r a iL O �� Lu °7 rn o� Q cn 0 :5 LL � N z N J iy m N CW o� G Q W B 0 U rn d rn 3" �(, O w QA w °' U LL co th J N m Q Lu <� N r� //�� VJ ZO <U) r 3 z C6 LU Lo N Z r Q N UJI Q z 0 C/3 Q W W m Q C) U C) 0 C/3 O C!3 0m 06 Q W W `M} L / c Lu JLu Z t/) V J 111.0253 Sheet A701 0 GENERAL 1. ALL ELEVATIONS REFERENCED TO FINISHED FIRST FLOOR (+0'-0"). 2. ALL OF THE WORK TO BE DONE UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE DRAWINGS, THE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF DIVISION ONE, THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND ANY ADDENDA THERETO. 3. IT SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO ACQUAINT HIMSELF AND ALL SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL WITH THE ABOVE-NAMED DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS. 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSPECTING THE SITE OF THE PROPOSED WORK TO SATISFY HIMSELF AS TO THE EXISTING CONDITIONS RELATIVE TO THE CONTRACT. 5. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING ALL TEMPORARY SHORING/BRACING OF COLUMNS, BEAMS, JOISTS, ETC., AS REQUIRED BY ALL FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION, UNTIL ALL PERMANENT FRAMING IS INSTALLED. 6. UTILITY LOCATIONS ARE SHOWN IN AN APPROXIMATE WAY ONLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES BEFORE COMMENCING WORK. SHOULD ANY UTILITIES BE FOUND DIFFERENT THAN LOCATED OR SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, THEY SHALL BE PROTECTED IN PLACE AND THE ENGINEER SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY NOTIFIED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY AND ALL DAMAGES WHICH MIGHT BE OCCASIONED BY HIS FAILURE TO EXACTLY LOCATE AND PRESERVE ANY AND ALL UTILITIES. 7. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2009 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DESIGN LOADS: OCCUPANCY CATEGORY II SNOW: GROUND SNOW LOAD = 30 PSF ROOF LIVE/SNOW LOAD = 20 PSF SNOW DRIFT PER IBC 2009 Ce =1.00 Ct = 1.00 Is = 1.00 WIND; BASIC WIND SPEED = 90 MPH EXPOSURE C GCpi = +/- 0.18 AT LODGE GCpi = +/- 0.00 AT SHELTER Iw = 1.00 SEISMIC: SITE CLASS C le = 1.00 Ss = 0.100 SMs = 0.121 SDs = 0.080 S1 = 0.052 SM1 = 0.089 SD1 = 0.059 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY A 8. IF CONFLICTS ARE FOUND BETWEEN DETAILS OR DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL PLANS AND THOSE SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL OR OTHER DISCIPLINES' PLANS, NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER IMMEDIATELY FOR CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO PERFORMING WORK. FOUNDATION NOTES 1. ALL PIERS AND COLUMNS ARE CENTERED ON FOOTING PADS U.N.O. WALLS CENTERED ON FOOTINGS U.N.O. 2. ALL FOOTINGS SHALL REST ON UNDISTURBED SOIL OR CONTROLLED COMPACTED FILL OR GEOPIERS. IF UNUSUAL OR QUESTIONABLE CONDITIONS ARE ENCOUNTERED, DO NOT PROCEED UNTIL THE ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER HAVE BEEN NOTIFIED. 3. POUR PIERS MONOLITHICALLY WITH CONCRETE WALLS. 4. PROVIDE KEYWAY AT TOP OF ALL FOOTINGS, END OF WALL POURS, SLAB POURS AND END OF FOOTING POURS. 5. PROVIDE DOWELS FROM FOOTINGS TO WALLS. USE SAME NUMBER AND SPACING AS VERTICAL WALL BARS, U.N.O. 6. PROVIDE BENT BARS 2'-0" X 2'-0" AT ALL CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS IN WALLS AND FOOTINGS. USE SAME NUMBER AND SPACING AS HORIZONTAL BARS. 7. BACKFILL EACH SIDE OF WALL SIMULTANEOUSLY. 8. WALLS BACKFILLED ON ONE SIDE ONLY ARE TO BE ADEQUATELY BRACED UNTIL SLABS ARE POURED AND SLABS ARE CURED.. 9. HAND EXCAVATE THE LAST 6" OF ALL FOOTINGS AND PADS JUST PRIOR TO MAKING POUR. 10. FORM TOPS OF ALL FOOTINGS, PADS AND GRADE BEAMS TO ENSURE CORRECT LINE AND GRADE. 11. BOTTOM OF EXTERIOR FOOTINGS AND WALLS TO BE AT LEAST 3'-6" BELOW FINAL GROUND LINE. 12. FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO TERRACON CONSULTANTS PROJECT NO. 06115631.011. 13. FOUNDATIONS SHALL BE SUPPORTED ON A REINFORCED GEOPIER AGGREGATE PIER SYSTEM. REINFORCED GEOPIER AGGREGATE PIER SYSTEM SHALL BE EITHER VIBRO STONE COLUMNS OR RAMMED PIERS. 14. SHOULD THE SOILS BECOME DISTURBED OR SATURATED PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT, AFFECTED SOIL SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH CONTROLLED COMPACTED ENGINEERED FILL. 15, IF UNSUITABLE SUPPORT MATERIALS ARE ENCOUNTERED, SOIL SHALL BE EXCAVATED UNTIL SUITABLE SOIL IS ENCOUNTERED. BACKFILL SHALL BE WITH CONTROLLED COMPACTED ENGINEERED FILL ACCORDING TO GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. 16. ASSUMED NET ALLOWABLE FOUNDATION BEARING PRESSURE ON GEOPIER AGGREGATE SYSTEM = 3000 PSF UNDER SPREAD FOOTINGS. 17. FLOOR SLAB SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 18 INCHES OF COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL BELOW THE SLAB. ALL INTERIOR BACKFILL TO BE APPROVED GRANULAR FILL. SEE NOTES ON FOUNDATION PLAN FOR OVEREXCAVATION AND GEOGRID. 18. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ADEQUATE PROTECTION TO ALL FOOTINGS DURING CONSTRUCTION TO PREVENT SUPPORTING SOIL FROM FREEZING, USING ADDITIONAL TEMPORARY SOIL COVER OR OTHER MEANS. BOTTOM OF FOOTINGS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3'-6" BELOW TOP OF TEMPORARY SOIL COVER. 19. REINFORCED GEOPIER AGGREGATE PIER SYSTEM DESIGN SHALL BE FINALIZED IN GEOPIER DESIGN BUILD. 20. ALL FOUNDATIONS OF LODGE BUILDING AND PATIO WALL SHALL BE SUPPORTED ON A REINFORCED GEOPIER AGGREGATE PIER SYSTEM. 21. LOCATE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN GRADE BEAMS AT QUARTER POINT OF SPAN BETWEEN GEOPIERS. 22. PROVIDE SHEAR KEYS AT ENDS OF GRADE BEAM CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. USE 6" X6"X2" BEVELED KEYWAYS SPACED 1'-0" D.C. VERTICALLY. CONCRETE 1. CONCRETE TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH "SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOR BUILDINGS (ACI 301 CURRENT EDITION)", 2. REINFORCING STEEL TO BE BENT AND PLACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH "MANUAL OF STD. PRACTICE FOR DETAILING CONCRETE STRUCTURES (ACI 315 CURRENT EDITION)". 3. ALL CONCRETE 4000 PSI @ 28 DAYS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE 4. CONCRETE EXPOSED TO FREEZE/THAW CONDITIONS SHALL BE AIR ENTRAINED. 5. COARSE AGGREGATE FOR FOOTINGS AND UNEXPOSED WALLS MAY BE GRAVEL. 6. COARSE AGGREGATE FOR SLABS AND EXPOSED WALLS TO BE CRUSHED LIMESTONE. 7. MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE TO BE 1" - U.N.O. 8. ALL AGGREGATE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C33. LIMIT SHALE, CHERT, COAL AND IRON OXIDE. 9. 4000 PSI CONCRETE TO HAVE A MIN. 6 SACKS CEMENT/MAX. 5 GAL. OF WATER/SACK. 10. 3000 PSI CONCRETE TO HAVE A MIN. 5 SACKS CEMENT/MAX. 6 GAL. OF WATER/SACK. 11. WATER REDUCER REQUIRED FOR ALL BEAMS, WALLS AND SLABS. 12. CONCRETE WATER -CEMENT RATIO INDICATED FOR DESIGN MIXES TO HAVE CEMENT CONTENT ADJUSTED TO PROVIDE A WORKABLE MIX. 13. USE OF CALCIUM CHLORIDES PROHIBITED. 14. ALL REINFORCING STEEL TO BE ASTM A615 - GRADE 60. 15, ALL WELDED WIRE FABRIC IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A185. 16. CLEAR DISTANCE FROM FACE OF CONCRETE TO NEAR REINFORCING BAR TO BE: 3" CAST AGAINST EARTH. 2" SLABS ON GRADE (DISTANCE FROM TOP OF SLAB TO NEAR BAR) 2" BEAMS, COLUMNS, SLABS, JOISTS. 17. ALL REINFORCING STEEL MUST BE SECURELY WIRED IN PLACE BEFORE CONCRETE IS PLACED. 18. MAXIMUM SPACING OF BAR SUPPORTS TO BE 3'-0" O.C. E.W. 19. PROVIDE 2-#5 BARS AROUND ALL SIDES OF HOLES THROUGH CONCRETE WALLS AND SLABS. BARS TO EXTEND 2'-0" BEYOND EDGES OF OPENINGS. 20. PROVIDE CLASS B TENSION SPLICES FOR CONTINUOUS BARS UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN. 21. LAP WELDED WIRE FABRIC MESH A MINIMUM OF 6 INCHES OR ONE SPACE. 22. AT REINFORCED MASONRY WALLS, PROVIDE DOWELS VERTICALLY, SAME SIZE AND SPACING AS WALL BARS. BARS AT R.C.M.U.'S TO LAP MINIMUM OF 40 DIAMETERS (I.E. 2'-1" FOR #5 BAR). 23. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS KEYWAYS AT SLAB CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. 24. ISOLATE ALL WALLS AND COLUMNS FROM SLAB ON GRADE. USE PREFORMED JOINT MATERIAL. 25. DO NOT SAWCUT STRUCTURAL SLABS, STOOPS, OR SLABS ON METAL DECK WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL OF ENGINEER. 26. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS IN WALLS, SLABS AND FOUNDATIONS FOR DUCTS, PIPES, UTILITY LINES AND OTHER PENETRATIONS WITH THE RESPECTIVE TRADES. ALL SUCH PENETRATIONS SHALL BE FORMED OR SLEEVED IN CONCRETE AND STEEL LINTELS IN MASONRY WALLS. STRUCTURAL WOOD 1. THE STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE RELIES ON THE CONTRACTOR TO STRICTLY FOLLOW THE NAILING - PLYWOOD SHEATHING SCHEDULE. 2. ALL STRUCTURAL FRAMING MEMBERS TO BE DOUGLAS FIR #1 OR BETTER. 3. WOOD MEMBERS ARE DESIGNED UTILIZING THE FOLLOWING WOOD STRESSES: Fb=1000 PSI Ft (TENSION)=1050 PSI Fv (HORZ. SHEAR)=175 PSI Fc (COMP. PERP.)=565 PSI Fc (COMP. PARA.)=1850 PSI E (MOD. ELASTIC)=1.7 X 1OE6 PSI 4. CONVENTIONAL FRAMING DETAILS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2308 OF THE 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, INCLUDING NAILING SCHEDULES. 5. STRUCTURAL SHEATHING TO BE 1/2" MINIMUM APA RATED 24/16, EXP. 1 OR BETTER PLYWOOD/OSB. 7. JOIST HANGERS, POST CAPS AND BASES, AND OTHER FRAMING CONNECTORS SHALL BE "SIMPSON" OR APPROVED EQUAL. 8. CUTTING, NOTCHING, OR DRILLING OF MEMBERS SHALL BE ONLY AS DETAILED OR APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. 9. ALL WOOD STUDS TO BE ONE PIECE CONTINUOUS , U.N.O. 10. ANCHOR BOLTS AT SILL PLATES: 1/2" DIA., 7" EMBEDMENT, 2' O.C. MAX. SEE IBC CONVENTIONAL CONSTRUCTION PROVISIONS. 11. ALL PRE-ENGINEERED CONSTRUCTION SHALL STRICTLY COMPLY WITH DESIGNER'S PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 12. SOLID WOOD DECKING TO BE DOUGLAS FIR/LARCH AND TO HAVE E= 1,800,000 PSI MIN AND Fb = 1000 PSI MIN. 13. AT SHEAR WALLS, PROVIDE BLOCKING BETWEEN ALL STUDS AT HORIZONTAL JOINTS IN PLYWOOD/OSB. ALL EXTERIOR 2X WALLS, INCLUDING CHIMNEY, SHALL HAVE BLOCKING AT 6' O.C. MAXIMUM. 14. ALL ROOF DEAD LOAD SHALL BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO INSTALLING EXT. 2X WALLS AGAINST THE UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. 15. HEADERS AT WOOD STUD NON -LOAD BEARING WALLS SHALL BE 3-2X12'S, TYP. 16. ALL WOOD IN CONTACT WITH CONCRETE/MASONRY OR EXPOSED TO THE EXTERIOR SHALL BE PRESERVATIVE TREATED. STEEL 1. STRUCTURAL STEEL TO BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH "SPECIFICATIONS FOR DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS, CURRENT EDITION." 2. STRUCTURAL STEEL WIDE FLANGE SECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A992. 3. STEEL CHANNELS, PLATES AND ANGLES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A36. 4. STEEL TUBES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A500 GRADE B (Fy = 46 ksi). 5. STEEL PIPE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM A53 GRADE B (Fy = 35 ksi). 6. ALL ELECTRODES E70 SERIES. 7. STAINLESS STEEL TO BE ASTM A304. 8. ANCHOR BOLTS - ASTM F 1554 (GRADE 36). 9. EXPANSION ANCHORS SHALL BE HILTI KWIK BOLT TZ OR APPROVED EQUAL. GROUT MASONRY SOLID AT EXPANSION AND EPDXY BOLTS. 10, ALL FIELD BOLTS - ASTM A325 H.S. STEEL BOLTS (TYPE "N" U.N.O.). 11. ALL BOLTS 3/4" DIAMETER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR SHOWN. 12. FIELD TIGHTEN HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH AISC "SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 BOLTS". (SNUG TIGHT). 13. BOLTED BEAM CONNECTIONS SHALL HAVE, THE WEB FILLED WITH BOLTS BASED ON AISC SPACING SPECIFICATIONS. 14. 1 Yz ROOF DECK SHALL BE 18 GA. STEEL, VULCRAFT 1.13-18, 1.5BA-18 OR EQUAL AS NOTED ON PLANS. STEEL ROOF DECK SHALL SPAN A MINIMUM OF THREE SPANS. LAP DECK A MINIMUM OF 2" OVER SUPPORTS. FASTEN DECK AS FOLLOWS: A. MAIN SUPPORTS - WELD DECK TO STEEL SUPPORT MEMBERS AT ENDS AND INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS WITH 5/8" DIAMETER FUSION WELDS AT 36/4 WELD PATTERN. B. DECK SIDELAPS - FASTEN SIDELAPS WITH 5-#10 TEK SCREWS PER SPAN, U.N.O. C. PERIMETER EDGES - WELD PERIMETER EDGES OF DECK WITH 5/8" DIAMETER FUSION WELDS OR 1" LONG FILLET WELDS AT 12" INTERVALS, U.N.O. 15, PROVIDE TUBE STEEL BLOCKING BENEATH DECK FLUTES AS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE FOR DECK WELDING AT SUPPORTS. 16. DECK CLOSURE TO BE 20 GAGE MINIMUM GALVANIZED. 17. NO HOLES ALLOWED IN BEAMS, JOISTS OR COLUMNS UNLESS DETAILED ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. 18. PROVIDE L5X3XY4 (LLV) FRAMES FOR ALL ROOF OPENINGS U.N.O. WELD FRAMES TO ADJACENT BEAMS, VERIFY ROOF OPENING SIZES AND LOCATIONS WITH MECHANICAL. 19, DO NOT HANG DUCTWORK FROM METAL DECK. HANG ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FROM BEAMS WHERE POSSIBLE. 20. SHOP PRIME ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL WITH ONE COAT TNEMEC 10-99 U.N.O. 21. PROVIDE BEARING PLATE 4" X 8" X 3/8" WITH 2 - 5/8" DIA. X 5" HD. STUDS AT ALL STEEL BEAMS BEARING ON MASONRY U.N.O. 22. GALVANIZE ALL EXTERIOR STEEL AND ALL GLULAM CONNECTIONS. SPECIAL INSPECTION 1. SPECIAL INSPECTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 1704 OF THE 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE, AND ICBG MODEL PROGRAM FOR SPECIAL INSPECTION. 2. THE OWNER WILL EMPLOY AN APPROVED AGENCY TO PERFORM THE SPECIAL INSPECTION SERVICES. 3. SPECIAL INSPECTION WILL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AND IN ADDITION TO THE INSPECTION AND TESTING REQUIRED BY THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 4. THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE INCLUDED IN THE SPECIAL INSPECTION: SOILS: FILL COMPACTING FOOTING BEARING CAPACITY CONCRETE: AIR -ENTRAINMENT SLUMP COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTING REINFORCING PLACEMENT MASONRY: GROUT STRENGTH REINFORCING PLACEMENT STRUCTURAL WOOD: GLULAM CONNECTIONS WOOD DECKING CONNECTIONS LINTELS 1. PROVIDE AND INSTALL STEEL LINTELS FOR ALL MASONRY OPENINGS 1'-0 OR WIDER IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE): WALL THICKNESS 4" WALLS 6" WALLS 8" WALLS 10" WALLS 12" WALLS 14" WALLS MAXIMUM OPENING WIDTH 6'-0" 1-L3.5 X 3.5 X 5/16 WT4 X 9 2-L3.5 X 3.5 X 5/16 W8 X 10 W/PL 9 X 5/16 W8 X 10 W/PL 11 X 5/16 W8 X 10 W/PL 13 X 5/16 8'- 0" 1-1_5X3.5X5/16 WT5 X 15 2-1_5 X 3.5 X 5/16 W8 X 10 W/PL 9 X 5/16 W8 X 10 W/PL 11 X 5/16 W8 X 15 W/PL 13 X 5/16 MASONRY 1. MASONRY CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 530 and 530.1, CURRENT EDITIONS. 2. MORTAR FOR MASONRY BEARING WALLS TO BE TYPE S. 3. ALL GROUT TO TEST 2000 PSI @ 28 DAYS. 4. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SHALL HAVE WALLS AND CROSS WEBS FILLED TO PREVENT GROUT LEAKAGE, 5. GROUT SHALL HAVE A COMPOSITION MEASURED BY VOLUME CONSISTING OF ONE PART PORTLAND CEMENT AND TWO PARTS OF SAND WITH TWO PARTS OF PEA GRAVEL. SLUMP SHALL BE MEASURED ON A TRUNCATED METAL CONE. 6. MORTAR SHALL NOT BE USED AS GROUT. 7. ALL REINFORCING TO LAP 40 BARS DIAMETERS (I.E. #5 LAP 2'-1".) 8. MORTAR "FINS" PROTRUDING FROM JOINTS SHOULD BE REMOVED BEFORE POURING GROUT. 9. CONSOLIDATE GROUT AT THE TIME OF PLACEMENT. CONSOLIDATE GROUT POURS 12 INCHES OR LESS IN HEIGHT BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION OR BY PUDDLING. CONSOLIDATE GROUT POURS EXCEEDING 12 INCHES IN HEIGHT BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND RECONSOLIDATE BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION AFTER INITIAL WATER LOSS AND SETTLEMENT HAS OCCURRED. 10. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PREVENT SEGREGATION OF GROUT MATERIALS AND DAMAGE TO MASONRY UNITS DURING THE GROUTING PROCESS. 11, GROUT POURS SHALL BE STOPPED 2" BELOW THE TOP MASONRY UNIT ON INTERMEDIATE POURS. 12. MAXIMUM VERTICAL GROUT POUR TO BE 5'-4". 13. FILL BOND BEAMS WITH 3000 PSI CONC. DO NOT USE MASON'S MORTAR. 14. REINFORCING STEEL TO BE AS SPECIFIED UNDER CONCRETE NOTES. 15. ALL CONCRETE BLOCK SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM C90. 16. DESIGN fm = 1500 PSI. 17. GROUT MASONRY SOLID 16" MINIMUM BELOW ALL BEAM AND LINTEL BEARINGS. 18,GROUT MASONRY SOLID AT ALL EXPANSION BOLTS. 19. PROVIDE A 2" X 3" MINIMUM CLEAR UNOBSTRUCTED CONTINUOUS VERTICAL CELL OPENING AT EACH VERTICAL BAR LOCATION AND CENTER BAR IN WALL (U.N.O.). 20. PROVIDE 9 GA. GALV. REBAR POSITIONERS TO ACCURATELY LOCATE VERTICAL REINFORCING BARS IN WALLS. VERTICAL BARS CENTERED IN WALL U.N.O. 21. PROVIDE BENT BARS 2'-0" X 2'-0" AT ALL CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS OF BOND BEAMS. USE SAME NUMBER AND SPACING AS HORIZONTAL BARS. 22. MASONRY CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING NECESSARY SHORING AND BRACING TO MAINTAIN WALL SHAPE, LINE AND DIMENSION IN CONFORMANCE WITH DRAWING, AGAINST WIND AND CONSTRUCTION LOADS. 23. "RCMU" DENOTES REINFORCED MASONRY. 24. PROVIDE 16 OZ. SMOOTH COPPER BOND BARRIER UNDER LINTEL BEARING AT CONTROL JOINTS. 25. PROVIDE 2 - #5 VERTICAL AT ALL JAMBS. GROUT CORES SOLID. 26, PROVIDE 2 COURSES JOINT REINFORCING BELOW SILLS AND ABOVE LINTELS. 27. PLACE BOND BEAM REINFORCING CONTINUOUS ACROSS CONTROL JOINTS. WRAP BARS WITHIN 2'-0 EACH SIDE OF JOINT WITH 1/8" THICK BOND BREAK TAPE. 28. WHERE CONTROL JOINTS NOT SHOWN, SUBMIT PROPOSED LOCATIONS PER ACI 531 FOR APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT. 29. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING AT 16" O.C. FOR SINGLE WYTHE AND MULTI-WYTHE WALLS. 30. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMNS LOCATED WITHIN MASONRY WALLS SHALL BE WRAPPED WITH A 1" INSULATION BLANKET TO ISOLATE COLUMN FROM MORTAR SPOILS. 31. ALL INTERIOR 8" MASONRY WALLS WITH UNSUPPORTED HEIGHTS OF 14'-0" OR MORE SHALL BE REINFORCED WITH #5 AT 4'-0" O.C. IN SOLID GROUTED CORE - U.N.O. FEB 21 2017 .,•Sf P� GLU-LAM BEAMS: 1. CUTTING, NOTCHING, OR DRILLING OF MEMBERS SHALL BE ONLY AS DETAILED OR APPROVED BY THE DESIGN ENGINEER. 2. PRE-ENGINEERED BEAMS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY AN IOWA REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER FOR LOADS SHOWN. HE SHALL SUBMIT CERTIFIED CALCULATIONS AND SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING DESIGN OF ANY REQ'D BRIDGING, BRACING, OR BLOCKING. 3. ALL PRE-ENGINEERED CONSTRUCTION SHALL STRICTLY COMPLY WITH DESIGNER'S PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 4. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD ERECTION OF PRE-ENGINEERED BEAMS INCLUDING ERECTION BRACING, PERMANENT BRACING, AND BRIDGING IF REQUIRED. 5.. BEAM MEMBERS, CONNECTIONS, AND CONNECTION PLATE MATERIAL TO BE DESIGNED AND SUPPLIED BY BEAM MANUFACTURERS. 6. BEAMS SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR EXTERIOR, WET, CONDITIONS. 7, GLULAM MEMBERS ARE DESIGNED UTILIZING THE FOLLOWING DOUGLAS FIR/LARCH GLULAM STRESSES, 24F -V8. 2-6 TYP 2-6 _j ==JL LINTEL DETAILS OPENINGS 1, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS IN WALLS, SLABS, AND FOUNDATIONS FOR DUCTS, PIPES, UTILITY LINES AND OTHER PENETRATIONS PERSPECTIVE TRADES. ALL SUCH E ETRATIONS WITH THE PENETRATIONS SHALL BE FORMED OR SLEEVED WITH STEEL LINTELS IN MASONRY WALLS AND PERIMETER REINFORCING IN CONCRETE. SEE DETAIL 1/S2. `"u' k1r%V-01311mc 2409 GRAND AVENUE DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 ID W cn 2. LINTELS SHALL BEAR A MINIMUM OF 8" ON MASONRY AT EACH END. DRILLED -IN -DOWELS AND ANCHOR BOLTS 3. ALL ANGLES BACK TO BACK SHALL BE WELDED TOGETHER TOP AND BOTTOM. 1. HOLES FOR DOWELS SHALL BE DRILLED INTO THE EXISTING CONCRETE 4. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL AS SPECIFIED UNDER STEEL NOTES. AT THE LOCATIONS AND OF THE SIZE SHOWN ON THE PLANS. EMBED 5. LONG LEG VERTICAL FOR UNEQUAL LEG ANGLES. DRILLED -IN -DOWELS 15 BAR OR ANCHOR BOLT DIAMETERS MINIMUM, 6, WELD PLATES TO W8 WITH 3/16 X 2" FILLET WELDS @ 6" O.C. BOTH SIDES. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. AFTER HOLES ARE DRILLED, THEY SHALL BE 7• NON -LOAD BEARING WALLS REQUIRE LINTELS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS BLOWN CLEAN WITH OIL -FREE COMPRESSED AIR BEFORE THE EPDXY FOR NON -LOAD BEARING WALL LOCATIONS. TYPICALLY NON -LOAD BEARING WALLS RESIN IS PLACED IN THE HOLE. THE HOLE SHALL BE FILLED WITH EPDXY ARE NOT SHOWN ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. RESIN TO A LEVEL SUCH THAT AFTER THE BAR IS INSERTED, THE EPDXY N WILL RISE TO THE SURFACE OF THE HOLE. IN OVERHEAD APPLICATIONS, WORK AND SECURE ENOUGH EPDXY RESIN INTO THE HOLE SUCH THAT d1i' WHEN THE DOWEL IS INSERTED, THE EPDXY RESIN COMPLETELY FILLS THE VOID AROUND THE DOWEL. SECURE THE EPDXY RESIN IN PLACE FOR I= CURING BY PLUGGING THE HOLE AROUND THE SHANK OF THE DOWEL. REINFORCING STEEL DOWELS OR ANCHOR BOLTS OF THE SIZE SHOWN ON Z 0 THE PLANS SHALL BE INSERTED INTO THE HOLE IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE EPDXY RESIN IS PLACED. THE EPDXY RESIN SHALL BE PERMITTED TO SET BEFORE NEW CONCRETE IS PLACED AROUND THE ANCHOR. C THE EPDXY SYSTEM USED SHALL BE A HILTI HIT-HY 150 MAX -SD OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. MASONRY 1. MASONRY CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 530 and 530.1, CURRENT EDITIONS. 2. MORTAR FOR MASONRY BEARING WALLS TO BE TYPE S. 3. ALL GROUT TO TEST 2000 PSI @ 28 DAYS. 4. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SHALL HAVE WALLS AND CROSS WEBS FILLED TO PREVENT GROUT LEAKAGE, 5. GROUT SHALL HAVE A COMPOSITION MEASURED BY VOLUME CONSISTING OF ONE PART PORTLAND CEMENT AND TWO PARTS OF SAND WITH TWO PARTS OF PEA GRAVEL. SLUMP SHALL BE MEASURED ON A TRUNCATED METAL CONE. 6. MORTAR SHALL NOT BE USED AS GROUT. 7. ALL REINFORCING TO LAP 40 BARS DIAMETERS (I.E. #5 LAP 2'-1".) 8. MORTAR "FINS" PROTRUDING FROM JOINTS SHOULD BE REMOVED BEFORE POURING GROUT. 9. CONSOLIDATE GROUT AT THE TIME OF PLACEMENT. CONSOLIDATE GROUT POURS 12 INCHES OR LESS IN HEIGHT BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION OR BY PUDDLING. CONSOLIDATE GROUT POURS EXCEEDING 12 INCHES IN HEIGHT BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND RECONSOLIDATE BY MECHANICAL VIBRATION AFTER INITIAL WATER LOSS AND SETTLEMENT HAS OCCURRED. 10. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PREVENT SEGREGATION OF GROUT MATERIALS AND DAMAGE TO MASONRY UNITS DURING THE GROUTING PROCESS. 11, GROUT POURS SHALL BE STOPPED 2" BELOW THE TOP MASONRY UNIT ON INTERMEDIATE POURS. 12. MAXIMUM VERTICAL GROUT POUR TO BE 5'-4". 13. FILL BOND BEAMS WITH 3000 PSI CONC. DO NOT USE MASON'S MORTAR. 14. REINFORCING STEEL TO BE AS SPECIFIED UNDER CONCRETE NOTES. 15. ALL CONCRETE BLOCK SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM C90. 16. DESIGN fm = 1500 PSI. 17. GROUT MASONRY SOLID 16" MINIMUM BELOW ALL BEAM AND LINTEL BEARINGS. 18,GROUT MASONRY SOLID AT ALL EXPANSION BOLTS. 19. PROVIDE A 2" X 3" MINIMUM CLEAR UNOBSTRUCTED CONTINUOUS VERTICAL CELL OPENING AT EACH VERTICAL BAR LOCATION AND CENTER BAR IN WALL (U.N.O.). 20. PROVIDE 9 GA. GALV. REBAR POSITIONERS TO ACCURATELY LOCATE VERTICAL REINFORCING BARS IN WALLS. VERTICAL BARS CENTERED IN WALL U.N.O. 21. PROVIDE BENT BARS 2'-0" X 2'-0" AT ALL CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS OF BOND BEAMS. USE SAME NUMBER AND SPACING AS HORIZONTAL BARS. 22. MASONRY CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING NECESSARY SHORING AND BRACING TO MAINTAIN WALL SHAPE, LINE AND DIMENSION IN CONFORMANCE WITH DRAWING, AGAINST WIND AND CONSTRUCTION LOADS. 23. "RCMU" DENOTES REINFORCED MASONRY. 24. PROVIDE 16 OZ. SMOOTH COPPER BOND BARRIER UNDER LINTEL BEARING AT CONTROL JOINTS. 25. PROVIDE 2 - #5 VERTICAL AT ALL JAMBS. GROUT CORES SOLID. 26, PROVIDE 2 COURSES JOINT REINFORCING BELOW SILLS AND ABOVE LINTELS. 27. PLACE BOND BEAM REINFORCING CONTINUOUS ACROSS CONTROL JOINTS. WRAP BARS WITHIN 2'-0 EACH SIDE OF JOINT WITH 1/8" THICK BOND BREAK TAPE. 28. WHERE CONTROL JOINTS NOT SHOWN, SUBMIT PROPOSED LOCATIONS PER ACI 531 FOR APPROVAL BY ARCHITECT. 29. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING AT 16" O.C. FOR SINGLE WYTHE AND MULTI-WYTHE WALLS. 30. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL COLUMNS LOCATED WITHIN MASONRY WALLS SHALL BE WRAPPED WITH A 1" INSULATION BLANKET TO ISOLATE COLUMN FROM MORTAR SPOILS. 31. ALL INTERIOR 8" MASONRY WALLS WITH UNSUPPORTED HEIGHTS OF 14'-0" OR MORE SHALL BE REINFORCED WITH #5 AT 4'-0" O.C. IN SOLID GROUTED CORE - U.N.O. FEB 21 2017 .,•Sf P� GLU-LAM BEAMS: 1. CUTTING, NOTCHING, OR DRILLING OF MEMBERS SHALL BE ONLY AS DETAILED OR APPROVED BY THE DESIGN ENGINEER. 2. PRE-ENGINEERED BEAMS SHALL BE DESIGNED BY AN IOWA REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER FOR LOADS SHOWN. HE SHALL SUBMIT CERTIFIED CALCULATIONS AND SHOP DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING DESIGN OF ANY REQ'D BRIDGING, BRACING, OR BLOCKING. 3. ALL PRE-ENGINEERED CONSTRUCTION SHALL STRICTLY COMPLY WITH DESIGNER'S PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 4. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD ERECTION OF PRE-ENGINEERED BEAMS INCLUDING ERECTION BRACING, PERMANENT BRACING, AND BRIDGING IF REQUIRED. 5.. BEAM MEMBERS, CONNECTIONS, AND CONNECTION PLATE MATERIAL TO BE DESIGNED AND SUPPLIED BY BEAM MANUFACTURERS. 6. BEAMS SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR EXTERIOR, WET, CONDITIONS. 7, GLULAM MEMBERS ARE DESIGNED UTILIZING THE FOLLOWING DOUGLAS FIR/LARCH GLULAM STRESSES, 24F -V8. 2-6 TYP 2-6 _j ==JL LINTEL DETAILS OPENINGS 1, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS IN WALLS, SLABS, AND FOUNDATIONS FOR DUCTS, PIPES, UTILITY LINES AND OTHER PENETRATIONS PERSPECTIVE TRADES. ALL SUCH E ETRATIONS WITH THE PENETRATIONS SHALL BE FORMED OR SLEEVED WITH STEEL LINTELS IN MASONRY WALLS AND PERIMETER REINFORCING IN CONCRETE. SEE DETAIL 1/S2. `"u' k1r%V-01311mc 2409 GRAND AVENUE DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 ID W cn o O w_� N W � cf)W cc o � C/) p sN o 71 LL � z J m N Lu o a W ¢� U N o F cp > _ O 4 n 0 1= CL C M oM J O m W � r' o Q N r� , o� rn Z Ln � Y r__ Q CN N 1 Q W z O CO W MW F- cr. w U C) C/3 o U, O co cesW 0 W J Q crp cc: V LU U) �+ 111.0253 Sheet 81 m irr L N N d1i' I= Z 0 m! C w� z U .2 0 m N 0 d ppo 3 Vf m c z o Z m � W Y Lu r 0- i o O w_� N W � cf)W cc o � C/) p sN o 71 LL � z J m N Lu o a W ¢� U N o F cp > _ O 4 n 0 1= CL C M oM J O m W � r' o Q N r� , o� rn Z Ln � Y r__ Q CN N 1 Q W z O CO W MW F- cr. w U C) C/3 o U, O co cesW 0 W J Q crp cc: V LU U) �+ 111.0253 Sheet 81 12'-8" 12'- 8" 12'-8" I Q12.4) .8 I 3.5 1'-7Yz ,3,-3Y' 5'-6�ij6" 6'-3�/j fi 6'-4?/I fi' D. .=0.5K Q'-9'1, I I 1I m 12'-8" 8 2'-3Ya" 10'-43/" "S 2'-3Ya„ I 4 TYP. 12'-8" 12'-8" 12'-8" 12'-B" 12'-8" 12'-8" 12'-8" 12'-8" 12'-8" I I I I I I I I I Q2 8 8.4 8.5 9.2 9.8 D.L.=0.5K Q is L.L.=O.OK I I I I SA 5'-8)g" 6'-4" 8'-4" 2'- I HSS5XSX " I 2'-2"! I 731"I 2'_2" 20 _0•' tK L.11.=0.OK I I I I I GB -2 ! I I I I I �1t, F2 `'��GB�� ; END GRADE BM. I I I II 17 ti GB -1I I `� ��-- ; 17 Sim SS SS I rr, GB -1 r' -� r �;!ti J o ` F3 S4 _ SIM D.L.=3.5KLF 2 -_ __ _ - - - F - - - - - - I --- - - - - - - - - - ------------- �i HSS5 5X " R+�'.• m 7 L.L.=0.3 KLF' I -- ---pi F2 L J -GB-1 I D.L.=0.7KLF JT J I, 11 I I I I I --, I F2 - s4 I I S4 I F M 1 F2 I L.L.=D. KLF �_HSSi5X5 B 2 -'-, GB -1 r ' 'I I ���� I ��"� I o- - - - - - _ 1- --- i - �- �i 1 I 16X20 CONC. PIER jJ J L_ '� 1 3 � 4'-2' i 1 4 I i � t_� F31 -I `�-S ITYP. I I I 1T.O.C.(+0'-6")EENDMGR' DE y I i Q co e S4 roS4 EXTERIOR TYP.$4 ( )F2 F2 u # F4 I I c� D..=4'-0" 1 ---T.O.C. +0'-0"r- Y�-,F1 L_Q__J II I J -- F1 I F1 i ----i I IF1 I I 1 I I IF1 19 I iF1 �F1 (- r-��--iF1 F1 -- Fl (U. N.O.) F1 Fl Flss_ ------ _ _Ga-_ -_ ______ J' �L__________1 L__ _______J L__________J I� L__________J L___ ______J L______________� �+-� r I r_� r____� r____� r__ 1 GB 1 I J I -I I I F I L f ,-_-_ -I I I --I I -' ] J II-- I 7 1 1 I 1 / J L L --'--J Vi F1L-- `�� r -+L_ J L�---�111-I---J L---I-J'L L ----J 1 o- -_-___ __- Ii ---�L---- Tom, --- T -- L_I_J I J L F2 L__J L _J D -(-4 O L� FZ L1____ II___T_ _ ----- _42 ___ I 1 _ __________ F2F2 F I F2 F2 --------- ----------------,- ------------ -- -I ------------- -�-----------„ aCF1 _ _ _p QCF1 13'-8" D.L.=15K I I STEP FTG. L4'-0" "D"=( -4'-O") 1 0"' 10' 8" 1 =(_4 - 1'-0" 15'-4Y2" 4'-5�g' 1'-0" L.L.=6.5K D.L.=5.OK ¢ I DN. 3'-4" SHEAR WALK (ABOVE) (�) i i "D" 0") D.L.=0.7KLF I I L.L.=6.0 K I w 1 1 I I D.L.=3.5KLF L.L.=0.0 KLF (TYP. STEEL = mI 13 L _ L.L.=O KLF In c� i D.L.=3.5KLF I I COLUMNS) S4 I I I I I L.L.=O KLF 2.'1 h1 D.L.=0.8KLF i I I ! HSS1OX6XJ'� - L.L.=D.O KLF 4" CONIC, SLAB (+Cj'-0") 4' CONC. SLAB (+0'-0') I � �z D.L.=4.OK L 1 I I LO I I I L.L.=O.DK F, L 1 I I I 9 I I I �, "D'=( -4'-O") I I 13 m HSS1 2X6xjt" HSS X "-I D.L.=#.OK cc S$ I W/16"PLATE BOTT. r L.L.=(p.OK I a=o i TYP. I TYP. D.L.=0.8KLF (+5'-10g") L J 16 c� D.L.=0.8KLF y� L.L.=0.1 KLF I I I I 5 Fi SHEAR WALL (•)' I i L.L.=0.1 KLF 11 TY11 I D.L.=13KI -213g" o D.L.=9.5K (TYP.) L.L.=6.5 K I "D"=(4-0") I GB -1 I I L.L.=6.5K (TYP.) ---- ----_- ---- ------------------ ----- --------------- F1 F1' F1 F1 F1 F1 I_ F1 F1 (GLULAM COL'S) --I I r1 I_ --s------ I_ �� I I �� - A ' --- Ij I ' M F1 Y 1 N I I I I I I jjjj����111IIIII ,,----- L-- - �_-------------------- -®------------- I_1__-__ ___ N_ _1_ _____ _ _r_ ______ _�_------_____I---I-----------r---F---- _I I____I ' L_ J _ _____ _ _____ - _ _J L_ f 6 -4Yz,. L----- -� L----- J I 2 F1 ----J L--I--JF1 F1 L F1 L I JF1 L JF1 _ L I L 16X20 CONIC. PIER i i i i GB -1 D.L.-0.6KLF T.O.C.(+O'-6') I $ I i 1 I I L.L.=0.0 KLF °� I "D"=( -4'-O") 16X20 CONC. PIEf� _ - S4 D.L.=0.7KLF T.O.C.(+O'-6") EXTERIOR TYP. I I I D.L.=1.8KLF L.L.=O KLF i TYP. (U.N.O.) EXTERIOR TYP. (U.N.O.) L.L.=0.1 KLF, TYP. 4 S4 C-29116' 3'-1 �fi' I (U.N.O. TYP. TYP I S4 ADDITIONAL # 5 BARS EA.FACE, EXTEND BEYOND EDGE OF OPENING 2'-0" 0 I N # 5 X 6'-0" DIAG. EA. FACE (ALL 4 CORNERS) TYPICAL REINF. FOR OPENING Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" THRU C.I.P. WALL SIMILAR REINF. AT ROUND PENETRATIONS MASONRY SCHEDULE MARK REINFORCING 1O 2-# 7 AT 16" O.C. VERT. O2 1-#5 AT 32" O.C. VERTICAL HORIZ. FACE BARS GB -1 LAP LOCATION MAINTAIN 3" SPACING BTWN. BARS DETAIL AT O DETAIL AT O TYP. N FOOTING AND FOUNDATION PLAN -LODGE SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ALL ELEVATIONS REFERENCED TO FINISHED FLOOR LINE (+0'-0") "D" DENOTES DISTANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR LINE TO TOP OF FOOTING OR BOTTOM OF GRADE BEAM "D" = (-4'-0") EXTERIOR "D" = (-0'-8") INTERIOR T.O.C. DENOTES TOP OF CONCRETE T.O.C. = (-0'-8") U.N.O. SLAB ON GRADE: 4" CONCRETE SLAB ON MIN. 6" FREE DRAINING GRANULAR MATERIAL REINF. 6X6 - W1.4 X W1.4 W.W.F. OVEREXCAVATE A MIN. OF 6" FOR SLAB SUPPORT, ADD TENSAR TRIAX TX 140 OR APPROVED EQ. GEOGRID, AND FILL WITH STRUCTURAL FILL. TOP 6" OF FILL SHALL BE FREE DRAINING GRANULAR FILL. FOR DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS NOT SHOWN SEE ARCHITECTURAL SLOPE ALL EXTERIOR STOOP SLABS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS ALL SPREAD FOOTINGS BASED ON A NET ALLOWABLE SOIL BEARING OF 3000 PSF OVER GEOPIER TO BE FINALIZED IN GEOPIER DESIGN BUILD. GRADE BEAMS SIZED FOR MAXIMUM SPAN OF 15'-0" BETWEEN GEOPIERS; GEOPIER LOCATIONS TO BE FINALIZED IN GEOPIER DESIGN BUILD. GLULAM COLUMNS: 10 3/4" X 13 1/2" GLULAM COLUMNS (U.N.O.) STEEL COLUMNS: HSS3X3X5/16" (U.N.O.) FOOTING LOADS ARE VERTICAL SERVICE LOADS. ADDITIONAL LOADING ON SPREAD FOOTINGS FROM ECCENTRIC HORIZONTAL LOADING NOT SHOWN. * SHEAR WALL TO INCLUDE SHEATHING ON INTERIOR FACE, DOUBLE STUDS AT ENDS, AND SIMPSON DSP CONNECTIONS TO TOP PLATE & SILL PLATE AT DOUBLE END STUDS. GRADE BEAM SCHEDULE MARK SIZE WxD REINFORCING TOP BARS BOTT. BARS STIRRUPS HORIZ. FACE BARS GB -1 12X40 2-#6 2-#6 #4 ® 12" O.C. #4 ® 8"O.C. GB -2 24X40 4-#5 4-#5 #4 ® 12" O.C. #4 0 8"O.C. GB -3 31.5X40 4-#5 4-#5 #4 ® 12" O.C. #4 ® 8"O.C. o: 00 1 - ""LEY FEB 21 2012 All s >a"I'l City Clerk lowa Ci -v, 1'sw SPREAD FOOTING SCHEDULE MARK SIZE REINFORCING F1 4' -0"x4' -0"x1'-0" 4-#5 EA. WAY, BOTT. F2 3'-0"x3'-0"xt'-O" 3-#5 EA, WAY, BOTT. F3 5'-0"x4'-0"xi'-O" 5-#5 EA. WAY, BOTT. F4 6'-0"x4'-Q"X1'-0" 6-# 5 SHORT WAY 4-# 5 LONG WAY BOTT. CF1 4'-6"x1'-0" CONT, FTG. 5-#5 CONT. cul 1e"""*v_1mm17rC ,.a V, LA M 1 so4m_ 2409 GRAND AVENUE DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 Q z O Q W LLI F_ 1 w W U O OO Q J V J O gC/3o C Q J z m IIII- LLJ < O E-- LL W z Q Q n� Z W Z LL �+ 111.0253 L Sheet S2 7 C37717�� o: a z N JL R N Qi ii � C4 ~' O r � m O Lu K v o N Q o Q c m p Z r Z of U p d Lu H a IT 0Ld O m N N d a 0 m U� O N o LL � N z v LuOr a LLI a n 0, U a Cp � 3N '� Q n w n O U 1..1.E MJ OM m LLI 0- to ^ L ¢ N C/)Zto O <LID Z uj Y Ln Z C'4 CQ N LLI - Q z O Q W LLI F_ 1 w W U O OO Q J V J O gC/3o C Q J z m IIII- LLJ < O E-- LL W z Q Q n� Z W Z LL �+ 111.0253 L Sheet S2 7 S5 SIM, 1 12'-8" 2 12'-8" 3 12'-8" 4 12'-8" 5 12'-8" 6 12'-8" 7 12'-8" 8 12'-8" 9 12'-8" 1 12'-8" 11 12'-8" 1 12'-8" 1 12'-8" 1c 2 Q4 .8 I 5 i 4.1 5 Q8 8"CONT. BOND BEAMI 2 A j 8.4 8.5 9.8 S5 ! (+12'-0")&(+9'-4") 1'! 8'-6" 8'-4" -�" W/2-# 5 CONT. I 7%" 12 I I I 1'- 7)/2" L3-3" 7'-OYZ 7'-0 6' 7'-O t6" 7'-5%r," 7'-5 t6 7'-5`Yj6' 6' 45/t6' 6'-45/6 6,' 4�6' 6'-4�6' i i Ss H555;X54Xj" SS (+7'_g") HSS16X X " —11 " ' 1„ HSS16X4 +10-11� W8X10 \ w HSSS}x5}x4 (+7'—�") x �N L4 4XJ" CONT. 1U x x I L6X g"ANGLE — — — �- — — — I — — — — — cxo I 00 FRA E (TYP.) - --r-- 00 Ln 'b 00 co $5 a 8X10 co -3 ----_--- --x co co co 5< 7< 3 3 co 00I I x 00 o 00 - I a 10 1 TYP. 5 x16} GLULAM 4 ZHS95X5 ±- rr --- 1-= = -- -- =�— I 3 pc o BEAM(m;ICA�) L _ r90 s5 (+17-11I" ss �_—= ---� 1 ITYP. qss1I IM. LAS I CON Jk TT I I t 8'-0" 6" MAX. o (TYP.) 1 48" MAX. 48" MAX I ROOF SHEATHING NAILING PATTERN N ----- t ---- X10__ I SHE - WALL (ABO E) I 8"CONT.IBOND BEAM W/2-# CONT. �E II ALL II II II I I I S I M. I I I II II I I I I II I I II It SHEA ---- WALL I ---- ---- ---- --- WALL ---- --r ---- - -- I -_-_ �! -- ---- ---- ---- I --r ---- - -- t - - S5 NOTE: END OF GLULAM TO BE INSIDE WALL 2 I TYP. 12'-8" 12'-8" I I I I I I I I 14 TYP. 8"CONT. BON I BEAM (+12'-0") W/ -# 5 CONT. 55 I N I I I M M I I ---------------- TOP MASONRY Yp DD00 (+12'-0") 58"x16" GLULAM OPEN BLOCKING (TYP.) (TYP. I III 20 �n S4 0 TYP 58"X16,4" GLULAM - BEAM (+10'-0") _(4=THUS) _—_� 00 I ROOF FRAMING PLAN -LODGE SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ALL ELEVATIONS REFERENCED TO FINISHED FIRST FLOOR LINE (+0'-0") (+10'-3 1/2") DENOTES DISTANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR LINE TO TOP OF BEAM OR BOND BEAM TOP STEEL BEAMS: (+10'-3 1/2") U.N.O. ROOF DECK HIGH: 2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING (U.N.O.) ROOF DECK LOW: 1 1/2"-18 GA. STEEL ROOF DECK TYPE "B" FOR DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS NOT SHOWN SEE ARCHITECTURAL GLULAM BEAM & COLUMN LOADS: D.L. = 25 PSF L.L. = 20 PSF WIND PER IBC 2009 GLULAM BEAM & COLUMN SHALL BE DESIGNED AS RIGID FRAME IN ORDER TO ADEQUATELY SUPPORT D.L., L.L AND W.L. IN THE STRONG AXIS OF THE RIGID FRAME. W.L. IN WEAK AXIS OF THE RIGID FRAME, LOWER ROOF, AND MASONRY WALL ALONG N.E. CORNER NEED NOT BE INCLUDED IN GLULAM FRAME ANALYSIS. SHEAR WALL NOTES: 1. SHEATING SHALL BE 1/2" APA RATED 24/16, EXP 1 OR BETTER PLYWOOD OR O.S.B. 2. WOOD SHEATHING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING WITH 10d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT 6" O.C. AT PANEL EDGES AND 6" O.C. AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. TOLING AND GROOVE SOLID WOOD DECKING: 1. DECKING SHALL BE 2X6 TOUNGE & GROOVE SOLID DECKING OR EQUAL. 2. DECKING SHALL BE PLACED IN RANDOM LENGTHS CONTINUOUS CONFIGURATION. 3. DECKING SHALL BE TOE NAILED WITH 6d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT 30" O.C. ALONG EACH COURSE, OFFSET 15" IN ADJOINING COURSES. END JOINT NAILS WITHIN 12" MAX. EACH SIDE. 4. DECKING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING WITH 2-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS PER COURSE. USE 3-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT BOUNDARY MEMBERS. ROOF SHEATHING NOTES: 1. ROOF SHEATHING SHALL BE 1/2" MINIMUM APA RATED 24/16, EXP. 1 OR BETTER PLYWOOD OR O.S.B. 2. MAXIMUM HEIGHT TO LENGTH RATIO OF SHEATHING IS 2:1. 3. SHEATHING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD DECKING WITH 1-1/2", 16 GA. STAPLES (MIN. 1" PENETRATION INTO WOOD DECKING) AT 6" O.C. AT BOUNDARY AND AT INTERMEDIATE LINES OF SHEATHING. 4. STAGGER SHEATHING JOINTS. 0 FE8 21 ;-; ,, 4:sq e7 City C. www Uri, luwZ 2409 GRAND AVENUE DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 7m w w O w z o Q M Y (1) LL L N O v N O T ,V/Ij r c Z TrY c c m Z w a 0 0Oo N mJ N J_ w 0cn � o � co C) 2 m \/) p Q N 1N_ o � m LL z N J � m N SW L A Lu U_ ILrn IL ~ �m ZQ N Y �7 O F N Q d w " U MJ N m O WO r o o V ^ / z O 1 } L6 z UsYu) ` N Z 1/..1L I' Q N W Q z 0 cn Q W W Ir Q w V O 0 u:) O 0 Q CO O W W A� E z W LL LL F_ cc O 111.0253 1 Sheet S3 II 562 7 S6 6 S5 S I S5 5j"x16}" GLULAMI IM. I II c N BEAMS (TYP.) II ii TYP. (SLOPE) $ I I II I I I I I s6 HSS1OX8X�' S6 II 2 SOL II WOOD D KING l (T P.) II 11 , I I I S6 ___ I I I I I i I I I I I I 8 " 3 E) SPACES 83, sf> 7 (TYP. GLULAM 58"x16l" GLULAM SS BEAM SPACING) BEAM (TYPICAL) TYP. TYP. 8'-0" 6" MAX. o (TYP.) 1 48" MAX. 48" MAX I ROOF SHEATHING NAILING PATTERN N ----- t ---- X10__ I SHE - WALL (ABO E) I 8"CONT.IBOND BEAM W/2-# CONT. �E II ALL II II II I I I S I M. I I I II II I I I I II I I II It SHEA ---- WALL I ---- ---- ---- --- WALL ---- --r ---- - -- I -_-_ �! -- ---- ---- ---- I --r ---- - -- t - - S5 NOTE: END OF GLULAM TO BE INSIDE WALL 2 I TYP. 12'-8" 12'-8" I I I I I I I I 14 TYP. 8"CONT. BON I BEAM (+12'-0") W/ -# 5 CONT. 55 I N I I I M M I I ---------------- TOP MASONRY Yp DD00 (+12'-0") 58"x16" GLULAM OPEN BLOCKING (TYP.) (TYP. I III 20 �n S4 0 TYP 58"X16,4" GLULAM - BEAM (+10'-0") _(4=THUS) _—_� 00 I ROOF FRAMING PLAN -LODGE SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" ALL ELEVATIONS REFERENCED TO FINISHED FIRST FLOOR LINE (+0'-0") (+10'-3 1/2") DENOTES DISTANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR LINE TO TOP OF BEAM OR BOND BEAM TOP STEEL BEAMS: (+10'-3 1/2") U.N.O. ROOF DECK HIGH: 2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING (U.N.O.) ROOF DECK LOW: 1 1/2"-18 GA. STEEL ROOF DECK TYPE "B" FOR DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS NOT SHOWN SEE ARCHITECTURAL GLULAM BEAM & COLUMN LOADS: D.L. = 25 PSF L.L. = 20 PSF WIND PER IBC 2009 GLULAM BEAM & COLUMN SHALL BE DESIGNED AS RIGID FRAME IN ORDER TO ADEQUATELY SUPPORT D.L., L.L AND W.L. IN THE STRONG AXIS OF THE RIGID FRAME. W.L. IN WEAK AXIS OF THE RIGID FRAME, LOWER ROOF, AND MASONRY WALL ALONG N.E. CORNER NEED NOT BE INCLUDED IN GLULAM FRAME ANALYSIS. SHEAR WALL NOTES: 1. SHEATING SHALL BE 1/2" APA RATED 24/16, EXP 1 OR BETTER PLYWOOD OR O.S.B. 2. WOOD SHEATHING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING WITH 10d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT 6" O.C. AT PANEL EDGES AND 6" O.C. AT INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. TOLING AND GROOVE SOLID WOOD DECKING: 1. DECKING SHALL BE 2X6 TOUNGE & GROOVE SOLID DECKING OR EQUAL. 2. DECKING SHALL BE PLACED IN RANDOM LENGTHS CONTINUOUS CONFIGURATION. 3. DECKING SHALL BE TOE NAILED WITH 6d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT 30" O.C. ALONG EACH COURSE, OFFSET 15" IN ADJOINING COURSES. END JOINT NAILS WITHIN 12" MAX. EACH SIDE. 4. DECKING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING WITH 2-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS PER COURSE. USE 3-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT BOUNDARY MEMBERS. ROOF SHEATHING NOTES: 1. ROOF SHEATHING SHALL BE 1/2" MINIMUM APA RATED 24/16, EXP. 1 OR BETTER PLYWOOD OR O.S.B. 2. MAXIMUM HEIGHT TO LENGTH RATIO OF SHEATHING IS 2:1. 3. SHEATHING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD DECKING WITH 1-1/2", 16 GA. STAPLES (MIN. 1" PENETRATION INTO WOOD DECKING) AT 6" O.C. AT BOUNDARY AND AT INTERMEDIATE LINES OF SHEATHING. 4. STAGGER SHEATHING JOINTS. 0 FE8 21 ;-; ,, 4:sq e7 City C. www Uri, luwZ 2409 GRAND AVENUE DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 7m w w O w z o Q M Y (1) LL L N O v N O T ,V/Ij r c Z TrY c c m Z w a 0 0Oo N mJ N J_ w 0cn � o � co C) 2 m \/) p Q N 1N_ o � m LL z N J � m N SW L A Lu U_ ILrn IL ~ �m ZQ N Y �7 O F N Q d w " U MJ N m O WO r o o V ^ / z O 1 } L6 z UsYu) ` N Z 1/..1L I' Q N W Q z 0 cn Q W W Ir Q w V O 0 u:) O 0 Q CO O W W A� E z W LL LL F_ cc O 111.0253 1 Sheet S3 10j"X134" GLULAM _Ya' COL'S (TYP.) 1"SIDE & }"BOTT. PLATES W/2-j"DIA. THRU BOLTS 8"STD. PIPE X 1'-5" PLATE 12XJX1'- GONC. PIER (SEE PLAN) - VERT. REINF. —(SEE SCHED) (GROUT SOLID) DWLS X 6'-D" AT - VERT. REINF. SAME SIZE & SPACING AS VERT. REINF. �T. 0. C. # 5 AT 12" O.C.E.W. STD. 90' HK. J SEE FTG. SCHED. (TYPICAL) FOR SIZE & REINF HSS10X6 HSS8X6 8„ "D" M 1 SECTION Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" PLATE 12"X1j"X1'-4" 00 W/8- J"DIA. THREADED RODS W/DOUBLE NUTS TOP c 14"NON-SHRINK GROUT � 5" PROJECTION iD 1 HSS3X3 SHEAR WALL SEE PLAN 2X6 STUDS AT� 16" O.C. 2'-0" N_7O # 5 DWLS X _ AT 24" O.C. =sof-- T.O.0 J 4' # 5 DWLS X 4'-0" __� AT 24" O.C. GRADE BEAM (SEE SCHED.) "D" -PLATE 9X1X0'-9" W/4- a"DIA. THREADED RODS W/DOUBLE NUTS TOP 1}"NON-SHRINK GROUT 5" PROJECTION l V A 101"X131' GLULAM COL'S (TYP.) —SHEATHING,y4'Y 3/4' 2X6 TREATED PLATE. 10j"X13j" GLULAM W/"DIA. BOLTS AT 24" COL'S (TYP.) 3/a' �a 1" O.C. (GROUT ENTIRE lidWALL SOLID) 1"SIDE & J"BOTT. PLATES T.O.C. W/2 -"DIA. THRU BOLTS —6"CMU D' SEE FTG. SCHED. FOR SIZE & REINF. 2 SECTION Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 1'-8%" PREF. JOINT PLATE 5j"X1X0'-11" MATERIAL 2„ W/4- J"DIA. THREADED RODS PLATE 10X1XO'-10' _ `. W/DOUBLE NUTS TOP =N W/4- 1"DIA. THREADED RODS 1"NON-SHRINK GROUT W/DOUBLE NUTS TOP 5' PROJECTION 1j"NON-SHRINK GROUT N 5PROJECTION GRADE BEAM_ -it (SEE SCHED.) ..N 5z 5j" 'N i 5' 5" HSS4X4 EXTERIOR WALL COL. HS54X4 INTERIOR COL. 1 9„ 1"„ PLATE 1 W/4- J"DIA. DIA. THREADED RODS W/DOUBLE NUTS TOP 14"NON-SHRINK GROUT 5" PROJECTION N HSS5X5 6 BASE PLATE DETAILS SEE PLAN FOR LOCATION OF STEP DOWN # 5 AT 12" O.C. 2'-0" 3 . 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. 8"CMU (GROUT —� ENTIRE WALL SOLID) SEE SEE SECT. 1 FOR CONN. CONC. PIER (SEE PLAN) STD. 90' HK. (TYPICAL) VERT. REINF. (SEE SCHED.) (GROUT SOLID) DWLS X 6'-0" AT VERT. REINF. SAME SIZE & SPACING AS VERT. REItJ,F� T.O.C. 2'-0" // 5 DWLS X AT 24' O.C. N (TYPICAL) MITER CORNER AN FULL PENN. SHOP 2-2X6 CONT. (TREATED) W/21"DIA. A. B. AT 24" O.C. SEE 2„ T. 0. C. z aw # 5 DWLS X 4'-0" 3" R. AT 24" O.C. (GROUT SOLID) Zn w � EQUAL "D' GRADE BEAM REINF, SAME SIZE (SEE SCHED) AND NUMBER AS CONT. HORIZ. REINF. 2'-0" M GEOPIER 14 SECTION Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 13 TYP. FOOTING STEP DN. DETAIL Stale: 1/2"=1'-0" PLATE 12XJX1'-0 L-8"STD. PIPE X 1'-5" 3 SECTION Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" A WINDOW (SEE ARCH.) 2-2X6 CONT. 2X6 STUBS AT 16' O.C. 2X6 CONT. (TREATED) PREF. JOINT W/4"DIA. A. B. AT 24" O.C. MATERIAL p, 6"CMU (GROUT ENTIRE WALL SOLID) ---FT. 0. C. 34 # 5 DWLS X 4'-0" AT 24" O.C. (GROUT SOLID) "D" GRADE BEAM (SEE SCHED.) 8 SECTION Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 1"END PLATE 15 SECTION Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 8-# 7 VERT. # 4 TIES AT 12" LINE JD # 4 AT 12" O.C.E.W. # 4 x 3'-0 (FIELD BEND) ---I a —. 2'-0" o 1 ATT2244"" O.C.OWLON GRADE BEAM (SEE SCHED.) 2X6 STUDS AT 12" O.C. PREF. JOINT-\ MATERIAL 4" L -T.O.C. LOOSE FILL „D,r o a"DIA. THREADED ROD f.0. C. I SINGLE NUT (SPOIL THIRDS.) AT 12" O.C.E.W. ANCHOR BOLT DETAIL 5 Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" D" 4 SECTION THRU STOOP Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 8" 8" _ 2X6 CONT. (TREATED) W/j"DIA. A. B. AT 24" O.C. — 6"CMU (GROUT ENTIRE WALL SOLID) T LT.O. C. 5 DWLS X 4'-0" AT 24" O.C. GRADE BEAM (SEE SCHED.) 9 SECTION Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" U16 DETAIL Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 8.4 6Yz' 1'-0" L. 6-# 7 VERT. 1y2' # 4 TIES AT 12" O.C. c - — SEE FTG. SCHED. FOR SIZE & REINF. 19 DETAIL Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 6-# 7 VERT. # 4 TIES AT DETAIL 10 Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 8" 8" 6-# 7 VERT. # 4 TIES AT 12" O.C. GROUT CORES SOLID AT REINF. (TYP.) �4-# 6 VERT. # 2 TIES AT 8"O.C. 8"X16" REINFORCED MASONRY PIER SHOWN, OTHER MASONRY PIERS SIZES SIMILAR. 12 REINF. MASONRY PIER DETAIL N.T.S. A-# 7 VERT. 4 TIES AT 12" O.C. 11 DETAIL Sole: 1/2"=1'-0" 17 DETAIL Sole: 1/2"=1'-0" # 5 AT 12" O. C. E. W. 10" 1, 1'-0"11 2, -Dir, 3Y8„ �GB1 0 A N I g I 1� N U DETAIL 10 Scale: 1/2"=1'-0" 8" 8" 6-# 7 VERT. # 4 TIES AT 12" O.C. GROUT CORES SOLID AT REINF. (TYP.) �4-# 6 VERT. # 2 TIES AT 8"O.C. 8"X16" REINFORCED MASONRY PIER SHOWN, OTHER MASONRY PIERS SIZES SIMILAR. 12 REINF. MASONRY PIER DETAIL N.T.S. A-# 7 VERT. 4 TIES AT 12" O.C. 11 DETAIL Sole: 1/2"=1'-0" 17 DETAIL Sole: 1/2"=1'-0" # 5 AT 12" O. C. E. W. 10" 1, 1'-0"11 2, -Dir, 3Y8„ �GB1 nT 8-# 7 VERT. # 4 TIES AT 12 O.C. (16"X18") CORE 1'-5W" 2'-7V v1PSON CJT5 CONCEALED ULAM HANGER (TYP.) "X16j" GLULAM _OCKING (SEE PLAN) 20 SECTION Sole: 1/2"_V -0r, 18 DETAIL Stale: 1/2"=1'4" FEB 21 2012 H:51 ant GB3 eu' vw%v_mmrr 2409 GRAND AVENUE \� 1%j%1101X,LSI " '0+ DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 Y 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 m O W': H O z o U) a m m N $ ® N N x L N [n t- z O > m O w '8 U 0 1n N C p m z CD z W m m w H a` a O mm 2 N a2Q 3f N J V W ZS o2 C) �� Cn m Q Cn o LL LN ca Z m N ui s W APE: a O w ^ U G co c+> J0 M woo W uj Lu < o V ) O m } rn z `O N Z �a N ui m Z o Cn W u I--- w U � o C/.) o to O Lu D H �Y � L1... Z w U) O W W Z U) Cf� = N I I N 1� 8-# 7 VERT. # 4 TIES AT 12 O.C. (16"X18") CORE 1'-5W" 2'-7V v1PSON CJT5 CONCEALED ULAM HANGER (TYP.) "X16j" GLULAM _OCKING (SEE PLAN) 20 SECTION Sole: 1/2"_V -0r, 18 DETAIL Stale: 1/2"=1'4" FEB 21 2012 H:51 ant GB3 eu' vw%v_mmrr 2409 GRAND AVENUE \� 1%j%1101X,LSI " '0+ DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 Y 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 m O W': H O z o U) a m m N $ ® N N x L N [n t- z O > m O w '8 U 0 1n N C p m z CD z W m m w H a` a O mm 2 N a2Q 3f N J V W ZS o2 C) �� Cn m Q Cn o LL LN ca Z m N ui s W APE: a O w ^ U G co c+> J0 M woo W uj Lu < o V ) O m } rn z `O N Z �a N ui m Z o Cn W u I--- w U � o C/.) o to O Lu D H �Y � L1... Z w U) O W W Z U) Cf� 5'-31a„ 3” E 3". 9° 9" WELDED 4"DIA. THIRD. RODS AT 24" D.C. STONE (SEE ARCH.) (+5'-10a") - 3-4"DIA. THUR BOLTS (4 -ROWS) TYP. " O.S.B/PLYWOOD " PLATE 12 2-16d NAILS AT 12" O.C. (TYP.) 12. ADD BLOCKING AS REQ'D 2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING 5X"X161" GLULAM BEAMS (TYP.) II � 2X4 W.P.(+17'-54") —SHEATHING O.C. OR SIMPSON EG5 1"DIA. BOLTS AT 4" SIDE P4LA HANGER CONN. (TYPICAL) _ (TYPICAL) AT 16" D.C. (TYP.) (24" O.C. AT GLULAM 58'X162' GLULAM BEAM (+12'-0") SHEAR WALLS DO NOT PLACE 2X6 WALL 10 STUD DIRECTLY UNDER 2'-0" # 5 DWLS GLULAM BM. (TYP.), LEAVE SHEAR WALL 12" CLR. EA. WAY FROM REINF. (SEE PLAN) NEAREST WALL STUD TO GLULAM BEAM, (TYP.) SHEAR WALL (SEE PLAN) SEE ARCH. FOR MEMBER SIZE t' TYP, i-- � a' PLATE 4XAXO'-8" W/2-j"DIA. X 5" HD. STUDS (TYP.) VERT. REINF. (SEE PLAN) (GROUT SOLID) 63/4" 63/4" I I • 104"X 131" GLULAM COL. (TYP.) 2'-3j" 1 SECTION $Crile: 1"=1'-0" 10)2"tHSS & STUDS FIREPLACE FRAMING 2X8 STUDS AT 12" O.C. (SEE ARCH.) a 3 3-2X12'S, CONN. TO HSS W/SIMPSON THA426-2 AND A35 AT TOP, CONN. TO WOOD W/TYP. FRAMING (BEARING ON TWO 2X8 MIN. ) W/SIMPSON A35 BOTTOM PLATE AT TOP LdBOTTOM 13 SECTION Scale: 1"=V-0" L4X4X4" CONT. ;n • + TYP, EA. 4 BEAM 10 2'-0" # 5 DWLS X AT VERT. REINF. STONE (SEE ARCH.) 75/e" 8" 43/a 5 SECTION Scale: 1"=1'-0" 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. 12 (TYP.) 2.5 I 2-2x6'.5 2-2X6 CONT. - 2X4 STUDS AT —SHEATHING O.C. OR 2X6 1"DIA. BOLTS AT 16" 24" O.C. _2X6 STUDS AT 16" D.C. (TYP.) (24" O.C. AT GLULAM BEAM) SHEATHING AT (+12'-0") SHEAR WALLS 10 2'-0" # 5 DWLS X SHEAR WALL AT VERT. REINF. (SEE PLAN) VERT. REINF. (SEE PLAN) (GROUT SOLID) STONE (SEE ARCH.) 1"DIA. BOLTS AT 32" O.C. (STAGG L4X4X4' CONT. TYP. EA. BM. 4 L4X3X6" EA. SIDE — 2-2X6 CONT (TYPICAL) 6 SECTION Scale: 1"=1'-0" 4" O.S.B/PLYWOOD 2-16d NAILS AT 12" O.C. (TYP.) ADD BLOCKING AS REQ'D 2-2x6's 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. (24" O.C. AT GLULAM BEAM) SECTION COL 2 Scale: 1"=V-0" ' SIDE PLATES 3-4"DIA. THUR BOLTS r(4 -ROWS) TYP. 91, 9, 3, 3„ (TYPICAL) WOOD W.P. (+10'-0 ;6 SOLID )OD DECKING 5A"X161" GLULAM BEAM SIMPSON EG5 HANGER CONN. 58'X161" GLULAM (TYPICAL) BEAMS (TYP.) 2-16d NAILS AT _ 12" O.C. (TYP.) ADD BLOCKING AS ;CH.) REQ'D 12 2.5 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. 4-HILTI X -U FASTENERS OR EQUAL 11 S5 DO NOT PLACE 2X6 WALL SIM. STUD DIRECTLY UNDER GLULAM BM. (TYP.), LEAVE 12" CLR. EA. WAY FROM NEAREST WALL STUD TO GLULAM BEAM, (TYP.) 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. (TYP.) SHEATHING AT SHEAR WALL 1" PLATE _2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING 4" SIDE PLATES (TYPICAL) t W.P. (+10'-0") 5j"X161" GLULAM BEAM (NOTCH AS REQ'D) TYP. SIMPSON EG5 HANGER CONN. ( TYPICAL) 3-4"DIA. THUR BOLTS q (4 -ROWS) TYP. m 674" 674' 83/16 83/16, " O.S.B/PLYWOOD 3'-9{" —ELEV. VARIES 5A"X161" GLULAM BEAMS (TYP.) 2-2X6 CONT. - 2X6 STUDS AT 12" O.C. 3 SECTION Scale: 58'X16}" GLULAM 3" 3" 9" 9" 3" 3" 4"THRU BOLTS BEAMS (TYP.) (TYPICAL) 1 "P ATE N _ 3-4"DIA. THRU BOLTS (4 -ROWS) j L 4" SIDE PLATES 104"X131" GLULAM (TYPICAL) COL. (TYP.) 4 DETAIL Scale: 1"=1'4' " PLATE 2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. L �1" O.S.B/PLYWOOD 5A"X161" GLULAM BEAMS (TYP.) WINDOW (SEE ARCH.) 1-6Ca ECTION 7 CEie:1"=V-0" 2X6 STUDS A AT 16" O.C. O.S.B/PLYWOOD 58'X161" GLULAM BEAMS (TYP.) 2-2x6's 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. (24" O.C. AT GLULAM BEAM) 73/4 2'-73/4" $ SECTION Scale: L5X3X4" X 0'-2" EA. SIDE W/2-1""DIA. THRU BOLTS & 1-1"DIA. X 6" LAG BOLTS L4X3Xi%" INTO GLULAM EA. SIDE 2X6 SOLID �� -- WOOD DECKING \-W.P. (+10'-0") \---5j"X161" GLULAM BEAM BEAM 12 2.5 SEE PLAN -L4X4X4" CONT. TYP. EA. 4 BEAM RET. 1" 4 EA. END 4"CAP PLATE W/4-4"DIA. BOLTS 9 SECTION Scale: 1"=1'-0" �L3X3X4" CONT. TYP. 4 10 SECTION Scale: E 5X" ELEV. VARI 2-2X4 OR 2-2X6 CONT. - 2X4 STUDS AT 12" O.C. OR 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. 5y2" 2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING 4-N0. 14 WOOD SCREWS MIN. 1"' EMBED. 16"X6"BENT PLATE AT 48" O.C. (MAX.) TYP. INTERIOR TOP WALL SUPPORT Scale: 1"=1'-0" ILEI AL CAP FEB 2 2012 ARCH.) q:6rf piq City Clerk (+7'-8") Iowa City, Iowa 2-2X6 CONT. 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. Am "„ —FE COL. 8"STIFF. PLATE EA. SIDE q WELDED THIRD. 24' 24" RODS AT 24" O.C. 12 SECTION Scale: 1"=1'-0" STONE CAP E (SEE ARCH.) 10 �2'-0„ 6'y4" 63/a„ # 5 DWLS X AT VERT. REINF. VERT. REINF. (+10'-0") (SEE PLAN) GROUT SOLID) 5A"X161" GLULAM BEAM (SEE PLAN) TREATED L6X4X6"X5" EA. SIDE 2X8 X 2'- (L.L.V.) W/4"DIA. THRU BOLT & 2' DIA. A.B. (MIN. 7"EMBED.) (GROUT SOLID) 2'-31" 14 SECTION Scale: 3/4"=1'-0" cui v-%u� M c m 0 W O Z LO U) Y mh L N LL L C0 N H � z 0 m 04 w O -8 .6 to .2 O N O c a z yy .0 tJ 6 Y C L m z grm S m w a i O �i �t Lj W N O= J [O W o,' E5 Cis o ¢ " 1 o LCL � LLN z �N J� m " W 5 W F aN 5" O aize U M J � m o ui LLJ C14 � o //may N v' O� Q m>6 6Y� ` N Z Ir..IL r-- Q N 1 ui LL Z o U, Q Lu W Er q< w U o VJ o cn O 4< coCn 4D6W LUW 0 Cr Z W Q O W W V� U) 2409 GRAND AVENUE DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 515/243-4477 111.0253 City File No. PA261 Sheet S5 r L5X3X4" X 0'- W/2-j""DIA, T & 1-j"DIA, X INTO GLULAM 5j"X16j (+10'-32" }"SHEATHING - ELEV. (+19'-0") 2X6 AT 12" O.C.- 2-2X8 CONT. (TYPICAL) 2X8 AT 12" O.C. 4 SECTION Scale: 7Y4"1 1'-33/4" I7Y„ 1:"BENT PLATE W/2-4"LAG BOLTS W/1-4"DIA. LAG BOLT EA. STUD IN VERT. 1 SLOTTED HOLE ELEV. VARIES -i 1 II 1 5j"x16}" GLULAM BEAMS (TYP.) (SLOPE) ISI PSON Ws2„ UD 2X4 AT 12" O.C. GLULAM SPACING (SEE PLAN) 11 SECTION scale: 1/2'=1'-0" &ESEICTION Sole: 1"=1'-0" ATE 1/4 3 -SIMPS MSTA18 STRP COL. (BEYOND) CLs (SEE PLAN) c� SIMPSON HDU4-SDS2.5 5/8" DIA. EPDXY W/6"MIN, EMBED. INTO GRADE BM. METAL ROOF DECK 103q"X13" GLU COL. (TYP.) 2-6 �(+10'-31") 3-2X6'S W/PLYWOOD SPACERS NOTCH 2X6 AS REQ'ALLOW FOR FLUSH FINISH ATT BO BOLTS 1/2" THRU BOLTS 1/2" OSB OR PLYWOOD Arl \� RIP STUDS TO ALLOW 2X6's ® 16" O.C. FLUSH SURFACE FOR FINISH BOARD (RIP TO 5") 1/2" OSB OR PLYWOOD RIP STUDS TO ALLOW FLUSH SURFACE FOR FINISH BOARD O.S.B/PLYWOOD A 3-4"DIA. THUR BOLTS C B (4 -ROWS) TYP. 3'-4)4" a' SIDE PLATES (TYPICAL) 3" 3" 9" 9" 3" 3" 1'-3Y4" HSS3jX3jX4" X V 0" 1" PLATE W/J"SHIM PLATE ELD DECK TO HSS 5 2X6 SOLID +j� TYP. WOOD DECKING TYP. L4X4X4" L3X3X4" TYP. CONT. EA. SIDE 3L TOE ONLY 4 r r rtr� r2" r/ (+10'-0) BOTT. (+9'-1J") J"CAP PLATE RET. 0.5" �4 63/4' TOP WINDOV 6 5X3X4" (L.L.V.) W/2-2'DIA. L4X3X" (L. L. V.) X 6" LAG BOLTS W/HOIRZ. y SLOTTED HOLES (TYP. EA. SIDE) X 0'-9" TOP & BOTT. EXTEND 1" PLATE ASSIMPSON EG5 REO'D FOR CONN., 2-4"DIA. HANGER CONN. GLULAM GLULAM SPACING X 6" LAG BOLTS BOTTOM COL. (SEE PLAN) COL'S (TYPICAL) (+20'-0^), SEE ARCH. FOR �_ CHIMNEY VENT 2 SECTION 10 2-2X8 IN 3 SECTION Scale: 1"=V-0" 56 6'3" 74" 9'1 7Y4" s� ' scale: 1"=1'-0" X6's 0 16" O.C. 3 -2X6 W/ PLYWOOD SPACERS 2X6's ® 16" O.C. (RIP TO 5") 6 SECTION Scale: 1 ELEVATION SHEAR WALL Sole: 3/4" =1'-0" _4X3XA" -A. SIDE CAP PLATE 3 —SIMPSON MSTA18 STRAPS 0 2X8 AT 12" O.C. 2-2X8 TIE AT EA. STONE (SEE ARCH.) "DIA. BOLT CONN. 2-2X8 BLOCKING BTWN. W/SIMPSON SSP TOP STUDS CONN. W/SIMPSON & BOTT. EA. SIDE HUC28-2 (TYP.) (TYPICAL) L6X4Xjj" CONT. (GALV.) TREATED 2X10'S CONT. (L.L.H.) W/�"DIA. THRU BOLTS AT 24" O.C. ELEV. VARIES W/2X2X4"PLATE WASHER (TYP. EA. SIDE) SIMPSON DTC EA. 5g"x16 " GLULAM STUD BEAMS (TYP.) 2 M N. (SLOPE) 2X4 STUDS AT 12" O.C. �"BENT PLATE W/2-14. LAG BOLTS W/1-4"DIA. LAG BOLT EA. STUD IN VERT. SLOTTED HOLE 9 SECTION Scale: l/2"=1'-0" 2X8 AT 12" O.C. SIMPSON HDU4-SDS2.5 W/ 5/8" DIA. EPDXY A.B. W/6"MIN. EMBED. INTO GRADE BM. 2 - SIMPSON HUC28-2 (TYP.) L6X4X&” C( (L. L. H.) J"DIA. THRU BOLTS AT 2-2X8'S Sf BLOCKING (TYP.) 9" -4„ 2X6 STUDS AT 16" O.C. 5'8"X162"' GLULAM BEAMS (TYP.) (SEE ARCH.) �'s ® 16" O.C. UDS AT 12" O.C. SON SSP STRAP AND BOTT. 1-2X8'S TIE EA. SIDE OF BOLT 10 DETAIL Scale: 1 ,_,'l T -. FEB 21 2012 L[: 5 f Pr2 Ciry Clerk kwa Clly, Iowa L 2-2X6 FULL HT. FIREPLACE (SEE ARCH.) S -SIMPSON 4STA18 STRAPS SIMPSON HDU4-SDS2.5 W/ 5/8" DIA. EPDXY A.B. W/6"MIN. EMBED. INTO GRADE BM. I T.O.C. 2 -2X6 z 2X6 CONT. WITH 4"DIA. ' A.B. AT 24" O.C. $ ELEVATION SHEAR WALL Scale: 3/4" = 1'-0" Cul vv%v_m01T'C0!4m 2409 GRAND AVENUE DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 m Lu W H- O Z th D U) a JL $ 5 N N C0 H � z o N m O W a1 M U NU) Q � O c o Z Y c m z o m w` u Go CE O Go N N o,6 m iLI r b U <� �m (� 0 ¢N LL L' N Z J mN W L) 5 LUa� qN K�`7 O N Q a� oM U �� CL M oM 7 N J O� [D W x<o !� N VJ co Oco U) Z Lb 2 z Y Lo ^ z LL N a N W Z O Cf) W w�— LL w U O V O Cn O W J W F. Z W < \:j O / w W z H CZ 111.0253 Sheet S6 4,3'-4" L FIN. FLOOR L—(+9'-8") LINE (+0'-0") LL -.— 2X6 CONT. GLULAM BEAM "BENT PLATE W/2 -'DIA. iv (SEE PLAN) LAG BOLTS X 5" & 2 -}"DIA. T.O.C. THRU BOLTS 4-# 8 OWLS X 6'-6" }"SIDE & BOTT. PLATE TYP. CONC. PIER a W/2-4"DIA. THRU BOLTS (SEE PLAN) 6"STD. PIPE COL. (TYP.) I 9X3 0'-9" BASE PLATE TYP./ 31/ \ F—(+7'-0") 1 STD. 90' HK. (TYPICAL) 1OX4XO'-10" EMBED PLATE W/4-# 5 X 1'-8" a SEE PLAN FOR (ASTM A706 REBAR) SIZE & REINF. 1 SECTION Scale:1/2"=1'-T U 0 0 10X10 CONCRETE COLUMN (SEE PLAN) c Fyw 5" 5" 5" 5" 10" 10" 2 SECTION Scale: 1"=V-0" 1-4X3XI"X4" EA. SIDE W/2 "PLYWOOD SHEATING "DIA. 1 ,.u. INVU 6'-8" 1. 24'-0" 6'-8" 1_ 2'-4" I. 11 FOOTING AND FOUNDATION PLAN 24'-0" SHALL 9'-8" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" I I SHALL BE PLACED IN RANDOM LENGTHS I 3. DECKING i ,, "D" DENOTES DISTANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR LINE TO TOP OF FOOTING OR BOTTOM OF TRENCH FOOTING 64"X13j" GLULAM BEAM D = (-S-6") EXTERIOR rr SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING T.O.C. DENOTES TOP OF CONCRETE 24X24 CONC. PIER USE 3-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS T.O.C. _ (-0'-4") U.N.O. 9 .92 T.O.C.=(-O'-4") SLAB ON GRADE: 6" CONCRETE SLAB REINF. 6X6-W2.1XW2.1 W.W.F. ON MIN. 4" COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL. THE OWNER SHALL HIRE A SOIL TESTING LABORATORY TO VERIFY ASSUMED SOIL BRG. CAPACITY. REINF. 8-# 8 VERT, r — — — — # 4 TIES AT 12" O.C. — — — — t FOOTINGS FOR SHELTER BUILDING SHALL REST ON UNDISTURBED SOIL. S7 TYP. S� SIM. I 1 I „D„=(-3'-6") 1000 PSF. FOR DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS NOT SHOWN SEE ARCHITECTURAL. N_ —lFir� i (TYPICAL) - - - - - I IFF - �-I=11 SLOPE ALL EXTERIOR STOOP SLABS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. COL. (TYP.) I LL`CJJ I L'l I 31"X74" RIDGE SHEATING PROVIDE SOLI BTW. 2X4'5 I I I I I 2X6 SOLID I 1 GLULAM BEAM I (TYPICAL) 1/ SIMPSON HGA10KT 4 (SEE PLAN) 10" 10" EA SIDE (TYP.) RIDGE LINE o7W/SDS TYP. 0 �j 6" CONC. SLAB (SLOPES) 1'-0X1'-0' THICKENED (moo S WIF BOLTSBLOCKING AT SLAB W/2-# 5 CONT. EXP. JT. MATERIAL U 2-2X4'S N (TYPICAL) I O 10X10 CONC. COL. Q � REINF. 4-# 8 VERT. N # 4 TIES AT 10” QC. '6 c m O O a z mz o O m (TYPICAL) Y < 2 W - 1 -� F-----� I I I I I f I I I I I- I I -��- --i - - - - I- -- FI- I I L J I FTG. 5'-0"X5'-0" X 1'-0" 1 L- A I I I REINF. 5-# 5 EA. WAY TOP & BOTT. I L --T---1 „D„ = (-3'-6") L-- --J (TYPICAL) I II I — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — FIN. FLOOR L—(+9'-8") LINE (+0'-0") LL -.— 2X6 CONT. GLULAM BEAM "BENT PLATE W/2 -'DIA. iv (SEE PLAN) LAG BOLTS X 5" & 2 -}"DIA. T.O.C. THRU BOLTS 4-# 8 OWLS X 6'-6" }"SIDE & BOTT. PLATE TYP. CONC. PIER a W/2-4"DIA. THRU BOLTS (SEE PLAN) 6"STD. PIPE COL. (TYP.) I 9X3 0'-9" BASE PLATE TYP./ 31/ \ F—(+7'-0") 1 STD. 90' HK. (TYPICAL) 1OX4XO'-10" EMBED PLATE W/4-# 5 X 1'-8" a SEE PLAN FOR (ASTM A706 REBAR) SIZE & REINF. 1 SECTION Scale:1/2"=1'-T U 0 0 10X10 CONCRETE COLUMN (SEE PLAN) c Fyw 5" 5" 5" 5" 10" 10" 2 SECTION Scale: 1"=V-0" 1-4X3XI"X4" EA. SIDE W/2 "PLYWOOD SHEATING "DIA. 1 ,.u. INVU 6'-8" 1. 24'-0" 6'-8" 1_ 2'-4" I. 11 FOOTING AND FOUNDATION PLAN 6'-0" SHALL BE 2X6 TOUNGE & GROOVE SOLID SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" I I SHALL BE PLACED IN RANDOM LENGTHS ALL ELEVATIONS REFERENCED TO FINISHED FLOOR LINE (+0'-0") 3. DECKING rr ,, "D" DENOTES DISTANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR LINE TO TOP OF FOOTING OR BOTTOM OF TRENCH FOOTING 64"X13j" GLULAM BEAM D = (-S-6") EXTERIOR rr SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING T.O.C. DENOTES TOP OF CONCRETE COURSE. USE 3-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS T.O.C. _ (-0'-4") U.N.O. 9 .92 0 SLAB ON GRADE: 6" CONCRETE SLAB REINF. 6X6-W2.1XW2.1 W.W.F. ON MIN. 4" COMPACTED GRANULAR FILL. THE OWNER SHALL HIRE A SOIL TESTING LABORATORY TO VERIFY ASSUMED SOIL BRG. CAPACITY. .� FOOTINGS FOR SHELTER BUILDING SHALL REST ON UNDISTURBED SOIL. S7 TYP. S� SIM. ASSUMED NET ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURE ON UNDISTURBED SOIL IS 1000 PSF. FOR DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS NOT SHOWN SEE ARCHITECTURAL. N_ SLOPE ALL EXTERIOR STOOP SLABS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. COL. (TYP.) 3'-4" J"PLYWOOD 31"X74" RIDGE SHEATING PROVIDE SOLI BTW. 2X4'5 SPACER RIDGE LINE 3'-0" 2X6 SOLID z o WOOD DECKING 12 GLULAM BEAM (TYPICAL) 1/ SIMPSON HGA10KT 4 (SEE PLAN) 10" 10" EA SIDE (TYP.) RIDGE LINE o7W/SDS SCREWS 0 CONC. COL. (SEE PLAN) 3-g'DIA. THRU PROVIDE SOLID (moo S WIF BOLTSBLOCKING AT u(TYPICAL) EXP. JT. MATERIAL U 2-2X4'S FIN. FLOOR L—(+9'-8") LINE (+0'-0") LL -.— 2X6 CONT. GLULAM BEAM "BENT PLATE W/2 -'DIA. iv (SEE PLAN) LAG BOLTS X 5" & 2 -}"DIA. T.O.C. THRU BOLTS 4-# 8 OWLS X 6'-6" }"SIDE & BOTT. PLATE TYP. CONC. PIER a W/2-4"DIA. THRU BOLTS (SEE PLAN) 6"STD. PIPE COL. (TYP.) I 9X3 0'-9" BASE PLATE TYP./ 31/ \ F—(+7'-0") 1 STD. 90' HK. (TYPICAL) 1OX4XO'-10" EMBED PLATE W/4-# 5 X 1'-8" a SEE PLAN FOR (ASTM A706 REBAR) SIZE & REINF. 1 SECTION Scale:1/2"=1'-T U 0 0 10X10 CONCRETE COLUMN (SEE PLAN) c Fyw 5" 5" 5" 5" 10" 10" 2 SECTION Scale: 1"=V-0" 1-4X3XI"X4" EA. SIDE W/2 "PLYWOOD SHEATING "DIA. 1 ,.u. INVU 6'-8" 1. 24'-0" 6'-8" 1_ 2'-4" I. 3 SECTION Scale: 1"=1'-0" ROOF FRAMING PLAN SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'-0" ALL ELEVATIONS REFERENCED TO FINISHED FIRST FLOOR LINE (+D'-0") (+8'-0") DENOTES DISTANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR LINE TO TOP OF BEAM OR BOND BEAM ALL ROOF DECK: 2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING FOR DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS NOT SHOWN SEE ARCHITECTURAL GLULAM BEAM LOADS: D.L.=20 PSF L.L.=21 PSF UPLIFT=15 PSF (GROSS) LE b FEB 21 2012 Y;Sg PM Cary Clerk Iowa C4, Iowa TOUNG AND GROOVE SOLID WOOD DECKING: 4 SPACES AT 6'-0" = 24'-0" 6'-0" SHALL BE 2X6 TOUNGE & GROOVE SOLID DECKING OR EQUAL. I I SHALL BE PLACED IN RANDOM LENGTHS CONTINUOUS CONFIGURATION. 3. DECKING rr ,, OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT 30" O.C. ALONG EACH COURSE, 64"X13j" GLULAM BEAM rr rr SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING WITH 2-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS PER COURSE. USE 3-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT BOUNDARY MEMBERS. 9 .92 0 LL .� S7 TYP. S� SIM. 6"STD. PIPE N_ COL. (TYP.) 3'-0" 31"X74" RIDGE PROVIDE SOLI BTW. 2X4'5 SPACER RIDGE LINE 3'-0" z o BEAMS (TYP.) � (TYPICAL) 1/ m N O RIDGE LINE 3 SECTION Scale: 1"=1'-0" ROOF FRAMING PLAN SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'-0" ALL ELEVATIONS REFERENCED TO FINISHED FIRST FLOOR LINE (+D'-0") (+8'-0") DENOTES DISTANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR LINE TO TOP OF BEAM OR BOND BEAM ALL ROOF DECK: 2X6 SOLID WOOD DECKING FOR DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS NOT SHOWN SEE ARCHITECTURAL GLULAM BEAM LOADS: D.L.=20 PSF L.L.=21 PSF UPLIFT=15 PSF (GROSS) LE b FEB 21 2012 Y;Sg PM Cary Clerk Iowa C4, Iowa TOUNG AND GROOVE SOLID WOOD DECKING: m 1. DECKING SHALL BE 2X6 TOUNGE & GROOVE SOLID DECKING OR EQUAL. 2. DECKING SHALL BE PLACED IN RANDOM LENGTHS CONTINUOUS CONFIGURATION. 3. DECKING SHALL BE TOE NAILED WITH 6d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT 30" O.C. ALONG EACH COURSE, OFFSET 15" IN ADJOINING COURSES. END JOINT NAILS WITHIN 12" MAX. EACH SIDE. 4. DECKING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD FRAMING WITH 2-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS PER COURSE. USE 3-16d COMMON OR GALVANIZED NAILS AT BOUNDARY MEMBERS. ROOF SHEATHING NOTES: 1. ROOF SHEATHING SHALL BE 1/2" MINIMUM APA RATED 24/16, EXP, 1 OR BETTER PLYWOOD OR O.S.B. 2. MAXIMUM HEIGHT TO LENGTH RATIO OF SHEATHING IS 2:1. 3. SHEATHING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO WOOD DECKING WITH 1-1/2", 16 GA. STAPLES (MIN. 1" PENETRATION INTO WOOD DECKING) AT 6" O.C. AT BOUNDARY AND AT INTERMEDIATE LINES OF SHEATHING. 4. STAGGER SHEATHING JOINTS. c i ■—►v mmrr •_ DES MOINES, IOWA 50312 2409 GRAND AVENUE `A MA4.0' ` LAM .' 515/243-4477 City File No. PA261 O mw � N Lj� a 4 Lu Cb U) Cb C5 m r C/) O g N fn N F o � N Z J� [!1 N W o� s W a8 �m O M UU? Ern Z N� l0 N 0 �n w ^ C U L > J M NO CO Ln W �Lno O Q 04N C/) z 20 oL6 z I ctj Y Lo m Z N Q N Q _ W Z 0 cn W W F— cr w U 0 0 CJ3 0 Cn 0 "' I- JMw Wwz W � W U) Cr. CL W Lu cc U) V 111.0253 Sheet S7 m 0 W H O z ao U) 3[ 00 9 .92 0 LL .� C/) N_ H � z o � m N O (moo S N U N O Q � N '6 c m O O a z mz o O m Y < 2 W 12 d LL O mw � N Lj� a 4 Lu Cb U) Cb C5 m r C/) O g N fn N F o � N Z J� [!1 N W o� s W a8 �m O M UU? Ern Z N� l0 N 0 �n w ^ C U L > J M NO CO Ln W �Lno O Q 04N C/) z 20 oL6 z I ctj Y Lo m Z N Q N Q _ W Z 0 cn W W F— cr w U 0 0 CJ3 0 Cn 0 "' I- JMw Wwz W � W U) Cr. CL W Lu cc U) V 111.0253 Sheet S7 A 2 -WAY CLEANOUT TO GRADE - SEE DETAILQ P4 INV, EL.: -5'-6" BELOW ^'FINISHED /FLOOR 4 I � I I I I Z „ -.. L 1� 1 PLUMBING KEYNOTES: (C>) 1Q 2" WASTE PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB INTO WALL CAVITY ABOVE. 11 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER, DOMESTIC COLD WATER, AND 1/2" G>CONNECT 3" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE TO WATER SHUT OFF VALVE In 1i 11 L� I SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. SLAB WTH NO JOINTS DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB I FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SITE UTILITIES CONTRACTOR. L- NOTE DELETED. `----J N EXPOSED ON WALL ABOVE, SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. C>2" LAWN IRRIGATION WATER PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB EXPOSED ON m a L in N WALL ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 2" DEEP SEAL P -TRAP AND 2" WASTE PIPE UP TO FLOOR DRAIN 12 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB IN WALL O � Q CONNECTION. ZQ y CAVITY ABOVE, SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 22 LAWN ATIOFINALTER PAPE OUT OOF BUS IIRRIGAMINIMUM STUB24 CD a V OF W GRADE. 4> 3" DEEP SEAL P -TRAP AND 3" WASTE PIPE UP TO MOP SERVICE 13 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB IN WALL SYSTEM BY OTHERS. BASIN CONNECTION, CAVITY ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 23 4" FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB 4" DEEP SEAL P -TRAP AND 4" WASTE PIPE UP TO FLOOR SINK 14 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB EXPOSED ON WALL ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF CONNECTION. IN WALL CAVITY ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING, G> 4" SOIL PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB INTO PIPE CHASE ABOVE. SEE PIPING. G>4" FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB IN SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 15 1" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB EXPOSED ON PIPE CHASE ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 2" VENT PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB INTO WALL CAVITY ABOVE. SEE WALL ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING, G>4" FIRE DEPARTMENT SPRINKLER MAIN UP THRU FLOOR SLAB SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 16 1" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB INTO PIPE EXPOSED ON WALL ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF CHASE ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. PIPING. 2" VENT PIPE SHEET P2 FOR UP THRU FLOOR SLAB INTO PIPE CHASE ABOVE. SEE CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 17 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB INTO PIPE @>CONNECT 4" FIRE SPRINKLER PIPE TO POST INDICATOR VALVE CHASE ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING., FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SITE UTILITIES CONTRACTOR. 2" VENT PIPE SHEET P2 FOR UP THRU FLOOR SLAB EXPOSED ON WALL ABOVE. SEE CONTINUATION OF PIPING, 18 FINAL CONNECTION TO 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE BY OTHERS. 27 1-1/2" GAS PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB EXPOSED ON WALL ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. G>CONNECT 4" WASTE PIPE TO WASTE PIPE BY SITE UTILITIES 19 3" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB EXPOSED ON CONTRACTOR. WALL ABOVE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 28 GAS PIPE UP TO GAS METER. 29 4" DOWNSPOUT PIPE UP THRU FLOOR SLAB INTO PIPE CHASE ABOVE. 30 CONNECT 4" STORM PIPE TO UNDERGROUND STORM PIPING FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY SITE UTILITIES CONTRACTOR. 3/4" DOMESTIC WATER PIPE UP INV. EL.: -5'-6" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR xT _ .xr- �� -- ,. ='--] Pn14 - -I L- �J - - - L__J L---JL---JI 4., 13 4„ / - - ST - 1/2 -0--- 6 --------- 1� 1 INV. EL.: 18 „--------------- -------------- - -5'-6" BELOW I I FINISHED FLOOR J 3 4 -� r- 247 I � 4 2' 10 4 2 -WAY CLEANOUT - 4 ----- u ❑ ❑ -�� CI o r DETAILTO ADE -SEE L 4 --- ---- o I I -I --- r---- L ----r -011 3.. L 11 ----J 4 ST _ r SI; r---- - L - P4 -. El GWI G2 - ---T T ❑❑ L J L J o „ 1 " -. -----� J__ 1 2 2 4" 4„ 2gI I I �__ �a 2 -� 1 __J 29 L --J - SEE DETAIL P4 3" I 1/2" 4" 4 SAN �4 SAN . F F F / 4,. 7 4., II1.. CENTERLINE OF FIRE DEPT I IIT L-- ---------JIV) 3" L---, 4" C� n CENTERLINE OF 18 0 SUPPLY I I ( 6 CONNECT PIPE TO BE 30" AIR DUCT AT 11" BELOW II BELOW FLOOR SLABFLOOR SLAB g I 4 11 IIII 1 Ii I 2„ 8 -- 7 r ---- I I 42„ 3 2" 6 27 23 SAN 7 4' c --- - --- - 15 ---- ------ I r-----.. r- 2 19 1 r----� � l7 25 NJ I� C , LLJ 4" 28 1-1/4" 26 �22 20 0 I � INV.. EL.: r -5'-6" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR N Plumbing Foundation Plan SCALE: 1 /e• = 1'-0 (J) 0 6 2" J 1 3 I I L _J F I I I I I � I 1 L - ----__J Imo. L ___ __-____-- I L � ALL DOMESTIC WATER PIPING BELOW FLOOR SLAB SHALL BE EITHER PEX PIPING OR TYPE •K• COPPER PIPE. In 1i 11 L� I PIPING SHALL BE RUN CONTINUOUS BELOW FLOOR SLAB WTH NO JOINTS BELOW FLOOR SLAB. I 1 INV. EL.: -5'-6" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR xT _ .xr- �� -- ,. ='--] Pn14 - -I L- �J - - - L__J L---JL---JI 4., 13 4„ / - - ST - 1/2 -0--- 6 --------- 1� 1 INV. EL.: 18 „--------------- -------------- - -5'-6" BELOW I I FINISHED FLOOR J 3 4 -� r- 247 I � 4 2' 10 4 2 -WAY CLEANOUT - 4 ----- u ❑ ❑ -�� CI o r DETAILTO ADE -SEE L 4 --- ---- o I I -I --- r---- L ----r -011 3.. L 11 ----J 4 ST _ r SI; r---- - L - P4 -. El GWI G2 - ---T T ❑❑ L J L J o „ 1 " -. -----� J__ 1 2 2 4" 4„ 2gI I I �__ �a 2 -� 1 __J 29 L --J - SEE DETAIL P4 3" I 1/2" 4" 4 SAN �4 SAN . F F F / 4,. 7 4., II1.. CENTERLINE OF FIRE DEPT I IIT L-- ---------JIV) 3" L---, 4" C� n CENTERLINE OF 18 0 SUPPLY I I ( 6 CONNECT PIPE TO BE 30" AIR DUCT AT 11" BELOW II BELOW FLOOR SLABFLOOR SLAB g I 4 11 IIII 1 Ii I 2„ 8 -- 7 r ---- I I 42„ 3 2" 6 27 23 SAN 7 4' c --- - --- - 15 ---- ------ I r-----.. r- 2 19 1 r----� � l7 25 NJ I� C , LLJ 4" 28 1-1/4" 26 �22 20 0 I � INV.. EL.: r -5'-6" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR N Plumbing Foundation Plan SCALE: 1 /e• = 1'-0 (J) 0 6 2" J 1 3 I I L _J F I I I I I � I 1 L - ----__J Imo. L ___ __-____-- I L SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES hEB 21 )oji FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS forris-uso.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. PA 261 J J H � N I In 1i 11 L� I n f 1I IL rj LJ 1 I 1 L- L ----J `----J N `----J w SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES hEB 21 )oji FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS forris-uso.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. PA 261 J J H 0 22 J W d (i} > i e U <� ym (� 0 a N o N z m� LU V n a W ao ma cis IL P % N NlW7 IO Q ti W m U Cr. M M > 04 mC) CD LO CD W LLI D � N O Q u' r m z '6 2 �wto IL N Q N 1 W Er. z o u, W W LU g U Cc: CLo 0 o cn O Q Q J m Z C)6 W Z) O Feez W Er m cc Z> Z H CL Cn 111.0253 Sheet P1 � N I � L0 z 0 In > N r— w m a L in N N O � Q r- ZQ y .. @ z CD a V LU r 0 22 J W d (i} > i e U <� ym (� 0 a N o N z m� LU V n a W ao ma cis IL P % N NlW7 IO Q ti W m U Cr. M M > 04 mC) CD LO CD W LLI D � N O Q u' r m z '6 2 �wto IL N Q N 1 W Er. z o u, W W LU g U Cc: CLo 0 o cn O Q Q J m Z C)6 W Z) O Feez W Er m cc Z> Z H CL Cn 111.0253 Sheet P1 1 SEE DETAIL 29 P4 ALL AREAS OF THIS BUILDING SHALL BE SPRINKLERED PER LIGHT HAZARD CLASSIFICATION EXCEPT FOR STORAGE 106 AND MECH 207 WHICH SHALL BE ORDINARY HAZARD CLASSIFICATION. +18" A.F.G. FOG Partial Plumbina Floor Plan SCALE' 1/4" = 1'-0" TO OUTSIDE SHOWER. SHOWER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. CONNECTION FOR AIR COMPRESSOR TO BLOW OUT PIPING FOR WINTERIZATION. � 3/4„ TO WALL HYDRANT PROVIDE AND INSTALL AN DOMESTIC COLD WATER 18" X 18" LOCKABLE PIPE BACK TO MECH 107 ACCESS PANEL BELOW FLOOR SLAB KITCHEN PIPING CHASE DETAIL , NO SCALE ELECTRIC ALARM BELL WATER FLOW SWITCH WET PIPE VALVE CHECK VALVE TO FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION - SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION MAIN DRAIN SPLASH BLOCK (NOMINAL 12"x24") FINISHED GRADE -\ MAIN WATER SUPPLY Partial Plumbing Floor Plan SCALE: 1/4' = 1'-0" SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WIRING TO ELECTRIC ALARM BELL I WATER PRESSURE GAUGE WET PIPE FIRE SUPPLY TO BUILDING (SEE FIRE PROTECTION PLANS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION) BALL VALVE THRUST BLOCK INSPECTOR'S TEST AND DRAIN VALVE SIGHT GLASS VERTICAL DOUBLE CHECK BACK FLOW PREVENTER WITH O.S.&Y. GATE VALVE WITH TAMPERPROOF SWITCH OR INDICATOR BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH TAMPERPROOF SWITCH (AS REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION) STRAINER (AS REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION) F PLUMBING KEYNOTES: (�) 1> 1-1/4' WASTE PIPE DOWN TO 2" WASTE PIPE THRU FLOOR SLAB WITH 1-1/4" TRAP ARM AND 1-1/4" VENT PIPE UP IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 1-1/4" GREASE WASTE PIPE DOWN TO 2" GREASE WASTE PIPE THRU FLOOR SLAB WITH 1-1/4" TRAP ARM, 1-1/2" VENT PIPE UP, 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING UP IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. C> 1-1/2" WASTE PIPE DOWN TO 2" WASTE PIPE THRU FLOOR SLAB WITH (2) 1-1/4" TRAP ARMS SIDE BY SIDE AND 1-1/2" VENT PIPE UP IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. C> 2" GREASE WASTE PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB WITH 1-1/2" TRAP ARM, 2' GREASE VENT UP IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. C> 2" VENT PIPE UP AND DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. G> 2" VENT PIPE UP AND DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB EXPOSED ON WALL. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 7� 2" VENT PIPE UP AND DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB IN PIPE CHASE. HOLD PIPING TIGHT TO PIPE CHASE WALL. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 2" SOIL PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB WITH 2" TRAP ARM AND 2" VENT PIPE UP IN PIPE CHASE. HOLD PIPING TIGHT TO PIPE CHASE WALL. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. C> NOTE DELETED. 10 4" SOIL PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB WITH 3" CONNECTION TO WATER CLOSET AND 2' VENT PIPE UP IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. PIPE SLEEVE FINISHED FLOOR 11 13 14 15 a FIRE SPRINKLER SERVICE RISER PIPING DETAIL NO SCALE 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPES UP TO LAVATORY FAUCET, HOLD TIGHT TO WALL AND BELOW COUNTERTOP. 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPES UP IN WALL CAVITY. 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE IN PIPE CHASE. WITH 1/2" BRANCH DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING TO EACH DRINKING FOUNTAIN. PROVIDE 1/2" BALL VALVE WITH HOSE THREAD ADAPTER FOR WINTERIZING PIPING. 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPES UP IN WALL CAVITY. DROP TO BELOW COUNTERTOP. 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER, 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER AND 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PIPES UP AND DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. DROP TO BELOW COUNTERTOP. PLUMBING KEYNOTES: ((>) 16 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER, 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER AND 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PIPES UP AND DOWN EXPOSED ON WALL DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 17 1/2' DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB, 1/2" BRANCH DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE IN WALL CAVITY TO ELECTRIC WATER COOLER AND UP TO ABOVE CEILING IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEET P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 18 1/2' DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN IN WALL CAVITY TO ELECTRIC WATER COOLER. 19 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB, 1/2" BRANCH DOMESTIC HOT WATER TO SINK FAUCET AND 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPE UP IN WALL CAVITY TO ABOVE CEILING, SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 20 1/2' DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEET P7 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 21 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP AND DOWN EXPOSED ON WALL DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB, SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 22 3/4' DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP IN PIPE CHASE SPACE AND CONNECTION TO WALL HYDRANT. PROVIDE 1/2" BALL VALVE WITH HOSE THREAD ADAPTER FOR WINTERIZING PIPING. Q>1' DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 24 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN TO MAIN ALONG PIPE CHASE INTERIOR WALL AND CONNECTION TO FLUSH VALVE. 25 1" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN TO MAIN ALONG PIPE CHASE INTERIOR WALL AND CONNECTION TO FLUSH VALVE. 26 2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP IN PIPE CHASE. HOLD TIGHT TO INTERIOR PIPE CHASE WALL. C>2" LAWN IRRIGATION PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. HOLD PIPING CLOSE TO FLOOR AND TIGHT TO WALL. 28 3" DOMESTIC COLD WATER DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 29 3/4" GAS PIPE UP TO NEAR CEILING. 30 3/4" GAS PIPE DOWN IN PIPE CHASE TO GAS FIREPLACE. VERIFY EXACT CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS AND CONNECTION LOCATION WITH UNIT SUPPLIED AND ARCHITECT. C>1-1/4" GAS PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB AND UP TO NEAR CEILING. HOLD TIGHT TO WALL. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 32 1-1/4" GAS PIPE DOWN TO BELOW GRADE. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 0>GAS METER BY LOCAL GAS UTILITY COMPANY. SEE GAS METER PIPING DETAIL FOR GAS LOADS. 34 GAS DISTRIBUTION PIPING DOWN TO BELOW GRADE. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 35 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR BY GAS UTILITY COMPANY. 36 4" FIRE SPRINKLER PIPE UP AND DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 37 4" FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. G>4" FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION PIPE DOWN TO BELOW FLOOR SLAB. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION SHALL BE FLUSH TYPE WITH NO ANGLED CONNECTION POINTS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MODEL NUMBER. S>4" STORM PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB AND UP IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 40 4" STORM PIPE DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB AND UP EXPOSED IN MECHANICAL ROOM. SEE SHEETS P1 AND P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 41 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE RUN IN BASE CABINET TIGHT TO BACK WALL, RUN BEHIND STOVE AND HOLD TIGHT TO WALL, MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ICE MAKERS IN REFRIGERATORS (REFRIGERATORS ARE PROVIDED BY OTHERS), 42 2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE UP TO NEAR CEILING. SEE SHEET P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING, 43 3" PVC OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE PIPE UP. SEE SHEET P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 44 3" PVC EXHAUST FLUE PIPE UP. SEE SHEET P3 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 45 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER DOWN THRU FLOOR SLAB. SEE SHEET P1 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND do GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES FEB 21 2012 x:sl Q'� FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usaxom COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 m a a 04 a �L m D W c i N If C - Ln z O r - m w NCNI W rm U p Ln N 0 Q Z < L'0 Z i r= m U _ LU a (.1 Q 0 0 O � § : N LuN �C oC6 V� �W to Q V) O aN 1 0 LL m N Z m NI N LU a LU so U� a,rn H 6Np 2N Kl� O �N ad, a w m U Cr) oM N J Q CDm LLI W �<N 0 � N Cn Zs > 6 _ w to Z CN Q N W Z 0 C/3 Q W W U � LU CL U X00 00 Cn 0 ii C/:)o q Q Z � LU co W LL, � z F— a. C/3 111.0253 Sheet P2 N PLUMBING KEYNOTES: (C>) 1-1/4" VENT PIPE DOWN IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. - - _ - -- I II — - -- - _ - - 2 1-1/2" VENT PIPE DOWN IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEET P2 FOR C1 CONTINUATION OF PIPING. --- - ---_ 2" VENT PIPE DOWN IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION G> 2" VENT PIPE DOWN EXPOSED ON WALL. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 2" VENT PIPE DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. G> 2" VENT PIPE DOWN AND 3" VENT PIPE UP IN PIPE CHASE WITH 5" 4"RDRD=1 VENT TERMINATION THRU ROOF. PAINT VENT TERMINATION TO MATCH 4"RD-1 ROOF COLOR. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 4,. 24 4„ 2" VENT PIPE DOWN AND 2" VENT PIPE UP IN PIPE CHASE WITH 4" 24 VENT TERMINATION THRU ROOF. PAINT VENT TERMINATION TO MATCH ROOF COLOR. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 8 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPES DOWN IN WALL CAVITY. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 3/4" 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER, 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER AND 1/2" ❑ 15 15 1„ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PIPES DOWN EXPOSED ON WALL. 4,. Ll SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. ST 10 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER, 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER AND 1/2" 1" W ----- - DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PIPES DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. SEE 13 -- - G - LL 4 - - - - - --- SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. - - — -__ _ 0 26 0 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN EXPOSED ON WALL. SEE 13 SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. HOLD TIGHT LI -0 TO INTERIOR PIPE CHASE WALL. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. V, 13 HOLD GAS PIPING TIGHT TO WALL. VERIFY HEIGHT ABOVE FLOOR WITH ARCHITECT. 13 - -- - -- - 14 3/4" GAS PIPE DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH - GAS FIREPLACE SUBMITTED AND ARCHITECT. SEE SHEET P2 FOR ----DCW CONTINUATION OF PIPING. - 8 °-- ---DHW---�} 1/2 2» 1/2„ » 2 3/4" 1/2, _ 15 3/4" GAS PIPE DOWN TO GAS FIRED FURNACE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR 1,�Q CONTINUATION OF PIPING. =DHW DCW _ - 2" --- - -- 2, 2 I I I 2 16 3/4" GAS PIPE DOWN TO GAS FIRED WATER HEATER. SEE SHEET P2 3 2 V; I , 1 2 52 1 ? 72 - 3/4 i I , FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. -- 1 " C>1-1/4" GAS PIPE DOWN. HOLD TIGHT TO WALL. SEE SHEET P2 FOR (I i 5 > �2 5 1 " CONTINUATION OF PIPING. yp I I 1" I 2" AT STORAGE OM I 2„ 5 >' 18 4" FIRE SPRINKLER PIPE DOWN TO FIRE SPRINKLER ENTRANCE RISER. 2" l INSTALL BALL V I 1-1/2' SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 01/2" CEILING 2-1/2' 'I � 19 4" GREASE VENT PIPE DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR 3/4" III ° I ° I CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 1 I`� / -_-, 20 RUN 4" GREASE VENT PIPE ABOVE CEILING AND UP THRU ROOF WITH 1-1 4" 9 11 I 2' I 5 I 1 2' �- 2-1 2" > 4" VENT TERMINATION. PAINT ROOF TERMINATION TO MATCH ROOF 2" / - COLOR. G 31 V _ -t ° 2 5 1 1-1/2" 21 RUN DOMESTIC HOT WATER, DOMESTIC COLD WATER, AND VENT PIPE 2 5 ( ABOVE CEILING. 29 1-1/4'/' 15 58<f _ I 5 1 5 I 22 3/4" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEET 1-1/4 - 2 P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. i -�T 1„ I 16 1 1 2" 23 1/2" DOMESTIC HOT WATER PIPE DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEET 0 1-1 4' -G I P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 3/4 4" Q 2° /I 5 24 4" STORM PIPE UP TO ROOF DRAIN CONNECTION. t 17 18 27 2„ 25 4" DOWNSPOUT DOWN IN PIPE CHASE. SEE SHEET P2 FOR N CONTINUATION OF PIPING. �- Partial Plumbing Ceiling Plan I 3" E>4" DOWNSPOUT DOWN EXPOSED IN MECH, ROOM, SEE SHEET P2 FOR (Kitchen 004) CONTINUATION OF PIPING. SCALE: Ile - 1'-0"27 2" DOMESTIC COLD PIPE DOWN TO RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER. SEE ❑ n ❑ N ❑ SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. Partial Plumbing Ceiling Plan28 1" DOMESTIC HOT AND 1" DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPE DOWN TO GAS (Mach 005 Women's 007, and Mens 008) FIRED WATER HEATER. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. SCALE: 1/4" - 1'-0" 29 3" PVC COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE PIPING DOWN TO GAS FIRED WATER HEATER. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 30 3" PVC EXHAUST FLUE PIPING DOWN TO GAS FIRED WATER HEATER. SEE SHEET P2 FOR CONTINUATION OF PIPING. 31 CONCENTRIC FLUE GAS AND COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE UP THRU ROOF. TO RESTROOMS 32 RUN VENT PIPE ABOVE CEILING. TO KITCHEN n SET 2.5 GPM 1 �TO CIRCULATING , PUMP SET 2.5 GPM HOT WATER CIRCULATING VALVING IN MECH 104 P1.3 SEE SHEET M1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES FEB 21 2012 S v� FARRIS ENGINEERING AM OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usaxom COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use aro prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 m a a � ❑ � � L i N Z O en m N r LU N N p p O p Q Z F- � m Zo U- m v LU rL L.7 O M2 W m = N > Or O � U <m FCnm Cn C) c6M U_ N Z J°N M N W a LUa Z N h O a � Ld n U I� C� o _j C14 W 0CD " LLI N O _ �Z wtn N Z Q N 1 W Z rn Vj 1 ,J W Z F--■ J w (.5 U Z o C)W C J 0 U C!3 o q Q MZ W ces F- IZ W 17— IZ C 111.0253 Sheet P3 CIRCULATING PUMP SHALL BE CONNECTED TO 7 -DAY ELECTRONIC TIME CLOCK TO CONTROL PUMP. VERIFY ON/OFF SCHEDULE WITH OWNER. TIMER TO BE PROVIDED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. INLINE BRONZE FITTED CIRCULATING PUMP.(SEE PUMP SCHEDULE FOR CAPACITY) CIRCULATING PUMPS TO BE INSTALLED IN VERTICAL SHUTOFF VALVE THERMOMETER 3 0 J IPETE'S PLUG AQUASTAT a CONTROLLER STRAINER UNION TYPE CONNECTION (PIPE SO PUMP CAN BE REMOVED FOR SERVICING) CHECK VALVE CIRCUIT SETTER SHUTOFF VALVE RISER WITH MANUAL AIR 0 0 VENT AT TOP OF RISER. 1 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP PIPING DETAIL NO SCALE BRANCH GAS PIPING (SEE DRAWINGS FOR MANUAL GAS SIZE AND LOCATION) I°>✓ `SHUTOFF VALVE GAS FIRED APPLIANCE 3" LONG DIRT LEG FLEXIBLE GAS CONNECTOR PIPE GAS FIRED APPLIANCE GAS PIPING CONNECTION DETAIL NO SCALE T USED NO SCALE GAS LINE PRESSURE REGULATOR PER LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. REDUCE FROM X P.S.I. TO X" W.C. GAS PRESSURE UNION STRAINER (IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL GAS UTILITY COMPANY) TO UNDERGROUND GAS UTILITY MAIN TT GAS SHUTOFF COCK PLUGGED PRESSURE FITTING (IF NOT PROVIDED ON METER OUTLET) UNIONGAS SHUTOFFCOCK GAS SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING RISER DETAIL NO SCALE BUILDING GAS LOADS LOAD SUBTOTAL LOAD BUILDING HEATING 203 DOMESTIC HOT WATER 76 COOKING 0 MISCELLANEOUS 80 TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD 359 SET WATER HEATER TEMPERATURE AT 140'F THERMOMETER (TYPICAL) 5 3" DEEP HEAT TRAP (TYPICAL) BALL VALVE SHUTOFF (TYPICDIELECTRIC UNION (TYPICAL) CHECK VALVE TEMPERATUREPRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PIPE FULL SIZE TO 6" ABOVE FINISH FLOOR n1/2 DRAIN VALVE 4" HIGH CONCRETE PAD BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR REMOVABLE CLEANOUT FACTORY PLUG TO CLEAR DRAIN CONDENSATE FLOOR SINK TRAP DOMESTIC GAS FIRED WATER HEATER PIPING DETAIL %61 AC GAS FIREDWATERHEATER GAS SERVICE TO BUILDING GAS METER PER LOCAL GAS UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS 1/4" BALL VALVE (MANUAL VENT) WITH 1/4" TUBING TO ABOVE FLOOR DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK AS SHOWN ON PLUMBING FLOOR PLANS 140' F DOMESTIC T WATER PIPE DOMESTIC COLD 3/4 WATER PIPE 140' F DOMESTIC HOT nWATER CIRCULATING PIPE HOT WATER CIRCULATING 1 PUMP PPSEE DETAILJJI eP4 3/4"3" x 3" x 1/2" TEE WITH HOSE BARB FITTING 1/2" FLEXIBLE DRAIN HOSE WITH LOOP WATER TRAP IN DRAIN HOSE 33/4" 21/2" CONDENSATE TUBE FROM EXHAUST ELBOW TO ABOVE NEAREST FLOOR DRAIN OR FLOOR SINK (TYPICAL) NO SCALE KEYNOTES: (C>) 4" PVC COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE PIPE TO OUTDOORS. INSTALL PER FACTORY RECOMMENDATIONS. C] 4" PVC EXHAUST GAS PIPE TO OUTDOORS. INSTALL PER FACTORY RECOMMENDATIONS. C] EXPANSION TANK, AMTROL #ST -12-C, 12"0 x 15" HIGH, TANK VOLUME6.4 GAL., MAX. ACCEPTANCE = 3.2 GAL. WITH ASME LABEL. 24" x 24" x 6" DEEP CONCRETE PAD FINISHED GRADE SOIL, WASTE, OR STORM PIPE RISERS 2- WAY CLEAN OUT FITTING SOIL, WASTE, OR STORM PIPE FLOW HEAVY DUTY CLEAN OUT HOUSING, CAST IRON BODY WITH INTEGRAL FLANGE, SECURED SCORIATED COVER WITH LIFTING DEVICE AND VANDAL PROOF COVER. ZURN MODEL #Z1474 CLEAN OUT FERRULE, DURA -COATED CAST IRON BODY, GAS AND WATER TIGHT, BRONZE GASKETED PLUG AND VANDAL PROOF COVER., ZURN MODEL #1440 2 -WAY CLEAN OUT TO GRADE PIPING DETAIL �11 NO SCALE FINISHED FLOOR SLAB SOIL, WASTI OR STORM ��a FLOOR CLEAN OUT (SEE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULES) 1/8" BENDS END OF THE LINE FLOOR CLEAN OUT INSIDE BUILDING PIPING DETAIL PETE'S PLUG (TYP.) - RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY (TYP.) (10 PSI MAXIMUM PRESSURE DROP) UNION (TYP.) 2" STRAINER (TYP.) AIR GAP FITTING (TYP.) r- 2„ 2" DRAIN PIPING TO ABOVE NEAREST FLOOR SINK. SIZE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS (TYP.) 2- 3/4- DRAIN VALVE WITH CAP FLOOR SLAB WATER METER (90 GPM FLOW INTERMITTENT) NO SCALE COLD WATER PIPE TO BUILDING SEE PLUMBING PLANS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION 2" SHUTOFF VALVE (TYP.) 2 BALL VALVE SHALL HAVE UNION CONNECTION BALL VALVE SHALL HAVE UNION CONN. STRAINER 2" 3/4" DRAIN VALVE WITH CAP 2„ SHUTOFF VALVE (TYP.) T 2" / / 2" " 2 - 3" i.... R OD RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY (TYP.) (10 PSI MAXIMUM PRESSURE DROP) STRAINER UNION --i 2 U AIR GAP FITTING DRAIN PIPING TO ABOVE NEAREST FLOOR SINK. SIZE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS WATER METER (15 GPM FLOW CONTINUOUS) JL - COPPER GROUND I 2" IRRIGATION SYSTEM PIPE AT BOND WIRE BY 2'-0" BELOW FINISHED GRADE ELECTRICAL SEE PLUMBING PLANS FOR CONTRACTOR o _ SIZE AND LOCATION in DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE ENTRANCE - SEE PLUMBING 3 DRAWINGS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE AND BACKFLOW PREVENTER FEB 2 ASSEMBLY PIPING DETAIL NO SCALE SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-uso.aam COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or consfruction use are prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. PA 261 NFSz�C0 NLn z 0 N 10LNU O U1 CL p p o ZQ zLL §sm �dO ME �nW m = J a.> � co31 U) o oA WU m aF=A QNzNcO NwL" J OJ04 W �/�0 3V )O 6z`�'Uj YI— z NWM Z 0 C�WLUw Voc0 0J 06 WV Wimm w 5 111.0253 PLUMBING FIXTURE TYPICAL NOTES: PLUMBING FIXTURES SHALL BE OF ONE OF THE MANUFACTURES INDICATED OR PRE -APPROVED AS AN EQUAL AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INFORMATION AND MANUFACTURER'S CATALOG NUMBERS INDICATED. WHERE MANUFACTURER '5 CATALOG NUMBERS HAVE BEEN UPDATED OR DELETED, FIXTURES SHALL BE OF SIMILAR CONFIGURATION AND OF SIMILAR OR BETTER QUALITY THAN THAT INDICATED. VERIFY ALL MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF PLUMBING FIXTURES PRIOR TO ORDERING. MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND COMPLY WITH CURRENT ADA REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY ALL FIXTURE COLORS AND FINISHES WITH ARCHITECT BEFORE ORDERING. ALL COUNTERTOP SINKS ARE TO BE COORDINATED WITH CABINET WORK TO INSURE THAT FIXTURE WILL FIT PRIOR TO ORDERING FIXTURE. REMARKS: FROM TOP OF LIP TO FINISHED FLOOR 1. SEE FLUSHOMETER SCHEDULE AND PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIER SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. HIGH EFFICIENCY, LOW CONSUMPTION (1.28 GPF) TYPE. 3. CLOSET BOLTS AND CAPS FURNISHED BY FIXTURE MANUFACTURER, 10" x 12" WATER SURFACE AREA, 100% FACTORY FLUSH TESTED 4. INSTALL PER ALL CURRENT ADA REQUIREMENTS. URINAL SCHEDULE BASIN SCHEDULE FIXTURE WATER CLOSET SCHEDULE TOP SPUD GALLONS SYSTEM FLUSHING Elevation INLET OUTLET SERVES FIXTURE (IPS) TYPE SEAT COLOR TYPE MARK TYPE Material COLOR BOWL TYPE FLUSHING RIM ELEVATION INLET SIZE INLET TRAPWAY MFR. &MODEL NO. TYPE MATERIAL COLOR MFR. & REMARKS WALL MOUNTED CHINA WHITE WASHOUT 24" TYPE BACK WASHBROOK #6590.125 LOCATION SIZE (IPS) WALL MOUNTED VITREOUS WHITE WASHOUT MODEL NO. 314" 2" NPT AMERICAN STANDARD 1,2,3 UNDERMOUNT 18 GAUGE TYPE 304 CHINA 18" (IPS) 14" TOP BACK WASHBROOK #6590.125 BATTERY POWEREDCHROME 1 1-1/2" 128 GPH WC -1 WALL VITREOUS WHITE ELONGATED SIPHON JET 15" 1-1/2" TOP 2-1/8" AMERICAN STANDARD OPEN FRONT SOLID WHITE CHURCH 1,2,3 BATTERY POWERED MOUNTED CHINA 8" COVERS 1/2" CHROME SLOAN 1 GLAZED AFWALL #3351.001 LESS LID PLASTIC 0.5 GPH #9500C - WG2 WALL VITREOUS WHITE ELONGATED SIPHON JET 161/2" 1-1/2" TOP 2-1/8" AMERICAN STANDARD OPEN FRONT SOLID WHITE CHURCH 1,2,3,4 6" MOUNTED CHINA #105 E -Z PLATED #186-0.5 TRUEBRO "LAVGUARD2" 11213,415 GLAZED MADERA#3351.001 LESS LID PLASTIC #9500C REMARKS: FROM TOP OF LIP TO FINISHED FLOOR 1. SEE FLUSHOMETER SCHEDULE AND PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIER SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. HIGH EFFICIENCY, LOW CONSUMPTION (1.28 GPF) TYPE. 3. CLOSET BOLTS AND CAPS FURNISHED BY FIXTURE MANUFACTURER, 10" x 12" WATER SURFACE AREA, 100% FACTORY FLUSH TESTED 4. INSTALL PER ALL CURRENT ADA REQUIREMENTS. URINAL SCHEDULE BASIN SCHEDULE FIXTURE MARK TOP SPUD GALLONS SYSTEM FLUSHING Elevation INLET OUTLET SERVES REMARKS (IPS) TYPE Materiel COLOR TYPE ," (IPS) (IPS) MFR. &MODEL NO. PITCH TO CAP STRAINER VITREOUS FLOW SIZE DECK 3/4" 2" NPT AMERICAN STANDARD 1,2 UR -1 WALL MOUNTED CHINA WHITE WASHOUT 24" TOP BACK WASHBROOK #6590.125 SENSOR OPERATED UR -2 WALL MOUNTED VITREOUS WHITE WASHOUT 15114" 314" 2" NPT AMERICAN STANDARD 1,2,3 UNDERMOUNT 18 GAUGE TYPE 304 CHINA 18" 2 14" TOP BACK WASHBROOK #6590.125 BATTERY POWEREDCHROME REMARKS: FROM TOP OF LIP TO FINISHED FLOOR 1. SEE FLUSHOMETER SCHEDULE AND PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIER SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 2. ULTRA HIGH EFFICIENCY ( 0.125 GPF), EXTENDED SIDES FOR PRIVACY. 3. INSTALL PER ALL CURRENT ADA REQUIREMENTS. FLUSHOMETER SCHEDULE BASIN SCHEDULE FIXTURE INLET TOP SPUD GALLONS SYSTEM FLOW CD MFR. & WASTE SERVES TYPE (IPS) CONNECTION PER FLUSH PRESSURE RATE FINISH MODEL NO. REMARKS REMARKS PITCH TO CAP STRAINER WATER FLOW SIZE DECK SLOAN BOWL WC -1 BATTERY POWERED 1 1-1/2" 128 SPH 25 PSI 18 GPM CHROME #111-1.28 1 REMARKS SENSOR OPERATED TYPE MATERIAL COLOR DRILLING MFR &MODEL NO. PLATED SMO COLOR NO. S1 UNDERMOUNT 18 GAUGE TYPE 304 32" 18" 2 14" SLOAN 12" WC -2 BATTERY POWEREDCHROME 1 1-1/2" 128 GPH 25 PSI 18 GPM JUST #111-1.28 1,2 BLADES SENSOR OPERATED CENTERS #IDX -1832-A O CD G PLATED SMO #JWF-200 BATTERY POWERED 2 -HANDLE W/ FOUR WALL 8" COVERS 1/2" CHROME SLOAN 1 URA - SENSOR OPERATED 314" 314" 0.5 GPH - - PLATED #186-0.5 UR -2 BATTERY POWERED 3!4" 3/4" 0.5 GPH - - CHROME SLOAN 1,2 - SENSOR OPERATED 12-1/2" 6" 4" CENTERS JUST #UOIF-1521-A #105 E -Z PLATED #186-0.5 TRUEBRO "LAVGUARD2" REMARKS: 1. FLUSH VALVE SHALL HAVE BAK-CHEK ANGLE STOP, FREE SPINNING VANDAL RESISTANT STOP CAP, HIGH BACK PRESSURE VACUUM BREAKER FLUSH CONNECTION WITH ONE-PIECE BOTTOM HEX COUPLING NUT, SWEAT SOLDER ADAPTER WITH COVER TUBE CAST SET SCREW WALL FLANGE, AND ADJUSTABLE TAILPIECE, FIXED METERING BYPASS, NO EXTERNAL VOLUME ADJUSTMENTS. ADA COMPLIANT OPTIMA BATTERY POWERED INFRARED SENSOR FOR AUTOMATIC "NO HANDS" OPERATION, CHROME PLATED METAL INFRARED SENSOR HOUSING, ANGLED SENSOR WINDOW, MANUAL OVERRIDE FLUSH BUTTON, FOUR (4) SIZE C BATTERIES INCLUDED, -LOW BATTERY" FLASHING LED WITH OPTIONAL AUDIO TONE, "USER IN VIEW' FLASHING LED, OPTIONAL 24-HOUR SENTINEL FLUSH, INFRARED SENSOR RANGE ADJUSTMENT SCREW AND RESET BUTTON. 2. FLUSH VALVE SHALL INSTALLED PER ALL CURRANT ADA REQUIREMENTS. LAVATORY AND SINK STOPS: COMPLETE WITH 1/2" I.P.S. ANGLE SUPPLIES WITH WHEEL HANDLES, CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS WITH ALL BRASS STEMS, CHLORAMINE -CHLORINE RESISTANT WASHERS. STOPS IN PUBLIC RESTROOMS SHALL BE LOOSE KEY TYPE. LAVATORY AND SINK SUPPLY PIPING: CHLORAMINE -CHLORINE RESISTANT BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS AND CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS ESCUTCHEONS. LAVATORY TRAP: 1-1/4" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED BRASS CONTINUOUS WASTE CONNECTION WITH WALL BEND, BRASS SLIP NUTS, 1-1/4" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED CAST BRASS P -TRAP WITH CLEANOUT, CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS ESCUTCHEONS. SINK TRAP: 1-1/2" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED BRASS CONTINUOUS WASTE CONNECTION WITH WALL BEND, BRASS SLIP NUTS, 1-1/2" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED CAST BRASS P -TRAP WITH CLEANOUT, CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS ESCUTCHEONS. LAVATORY SCHEDULE BASIN SCHEDULE FIXTURE PIPE INSULATION KIT DIMENSIONS SPOUT .iL v DIMENSIONS CD NOMINAL DIMENSIONS (INCHES) WASTE OVERALL SIZE COMPARTMENT SIZE FAUCET HOLE MFR. & MODEL MATERIAL MARK TYPE MATERIAL PUNCHING NO. REMARKS PITCH TO CAP STRAINER WATER FLOW SIZE DECK OVERALL BOWL MARK FRONT TO o LEFT TO FAUCET MATERIAL WASTE PIPING 1/2" MFR. & MODEL REMARKS PRECAST TERRAZO TYPE MATERIAL COLOR DRILLING MFR &MODEL NO. PIPING VALVE COLOR NO. S1 UNDERMOUNT 18 GAUGE TYPE 304 32" 18" 2 14" 16" 12" 3 HOLES ON 4" LEFT FRONT TO LEFT FRONT TO STAINLESS STEEL POLISHED CHROME JUST 1,2 Z BLADES F_ CENTERS #IDX -1832-A O CD G 7E PLATED #JWF-200 DEPTH 2 -HANDLE W/ FOUR WALL 8" COVERS 1/2" - 9" BRASS ROUGH CHROME SPEAKMAN 3,4,5 RIGHTT BACK RIGHTT BACK PLATED #SEF -9000 -TW L-1 UNDER COUNTER STAINLESS WHITE - - 17-1/2" 12-1/2" 6" 4" CENTERS JUST #UOIF-1521-A #105 E -Z 102 E -Z CHINA WHITE TRUEBRO "LAVGUARD2" 11213,415 STEEL REMARKS: 1. SEE FAUCET SCHEDULE FOR FAUCET INFORMATION 2. 18 GAUGE TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL WITH OVERFLOW SYSTEM AND UNDERMOUNT CLIPS LESS FASTENERS AND J -115 -FS LAVATORY DRAIN. 3. FIT ON ALL TUBULAR AND CAST BRASS P -TRAP ASSEMBLIES, VALVE COVER COMPLETELY ENCLOSES ANGLE VALVE AND SUPPLY TUBE FOR BOTH HANDLED AND KEYED TYPE WATER STOPS, MOLDED VINYL, 1/8" CONSTANT NOMINAL WALL, E -Z TEAR -TO -FIT TRIM FEATURE, INTERNAL E -Z GRIP REUSABLE FASTENERS, PAINTABLE WITH LATEX PAINT, 5" OFFSET TAILPIECE WHEELCHAIR STRAINER ASSEMBLY 4. INSTALL PER ALL CURRENT ADA REQUIREMENTS. 5. SEAL WITH A BEAD OF SILICONE CAULK UNDER FIXTURE RIM AND COUNTERTOP AND EXTERIOR FIXTURE RIM AND COUNTERTOP. SINK SCHEDULE BASIN SCHEDULE a LO DIMENSIONS SPOUT .iL v DIMENSIONS CD CURB WASTE OVERALL SIZE COMPARTMENT SIZE FAUCET HOLE MFR. & MODEL MATERIAL MARK TYPE MATERIAL PUNCHING NO. REMARKS PITCH TO CAP STRAINER FLOW SIZE DECK LENGTH WIDTH LEFT TO FRONT TO o LEFT TO FRONT TO MATERIAL CONN. SIZE 0.5 1/2" MSB -1 FLOOR MOUNTED PRECAST TERRAZO RIGHT BACK NUMBER OF RIGHT BACK DEPTH STAINLESS STEEL STAINLESS STEEL 3„ S1 UNDERMOUNT 18 GAUGE TYPE 304 32" 18" 2 14" 16" 12" 3 HOLES ON 4" JUST 1,2,3,4 9-13/16" 8314" STAINLESS STEEL POLISHED CHROME JUST 1,2 Z BLADES F_ CENTERS #IDX -1832-A O REMARKS: 1. SEE FAUCET SCHEDULE FOR FAUCET INFORMATION. 2. SEAMLESS DIE -DRAWN CONSTRUCTION, INTERIOR AND TOP SURFACES POLISHED TO A NON -POROUS HAND -BLENDED FINISH WITH HIGHLIGHTED BOWL RIM, FULLY COATED UNDERSIDE INSULATES FOR SOUND AND REDUCES CONDENSATION, WITH 1314" RADIUS CORNERS, UNDERMOUNT GRIPS LESS FASTENERS, DRAIN CENTERED PUNCHED. 3. STAINLESS STEEL DRAIN WITH CRUMB CUP STRAINER, DRAIN BODY, STRAINER, AND POST OF TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL, STOPPER OF RUBBER, TAILPIECE CHROME PLATED BRASS, DIE-CAST ZINC LOCK NUT, DIE-CAST COUPLING NUT, JUST MODEL #J-35 4. SEAL WITH A BEAD OF SILICONE CAULK UNDER FIXTURE RIM AND COUNTERTOP AND EXTERIOR FIXTURE RIM AND COUNTERTOP. MOP SERVICE BASIN SCHEDULE a LO 0 SPOUT .iL v DIMENSIONS CD CURB WASTE TYPE MOUNTING MARK TYPE MATERIAL MFR & MODEL NO. REMARKS AERATOR INLET HEIGHT ABOVE REACH OUT PITCH TO CAP STRAINER FLOW SIZE DECK LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH o INSIDE MATERIAL MATERIAL CONN. SIZE 0.5 1/2" MSB -1 FLOOR MOUNTED PRECAST TERRAZO 24" 24" 12" 2" SENSOR ACTIVATED 1!2" STAINLESS STEEL STAINLESS STEEL 3„ FIAT #TSB 100 1,2,3,4 REMARKS: 1. SEE FAUCET SCHEDULE FOR FAUCET INFORMATION 2. MOP BRACKET: STAINLESS STEEL WITH THREE (3) RUBBER GRIPS, 24" LONG x 3" WIDE, FIAT MODEL #899 -CC. 3. HOSE AND HOSE BRACKET: STAINLESS STEEL WITH RUBBER GRIP, FLEXIBLE HEAVY DUTY 518" RUBBER HOSE, CLOTH REINFORCED WITH 3/4' CHROME COUPLING AT ONE END, 5" LONG x 3" WIDE, FIAT MODEL #832-4A. 4. STAINLESS STEEL WALL GUARDS: HEAVY GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL, PROVIDE TWO PANELS FOR A CORNER INSTALLATION, OR THREE PANELS FOR A RECESSED INSTALLATION, FIAT MODEL #MSG 2424. FAUCET SCHEDULE a LO 0 SPOUT .iL v O) CD W SERVES TYPE MOUNTING CENTERSETBODY MATERIAL FINISH MFR. & MODEL NO. REMARKS AERATOR INLET HEIGHT ABOVE REACH OUT cV FLOW SIZE DECK FROM DECK O U) "' o L_1 BATTERY POWERED DECK 4" 0.5 1/2" 2-3/16" 4/16" BRASS POLISHED CHROME SLOAN #EBF -655 1 L SENSOR ACTIVATED v GPM PLATED � S-1 2 -HANDLE W/ 4" WRIST DECK 8" 1'5 1/2" 9-13/16" 8314" BRASS POLISHED CHROME JUST 1,2 Z BLADES F_ ~ GPM O CD G 7E PLATED #JWF-200 MSB -1 rARM 2 -HANDLE W/ FOUR WALL 8" 1.5 GPM 1/2" - 9" BRASS ROUGH CHROME SPEAKMAN 3,4,5 HANDLES PLATED #SEF -9000 -TW � REMARKS: 1. HEIGHT ABOVE DECK IS FROM TOP OF DECK TO CENTERLINE OF BOTTOM OF AERATOR. 2. COLOR CODED INDEXES, REPLACEABLE SEAT WASHERS, QUARTER TURN STEM UNITS, RESTRICTED SWING SPOUT AND HOSE SPRAY. 3. COLOR CODED INDEXES, 1/4 TURN CERAMIC CARTRIDGES, INTEGRAL STOPS, CAST BRASS NOZZLE WITH 314" HOSE THREAD AND PAIL HOOK, BRASS VACUUM BREAKER, BRASS TOP BRACE ASSEMBLY WITH WALL FLANGE AND MOUNTING SCREWS, ADJUSTABLE THREADED BRASS WALL FLANGES. SPEAKMAN MODEL #SG5811 4. PROVIDE EYEWASH UNIT: CHROME PLATED BRASS FINISH, SQUEEZE VALVE WITH AN AUTOMATIC STAY OPEN DEVICE, DUAL SPRAY'S WITH FLIP TOP CAPS AND AUTOMATIC FLOW CONTROL, INTEGRAL VACUUM BREAKER AND CHECK VALVE, 2,4 GPM AT 30 PSI. FLOWING, 30 PSI. MINIMUM FLOW PRESSURE, 125 PSI. MAXIMUM STATIC PRESSURE. 5. THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE UNIT: ROUGH BRONZE FINISH, DIAL THERMOMETER (0"-200"F), CHECK VALVES ARE INTEGRAL TO UNIT, LIQUID FILLED THERMOSTATIC MOTOR WITH STAINLESS STEEL SLIDING PISTON CONTROL DEVICE, REVERSE SEAT CLOSURE AND BOTH FIXED AND VARIABLE COLD WATER BYPASS, MAX INLET PRESSURE: 125 PSI (RECOMMENDED 65 PSI), MINIMUM SUPPLY PRESSURE: 40 PSI, MAXIMUM INLET TEMPERATURE: 180"F (RECOMMENDED 1207 -140°F), MAXIMUM OUTPUT FLOW: 7 GPM (5 GPM BYPASS FLOW) L4Jn7T,/_1.LF, WC:1I FI&ICINf01 SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES FEB 21 2012 �)<57 P'7 FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS Farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 V z W W O Cr CL 2 Y m a a LO 0 .iL v O) CD W 2 m (1) ro iL L O L6 W � w cV 3i zY U LO O U) "' o W Q z O C-4 Q Z) > T IN M X N r L : I v N � � Z 11 CV 0 O O Q Q Z F_ ~ O CD G 7E Z LL m m o LU r It aP a 'qq? > � rn >_A 0,6 m Q N aJ R 0 m N O� M _j (y)m� O CD W N ¢?� W C] N Y O L6 W � w U 3i zY U LO O U) "' o W Q J C-4 Q Z) Cd LU X N 1 LU Q z O C/3 W W a< W w U U U) O U) "' o W Q J Z) Cd LU X LL v LU � � Z 11 C+ 111.0253 Sheet P5 1 PLUMBING FIXTURE TYPICAL NOTES: PLUMBING FIXTURES SHALL BE OF ONE OF THE MANUFACTURES INDICATED OR PRE -APPROVED EQUAL AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INFORMATION AND MANUFACTURER'S CATALOG NUMBERS INDICATED. WHERE MANUFACTURER'S CATALOG NUMBERS HAVE BEEN UPDATED OR DELETED, FIXTURES SHALL BE OF SIMILAR CONFIGURATION AND OF SIMILAR OR BETTER QUALITY THAN THAT INDICATED. VERIFY ALL MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF PLUMBING FIXTURES PRIOR TO ORDERING. MOUNTING HEIGHTS SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS AND COMPLY WITH CURRENT ADA REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY ALL FIXTURE COLORS AND FINISHES WITH ARCHITECT BEFORE ORDERING. ALL COUNTERTOP SINKS ARE TO BE COORDINATED WITH CABINET WORK TO INSURE THAT FIXTURE WILL FIT PRIOR TO ORDERING FIXTURE. LAVATORY AND SINK STOPS: COMPLETE WITH 1/2" I.P.S. ANGLE SUPPLIES WITH WHEEL HANDLES, CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS WITH ALL BRASS STEMS, CHLORAMINE -CHLORINE RESISTANT WASHERS. STOPS IN PUBLIC RESTROOMS SHALL BE LOOSE KEY TYPE LAVATORY AND SINK SUPPLY PIPING: CHLORAMINE -CHLORINE RESISTANT BRAIDED STAINLESS STEEL FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS AND CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS ESCUTCHEONS. GARBAGE DISPOSER SCHEDULE MARK FIXTURE PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIER SCHEDULE RECOVERY MARK TEMPERATURE CARRIER GRATE STYLE MARK INLET/ HAND TYPE CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT CLASS CONNECTIONS SIDE INLET(S) REMARKS VENT PIPE TYPE MATERIAL CONTROL CAPACITY OUTLET RPM LUBRICATION TIME RATING MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. CONNECTIONS CONNECTION DOM. WTR. HTR. STEEL 5.0 WC -1 & (INCHES) NONE DURA -COATED 500 POUNDS SINGLE OR DOUBLE 1 4" GD -1 CONTINUOUS GALVANIZED STEEL WALL SWITCH 26 OZ. 1-112" SLIP 1725 PERMANENTLY UPPER & INTERMITTENT INSINKERATOR BADGER 1 1,2 TAPER THREADED FEED 4 F Q M W UR -1 & JOINT NONE LOWER BEARINGS NONE NONE NONE NONE REMARKS: 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. 2. PROVIDE GROUNDED CORD AND PLUG FOR GARBAGE DISPOSER,JAM-BUSTER WRENCH,QUITE COLLAR SINK BAFFLE AND REMOVABLE SOUND BAFFLE. REMARKS: 1. TOP AND BOTTOM PLATES, RECTANGULAR STEEL UPRIGHTS, WELDED FEET, ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT PLATES AND MOUNTING FASTENERS. 2. RECTANGULAR STEEL UPRIGHTS, WELDED FEET, CAST IRON ADJUSTABLE HEADERS, STEEL SLEEVES, ALIGNMENT TRUSS AND MOUNTING FASTENERS, USE FOR SINGLE LAVATORY OR BACK TO BACK LAVATORY MOUNTING. FLOOR DRAIN / FLOOR SINK SCHEDULE MARK BODY PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIER SCHEDULE RECOVERY TEMPERATURE CARRIER GRATE STYLE MARK TYPE (HORIZONTAL HAND TYPE CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT CLASS CONNECTIONS SIDE INLET(S) SOIL PIPE VENT PIPE MANUFACTURER MFR. & MODEL NO. REMARKS INTERIOR OR VERTICAL) 1 THRU 11 SIZE DEPTH LOCATION ZURN CONNECTIONS CONNECTION DOM. WTR. HTR. STEEL 5.0 WC -1 & ADJUSTABLE NONE DURA -COATED 500 POUNDS SINGLE OR DOUBLE 1 4" 2" ZURN #21204 X 1 WC -2 VERTICAL 1 CAST IRON WCO MAIN FITTING ROUND SMOOTH STAINLESS STEEL TAPER THREADED ZURN #21446 4 F Q M W UR -1 & VERTICAL NONE DURA -COATED NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE ZURN #21222 1 UR -2 B -1/2"x8-112" NICKELNICKEL STEEL 1/2" ZURN0 2,3 Z I' D N O REMARKS: 1. TOP AND BOTTOM PLATES, RECTANGULAR STEEL UPRIGHTS, WELDED FEET, ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT PLATES AND MOUNTING FASTENERS. 2. RECTANGULAR STEEL UPRIGHTS, WELDED FEET, CAST IRON ADJUSTABLE HEADERS, STEEL SLEEVES, ALIGNMENT TRUSS AND MOUNTING FASTENERS, USE FOR SINGLE LAVATORY OR BACK TO BACK LAVATORY MOUNTING. FLOOR DRAIN / FLOOR SINK SCHEDULE MARK BODY GRATE RECOVERY TEMPERATURE MARK GRATE STYLE MFR.8 MODEL NO. REMARKS MATERIAL FINISH FRAMEIBODY BODY OUTLET TYPE SIZE FRAME FINISH EXTERIOR INTERIOR A 1 THRU 11 SIZE DEPTH LOCATION ZURN 1 — DOM. WTR. HTR. STEEL 5.0 20 FDA CAST IRON DURA -COAT — 8,V8" /E — BOTTOM ROUND 5" fE NICKEL POLISHED TYPES ZURN 1 #Z1700 WCO ED ROUND SMOOTH STAINLESS STEEL TAPER THREADED ZURN #21446 4 F Q M W BRONZE NICKEL BRONZE U #Z415B FS -1 CAST IRON — WHITE 12" X12" 6" BOTTOM SQUARE B -1/2"x8-112" NICKELNICKEL BRONZE 1/2" ZURN0 2,3 REMARKS: 1. FURNISH COMBINATION INVERTIBLE MEMBRANE CLAMP AND ADJUSTABLE COLLAR WITH SEEPAGE SLOTS, SEDIMENT BUCKET, CAST IRON DEEP SEAL P -TRAP AND TRAP GUARD 2. FURNISH ALUMINUM BUCKET, ANCHOR FLANGE WITH SEEPAGE HOLES AND CLAMP COLLAR, BOTTOM OUTLET, ALUMINUM INTERNAL DOME STRAINER, CAST IRON DEEP SEAL P -TRAP AND TRAP GUARD 3. INTERIOR SHALL BE ACID -RESISTING PORCELAIN ENAMEL WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR SCHEDULE MARK FIXTURE UNIT STORAGE RECOVERY TEMPERATURE GASINPUT (PDI RANGE CASING & BELLOWS BELLOWS TYPE MALE INLET MFR. & MODEL REMARKS SIZE) (WSFU) CONSTRUCTION & MODEL NO. SIZE NO. 50 A 1 THRU 11 TYPE 304 STAINLESS NESTING 314" ZURN 1 — DOM. WTR. HTR. STEEL 5.0 20 #Z1700 70.0% C33 THRU 60 TYPE 304 STAINLESS NESTING 1" ZURN 1 CAST IRON SCORIATED STEEL BRONZE 2 #Z1700 WCO REMARKS: 1. CASING SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT DISPLACEMENT VOLUME TO DISSIPATE THE CALCULATED KINETIC ENERGY GENERATED IN THE PIPING SYSTEM. LAVATORY TRAP: 1-1/4" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED BRASS CONTINUOUS WASTE CONNECTION WITH WALL BEND, BRASS SLIP NUTS, 1-1/4" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED CAST BRASS P -TRAP WITH CLEANOUT, CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS ESCUTCHEONS. SINK TRAP: 1-1/2" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED BRASS CONTINUOUS WASTE CONNECTION WITH WALL BEND, BRASS SLIP NUTS, 1-1/2" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED CAST BRASS P -TRAP WITH CLEANOUT, CHROME -PLATED SOLID BRASS ESCUTCHEONS. GAS FIRED WATER HEATER SCHEDULE a STORAGE RECOVERY TEMPERATURE GASINPUT THERMAL MANUFACTURER MFR. & MARK CAP. (GAL) (GPH) GPM RISE (BTUIHR) EFFICIENCY & MODEL NO. REMARKS GWH 1 50 83 HEAVY-DUTY ROUND 100° F 76,000 90%A.O.SMITH "CYCLONE" 1 2 PP -1 DOM. WTR. HTR. INLINE CIRCULATOR 5.0 20 3,250 70.0% #BTX -80 1,2 REMARKS: 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. 2. 3" PVC PIPE POWER VENT DESIGN - VERTICAL VENT RUNS, CONCENTRIC ROOF TERMINATION. PUMP SCHEDULE L' m a ACCESS COVER o HEAD MARK BODY MATERIAL MANUFACTURER MFR. & MARK SERVES TYPE GPM En RPM I EFFICIENCY I INLET REMARKS a c m DURA -COATED HEAVY-DUTY ROUND FT. TAPER THREADED 3/4" & MODEL NO. GCo PP -1 DOM. WTR. HTR. INLINE CIRCULATOR 5.0 20 3,250 70.0% TACO MODEL 1,2 POLISHED NICKEL GWH-1 ZURN #21400 2,3 FCO CAST IRON SCORIATED #0014 -BFI BRONZE REMARKS: 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. 2. BRONZE BODY CONSTRUCTION. CLEANOUT SCHEDULE L' m a ACCESS COVER o MARK BODY MATERIAL CLEANOUT PLUG MFR. & REMARKS MFR. & REMARKS i co En TYPE FINISH INLET MODEL NO. a c m DURA -COATED HEAVY-DUTY ROUND POLISHED NICKEL TAPER THREADED 3/4" 3/4" GCo CAST IRON SECURED SCORIATED BRONZE BRONZE ZURN #21474 1 N M M J DURA -COATED HEAVY-DUTY ROUND POLISHED NICKEL TAPER THREADED ZURN #21400 2,3 FCO CAST IRON SCORIATED BRONZE BRONZE 2 WH 11 WCO DURA -COATED ROUND SMOOTH STAINLESS STEEL TAPER THREADED ZURN #21446 4 F Q M W CASTIRON U BRONZE 7r, 7P. 1. HEAVY DUTY CLEANOUT HOUSING, DURA -COATED CAST IRON BODY WITH INTEGRAL ANCHOR FLANGE, SECURED SCORIATED COVER WITH LIFTING DEVICE, INTERNAL CLEANOUT SOLID GASKETED COVER, VANDAL -PROOF SCREW, PROVIDE ZURN #Z1440 CLEANOUT FERRULE WITH PLUG, DURA -COATED CAST IRON BODY AND GAS AND WATERTIGHT TAPERED THREAD PLUG. 2. PROVIDE THREADED ADJUSTABLE CAST IRON HOUSING, ANCHOR FLANGE WITH MEMBRANE FLASHING CLAMP COLLAR, ADJUSTABLE TO FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION, K� 7 t•P/ h7 �:1 � � h [diL` 6� N [fl IL•Iq.9 XiI9_� C•7 :� 7i7:7cL I I � SiZ•7 :i � / »•] � yiV [•1�1 & t:•i_� I � �l :1 q [•Pd� CARPETED FLOORS. ZURN #(-CM). 4. PROVIDE VANDAL PROOF SCREW. HOSE BIB / WALL HYDRANT SCHEDULE L' m a CONNECTIONS o .X MARK TYPE HANDLE FINISH MFR. & REMARKS i co En Iz _c_ - INLET OUTLET a c m MODEL NO. HB -1 SURFACE WALL 3/4" 3/4" LOOSE CHROME WOODFORD 1 o MOUNTED N M M J KEY PLATED #24 WOUn SURFACE WALLLOOSE a CHROME WOODFORD 2 WH 11 MOUNTED 3/4" 314" KEY PLATED #67 REMARKS: 1. FOR NON-FREEZING AREAS, MALE HOSE THREAD ANTI -SIPHON VACUUM BREAKER, EPDM PACKING, ADJUSTABLE BRASS PACKING NUT, STANDARD "O" SIZE VALVE SEAT WASHER, INSTALL AT 18" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTERLINE OF INLET. 2. AUTOMATIC DRAINING WITH DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW PREVENTER, FREEZLESS, HARDENED STAINLESS STEEL OPERATING STEM AND ONE-PIECE VALVE PLUNGER TO CONTROL BOTH FLOW AND DRAIN FUNCTIONS, INSTALL AT 18" ABOVE FINISHED, GRADE TO CENTERLINE OF INLET. SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES FEB z p 2012 FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS forris-uw.mm COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. PA 261 m L' m a � o .X m z ^` W CD i co En Iz _c_ - Cl) a c m z O CD w N LO Io lf) N O 1O N a_ Z 4) U_ U L' m e Lm (j o Z 41 1O N a_ Z 4) U_ U LU Cr Q Z O V W LU Cr U) C) J U C) C) qC/:) o ^ V J w M Cc LU 5 o6 � X L (r3 W Z 0 °C : z F— [L C!3 111.0253 Sheet P6 uqT J 'P LuLu i co (, a c m O a N o N M M J z OJ N WOUn a wU a rn Z N M aa N CIN F Q M W O U I..L M >� J N rn O WN Z I' D N O VJ r r Lb W r N Z N LU Cr Q Z O V W LU Cr U) C) J U C) C) qC/:) o ^ V J w M Cc LU 5 o6 � X L (r3 W Z 0 °C : z F— [L C!3 111.0253 Sheet P6 r, MECHANICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND (AS APPLICABLE) GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION NOTES (APPLICABLE FOR ALL FIRE PROTECTION SHEETS) FIRE PROTECTION WORK SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: A. 1. COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES, LAWS AND REGULATIONS INCLUDING ALL PIPING AND ALL VALVES, ETC. PROVIDE FIRE PROTECTION RISERS INCLUDING VALVES, ALARM, AND INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION. 2. ALL AREAS OF THE BUILDING INDICATED SHALL BE SPRINKLERED ACCORDING TO THE LATEST EDITION OF APPLICABLE NFPA STANDARDS, SPECIFICALLY NFPA 13. ENTIRE SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED PER IOWA STATE FIRE MARSHAL REQUIREMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY FIRE DEPARTMENT. 3. DESIGN SHALL BE BASED ON HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS PER NFPA 13, WITH SHOP DRAWINGS PREPARED ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE IOWA STATE FIRE MARSHAL. B. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC, INTENDED TO CONVEY THE SCOPE OF WORK AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYSTEM. COORDINATE THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM LAYOUT WITH ALL ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, HVAC, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. PROVIDE OFFSETS AS NECESSARY TO AVOID CONFLICTS. SEE PLUMBING SHEETS FOR FIRE PROTECTION WORK. C. THE LAYOUT SHOWN IS TO DEPICT THE APPROXIMATE ROUTING OF PIPE AND THE GENERAL AREAS TO BE SERVED. THE EXACT NUMBER, TYPE, COVERAGE, ETC., OF SPRINKLERS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY ALL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. D. EXTEND A 4" PIPE THROUGH WALL FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (FDC). FDC SHALL BE INSTALLED 3'-O" TO 4'-0" ABOVE GRADE. PROVIDE HOSE CONNECTION THREADS TO MATCH LOCAL FIRE DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE BRONZE FINISH ON FDC. SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION OF FDC. E. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR CEILING TYPES AND HEIGHTS, AND LOCATIONS OF EXPOSED STRUCTURE. COORDINATE ALL SPRINKLER LOCATIONS IN AS AESTHETIC SPACING AS POSSIBLE. F. ALL PIPING AND SPRINKLERS IN EXPOSED AREAS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH DUCTWORK AND LIGHTS. EXPOSED SPRINKLERS SHALL BE UPRIGHT UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AS NECESSARY. G. ALL SPRINKLERS IN GYP. BOARD AND LAY -IN CEILINGS SHALL BE CONCEALED TYPE WITH WHITE FINISH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL SPRINKLERS IN SOFFITS SHALL BE RECESSED SIDEWALLS WITH WHITE/CHROME FINISH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. H. PROVIDE AUXILIARY DRAINS FOR ALL LOW SPOTS, TYPICAL. I. SPRINKLER TYPES AND LOCATIONS, AND SPRINKLER PIPING SHOWN FOR AESTHETIC AND COORDINATION PURPOSES. ACTUAL SYSTEM LAYOUT SHALL BE BASED ON HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND SHOP DRAWINGS, SPRINKLERS SHOWN ADJACENT TO AIR OUTLETS/INLETS AND LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE LOCATED 6" MINIMUM FROM BOTH. ALL SPRINKLERS IN LAY -IN CEILINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN 3" OF THE CENTER OF CEILING TILE. NOTIFY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF CONFLICTS. J. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15300 AND 15310 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. K. SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY AVAILABLE WATER PRESSURES AND FLOW FROM LOCAL WATER DEPARTMENT. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT HYDRANT FLOW TEST DATA THAT IS NOT MORE THAN ONE YEAR OLDER THAN THE DATE OF SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL. L. FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTORS' TEST, FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (FDC) AND MAIN DRAIN SHALL BE PIPED THROUGH EXTERIOR WALL. LOCATE MAIN DRAIN AND FDC 3'-0" ABOVE GRADE. PROVIDE A CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK BELOW OUTLET ON GRADE. M. SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL CEILING HEIGHTS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR BEFORE MAKING FINAL PIPE DROPS TO SPRINKLERS. A COST EXTRA IS NOT ACCEPTED IF CEILING HEIGHTS CHANGE. N. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF ALL PIPING SYSTEMS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PREVENT PIPING FREEZEUPS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF AREAS FOR POTENTIAL FREEZEUP CONCERNS. 0. PROVIDE DRY TYPE SPRINKLERS AT ALL VESTIBULE ENTRANCE LOCATIONS. P. ALL EXPOSED PIPING SHALL BE CLEANED AND PREPARED FOR PAINT. Q. APPLICABLE UL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS SHALL BE USED WHERE RATED ASSEMBLIES ARE PENETRATED BY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM. R. PIPE OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS SHALL BE CAULKED WITH A FIRE RETARDANT INTUMESCENT MATERIAL. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. S. PROVIDE SPRINKLER PROTECTION BELOW ALL DUCTS 4'-0" AND GREATER, AS REQUIRED BY THE LATEST EDITION OF NFPA 13. T. ROUTE SPRINKLER PIPING AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE THROUGHOUT STRUCTURE, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. U. SUPPORT ALL PIPING FROM TOP CHORD OF STRUCTURE. V. COORDINATE NTH MECHANICAL HVAC WORK. DO NOT INSTALL SPRINKLER PIPING BELOW MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT OR WITHIN CLEARANCE SPACES FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. W. ALL HOLES FOR PIPING AND CONDUIT SHALL BE DRILLED OR CORE DRILLED, NO BREAKING OF CONCRETE OR C.M.U. SHALL BE PERMITTED. X. ROUTE SPRINKLER PIPING AROUND ELECTRICAL, DATA, IT, COMM AND ALL OTHER ROOMS DESIGNATED TO ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND/OR PANELS. PROTECT THESE AREAS WITH SIDEWALL SPRINKLERS AS APPLICABLE. PIPING AND SPECIALTIES SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION — RL — REFRIGERANT LIQUID — RS— REFRIGERANT SUCTION – –CD– – COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN r 0 DUCTWORK --I w VOLUME CONTROL DAMPER 1 O/6 RECTANGLE DUCT (WIDTH/HEIGHT) OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER 1 Ofd ROUND DUCT (DIAMETER) H.V.A.C. SIDE WALL DIFFUSER X SUPPLY IDENTIFICATION TAG Q THERMOSTAT CFM XDENOTES TYPE m CD DUCTWORK AND NOT INDICATED ARE ALL OFFSETS AND FITTINGS. OG THERMOSTAT WITH GUARD EXTERIOR LOWER X RETURN/ EXHAUST/LOUVER IDENTIFICATION TAG COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK AND X DENOTES TYPE OG HUMIDISTAT WITH GUARD PROVIDE OFFSETS TO AVOID CONFLICTS. o- MOTORIZED ACTUATOR PLUMBING — - — DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING �GW = GREASE WASTE BELOW FLOOR OR GRADE — IR — IRRIGATION PIPING 1 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SUPPLY GW— GREASE WASTE ABOVE FLOOR OR GRADE P — TRAP PRIMER — - - - — DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRC. — SCW — SOFTENED COLD WATER PIPING — G (XX) — NATURAL GAS PIPING (PSIG) USAN- = SANITARY BELOW FLOOR OR GRADE — PD— PUMPED DISCHARGE HB HOSE BIBB —SAN— SANITARY ABOVE FLOOR OR GRADE --V-- VENT PIPING WH WALL HYDRANT —=ST= STORM BELOW FLOOR OR GRADE o FCO FLOOR CLEAN OUT ST — STORM ABOVE FLOOR OR GRADE C. SUPPORT DUCTWORK, COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT FROM TOP CHORD OF ® FLOOR DRAIN — SO — STORM OVERFLOW ABOVE FLOOR/GRADE Co SON RD ROOF DRAIN BUILDING STRUCTURE. (0) ORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN N C1 DSN DOWNSPOUT NOZZLE VALVES r; o LO BALL VALVE ON PLANS. ALL DIMENSIONS GIVEN IN INCHES AND INDICATE INSIDE CLEAR SWING GATE CHECK VALVE (ARROW IND. FLOW) PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE L LOCKABLE BALL VALVE SAFETY PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE rsvac _Pj PRESSURE REDUCING PILOT VALVE �H- BUTTERFLYVALVE 4Q TEMPERATURE MIXING VALVE PRvx o 0 O Z rr REDUCED PRESS. BACKFLOW ABBY. GLOBE VALVE i[7 AUTO FLOW VALVE I ANGLE GLOBE VALVE OF DUCT. WHERE SPACE CONDITIONS DO NOT PERMIT AND WHERE CIRCUIT SETTER oc DOUBLE CHK VALVE BACKFLOW ASSY. * ILL aH- PLUG VALVE} OUTSIDE STEM & YOKE VALVE m VALVE IN VERTICAL LINE PRESSURE GAUGE & BALL VALVE F. SIZE TRANSITIONS WITH A MINIMUM SLOPE OF 1:4. USE 45'ENTRY SOLENOID VALVE w U FITTINGS FOR BRANCH DUCT TAPS. SEAL SHEET METAL CONNECTIONS Q --0� POST INDICATOR VALVE G. FLEXIBLE DUCTS SHALL BE FACTORY INSULATED, PROVIDE DRAWBANDS AND DUCT TAPE ON ALL ROUND FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. MAXIMUM Q FITTINGS LENGTH OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS SHALL BE THREE FEET. ELBOW _-4–D ELBOW -OUTLET DOWN }— ~ CAPPED CONNECTION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND LIGHTING. 45' ELBOW __+Q ELBOW -OUTLET UP � STRAINER I. ALL TRANSVERSE SPIRAL AND ROUND DUCT JOINTS FOR ALL EXPOSED TEE. OUTLET DOWN T FLOW DIRECTION DUCTWORK SHALL BE MADE WITH WARD KEATING CONNECTOR TEE CENTER -BEADED SLIP COUPLING OR APPROVED EQUAL ROUND DUCT SIAMESE CONNECTION —�� TEE - SIDE OUTLET DOWN -�-o-� TEE - OUTLET UP J. INSTALL ESCUTCHEON PLATES ON ALL SPIRAL AND ROUND DUCT WALL Z M TEE -SIDE OUTLET UP PENETRATIONS, FABRICATE ESCUTCHEON PLATES WITH FLAT SHEET METAL o 2" TO 3" WIDTH AROUND DUCT. MISCELLANEOUS ® EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION TAG OA OUTSIDE AIR WC WATER CLOSET (ELECTRICAL CONNECTION REQUIRED) LABELS AND OTHER IDENTIFICATION TAGS. PROVIDE PAINT GRIP FINISH :5 C6� FOR ALL DUCTS EXPOSED TO VIEW. Uj VA VENTILATION AIR UR URINAL QX DETAIL REFERENCE o^W XX SHEETREFERENCE EA EXHAUST AIR L LAVATORY _ ELECTRICAL PANEL -SHOWN FOR RA RELIEF OR RETURN AIR S SINK COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLY SA SUPPLY AIR DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN ® ELECTRICAL PANEL - SHOWN FOR (APPLICABLE FOR ALL PLUMBING SHEETS) M EWC ELECTRIC WATER COOLER COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLY m CDto A. INDICATED ARE APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS OF PIPING. NOT INDICATED ARE w O_ N ALL OFFSETS, FITTINGS AND VALVES. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING PIPE SIZES MSB MOP SINK BASIN GENERAL FIRE PROTECTION NOTES (APPLICABLE FOR ALL FIRE PROTECTION SHEETS) FIRE PROTECTION WORK SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE FOLLOWING: A. 1. COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM IN COMPLIANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES, LAWS AND REGULATIONS INCLUDING ALL PIPING AND ALL VALVES, ETC. PROVIDE FIRE PROTECTION RISERS INCLUDING VALVES, ALARM, AND INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION. 2. ALL AREAS OF THE BUILDING INDICATED SHALL BE SPRINKLERED ACCORDING TO THE LATEST EDITION OF APPLICABLE NFPA STANDARDS, SPECIFICALLY NFPA 13. ENTIRE SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED PER IOWA STATE FIRE MARSHAL REQUIREMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY FIRE DEPARTMENT. 3. DESIGN SHALL BE BASED ON HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS PER NFPA 13, WITH SHOP DRAWINGS PREPARED ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE IOWA STATE FIRE MARSHAL. B. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC, INTENDED TO CONVEY THE SCOPE OF WORK AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE SYSTEM. COORDINATE THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM LAYOUT WITH ALL ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, HVAC, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. PROVIDE OFFSETS AS NECESSARY TO AVOID CONFLICTS. SEE PLUMBING SHEETS FOR FIRE PROTECTION WORK. C. THE LAYOUT SHOWN IS TO DEPICT THE APPROXIMATE ROUTING OF PIPE AND THE GENERAL AREAS TO BE SERVED. THE EXACT NUMBER, TYPE, COVERAGE, ETC., OF SPRINKLERS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY ALL AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. D. EXTEND A 4" PIPE THROUGH WALL FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (FDC). FDC SHALL BE INSTALLED 3'-O" TO 4'-0" ABOVE GRADE. PROVIDE HOSE CONNECTION THREADS TO MATCH LOCAL FIRE DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE BRONZE FINISH ON FDC. SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION OF FDC. E. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR CEILING TYPES AND HEIGHTS, AND LOCATIONS OF EXPOSED STRUCTURE. COORDINATE ALL SPRINKLER LOCATIONS IN AS AESTHETIC SPACING AS POSSIBLE. F. ALL PIPING AND SPRINKLERS IN EXPOSED AREAS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH DUCTWORK AND LIGHTS. EXPOSED SPRINKLERS SHALL BE UPRIGHT UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SPRINKLERS AS NECESSARY. G. ALL SPRINKLERS IN GYP. BOARD AND LAY -IN CEILINGS SHALL BE CONCEALED TYPE WITH WHITE FINISH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL SPRINKLERS IN SOFFITS SHALL BE RECESSED SIDEWALLS WITH WHITE/CHROME FINISH, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. H. PROVIDE AUXILIARY DRAINS FOR ALL LOW SPOTS, TYPICAL. I. SPRINKLER TYPES AND LOCATIONS, AND SPRINKLER PIPING SHOWN FOR AESTHETIC AND COORDINATION PURPOSES. ACTUAL SYSTEM LAYOUT SHALL BE BASED ON HYDRAULIC DESIGN AND SHOP DRAWINGS, SPRINKLERS SHOWN ADJACENT TO AIR OUTLETS/INLETS AND LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE LOCATED 6" MINIMUM FROM BOTH. ALL SPRINKLERS IN LAY -IN CEILINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED WITHIN 3" OF THE CENTER OF CEILING TILE. NOTIFY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF CONFLICTS. J. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 15300 AND 15310 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. K. SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY AVAILABLE WATER PRESSURES AND FLOW FROM LOCAL WATER DEPARTMENT. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT HYDRANT FLOW TEST DATA THAT IS NOT MORE THAN ONE YEAR OLDER THAN THE DATE OF SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL. L. FIRE DEPARTMENT INSPECTORS' TEST, FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (FDC) AND MAIN DRAIN SHALL BE PIPED THROUGH EXTERIOR WALL. LOCATE MAIN DRAIN AND FDC 3'-0" ABOVE GRADE. PROVIDE A CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCK BELOW OUTLET ON GRADE. M. SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL CEILING HEIGHTS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR BEFORE MAKING FINAL PIPE DROPS TO SPRINKLERS. A COST EXTRA IS NOT ACCEPTED IF CEILING HEIGHTS CHANGE. N. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF ALL PIPING SYSTEMS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PREVENT PIPING FREEZEUPS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER OF AREAS FOR POTENTIAL FREEZEUP CONCERNS. 0. PROVIDE DRY TYPE SPRINKLERS AT ALL VESTIBULE ENTRANCE LOCATIONS. P. ALL EXPOSED PIPING SHALL BE CLEANED AND PREPARED FOR PAINT. Q. APPLICABLE UL CONSTRUCTION DETAILS SHALL BE USED WHERE RATED ASSEMBLIES ARE PENETRATED BY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM. R. PIPE OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS SHALL BE CAULKED WITH A FIRE RETARDANT INTUMESCENT MATERIAL. SEE SPECIFICATIONS. S. PROVIDE SPRINKLER PROTECTION BELOW ALL DUCTS 4'-0" AND GREATER, AS REQUIRED BY THE LATEST EDITION OF NFPA 13. T. ROUTE SPRINKLER PIPING AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE THROUGHOUT STRUCTURE, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. U. SUPPORT ALL PIPING FROM TOP CHORD OF STRUCTURE. V. COORDINATE NTH MECHANICAL HVAC WORK. DO NOT INSTALL SPRINKLER PIPING BELOW MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT OR WITHIN CLEARANCE SPACES FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT. W. ALL HOLES FOR PIPING AND CONDUIT SHALL BE DRILLED OR CORE DRILLED, NO BREAKING OF CONCRETE OR C.M.U. SHALL BE PERMITTED. X. ROUTE SPRINKLER PIPING AROUND ELECTRICAL, DATA, IT, COMM AND ALL OTHER ROOMS DESIGNATED TO ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND/OR PANELS. PROTECT THESE AREAS WITH SIDEWALL SPRINKLERS AS APPLICABLE. FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet MG1 } m GENERAL MECHANICAL HVAC NOTES o a r 0 (APPLICABLE FOR ALL MECHANICAL DUCTWORK SHEETS) A. INDICATED ARE APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND m CD DUCTWORK AND NOT INDICATED ARE ALL OFFSETS AND FITTINGS. ren � COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK AND Cl) PROVIDE OFFSETS TO AVOID CONFLICTS. 1 N B. AVOID LOCATING DUCTWORK, COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT THROUGH AND OVER ELECTRICAL, DATA, TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND PANELS. o N C. SUPPORT DUCTWORK, COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT FROM TOP CHORD OF > Co %o BUILDING STRUCTURE. LU it N D. DUCTWORK DIMENSIONS ON PLANS AND DETAILS INDICATE THE SIDE SEEN r; o LO ON PLANS. ALL DIMENSIONS GIVEN IN INCHES AND INDICATE INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. INCREASE SIZE TO ACCOMMODATE LINER. o 0 O Z E. CONSTRUCT ELBOWS WITH CENTERLINE RADIUS OF 1-1/2 TIMES THE WIDTH I fD OF DUCT. WHERE SPACE CONDITIONS DO NOT PERMIT AND WHERE z ILL INDICATED ON DRAWINGS USE SQUARE ELBOWS WITH TURNING VANES. m :� F. SIZE TRANSITIONS WITH A MINIMUM SLOPE OF 1:4. USE 45'ENTRY w U FITTINGS FOR BRANCH DUCT TAPS. SEAL SHEET METAL CONNECTIONS Q AND JOINTS. G. FLEXIBLE DUCTS SHALL BE FACTORY INSULATED, PROVIDE DRAWBANDS AND DUCT TAPE ON ALL ROUND FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS. MAXIMUM Q : LENGTH OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS SHALL BE THREE FEET. N w xa " H. COORDINATE ALL GRILLE, REGISTER AND DIFFUSER LOCATIONS WITH }— ~ ILU > w06 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND LIGHTING. I. ALL TRANSVERSE SPIRAL AND ROUND DUCT JOINTS FOR ALL EXPOSED Q DUCTWORK SHALL BE MADE WITH WARD KEATING CONNECTOR CENTER -BEADED SLIP COUPLING OR APPROVED EQUAL ROUND DUCT 0 a N CONNECTOR WITH CLEAR SEALANT. WIPE CLEAN REMAINING SEALANT. J. INSTALL ESCUTCHEON PLATES ON ALL SPIRAL AND ROUND DUCT WALL Z N m C? PENETRATIONS, FABRICATE ESCUTCHEON PLATES WITH FLAT SHEET METAL o 2" TO 3" WIDTH AROUND DUCT. K. THOROUGHLY CLEAN ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK, REMOVING ALL SHIPPING a_ LABELS AND OTHER IDENTIFICATION TAGS. PROVIDE PAINT GRIP FINISH :5 C6� FOR ALL DUCTS EXPOSED TO VIEW. Uj F a N o^W U I..L GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES s_ (APPLICABLE FOR ALL PLUMBING SHEETS) M Cirn 04 m CDto A. INDICATED ARE APPROXIMATE LOCATIONS OF PIPING. NOT INDICATED ARE w O_ N ALL OFFSETS, FITTINGS AND VALVES. FIELD VERIFY EXISTING PIPE SIZES p N AND SERVICES PRIOR TO FINAL CONNECTION. COORDINATE LOCATIONS �/'� V J z WITH OTHER TRADES AND PROVIDE OFFSETS AND RELOCATE TO AVOID - CONFLICTS. Q 7, fn Y N B. DO NOT ROUTE PIPING, COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT OVER ELECTRICAL PANELS. AVOID ROUTING THROUGH ELECTRICAL, DATA, TELEPHONE OR Q EQUIPMENT ROOMS UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. N C. SUPPORT PIPING, COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT FROM THE TOP CHORD OF BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. HOLD PIPING TIGHT TO BOTTOM OFU) STRUCTURAL MEMBERS OR RUN THROUGH JOIST WEBS. DO NOT USE WIRE OR PERFORATED METAL TO SUPPORT PIPING. DO NOT SUPPORT PIPING �� ■ . . W FROM OTHER PIPING, DUCTWORK AND CONDUITS. DO NOT SUPPORT FROM O METAL ROOF DECK. D. LOCATE PLUMBING WORK ABOVE CEILINGS, IN PIPE CHASES, OR OTHER CONCEALED ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. LOCATE AND ARRANGE VALVES AND DRAIN FITTINGS TO BE ACCESSIBLE THROUGH Q LAY -IN CEILINGS. PROVIDE ACCESS PANEL AND DOOR FOR ALL NON -ACCESSIBLE INSTALLATIONS. O W E. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS. TOP Z _ r OF STRAINER SHALL BE 1/8" BELOW FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION AND W W FLOOR SHALL SLOPE TOWARD FLOOR DRAIN. Uj�wxx F. COMPLY WITH LOCAL UTILITIES, RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR ALL GAS PIPING. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF GAS OUTLETS WITH EQUIPMENT. W G. LOCATE PIPING IN EXTERIOR BUILDING WALLS ON THE WARM SIDE OF U 0 BUILDING INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIER. COORDINATE INSTALLATION V OF BUILDING INSULATION TO RUN CONTINUOUS BETWEEN PIPING AND W Wrt BUILDING WALL. V H. ROUTE DRAINAGE PIPING AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE AND PITCH IN THE W DIRECTION OF FLOW. COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES. DRAINAGE Q J PIPING 3 INCHES AND SMALLER SHALL SLOPE NO LESS THAN 1/4 INCH PER FOOT, DRAINAGE PIPING 4 INCHES AND LARGER SHALL SLOPE NO LESS THAN 1/8 INCH PER FOOT. O U) Cn J O O I. INSTALL WALL HYDRANTS BETWEEN 18" MIN. AND 24" MAX. ABOVE FINISH GRADE AND FINISHED FLOOR. PROVIDE ACCESSIBLE SHUTOFF VALVE J m INSIDE THE BUILDING FOR EACH WALL HYDRANT. co ■ ■j J. INSTALL WALL CLEAN OUTS (WRQ), WHEN LOCATED BEHIND A WATER 5- cod CLOSET OR CABINETRY ON ALL SANITARY & STORM STACKS AT 30" A.F.F. W OR AT 42" A.F.F. K. PVC PIPING SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN A RETURN AIR PLENUM, UNLESS IT IS WRAPPED WITH AN APPROVED INSULATION AND APPROVED AS AN Lam. W ASSEMBLY PER ASTM E84 OR UL -723. U C) W W FEB 21 2012 C/3 4:5f (11 FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet MG1 m MECHANICAL KEYNOTES: ((2>) W CONNECT EXHAUST DUCT TO RANGE EXHAUST HOOD DUCT TAP. INSTALL COOLING COIL IN DUCTWORK. ROUTE REFRIGERANT PIPING TO 16 INTAKE AND EXHAUST PIPING UP THROUGH CONCENTRIC ROOF VENT o a HOOD, FAN AND BACKDRAFT DAMPER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONDENSING UNIT. PROVIDE A TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL TERMINATION. CONCENTRIC ROOF VENT TERMINATION KIT FURNISHED OTHERS. CONDENSATE DRAIN PAN BELOW THE COIL. SLOPE PAN TO 1" DRAIN WITH FURNACE. m �, OUTLET. ROUTE 1" COOLING COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING TO SEE DETAIL 3/M2 FOR LOUVER INSTALLATION. FLOOR DRAIN IN MECH 107. SEE DETAIL 5/M2 FOR PIPING 17 ROUTE 1" CONDENSATE DRAIN LINES FROM FURNACES TO CONDENSATE REQUIREMENTS. PUMP. SEE DETAIL 5/M2. PUMP DISCHARGE TO CONNECT TO 1-1/4" SIZE REFRIGERANT PIPING PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. CONDENSATE DRAIN PASSING THROUGH ROOM. ROUTE 1-1/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING TO FLOOR DRAIN IN MECH � N UNDERSLAB DUCTWORK. SEE DETAIL 4/M2. COORDINATE WITH ALL 107. INSULATE PIPING PER SPECIFICATIONS. 18 ROUTE 1" CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE FROM FURNACE TO FLOOR DRAIN. G>Ln UNDERFLOOR CONDUIT AND PIPING. SEE DETAIL 5/M2. Z 10 PROVIDE AND INSTALL TWO POSITION 24 -VOLT CONTROL DAMPER. O PROVIDE CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PAD UNDER CONDENSING UNIT. SEE 6/M2 FOR CONTROL REQUIREMENTS. MOUNT UNIT ABOVE ROOM TO SERVE GATHERING ROOM. FOLLOW In 19 m N r - MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS FOR MOUNTING AND REQUIRE w CO INSTALL FURNACE PER DETAIL 1/M2. ROUTE REFRIGERANT PIPING TO G>SEE SECTION 6/M2 FOR ADDITIONAL DUCTWORK REQUIREMENTS. CLEARANCES. N CONDENSING UNIT. SIZE PIPING PER MANUFACTURERS r � d RECOMMENDATIONS. ROUTE 1" COOLING COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN 12 PROVIDE AND INSTALL TWO 16/12 TRANSFER AIR GRILLES IN CHASE 20 INSTALL S-1 GRILLE IN BRANCH DUCT FLOOR PENETRATION FROM 6"0 L) 0 1 N PIPING TO FLOOR DRAIN IN MECH 005. SEE DETAIL 5/M2 FOR PIPING WALL. INSTALL ONE LOW AND ONE HIGH ON WALL TO ALLOW AIR UNDERSLAB DUCT. BALANCE SUPPLY GRILLE FOR 80 CFM. O O REQUIREMENTS. TRANSFER THROUGH CHASE. i Z 21 MOUNT SUPPLY REGISTER IN TOP OF BENCH. SEE ARCHITECTURAL (D C>INSTALL FURNACE PER DETAIL 1/M2. ROUTE REFRIGERANT PIPING TO 13 EXTEND DUCTWORK TO WITHIN 1 FOOT OF EXTERIOR WALL AND CAP SECTIONS. 1L e o CONDENSING UNIT. SIZE PIPING PER MANUFACTURERS FOR FUTURE EXTENSION. `m -�° Z RECOMMENDATIONS. ROUTE 1" COOLING COIL CONDENSATE DRAIN Y c r PIPING TO CONDENSATE PUMP CP -1. SEE DETAIL 5/M2 FOR PIPING14 MOUNT 18x4 SUPPLY REGISTER IN WALL 18" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. W r li ( ) REQUIREMENTS. ROUTE PUMP DISCHARGE PIPING TO 1-1/4" CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING ABOVE. 15 18/4 SUPPLY DUCT UP IN CHASE. COORDINATE WITH PIPING BELOW FLOOR AND WITHIN THE CHASE. MOUNT 18x4 SUPPLY REGISTERS IN Q WALL AT 7'-0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. C)LQ 0 0 N W OD = N J W 1 2 3 4 5, b 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 }� o� �m yW o �N O ILL D N Z J m m� L LU 7 i LU cs5 M a M IDS _----------- - -- --} — — jl_ i 1B 19 �_ s. 100 SA ` 1 ---------- 0 In N 100 SA . r- ---gym i i w 12/8 EA { i -r------------ -�-- CH 1 I1`° Cu 5 - 10/10 TRANSFER 11 N N 2 II II 1 p DUCT AND GRILLES. 16 11 II � 17 4� r r T-1�1 T-1 1 1 1 1 5 CU 1 01 i{ -3 16 II II ) F ({ 16/10 TRANSFER 10/10 TRANSFER j 14 ® 12/10 RA �<�o}- Al I i; I N 2 n7 3 I 2 DUCT AND GRILLES. DUCT AND GRILLES. j o� - ❑ t - --- LJ ...{ i I I -. _ L.7 -. -. _r Q._ _-.---- -- -- �....------- - --- ,-.. -.- Q }- --------_. _---�---- _. --___. 0-.- _.-_ _-_. C � m o O O H T SS 80 SA u' N T — _ ---- 8 -__ --- _ _.: -- - - - o N _-- 1 I r T r�T–r, -- -�.. {� { — 7 1 _ ��JL=�' 180 RA r_z r r — — — — cs '�------- -- -- --- O a - �i �/'� 5 DS b os-sn c 4 I N o N o - I a i i i_ 12/10 RA I T-1 -1JECH Z I rn I rn 22/18 RA { v> I / 1 1 114 1 1 �- 4) 0 3 w �n 26 3 �_ ----- --- --- ------ -- 8 0 SA--- w i i i I /�I I I V 12/12 EA T �n Y 19 I ---- eo -� co _ o 0 16 26 RA / 1 I, \ - - - +� N Z I DS _ __ __________ I I I rn _ 2A 8"0 SA �� �� - / 1 �y 180 EA ;y 180 EA �� �y 180 EA -1 N I N N N I 1 I I1 vi h h h I' 16 - � i i 1 V / 10 6 6R � 4 13 Itv�, wN N � 1 {aI �`�� 11 1 - Irr-s -- � I� I I I LU BOTTOM OF DUCT 19 f -i Io1 8' I 3A N AT 10'-2 ;`/ i { 1 S-1 1 1 18/14 i f, F 150 {�{ ` 15 5, 1 I � $A Q 4 fir% iY 1 i 1 140 5_ 10/10 TRANSFER N 20 C�' DUCT AND GRILLE S. y 180 VA r180 VA 180 VA I i Z ' —__ 11 5-1 Y1S-1 I I I 0 ' 11 _141_ ti{150 C I I 9;16 150 V ----- --+- ----- --� �'� ' 140 Sr --- -- t�101 Ii-- --------------- ---4-- -1 - 100 18� I - -- r- -- 140 SA- - - ----- y i i lei - I W - 200 SA 1 Y --- ^ ' ------ ' _-- n 100 SA _ - 1"ll. J __LV1 X160 $A1fL). MI 10 nI -_–__ "' ___ - _ _-__–_–_ A:1-1 cw- r-� I r'r�C_�-T I 'r r I r r I r r I [] { L] - L} -- q.. L.�..I 0 1tm NI tzt - - - - I Im "�I 1 C3 ❑ o - V rl O�ir---r ---r l O�ir-= I in in ----� I I ------------- I - - -- - w 0 ® y - Q - �( 21 TYPICAL) 14/22 SA i 21 TYPICAL) LOUVER L_LQ2 ' LU BALANCE TO 300 AFM. F 6 I I I i O 2�LOUVER L 5 4 f3 5 L=2-Cf.)4 VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL. DS O C/3 5 3 O Z M :5 C.6 W HVAC Floor Plan N j= SCALE. 1/8" as 170' 0�' O J Q FEB 21 2012 LL 41 s 1 Pry LU � Q 2 Cn SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND do GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN 1 DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usaxom COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. PA 261 111.0253 j Sheet M1 HAND -TIGHT U, PLUG WALL CONSTRUCTION COOLING COIL OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE 1 DRAIN PAN EXTERIOR DUCT INSULATION AS SPECIFIED ON ALL OUTSIDE AIR DUCT Ff �1 DRAIN AN WATER LEVEL SEAL OR GASKET (l ALL AROUND (TYP.) r ROOF --- \ - jC14 TO CONDENSATE PUMPOR FLOOR DRAIN. ------- -ROOF JOIST FASTENERS BIRD SCREEN 6" ON CENTER 12X12 jt (A) =UNIT NEGATIVE STATIC PRESSURE AT PAN. GASKETED AIRCRAFT CABLE` \� ���� ��. ACCESS DOOR TYPE 'A' LIGHT FIXTURE CAULK / L 3/4" STEEL CHANNEL / s - FURNACE AND COOLING COIL-� CONDENSATE PIPING PIPING DETAIL X51 ,i' i s SEAL ALL LOWER SHEET METAL NOT TO SCALE f / JOINTS WATERTIGHT WITH MASTIC 30- (MINIMUM) a18" EXHAUST AIR DUCT =� 20 GAUGE SHEET METAL BLANKOFF ATTACHED TO ALL UNUSED AREAS OF LOUVER. BACK WITH 2" RIGID 3# 20 GAUGE SHEET METAL DENSITY FIBERGLASS BOARD INSULATION WITH FOIL SCRIM ANGLE. BENT TO FACING THE ROOM. SEAL WATERTIGHT. MATCH DUCT AND LOUVER. CLIP ANGLE AROUND ENTIRE PERIMETER OF LOUVER EXTENDED DRIP SILL BY G.C. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS OF INSTALLATION VEN TI LAT )UCT INSTALLATION 24/14 OA 14/24 VA CONTROL DAMPER WITH ACTUATOR. DH 'I 1" CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE. DISCHARGE OVER FLOOR i///� DRAIN. � I i ERV SECTION AND CONTROL DIAGRAM (0�6_� NOT TO SCALE NOTES: 1. SEAL ALL JOINTS ON BOTTOM SURFACE OF DUCT WITHIN 6'-0" OF THE LOUVER WATER TIGHT. 2. MOUNT BOTTOM OF INTAKE LOUVERS AT LEAST 40" ABOVE GRADE ELEVATION TO MINIMIZE CHANCES OF SNOW DRIFTING INTO THE LOUVER, 3. CAULK SHEET METAL SCREWS WHERE THEY PENETRATE METAL. LOU 3TALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SUPPLY AIR FLOOR GRILLE WITH OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER.SEE HVAC PLANS AND SCHEDULES FOR TYPE, LOCATION AND SIZE. COORDINATE SIZE TO MATCH REGISTER INLET. z FINISHED FLOOR SAND BACKFILL ON ALL SIDES OF DUCT. FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION RETURN AIR DUCTWORK SEE HVAC DRAWINGS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION GAS FIRED FURNACE WITH DX AIR CONDITIONING COIL. SEE HVAC DRAWINGS FOR FURNACE SIZE AND LOCATION REFRIGERANT SUCTION LINE CONNECTION SUPPLY AIR PLENUM SUPPORTS FURNACE. REFRIGERANT LIQUID PROVIDE ADDITIONAL LINE CONNECTION FURNACE SUPPORT IF ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER CONDENSATE DRAIN. IS USED FOR UNDERSLAB SEE DETAIL 5/M2 PLENUM. SUPPLY AIR PLENUM. SEE DETAIL 2/M2. SAND BACKFILL ON ALL SIDES AND BELOW PLENUM. 3" PVC PIPE CONNECTED TO BOTTOM OF PLENUM. SEAL WATER TIGHT. USE TO ACCESS BOTTOM OF PLENUM TO REMOVE WATER ACCUMULATION MANUFACTURED SADDLE AND DIFFUSER BRANCH TAP. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. UNDERSLAB SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK (SEE HVAC PLANS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION) COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH DRAINAGE TILE. TILE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS. PERIMETER INSULATION AS SPECIFIED BY ARCHITECT FLOOR SUPPLY AIR GRILLE & UNDERSLAB SUPPLY AIR DUCT INSTALLATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE FURNACE DOWN FL( NOT TO SCALE r- FLOOR CLEANOUT FINISHED FLOOR SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK SEE HVAC DRAWINGS FOR SIZE AND LOCATION IETAIL UNDER FLOOR SUPPLY DUCT PLENUM DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SEE SHEET MG1 FOR MECHANICAL SYMBOL LEGEND & GENERAL MECHANICAL NOTES DUCT CONNECTION PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. UNDERSLAB DUCTWORK. SUPPLY AIR PLENUM TO BE OF SAME MANUFACTURER AND MATERIAL AS UNDERSLAB DUCTWORK. FEB 21 2012 `! S'R F"y FARRIS ENGINEERING AM OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usaxom COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright low_ City File No. PA 261 C) o a 8 D lL M LL ^1 Z J N_ LU a LU ao �rn 0 `J Z�QrA �N J N 0 LU U M oM J N m � WN C/A] N �./ / ' `nr 6 z C6 LU LC) CL Z N z N W I� Z 0 C ^ Q W LU F— U - w U It o 0 C!3 0 Cn 0 Q W � � J W Q L) Et LU > Z I- Z Cn 111.0253 Sheet M2 m a N r o N lz Cn N Ln z O uJ m >.SO N r— L $ N CD r) Q U 0 In O O Z m z m S 'V L N Y W F 0- o 0 LL m = N� N R = �6 o(b U �m U� C) o a 8 D lL M LL ^1 Z J N_ LU a LU ao �rn 0 `J Z�QrA �N J N 0 LU U M oM J N m � WN C/A] N �./ / ' `nr 6 z C6 LU LC) CL Z N z N W I� Z 0 C ^ Q W LU F— U - w U It o 0 C!3 0 Cn 0 Q W � � J W Q L) Et LU > Z I- Z Cn 111.0253 Sheet M2 r DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE DUCTWORK SYSTEM ACOUSTICAL LINER FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS RIGID FIBERGLASS THICKNESS (INCHES) REMARKS RECTANGULAR RETURN AIR X VOLTAGE/ BTUH 1" 1 ROUND RETURN AIR (EXPOSED) X NA QUA 1" 1, 2 RECTANGULAR EXHAUST AIR X DS -2B 568 1" 1 ROUND EXHAUST AIR (EXPOSED) X MUY-GA24NA 1, 2, 3 1" 1, 2 RECTANGULAR OUTSIDE AIR 22.00 X MITSUBISHI 1" 1 m X L3 KITCHEN HOOD 1" 1 ROUND VENTILATION AIR (EXPOSED) X 4" LU a 1" 1, 2 ROUND SINGLE WALL VENTILATION AIR iT a M 1.10 1" 1 ROUND UNDERSLAB SUPPLY AIR MOUNT 94.fi% 60.00 ALUM 3 0.80" LENNOX S1 FLOOR LINEAR SLOT 121 25 18 x 4 0 X BRUSH G61 MPV-06DC-090 PRICE LBPH 1, 2 FLA SUPPLY 41.00 180 24.00 - MOUNT 0.60" LENNOX ALUM - DOWN -FLOW S7 m Y 181 - 25 30 x 4 SURFACE X BRUSH PRICE LBPH 1, 2 SUPPLY CU -2 320 FLA 208 MOUNT E/E SS ALUM MR 3R M/M v a _ 321- 25 48 x 4 SURFACE X BRUSH PRICE LBPH 1, 2 SUPPLY 480 MOUNT CONDENSING UNIT FLA ALUM 1 E!E SS S-2 SUPPLY ROUND 301 - 25 12 x 10 DUCT X CLEAR PRICE SDGE 1, 2 ADJUSTABLE 350 MOUNT ANDD CUA CONDENSING UNIT FLA R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 0-200 25 12 x g SURFACE MIM X STND. 10KAIC PRICE 530 N 35° BLADE MOUNT WHITE R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 201 - 25 12 x 10 SURFACE CPLUG& X STND. - PRICE 530 1, 2 - 10KAIC 35° BLADE 300 WATTS MOUNT WHITE R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. Z 25 tI7 SURFACE 12 KW X STND. E/E PRICE 530 1, 2 MR N1 35° BLADE 450 - 10KAIC MOUNT HEATER WHITE O R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 451 - 25 24212 SURFACE X STND. DUCTLESS SPLIT- PRICE 530 1, 2 1 E!E 35° BLADE 550 MR N1 MOUNT - - WHITE 1 INDOOR UNIT R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 1900 25 36x24 SURFACE X STND. PRICE 530 1, 2 DS -1B DUCTLESS SPLIT- 35° BLADE 208 LU m MOUNT 20 MR WHITE MIM - - R-2 RETURN ROUND 201 - 25 12 x 10 DUCT X CLEAR PRICE SDGER 1 PERFORATED 300 N DUCTLESS SPLIT- MOUNT 208 1 ANDD SH 20 MR R-2 RETURN ROUND 801 - 25 36 z 12 DUCT INDOOR UNIT X CLEAR 0 M Q PERFORATED 900 MOUNT DS -2B ANDD 13.8 208 1 T-1 TRANSFER SINGLE DEFL. 201 - 25 10 x 10 t U o � CL PRICE 530 1 35° BLADE 300 MOUNT WHITE DS -3A T-1 TRANSFER N 301 - 25 16 x 10 SURFACE MR X STND. - PRICE 530 1 1 O 35° BLADE 450 MOUNT WHITE E-1 EXHAUST SINGLE DEFL. 301 - 25 16 x 10 SURFACE 1 X STND- 20 Z 1, 2 MIM - 35° BLADE 450 1 MOUNT WHITE E-2 EXHAUST ROUND 201 - 25 12 x 10 r ECH-1 X CLEAR 120 PRICE SDGER 1, 2 - - ADJUSTABLE 300 MIM - MOUNT 10KAIC ANDD HEATER E-2 EXHAUST ROUND 801 - 25 36 x 12 DUCT X CLEAR PRICE SDGER 1, 2 1.5 KW 120 ADJUSTABLE 900 - - MOUNT - MIM ANOD m Z IL HEATER ECH-3 ELECTRIC CABINET 1.5 KW 120 1 M/M - - 10K AIC w F N_ g. (.7 ERV -1 ENERGY RECOVERY 3 HP 208 3 FJE SS 30 MR N1 VFD - - 10KAIC VENTILATOR F-1 FURNACE 12 FLA 120 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC F-2 FURNACE 12 FLA 120 1 E/E SH O 2 B N N1 MIM - - 10KAIC F-0 FURNACE 12 FLA 120 1 EIE SH 20 MR N1 MIM W m = N - 10KAIC PP -1 DOM. HOT WATER CIRC. 1/8 HP 120 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC y�y >u°Q mcg PUMP REMARKS: EWC-1 cr 0,6 3.7 FLA 120 1. SEE SPEC SECTION 15890 "AIR DISTRIBUTION" FOR ACOUSTICAL LINER SPECIFICATIONS & SEE SECTION 15207 MIE CORD & 20 - - NUM - - 10K AIC 2 V < m ao "HVAC PLUG G0.1 GARBAGE DISPOSER 1I3 HP 120 1 M/E CORD & 20 INSULATION" FOR OTHER DUCT INSULATION SPECIFICATIONS. - MIM - - 10KAIC 2 PLUG 2. PROVIDE DOUBLE WALL DUCT WITH PERFORATED INTERIOR LINER. GWH-1 GAS FIRED WATER 6 FLA 120 1 E/E SH 26 j1 N1 MIM - - 10KAIC HEATER ,,/ 0 a N 3. HDPE DUCT DOES NOT REQUIRE INSULATION. GENERAL NOTES: A, VERIFYICOORDINATERLL RATINGS FOR EQUIPMENT. WHERE SUCH RATINGS ARE OTHER THAN THAT INDICATED ON MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE, PROVIDE DISCONNECTS, MOTOR STARTERS, OVERCURRENT DEVICES AND RELATED REVISIONS ACCORDINGLY. WHERE EQUIPMENT IS PROVIDED WITH RATINGS OTHER THAN THAT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION AND ASSOCIATED COSTS FOR REVISIONS. B. PROVIDE FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS WITH INTEGRAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION. o cd HP -1.2. IN THESE INSTANCES, THE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS DO NOT CHANGE FROM ONE MARK TO THE NEXT, ONLY THE UNIQUE IDENTIFIER CHANGES. D. HORSEPOWER RATED SWITCHES {SH): FOR 120 V MOTORS LESS THAN 1/2 HP, PROVIDE FUSEHOLDER WITH SWITCH, FUSED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION AND NEC REQUIREMENTS. FOR 120 V MOTORS RATED 1/2 HP OR 314 HP, PROVIDE HP RATED TOGGLE SWITCH (WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT DEVICE MEETS NEC REQUIREMENTS FOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION) OR FUSED SAFETY SWITCH. E. INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS (COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER AND SAFETY SWITCH, VFDS, ETC) AS DEFINED BY THE NEC ARTICLE 409, SHALL 8E PROVIDED WITH A FACTORY INSTALLED NAMEPLATE WITH MARKINGS AS INDICATED BY NEC 409.116. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR) LABEL SHALL BE AS INDICATED ABOVE. REMARKS: 1. PROVIDE INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN INDOOR AND OUTDOOR UNIT. 2. CORD AND PLUG FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 3. CIRCULATING PUMP TO BE CONTROLLED BY TIME CLOCK. TIME CLOCK AND WIRING TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. �N JN Z m N O� W a W ¢o Crn tiA dm m O LU U 1. PROVIDE WITH SCR CONTROLLER AND DUCT STAT. REMARKS: 1. PROVIDE SPECIFIC NOISE CRITERIA (NC) DATA FOR EACH LINE ITEM WITH SHOP DRAWINGS. 2. PROVIDE WITH INTEGRAL BALANCING DAMPER. M o� J N m C) W ocli D N O U)rm We 2 Z t` N Q 113. n N 1 REMARKS: Q 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. 2. PROVIDE UNIT WITH INTEGRAL FAN VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES. REMARKS: 3. PROVIDE UNIT WITH INTEGRAL OUTSIDE AIR AND EXHAUST AIR DAMPERS. 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. 2. PROVIDE WITH WIRELESS THERMOSTAT. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL LOCKABLE GUARD. 3. PROVIDE WITH CONDENSATE PUMP. o U„ Q W W LU U O REMARKS; REMARKS: 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. Q 1. COLOR SELECTION BY ARCHITECT. 2. PROVIDE WITH CONCENTRIC ROOF VENT TERMINATION KIT. O V J 3. PROVIDE 7 DAY PROGRAMMABLE 2 -STAGE HEATING AND COOLING THERMOSTAT. Cf.) 4. PROVIDE CONDENSATE NEUTRALIZATION KIT. O Q J � W —1 C45 /'Y� 0 2 W REMARKS: FEB 2 1 2O1Z 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. U �.$? Pry � Q 7� L I— 2 V REMARKS: 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. 2. PROVIDE WITH 2 -STAGE COMPRESSOR. REMARKS: 1. SEE MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE FOR ELECTRICAL DATA. � FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018. This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by REMARKS: the copyright law. 111.02.33 1. PROVIDE INSULATED DRAIN PAN BELOW COIL WITH DRAIN CONNECTION. City File No. PA 261 Sheet M3 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE DUCTWORK SYSTEM ACOUSTICAL LINER FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS RIGID FIBERGLASS THICKNESS (INCHES) REMARKS RECTANGULAR RETURN AIR X VOLTAGE/ BTUH 1" 1 ROUND RETURN AIR (EXPOSED) X NA QUA 1" 1, 2 RECTANGULAR EXHAUST AIR X DS -2B 568 1" 1 ROUND EXHAUST AIR (EXPOSED) X MUY-GA24NA 1, 2, 3 1" 1, 2 RECTANGULAR OUTSIDE AIR 22.00 X MITSUBISHI 1" 1 RECTANGULAR VENTILATION AIR X L3 KITCHEN HOOD 1" 1 ROUND VENTILATION AIR (EXPOSED) X 4" KYNAR 1" 1, 2 ROUND SINGLE WALL VENTILATION AIR 1 X 1.10 1" 1 ROUND UNDERSLAB SUPPLY AIR MOUNT 94.fi% 60.00 ALUM 3 SPLIT SYSTEM UNIT SCHEDULE ELECTRIC DUCT HEATER SCHEDULE CFM COOLING DATA (MBH) MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. WATTS VOLTAGE/ BTUH REMARKS PHASE DH -1 INDEECO NA QUA 12000 20813 40980 1 SPLIT SYSTEM UNIT SCHEDULE INDOOR UNIT MARK OUTDOOR UNIT MARK CFM COOLING DATA (MBH) MANUFACTURER INDOOR UNIT MODEL NO. OUTDOOR UNIT MODEL NO. REMARKS TOTAL SENSIBLE DS -1A DS -18 568 22.00 NA MITSUBISHI MSY-GA24NA MUY-GA24NA 1, 2, 3 DS -2A DS -2B 568 22.00 NA MITSUBISHI MSY-GA24NA MUY-GA24NA 1, 2, 3 DS -3A DS -313 568 22.00 NA MITSUBISHI MSY-GA24NA MUY-GA24NA 1, 2, 3 LOUVER SCHEDULE MARK FUNCTION CFM AIR P.D. SIZE (INCHES) FINISH SCREEN MANUFACTURER &MODEL NO. REMARKS WIDTH HEIGHT DEPTH BIRD INSECT L-1 OUTSIDE AIR 1,600 0.20 30" 18" 6" KYNAR X ALUM. RUSKIN ELF375DX 1 L-2 EXHAUST AIR 1,600 0.30 24" 18" 6" KYNAR X 60.00 RUSKIN ELF375DX 1 L3 KITCHEN HOOD 440 N/A 12" 8" 4" KYNAR X PRICE LBPH RUSKIN ELF375DX 1 REGISTER -GRILLE -DIFFUSER SCHEDULE Memel MARK ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR SCHEDULE PUMP SCHEDULE CFM MAX SIZE BORDER OR MATERIAL MANUFACTURER &MODEL NO. HEAD MANUFACTURER EXT SP MANUFACTURER FUNCTION MARK SERVES TYPE GPM E.A. RPM EFFICIENCY 1,600 REMARKS ALUM. STEEL 95° F t FT. RANGE N.C. &MODEL NO. FRAME 1, 2, 3 81.00 &MODEL NO. 60.00 S1 FLOOR LINEAR SLOT LITTLE GIANT 25 CP -1 F-1 & F-2 CONDENSATE PUMP 25.0 BRUSH 13.40 PRICE LBPH VCMA-15 1 REGISTER -GRILLE -DIFFUSER SCHEDULE Memel MARK ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR SCHEDULE INPUT CFM MAX SIZE BORDER OR MATERIAL MANUFACTURER &MODEL NO. REMARKS MANUFACTURER EXT SP MARK FUNCTION TYPE CFM S.A. 60 E.A. FINISH ACCESS. 1,600 REMARKS ALUM. STEEL 95° F t 81° F RANGE N.C. (INCHES) FRAME 1, 2, 3 81.00 &MODEL NO. 60.00 S1 FLOOR LINEAR SLOT 0-120 25 12 x 4 SURFACE X 95° F BRUSH 13.40 PRICE LBPH 1, 2 1 SUPPLY 1.10 F-1 VERTICAL gg,00 MOUNT 94.fi% 60.00 ALUM 2,165 0.80" LENNOX S1 FLOOR LINEAR SLOT 121 25 18 x 4 SURFACE X BRUSH G61 MPV-06DC-090 PRICE LBPH 1, 2 FLA SUPPLY 41.00 180 24.00 - MOUNT 0.60" LENNOX ALUM - DOWN -FLOW S7 FLOOR LINEAR SLOT 181 - 25 30 x 4 SURFACE X BRUSH PRICE LBPH 1, 2 SUPPLY CU -2 320 FLA 208 MOUNT E/E SS ALUM MR 3R M/M S1 FLOOR LINEAR SLOT 321- 25 48 x 4 SURFACE X BRUSH PRICE LBPH 1, 2 SUPPLY 480 MOUNT CONDENSING UNIT FLA ALUM 1 E!E SS S-2 SUPPLY ROUND 301 - 25 12 x 10 DUCT X CLEAR PRICE SDGE 1, 2 ADJUSTABLE 350 MOUNT ANDD CUA CONDENSING UNIT FLA R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 0-200 25 12 x g SURFACE MIM X STND. 10KAIC PRICE 530 1, 2 35° BLADE MOUNT WHITE R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 201 - 25 12 x 10 SURFACE CPLUG& X STND. - PRICE 530 1, 2 - 10KAIC 35° BLADE 300 WATTS MOUNT WHITE R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 301 - 25 16 x 10 SURFACE 12 KW X STND. E/E PRICE 530 1, 2 MR N1 35° BLADE 450 - 10KAIC MOUNT HEATER WHITE R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 451 - 25 24212 SURFACE X STND. DUCTLESS SPLIT- PRICE 530 1, 2 1 E!E 35° BLADE 550 MR N1 MOUNT - - WHITE 1 INDOOR UNIT R-1 RETURN SINGLE DEFL. 1900 25 36x24 SURFACE X STND. PRICE 530 1, 2 DS -1B DUCTLESS SPLIT- 35° BLADE 208 1 E/E MOUNT 20 MR WHITE MIM - - R-2 RETURN ROUND 201 - 25 12 x 10 DUCT X CLEAR PRICE SDGER 1 PERFORATED 300 DS -2A DUCTLESS SPLIT- MOUNT 208 1 ANDD SH 20 MR R-2 RETURN ROUND 801 - 25 36 z 12 DUCT INDOOR UNIT X CLEAR PRICE SDGER 1 PERFORATED 900 MOUNT DS -2B ANDD 13.8 208 1 T-1 TRANSFER SINGLE DEFL. 201 - 25 10 x 10 SURFACE - X STND. PRICE 530 1 35° BLADE 300 MOUNT WHITE DS -3A T-1 TRANSFER SINGLE DEFL. 301 - 25 16 x 10 SURFACE MR X STND. - PRICE 530 1 1 35° BLADE 450 MOUNT WHITE E-1 EXHAUST SINGLE DEFL. 301 - 25 16 x 10 SURFACE 1 X STND- 20 PRICE 530 1, 2 MIM - 35° BLADE 450 1 MOUNT WHITE E-2 EXHAUST ROUND 201 - 25 12 x 10 DUCT ECH-1 X CLEAR 120 PRICE SDGER 1, 2 - - ADJUSTABLE 300 MIM - MOUNT 10KAIC ANDD HEATER E-2 EXHAUST ROUND 801 - 25 36 x 12 DUCT X CLEAR PRICE SDGER 1, 2 1.5 KW 120 ADJUSTABLE 900 - - MOUNT - MIM ANOD - 10KAIC GAS FIRED FURNACE SCHEDULE M LU MARK ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR SCHEDULE INPUT MARK SUPPLY FAN EXHAUST FAN SUMMER AIR CONDITIONS WINTER AIR CONDITIONS MANUFACTURER &MODEL NO. REMARKS CFM EXT SP CFM EXT 5P O.A. CFM S.A. 60 E.A. S.A. ERV -1 1,600 0.50" 1,600 0.50" 95° F t 81° F tA 70° F 49° F RENEWAIRE HE2XINH 1, 2, 3 GAS FIRED FURNACE SCHEDULE M LU MARK SERVES INPUT OUTPUT ANNUAL FUEL COOLING CAP. MBH MANUFACTURER &MODEL NO. EXT. MANUFACTURER RLA(EA) MARK TYPE NO. HP(EA) FLA(EA) CFM F-1 60 REMARKS TOTAL SENSIBLE 118 WB MBH MBH UTILIZATION EFF. LENNOX XC1fi-060.23D S.P. & MODEL NO. F-2 F-1 VERTICAL gg.00 81.00 94.6% 60.00 - 2,165 0.80" LENNOX 1, 2, 3, 4 CU -3 DOWN -FLOW 24 95° F 1 13.40 58 INSTALL 1 G61 MPV -060C -VERTICAL 090 1.10 F-1 VERTICAL gg,00 81.00 94.fi% 60.00 - 2,165 0.80" LENNOX 1, 2, 3, 4 BY DOWN -FLOW LENNOXXCI4-060-230 1 BY SIZE (AMPS) G61 MPV-06DC-090 CU -1 F-3 FLA 44.00 41.00 92.1% 24.00 - 760 0.60" LENNOX - - DOWN -FLOW G51 MP -246- 045 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT SCHEDULE LU MARK SERVES CAPACITY( EVAP MBH AMBIENT TEMP. COMPRESSORS CONDENSER FANS MANUFACTURER &MODEL NO. REMARKS NO. RLA(EA) LRA(EA) KW(EA) NO. HP(EA) FLA(EA) CU -1 F-1 60 95° F 1 25.90 118 WB 1 ERV -1 1.80 LENNOX XC1fi-060.23D 1, 2 GU -2 F-2 60 95° F 1 25.90 118 744 1 1.80 LENNOX XC16-060-230 1, 2 CU -3 F-0 24 95° F 1 13.40 58 INSTALL 1 1.10 LENNOX XC14-024-230 1, 2 CU -4 ERV -1 fi0 95°F 1 26.40 134 V 1 BY 1.80 LENNOXXCI4-060-230 1 MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE ABBREVIATION: E ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HP HORSEPOWER 4X NEMA 4X V VOLTAGE DX COOLING COIL SCHEDULE I INTEGRAL WITH EQUIPMENT MR PER MANUFACTURER'S RE REVERSING DRIVE C COMBINATION STARTER AND RECOMMENDATION RV REDUCED VOLTAGE 2S TWO SPEED SAFETY SWITCH NF NON-FUSED SF FUSE HOLDER WITH SWITCH 3S THREE SPEED MARK SERVES CFM CAPACITY MBH E.A.T. LAT. MAX. AIR P.D. (WG) MIN. ROWS FACE VEL. (FPM MAX) MAX. FINS/FT. REMARKS TOTAL SENS. DB WB D8 WB CC -1 ERV -1 1,600 57.5 - 81° F 69° F 59° F 58° F 0.2" 2 750 744 1 MECHANICAL /ELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE ABBREVIATION: E ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR HP HORSEPOWER 4X NEMA 4X V VOLTAGE M MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR KW KILOWATTS PH PHASE VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY I INTEGRAL WITH EQUIPMENT MR PER MANUFACTURER'S RE REVERSING DRIVE C COMBINATION STARTER AND RECOMMENDATION RV REDUCED VOLTAGE 2S TWO SPEED SAFETY SWITCH NF NON-FUSED SF FUSE HOLDER WITH SWITCH 3S THREE SPEED CB CIRCUIT BREAKER NR NON -REVERSING SS SAFETY SWITCH FV FULL VOLTAGE N1 NEMA 1 SH HP RATED SWITCH FLA FULL LOAD AMPS 3R NEMA 3R ST THERMAL ELEM. SWITCH REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CEILING RECESSED VERTICAL THROW 100 DISCONNECT MOTOR STARTER NAMEPLATE BERKOQFFI$DO 1 ECH-2 RATING VERTICAL THROW 100 1.5 0.00" - BERKO QFF1500 1 LECH-3 WALL RECESSED HORIZONTAL THROW MARK DESCRIPTION 0.00" FURNISH! BERKO FRC1512 RATING FUSE FURNISH! TYPFJ MINIMUM REMARKS INSTALL TYPE ENCL. INSTALL NEMA ENCL. SCCR LOAD V pH BY (AMPS) SIZE BY SIZE (AMPS) CU -1 CONDENSING UNIT FLA 208 1 E/E SS 60 MR 3R MIM - - 10KAIC CU -2 CONDENSING UNIT FLA 208 1 E/E SS 60 MR 3R M/M - - 10KAIC CU -3 CONDENSING UNIT FLA 208 1 E!E SS 30 MR 3R M/M - - 10KAIC CUA CONDENSING UNIT FLA 208 1 E/E SS 60 MR 3R MIM - - 10KAIC CP -1 CONDENSATE PUMP 120 1 M!E CPLUG& 20 - - MIM - - 10KAIC 2 WATTS DH -1 ELECTRIC DUCT 12 KW 208 3 E/E SS fi0 MR N1 M/M - - 10KAIC HEATER DS -1A DUCTLESS SPLIT- FLA 208 1 E!E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC 1 INDOOR UNIT .76 DS -1B DUCTLESS SPLIT- 13.8 208 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC 1 OUTDOOR UNIT FLA DS -2A DUCTLESS SPLIT- ,76 FLA 208 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC 1 INDOOR UNIT DS -2B DUCTLESS SPLIT - 13.8 208 1 E/E SH 2D MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC 1 OUTDOOR UNIT FLA DS -3A DUCTLESS SPLIT- FLA 206 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 M/M - - 10KAIC 1 INDOOR UNIT .76 DS -3B DUCTLESS SPLIT- 1.5 KW 208 1 ElE SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC 1 OUTDOOR UNIT ECH-1 ELECTRIC CABINET 1 5 KW 120 1 M/M - - - - MIM - - 10KAIC HEATER ECH-2 ELECTRIC CABINET 1.5 KW 120 1 M/M - - - - MIM - - 10KAIC HEATER ECH-3 ELECTRIC CABINET 1.5 KW 120 1 M/M - - 10K AIC HEATER ERV -1 ENERGY RECOVERY 3 HP 208 3 FJE SS 30 MR N1 VFD - - 10KAIC VENTILATOR F-1 FURNACE 12 FLA 120 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC F-2 FURNACE 12 FLA 120 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC F-0 FURNACE 12 FLA 120 1 EIE SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC PP -1 DOM. HOT WATER CIRC. 1/8 HP 120 1 E/E SH 20 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC 3 PUMP EWC-1 ELECTRIC WATER 3.7 FLA 120 1 MIE CORD & 20 - - NUM - - 10K AIC 2 COOLER PLUG G0.1 GARBAGE DISPOSER 1I3 HP 120 1 M/E CORD & 20 - - MIM - - 10KAIC 2 PLUG GWH-1 GAS FIRED WATER 6 FLA 120 1 E/E SH 26 MR N1 MIM - - 10KAIC HEATER GENERAL NOTES: A, VERIFYICOORDINATERLL RATINGS FOR EQUIPMENT. WHERE SUCH RATINGS ARE OTHER THAN THAT INDICATED ON MECHANICAUELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE, PROVIDE DISCONNECTS, MOTOR STARTERS, OVERCURRENT DEVICES AND RELATED REVISIONS ACCORDINGLY. WHERE EQUIPMENT IS PROVIDED WITH RATINGS OTHER THAN THAT INDICATED, CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION AND ASSOCIATED COSTS FOR REVISIONS. B. PROVIDE FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS WITH INTEGRAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION. C. EQUIPMENT LISTED IN SCHEDULE MAY APPEAR IN NUMEROUS LOCATIONS. EQUIPMENT MARKS ARE DESIGNATED BY UNIQUE IDENTIFIERS ON THE PLANS; I.E., HP -1.1, HP -1.2. IN THESE INSTANCES, THE ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS DO NOT CHANGE FROM ONE MARK TO THE NEXT, ONLY THE UNIQUE IDENTIFIER CHANGES. D. HORSEPOWER RATED SWITCHES {SH): FOR 120 V MOTORS LESS THAN 1/2 HP, PROVIDE FUSEHOLDER WITH SWITCH, FUSED PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION AND NEC REQUIREMENTS. FOR 120 V MOTORS RATED 1/2 HP OR 314 HP, PROVIDE HP RATED TOGGLE SWITCH (WHERE BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT DEVICE MEETS NEC REQUIREMENTS FOR SHORT-CIRCUIT PROTECTION) OR FUSED SAFETY SWITCH. E. INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS (COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER AND SAFETY SWITCH, VFDS, ETC) AS DEFINED BY THE NEC ARTICLE 409, SHALL 8E PROVIDED WITH A FACTORY INSTALLED NAMEPLATE WITH MARKINGS AS INDICATED BY NEC 409.116. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING (SCCR) LABEL SHALL BE AS INDICATED ABOVE. REMARKS: 1. PROVIDE INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN INDOOR AND OUTDOOR UNIT. 2. CORD AND PLUG FOR EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 3. CIRCULATING PUMP TO BE CONTROLLED BY TIME CLOCK. TIME CLOCK AND WIRING TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. CABINET AND UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE {ELECTRIC) MARK TYPE ARRANGEMENT CFM HEATING CAP. (KW) EXT. S.P. FAN RPM MANUFACTURER &MODEL NO. REMARKS ECH-t CEILING RECESSED VERTICAL THROW 100 1.5 0.00" - BERKOQFFI$DO 1 ECH-2 CEILING RECESSED VERTICAL THROW 100 1.5 0.00" - BERKO QFF1500 1 LECH-3 WALL RECESSED HORIZONTAL THROW 100 1.5 0.00" - BERKO FRC1512 1 I } m W Q v Z O U) w a: N LC) M N m to U O L() N CJ IT- o V f c c m Z m _U Y C 2 Ir O m 0 i w I- a - Z W 75 W 0 cr CL M %O N Q CL O Z m U_ U N Lu a J N U) M O N M o C, mC14 W LU /� U) � � N } r/ /� N ii Z W L0 Z N N VIA L -2 �\ ILE- # Z OD 9 7 DO R WALL LIGHT COVE FEB 2 j 2012 D 2' N:SfeM se % o 0 LU p L-27 o g 10 ° VIA LC -2 1-T-0 W O .N REFER TO AREA U Q o 106j' > KEY PLAN ON SHEET E1 FOR ROUTINGLU LU CONTINUATION TO EXISTING MARINA BLDG. U MM L.f_ ° Q G 9 ; ° 7 _ --- _ ro 9 � ° � �-23 10 10 6 W O z ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES: (0) L-41 ;! LC -2 2„ U:) O1 SECONDARY SERVICE ENTRANCE FROM UTILITY TRANSFORMER. /J ° AA 11 O IL REFER TO SHEET E4 AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THIS WORK. / ° / 12 M W OLIFT STATION CONTROL L11 EL TO BE MANUFACTURER/ETU PMENTER.PROVIDEDD PROVIDE BY LIFT STAT,IOWIRING, AND _ f Q \ / EXISTING UTILITY w CONNECTIONS REQUIRED FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION OF THE LIFT TRANSFORMER (n STATION CONTROL PANEL, POWER AND CONTROL WIRING, AND COMPLETE OPERATION OF THE LIFT STATION EQUIPMENT. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION 1 71, COORDINATE EXACT LIFT STATION EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS AND WIRING\`'` U U' REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LIFT STATION EQUIPMENT PROVIDER AND INSTALLER. A I AA �� OLIFT STATION CONDUIT AND WIRING FOR POWER AND CONTROL OF THE LIFT STATION EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE ALL CONDUIT, WIRING, AND CONNECTIONS Electrical Site Plan — Area No. 1 Cr V REQUIRED FROM THE INSTALLATION OF THE LIFT STATION EQUIPMENT TO THE 7-, AA 2., LIFT STATION CONTROL PANEL REQUIRED FOR THE COMPLETE OPERATION OF SCALE: 1' = 20'-0� THE LIFT STATION EQUIPMENT. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT 211 (TYPICAL) 6 �' . ; , J Z LIFT STATION EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS, CONDUIT QUANTITY AND SIZE % W REQUIREMENTS, WIRING AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LIFT AA H w /� /1 STATION EQUIPMENT PROVIDER AND INSTALLER. PROVIDE O CONDUIT FROM LIGHT POLE V i TO IN -GROUND JUNCTION BOX HANDHOLE OMOUNT TYPE 'HH' LIGHT FIXTURE AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE ON COLUMN FACE Og PROVIDE SPARE 1" CONDUITS FROM RESPECTIVE PANEL IN ROOM INDICATED. ROUTE UNDERGROUND TO EXTERIOR FOR FUTURE CAMERA BY OWNER . INDICATED_ GREEN SPACE AS SHOWN. CAP AND STAKE ENDS AND LOCATE ON AS -BUILT DRAWINGS FOR FUTURE LOCATING, AA OPRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING WITH 10 PROVIDE TWO (2) 2" SDR -11 ORANGE HDPE DUCTS AND ONE (1) 1-1/4" SDR -11 ORANGE HDPE DUCT, 42" BELOW ARCHITECT, CONCEAL AND RECESS CONDUIT AND BOXES TO BE GRADE, FROM HANDHOLE TO STUB UP IN COMM. CLOSET. REFER TO SHEET E2 FOR LOCATION. PROVIDE MULE TAPE FLUSH -CONCEALED WITH SHELTER COLUMN, AND DUCT PLUGS, WITH ROPE LOOP, INSTALLED IN/ON ALL DUCTS. PRIO FIELD ENOGINEERLACTUALLATIONCLOOCATON OFX XLIGHTS TOT ENLOCATEDHBETWEEN OLES NTH 11 MARINAPROVIDEBUILDIONE NIG CONCD RETE APRONN.2" SR -11 ORAGE PROVIDE MULE2T PELOAND DUCT PLO HDPE DUCT, 4" BEW GRADE, SHWIT HROPEOLOOP,MIINS AL EDTERNATE NEARIN/ONING PROPOSED TREES. PROVIDE CONCRETE POLE BASE. REFER TO DETAIL ON ALL DUCTS. REFER TO AREA KEY PLAN ON SHEET E1 FOR CONTINUATION. FARRIS ENGINEERING SHEET ES2. OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS 7O REFER TO DETAIL ON SHEET ES2 FOR CONTROL REQUIRED. 12 PROVIDE # 30"W X 48"L X 36"D GRAY, OPEN BOTTOM, ANSI TIER 22 RATED, POLYMER CONCRETE HANDHOLE BOX � farris-usaxom MODEL PCA304836-00012 WITH BOLT—SS—PENTA-3 8"-3.5, ONE PIECE COVER FOR TERMINATION OF CONDUITS. REFER TO HANDHOLE "PULLBOX" DETAIL ON SHEET ES2. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH OWNER. REFER TO This d GFtr 118018 O MOUNT CONTINUOUS ROW OF 3 TYPE 'DD' LIGHT FIXTURES IN TOP OF DONOR This produced one the information contained may not () CIVIL SITE DRAWINGS FOR ALL EXISTING UTILITIES -ROUTING. be reproduced or excerpted from without the express WALL LIGHT COVE TO SHINE DOWN THE FACE OF THE WALL. PRIOR TOwritten permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. unauthorized INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT FIXTURE ROUGH—IN LOCATION AND FIXTURE copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by MOUNTING WITH ARCHITECT AND DONOR WALL LIGHT COVE the copyright low. 111.0253 STRUCTURAL/ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS. City File No. PA 261 Sheet ES1 LUG GROUND WIRE TO POLE LUG #8 BARE COPPER GRD TO POLE — 1" CHAMFER- 2'- 3/4" HAMFER- 2"- 3/4" DIA - X 8'-0" LONG GRD z N ANCHOR BOLTS - CONCRETE 3" CLEAR 0 Uv 2 REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF THIS AREA AT SOUTH END OF THE RECREATION AREA. 3 N Electrical Site Plan — Area No. 4 SCALE: 1' = 20'-0' — PROVIDE BASE COVER —NONMETALLIC GROUT AS REQUIRED 3' WHERE APPLICABLE X��AvA��� 2-#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR 3" O.C. `6-#6 VERTICAL REINFORCING _#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR TIES AT 12" O.C. (TYP.) CONDUIT TO ADJACENT FIXTURES AS REQUIRED TYPE 'AA' POLE BASE DETAIL NO SCALE LUG GROUND WIRE TO POLE LUG #8 BARE COPPER GRD TO POLE — 1' CHAMFER- 6"� 3/4" DIA x 8'-0" LONG GRD 7 z CN N ANCHOR BOLTS - CONCRETE 3" CLEAR LIGHTING -H IIIIu 30 AMP, 8 POLE, 120 VOLT L-34—1--�iF--�--�� PUMP PP -1 L-34 II (IN NEMA a II IIIf� II II 11M/SII < II I II it 11 J L 0 II -a- i` u 11°u IOFF C 11-4 77,77 24" (ROUND) REFER TO CIVIL DRAWINGS FOR LOCATION OF THIS AREA AT SOUTH END OF THE RECREATION AREA. 3 N Electrical Site Plan — Area No. 4 SCALE: 1' = 20'-0' — PROVIDE BASE COVER —NONMETALLIC GROUT AS REQUIRED 3' WHERE APPLICABLE X��AvA��� 2-#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR 3" O.C. `6-#6 VERTICAL REINFORCING _#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR TIES AT 12" O.C. (TYP.) CONDUIT TO ADJACENT FIXTURES AS REQUIRED TYPE 'AA' POLE BASE DETAIL NO SCALE LUG GROUND WIRE TO POLE LUG #8 BARE COPPER GRD TO POLE — 1' CHAMFER- 6"� 3/4" DIA x 8'-0" LONG GRD 7 z CN N ANCHOR BOLTS - CONCRETE 3" CLEAR (ROUND) :1019III a*yb�290IiP/q NONMETALLIC GROUT AS REQUIRED 2-#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR TIES 3" O.C. 3' WHERE APPLICABLE a a 6-#6 VERTICAL REINFORCING —#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR TIES AT 12" O.C. (TYP.) iv 'CONDUIT TO ADJACENT FIXTURES AS REQUIRED TYPE 'BBPOLE BASE DETAIL NO SCALE ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES: (0) O1 EXISTING POWER COMPANY POLE. REFER TO CIVIL SHEETS FOR THIS AREA/LOCATION AT SOUTH END OF THE RECREATION AREA, O2 POLES AND LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE PROVIDED BY POWER COMPANY. COORDINATE WITH POWER COMPANY FOR EXACT LOCATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. O3 PROVIDE 2" CONDUIT UNDERGROUND BETWEEN POLES WITH PULL WIRE AND STUBBED UP AT BASE OF EACH POLE PER POWER COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS AND LOCATIONS WITH POWER COMPANY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED BY CONDUIT SWEEP AND D PULL SLOTS SLOPE GRADE AWAY F COVER 1" IN 3'. ® O STAINLESS STEEL HEX HEAD BOLT W/WASHER*40 - SKID RESISTANT SURFACE MOUSEHOLES - (2) W W W KNOCKOUTS - (8) HANDHOLE "PULLBOX" DIAGRAM NO SCALE H 120 -VOLT PHOTOCELL (PC -1) r � TIME CLOCK (TC -1) VEL DRAINAGE BED LL BE MINIMUM 6" DEPTH DUITS LARGER THAN SEHOLES CAN OMMODATE, SHALL ENTER TOM OF HANDHOLE WITH LONG RADIUS SWEEPS, LIGHTING CONTACTOR (LC -1) r AUTO T - 30 AMP, 6 POLE, 120 VOLT (IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE) 10FF C +� HAND L--� SPARE 4+ 1I-�� TO EXTERIOR BUILDING, L-15 <--- LIGHTS, FLAGPOLE LIGHT, SIGN LIGHT L-17 l�� I-�� L-43 E -1---i F---�� SPARE SPARE ^11^ L — — — J T t., I I LIGHTING -H - 30 AMP, 8 POLE, 120 VOLT L-34—1--�iF--�--�� PUMP PP -1 L-34 II (IN NEMA ° II L II I II it 11 II i` u 11°u IOFF C 11-4 HAND L___J ii II ii ISI ISI IIS I I II h/ aa n 24" (ROUND) :1019III a*yb�290IiP/q NONMETALLIC GROUT AS REQUIRED 2-#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR TIES 3" O.C. 3' WHERE APPLICABLE a a 6-#6 VERTICAL REINFORCING —#3 CLOSED CIRCULAR TIES AT 12" O.C. (TYP.) iv 'CONDUIT TO ADJACENT FIXTURES AS REQUIRED TYPE 'BBPOLE BASE DETAIL NO SCALE ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES: (0) O1 EXISTING POWER COMPANY POLE. REFER TO CIVIL SHEETS FOR THIS AREA/LOCATION AT SOUTH END OF THE RECREATION AREA, O2 POLES AND LIGHT FIXTURES TO BE PROVIDED BY POWER COMPANY. COORDINATE WITH POWER COMPANY FOR EXACT LOCATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. O3 PROVIDE 2" CONDUIT UNDERGROUND BETWEEN POLES WITH PULL WIRE AND STUBBED UP AT BASE OF EACH POLE PER POWER COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS AND LOCATIONS WITH POWER COMPANY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. EXTENSIONS AS REQUIRED BY CONDUIT SWEEP AND D PULL SLOTS SLOPE GRADE AWAY F COVER 1" IN 3'. ® O STAINLESS STEEL HEX HEAD BOLT W/WASHER*40 - SKID RESISTANT SURFACE MOUSEHOLES - (2) W W W KNOCKOUTS - (8) HANDHOLE "PULLBOX" DIAGRAM NO SCALE H 120 -VOLT PHOTOCELL (PC -1) r � TIME CLOCK (TC -1) VEL DRAINAGE BED LL BE MINIMUM 6" DEPTH DUITS LARGER THAN SEHOLES CAN OMMODATE, SHALL ENTER TOM OF HANDHOLE WITH LONG RADIUS SWEEPS, LIGHTING CONTACTOR (LC -1) r AUTO T - 30 AMP, 6 POLE, 120 VOLT (IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE) 10FF C +� HAND L--� SPARE 4+ 1I-�� TO EXTERIOR BUILDING, L-15 <--- LIGHTS, FLAGPOLE LIGHT, SIGN LIGHT L-17 l�� I-�� L-43 E -1---i F---�� SPARE SPARE ^11^ L — — — J T t., I I LIGHTING CONTACTOR (LC -2) - 30 AMP, 8 POLE, 120 VOLT L-34—1--�iF--�--�� PUMP PP -1 L-34 (IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE) L 11 AUTO IOFF C HAND L___J PROVIDE EXTRA N.O. CONTACTI I FOR CONTROLLING PUMP PP -1 L-19 <--74 --I L-23 Edi TO PARKING AND L-25 DRIVE LIGHTS L-27 +--7-1 SPARE SPARE I --i ~' I FEB 21 2012 SPARE I -*1 1 4:57 ah L — — — J EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM NO SCALE SEE SHEET E4 FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES AND ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 r MUd_ 4 N C%j o ° a W Y m N Ln z 0 m W N 20D ro U O U -)C N U = O O � V d dl U z IL d• Of m N � s U 0 0� 0� 5 rn �6 0"6 U Q U) O a o LL� N Z on cNf N W Vn a W s o U QctQ NrnN z N K m o g� Q� ¢" w" U M >M J N m O W L"'CD N U) zo8 <U) r L6 M _ �LIJLOz C-4 z a N 1 W Z Or Q Rt vLU W 0 Ile— I= Z W W C� p a ' C/:) O Z o C V J Q JLU W C/� J U W U W F-- LU C/3 111.0253 Sheet ES2 a a ❑■ N .� Li htin Floor Plan — The Lode SCALE: 1/8" — 1'-0" (P 3/4" STEEL CHANNEL 18" EXHAUST AIR DUCT Lighting Above Duct Detail SCALE: NONE (TYPI I I MECHANIC/.L� — y 05f 8 1 R Fain I ' \ �md1 M -SPARE VIA - BOAitiORAG-1 STORAGE `EXISTING PANEL 'M' O�i- 8 (TYPICAL)I I � t— '.EXISTING 'LC -1' I II I I1 I I i - I II I _ r- � CONC�ESG(N1 VIY, II� iqhtinq Floor Plan — Existin N Marina Building A7�, SCALE: 1 /8" . 1'—O" W N Area Plan SCALE: 1" = 50'-O" ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES: (0) OROUTE ALL CONDUIT CONCEALED. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING, FIXTURE MOUNTING MATERIAL, LOCATION, AND POSITION WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO MOUNT FIXTURE SUCH IT IS CENTERED BETWEEN DOUBLE BEAMS, CENTERED BETWEEN EXTERIOR WALL AND ROOF EDGE, AND BOTTOM OF FIXTURE IS FLUSH WITH BOTTOM OF BEAM AND AIMED STRAIGHT DOWN. OROUTE ALL CONDUIT CONCEALED. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING, FIXTURE MOUNTING MATERIAL, LOCATION, AND POSITION WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO MOUNT FIXTURE SUCH IT IS CENTERED BETWEEN DOUBLE BEAMS, CLOSE TO THE EDGE OF COLUMN, AND AIMED TO GRAZE THE LIGHT BEAM DOWN THE FULL HEIGHT OF THE STONE WALL. O TYPICAL FOR ALL TYPE 'H' LIGHT FIXTURES - SUSPEND, CHAIN HANG, AT 10 FEET AFF. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS WITH MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS. O4 ROUTE ALL CONDUIT CONCEALED, PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING, FIXTURE MOUNTING MATERIAL, LOCATION, AND POSITION WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO MOUNT FIXTURE SUCH IT IS CENTERED BETWEEN DOUBLE BEAMS, STRAIGHT AND PARALLEL TO THE BEAMS, FOLLOWING THE ANGLE OF THE SLOPE OF THE CEILING AND BEAMS, AND BOTTOM OF FIXTURE LAMPS ARE FLUSH WITH BOTTOM OF DOUBLE BEAMS. OROUTE ALL CONDUIT CONCEALED. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING, FIXTURE MOUNTING MATERIAL, LOCATION, AND POSITION WITH ARCHITECT. PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO MOUNT FIXTURE SUCH IT IS CENTERED BETWEEN BEAM AND GLASS WINDOW, STRAIGHT AND PARALLEL TO THE BEAMS, FOLLOWING THE ANGLE OF THE SLOPE OF THE CEILING AND BEAMS, AND BOTTOM OF FIXTURE LAMPS ARE FLUSH WITH BOTTOM OF DOUBLE BEAMS. O6 PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS REQUIRED TO MOUNT FIXTURE SUCH IT IS CENTERED ABOVE DUCT, ULTIMATELY SUPPORTED VIA THE SAME AIRCRAFT TYPE CABLE SUPPORT THAT IS SUPPORTING THE DUCT. MOUNT THE LIGHTS STRAIGHT AND PARALLEL TO DUCT, FACING UP SUPPORTED BY AND MOUNTED TO STEEL CHANNEL RUNNING THE LENGTH OF THE BOTTOM OF THE LIGHT FIXTURES. REFER TO LIGHTING ABOVE DUCT MOUNTING DETAIL ON THIS SHEET. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE ALL MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION WORK REQUIRED FOR THE COMPLETE INSTALLATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR, y, O ROUTE ALL CONDUIT CONCEALED. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING, FIXTURE MOUNTING - MATERIAL, LOCATION, AND POSITION WITH ARCHITECT. OUTILIZE EXISTING INTERIOR JUNCTION BOXES AND CONDUIT WHERE POSSIBLE TO INSTALL WIRING AND CIRCUITING TO NEW LIGHT FIXTURES. ALL NEW CONDUIT REQUIRED SHALL BE INSTALLED PER ELECTRICAL KEYNOTE #7 ABOVE. OMOUNT ON FACE OF HORIZONTAL BEAM ON VANITY SIDE, PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING, FIXTURE MOUNTING MATERIAL, LOCATION, AND POSITION WITH ARCHITECT. 10 MOUNT TRACK ON EAST OUTSIDE FACE OF DOUBLE BEAM. ROUTE ALL CONDUIT CONCEALED. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT CONDUIT ROUTING, FIXTURE MOUNTING MATERIAL, LOCATION, AND POSITION WITH ARCHITECT. CENTER TRACK BETWEEN BOTTOM OF DECK AND BOTTOM OF BEAM RUNNING PARALLEL TO THE BEAM. 11 PROVIDE TWO (2) 2" SDR -11 ORANGE HDPE DUCTS AND ONE (1) 1-1/4" SDR -11 ORANGE HDPE DUCT, 42" BELOW GRADE, FROM HANDHOLE TO STUB UP IN COMM. ROOM. PROVIDE 1250 POUND STRENGTH POLYESTER MULE TAPE WITH FOOTAGE MARKINGS AND DUCT PLUGS, WITH ROPE LOOP, INSTALLED IN/ON ALL DUCTS. PROVIDE TRACER WIRE ON ALL DUCTS PER IOWA CITY IT REPRESENTATIVE'S REQUIREMENTS. REFER TO SHEET ES1 FOR DUCT CONTINUATION INFORMATION TO BUILDINGS ON SITE. 12 BORE DUCTS UNDER ALL EXISTING WALKWAYS AND UNDER MCCOLLISTER BLVD. PROVIDE TRACER WIRE ON ALL DUCTS PER IOWA CITY IT REPRESENTATIVE'S REQUIREMENTS. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT TERMINATION POINT/LOCATION OF DUCTS UNDER AND ON OTHER SIDE OF MCCOLLISTER BLVD. WITH IOWA CITY IT REPRESENTATIVE, 13 PROVIDE ONE (1) 2" SDR -11 ORANGE HDPE DUCT, 42" BELOW GRADE, FROM HANDHOLE TO TERMINATE NEAR EXISTING MARINA BUILDING CONCRETE APRON. COORDINATE EXACT TERMINATION POINT/LOCATION OF DUCTS NEAR MARINA BUILDING WITH IOWA CITY IT REPRESENTATIVE. PROVIDE MULE TAPE AND DUCT PLUGS, WITH ROPE LOOP, INSTALLED IN/ON ALL DUCTS. PROVIDE TRACER WIRE ON ALL DUCTS PER IOWA CITY IT REPRESENTATIVE'S REQUIREMENTS. 14 SIGN LIGHTING. MOUNT CONTINUOUS ROW OF (3) TYPE 'JJ' LIGHT FIXTURES IN TOP OF SIGN WALL LIGHT COVE TO SHINE DOWN THE FACE OF THE SIGN LETTERING. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT FIXTURE ROUGH -IN LOCATION AND FIXTURE MOUNTING WITH ARCHITECT AND DONOR WALL LIGHT COVE STRUCTURAL/ARCHITECTURAL DETAILS. FEB21 2012 4'S9 oM SEE SHEET E4 FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES AND ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-uso.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 r m � a � o w Y cn Ir � N Ln z y > N w m r— N m t7 Q U p Lr)CN d 0 M Z v, d m Z LL m _V U o �I : " N Uj En U %8 �m Q U� o < N o LL N M Z M N CiW a LU CL M 7 �6 N � fh o W /�yyam� U LL I..L M Ci M J 0 m W �<N LLI � N O , rn >_ 0) Y C-4 Z r- Q N 1 W Q z o u, W W C) U O V O z0 15 to W O O LL Llj z IC) cc 2 LU C3 z ll.— J 111.0253 Sheet E1 0 71 N Enlarged Kitchen Power Floor Plan SCALE: Ile - 1'-0' ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES: (O ) 0 PROVIDE 120V CONNECTION TO RANGE HOOD/LIGHTS/FAN. COORDINATE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER FOR EXACT REQUIREMENTS/ROUGH-IN LOCATION. OPROVIDE SWITCH ABOVE COUNTER AND SWITCHED RECEPTACLE BELOW COUNTER FOR GARBAGE DISPOSAL GD -1. O3 COORDINATE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER FOR LOCATION OF ELEC. WATER COOLER RECEPTACLE. O4 PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO GAS FIREPLACE. COORDINATE EXACT CONNECTION LOCATIONS AND WIRING REQUIREMENTS WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER/INSTALLER. O5 PROVIDE RECEPTACLE FOR CONDENSATE PUMP 'CP -1'. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. O6 PROVIDE RECEPTACLE WITHIN UPPER CABINET FOR MICROWAVE. COORDINATE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER FOR EXACT LOCATION. O7 PROVIDE CONNECTIONS FOR ELECTRIC HAND DRYER PROVIDED BY OTHERS. COORDINATE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER FOR EXACT LOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS. OPROVIDE PROJECTOR ROUGH -IN. REFER TO DETAIL ON THIS SHEET. PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS WITH ARCHITECT AND OWNER. O9 PROVIDE CONNECTIONS FOR VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL PROVIDED BY OTHERS. COORDINATE WITH EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER FOR EXACT LOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS. C0] COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE ENTRANCE DUCT STUB UP LOCATIONS. PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOOR SHALL BE EITHER PVC OR GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT. TRANSITION FROM HDPE AND PVC OR GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT USING APPROVED ETCO DEL-### TYPE E -LOC COUPLING FOR SDR -11 HDPE -TO -HDPE AND HDPE -TO -GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT CONNECTIONS. EXTEND CONDUIT ALIGNED AND PLUMB ABOVE FINISH FLOOR S" ANTI PRmmnp7 Phin RIICHINr] nm FARH CnNf1111T CIIPPnRT CONDUITS STRAPS. 0 PROJECTOR SUPPORT (BY OWNER) PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. COORDINATE WITH OWNER. PROJECTION SCREEN ELEVATION PLAN PROJECTOR ROUGH—IN DETAIL NO SCALE N Power Floor Plan SCALE: 1/8' = 1'-0' PROJECTOR DETAIL KEYNOTES (0) OA AT EACH PROJECTOR INPUT LOCATION, PROVIDE 2 -GANG, 3 1/2" DEEP MASONRY BOX FLUSH MOUNTED IN WALL BLANK STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE. LOCATE BOTTOM OF BOX AT 48" A.F.F. PROVIDE 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE FROM BOX, ROUTED UNDERGROUND OR CONCEALED, TO COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET. PROVIDE CONNECTOR WITH NON-METALLIC BUSHING AT EACH END OF CONDUIT. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DEVICE WITH OWNER . BO AT EACH PROJECTOR CONTROL STATION LOCATION, PROVIDE DEEP 4 -SQUARE BOX WITH BLANK STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE. LOCATE TOP OF BOX AT 48" A.F.F. PROVIDE 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE FROM BOX, ROUTED UNDERGROUND OR CONCEALED, TO COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET LOCATED OFF OF CORRIDOR 101, PROVIDE CONNECTOR WITH NON-METALLIC BUSHING AT EACH END OF CONDUIT, PRIOR TO IN STALLATIONCOORDI NATE EXACT LOCATION OF DEVICE WITH OWNER. CO PROVIDE WHITE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND WHITE COVER PLATE, FLUSH MOUNT RECEPTACLE IN CEILING AT REAR OF FUTURE CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR (COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION). FEB 21 2012 -Y: Sf Pq SEE SHEET E4 FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES AND ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use ore prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. PA 261 Y m P- A a `(BY OWNER) FINISHED FLOOR B 0 ( �WHITEBOARD ELEVATION PLAN PROJECTOR ROUGH—IN DETAIL NO SCALE N Power Floor Plan SCALE: 1/8' = 1'-0' PROJECTOR DETAIL KEYNOTES (0) OA AT EACH PROJECTOR INPUT LOCATION, PROVIDE 2 -GANG, 3 1/2" DEEP MASONRY BOX FLUSH MOUNTED IN WALL BLANK STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE. LOCATE BOTTOM OF BOX AT 48" A.F.F. PROVIDE 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE FROM BOX, ROUTED UNDERGROUND OR CONCEALED, TO COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET. PROVIDE CONNECTOR WITH NON-METALLIC BUSHING AT EACH END OF CONDUIT. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF DEVICE WITH OWNER . BO AT EACH PROJECTOR CONTROL STATION LOCATION, PROVIDE DEEP 4 -SQUARE BOX WITH BLANK STAINLESS STEEL COVER PLATE. LOCATE TOP OF BOX AT 48" A.F.F. PROVIDE 1" CONDUIT WITH PULL WIRE FROM BOX, ROUTED UNDERGROUND OR CONCEALED, TO COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET LOCATED OFF OF CORRIDOR 101, PROVIDE CONNECTOR WITH NON-METALLIC BUSHING AT EACH END OF CONDUIT, PRIOR TO IN STALLATIONCOORDI NATE EXACT LOCATION OF DEVICE WITH OWNER. CO PROVIDE WHITE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND WHITE COVER PLATE, FLUSH MOUNT RECEPTACLE IN CEILING AT REAR OF FUTURE CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR (COORDINATE LOCATION WITH OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION). FEB 21 2012 -Y: Sf Pq SEE SHEET E4 FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES AND ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use ore prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. PA 261 Y m O N W > 6 m,6 U o Q cdIleM U_ N z J' m� W o� a W aM �rti �N ¢" wm U eee� Ci M > m J N m � WLLI N 0 3 N U) zap Q Groh N Y u) N Q 04 N W z o C/, Q W W oC Q U - W U °C O o c� 0 z cn .J Q W C.6 o °C _1 w W 0 °C z W 0 IL H C/3 111.0253 Sheet E2 a a Ld 0 m �D m `i W � N Ln z 0 T M N r U N U O Ln C N U _ 0 O V V) r- M z° 6 �L T—ML a V L` rm O N W > 6 m,6 U o Q cdIleM U_ N z J' m� W o� a W aM �rti �N ¢" wm U eee� Ci M > m J N m � WLLI N 0 3 N U) zap Q Groh N Y u) N Q 04 N W z o C/, Q W W oC Q U - W U °C O o c� 0 z cn .J Q W C.6 o °C _1 w W 0 °C z W 0 IL H C/3 111.0253 Sheet E2 A A u 0 Special Systems Floor Plan SCALE: 1 /8' v 1'-0' 7 a 7 Y m ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES: (0) O M CIA / j m C) a w W o 0) <0) r 16 O1PROVIDE CONNECTION FROM ALL SPRINKLER SYSTEM FLOW, TAMPER AND Z N Q N PIV DEVICES TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND QUANTITY OF DEVICES WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS/EQUIPMENT N SUPPLIERS. OFUTURE CAMERA ROUH-IN. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT N DEVICE LOCATIONS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, AND CONDUIT ROUTING WITH OWNER'S TECHNOLOGY REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT. MOUNT INTERIOR In BOXES AT APPROXIMATELY 10 -FEET AFF OR AT SAME HEIGHT AS BOTTOM o OF DUCTWORK CROSSING THE ROOM. FLUSH MOUNT BOXES AND CONCEAL to m 'cV r - CONDUIT. PROVIDE 2-1/8" DEEP BOX WITH SINGLE GANG DEVICE RING. w g N ROUTE 1" CONDUIT HOME RUN UNDERGROUND, CONCEALED IN AND UP c"s WALL TO DEVICE BOX AND STUBBED UP THROUGH FLOOR ALONG THE o inN SOUTH WALL OF THE COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET LOCATED OFF OF CJ CORRIDOR 101 FROM EACH DEVICE BOX LOCATION. o Z OFUTURE ACCESS CONTROL ROUH-IN. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE Loy EXACT DEVICE LOCATIONS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, AND CONDUIT ROUTING c o WITH OWNER'S TECHNOLOGY REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT. FLUSH z LL MOUNT BOXES AND CONCEAL CONDUIT. ROUTE 3/4" CONDUIT HOME RUN t c UNDERGROUND CONCEALED IN AND UP WALL TO DEVICE BOX AND .5 � o C.7 STUBBED UP THROUGH FLOOR ALONG THE SOUTH WALL OF THE w 0- COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET LOCATED OFF OF CORRIDOR 101. Q O4 FUTURE DATA ROUH-IN. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT DEVICE LOCATIONS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, AND CONDUIT ROUTING WITH N OWNER'S TECHNOLOGY REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT. FLUSH MOUNT — BOXES AND CONCEAL CONDUIT. PROVIDE 2-1/8" DEEP BOX WITH SINGLELu > GANG DEVICE RING. ROUTE 1" CONDUIT HOME RUN UNDERGROUND, co CONCEALED IN AND UP WALL TO DEVICE BOX AND STUBBED UP THROUGH U C5 0'6 W o " FLOOR ALONG THE SOUTH WALL OF THE COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET < LOCATED OFF OF CORRIDOR 101 FROM EACH DEVICE BOX LOCATION. OFUTURE CAMERA ROUH-IN. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT 0 DEVICE LOCATIONS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, AND CONDUIT ROUTING WITH — LL OWNER'S TECHNOLOGY REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT. MOUNT BOX IN UNDERSIDE OF CANOPY AT LOCATION COORDINATED. FLUSH MOUNT BOXES7 m C?AND CONCEAL CONDUIT. PROVIDE 2-1/8" DEEP BOX WITH SINGLE GANG L an DEVICE RING. ROUTE 1" CONDUIT HOME RUN UNDERGROUND, CONCEALED It W AND UP WALL TO DEVICE BOX AND STUBBED UP THROUGH FLOOR ALONG THE SOUTH WALL OF THE COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET LOCATED OFF OF LU a CORRIDOR 101 FROM EACH DEVICE BOX LOCATION. 5 LIJ oM OFUTURE SPEAKER ROUH-IN. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION COORDINATE EXACT a, DEVICE LOCATIONS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, AND CONDUIT ROUTING WITH N m OWNER'S TECHNOLOGY REPRESENTATIVE AND ARCHITECT. PROVIDE BOXES Q , WI AND CONCEAL CONDUIT. PROVIDE BOX NTH SINGLE GANG DEVICE RING. O w ROUTE 1' CONDUIT HOME RUN CONCEALED TO THE SOUTH WALL OF THE M COMMUNICATIONS CLOSET LOCATED OFF OF CORRIDOR 101. L.L O7 COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE ENTRANCE DUCT STUB UP LOCATIONS. REFER TO SITE ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SHEET E2. El 0 1 W Z o C„ Q W W �- Z Q LU C U Ecco 0 0 � O LL "' J U) Q LU W Cz F— fn W J Q �LL wa- Iiii— U) SEE SHEET E4 FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES AND ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS (orris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. FA 261 111,0253 Sheet E3 O M CIA / j m C) � W 0) <0) r 16 Y LO Z N Q N W Z o C„ Q W W �- Z Q LU C U Ecco 0 0 � O LL "' J U) Q LU W Cz F— fn W J Q �LL wa- Iiii— U) SEE SHEET E4 FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES AND ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS LEGEND OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS (orris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright low. City File No. FA 261 111,0253 Sheet E3 6 ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES (0) Ot PROVIDE METER BASE PER POWER COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. O2 REFER TO MDP PANEL SCHEDULE FOR CONDUIT AND WIRE SIZES, O3 EXISTING POWER UTILITY PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER - PROVIDE CONDUIT AND WIRE TO SECONDARY COMPARTMENT OF TRANSFORMER. REFER TO SITE PLAN ES1 FOR LOCATION. 40 PROVIDE AN EXTERNALLY MOUNTED, NON -MODULAR, SERVICE ENTRANCE TYPE TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (SPD) ADJACENT TO THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL. THE SPD SHALL BE UL LISTED TO UL 1449 THIRD EDITION (OR THE LATEST EDITION) AND SHALL PROVIDE SEVEN MODE (L -N, L -G, N -G) PROTECTION. THE SPD SHALL INCLUDE SURGE RATED INPUT FUSES OR SHALL EMPLOY THERMALLY PROTECTED MOVS, SPDS RELYING ON EXTERNAL OR SUPPLEMENTARY INSTALLED SAFETY DISCONNECTORS DO NOT MEET THE INTENT OF THIS SPECIFICATION. THE SPD SHALL CONTAIN POWER AND STATUS INDICATOR LIGHTS AND EMI/RFI FILTERING. THE SPD SHALL BE RATED FOR A SINGLE SURGE CURRENT OF AT LEAST 160,000 AMPERES PER PHASE, SHALL HAVE A NOMINAL DISCHARGE CURRENT RATING (IN) OF 20KA, AND SHALL HAVE A SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING OF 200,000 AMPERES. THE SPD ENCLOSURE SHALL BE SURFACE MOUNTED NEMA 12 OR BETTER. (SQUARE D EBA SERIES, MERSEN STXT SERIES, OR EQUAL FROM SIEMENS, CUTLER -HAMMER OR GENERAL ELECTRIC), O5 PROVIDE TORK #DT200-3 2 CHANNEL ELECTRONIC ASTRONOMICAL TIME CLOCK. CONNECT ONE CHANNEL TO PHOTOCELL ON AND TIME CLOCK OFF OPERATION OF LIGHTING CONTACTOR 'LC -2'. THE OTHER CHANNEL SHALL CONTROL CIRCULTAION PUMP PP/1. 60 PROVIDE STONCO (OR PRE -APPROVED EQUAL) P105 PHOTOCELL MOUNTED ABOVE ROOF FACING NORTH, CONNECT TO AUTO POSITION OF LIGHTING CONTACTORS FOR AUTOMATIC PHOTOCELL ON/OFF OPERATION. REFER TO SHEET E1 FOR LOCATION. O7 LIGHTING CONTACTOR 'LC -1'. PROVIDE 30 AMP, 6 -POLE, ELECTRICALLY HELD LIGHTING CONTACTOR WITH H.O.A. SWITCH AND GREEN PUSH -TO -TEST LED PILOT LIGHT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE. LABEL CONTACTOR TO INDICATE LOAD SERVED. CONNECT CONTACTOR TO PHOTOCELL FOR 'PHOTOCELL-ON/OFF' OPERATION. O LIGHTING CONTACTOR 'LC -2'. PROVIDE 30 AMP, 6 -POLE, ELECTRICALLY HELD LIGHTING CONTACTOR WITH H.O.A. SWITCH AND GREEN PUSH -TO -TEST LED PILOT LIGHT IN NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE, LABEL CONTACTOR TO INDICATE LOAD SERVED, CONNECT CONTACTOR TO PHOTOCELL AND TIME CLOCK FOR 'PHOTOCELL ON - TIME CLOCK OFF' OPERATION. O9 PROVIDE SPARE 1" CONDUITS FROM RESPECTIVE PANEL INDICATED. ROUTE UNDERGROUND TO EXTERIOR GREEN SPACE AS SHOWN ON SHEET ES1. CAP AND STAKE ENDS AND LOCATE ON AS -BUILT DRAWINGS FOR FUTURE LOCATING. ONE -LINE POWER RISER DIAGRAM NO SCALE MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL'MDP' 1201208 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE 400 AMP MAIN BREAKER FULL NEUTRAL 400 AMP BUS WALL MOUNTED 10K AIC RATING NO, TRIP LOAD KVA WIRE SIZEICONDUIT SIZE M 40013 MAIN 94.5 4-#500KCMIL IN 3 112" C. 1 200/3 PANEL'L' 32.0 4-#3/0,1-#4 GRD., IN2'C. 2 15013 PANEL'K' 25.0 4-#1/0, 1 -#4 GRD., IN 2" C. 3 100/3 SPARE 4 150/3 SPARE 5 60/2 CU -1 5.8 2 -#6, 1 -#10 GRD., IN 1" C. 6 60/2 CU -2 5.8 2 - #6, 1 - #10 GRD., IN V C. 7 3012 CU -3 3.0 2 - #10, 1 - #10 GRD., IN 314" C. 8 60/2 CU -4 5.9 2 -#6, 1 -#10 GRD., IN 1"C. 9 50/3 DH -1 12 3 - #6, 1 - #10 GRD., IN 1" C. 10 30/3 LIFT STATION 5.0 3 - #6, 1 - #8 GRD., IN 1"C. 11 100/3 SPACE 12 10013 SPACE r m GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES a w 0 A. ALL WIRING SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CONTINUOUS RACEWAY. coY B. ALL CONDUITS IN FINISHED AREAS SHALL BE INSTALLED CONCEALED. m co r C. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING, PAINTING, C/) REPAIRING OR REPLACEMENT OF ALL WALLS, CEILINGS, OR OTHER BUILDING N ELEMENTS WHICH ARE DISTURBED AS PART OF THE INSTALLATION OF \ ELECTRICAL WORK. Ln z D, PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION TO SMOKE AND FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS g INCLUDING POWER AND FIRE ALARM. VERIFY EXACT QUANTITY AND 5 T N LOCATION OF DAMPERS WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. LV m E. REFER TO MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL COORDINATION SCHEDULE SHEET M3 v M u7 d FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DISCONNECTS, MOTOR STARTERS, ETC. N Z F. PROVIDE CONNECTION FROM ALL SPRINKLER SYSTEM FLOW, TAMPER AND V) to PIV DEVICES TO THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION d AND QUANTITY OF DEVICES WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS/EQUIPMENT •• R z SUPPLIERS. Y C G. LABELING FOR PANELBOARD DIRECTORIES, FIRE ALARM PANEL w 41 a U PROGRAMMING, ETC. SHALL USE ROOM NUMBERS ASSIGNED BY OWNER AND NOT ROOM NUMBERS LISTED ON DRAWINGS. LABELS ON PANELBOARD Q DIRECTORY SHALL INCLUDE A DESCRIPTION OF LOAD SUCH AS LIGHTS, RECEPTACLES, MECH. UNIT LOCATIONS, ETC. 3\ 0 ME :2� H. LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES OF OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHOWN ON THE w p a DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE ONLY THE ROOM/AREA TO J Cn BE CONTROLLED BY THE SENSORS. ADDITIONAL SENSORS AND RELATED a o C6 EQUIPMENT MAY BE REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE COVERAGE AND SWITCHING U o 0D ARRANGEMENTS AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR Q "' ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. I. MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUITS AS DEFINED BY THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL 0 N CODE (CIRCUITS WITH COMMON NEUTRAL) SHALL NOT BE USED. EXCEPTION: WHERE AN EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER REQUIRES A MULTIWIRE m M BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR ONLY ONE UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT AND WHERE ALL r+ UNGROUNDED CONDUCTORS OF THAT CIRCUIT ARE OPENED 1 1 1 r` SIMULTANEOUSLY BY THE BRANCH CIRCUIT OVERCURRENT DEVICE. � ■ ■ J. A CABLE OR RACEWAY TYPE WIRING METHOD, INSTALLED IN EXPOSED OR a Cd CONCEALED LOCATIONS NEAR METAL -CORRUGATED SHEET ROOF DECKING, ¢ im SHALL BE INSTALLED AND SUPPORTED SO THE NEAREST OUTER SURFACE H 3 N OF THE CABLE OR RACEWAY IS NOT LESS THAN 6 INCHES FROM THE > g m NEAREST SURFACE OF THE ROOF DECKING. EXCEPTION: RIGID METAL a ^ 4o m CONDUIT AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT SHALL NOT BE REQUIRED TO1; O MAINTAIN THIS CLEARANCE. 0 coJ N m O WW"'N /� N �/ � z V /� N O Z � Y CL N Z �a N W Z O W C/3 Z W W 0 T. C) U U Iroo o Q "' o U) "' J Q Q W W C45 U W ee Ck � U � W i Z FEB 21 2012 11-- LU (/3 Y: S7 Pry FARRIS ENGINEERING OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS farris-usa.com COPYRIGHT 118018 This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized copying, disclosure or construction use are prohibited by the copyright law. City File No. PA 261 111.0253 Sheet E4 I it :] PANEL 'L' 1201208 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE AIC RATING: 10,000A 200 AMP M.L.O. SURFACE MOUNTED CCT NO LOAD V.A. L T S LUMINAIRE LOAD DESCRIPTION SCHEDULE P AMP SIZE 0 AMP SIZE P R E M LOAD DESCRIPTION E CNO R5400 L T S a CCT 1 1200 X INCLUDED LOBBY LIGHTING o 1 20 A 20 1 X1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES X2 LES -X-1 -R-120/277-ELN-SD LAMPS Y 3 INPUT X 120 ACCEPTABLE 2 MARK DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER CATALOG NO. FINISH MOUNTING MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES VOLTS REMARKS - 4 QTY TYPE X m LIGHTING � 1 20 C WATTS 1 MANUFACTURERS X6 A 4' COMPACT STRIPLIGHT LITHONIA Z-1-32-120 1 F32t81841 BY ARCHITECT SEE REMARKS 40 120 7 1 20 1 120 OUTSIDE RECEPTACLES Al 4' COMPACT STRIPLIGHT WITH LITHONIA 2-1.32-120-EL65 WITH EM 1 F32t8/841 BY SEE REMARKS 40 120 7,5 1 B 20 EMERGENCY BATTERY BALLAST BATT BALLAST X10 STERNBURG ARCHITECT z O 11 1200 X 140 LIGHTING A2 4' COMPACT STRIPLIGHT WITH LITHONIA Z-2S2-120-ADZT DIMMING 2 F320841 BY SEE REMARKS 65 120 7 1 13 1210 X X DIMMING BALLAST BALLAST 20 A ARCHITECT 1 COORIDOR/ENTRY RECEPTACLES X14 400 14 15 500 4' COMPACT STRIPLIGHT WITH BB Z-2-32-120-ADZT-EL65 STERNBURG 1 BY B 20 1 460 WOMENS RESTROOM RECEPTACLES X16 A3 DIMMING BALLAST AND LITHONIA DIMMING BALLAST & EM BATT 2 F320841 ARCHITECT SEE REMARKS 55 120 7, 5 1 20 1 FARRIS ENGINEERING EMERGENCY BATTERY BALLAST X BALLAST 400 18 19 1000 X _ PARKING LOT/WALKWAY LIGHTING 6 1 2 A4 4' COMPACT STRIPLIGHT WITH LITHONIA Z-1-32-120-ADZT DIMMING 1 F3218/841 BY SEE REMARKS 40 120 7 1 REMRKS 3. SPARE COPYRIGHT 118018 DIMMING BALLAST - BALLAST 20 1 ARCHITECT VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL INCLUDED TEXTURED SAND 180 22 23 1000 X 4' COMPACT STRIPLIGHT WITH 6 Z-1-32-120-ADZTSL65 20 C BY 1 Q SPARE REMRKS PROVIDE WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE ELECTRONICS. A5 DIMMING BALLAST AND LITHONIA DIMMING BALLAST & EM BATT 1 F320841 City File No. PA 261 SEE REMARKS 40 120 7, 5 1 SPARE 26 27 200 ARCHITECT <� �m DONOR WALL LIGHTING 6 1 20 B 20 2 EMERGENCY BATTERY BALLAST DS -3A, DS -38 BALLAST 1 3028 1 28 F 1440 o m F-1 1 20 B B" DIA. OPEN DOWN LIGHT GOTHAM AF-1/32TRT-BAR-X-120-X 1 CFTR32W/841 ASK RECESSED 40 120 1440 3 F-2 B1 B" DIA. OPEN DOWN LIGHT WITH GOTHAM AF-1I32TRT-BAR-X-120-X 1 CFTR32W/841 CLEAR RECESSED 40 120 5,6 3 F35 1440 EMERGENCY BATTERY BALLAST X F-3 6" DIA. DAMP LOCATION & IC RATED 1 ALZAK B 20 1 PP -1 C B" DIA. OPEN DOWN LIGHT, WALL GOTHAM AFW-1/32TRT-8AR-X-X-120 1 CFTR32W/841 CLEAR RECESSED 40 120 20 3 20 1 120 ECH-1 WASH 1500 36 EMERGENCY BATTERY BALLAST ALZAK - A TRACK & TRACK LIGHTING HEADS, 1 ECH-2 50PAR20 1500 38 39 BY DSAA, DS -1B D INCANDESCENT LINE VOLTAGE, LITHONIA LTC-GMBR-PAR20-DBL 1 30DEG DBL SEE REMARKS 50 120 7 1 400 120 X GIMBAL RING WITH 12' OF TRACK 1 20 C 20 1 F.A.C.P. 1000 42 43 E1 EMERGENCY WALL PACK DUAL -LITE LZ2-1 2 5W MR -16 HALOGEN WHITE SURFACE - 120 6 2 F WALL MOUNTED LINIEAR LITHONIA W-1-32-00.120 1 F32[81841 BY SEE REMARKS 40 120 7 1 B 20 1 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE 2300 46 ARCHITECT SPACE ONLY F2 WALL MOUNTED LINIEAR DAY -BRIGHT AVW-2-PMW-120-DEK 2 F32t8/841 BY WALL 40 120 49 LUMINAIRES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM DEPTH SPACE ONLY EXTRUDED FLUORESCENT TYPE DOOR FRAMES A 20 1 ARCHITECT SURFACE 2300 50 51 G 2'X4' RECESSED, LENSED TROFFER LITHONIA 2SP8-G-2-32-X-A12125-120-GEB 2 F32t6/841 WHITE RECESSED 65 120 1 52 53 10RS SPACE ONLY C r 20 1 SPARE 2'X4' RECESSED, LENSED TROFFER 54 REMARKS: 6 = PROVIDE #6 CONDUCTORS FOR CIRCUIT. G1 WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY LITHONIA 23P8-G-2S2-X-A12125-120-GEB 2 F32t81841 WHITE RECESSED 65 120 5,6 1 BALLAST 1ORS-EL14 PANEL 'L' 1201208 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE AIC RATING: 10,000A 200 AMP M.L.O. SURFACE MOUNTED CCT NO LOAD V.A. L T S R E C LOAD DESCRIPTION R E M P AMP SIZE 0 AMP SIZE P R E M LOAD DESCRIPTION E CNO R5400 L T S a CCT 1 1200 X INCLUDED LOBBY LIGHTING o 1 20 A 20 1 X1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES X2 LES -X-1 -R-120/277-ELN-SD - Y 3 800 X 120 LIGHTING 2 1 20 B 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES X4 - 4 5 800 X m LIGHTING � 1 20 C 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES X6 300 6 7 950 X ALUMINUM, SINGLE SIDED WITH LIGHTING N 1 20 A 20 1 120 OUTSIDE RECEPTACLES X8 i � 8 9 1200 X X LIGHTING 1 20 B 20 1 OUTSIDE RECEPTACLES X10 STERNBURG 1-1290/HCF-6SQ16-100MHP208- z O 11 1200 X 140 LIGHTING 1 20 C 20 1 N COORIDOWENTRY RECEPTACLES X12 1127 ARCHITECT 13 1210 X X LIGHTING 1 20 A 20 1 COORIDOR/ENTRY RECEPTACLES X14 400 14 15 500 X BB BUILDIING MOUNTED LIGHTING STERNBURG 1 20 B 20 1 460 WOMENS RESTROOM RECEPTACLES X16 PRE -APPROVED EQUAL 16 17 630 X O. BUILDING MOUNTED LIGHTING 1 20 C 20 1 FARRIS ENGINEERING MENS RESTROOM RECEPTACLES X 400 18 19 1000 X _ PARKING LOT/WALKWAY LIGHTING 6 1 2 20 A 20 1 STORAGE/MECH ROOM RECEPTACLES X 800 20 21 - REMRKS 3. SPARE COPYRIGHT 118018 - - B 20 1 Mx1-1250K-50K VENTILATION CONTROL PANEL INCLUDED TEXTURED SAND 180 22 23 1000 X SIDE WALK POLE LIGHTING 6 2 20 C 20 1 Q SPARE REMRKS PROVIDE WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE ELECTRONICS. 24 25 - O - City File No. PA 261 - - A 20 1 SPARE 26 27 200 X <� �m DONOR WALL LIGHTING 6 1 20 B 20 2 1 DS -3A, DS -38 C/) 1 3028 1 28 F 1440 o m F-1 1 20 C - m� 6" DIA. DAMP LOCATION & IC RATED W LIFE-2/13DTT-MVOLT-F602AZ d' Ur CFDTI3W/841 30 RECESSED 1440 120 F-2 so oM 1 20 A 20 1 GWH-1 ¢" w" ALZAK O 32 F35 1440 X F-3 6" DIA. DAMP LOCATION & IC RATED 1 20 B 20 1 PP -1 250 34 35 4032 GG1 7.5"H SHALLOW DOWN LIGHT WITH ERV -1 LIFE-2/13DTT-MVOLT-F602AZ 3 20 C 20 1 120 ECH-1 3 1500 36 EMERGENCY BATTERY BALLAST - - A 20 1 ECH-2 DECORATIVE WALL -MOUNTED WITH 1500 38 39 BY DSAA, DS -1B 2 15 El 20 1 INTEGRAL PHOTOCELL 12.5"W ECH-3 WSTM-32TRT-MVOLT-PE 1 1500 40 41 400 120 X OUTSIDE RECPTACLES 1 20 C 20 1 F.A.C.P. 1000 42 43 300 X SIGN LIGHT 6 1 20 A 20 1 SAND ELECTRIC HAND DRYER 60 120 2300 44 45 '1'I FACADEELIGTEXTURED LIGHT SPACE ONLY WITH UNIT STONE B 20 1 ELECTRIC HAND DRYER LUMINAIRE 2300 46 47 SPACE ONLY C 20 1 ELECTRIC HAND DRYER A. ALL FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES SHALL BE 2300 48 49 LUMINAIRES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM DEPTH SPACE ONLY EXTRUDED ALUMINUM TYPE DOOR FRAMES A 20 1 LUMINAIRES ARE SPECIFIED WITH ELECTRIC HAND DRYER 2300 50 51 SPACE ONLY B 20 1 SPARE 52 53 SPACE ONLY C r 20 1 SPARE 54 REMARKS: 6 = PROVIDE #6 CONDUCTORS FOR CIRCUIT. 2'X4' RECESSED, LENSED TROFFER 02 WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY LITHONIA 2SP8-F-2-32-X-A12125-120-GEB 2 F32t8/841 WHITE RECESSED 65 120 5,6 1 ^ BALLAST 10RS-EL14 a. H 4' INDUSTRIAL WITH 10% UPLIGHT LITHONIA EJSA-2-32-120-GEB10RS m F320841 WHITE SUSPENDED SEE REMARKS ar 120 7 1 LOAD DESCRIPTION R E C L T S a LU 1 195 X INCLUDED BY o 1 20 A 50 2 X1 ALUMINUM, SINGLE SIDED WITH LITHONIA LES -X-1 -R-120/277-ELN-SD - Y ARCHITECT REMARK 4 RANGE OF 120-277V t 10%, BALLAST FACTOR GREATER THAN 0.99 (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED), MANUFACTURE. 120 6 2 1 20 B EMERGENCY BATTERY BACKUP - m - 4 5 1200 J m 11: � 1 20 C INCLUDED BY KITCHEN RANGE HOOD FAN/LIGHT RANGE FOR TB LAMPS OF 100% TO 3%, AND A THREE YEAR WRITTEN REPLACEMENT WARRANTY. COORDINATE BALLAST CONTROL REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING CONDUCTOR 300 6 7 1200 X2 ALUMINUM, SINGLE SIDED WITH LITHONIA N - WITH UNIT ARCHITECT REMARK 4 - 120 I 2 i � 8 EMERGENCY BATTERY BACKUP 400 US12 X KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES 1 20 B 20 1 AA PEDESTRIAN DARK SKY STERNBURG 1-1290/HCF-6SQ16-100MHP208- z O MPH100IMED BY POLE/ARM 140 208 PRE -APPROVED EQUAL 20 C y a m N KITCHEN GARBAGE DISPOSAL REC r - 1127 ARCHITECT 13 400 LU X KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES CN 20 A 20 L03 -S tr rQ 400 14 15 BB PARKING LOT POLE MOUNTED STERNBURG U c Ln a" POLEIARM 460 208 N. PRE -APPROVED EQUAL 16 17 = O. PMT208-R08-RO4H-L D28 ARCHITECT C O O Z FARRIS ENGINEERING KITCHEN MICROWAVE 1200 CC V)O !n f _ INCLUDED BY SURFACE SEE 36 120 7 Q z FACADE LIGHT H 20 WITH UNIT d REMRKS 3. SPARE COPYRIGHT 118018 1 20 DD EXTERIOR ADJUSTIBLE LED LINEAR INSIGHT Mx1-1250K-50K SPARE INCLUDED TEXTURED SAND M U 120 7 PRE -APPROVED EQUAL SPARE LU FACADE LIGHT C 20 1 Q STONE REMRKS PROVIDE WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE ELECTRONICS. 24 25 O SPARE City File No. PA 261 1 20 W m = N W o v' 20 1 j o(b 26 FF 7.5"H SHALLOW WALL WASH DOWN U <� �m 2 CFDT13W/841 ALZAK RECESSED 40 120 1 3 EWC RECEPTACLE C/) O aN 28 F o m SPARE LL � N 20 Z 20 m� 6" DIA. DAMP LOCATION & IC RATED W LIFE-2/13DTT-MVOLT-F602AZ d' Ur CFDTI3W/841 CLEAR RECESSED a 120 3 so oM 1 LU / A U am tNtpp N h 1 CORRIDOR RECEPTACLES ¢" w" ALZAK O 32 Uj U 400 X SHELTER LIGHTS RECEPTACLES 2'X4' RECESSED, LENSED TROFFER 02 WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY LITHONIA 2SP8-F-2-32-X-A12125-120-GEB 2 F32t8/841 WHITE RECESSED 65 120 5,6 1 ^ BALLAST 10RS-EL14 a. PANEL 'K' 120/208 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE AIC RATING: 10,000A 150 AMP M.L.O. FLUSH MOUNTED H 4' INDUSTRIAL WITH 10% UPLIGHT LITHONIA EJSA-2-32-120-GEB10RS 2 F320841 WHITE SUSPENDED SEE REMARKS ar 120 7 1 LOAD DESCRIPTION R E C L T S LOAD V.A. LED EXIT SIGN, DIE CAST 1 195 X INCLUDED BY MANUFACTURE. 1 20 A 50 2 X1 ALUMINUM, SINGLE SIDED WITH LITHONIA LES -X-1 -R-120/277-ELN-SD - WITH UNIT ARCHITECT REMARK 4 RANGE OF 120-277V t 10%, BALLAST FACTOR GREATER THAN 0.99 (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED), MANUFACTURE. 120 6 2 1 20 B EMERGENCY BATTERY BACKUP - - 4 5 1200 J KITCHEN REFRIGERATION RECEPTACLE LED EXIT SIGN, DIE CAST 1 20 C INCLUDED BY KITCHEN RANGE HOOD FAN/LIGHT RANGE FOR TB LAMPS OF 100% TO 3%, AND A THREE YEAR WRITTEN REPLACEMENT WARRANTY. COORDINATE BALLAST CONTROL REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING CONDUCTOR 300 6 7 1200 X2 ALUMINUM, SINGLE SIDED WITH LITHONIA LES-X-1-R-120/277-ELNSD-SD - WITH UNIT ARCHITECT REMARK 4 - 120 6 2 400 8 EMERGENCY BATTERY BACKUP 400 US12 X KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES 1 20 B 20 1 AA PEDESTRIAN DARK SKY STERNBURG 1-1290/HCF-6SQ16-100MHP208- 1 MPH100IMED BY POLE/ARM 140 208 PRE -APPROVED EQUAL 20 C 20 1 COMPLIANT POLE MOUNTED LIGHT KITCHEN GARBAGE DISPOSAL REC 1127 ARCHITECT 13 400 FEB 21 Z�'Z X KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES 1 20 A 20 L03 -S KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES X 400 14 15 BB PARKING LOT POLE MOUNTED STERNBURG 2-PA230N-FGQ25-400MH 2 MHP400/MOG/E BY POLEIARM 460 208 N. PRE -APPROVED EQUAL 16 17 LIGHT DARK SKY COMPLIANT O. PMT208-R08-RO4H-L D28 ARCHITECT C 20 1 FARRIS ENGINEERING KITCHEN MICROWAVE 1200 CC EXTERIOR ADJUSTIBLE LED INSIGHT MQ2.36LED50-100-CM-120-EA _ INCLUDED BY SURFACE SEE 36 120 7 PRE -APPROVED EQUAL SPARE FACADE LIGHT H 20 WITH UNIT ARCHITECT REMRKS 3. SPARE COPYRIGHT 118018 1 20 DD EXTERIOR ADJUSTIBLE LED LINEAR INSIGHT Mx1-1250K-50K SPARE INCLUDED TEXTURED SAND SURFACE SEE 60 120 7 PRE -APPROVED EQUAL SPARE 1 FACADE LIGHT C 20 1 WITH UNIT STONE REMRKS PROVIDE WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE ELECTRONICS. 24 25 6" DIA. DAMP LOCATION & IC RATED SPARE City File No. PA 261 1 20 CLEAR 20 1 SPARE 26 FF 7.5"H SHALLOW WALL WASH DOWN LITHONIA LIFE-2/13DTT-MVOLT-F6W1AZ 2 CFDT13W/841 ALZAK RECESSED 40 120 1 3 EWC RECEPTACLE LIGHT 28 29 SPARE 1 20 C 20 GG 6" DIA. DAMP LOCATION & IC RATED LITHONIA LIFE-2/13DTT-MVOLT-F602AZ 2 CFDTI3W/841 CLEAR RECESSED 40 120 3 6 1 20 A 7.5"H SHALLOW DOWN LIGHT 1 CORRIDOR RECEPTACLES ALZAK 400 32 33 400 X SHELTER LIGHTS RECEPTACLES 6" DIA. DAMP LOCATION & IC RATED 1 20 B 20 CLEAR MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES 200 34 35 2342 GG1 7.5"H SHALLOW DOWN LIGHT WITH LITHONIA LIFE-2/13DTT-MVOLT-F602AZ 2 CFDTI3W/841 ALZAK RECESSED 40 120 516 3 400 E6 EMERGENCY BATTERY BALLAST - - A 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES DECORATIVE WALL -MOUNTED WITH 400 38 39 BY DSAA, DS -1B 2 15 B 20 HH INTEGRAL PHOTOCELL 12.5"W LITHONIA WSTM-32TRT-MVOLT-PE 1 CFTR32WI841 ARCHITECT SURFACE 40 120 1 X5.75"HX7.5D 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES 200 42 REMARKS: 6 = PROVIDE #6 CONDUCTORS FOR CIRCUIT. G = PROVIDE GFCI CIRCUIT BREAKER EXTERIOR ADJUSTIBLELED LINEAR INSIGHT Mui -1250K -30.72 -TS - INCLUDED SAND SURFACE SEE 60 120 7 PRE -APPROVED EQUAL '1'I FACADEELIGTEXTURED LIGHT WITH UNIT STONE REMRKS LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS A. ALL FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES SHALL BE PAINTED AFTER FABRICATION. HOUSINGS FOR RECESSED FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 4". PROVIDE EXTRUDED ALUMINUM TYPE DOOR FRAMES WHERE LUMINAIRES ARE SPECIFIED WITH ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMES. PANEL 'K' 120/208 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE AIC RATING: 10,000A 150 AMP M.L.O. FLUSH MOUNTED CCT NO LOAD V.A. L T S R E C LOAD DESCRIPTION R E M P AMP SIZE 6 AMP SIZE P R E M LOAD DESCRIPTION R E C L T S LOAD V.A. CCT NO 1 195 X KITCHEN LIGHTING MANUFACTURE. 1 20 A 50 2 6 KITCHEN RANGE U j 8000 2 3 RANGE OF 120-277V t 10%, BALLAST FACTOR GREATER THAN 0.99 (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED), MANUFACTURE. SPARE 0 1 20 B - - - 4 5 1200 J KITCHEN REFRIGERATION RECEPTACLE 1 20 C 20 1 KITCHEN RANGE HOOD FAN/LIGHT RANGE FOR TB LAMPS OF 100% TO 3%, AND A THREE YEAR WRITTEN REPLACEMENT WARRANTY. COORDINATE BALLAST CONTROL REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING CONDUCTOR 300 6 7 1200 AND LAMP TYPE TO INSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH SPECIFIED CONTROL SYSTEM. KITCHEN REFRIGERATION RECEPTACLE 1 20 A 20 1 KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES X 400 8 9 400 X KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES 1 20 B 20 1 KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES X ALL NON -DIMMED FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE LOW MERCURY TCLP COMPLIANT 400 10 11 400 X KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES 1 20 C 20 1 COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHTS SHALL HAVE ALZAK FINISH SELF -TRIMMING KITCHEN GARBAGE DISPOSAL REC 1127 12 13 400 FEB 21 Z�'Z X KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES 1 20 A 20 1 KITCHEN COUNTER RECEPTACLES X 400 14 15 SPARE 1 20 B 20 1 SPARE N. PROVIDE FACTORY INSTALLED INTEGRAL DISCONNECTING MEANS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHT LUMINAIRES PER 2006 NEC ARTICLE 410.73.(G). NOTE THAT EXCEPTION NO.4 AND EXCEPTION NO.5 WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 16 17 O. SPARE 1 20 C 20 1 FARRIS ENGINEERING KITCHEN MICROWAVE 1200 18 19 OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS SPARE 1 20 A 20 1 SPARE farris-esa.com 20 21 3. SPARE COPYRIGHT 118018 1 20 B 20 1 REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS SUCH AS WALL MOUNT, END MOUNT, CEILING MOUNT AND PROVIDE LUMINAIRES ACCORDINGLY. PROVIDE DIRECTIONAL ARROWS AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. SPARE 22 23 written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized SPARE 1 20 C 20 1 copying, disclosure or construction use aro prohibited by the copyright law. SPARE 6. PROVIDE WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE ELECTRONICS. 24 25 7. SPARE City File No. PA 261 1 20 A 20 1 SPARE 26 27 SPARE 1 20 B 20 1 EWC RECEPTACLE 500 28 29 SPARE 1 20 C 20 1 CORRIDOR RECEPTACLES 400 30 31 600 X SHELTER LIGHTS AND RECEPTACLES 6 1 20 A 20 1 CORRIDOR RECEPTACLES 400 32 33 400 X SHELTER LIGHTS RECEPTACLES 6 1 20 B 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES 200 34 35 2342 DS -2A, DS -213 2 20 C 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES 400 E6 37 - - A 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES 400 38 39 2290 DSAA, DS -1B 2 15 B 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES 400 40 41 - C 20 1 MEETING ROOM RECEPTACLES 200 42 REMARKS: 6 = PROVIDE #6 CONDUCTORS FOR CIRCUIT. G = PROVIDE GFCI CIRCUIT BREAKER L coCi On C3 WLU > C4 9 N Q QOM r 2 �LU o N Q N 1 W Z o W V/ !TC D W d 0 LL w U ❑ O O Q V/ B. C. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS FOR EACH BALLAST AND LAMP TYPE USED ON PROJECT.Cn BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT TB LAMPS SHALL BE GE ULTRASTART SERIES (OR EQUAL BY ADVANCE OPTANIUM SERIES). BALLAST CHARACTERISTICS SHALL BE: PROGRAMMED START, OPERATING VOLTAGE O J V RANGE OF 120-277V 10%, BALLAST FACTOR GREATER THAN 0.85 (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED), T.H.D. OF 10% OR LESS, P.F. GREATER THAN 0.95, AND A FIVE YEAR WRITTEN REPLACEMENT WARRANTY FROM DATE OF J t MANUFACTURE. M D. BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT T5 AND T5H0 LAMPS SHALL BE GE ULTRASTART SERIES (OR EQUAL BY ADVANCE OPTANIUM SERIES). BALLAST CHARACTERISTICS ARE: PROGRAMMED START, OPERATING VOLTAGE T.H.D. OF 10% OR LESS, P.F. GREATER THAN 0.95, AND A FIVE YEAR WRITTEN REPLACEMENT WARRANTY FROM DATE OF U j LU RANGE OF 120-277V t 10%, BALLAST FACTOR GREATER THAN 0.99 (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED), MANUFACTURE. 0 E. BALLASTS FOR DIMMING FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE UNIVERSAL LIGHTING TECHNOLOGIES (OR EQUAL BY LUTRON, ADVANCE OR OSRAM). BALLAST CHARACTERISTICS SHALL BE: PROGRAMMED RAPID START, END OF VOLTAGE RANGE OF 120-277V 10%, BALLAST FACTOR GREATER THAN 0.86, T,H.D. OF 10% OR LESS, P.F. GREATER THAN 0.90, DIMMING RANGE FOR T5 LAMPS OF 1000/6-1%, DIMMING J LAMP -LIFE SHUTDOWN, OPERATING t VOLTAGE, QUANTITY, DIMMING DEVICE ETC.) RANGE FOR TB LAMPS OF 100% TO 3%, AND A THREE YEAR WRITTEN REPLACEMENT WARRANTY. COORDINATE BALLAST CONTROL REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING CONDUCTOR W AND LAMP TYPE TO INSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH SPECIFIED CONTROL SYSTEM. F. ALL COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES SHALL HAVE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS. r V� G. UNIVERSAL LIGHTING TECHNOLOGIES, OSRAWSYLVANIA, ADVANCE, G.E., VENTURE, HOLOPHANE, TRIAD AND LUTRON ARE ACCEPTABLE BALLAST MANUFACTURERS FOR H.I.D. AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS. H. ALL FLUORESCENT LAMPS USED IN DIMMING APPLICATIONS SHALL BE OPERATED CONTINUOUSLY AT FULL BRIGHTNESS NOT LESS THAN 100 HOURS PRIOR TO DIMMING. TYPE. L!TL— I. ALL NON -DIMMED FLUORESCENT LAMPS SHALL BE LOW MERCURY TCLP COMPLIANT W J. PHILIPS, OSRAMISYLVANIA, G.E. AND VENTURE ARE ACCEPTABLE LAMP MANUFACTURERS. REFLECTORS. COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHTS WITH HORIZONTAL LAMP(S) SHALL HAVE HARDWARE MOUNTING FOR REFLECTOR, H j+ W w C/3 K. COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHTS SHALL HAVE ALZAK FINISH SELF -TRIMMING SPRING CLIPS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. FEB 21 Z�'Z L. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY VOLTAGE OF ALL LUMINAIRES PRIOR TO ORDERING. M. WHERE LUMINAIRES ARE SHOWN WITH LAMPS SWITCHED SEPARATELY, PROVIDE QUANTITY OF BALLASTS ACCORDINGLY. PROVIDE INSIDE LAMP(S) SWITCHED SEPARATE FROM OUTSIDE LAMPS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. N. PROVIDE FACTORY INSTALLED INTEGRAL DISCONNECTING MEANS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHT LUMINAIRES PER 2006 NEC ARTICLE 410.73.(G). NOTE THAT EXCEPTION NO.4 AND EXCEPTION NO.5 WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. O. PROVIDE FACTORY INSTALLED VIBRATION DAMPENERS IN ALL ALUMINUM POLES 20 FEET IN LENGTH AND LONGER, AND IN ALL SQUARE STEEL POLES 25 FEET IN LENGTH AND LONGER. LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE REMARKS FARRIS ENGINEERING 1. COLUMBIA, DAY-BRITE, LITHONIA, LIGHTOLIER AND METALUX ARE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR LUMINAIRE TYPE INDICATED. OMAHA I LINCOLN I DES MOINES I COLORADO SPRINGS 2. LIGHTALARMS, CHLORIDE, DUAL -LITE, CORNERSTONE, EMERGI-LITE, HUBBELL, INFINITY, LITHONIA, MCPHILBEN AND SURE-LITES ARE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR LUMINAIRE TYPE INDICATED, farris-esa.com 3. GOTHAM, LIGHTOLIER, OMEGA, PORTFOLIO, PATHWAY COVENTRY AND INFINITY WITH -YM OPTION ARE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR LUMINAIRE TYPE INDICATED. COPYRIGHT 118018 4. REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING REQUIREMENTS SUCH AS WALL MOUNT, END MOUNT, CEILING MOUNT AND PROVIDE LUMINAIRES ACCORDINGLY. PROVIDE DIRECTIONAL ARROWS AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. This document and the information contained may not be reproduced or excerpted from without the express written permission of Farris Engineering, Inc. Unauthorized 1.11,0253 5. PROVIDE A BODINE #B50ST-PE5-75 EMERGENCY BALLAST WITH TWO POLE REMOTE TEST SWITCH (INSTALLED ADJACENT TO LUMINAIRE) FOR TWO LAMP OPERATION AT 1350 LUMEN MINIMUM OUTPUT. copying, disclosure or construction use aro prohibited by the copyright law. 6. PROVIDE WITH SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MAINTENANCE ELECTRONICS. 7. SEE MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ON DRAWINGS ASSOCIATED WITH LIGHT FIXTURES. City File No. PA 261 Sheet